LIBRARY OK THK University of Califc)rnia. PACIFIC THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY. Accession -^^^^^^ Class 7^^' W7(>7 ■vU vl^ -1^ -J^ -sU d^ ^^ ^1^ -^1^ ^u- -g^ -sU M^ ^j^ ~j ^ •'J^ ■si^ M^ -0- -^L- -a* Class ' Book. Xj I :J3 H. -A. OFL "y GIFT OF f >sl,v "sj^ "nJ,^ "si^ *vt-^ %!/- *sj^ '■-L^ ^/ fc>|N^ ^^T\, t^Ts, fc^fs, iXTVa -'^ ^^s* t*^^ " '^*. GRAMMAR THE IDIOM OF THE MW TESTAMENT, PKEPARED AS A SOLID BASIS FOR THE INTERPRETATION OF THE NEW TESTAMENT. BY DR. GEORGE BENEDICT WINER. SEVENTH EDITION, ENLARGED AND IMPROVED. BY DR. GOTTLIEB LUNEMANN, FB0FES80S OF THEOLUQT AT THE U2(1T£RSITY OP GOETTINQEir. BEVISED AND AUTHORIZED TfLfiLNSIiATION. WARREN F. DRAPER. LONDON: TRUBNER AND CO. LEIPSIC: F. C. W. VOGEL. PHILADELPHLi: SMITH, ENGLISH, & CO. 1883. Entere*' according to Act of Congress, in the year 1374, Dy WARKEN F. DRAPER, In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. AKDOVEB : rBIJfTED BY WAEBEW V. DBAPKB. PEBFACE TO THE SIXTH EDITION. When this Grammar first made its appearance, in 1822, the object proposed was to oppose the unbridled license with which the diction of the New Testament was then, and had long been, handled in commentaries and exegetical lectures ; and to apply, as far as practicable, the results of an enlightened philology, as deduced and taught by Hermann and his school, to the study of the language of the New Testament. It was high time that some voice should be raised against the inveterate empiricism of ex- positors, and that some effort should be made to emancipate the writers of the N. T. from the bondage of a perverted philology, which styled itself sacred and yet showed not the least respect towards the sacred authors and their well-considered phraseology. The fundamental error — the irpwrov -^evhofi — of the Biblical philology and exegesis to which we refer, consisted ultimately in this, that neither the Hebrew nor the language of tlie N. T. was regarded as a living idiom (Herm. Eurip. Med. p. 401.), designed to be used by men as the medium of intercourse. , Had scholars deliberately inquired, whether those departures from the current laws of speech which were assumed to exist in the Bible in such prodigious multitudes, were compatible with the essential princi- ples of a language intended for the ordinary purposes of life, they would not so arbitrarily have held every kind of anomaly to be permissible ; and would not have delighted to attribute to the Apostles in almost every verse an enallage or a substitution of the wrong construction for the right. The older commentaries belonging to the period of the Refor- mation are comparatively free from such perversions ; but when -84594 ' Vi PREFACE TO THE SIXTH EDITION. we read certain commentaries of tlie 18th and 19th centuries still current, we are constrained to conclude that the main character- istic of the language of the N. T. is a total want of precision and regularity. For these interpreters are continually showing how here a wrong tense is used, there a wrong case, here a comparative for a positive, there 6 for rt?, hut instead oi for, consequently for because, on the other side for on this side (what for so Isa. viii. 20). Such exegetical learning makes a reader quite impatient with the sacred writers for their ignorance of the ordinary principles of language. He cannot comprehend how such men in oral dis- » course, where this lawlessness of speech must certainly have been still more conspicuous, could have made themselves understood even, much less how they could have won over to Christianity a great number of persons of education. But this system of explaining every difficulty by a pro or an idem quod had a serious as well as a ludicrous aspect. For does not Scripture become, as an eminent linguist long ago intimated, like a waxen nose, which every one can twist as he pleases, in proportion to his ignorance of the learned tongues ? Would it have been impossible, or even difficult, for such a man as Storr, for example, had the task been assigned him, to have found in the words of the Apostles any favorite notion whatever ? And does such a view of N. T. diction accord with the dignity of sacred writers ? ^ Every one who now-a-days should insist on using in the ordinary intercourse of life such perversions of language as the following : / shall come to thee to-day for / came to thee to-day ; no prophet ever came out of Galilee for no prophet will ever come out of Galilee (Jno. vii. 62) ; / call you no longer servants for / did not call you mere servants (Jno. xv. 15) ; for Jesus himself tes- tified, that a prophet has no honor in his own country for although Jesus himself testified, etc. (Jno. iv. 44) ; I saw the forest that was magnificently covered with foliage for a forest that was, etc. (Jno. V. 1^) ; send me the book, and I will read it, for thou wilt 1 Herm. ad Viger. p. 786 : Diligenter caveant tirones, ne putent, viros spiritu sancto afflatos sprevisse sermonem mortalium, sed meminerint potius, illam interpretandi rationem, qua nonnulli theologorum utuntur, nihil esse nisi blasphemiam. 2 To what extent expositors of the old school were devoid of all sense of expression may be seen (instar omnium) in Kuhnol's reasoning, Mt. p. 120 sq. PREFACE TO THE SIXTH EDITION. yij send me the hooh, etc. ; to whom it was revealed that for to whom ihis was revealed, yet so that, etc. (1 Pet. i. 12 1) ; CJirist is dead imere/ore risen again for but risen again ; he is not more learned zor he is not learned; he rejoiced that he should see, etc., and he saw and rejoiced, for he would have rejoiced if he had seen, etc., he rejoiced even at what he already saw (Jiio. viii. 56) ; he began to wash for he washed (Jno. xiii. 56), and the like, — would be re- garded as having lost his reason. Were all the instances of a quid pro quo which many expositors during the decennaries just past have put into the mouth of the Apostles to be collected, the list could not fail to be astounding. When, at the commencement of my career as a university tutor, I undertook to combat this absurd system of interpretation, I was aware that there were scholars far more competent for the task than myself ; and, in fact, what I accomplished in the earlier editions of this book was but imperfect. My attempt, however, was cordially encouraged by distinguished men, and in particular by Vater and D. Schulz. Others pointed out, sometimes indeed in a spirit of bitterness, the imperfections of the work ; and to these unsparing critics I have been greatly indebted, not only in this publication, but in all my exegetical labors. By discussions annexed to the second edition (1828) the grammatical contents of the work were enlarged, and the third edition came out greatly improved, both in copiousness and accuracy, by a more extensive study of the writings of the Greek prose authors and of the Hel- lenistic Jews. From that time forward I have labored incessantly to improve the work ; and I have been animated by the aid which philological and exegetical publications suited to my purpose have furnished me in rich abundance. At the same time, the intelligent investigation of the N. T. diction has been daily gaining ground ; and the use of the Grammar by commentators has been growing more and more evident. The work began to attract the attention of professed philologists even. At the same time I have always been far from thinking the correct grammatical elucidation of the N. T. to be its only proper exposition ; and I have, in silence, allowed some to regard me even as an opponent of what is now called the theological interpretation. 1 On this passage see my Erlanger Pfingstprogr. 1830. 4to. Viii PREFACE TO THE SIXTH EDITION. The present edition — the sixth — will show again on every page, that I have spared no effort to arrive at truth. Deeply, how- ever, do I regret, that in the midst of my labors I was overtaken by a nervous affection of the eyes, which lias brought me to the verge of total blindness. This calamity has compelled me to employ the eyes and hands of others to complete this edition. I cannot omit this opportunity of expressing publicly my sincere thanks to all the young friends whose indefatigable assistance only has enabled me, in spite of my frequent forebodings, to accomplish my task. The change in the arrangement of the matter in Part III. will, I trust, be approved. In other respects, it has been my especial aim to treat every point with greater completeness, and in smaller space, than in previous editions ; (the text of the Grammar now occupies eight sheets fewer than before). With this view I adopted all possible abbreviations in the Biblical and Greek citations.^ It is hoped, however, that these, as well as those for the names of more recent authors,^ will everywhere be intelligible. The citations have been verified anew througliout ; and, so far as I know, not a single work that has appeared since 1844 has beeji left unused, or at least unnoticed. The text of the N. T. I have uniformly, that is except when there was a question of various readings, quoted in accordance with the second Leipsic edition of Dr. Tischendorf, which at present has probably the most extensive circulation. May this new revision — the last the work will ever receive from me — contribute to the diffusion of Biblical truth, so far as any such work can. ^ The Greek writers are only quoted by the page when the division by chapters has not obtained currency : Plato, according to the edition by Stephan. ; Strabo and Athe- nacus, by Casaubon ; Demosthen. and Isocrat., by H. Wolf; Dionys. Hal., by Reiske; Dio Cass., by Reimar. ; Dio Chrysost., by Mordl. ^ It may be remarked here, that instead of Kuinod (the Latinized form of the name), Kvhndl, as the family wrote their name in German, is used everywhere, except in Latin citations. Lbipsic, October, 1865. PEEFACE TO THE SEVENTH EDITION. Winer's foreboding that the sixth edition would be the last revision from his hand has unfortunately been realized. But even while sensible of his approaching death, the indefatigable man took incessant interest in his Grammar, and labored to the very end of his life to perfect it. Without altering the general distri- bution of matter as it appeared in the sixth edition, he constantly improved the book in details, — by additions of greater or less extent in more than three hundred and forty places, by erasures and reconstructions, by the multiplication of parallel passages from biblical and from profane literature, by a more precise defini- tion of thoughts and expressions, by the correction of trivial over- sights and mistakes, etc. etc. Thus he has not left us without bequeathing to us in this book a legacy richer than ever. When the publisher confided to me the preparation of the new edition which had become necessary, I could not hesitate a moment what course to adopt. It was clear to me, in the first place, that the book must retain absolutely and throughout the character of a work by Winer. This was demanded, on the one hand, by reverence towards the departed author ; whom no one has hitherto surpassed — whom hardly any one among those now living will surpass — in a department which he cultivated with especial fondness for more than a generation. It appeared also, on the other hand, to be a sacred duty towards the theological public, to whom Winer's work, on account of its scholarly exact- ness and copious erudition, justly became long ago a precious possession and a universally acknowledged authority. I con- sidered myself, therefore, as bound to abstain from every radical Ji ix X PEEFACE TO THE SEVENTH EDITION. alteration of the text, either as respects the general arrangement or as respects the development of details. My task, rather, I perceived to be merely this : while preserving in its integrity the character of Winer's book, to increase as far as possible, in the spirit and intent of Winer, its usefulness for students of the present day. I have taken especial pains to work into the text the numerous manuscript notes from Winer's liand. In doing this, Winer's own words have been retained as far as it was any way feasible ; and changes, when necessary, have always been restricted so closely, that they affect merely what is unessential, never tlie matter itself. Further, I have made it a point, not merely to correct silently the obvious oversights and mistakes I met with — and they proved to be more numerous than I expected — and to give to the cross-references a definiteness in which they were often deficient, but also to consult, as far as pertinent, the theological and philological works which have appeared since Winer's death, and to use in this new edition what they contained worthy of attention. Whenever, too, a question of textual criticism is involved, regard has been paid to the read- ings of the Codex Sinaiticus. Yet great self-restraint has been imposed throughout, in order not to augment excessively a work already of considerable bulk. Winer's additions and alterations have been directly incorpo- rated with the text without being indicated by a particular sign. They will be plain to every one who will take the pains to com- pare the seventh edition with .the sixth. On the other- hand, the additions which I have made have been in all cases marked by square brackets. The square brackets already used by Winer here and there, have consequently been made to give place to other signs ; such as round brackets, dashes, etc. In conclusion it may be remarked that very great care has been taken to secure typographical accuracy. And now may the book, in this its seventh edition, subserve its purpose to afford the interpretation of the New Testament a stable foundation. DR. LtJNEMANN. GoTTiNGEN, August 19, 1866. AMERICAN EDITOR'S PREFACE. Winer's Grammar is now for the fourth time rendered accessi- ble to English readers. A translation of the first edition was made by the late Professors Stuart and Robinson, and published at Andover in 1825. The fourth edition of the original, rendered into English by Professors Agnew and Ebbeke, appeared in 1839. Twenty years later Professor Massoa's translation of the sixth German edition was published at Edinburgh (and Philadelphia). The present work was originally announced (in April 1866) as a revision of Professor Masson's. The labor of revision was drawing towards completion, and nearly three hundred pages of the book had been stereotyped, when appeared the seventh German edition, under the supervision of Dr. Liineraann. Some unavoidable delay ensued before the revision and the printing were begun anew in conformity with this new edition. These facts explain why the publication of the present volume follows the original announcement so tardily. The book still remains, substantially, a revision of Professor Masson's translation. The changes introduced have been such as could be made upon tbe printed sheets of tliat work. This circum- stance has frequently affected their form and sometimes their num- ber. But although Professor Masson's version has been retained as the basis of this, it is believed that hardly a paragraph of his work remains altogether unaltered ; and sometimes the alterations amount in effect to a new translation, — a translation which for entire pages has but a few phrases in common with its predecessor. In making the changes described it has been the editor's aim to render the version a faithful reproduction of the original. A faithful translation, he believes, should not only be free from Xii AMERICAN EDITOR'S PREFACE. intentional addition,^ omission, or alteration, but in a work of this kind should adhere as closely to the author's expression as English idiom will permit. Accordingly, should the renderings seem, here and there, to have lost a little in ease, a compensation will be found, it is hoped, in their increased accuracy. It has not been judged necessary to annotate any interpretation having a doctrinal bearing, even though such interpretation be debatable on grammatical grounds, or to qualify an expression or two respecting the sacred writers which may strike many English readers as unwarrantably free ; for the book is likely to be used either by students with mature understandings in exercise, or by pupils under the guidance of competent teachers. The reasons which have led the editor to disregard the request that he would abridge and otherwise alter the original work will be suggested by Professor Liinemann's remarks upon this point. The notation of the sections, etc., has been carefully retained throughout. When it could be done conveniently, the cross-refer- ences have been rendered more definite by subjoining the number of the page. To aid those who may use this book in connectioi^y^ with Commentaries which refer to the Grammar by pages, the paging of the sixth and seventh German editions, as well as of Professor Masson^s translation, has been noted on the outer margin/ of the leaves. Tlie indexes have been revised, and that of Greek words has been considerably enlarged. Further, the Index of Passages in the New Testament has been made complete, and the references themselves have been carefully verified ; this laborious work has been performed by Mr. G. W. Warren, formerly a student in this Seminary, at present Professor of Biblical Interpretation in the Baptist Theological Seminary at Chicago, Illinois. This Index, it is believed, will be highly valued by students. A glance at it will show with how little exaggeration the book may be called a grammatical commentary on the more difficult texts of the ^ew Testament. Other references the editor has been content simply to transfer to the pages of the translation. This will account for their frequent want of uniformity. Pains have been taken to give the work that typographical 1 In a single passage it seemed necessary to append a note ; see page 598. AMERICAN EDITOR'S PREFACE. xjji accuracy which is a leading requisite in a satisfactory manual. On this point, however, the editor would not speak too confi- dently ; for even in the seventh German edition, wliich is as superior to tlie sixth in accuracy of typography as it is in elegance, errata have been discovered by the score. It is hoped that the mistakes which have slipped in, will not exceed in number those detected, and silently rectified, in the German original. In conclusion, the editor would express the desire that the book in its present form may both facilitate and increase that patient, reverent study of the letter of the Inspired Word, which is indispensable to the fullest reception of it as spirit and life. J. HENRY THAYER. Theolooical Semi k art, Ain>ovsR, MAsa October, 1868. NOTE. In this new impression the Biblical references, both in the body of the work and as collected in the N. T. Index, have been verified again. A few of the former, which appear to be wrong as they stand but which the editor had not the means of correcting, have been marked with [?]. The altera- tions in the N. T. Index are so numerous, that it has been found convenient occasionally to sink an added reference into a foot-note ; and, in inserting other references to the pages, to disregard sometimes the strict numerical order. In some instances, also, the gap left by the removal of erroneous references has not been closed up. The re-examination of this index proves it to be not quite " complete " ; but there are no omissions, it is believed, which a student will regret. J. H. T. Andover, September, 1873. CONTENTS. INTRODUCTION. PASS On the Scope, Treatment, and History of N. T. Grammar, §§ 1-4, 1 PART FIRST. ON THE CHARACTER OF THE N.T. DICTION ESPECIALLY IN ITS GRAMMATICAL ASPECTS. § 1. Various Opinions concerning the Character of the N. T. Diction, . 12 §2. Basis of the N.T. Diction, 20 § 3. Hebrew- Aramaic Tinge of the N. T. Diction, .... 27 §4. Grammatical Character of the N. T Diction, .... 85 PART SECOND. THE GRAMMATICAL FORMS AS RESPECTS THEIR FORMA- TION (INFLECTION). § 5. Orthography and Orthographic Principles, .... 40 § 6. Accentuation, 49 § 7. Punctuation, 55 § 8. Rare Forms of the First and Second Declensions, ■ . . . .60 § 9. Rare Forms of the Third Declension, . . . . . .64 § 10. Foreign Words and Words which are Indeclinable, . . .66 § 11. Inflection and Comparison of Adjectives, 68 §12. Augment and Reduplication of Regular Verbs, .... 70 § 13. Rare Forms in the Tenses and Persons of Regular Verbs, . . 73 § 14. Rare Inflections of Verbs in MI and of Irregular Verbs, ... 78 § 15. Defective Verbs, . . . . ... . . .81 § 16. Formation of Words, . . . . ; . . . . 91 XV Xvi CONTENTS. PART THIRD. SYNTAX. A. IMPORT AND USE OF THE SEVERAL PARTS OF SPEECH. CHAPTER I. THE ARTICLE. FAOI § 17. The Article as a Pronoun, 104 § 18. Articulns Praepositivus, a. before Nouns, . , . . .105 § 19. Omission of the Article before Nouns, ,119 § 20. Articulus Praepositivus, b. with Attributives, 131 CHAPTER H. PRONOUNS. § 21. The Pronouns in general, 140 § 22. Personal and Possessive Pronouns, 143 § 23. The Demonstrative Pronoun, 157 § 24. The Relative Pronoun, 163 § 25. The Interrogative Pronoun and the Indefinite Pronoun TI2, . .168 §26. Hebraisms in connection with certain Pronouns, . . . .171 CHAPTER m. THE NOUN. § 27. Number and Grender of Nouns, 1 74 § 28. The Cases in general, 179 § 29. Nominative and Vocative, ....•••• 181 § 30. Genitive, 184 § 31. Dative, 208 § 32. Accusative, 221 § 33. Connection of a Verb (neuter) with its dependent Noun by means of Prepositions, 232 § 34. Adjectives, 234 § 35. Comparative, 239 § 36. Superlative, 246 § 37. Numerals, 248 CHAPTER rV. THE VERB. § 38. Active and Middle Voices, 251 § 39. The Passive, 260 § 40. The Tenses, , ... 264 CONTENTS. xvu PAOB § 41. The Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative Moods, .... 281 §42. The Conjunction 'AN with the three Mooda, 302 § 43. The Imperative, 310 § 44. The Infinitive, 317 § 45. The Participle, 840 CHAPTER V. THE PARTICLES. § 46. The Particles in general, 356 § 47. The Prepositions in general, and such as govern the Grenitive in particular, ........... 358 § 48. Prepositions with the Dative, 384 § 49. Prepositions with the Accusative, ....... 396 § 50. Interchange, Accumulation, and Repetition of Prepositions, . . 409 § 51. Use of Prepositions in Circumlocutions, 423 §52. Construction of Verbs compounded with Prepositions, . . . 426 § 53. Conjunctions, .^ i.... 433 § 54. Adverbs, 462 § 55. Negative Particles, , .... 473 § 56. Construction of Negative Particles, 500 § 57. Interrogative Particles, 508 B. STRUCTURE OF PROPOSITIONS, AND THEIR COMBINA- TION INTO PERIODS. § 58. The Proposition and its Component Parts in general, . . .512 § 69. Extension of a Simple Sentence in its Subject and Predicate : Attributives, Apposition, 523 § 60. Connection of Sentences : Periods, 537 § 61. Position of Words and Clauses, especially when Irregular (Hy- perbaton), 546 § 62. Interrupted Structure of Sentences ; Parentheses, . . . .661 § 63. Broken and Heterogeneous Structure of Sentences ; Anacoluthon, Oratio variata, 566 § 64. Defective Structure of Sentences ; Ellipsis, Aposiopesis, . . .580 § 66. Redundant Structure of Sentences ; Pleonasm (Superfluity), Diffuseness, 601 xviii CONTENTS. ^ PAOB § 66. Condensed and Expanded Structure of Sentences (Breviloquence, Constructio Praegnans, Attraction, etc.), 619 § 67. Abnormal Relation of Individual Words in a Sentence (Hypallage), . 631 § 68. Regard to Sound in the Structure of Sentences ; Paronomasia and Play upon Words (Annominatio), Parallelism, Verse, . . . 636 INDEX. I. Index of Principal Subjects, .... ... 643 n. Index of Greek Words and Forms, . . . . . . . 652 ILL Index of Passages in the N. T. explained or cited, .... 668 INTEODUCTION. ON THE SCOPE, TREATMENT, AND HISTORY OF N. T. GRAMMAR. § 1. The language of the N. T., like every other, presents two aspects for scientific consideration, inasmuch as the words which we find in the N. T. following one another in connected discourse may be considered either by themselves, in reference to their origin and their meaning (the material element) ; or as respects their legitimate employment in the structure of clauses and periods (the formal element). The former is the business of Lexico- graphy; the latter belongs to Grammar, which must be carefully distinguished from N. T. Stylistics (Rhetoric). On distinguishing Lexicography from Grammar, see Pott in the Kieler Allgem. Monatsschr. 1851. Juli. The Lexicography of the N. T., of which Synonymy forms a very important part, though its importance was not duly recognized till of late, has always been cultivated in a merely practical manner. A theory of it, however, may be laid down; which might be styled Lexicology, — a term that has recently come into use. That this theory has not as yet been fully developed and perfected is the less surprising, since even the classic tongues remain destitute of a Lex- icology ; and in the department of Exegetical Theology a theory of Biblical Criticism (higher and lower) is still a desideratum. This deficiency, however, has had a decidedly unfavorable effect on practical lexicography, as might be easily shown by a close examination of the lexicographical works on the N. T. which have hitherto appeared, even the most recent not excepted.^ N. T. Stylistics or Rhetoric (the latter appellation has already been em- ployed by Glassius and by Bauer, author of Rhetorica PauUna), should exhibit the characteristics of N. T. style in its freedom and individuality, 1 For some remarks on the theory of lexicography, see Schleiermacher, Hermeneutik, S. 49. 84. A commencement towards a comparative lexicography has been made by Zeller, in his theolog. Jahrb. II. 443 ff, 1 -84594 2 INTRODUCTION. 14 restricted only by the character and aim of the composition ; and this it should do both generally, and in reference to the peculiarities of the genera dicendi and of the respective writers (cf. Hand, Lehrb. d. lat. Styls. p. 25 sq.) . In this department much remains to be done, (particularly as respects the theory of rhetorical figures, erroneous views respecting which have at all times caused much mischief in the interpretation of the N. T.). 2 The preparatory labors of Bauer and Dan. Schulze,' however, are of service ; '^^^^- and Wilke has made a compilation (N. T. Rhetorik, Dresd. 1843, 8vo.) Clhed worthy of attention. Schleiermacher had already given excellent hints in his Hermeneutik. As respects the discourses of Jesus and the apostolic epistles, it would be best to follow the example of the ancient rhetoricians, and treat in Biblical Rhetoric of the style of reasoning. This would prevent the excessive subdivision of N. T. Exegetics, and the separation of kindred subjects, which, when treated in connection, afford mutual light. Cf., besides, Gersdorf, Beitriige zur Sprachcharakterist. d. N. T. 1 Bd. S. 7 ; Keil, Lehrb. der Hermeneutik, S. 28 ; C. J. Kellman, Diss, de usu Rhetorices hermeneutico. Grypli. 17GG. 4to. It may be incidentally remarked, that in their exposition of Exegetical Theology our Encyclopaedias still leave much to be desired. And in practice, too, N, T. Ilermeneutics is not properly distinguished from N. T. Philology,^ as we may call that entire department of Exegetical Theology which has just been sketched. § 2. A grammatical exposition of the idiom of the N. T., in so far as it is a variety of the Greek language, would strictly consid- ered involve only a systematic comparison of that idiom with the grammatical structure of the later Greek literary language ; for with this last the idiom of the N, T. is closely connected, both chronologically and generically. As, however, this later Greek itself has not yet been delineated in its peculiarities as a whole, and as the idiom of the N. T. also exhibits throughout the influence of a foreign tongue (the Hebrew-Aramaic) upon the Greek, N. T. 15 Grammar must be so far extended as to comprise a scientific 1 K. Lud. Bauer, Rhetorica Paullina. Halle, 1782. 3 pts. in 2 Vol. 8vo. ; also Philologia Thucydideo-PauUina. Halle, 1773. 8vo. (To these may be added: H. G. Tzschirner, observationes Pauli Ap. epistolar. scriptoris ingenium concernentes. Viteb. 1800. 3 Partes. 4to.) J. Dan. Schulze, der schriftstellerische Worth und Charakter des Johannes. Weissenf. 1803. 8vo. ; also, der schrift.steller. Werth und Char, des Petrus, Judas und Jacobus, eb. 1802. 8vo. ; also, iiber den schriftst. Char, und Werth des Evang. Markus, in Keil and Tzschimer's Analekt. 2 Bds. 2 St. S. 104-151. 3 St. S. 69-132. 3 Bds. 1 St. S. 88-127. 2 I should prefer this old and intelligible appellation, " Philologia sacra N. T." (cf. J. Ch. Beck, conspect. system, philol. sacrac. Bas. 1760. 12 Section. 4to.) to that which Schleiermacher, following classic usage, proposes, "Grammar"; seeLikke, on his Her- meneutik, S. 10. INTRODUCTION. 3 exposition of the mode in which the Jewish authors of the N. T. wrote the Greek of their time. If it were proposed e.g. to write a grammar of the Egyptian or Alexan- drian variety of the Greek (as this variety had been moulded there in the mouths of Greek- speaking residents from various parts of the world), it would be enough to collect all its distinctive peculiarities, that is to say, all that make it a separate dialect ; not indeed simply stringing them 3 together in a fragmentary way, but arranging them systematically under ''!» ei the several divisions of grammar, and pointing out how and to what extent they respectively modified the general laws of the Greek language (by abandoning niceties, misusing analogies, etc.). The idiom of tlie N. T., as it is a variety of the later Greek, should it require a grammar of its own, could only be exhibited as a species of a species ; and thus a grammar of the N. T. would presuppose a grammar of tlie later Greek. But N. T. 3 Grammar cannot easily be so restricted even in thought, still less can the *'''••'• idea be carried out to advantage. For, on the one hand, the Grammar of later Greek, especially in its oral popular form, has not yet been scien- tifically investigated ; ^ consequently, the groundwork for N. T. Grammar exists in thought rather than in fact. On the other hand, the idiom of the N. T. displays also the influence of a non-cognate language, the Hebrew- Aramaic, upon the Greek. N. T. Grammar, therefore, must extend its limits in two directions : Presuming the reader to be acquainted with the Grammar of classic Greek, it must point out in the manner already described the peculiarities of the later Greek, as exhibited in the N. T. ; and likewise show, in the same scientific way, how and to what extent the Greek was modified by Hebrew-Aramaic influence. It would be wrong, however, to attempt to keep the two quite separate,^ for the mingling of the (later) Greek with the national (or Jewish) element in the mind of the writers of the N. T., produced a single composite syntax, which must be recognized and exhibited in its essential unity. 1 Valuable information, though rather lexical than grammatical, will be found in Lobeck's notes on Phrynichi Eclog. Lips. 1820. 8vo. Previously Irmisch (on Herodian) and Fischer (dc vitiis Lexicor. N. T.) had collected much useful matter. Copious hints relative to the graecitas fatiscens have been more recently ))resented in the improved texts of the Byzantine writers, and the indices (of very unequal merit) appended to most of them in the Bonn edition ; as well as in Boissonade's notes in the anecdot. grace. (Paris, 1829 ff. V. 8.), and in his editions of Marinus, Philostratus, Nicetas Eugen., Babrius, etc.; and, lastly, in Mullach's ed. of Hierocles (Berl. 1853. 8vo.), [cf. also his Grammatik der griech. Vulgarsprache in histor. Entwickelung. Berl. 1856. 8vo.]. To the later Greek element appropriate reference is made likewise in Lcbeck^a Paralipomena grammaticae Gr. Lips. 1837. 2 pts. 8vo., in his Pathologiae sermonis Gr. proleg. Lips. 1843. 8vo., and pathol. Graeci serm. elementa, Konigsb. 1853. I. 8vo., and also in ^ijnariKSu s verbor. Gr. et nominum verball. technologia, ib. 1846. 8vo. 2 For judicious remarks on the lexical treatment of Hebraisms, see Sckkiermacher'M Hermeneutik, S. 65. 4 INTRODUCTION. This mode of treating N. T. Grammar will undergo a partial change 16 whenever the grammar of the later Greek language shall have received an independent exposition ; for then it will not be necessary to prove the peculiarities of this later language by examples, — a task from which the N. T. grammarian cannot for the time be released. But one portion of the present contents of a grammar will gradually disappear, viz. the 4 polemic, wliich opposes inveterate and deeply rooted prejudices, or errors 7th ed. which have again made their appearance. As yet, however, this negative vindication of the true character of the diction of the N. T. still continues indispensable ; for, well-known expositors even of very recent date (Kiihnol, Flatt, Klausen in his Evangeliencomm.) have shown us again how deeply rooted is that old grammatical empii-icism which deems it an abomination ultra Fischerum (or even Storrium) sapere. Special grammars of separate portions of the N. T., as of the writings of John, of Paul, are clearly out of the question. The distinctive qualities 4 that mark the diction of these writers in particular, consist almost entirely •"*"• in the use of certain favorite expressions, or relate to the department of Rhetoric, as may be seen from the observations of Blackwall in his Crit. Sacr. N. T. II. 2. 8. p. 322 sqq. ed. Lips. To this also peculiarities in the collocation of words are mostly to be assigned. Grammar is but eeldora affected by these peculiarities of individuals. Accordingly Schulze and Schulz ^ have, on the whole, formed a more correct estimate of such peculiarities of diction than Gersdorf, whose well-known work — no great contribution of sure results even to verbal criticism — must have almost proved its own refutation, if it had had to be contiimed on the principles hitherto laid down. § 3. Although investigation into the language of the N. T. is the basis of all sound interpretation, yet N. T. Grammar has been till a recent period almost entirely excluded by Biblical philologists from the range of their inquiries. While the lexical element of the N. T. language has been the subject of repeated investigation, the grammatical has been treated at the most only so far as it stood connected with the discussion of the Hebraisms of the N.T.^ J His remarks on the character of the N. T. diction are contained in his dissertation on the Parable of the Steward (Bresl. 1821. 8vo.) and that on the Lord's Supper (Leipzig, 1824; 2d improved edit. 1831. 8vo.), and also in several articles in the Wachlersch. thcol. Annalen. In both dissertations, which are of an cxegetical char- acter, his observations, mostly acute, seem out of place, as they throw very little light on exegesis. Textual criticism, however, might have turned his views to good account, if the distinguished writer iiad only been pleased to give them to us in full. Cf. also Schleiermacher, Hermeneutik, S. 129. 2 An honorable exception among earlier expositors is the nearly forgotton G. F. Heupel, who in his copious and almost purely philological Commentary on the Gospel of Mark (Strassburg, 1716, Svo.) makes many excellent grammatical observations. INTRODUCTION. 5 Only Casp. Wyss (1650) and G. Pasor (1655) conceived more IT completely the idea of a N. T. grammar ; but their efforts were unavailing to accomplish its recognition as a special department of exegetical discipline. During a period of one hundred and sixty years after them, Haab was the first to publish a special 5 treatise on the Grammar of the N. T. ; but his rather uncritical work, besides being restricted to the Hebraisms, was adapted to retard the science, rather than to promote it. The first author who in some degree collected and explained the pecu- liarities of the N. T. diction, was the celebrated Sal. Glass (tlCo6) in his Philologia Sacra, the third book of which is entitled Grammatica Sacra, and the fourth Grammaticae Sacrae Appendix.^ But as he everywhere makes the Hebrew his point of departure, and touclies upon the language 5 of the N. T. only so far as it coincides with that, his treatise, to say notliing "'"*"• of its deficiencies, can be mentioned in a history of N. T. Grammar only as a weak performance. It serves to remind us, however, of the two writers mentioned above, whose very names, as well as their productions, which belong here, had fallen into almost total oblivion. The one, Casp. Wyss, Prof of Greek in the Gymnasium of Zurich (tl659), published Dialectologia Sacra, in qua quicquid per universum N. F. contextum in apostolica et voce et phrasi a communi Graecor. lingua eoque grammatica analogia discrepat, methodo congrua disponitur, accurate definitur et om- nium sacri contextus exemplorum inductione illustratur. Tigur. 1650. pp. 324 (besides the appendix), small 8vo. In this treatise the grammatical peculiarities of N. T. diction are arranged under the following heads : Dialectus Attica, lonica, Dorica, Aeolica, Boeotica, Poetica, 'E/Spdt^ova-a. This arrangement is awkward in the extreme, since kindred topics are separated and frequently are discussed in four different places. The writer's acquaintance with the Greek dialects, also, was clearly not beyond the ordinary scholarsliip of his time, as the very mention of a special dialectus poetica shows, and an examination of what he calls Attic renders still more manifest. Still, as a collection of examples, which in several sections is absolutely complete, the volume has value ; and as respects the grammatical Hebraisms of the N. T. the author's moderation might well have been imitated by his contemporaries. George Pasor, Prof, of Greek at Franeker (11637), known by his small Lexicon of the N. T., — which has been several times republished, finally by J. F. Fischer, — left among his papers a grammar of the N. T., which his son, Matthias Pasor, Prof of Theology at Groningen (tl658), pub- The Greek erudition of J. F. Ilombergk, in his Parerga Sacra. Amstel. 1719. 4to., and of ^. Heisen, in his Novae Hypotheses Interpretandae felicius Ep. Jacobi. Brem. 1739. 4to., is lexical rather than grammatical. * In Dathe's edition this Grammatica Sacra forms, as is well known, the Jirst book- 6 INTRODUCTION. 18 lished, with additions and improvements of his own, under the following title : G. Pasoris Grammatica Graeca Sacra N. T. in tres libros distributa. Q Groning. 1655. pp. 787. 8vo. This work is now a literary rarity,' though 7th e4 it is far more fitted than the Lexicon -to transmit the author's name to posterity. It is divided, as the title indicates, into three books. The first contains the Inflections ; the second, the Syntax (244-530) ; the third, seven appendices : de nominibus N. T., de verbis N. T., de verbis anomalis, de dialectis N. T., de accentibus, de praxi grammaticae, de numeris s. arithmetica graeca. The second book and the Appendix de dialectis N. T.'' are the most valuable portions of the work. For in the first book, and in 6 most of the appendices which form the third, he treats of the ordinary Bh ed. subjects of a general Greek grammar, superfluously inserting e.g. full paradigms of the Greek nouns and verbs. The syntax is elaborated with great accuracy and copiousness. The writer points out what is Hebraistic, but seldom adduces parallels from native Greek authors. This useful volume, however, is without a full index. During the interval from Pasor to Haab, the Grammar of the N. T. was treated but incidentally in treatises on the style of the N. T., e.g. by Leusden (de Dialectis N. T.) and Olearius (de Stylo N. T., pp. 257-271). But these authors confined themselves almost exclusively to Hebraisms, and by representing as Hebraistic much pure Greek phraseology, they involved in confusion again the whole inquiry concerning the Grammar of the N. T. Georgi was the first to vindicate the Greek character of numerous constructions usually regarded as Hebraistic, although even he did not escape one-sidedness. His writings attracted but little attention ; while the works of Vorst and -Leusden now obtained through the efforts of Fischer new currency, and Storr's well-known book ' was allowed for many years to exert its pernicious influence on the interpretation of the N. T. without restraint. From the school of Storr appeared Ph. H. Haab (rector of Schweigern, in the kingdom of Wiirtemberg, tl833) with his Hebrew-Greek Grammar of the N. T., prefaced by F. G. v. Siiskind. Tubing. 1815. 8vo. Over- looking the pure Greek element in the N. T. diction, he directed his 1 Even Foppen (Bihliotheca Belgica, Tom. I. p. 342), who gives a list of Pasor's other writings, does not mention this work. Salthen, Cat. Biblioth. Lib. Rar. (Regiom. 1751. 8vo.) p. 470, bears witness to its extreme rarity, and D. Gerdesius, in his Florileg. Hist. Crit. Libr. Rar. (Groning. 1763. 8vo.) p. 272. 2 Pasor had already himself added this appendix, under the title Idea (syllabus brevis) Graecar. N. T. Dialectorum, to the first edition of his Syllabus Graeco-Lat. omnium N. T. vocum. Amstel. 1632. 12mo. At the end he promises the above full Grammatica N. T. 8 Observ-att. ad analog, et syntaxin Hebr. Stuttg. 1779. 8vo. Some acute gram- matical observations, especially on enallage temporum, particularum, and the like, are to be found in J. G. Straube, diss, de emphasi graecae linguae N. T. in v. d. Honert, p. 70 sqq. INTRODUCTION, 7 attention merely to grammatical Hebraisms, and in the arrangement of the whole he followed the works of Storr and Weckherlin (Hebr. Gram. 19 2 Pts.). If the reviewer in Bengel's Archiv (1 B. S. 406 ff.) is to be credited, " the author has accomplished his task with such diligence, such sound judgment, such accuracy, and such nice and comprehensive knowl- edge of language, as must obtain for it the approbation of all friends of 7 the well-grounded interpretation of the N. T." A very different and ''"' *•• almost entirely opposite opinion has been expressed, however, by two scholars who must be regarded as most competent and impartial judges in this department: in the n. theol. Annal. 1816. 2 B. S. 859-879, and (by deWette?) in the A. LZ. 1816. N. 39-41. S. 305-326. After long and various use of the book, I am compelled to say that I entirely concur in their decision. The principal fault of the book consists in the author's not having correctly distinguished the classic Greek element from the Hebraistic in the diction of the N. T., and in his having consequently adduced as Hebraistic much either that is common to all cultivated lan- guages, or that occurs as frequently in the classics as in the N. T. ; while from his partiality to Storr's views, he has quite misinterpreted numerous passages of the N. T. by forcing Hebraisms upon them (see proof below). Moreover, the book is full of confusion, the matter is arranged most 7 arbitrarily, and the whole begins with a section on Tropes ! — a subject not belonging to Grammar at all. The last of the reviewers mentioned above does not, accordingly, seem too severe in concluding his criticism with these words : " Seldom have we met a work which was so complete a failure as this, and against the use of which we must warn the public so emphatically." § 4. Further, the detached grammatical remarks in commentaries on the books of the N. T., in miscellanies, and in exegetical mon- ographs, though sometimes exhibiting creditable research, failed to furnish, all taken together, a complete discussion of the Gram- mar of the N. T. Tiiese contributions, moreover, were rendered useless by that uncritical empiricism which controlled Greek Philology till the beginning of the present century, and Hebrew till a much more recent period ; just as this same empiricism has imparted to the interpretation of the N. T. the impress of uncer- tainty and arbitrariness. The pliilosophical method of handling philological subjects, — that method which seeks in national and individual peculiarities of thought the grounds of all phenomena of speech, anomalies even not excepted, — has effected a complete revolution in the study of Greek ; and the application of the same method to the language of the N. T. can alone invest the Grammar 20 of the N. T. with a scientific character, and elevate it to the dignity of a safe guide in interpretation. 8 INTRODUCTION. The empiricism that pervaded Greek philology manifested itself in the department of Grammar mainly in the following particulars : a. The gram- matical structure of the language was apprehended merely in the rudest outline ; hence the relation of kindred forms, e.g. of the Aor. and Perf., of the Subjunctive and the Optative, of the twofold order of negatives (oi and /A77), matters in which the genius of the Greek language is especially conspicuous, was left quite uncertain, b. In regard to those forms the g distinctive power of which had been in general discerned, an unlimited Ttb ed. interchange was asserted, according to which, one tense, one case, one par- ticle, was used for another ; and even direct opposites (e.g. Pret. and Fut., OLTTo and Trpos, etc.) were supposed to be interchanged, c. A multitude of ellipses was devised, and in the most simple expression something was , said to be understood. This method of procedure, still exhibited in Fis- cher's copious Animad. ad Welleri Grammat. Gr. (Lips. 1798 fF. 3 Spec. 8vo.), was applied by expositors to the N. T. They thought themselves warranted in using still greater liberties than Greek philologists, because the Hebrew, after which the diction of the N. T. was modelled, is charac- terized by want of precision in forms, and want of regularity in syntax, (which, therefore, was not treated systematically but only under the head g of enallages and solecisms).^ The natural consequences of such views were 8ft ed. abundantly apparent in the N. T. commentaries of the time ; and Storr^ had the honor of reducing to a sort of system this farrago of grammatical empiricism. Apart from all other evils resulting from such principles, they afforded unbounded license to thje caprice of expositors, and made it 21 easy for them to discover in the words of the sacred authors sentiments quite contradictory.^ 1 This empiricism was but occasionally and partially combated by enlightened scholars. Thus numerous misapprehensions of expositors were pointed out, very intel- ligently on the whole, by the Wittenberg professors Balth. Stolherg, in his Tractat. de soloecism. ct barbarism, graecae N. F. dictioni falso tributis. Vit. (1681.) 1685. 4to., and Franz Woken, in his dissertation entitled : Pietas critica in hypallagas bibl. Viteb. 1718. 8vo., and particularly in his Enallagae e N. T. graeci textus praecipuis et plu- rimis locis exterminatae., Vitcb. 1730. 8vo. Also J. Conr. Schwarz evinces highly respectable research and judgment in his Lib. de opinatis discipulor. Chr. soloecismis. Cob. 1730. 4to. Sucli protests, however, either obtained no attention, or weredroAvned by a contorte ! artijiciosf .' '^ How entirely different from his acute countryman Alb. Bengel, in his Gnomon, who, though he is often drawn into over-refined expositions, and attributes to the apostles his own dialectic conceptions, might have served for j'ears as a model of careful and instructive exposition. While he turned attention to grammatical inquiries (cf. e.g. Acts iii. 19 ; xxvi. 2 ; 1 Cor. xii. 15 ; Matt, xviii. 17 ; Heb. vi. 4.), he devoted special diligence in lexical matters to synonyms. 8 Sunt, says Tittmann (de scriptor. N. T. diligentia gramm. Lips. 1813. 4to., in Synonym. N. T. I. p. 206), qui grammaticarum legum observationem in N. T. inter- pretatione parum curent et, si scriptoris cujusdam verba grammatice i.e. ex legibus linguae explicata sentcntiam ab ipsorum opinione alienam prodant, nullam illarum legum rationem habeant, sed propria verborum vi neglecta scriptorem dixisse INTRODUCTION. 9 The Greek philologists were the first to abandon this empiricism. Reitz's pupil, Gottfr. Hermann, by his work De Emendanda Ratione Grammaticae Gr., gave the first powerful impulse to the rational ^ investi- gation of the noble Greek tongue. This method has now, after the lapse of more than fifty years, become so general, and produced such important 9 results, and of late has allied itself so successfully to historical "^ research, '''' ** that Greek grammar has become transformed. The treatment of the sub- ject has been rational, because a. The primary import of all grammatical forms (the cases, tenses, moods), that is, the notion corresponding to every such form in the Greek mind, was distinctly settled ; and to this primary notion ail actual uses of the same form were referred. Thus a multitude of ellipses disappeared, and enallage was reduced within its natural and narrow bounds. b. Even in the case of such deviations from the established laws of the language as had been adopted, either generally or by individual authors, — anacoluthon, confusio duarum structurarum, attractio, constructio ad sen- sum, brachylogia, etc., — pains were taken to show how they originated in the mind of the speaker or writer. The Greek language is thus exhibited as the expression of Greek thought 9 — as a living idiom. Every form and turn of e;xpression is not merely "™ *''' stated as a matter of fact, but is traced back to the thinking mind, and an attempt is made to comprehend it in its origin within the soul. By such a method every unintelligible usage disappears of itself, such as the as- sumption that a writer wishing to express a past event has employed Sifut. tense; that intending to say out of, he has said at; that wishing to call some one learned, he has called him more learned ; that meaning to sub- join a cause, he has written consequently ; that desirous of saying / saw a man, he has said I saw the man, etc. For a long time, however. Biblical philologists took no notice of all this 22 progress in Greek grammar (and lexicography). They clung to old Viger and to Storr, and kept aloof from classical philology, under the impression (by no one distinctly avowed, to be sure, in recent times) that N. T. Greek, because Hebraistic, could not be subjected to the same philosophical method of inquiry. They would not perceive that Hebrew itself, like every other human language, admits and requires a philosophical treat- ment. Through the persevering eflforts of Ewald, this truth is now uni- versally acknowledged. No one now denies that the ultimate explanation of Hebrew modes of expression must be sought for in Hebrew modes of contendant, quae talibus verbis nemo sana mente praeditus dicere unquam potuit. Hermann's (ad Vig. 788) satirical remarks were just. 1 I should prefer this epithet to philosophical, because the latter may easily give rise to misunderstanding. All merely empirical philology is irrational ; it regards lan- guage as something merely external, and not as the expression of thought. Cf. Titt- mann, as above, S. 205 sq. 2 G. Bernhardt/, wissenschaftl. Syntax der griech. Sprache. Berl. 1829. 8vo. 2 10 INTRODUCTION. thought, and that a simple-minded people would be the last to repudiate 10 the fundamental principles of human speech.^ Scholars are no longer con- 7tbed. tent to give a preposition, for instance, the most diverse meanings accord- ing to the assumed requirements of a context superficially examined. But an endeavor is made to point out the transition from the primary import of every particle to every one of its secondary meanings ; and without this, every alleged signification is regarded as an unscientific assumption. A student is no longer satisfied with the vague remark that to a Hebrew, non omnis — which in reason can only mean not every one — is the same as omnis non, that is, nullus ; on the contrary, he refers to the true prin- ciple in every such case to be kept in view. N. T. Grammar, therefore, must strive after a rational exposition of the language of the N. T. if it will attain a scientific basis itself, or secure the same in turn to exegesis. All that has been already achieved in Greek 10 philology must be carefully turned to account. It must, however, be Ith ed. remembered, that not every nice distinction propounded by the linguists is to be viewed as established (and even the text perhaps altered accordingly), but that philology is constantly progressive. Many views have already required to be considerably modified (those, for instance, relating to the use of €1 with the subjunctive) ; others are still matters of disputation even among the best scholars (for instance, certain uses of av). 23 Since 1824, N. T. Grammar in particular has received valuable contri- butions from Fritzsche, in his Dissertatt. in 2 Epist. ad Cor. (Lips. 1824.), in his Commentaries on Matthew and Mark, in his Conject. in N. T. Lips. 1825. 2 Spec. 8vo., and especially in his Comment, on the Epistle to the Romans, Hal. 1836. 8vo. To these must be added the Dissertations of Gieseler and Bornemann in Rosenmiiller's Exeget. Repert. 2 B., as well as the latter's Scholia in Lucae Evang. Lips. 1830. 8vo., and, in part, his edition of the Acts of the Apostles (Acta Apost. ad Cod. Cantabrig. fidem rec. et interpr. est. Grossenhain, 1848. 8vo. L). Finally, many grammat- ical questions have been discussed in the controversial correspondence between Fritzsche and Tholuck.^ 1 Rational investigation must be founded on historical. The whole field of language must first be historically surveyed, before we can explain individual phenomena. A simple language supposes simplicity of thought; and the explanation of forms and expressions is more easy in Hebrew, than in languages of less simplicity. The rational investigation of Hebrew implies tracing out all transitions from one signification of a word to another, all constructions and turns of expression, as they occurred in the Hebrew mind; since language is merely the image of thought (as thinking is, according to the Hebrew view itself, unuttered speech). To attempt to delineate a priori the laws of language is absurd. It is readily conceded that the rational method of investi- gation may be now and then misapplied, as even the Greek philologists have not escaped over-refinements. Adherence, however, to empirical stupidity from the appre- hension of such danger is disgraceful. 2 Fritzsche, Ueber die Verdienste D. Tholuck's um die Schrifterklarung. Halle. 1831. 8vo. Tholuck, Beitrage zur Spracherklarung des N. T. Halle. 1832. 8vo. Fritzsche, INTRODUCTION. H Philological investigation into the language of the N. T. has not re- mained wholly without influence ^ on any of the numerous commentaries which have recently appeared, whether emanating from the critical, evan- gelical, or philosophical school of theology ; although but a few of them 11 have treated philological points attentively and independently (as van ''''"^ Hengel, Liicke, Bleek, Meyer). An intelligent estimate of improved phil- ological principles in their application to the N. T., has been given by H. G. Holemann, Comment, de iuterpretatione sacra cum profana feliciter conjungenda. Lips. 1832. 8vo. N. T. Grammar has recently found its way from Germany to England and North America ; partly in a translation of the fouitli edition of the present book (New York and Loudon, 1840), and psrtly in a separate (original ?) work, entitled, A Greek Grammar to the N. T., etc., by the Rev. William Trollope, M.A. London, 1842. 8vo. An earlier work on this subject, entitled, A Grammar of the N. T. Dialect, by Moses Stuart. Andover, 1841. 8vo., I have not yet seen. Moreover, the special gram- matical characteristics of individual writers have begun to attract attention (yet see above, p. 4) : Gl. Ph. Ch. Kaiser, Diss, de Speciali Joa. Ap. Grammatica Culpa Negligentiae liberanda. Erlang. 1842. IL4to. ; also De Speciali Petri Ap. Grammatica Culpa Negligentiae liberanda. Erlang. 1848. 4to. [In Germany, too, works upon N. T. Grammar have since been issued by Alex. Buttmann (Grammatik des N. T. Sprachgebrauchs. Im Anschlusse an Ph. Buttmann's griech. Grammatik. Berl. 1859. 8vo.) and S. Ch. Schir- litz (Grundzuge der N. T. Gracitat nach den besten Quellen fiir Studi- rende der Theol. u. Philol. Giessen. 1861. 8vo.)-] Praliminarien zur Abbitte unci Ehrenerklarung, die ichgem dem D. Tholuck gewahren mochte. Halle. 1832. 8vo. Tholuck, Noch ein emstes Wort an D. Fritzsche. Halle. 1832. 8vo. Tholuck laid more stress on philological investigation in his Commentary on the Epistle to the Hebrews. Hamb. 1836, 1840, 1830. 8vo. The anonymous author of Beitrage zur Erklarung des Br. an die Hebr. Leipz. 1840. 8vo., passes a severe judgment rather on the hcrmeneutical than the grammatical merits of Tholuck. 1 Even on the commentaries of the excellent BCruslus, whose weakest side is un- doubtedly the philological. 12 PART I. Ithcd. gtlijj ON THE CHARACTER OF THE N. T. DICTION, ESPECIALLY 25 IN ITS GRAMMATICAL ASPECTS. §1. VAKIOUS OPINIONS CONCERNING THE CHARACTER OF THE N. T. DICTION. 1. Though the character of the N. T. diction is pretty distinct and obvious, Biblical philologists long entertained erroneous, or at least imperfect and one-sided, views on the subject. For, dog- matic considerations, combined with ignorance of later Greek dialectology, rendered minds in other respects intelligent incapable of perceiving exegetical truth. Prom the beginning of the 17th century various distinguished scholars (Purists) repeatedly attempted to demonstrate that the style of the N. T. reaches in every respect the standard of classical purity and elegance ; while others (Hebraists) not only recognized its Hebrew coloring, but in part at least grossly exaggerated it. Towards the end of the 17th century the opinion of the Hebraists obtained the ascendancy ; though it did not altogether suppress that of the Purists, which found very learned defenders. About the middle of the 18th century, however, the Purist party became extinct, and the principles of the Hebraists, slightly modified in some particulars, became universal. Not until very lately have scholars begun to perceive the one-sidedness of tliese principles, and to adopt the correct intermediate views which Beza and H. ^ephanus had already in the main pointed out. The history of the various opinions which from time to time were advanced, often with great controversial bitterness, respecting the Greek style of the N. T., is briefly related in Morus, Acroas. acad. sup. Hermeneut. N. T., ed. Eichstadt, Tom. i. p. 216 sqq. ; in Meyer, Gesch. der Schrifter- klar. iii. 342 ff. (cf. Eichstadt, Pr. sententiar. de dictione scriptor. N. T. brevis censura. Jen. 1845. 4to.) ; with several important inaccuracies, in Planck, Einleit. in d. theol. Wissensch. ii. 43 fF. (cf. Stange, theol. Symmikta, § 1. OPINIONS ON THE N. T. DICTION. 13 ii. 295 fF.). For the bibliography of the subject see "Walch, biblioth. theol. 13 iv, 276 sqq.^ From these sources, with occasional corrections, we present ^'^ the following remarks as sufficient for our purpose : r:'^ Th. Beza, in his Digressio de dono linguarum et apostol. sermone (on Acts X. 46), in reply to Erasmus's assertion Apostolorura sermo non solum 26 impolitus et inconditus verum etiam imperfectus et perturbatus, aliquoties plane soloecissans, defended the simplicity and force of the N. T. diction ; and its Hebraisms in particular, which, as is well known, he was far from denying, he represented in a very advantageous light as ejusmodi, ut nullo alio idiomate tam feliciter exprimi possint, imo interdum ne exprimi quidem, — in fact as gemmae, quibus (apostoh) scripta sua exornarint. After him, H. Stephauus, in the preface to his edition of the N. T. of 1576, combated the views of those qui in his scriptis inculta omnia et horrida esse putant ; and labored to show, by specimens, what fine Greek turns of expression occur in the style of the N. T., and that even the admixture of Hebraisms imparts to it inimitable force and expressiveness. Though the beauties pointed out are rhetorical rather than linguistic, and the Hebraisms are overrated, yet the judgment of these two masters of Greek is not so one-sided as it is generally said to be, and on the whole comes nearer the truth than that of many later expositors. After Drusius and Glass had specified and explained Hebraisms in the N. T. without opposition, extravagant notions were first promulgated by Seb. Pfochen, in his Diatribe de linguae graecae N. T. puritate (Amst. 1629 ; ed. 2, 1633. 12mo.). Having in the preface stated the subject of his inquiry to be : an stylus N. T. sit vere graecus nee ab aliorum Graecorum stylo alienior talisque, qui ab Homero, Demosthene aliisque Graecis intelligi potuisset §§ 81-129, he endeavors to demonstrate by copious quotations, graecos autores profanos eisdem phrasibus et verbis loquutos esse, quibus scriptores N. T." (§ 29). This juvenile treatise (though in substance ap- proved by Erasmus Schmid, as afterwards appeared from his Opus posthu- mura, 1658) seems, with its strict Purism, to have produced at the time no great impression. The Hamburg rector Joach. Junge (1637, 1639) in reality, though indi- rectly, first gave rise to a controversy on the nature of the N. T. diction. 27 His opponent, the Hamburg pastor Jac. Grosse (1640), though not endors- 14 ing Junge's real opinion respecting the Hellenism (not barbarism)^ of the 7tli ed 1 See also Baumgarten, Polemik, iii. 176 ff. The opinions of the (apologetical) Fathers on the style of the N. T. are given summarily in J. Lami, de erudit. apostolor. p. 138 sqq. They treat the subject less under a philological than a rhetorical point of view. Theodoret, gr. affect, cur. s., triumphantly .opposes the (ro\oiKiaf/.ol aXtfvrtKoi to the ^vWoyia-fxol arriKoL 2 Junge himself thus states his true opinion, in a German memorial addressed to the Minister of Ecclesiastical Affairs in 1637 [cf. Joach. Jungius Ueber die Originalsprache des N. T. vom Jahre 1637. Aufgefunden, zuerst herausgegebcn und eingeleitet von Joh. Geffckm. Hamb. 1863. 8vo.] : I have distinctly said, and I still say, that the style 14 § 1. OPINIONS ON THE N. T. DICTION. 13 N. T. style, admitted its harmlessness.^ Dan. Wulfer, however, came 6th ed. forward the same year with Innocentia Hellenistarum vindicata (see 1, etc.), in which he asserted that Grosse's reasoning was neither clear nor con- vincing.2 Grosse had now to contend against Wulfer, whose misunder- standings he exposed, and also against Joh. Musaeus, the theologian of Jena (1641-42), who had charged him with vacillation and contradiction, but had in view rather his doctrinal opinions (respecting verbal inspiration) ; so that Grosse published, in all, five short dissertations (1641-42), vindi- cating, not indeed the Grecian elegance, but the purity and dignity of the language of the N. T. Without mingling in these controversies, which descended into odious personalities and were nearly fruitless to science, Dan. Heinsius (1643) asserted the Hellenism of the N. T. diction ; and Thom. Gataker (de novi instrum. stylo dissert. 1 648) wrote expressly against the Purism of Pfochen, with learning, but not without exaggeration. Joh. Vorst now published (1658, 1665) an elaborate and perspicuous list of the Hebraisms of the N. T. which Hor. Vitringa shortly afterwards animadverted upon as highly partial.^ J. H. Bocler (1641) and J. Olearius (1668)* adopted intermediate views, carefully discriminating between the Greek and the Hebrew elements in 28 the style of the N. T., and J. Leusden agreed with them in the main, although he is inferior to Olearius in discretion. of the N. T. is not classical Greek The question an N. T. scateat barbarismis, is so outrageous, that no Christian man ever entertained it before ; I never could be brought to admit that there arc barbarous expressions in the N. T., because the Greeks themselves regard-a barbarism as a vitium. 1 His two leading positions are thus expressed : quod quamvis evangelistae et apos- toli in N. T. non adco ornato et nitido, tumido et affectato (!) dicendi genere usi sint impium tamen, imo blasphemum sit, si quis inde S. literarum studiosus graccum stylum sugillare, vilipendcre et juventuti suspectum facere ipsique vitia et notam soloecismorum et barbarismorum attricare contcndat Quod nee patres, qui soloe- cismorum et barbarismorum mcminerunt et apostolos idiotas fuisse scripserunt, nee ill! autorcs, qui stylum N. T. hcllenisticum esse statuerunt, nee isti, qui in N. T. Ebrais- mos et Chaldaismos esse observarunt, stylum S. apostolorum contemserint, sugillarinl eumq. impuritatis alicujus accusarint cet. 2 Grosse's dissertation was specially directed against a possible inference from the proposition that the N. T. is not written in so good Greek as that employed by native Greek authors ; and, essentially, refers to adversaries that (at least in Hamburg) had then no existence. Moreover his whole argument is rather of a negative kind, as appears for example from the re'sume (p. 40 of Grosse's Trias) : etiamsi graecus stylus apostolor. non sit tam omatus et affoctatus, ut fuit ille qui fuit florente Graecia, non atticus ut Athenis, non doricus ut Corinthi, non ionicus ut Ephesi, non aeolicus ut Troade, fuit tamen vere graecus ab omni soloecismorum et barbarismonim labe immunis. 8 Vorst in the preface utters his conviction : sacros codices N. T. talibus et vocabulis et phrasibus, quae hebraeam linguam sapiant, scatere pinnp. Cf further, his Cogitata de stylo N. T., prefixed to Fischer's edition of the work de Hebraismis. * J. Cocceji stricturae in Pfochen. diatrib. were first printed solely for private distri- bution, and afterwards published in Rhenferd's collection^ § 1. OPINIONS ON THE N. T, DICTION. 15 It now came to be very generally admitted that Hebraisms constitute a prominent element in N. T. diction, and give it a coloring, not indeed barbarous, but widely removed from classic purity (see also Werenfels, 15 Opusc. i. p. 311 sqq.).^ The same view was advanced by Mos. Solanus, '"*'• in a tardy but very sensible pamphlet against Pfochen. Even J. Heinr. * Michaelis (1707) and Ant. Blackwall (1727) did not presume to deny the existence of Hebraisms, but tried to prove that the style of the N. T. writers, notwithstanding the Hebraisms, has all the properties of an elegant style, and in this respect is not inferior to the purity of the classics. The last-named scholar begins his work, which abounds in excellent remarks, thus : tantum abest, ut hebraismos in X. T. reperiri infitiemur, ut eorum potius insignem, qua hie divinus abundat liber, copiam ad commoditatem ejus et elegantiam majorem afferre accessionem arbitremur. As little effect, however, had these scholars on the now established opinion as the erudite Ch. Siegm. Georgi, who, in his Vindiciae X. T. ab Ebraismis (1732), re- turned to the strongest Purism ; and in a new work, Hierocriticus sacer (1733), defended his assertions. He was followed, but with no greatfer success, by J. Conr. Schwarz, whose Commentarii crit. et philol. linguae gr. N. T. Lips. 1736. 4to., chiefly aimed at demonstrating the Greek purity even of expressions taken for Hebraisms.^ To these must be added, as the last who opposed the misuse of Hebraisms, El. Palairet (observatt. philol. crit. in N. T. L. B. 1752. 8vo.),' and H. W. van Marie (florileg. observ. in epp. apost. L. B. 1758. 8vo.). Through the influence of the school of Ernesti, the more correct estimate of the language of the N. T. was generally diffused over Germany.* Cf. Ernesti's Institut. Interpret. i. 2. cap. 3. 1 Hemsterhuis ad Lncian. dial. mar. 4, 3 : corum, qni orationem N. T. graecam esse castigatissimam contendunt, opinio perquam mihi semper ridicuia fiiit visa. Also, Bhh. Stolhei-g, de soloecismis et barbarismis N. T. Vitcb. 1681. 4to. and 1685. 4to., ^vished merely to vindicat'e the N. T. diction from blemishes unjustly ascribed to it ; but, in fact, attempted to explain away many real Hebraisms. 2 In the anticipation of certain victory he says in p. 8 of his preface : olira hebraismi, syrismi, chaldaismi, rabinismi (sic !), latinisrai cet. celebrabantur nomina, ut vel scrip- tores sacri suam graecae dictionis ignorantiam prodere aut in graeco sermone tot lin- guarum notitiam ostentasse viderentur vel saltcm interpretes illorum literatissimi et singularum locutionum perspicacissimi judicarenttir. Sed conata haec ineptiarum et vanitatis ita sunt etiam a nolns convicta, ut si qui cet. A satire on the Purists will be found in Somnium in quo praeter cetera genius sec. vapulat. Alteburg. 1761, p. 97 sqq. * Supplements by Pal. himself may be seen in the Biblioth. Brem. no^-a CI. 3 and 4. On the whole. Pal. produces passages almost exclusively in defence of such significsr tions and phrases, as no judicious person would take to be Hebraisms. * Ernesti's view of the N. T. diction (diss, de difficult, interpret, grammat. N. T. ^ 12) may be recalled here : genus orationis in libris N. T. esse e pure graecis et ebraicam maxime consuetudinem referentibus verbis formulisque dicendi mixtum et temperatum, id quidem adeo evidens est iis, qui satis graece sciunt, ut plane m'isericordia clifjni sint, qui omnia bene graeca esse conletidant. 16 § 1. OPINIONS ON THE N. T. DICTION. 29 Most of the above-mentioned old dissertations (besides others), written 16 in the Purist controversy, are collected in J. Rhenferd's Dissertatt. philolog. 7th ed. theolog. de Stylo N. T. syntagma, Leov. 1702. 4to., and in (what may be considered as a supplement to Rhenferd's collection) Taco Hajo van den Honert, Syntagma dissertatt. de stylo N. T. graeco. Amst. 1703. 4to.^ 15 Let us endeavor briefly to characterize the efforts of those who attrib- 6th ed. uted classical purity to the N. T. diction.^ Their great object was to collect from native Greek authors passages in which those very same words and phrases occur which are found in the N. T., and are there explained as Hebraisms. Now, apart from the cir- cumstance that what is strictly speaking the body of the language was not in general distinguished from the rhetorical element, the Purists entirely overlooked the following considerations : a. That numerous expressions and phrases (particularly such as are figurative), owing to their simplicity and naturalness, are common to all, or at least to many languages, and cannot with propriety be called either Grecisms or Hebraisms.^ b. That a distinction is to be made between the diction of prose and that of poetry, and also between figurative expressions employed very rarely and by individual authors to give composition a peculiar elevation (as lumina orationis), and those which have become the common property of the language ; and that, if in plain prose like that of the N. T. expres- sions used by Pindar, -^schylus, Euripides,'' etc. occur, or if such expres- sions, as well as rare Greek figurative phrases, recur as ordinary phraseol- ogy, this by no means proves the classical purity of the N. T. c. That when an expression is found alike in Hebrew and in Greek, the training and history of the writers of the N. T. render it in general more 1 The dissertations of Wulfer, Grosse, and Musams, though of trifling importance compared to their size, are missed with regret from tliis collection, and more of Junge's than the sententiae doct. vir. de stylo N. T. should have been admitted. Besides, cf. Blessig, praesidia interpret. N. T. ex auctorib. grace. Argent. 1778. 4to., and Miitenzwey, locorum quorundam e Hutchinsoni ad Xenoph. Cyrop. notis, quib. purum et elegans N. T. dieendi genus defenditur, refutatio. Coburg. 1763. 4to. An essay by G. C. Drau- dius, de stylo N. T., in the Primitt. Alsfeld., Niimb. 1736. 8vo., I have not seen ; (see Neubauer, Nachr. von jetzt lebenden Theol. i. 253 ff.). 2 Mlttenzwey made some remarks on this in his Essay, already mentioned. 8 Simplicity and graphic expression are common to Hcbrevsr and Hebrev?-Greek with the diction of Homer ; and particular phrases having these characteristics could with as little propriety be called Hebraisms in the latter as Grecisms in the former. In general, languages have points of contact, especially in popular speech, which is universally sim- ple and graphic ; while cidtivated diction, as it is coined by the learned, is more isolated. Hence in Latin, for instance, most of what are called Germanisms are to be found in the style of comedies, epistles, etc. * See, on the other hand, Krebs, observ. praef. p. 3. Leusden, de dialectt. p. 37, says, with great absurdity : nos non fugit, carmina istorum hominum (tragicor.) innumeris hebraismis esse contaminata. Accordingly Fischer, ad Leusden, p. 114, finds Hebra- isms in the poems of Homer. § 1. OPLN'IOXS ON THE N. T. DICTION. 17 probable that such expression is copied immediately from the Hebrew, than that it is borrowed from the choicer literary language of Greece. 30 Not to mention, d. That those uncritical collectors huddled together many passages out of Greek authors where, a. the same word indeed occurs, but in a different 17 signification ; or, fi. expressions are found only similar, not identical. "'' ^ Further, e. That they unhesitatingly used even the Byzantine writers, into whose language, through the influence of the church, many elements of the Hebraizing N. T. phraseology may have been transferred (as in particular 16 instances can be proved to be extremely probable ; cf. Niebuhr, Index to ^^^ Agath. under l-q^iovaBai) ; and, at all events, these Byzantine authors are not standards of classic Greek purity. Finally, f. That they passed over, and were forced to pass over, many expres- sions in silence, because they are undeniable Hebraisms.' Thus the evidence produced in favor of Purism was partly defective and partly irrelevant. Besides, most of the Purists restricted themselves mainly to the lexical side of the question ; Georgi alone discussed the grammatical with a fulness sustained by stores of erudition. In proof of the preceding statements, we subjoin several striking exam- ples (cf. also Mori acroas. 1. c. p. 222 sqq.) : And as respects a. Matt. V. G, TrcivwKrcs kclL Sii^oivTes rijv 8u«I- Greek by parallels from Herodot., ^lian, Xenophon, Diodor. Sic, Philos- tratus, and others. d. a. That iv is used by Greek authors to express the casus instru- mentalis — which with certaui limitations is true — Pfochen tries to prove by such quotations as: ttAcW cV rats vavai. (Xenoph.), ^X5c iv v-qX fieXalvr) (Hesiod) ! That good Greek authors use prjfia for res is said to be apparent from Piatt, legg. 797 c. {tovtov prfp.aToi;os, Georgi (Vind. p. 304) supports by passages in which xapTros alone is used to denote the fruit of the human body. ' Aristoph. Nub. irXeov ttXcov, more and more, is not sufficient to prove that Svo Svo, two and two, is a Grecism ; it would be necessary to produce examples where the repeated cardinal is employed for dva 8uo, ava. rpeh, etc., § 37, 3. In the same way ocrcra ^ oKovaa'i (.UiOiynqv is vainly quoted from Callimachus to prove that nOivat. eis TO. wra is pure Greek, as the two phrases are essentially unlike each other. Yet such specimens might be multiplied without end. What 19 Georgi, Vind. p. 25, produces from Arrian. Epictet. in defence of 6 aSeA^ds '"" *''• alter, seems peculiarly ridiculous. e. Schwarz, p. 1245, asserts, on the usage of Nicetas, the pure Greek character of the phrase cm]pii,uv ro Tr/jogwTrov and the word ivoizL^eaOaL ; and Palairet proves that of tj ^pd. in the sense of continent, from Jo. Cinnam. hist. iv. p. 183. Pfochen still more oddly vindicates the use of Kotvds to signify immundus, from Lucian, Mort. Peregrin, c. 13, where Lucian derisively employs a Judeo-Christian expression. f. Of the numerous Hebraistic words and phrases which the Purists passed over in silence, it will suffice to mention : Trp6aXi<; volu7ne (roll) of a book (Bleek on Ileb. x. 7), evaxQl^i^v a respectable, prominent, man (Lob. 333), xJ/w/jll^hv and )(opTd^eLv (fodder) feed, nourish*,^ 6ij/(ovlov wages (Sturz, 187), oij/dptov fish, epevye- udaL eloqui (Lob. 63 sq.), eTrtcn-cAAciv write a letter (iTnaroXi^, Tr(.pLcnvaa-6ai 28 negotiis distrahi (Lob. 415), Trroi/xa corpse (Lob. 375), yewrj/xaTa fruges ' ** (Lob. 286), axoXi^ school (Lob. 401), Ovpe66a\p.o<;, Lob. 136), Kap.p.v(.Lv (/cara- fxveiv, Sturz, p. 123), 6^Lp.o Lob. 726), drrjKii) (from eo-TtjKa stand, Bttm. II. 36), dpyos, 17, 6v 6th ed (^^ ^^ adject, of three terminations, Lob. 105), ttci^os, vocraoL, vocrcnd (veoaaoL, veoacrid, Thom. M. 626; Lob. 206 f.), Trerdop.ai (ireTop^at, Lob. 581), aTreATTi^ctv (dTroyivwo-Kctv) , c^ttvi^civ (d(f>VTrvLt,etv, Lob. 224),pavri^€tv (patvetv), ScKarovv (8c/caT€i;«v), dpoTpiav {apovv, Lob. 254 sq.), /Si^AapiStov* (/Si/3Ai8iov, /8i/?Ai8ttpiov), ij/Lxtov (i/'i^), Tafjieiov (rap-ulov) Lob. 493, KaraTrovTi^cii' (/cara- TTOVTOvv, Lob. 361), TTaparjypovi'a (jrapapoopTLov.^ Lastly, many substantives received a different gender and in 25 part a corresponding change of termination ; see § 8 note, and § 9 note 2. Ith ei e. Entirely new words and phrases ^ were constructed, mainly by composition and for the most part to meet some sensible want ; as, dWo- TpLoema-KOTTOs*, dvOpuiirdpecrKO^ (Lob. 621), okoKkrjpo';, dyeveaXoyj/ro?*, aifj.a- T€K)(vcrLa*, ^LKaLOKpuTLCL, (TiTOfjifTpioVy w\6rifJif^pov (Sturz, 186), ■n-X.r]poopLa (Theophan. 132), KaXo-n-ouLV (Lob. 199 sqq.), aixjxaXwTL^etv and aix[xa\(DT€V€LV (for alxfidXorrov ttouIv, Thora. M. p. 23 ; Lob. 442), ij.€(jjvLa (Lob. 229), a7roKeL71— 574) ; — in substantives compounded with avv, e.g. (rvp.fia6r]Ty]^, cru/xTroXtrT^? (Lob. 471) ; — in adjectives in tvos, e.g. 6p6pLv6ri, absolutely used, to com-ert, conversion, Trpo^-qXvTo<;, Trci/rtKocrri; Whitsuntide, K6ap.o<; (in a figurative sense), uvaL, Trposwwov Xafx/SoiVfiv, oIkoSo- ixelv (in a figurative sense), 7rAarw€ti' t'^i' KapBtau, iropevecrOaL oiricrw, ov Tras (for ovStt'?), i^o/MoXoyeiaOaL tlvl and ev tlvi, etc. 2. Such words, etc. as, though occasionally occurring in Greek authors, are imitated by the writers of the N. T. directly from their native tongue ; e.g. (nr4p(jia for proles (Schwarz, Comm. p. 1235) hebr. s-T ; avdyKr) distress, calamity (cf D. Sic. 4, 43 ; Schwarz, as above, p. 81) hebr. pis^, tnpiJCia, 29 "i^ , Tr\-i ; IpuiTOLv request (as bsd denotes both request and interrogate, cf. "Uhed. the Latin rogare) Babr. 97, 3 ; Apollon. synt. p. 289 ; cis airavTrjo-Lv (D. Sic. 8, 59 ; Polyb. 5, 26, 8) cf. nxnpb ; Trepara T77S 7175 (Thuc. 1, 69 ; Xen. Ages. 9, 4 ; Dio Chr. 62. 587) cf. j'-ix -^osx ; x^^^^"'^ ^or littus (Her. 1,191; Strabo, and others) cf. fnsb ; arop-a of a sword (ns) cf , besides the Poets, Philostrat. her. 19, 4. So also the expression ivBvcraaOai Xpio-rov (Tap- Kvviov ivSva. in Dion. H.), formed after pns 'J^b, etc. Cf. above, p. 17. 3. Such words, etc., as are equally common in Greek and in Hebrew, and with regard to which, accordingly, there is room for doubt whether they are to be considered as portions of the popular Greek adopted by the Jews, or as currently employed by them through the influence of their 44 native tongue ; e.g. tL\r}fji.a pec- ^-[ catum, after the Aram. 3in ; vvfx<^-q (bride) also daughter-in-law Matt. x. 35, 6thed. as nS3 denotes both (Sept. Gen. xxxviii. 11) ; cts for primus (in certain cases) like "inx ; i^ofJioXoyeLcrOai rivi also praise one (thanking), like h iTi'^rt (Ps. cvi. 47 ; cxxii. 4, and elsewhere in Sept.) ; eiXoyiiv bless, i.e. make happy, like "r^'^a; kticti? thing created, creation, cf. Chald. n^'na ; S6$a bright- ness, like 'i"^23 ; Swotyuet? miracles, Pi'-iiaa. The transfer of figurative senses is the most frequent ; as, Trorrfpiov sors, portio Matt. xx. 22 (Ois) ; o-Kav8aXov stumbling-block in a moral sense (^iuJD^a) ; yXwo-cra for nation {'\^^\) ; x^-^o? for speech (rs'vD) ; evwTrtov toG Oiov (rtini "^ssb) according to God's judgment ; 46 KapSla ivdeia (n"^Tr"^) ; TreptTraTciv walk, of one's course of. life ; 68os ("'^'^) of. Schaf. ind. ad Aesop, p. 148 ; a.vdOefj.a not merely what is consecrated to God, but, agreeably to the Heb. o'lri, to be destroyed, Rom. ix. 3, Deut. vii. 26, Josh. vi. 17, and elsewhere; Xveiv Matt. xvi. 19 for declare lawftU, after the Rabbin. "T^nrj- b. Numerous Hebraisms arose from the verbal translation of certain § 8. HEBREW-ARAMAIC TINGE OF N. T. DICTION. 33 very common vernacular expressions ; as, ■rrp6<;uyrrov Xaix/Bdveiv for d'^SB X'S5 ; ^■qrelv ^X^v for rs.: UJ|5a ; -TToieiv eXeos (x'^P'-^) H-^'''^ tikos, for D? lOn ifCV ; dvotyetv Tois oc^^aA/Aovs or to o-ro/ia rivds ("153) ; yevc(rOaL davdrov Xr"''? D?:? (Talm.) ; dprov ay€iv (coenare) for Onh bzN ; at/Aa tKx^eiv (n'^ T)?'^") H/^/ avLCTTTjixL (TTrepfia tlvl for ^ snt C^pn ; wios ^amrou for r.^r"? ("^ ^^"'^ TO" vu/A^wvo?) ; KapTTos OCTAVOS for D";s^n "'nQ ; Kapiros KotAias for "1:35 i~iQ ; c^- ipx^o-OaL Ik t^s o(t<^uos rtvds for 'p "^y^n^ SS^ ; e/c KotAiu? fj.r]Tp6<; for iox l^M^ ; 6€LXr)iJ.a dcfiievai for N3in pSTT (Talm.) ; also arrrjpi^eLV TrpdswTrov awTo€ for 33 r;Q niirn ; rao-a crap^ for "i'93"b3. '^'''**' c. The formation of foreign derivatives in imitation of vernacular, im- plies more reflection and contrivance ; as, oXoKavrwixa (from oXoKavrovv, Lob. 524) for SibiJ; a-irXayxi^ileaOaL from (nrXd-fxya, as trn is connected with =''«n"n ; crKavSaAtCciv, aKavSaXi^ecrOai, like b"w'23, b-^Trrn ; eyKaivi^etv from cyKatVta, as "Sn is related to nspn ; dva6€ixaTii,uv. like B^";nn ; opOpi^ctv, like QiS'rn ; perhaps evwrt'Ceo-^ai, like "r^xn, cf. P'ischer ad Leusden dial. p. 27. npo^wTToXr/TTTciv, for which even the Hebr. has no single corresponding word, goes still further. All this easily accounts for the predominant Hebrew- Aramaic complexion of the style of the N. T. writers, who were not, like Philo and Josephus,'' acquainted with Greek literature, and did not aim at writing correct Greek. Hence, the whole cast of their composition (particularly the want of com- 32 pactness, especially in narration) must have oiFended a cultivated Greek 6th ei ear ; indeed, numerous single expressions must either have conveyed to a native Greek an erroneous meaning, or have been entirely unintel- ligible (such as a(f)uvai ocjietX-qfJiaTa,^ TrpdswTov Xaftftdveiv, Xoyi^earOai eU SiKaioavvrjv, and the like) ; cf. Gataker de Stylo N. T. cap. 5. Hence also 47 is exjilained why such Hebraistic turns of expression are less frequent in the original authors of the N. T. than in the translators of the O. T., and in the Hellenistic writers of the N. T. (Paul, Luke, particularly in the 1 A similar Grecism in Latin is e.g. a teneris ■unfjuicnh's (Cic. fam. 1, 6, 3), ■which although a Greek phrase was quite intelligible to the Romans, as e.g. Kapirhs xeiA.€a»>', though it must have had a strange sound, was unquestionably intelligible to the Greeks; cf. Kapirhs (ppevwy, Find. Nem. 10, 22. Still more easily must the Greeks have under- stood Kupirhs KoiKias, sinccjruit, by itself, (for fruit of the body) was used in unambig- uous connections, as well among the Greeks (Arist. polit. 7, 16 ; Eurip. Bacch. 1305), as elsewhere ; cf. Ruhnhen, ad Homer, in Cerer. 23. 2 Though even Josephus, when narrating Old Test, history after the Septuagint, does not always avoid Hebraisms ; see Scharfenherg, de Joseph! et LXX. consensu, in Pott't sylloge, VII. p. 306 if. 8 That is, in the signification of remitting sins, so far, therefore, as regards o^etA^/xara. For, acpievai remit, even applied to offences, occurs in Her. 6, 30, in the expression atpifvai alriav, and ocpeLK-fi/jLara acpievai debita remittere (obligatory acts), is quite common. In later Greek we find (KpUvat tivI r))v aSiKiav, Plutarch, Pomp. 34 ; see Coraes and Schdf. in loc. The well-known phrase evpia-Kfiv x*^/"" 'w^ould likewise have been under- stood by a native Greek, though it would have sounded strange to him (instead of fvplffKfaOou). 5 34 § 3- HEBREW-ARAMAIC TINGE OF N. T. DICTION. second part of the Acts, John, the author of the Epistle to tlie Hebrews ; of. Tholuck, Com. Cap. I, § 2. S. 25 sqq.) than in those more strictly Pal- estinean (Matthew, Peter) .^ And it is obvious, further, that not all the Hebraisms in the diction of the apostles were adopted unconsciously (van d. Honert, Synt. p. 103). Religious expressions — and of these the main portion of N. T. Hebraisms consist — they must have been influenced to retain by the circumstance that in these expressions their religious ideas themselves were embodied, and because Christianity had to be built on a 84 Jewish foundation.^ The existing Greek, too, possessed in fact no phrase- "'' ***• ology for the profound religious phaenomena which apostolic. Christianity disclosed.^ Still, it is an exaggeration to assert, with Eichhorn and Bret- schneider (Prefat. ad Lexic. N. T. ed. 2. II. p. 12),^ that the authors of the N. T. in composition did all their thinking in Hebrew or Aramaic. That is the process of a tyro. We moderns even, in writing Latin, after we have attained a certain proficiency, gradually (though never altogether) cease to think first in our vernacular. Men who, though not regularly gg trained in the study of language, were constantly hearing Greek spoken Jtbed. and very frequently, yes ordinarily, speaking it themselves, must soon have acquired such a command of its words and phrases and such skill in ex- pression, that in composition the Greek would present itself directly, and not solely through the medium of Hebrew or Syro-Chaldaic words and phrases.* The comparison of the authors of the N. T. with modern beginners in writing Latin, or even with (uneducated) Jews speaking ^ The Grecian trainings of individual writers appears particularly in the appropriate use of verlxi composila and dccomposita. 2 Cf. Beza, ad Act. x. 46. Eambach is not altogether wrong in saying (institutt. hermen. 1, 2, 2) : lingua N. T. passim ad ebraei sermonis indolera conformata est, ut hoc modo concentus scripturae utriusque test, non in rebus solum scd ipsis etiam in verbis clarius observaretur. Cf. Pfaff- nott. ad Matt. p. 34 ; Olear. 341 sqq. ; Tittmann, de dilig. gramm. p. 6 sq. (Synon. I. p. 201 sq.). Further cf. J. W. Schroder, de causis quare dictio pure gracca in N. T. plerumque praetermissa sit, Marb. 1768. 4to. ; also van Ilengel, com. in ep. ad Philipp. p. 19. 8 Some good remarks on this point are to be found in Hvalstroem, spec, de usu graeci- tatis alex. in N. T. (Upsal. 1794. 4to.) p. 6 sq. Van den Honert went even so far as to assert : vel ipse Demosthenes, si eandcm rem, quam nobis tradiderunt apostoli, debita perspicuitate et efficacia perscribere voluisset, hebraismorum usum evitare non potuisset. * The latter, however, recalled this opinion, so far at least as regards Paul (Grundlage des evang. Pietism, u. s. w. S. 179). s How easily do we, who never heard Latin spoken by a native Roman, attain the power of at once conceiving in Latin, dixit verum esse, or quam virtutem demonstravit aliis praestare, and the like, without iirst mentally construing dixit quod verum sit, or de qua virtute demonstravit, quod ea, etc. Thinking in conformity to the genius of one's mother tongue, appears particularly in phrases and figures which have become habitual, and which one introduces unconsciously in speaking or writing a foreign language. So it was with the apostles, who constantly employed, and with perfect pro- priety, along with many Hebraistic expressions, numerous Greek phrases entirely foreign ito the genius of Hebrew. § 4. GRAMMATICAL CHAEACTER OF THE N. T. DICTION. 35 German, is as incorrect as it is unworthy ; cf. ScUeiermacher, Hermeneut. S. 54, 59, 257. Besides, it is forgotten that the apostles found a Jewish- Greek idiom already current, and therefore did not first frame for them- selves most of their phraseology by thinking it out in Hebrew. (Many Greek words are used by the N. T. writers with a specific reference to the Christian system (even in contrast with Judaism), so to 48 speak, like religious technical terms. Hence arises, apparently, a third element of N. T. diction, viz. the distinctively Christian (see Olear. de Stylo N. T. p. 380 sqq. ed. Schwarz ; Eckard, technica sacra. Quedlinb. 1716. 4to.). Compare particularly the words Ipya (ipydlea-dai Rom iv. 4), Tr[(rTi<;, TTUTTeviLv €is Xptcrrov or Trurreveiv absol., ofMokoyia, SiKaLoavvrj and Succu- ovaOai, €K\ey€(T6aL, ol KkyjTol, 01 iKKtKToL, ol ayioi (for Christians), ol ttlotoL and ol a.TTL(TTOL, oiKoSoju,^ aud oLKohofjiuv in the figurative sense, d'jrocrToA.os, €vayyiXi^€cr6aL and icqpvmLv absol. for Christian preaching, the appropria- tion of fiaTTTiarfjia for Christian baptism, perhaps kXov . . . t6v . . . aprov 35 for the holy repasts (the Agape with the Communion), 6 koo-/ao9, tj (ra.p$, Ttlifd. 6 trapKiKo?, in the familiar theological sense, etc. Most of these expressions, however, already existed in the O. T. and in rabbinical writings.^ Accord- ingly it will not be easy to prove any phraseology to be altogether pecu- liar to the apostles — to have been introduced by them. This apostolic element, therefore, is restricted rather to the meaning and application of words and phrases, and lies on the very outskirts of the province of philo- logical inquiry. Cf., however, Schleiermacher, Hermeneut. S. 56, 67 f. 138 f. [and G. v. Zezschwitz, Profangracitiit u. biblisch. Sprachgeist. Eine Vorl. iib.diebibl. Umbildung hellenischer Begriffe, bes. der psychologfschen. Leipz. 1859. 8vo.]. In the historical vocabulary rrda-x^t-v to suffer, and 7rapa8i8ocr^ai to be delivered up, absol., had established themselves as tech- nical expressions for the last earthly fate of Jesus.) Grammatical Hebraisms will be discussed in the next section. § 4. GRAMMATICAL CHARACTER OF THE N. T. DICTION. 34 6died. As respects the grammatical character of the N.T. diction, those same two elements above mentioned may be distinctly traced. That is to say, here also the peculiarities of the N. T. phraseology arc, fundamentally, those of the later (common) Greek language, and consist more in certain forms of inflection than in syntactical combinations. With these are occasionally mingled (though far 1 To attempt to explain snch expressions in the Christian terminology of the apostles by quotations from Greek authors (cf. Krebs, observ. praef. p. 4) is extremely absurd. But, on the other hand, it is necessary to distinguish the diction of the apostles, far more tinged as it was with Old Testament pecnliarities, from the terminology of the Greek Church, which was constantly growing more and more peculiar. 36 § 4. GRAMMATICAL CHARACTER OF THE N. T. DICTION. less copiously) Hebrew turns and constructions in the use of all the parts of speecli. A predilection for prepositions where the Greeks employ cases alone is especially noticeable. In general tlie grammatical character of the N. T. idiom conforms to the laws of the Greek hmguage ; the authors of the N. T. have even adopted many constructions pecuHarly Greek (attraction of the relative and the preposition), and have observed strictly, though as by mere instinct, ]iumerous distinctions entirely foreign to Hebrew (e.g. that between the negatives ov and firj, etc.). 49 We find it true in Greek, as in almost all languages the history of whose growth can be traced, that changes produced by time are lexical in their nature far more than grammatical (compare, for instance, the German of Luther's translation of the Bible with that of the present day). For the 36 later common Greek exhibits but few grammatical peculiarities, and these 'th ti almost all relate to inflections. We find, that is to say, first and foremost, a number of inflections in nouns and verbs which either were not used at all previously, and were first formed in later times by the abbreviation or the extension of the original forms, or which pertained exclusively to some one of the dialects. Of the latter sort are, for example, a. Attic inflections : TiOiacn, r^PovX-qOrjv , rjfXfXXe, ySovXct (jSovXr]), oij/eL; b. Doric : rj At/xds as fem., ^TO) (Iotcd), a«i vernacular with Greek constructions. (Such mixture of constructions would be far easier to a German in speaking Latin or French.) Besides, every one makes the grammatical laws of a foreign language his own, more easily than he does its store of words and phrases and its general idiomatic peculiarities (cf. Schleiermacher, Hevmeneut. *S. 73). This is so because the rules of syntax are but few in comparison with the number of words and phrases, and because these rules too (especially the principal ones, which are fundamental to accurate, not elegant, composition) by oral intercourse are hx more frequently brought before the mind. The Jews, therefore, must have been able readily to acquire such a mastery of the grammatical rules of the Greek then current — which by no means possessed all the niceties of Attic — as sufficed for their simple mode of communicating their thoughts. Even the Seventy have succeeded for the most part in recasting Hebrew constructions into accurate Greek.^ Only a few vernacular idioms of frequent occurrence, and not at variance with the rules of Greek Grammar, have been retained to the letter (such as instead of the Optat. an interrogative clause expressing a wish, 2 Sam. 3g XV. 4, Ti's fte KaracTTijo-ei KpiT-qv ; xxiii. 15; Num. xi. 29; Deut. v. 26;6thei xxviii. 67 ; Cant. viii. P), or, where it could be done, rendered in accord- ance at least with Greek analogy (as, ^avarw airoOavdaOe Gen. iii. 4, ma "(iinBr) Deut. xx. 17; 1 Sam. xiv. 39 ; Isa. xxx. 19) or by a construction already usual in Greek (see, however, § 45, 8), Judg. xv. 2 fiiawv i/j-ia-rjcras for nxra xbia. Gen. xliii. 2; Ex. xxii. 17; xxiii. 26; 1 Sam. ii. 25, etc.; 1 Certain Greek idioms became quite habitual to them, such as the article with qual- ifying words and phrases after a noun (6 Kvpios 6 iv ohpavS, and the like), the attraction of the relative, etc. Negatives, also, they almost always distinguish correctly. The more extended use of the Greek cases is exhibited by the better translators, as e.g. Gen, xxvi. 10, iJiiKpov iKoifx-fid-n it vxinted little that, etc. 2 Cf. Rom. vii. 24, where Fr. adduces similar instances from Greek poets. The con- struction with irws {iv) followed by the Optat. or Subjunct. is discussed by Schaefer, ad Soph. Oed. Col. p. 523, and Melet. p. 100. 38 § 4. GRAMMATICAL CHARACTER OF THE N. T. DICTION. cf. also Inf. with tov} Hebrew constructions thoroughly repugnant to the genius of the Greek, the Septuagint have usually rejected. For instance, the Fern, for the Neut. occurs only in a few passages, where the translators have not duly adverted to the meaning of the text, or have given it a nervously literal rendering ; as, Ps. cxix. 50 ; cxviii. 23 ; * and it is hardly 38 allowable to suppose that they designedly employed it for the Neut. In 7th ei other passages the Heb. Fem. refers manifestly to a feminine subject indi- 61 cated in the context ; as, Judges xix. 30. On the other hand, cv Tavrr) in Neh. xiii. 14 is probably equivalent to Tavrr) in Greek authors, in this respect, hoc in genere (Xen. Cyr. 8, 8, 5) or therefore (cf. raim; on propterea quod, Xen. Anab. 2, 6, 7) ; see also 1 Sam. xi. 2. The construction of Hebrew verbs with prepositions is imitated oftenest ; as, ^ctSco-^ai cTrt rivi Deut. vii. 16, or ctti rtva Ezek. vii. 4, oLKohofi^iv Iv tlvi Neh. iv. 10 (a •^53)? iTrepwrav iv Kvpiio (HitT^a ^^^) 1 Sam. X. 22, evhoKiZv €V tlvi (a I'Eri Fr. Rom. II. 371). These imitations sound harsh in Greek, it must be confessed, yet in that flexible idiom they might find some point of affinity. (Cf. the Germ, bauen an etwas, fragen hei, etc.) Even, however, if the Septuagint contained numerous other slavish imitations of Hebrew constructions, that would prove nothing in reference to the N. T. idiom. For, as has already been said, the style of these translators who, moreover, adhered for the most part with rigid exactness to the very letter of the Hebrew, — which sometimes indeed they did not even understand, — was by no means the model followed by the Jews in original composition or conversation. So far as regards the several rules of grammar, the N. T. is written thoroughly in Greek, and the few un- doubted grammatical Hebraisms it contains become hardly discernible. 37 To Hebraisms of this sort may be referred, with more or less assurance,' Ithed. the use of prepositions where the Greeks employ cases alone {airoicpvirTCLv Tt air 6 Tivos, icrOuLv air 6 tmv ij/l^lo)v, d^wos aTro tov atyu.aTos, Koivwvos (V TivL, a.pi(TK€Lv and TrposKvvciv ivoiTTLov Tivos, euSoKctv and OtXeiv Iv tivl). Many such peculiarities, how-ever, pertain to antique simplicity, and are accord- ingly in use among the Greeks themselves, especially the poets, and con- 1 Hemsterhuis, ad Lucian. dial. mar. 4, 3 : saepenumero contingit, ut locutio quaedam native graeca a LXX. interpretib. ct N. T. scriptoribus mutata pauhilum potestate ad hebraeam apte exprimendam adhibeatur. 2 The translation of the Psalms is, in general, one of the most heedless. That of Nehemiah is little better. Aquila, who translated word for word (absurdly rendering for instance, the nota ace. TX by arvv), cannot be taken into consideration at all in an inquiry into the grammatical character of Hellenistic Greek. In order to give a literal translation he violates without hesitation the rules of grammar; as. Gen. i. 5, iKaKta-fy 6 Ofhs Ti^ (pwrl r]fji.4pa. And yet he always uses the article with propriety, and even em- ploys the attraction of the relative ; so deeply were both rooted in the Greek language ! 8 Imaginary Hebraisms are, the supposed Plur. excelL, the a essentiae, combinations erroneously regarded as circumlocutions for the superlative like ad\iriy^ rov deov, the use of the Fem. for the Neut., and probably the Hypallage already mentioned ra pijfjLaTa TTJs ^wTJs ravrr)s for ravra ri p'l\fMra ttjs C(er\s. § 4. GRAM.;rATICAL CHARACTER OF THE N. T. DICTION. 39 eequently do not exactly conflict with the genius of the language ; as, iravetv ciTro tivo?. Special and more decided instances are : a. The verbal imitation of such Hebrew constructions as offend against Greek propriety ; as, o/xoXoyeiv ev tlvl, pXe-rreiv airo sibi cavere a, Trpos^Otro Tre/xi/'at, el SoO-qaiTai. as a form of negatory oath ; b. The repetition of a word to denote distribution, as 8vo Bvo Mm, instead of ava 8vo ; 0. The imitation of the Inf. absol. (see above) ; d. The use of the Gen. of an abstract noun for the kindred adjective, and probably the very frequent use of the Inf. with a preposition (and its 52 subject in the Ace.) in narration. The peculiarities classed under a. and b. may be regarded as pure Hebraisms. When, however, it is considered that by far the majority of construc- tions in the N. T. are genuine Greek, and that the N. T. writers have constantly employed such peculiarities of Greek s}Titax ' as differed entirely 39 from their vernacular idiom, — as the distinction of the different past 7th «d. tenses, the use of av with verbs, the attraction of the relative, such an expression as oIkovoixmv Trema-TevixaL, the use of the Sing, with Neuters, etc., — we shall not be disposed to join in the cry about countless gram- matical Hebraisms in the N. T, That the diction of the N. T. is grammat- ically far less Hebraistic than that of the Septuagint and the Palestinean Apocrypha, as might naturally be expected, will be manifest, if, when the expressions just specified as Hebraistic are observed in the Septuagint, it is also noticed that many a vernacular idiom in the LXX. never occurs in the N. T., or (such as an interrogative clause for the Opt.) only in soli- tary cases in impassioned style. A circumlocution for the Fut., as tcro/mai StSdvat Tob. V. 14, or the repetition of a substantive to denote every (Num. ix. 10 ; 2 Kings xvii. 29 ; 1 Chron. ix. 27), never occurs there.^ The N. T. writers considered separately exhibit extremely few purely 3g grammatical peculiarities. Only the book of Rev. requires particular, 6th ei though not exceptional, attention in a treatise on the grammar of the N. T. Finally, throughout the investigation into the grammatical character of the N. T. diction, it is obvious that the diversity of readings must be care- fully attended to ; on the other hand, it is also plain that verbal criticism can be successfully practised only in connection with a thorough acquain- tance with the linguistic (lexical) peculiarities of the several N. T. writers. 1 The more refined elegances of literary Attic are not to be found in the N. T., partly because they were unknown in the popular lansruage adopted by the N. T. writers, partly because they were unsuited to the simple cast of thought of the sacred authors. 2 Yet in the better translated portions of the O. T. and in the Palestin. Apocrj'pha we find single Greek constructions, on the other hand, instead of which the authors of the N. T. use the corresponding Hebraisms; thus, in 3 Esr. vi. 10; Tob. iii. 8, the Gen. is used with strict Grecian propriety. Further, cf. Thiersch, de Pentat. alex. p. 9.5 sq. iZ. PART II. 39 6th ed. 53 THE GRAMMATICAL FORMS AS RESPECTS THEIR FORMATION. (INFLECTION.) § 5. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOGRAPHIC PRINCIPLES. 1. The best manuscripts of the N. T. (like those of the Greek classics, see Poppo, Time. I. 214 ; Mtth. I. 133) exhibit extraor- dinary variations of orthography, especially in regard to particular words and forms. Amid such diversity it cannot always be de- termined on satisfactory grounds what is correct. However, editors of the text should lay down precise rules, sluR carry them out consistently. Though the various Codd. have recently been collated with greater diplomatic exactness, still, on many points, a more careful settlement of the facts is to be desired. We submit the following remarks: a. The use of an apostrophe to prevent a hiatus is of much rarer occurrence in the Codd. of the N. T, and of the Sept., than in the texts of native Greek authors (especially the orators ; cf. G. B. Benseler, de hiatu in scriptorib. gr. P. I. Friberg. 1841. 8vo. ; the same, de hiatu in Demosth. Friberg. 1847. 4to.) : a/xa, apa, apa, 76, €fie, eVt, iva, m<;t€, never suffer elision of the last vowel ; Be (before dv') and ovSe very seldom (Matt, xxiii. 16 and 18 ; xxiv. 21 ; Rom. ix. 7 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 21 ; Heb. viii. 4 ; Luke x. 10 ; 2 Cor. iii. IG ; xi. 21 ; Phil. ii. 18 ; 1 John ii. 5 ; iii. 17). Only / the prepositions airo, 8td, inl, irapd, /xerd, and the conjunction f dXKd. regularly suifer elision, the former particularly before pro- nouns and in phrases of frequent occurrence, as dir dpxv'^, etc. ; dvTL only in dv6' wv. Yet the manuscripts vary in those cases, and even the best in particular passages, especially in regard to aXKd. Thus the Cod. Alex. [Sin.] and some others, have in xVcts Xxvi. 25 dXKa d\r}d6La<; ; vii. 39 dWa dircoaapro ; 2 Pet. ii. 5 dWa §5. ORTHOGRArHY AXD ORTHOGRAPHIC PRINCIPLES. 41 078001;. The best Codd. have 2 Cor. xii. 14 aXKa vfm^, and Gal. iv. 7 dXKa vi6<;. So also the authority of manuscripts is in favor of, Luke ii. 36 fiera uv8p6€iX€Tr]^ the best Codd. have ^(/aeo^etXeri^s Luke vii. 41 ; § 5. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOGRAPHIC PRINCIPLES. 45 xvL 5, which Zouaras rejects, and it occurs only once in the MSS. of Greek authors ; see Lob. Phryn. p. 691. 14. The rough mutes for the smooth in l<^tSe Acts iv. 29, and di^tSw Phil. ii. 23, Lchm. has already adopted on the authority of MSS. Other similar forms are i(f> iXvLSL 1 Cor. ix. 10; d^eATrt^ovres Luke vi. 35; ov^ oij/eaOe Luke xvii. 22 ; ovx 'louSatKws Gal. ii. 14 ; ovx dA.tyos Acts xii. 18, etc., (cf. Bornem. Acta, p. 24). Analogous forms occur in the Sept. 58 (Sturz, dial. Alex. p. 127) and in Greek inscriptions (Bockh, Liscript. L 301, and II. 774), and are explained by the fact that many of those words, as eXTTis, ISecv, had been pronounced with the digamma. 15. Ilpais and TrpavTr)» Lob. path. p. 47) Lchm. has already received into the text, agreeably to the best Codd. 2. Whether such words as Bia rl, iva ri, Blu 76, dWd 76, utt aprc, TovT ecTTi, slioiild be written separate or united, can liardly be determined on any general principle ; and the matter is of the less moment as the best Codd. themselves vary extremely. Knapp has printed most such words combined ; and, in fact, two small words in expressions of frequeut recurrence are wout readily to blend thus in pronunciation (as the erases in Blo, Siori, Kadd, &)9Te, 44 also fMr]K6TL and others, show). Schulz, on the contrary, defends 6"! ei their separation. Would he write also et 76, rot vvv, ovk ere, etc. ? How much the Codd. in tlie main favor their junction may be seen from Poppo, Time. I. p. 455. Schulz himself, too, has printed Bia'7ravT6ci) Eph. V. 12, cf. Xen. conv. 5, 8, and elKi) (Bttm. II. 342) have been received into the N. T. text ; cf. Poppo, Thuc, II. I. 150. Lchm. still writes \d6pa, though \ddpa is more correct ; Schneider, Plat, civ. I. p. 61 praef. ; Ellendt, lex. Soph. II. p. 3 sq. Lastly, f. Since Lchm. d6a)ov stands in the text of the N. T. Matt, xxvii. 4, 24 {uOcoiov, Elmsley, Eurip. Med. 1267), cf. also Weber, 1 Cf. Vig. p. 220. See also Gregor. Choerobosc. Dictata ed. Gaisford, torn. II. p. 721. Yet see Hm. Vig. 748. 48 § 5. ORTHOGEAPHY AND ORTHOGRAPHIC PRINCIPLES. Demosth. p. 231 ; but contrary to all tradition, Lob. pathol. graec. serm. p. 440,^ After the example of Bekker and others, Lchm. began, in the larger edition of his N. T., to reject the breathings over double p as useless ; but he has found no followers [except Tdf. ed. vii.]. That the Romans also heard an aspiration in the middle of words is clear from the orthography of Pyrrhus, Tyrrhenus, etc. Bttm. I. S. 28. Still less can one bring one's self to omit the breathing also over p at the beginning of a word, as some 61 do; see in opposition Rost, Gramm. S. 17 f. [or, as Lchm. does,, to mark with a smooth breathing the first p in words the first two syllables of wliich begin with p ; see in opposition Gottling, Accentl. p. 205]. The Alexandrians (Sturz, dial. Alex. p. 116 sqq.) had, as it is admitted, their pecubar Greek orthography, which not only interchanged letters (as ai and €L, € and t], i and «, cf. et8ea Matt, xxviii. 3, y and *c), but even added superfluous ones, to strengthen the forms of words ; as, iK-^Oht ySao-tXf'av, vvKTav^ (f>Odwetv, (K)(yvv6fjievov, eo-o-Treipf, ava(3aLvvov, ■^XXaro (Acts xiv. 10 ; vii. 26 ; cf. Poppo, Thuc. I. 210). On the other hand, necessary 48 letters (when doubled) they rejected ; as, Svo-e/Sr^?, adfiam, avraAay/xa, piov^ (TvvKdXvfx.ixa, avvprjTelvf crvvirviyeiv, a-vviJiaOr]T-^<;, Trivirei. These peculiarities are found, partly in good MSS. of the Sept. and of the N. T. (Tdf. praef. ad N. T. p. 20 sq. [ed. vii. p. 46 sqq.]) which are said to have been executed in Egypt, e.g. Cod. Alex., [Cod. Sin.], Cod. Vatic, Cod. Ephraem. (ed. Tdf. p. 21), Cod. Cantabr., Cod. Claromont. (Tdf. prolegg. ad cod. Clarom. p. 18), Cod. Cypr. (see Hug, Einleit. 1. S. 238, 242, 244, 245, 247, 249, 254 ; Scholz, curae crit. in hist, text, evangg. pp. 40, 61) ; partly in Coptic and Graeco-Coptic documents (see Hug. 1. 239), with more or less uniformity. They cannot, therefore, be dismissed as but caprices of the copyists, as Planck thinks (de orat. N. T. indole, p. 25, note), especially as for many of them analogies can be adduced from the older dialects. At the same time, many of them are not specially Alexandrian, as the like occur in Codd. of Greek authors, and in Greek inscriptions, that cannot be traced to an Egyptian origin ; as, e.g. 47 ct for t, €y for eK, (on X'^/xi^op.ai cf. the Ion. kajx^ofxai Mtth. 609) ; and, on 6tlieAthe other hand, many Egyptian documents are tolerably free from the peculiarities in question. Lchm. and Tdf., on the concurrent testimony of good (but for the most part few) Codd. in Matt. xx. 10 ; xxi. 22 ; Mark xii. 40 ; Luke xx. 47 ; 1 The spelling t^6v (Wessel, Her. 2, 68), Cyo". which Jacobs, in Aelian. animal., re- cently adopted on the authority of a good Cod., nobody will be disposed to introduce into the N. T. ; still less a<^C*"'- Cf. Lob. pathol. p. 442. §6. ACCENTUATION. 49 Acts i. 2, 8, 11, 22; Jas. i. 7; Mark i. 27 ; 2 Cor. vii. 3; Phil. ii. 25, etc. (sometimes without giving authorities, Matt. xix. 29 ; John xvi. 14; 1 Cor. iii. 14; Phil. iii. 12 ; Rom. vi. 8, etc.), have received these forms into the text. Without more convincing proof, however, than what has been produced by Tdf. praef. ad. N.T. p. 19 [ed. vii. p. 45] all the peculi- arities of the Alex, dialect, and in particular of the Alex, orthography, should not be attributed to Palestinean writers, (as John, Paul, James) ; and it is improbable that the N. T. writers should have followed that orthography only in comparatively few instances.* Besides, Cod. B in reference to this point has not yet beeil thoroughly collated. According to what Tdf. has said, as above, p. 21, he might have been expected to adopt such forms more frequently. The introduction, therefore, of this orthography into the text of the N.T. — if editors choose to imitate on such points the Codd., even in edi- tions intended for general use — must undergo renewed and thorough consideration ; and at the same time the question may be raised, whether 62 this orthography was not a mode of spelling adopted by the learned rather ^g than the actual pronunciation of the people, somewhat as in Roman in- 7th ed scriptions (Schneider, lat. Grammat. I. II. 530 f., 543 f., 566 f. etc.) we find adferre, inlatus, and the like, written according to the etymology. § 6. ACCENTUATION, [^j 1. The a ccentuation of the t ext of the N. T . is to be regulated, not so much by the authority of the oldest accented Codd. [to which Lipsius, as above, has attached too much unportancej , as by the esta blished ti:aditi on of the grammaria ns ; though much still re- mains doubtful, and, in the minute researches of later critics, attempts have sometimes been made to introduce subtil ties. We select the following observations : a. According to the ancient grammarians (Moeris, p. 193), I8e should be written IBi in Attic autliors only, and tiSe in the remain- ing (later) writers ; just as Xa/Se and Xd^e are distinguished, Weber, Demosth. p. 173, cf. Bttm. I. 448. Griesb. has so printed (except in Gal. v. 2), and Lchm. everywhere. According to Bornem.'s conjecture (Rosenmiiller, exeg. Repert. II. 267), the word should be written ISe when it occurs as an Imper. followed by an Ace. (Rom. xi. 22), and iBe when it is merely an exclamation. It is preferable, however, to follow the ancient grammarians. 1 Of many words, as (rvWaixfidveiv, av\Xa\f7y, avfifioiMov, avfiirlirretv, no such form at all has been observed ; of others, as avWfyeiv, (TvyKa\uv, avffTavpovv, iyKdKftv, only in single passages. [■- Cf. Lipsius, gramm. Unterss. iib. d. bibl. Gracitat. S. 14 fF. S. 33 fF.] 7 50 §6- ACCENTUATION. b. Numerals compounded with ero? should have the accent on the penult, according to the ancient grammarians (Thom. M. 859; 48 Moschopul. in Sched.), when they are used of time; m every other 6th wl. case, on the last. Hence Acts vii. 23 T€arcrapaKovTaeri]<; 'xpovo^, and Acts xiii. 18 rea-aapaKovraeTq '^povov : on the other hand, eKarov- raeri]^, Rom. iv. 19 (cf. Jacobs, Anthol. III. p. 251, 253). This distinction, however, is not observed in the MSS., and the whole rule is doubtful, see Lob. 406 sq. Ammonius, p. 136, exactly re- verses the distinction ; see Bremi, Aeschin. Ctesiph. 369, ed, Goth. c. Some would have Kr'ipv^ and (poivi^ accented Krjpv^ and ^olvt^ (see Schiif. Gnora. p. 215 sq. and Soph. Philoct. 562, cf. Ellendt, Lexic. Soph. I. 956 sq.) on the ground that, according to ancient grammarians, the v and i (in the Norn. Shig.) were pronounced 63 short (Bckkcr, Anccd. III. 1429). Hm., Soph. Oed. R. p. 145, rejects this as contrary to all analogy. Yet it is a question whether in later Greel<; the acccntuatio.i Kijpv^, 7 hi vfiCjv to vat val Kal to ov ov, 1 Cor. xv. 47 o irpaJTos a.vOpujTro<: c/c y^s xoik6<;, Heb. V. 1 2 6<^€lA.ovt€s eti/ai 8iSd(jKaA,ot Sto. tov )(p6vov TraXtr y^piiav fx^^* ''^^^ StSao-KCti/ v/xa?, J no. v. 5 t^v tis dvOp(DTroa 1 Cor. i. 12, SuTam Mark i. 13 ; 2 Thess. ii. 9, 'E7raxf>pa Col. i. 7.^ Likewise those ending in unaccented av make the Gen. in a ; as, Kald^a Jno. xviii. 13, "Auva Luke iii. 2, 'Apera 2 Cor. xi. 32 (Joseph, antiqq. 17, 3, 2 ; 18, 5, 1), Bapvd^a Gal. ii. 1 ; Col. iv. 10, 'A'yplTTTra'^ Acts xxv. 23 ; cf. Joseph, antiqq. 16, 2, 3 ; 16, 6, 7 ; 20, 7, 1, etc. (^SiTuL Joseph, vit. 17, Mardeia Acta apocr. p. 133), ^lovBa often. The same form in proper names is often used by Attic authors ; as, Mow/ca Xen. An. 1, 5, 4, Twfipva Xen. C.5,2,14, Kopbdra Theocr. 5, 150 a., cf. Georgi, Hierocr. I. 156 ; Krii. 42 ; Ellendt, Arrian. Al. I. 83 ; V. Fritzsche, Aristoph. I. 566 ; and on Boppd, Luke xiii. 29, Rev. xxi. 13, especially Bttm. 1. 147, 199 ; Bekker, Anecd. III. 1186. 1 So also @wfia. in the Act. Thom., Aovku Euseb. H. E. 3, 24, 'Ep/xa Euseb. 3, 3. 2 On the other hand, we find occasionally 'Aypiirirov in Joseph, (antt. 18, 7, 1 and 2 ; 18, 8, 8, etc.) and Euseb. H. E. 2, 19. Codd. of Xenoph. also vary between Tw^pvov and Tte^pia. § 8. RARE FORMS OF FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 61 On the otlier hand, thoss in aayr], ToXyoOa, 'Pafxa. B-qOafiapa Juo. i. 28 would not come under this head, since Origen uses it as a Neut. Plur. ; recent editors have printed iv B-qOavLo. AvSSa is unquestionably inflected as 74 feminine in Acts ix. 38 (AvSSj;?), on the other hand in vs. 32 and 35 Av88a as Neut. Ace. has respectable Codd. in its favor ; cf. my R W. II. 30. "Words in apxo^ * commonly follow in the N. T. and later Greek the first declension, and end in ap^s ; ^ as, TraTpidpxqs Heb. vii. 4, Plur. Acts vii. 8, 9, coll. 1 Chron. xxvii. 22, rcrpapx^s Matt. xiv. 1 ; Luke iii. 19 ; ix. 7, coll. Joseph, antiqq. 18, 7, 1, Tcrpapxai Euseb. H. E. 1, 7, 4 ; TroXtrap;^? Acts xvii. 6 ; iOvdpxifs 2 Cor. xi. 32, coll. 1 Mace. xiv. 47, i6vdpx[i 1 Mace. XV. 1, 2, iOvdpxrp' Joseph, antiqq. 17, 11, 4, l6vdpxo.<; Euseb. Const. 1, 8; axndp)(r)^, hence do-tap^^^wv Acts xix. 31, and daLdpxr]v Euseb. H. E. 4, 15, 11 (Asiarcha, Cod. Theodos. 15, 92) ; exaTovrdp;^; Acts x. 1, 22 ; xxi. 32 ; xxii. 26, coll. Joseph, b. j. 3, 6, 2, iKaTovrdpyrj Acts xxi v. 23 ; xxvii. 31 ; Matt. viii. 13 where, however, a few Codd. have cKaTovTap;(a), just as in Joseph, b. j. 2, 4. 3, kKarovrapxov is found besides iKaTovrdpxrjv. On the other hand, kKarovTapxp'i occurs almost without var. iij the following pas- sages : Matt. viii. 5, 8 ; Luke vii. 6 ; Acts xxii. 25 ; (the Gen. Sing. Luke vii. 2, and Plur. Acts xxiii. 23, the former with the same accent and the latter with a circumflex on the last, may be cases of kKarovrdpxq'i also). 1 The MSS. even of ancient Greek authors vary, indeed, between apxos and apxv^, but later critics, in them, give the form apxoi the preference ; cf. Bornem. Xen. conv. 1,4; Poppo, Xen. Cyrop. 2, 1, 22, p. 109. This also corresponds best with the etymology (from apxos). So r6irapxos, Aeschyl. Choeph. 662. Tvixvatriipxv^, however, is un- doubtedly the correct reading in Acschin. Tim. ed. Bremi I. 2.3. 2 That this was the predominant termination in the Apostolic age appears further from the circumstance that the Romans in rendering such words into Latin gave to them this or a similar form, when they might just as well have chosen the form in archus. Hence Tetrarches, Hirt. bell. Alex. c. 67 ; Liv. epitom. 94 ; Horat. serm. 1 , 3, 12 ; Lucan. 7, 227 ; Alaharches, Cic. Attic. 2, 17; Juven. Satir. 1, 130 ; Toparcha, Spartian. in Ha- drian. 13 ; Patriarcha, Tertull. de anim. c.7, 55, and elsewhere. Cf. Schdf. Demosth. IL A51. Byzantine authors still more fully attest the predominance of this form. 62 § 8. RARE FORMS OF FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. Finally, for a-TpaToiriBdpxr] Acts xxviii. 16 (Const. Man. 4412, etc.) the better Codd. have o-TpaTOTreSapp^w. Elsewhere, besides, in the Greek Bible and in authors of the first Christian centuries we find the following vouchers 61 for the form apxr]^ '• yeve(ndp)(r]<; Wisd. xiii. 3, Kw/xoipx^s Esth. ii. 3, KVTrpidpxrj^ ithed. 2 Mace. xii. 2, roTrdpxn^ Gen. xli. 34 ; Dan. iii. 2, 3 ; vi. 7 ; Euseb. H. E. 1, 13, 3, 6Laa-dpxrjs Lucian. peregr. 11, fj.€pdpxq^ Arrian. Tact. p. 30, aKay- ydpxr}<: ibid. p. 30, elXdpxf]<: ibid. p. 50, cAe^avrap;^? 2 Mace. xiv. 12; 3 Mace. V. 4, 45, d\al3dpxq«i (cf. also KA.€i8tV Const. Porph. 14, 208). Note 2. In several passages in good MSS. TrXoirro?, contrary to general usage, is used as Neuter, Eph. ii. 7; iii. 8, 16; Phil. iv. 19; Col. ii. 2 (Acta apocr. p. 76), a peculiarity probably originating in the language of the people, as the modern Greeks use indiscriminately both to ttAovtos and 6 ttAoutos, see Coray, Plutarch, vit. II. p. 58 ; Isocr. II. 103, 106. In the same way we find to ^tjXos 2 Cor. ix. 2 in Codd. B [and Sin.] ; Phil. iii. 6 in A B [Sin.] (Clem. ep. p. 17 Ittig.) and perhaps to ^^os Luke xxi. 25, (if the Gen. be accented i]xov<;, as it is by Lchm.), according to good Codd., 62 as Malal. p. 121, 436. Compare in later writers, to kXciSos Theophan. 6th e4 contin. ed. Bekker, p. 222 ; see, in general, Benseler, Isocr. Areopag. p. 106. On the other hand, we find in later writers o Scittvos Luke xiv. 16 B D; see Hase, ad Leon. Diac. p. 239 ; Schaf. ind. Aesop, pp. 128, 163 ; Boisson. Herod. Epim. p. 22, and Anecd. I. 51 ; and o tcixos Ducae p. 266 Bonn.; Acta apocr. p. 84. The heteroclite o-koto^ (Poppo, Thuc. I. 225) 6b § 10 FOREIGi^ AND INDECLINABLE WORDS. is found only once as Masc. (Heb. xii. 18 o-kotw, but not certain), else always Neut. (arKOTovs, o-kotci) without a single var. noted. As to eXeos, which the Sept. sometimes use as Masc. (so too Philo I. 284), in N. T. MSS. the Neut. predominates (var. only Matt. ix. 13 ; xii. 7 ; xxiii. 23 ; Tit. iii. 5 ; Heb. iv. 16). &oLfx(3o<; has, Acts iii. 10, Gen. dd/xfSov in C. Note 3. The MSS. have several instances of v subjoined to the Ace. Sing, in a or ■^ (iXTriSav, avyyevrjv, cf. Sturz, dial. alex. p. 127 ; Lob. paralip. p. 142), as Matt. ii. 10 aa-repav, Codd. [Sin! and] Ephr. Jno. xx. 25, ^eipav Cod. Alex., and in same Cod. Rev. xii. 13 apaevav, xiii._14 ciVoVav, xxii. 2 firjvav, Acts xiv. 12 AtW according to several Codd., and Rom. xvi. 11 o-vYYcvrjv, Heb. vi. 19 aacfiaXrjv (this also in Codd. Ephr. and Cantab.) ; Rev. i. 13 iroBrjprjv. Likewise in the Byzantine writers we find similar forms (see Lidex to Leo Grammat. p. 532 ; Boisson. anecd. V. 102), as also in the Apocr. (Tdf. de evaug. apocr. p. 137), and in Rev. Lchm. has received into the text the forms quoted above. This subjoined v is probably not to be considered, witli Ross, as an original termination (transmitted in the popular speech), but as an arbitrary extension of the v usual in the Ace. of many sorts of words (Mtth. 208), Lob. paralip. as above. In adjectives of two terminations in 175, this form is said to be Aeolic, Mtth. 289. More- over, see also Bornem. on Acts as above. 79 § 10. FOREIGN WORDS AND WORDS WHICH ARE INDECLINABLE. 1. In the case of certain Hellenized Oriental names the Sept. and the N. T. writers have introduced a simple mode of inflection, gc according to which the Gen., Dat., and Voc. coincide for the most 7th ed. part in one and the same form, and the Ace. is designated by v. To this class of nouns belong the following : 'l7]aov<;, Gen. 'Irjaov Matt. xxvi. 69, Dat. 'Irjaov Matt. xxvi. 17,^ Voc. 'Irjaov Mark i. 24, Ace. 'Irjaovv Matt. xxvi. 4 ; Acts xx. 21. Aevt or Aevtu)VTos). But the better MSS. have SoXoyaoJi/os, 2oA.o- fxiova, see Wetsten. L 228 ; and this, being according to analogy and also the received form in Joseph, ed. Havercamp, deserves probably to be admitted into the text, since the termination wv, wvtos implies derivation from a participle (Bttm. I. 169; Lob. paralip. 347). But then we must - write in the Nom. (not 2oXo/xuiv, as Lchm. even has printed, but) 2oA.(>/xwv 80 agreeably to the better authorities, ^ like Ba^uA.oij', etc. (cf. also Puppelb. Cod. Diez. p. 9). Iloo-ctSaiv (Iloo-ciSaJvos), being contracted from Iloo-ctSawv, is not analogous. In the Sept. 'S.oXofxwv is indeclinable ; see 1 Kings iv. 7, 29 ; V. 12, 15, 16 ; vi. 18, and elsewhere. 2. Many Hebrew proper names which might have been inflected according to the 3d Decl. are used in the Sept. and in the N. T. as indeclinable ; e.g. ^Aapcov Gen., Heb. vii. 11 ; ix. 4 ; Dat.,Exod. 66 vii. 9 ; Acts vii. 40 ; Ace, Exod. vii. 8 ; cf. in particular Matt. i. '^^'^ and Luke iii. 23 sqq. ; besides Sufiecov Luke iii. 30, HaKfKov Luke iii. 32, Kehpoiv Jno. xviii. 1 var. So 'Upix^, Gen. Deut. xxxii. 49 ; Matt. XX. 29; Heb. xL 30; Ace, Luke x. 30; xviii. 35 (Glyc. p. 304).2 ' l6povaa\7]/jL, for which, however, in Matt. Mark and Jno. the Grecized form ' lepoaoXviia might on the authority of MSS. be preferred, which is regularly declined as Neut., Matt. iv. 25 ; 64 Mark iii. 8 ; Luke xxiii. 7 ; Jno. ii. 23. It is Femimne only in •>"'«i 1 In Glycas Bekker has had printed, even in the new edition, "ZoKonwvros, 'ZoXofjLoivra, but for the Nom. 'S.oKondtv. 2 Elsewhere, on the other hand, we find a twofold mode of declining the word : o. Gen. 'Upixov 3 Esr. v. 44, Dat. 'Upixv Procop. de aedif. 5, 9; Theodoret. V. p. 81, Hal., or 'Upixoii Joseph, b. j. 1, 21, 4. Suid. under " apiyivi)s ; and b. from 'UpiKovs (Ptol. 5, 16, 7), Gen. 'UpiKovmos Strabo 16, 763, Ace. 'UpiKovvra 16, 760, and usually in Josephus. k 68 § 11- INFLECTION AND COMPAKISON OF ADJECTIVES. Matt. ii. 3 (iii. 5 ?). The Sept. has only the form 'le^jovaaXrjfi; Josepli., on the contrary, ' lepoaoXv/xa. To irda'xa, Luke ii. 41 ; Jno. ii. 23 ; as in Sept.^ So also (to) aUepa Luke i. 15, and in Sept. Lev. x. 9 ; Num. vi. 3 ; Isa. xxiv. 9, etc. (Euseb. praep. ev. 6, 10, has Gen. o-t/cepo?) .^ The Hebrew Plural termination occurs only in Heb. ix. 5, Xe/jou/St/A ; this word, however, as in the Sept., is construed as Neut. (Geu. iii. 24 ; 1 Kings viii. 7 ; Ezek. x. 3, etc.) like irvev^iara. J^ Also in Rev._j. 4 a whole phrase (the Greek equivalent for ti'Hi) is treated as indeclinable : otto 6 wi/ koX 6 rjv xai 6 ip)(6fjL€vo<;, perhaps with design (as the name of the immutable One) like cv, fjirjOiv, etc. in Greek philosophical writings, even in Aristot. e.g. polit. 5, 3 ; Procl. theol. Plat. 2. ed. Hoeschel /Acra tot) h, ;(wpis tov ev (Stollberg, de soloecis. N. T. p. 14 sqq.). On the other hand, in Creuzer's edition of the writings of Proclus we find invariably ck tov evds, ev tw Ivi. Cf. also tov 6 Beiva, Schaf. Demosth. III. 282. 81 §11. INFLECTION AND COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 1. Adjectives of three terminations, particularly those in to?, /ito9, 6topdvdr} Acts ii. 26 (from Sept.). Cf. generally Bttm. I. 321 ; Poppo, Thuc. I. 227, also Lehm. Lucian II. p. 456. Evay- " 7eXi^. has the Augm. after eu, and that without var. Acts viii. 35, 40 ; xvii. 18 ; 1 Cor. xv. 1 ; Gal. iv. 13 ; Rev. x. 7, etc. (see Lob. p. 269), even irpoevrfff^KiaaTo Gal. iii. 8. So also evapea-relv Heb. xi. 5 (yet Cod. A and several others, without Augm.). Of irpos- 84 evxecrOai the forms nearly always have Augm. without var., as nrpo^rjv^aro Matt. xxvi. 44, Trpo^rjvxero Mark i. 35 ; Acts viii. 15 ; Luke xxii. 41, etc. 4. The only verb beginning with oi which occurs in past tenses, oiKoBofielv, has, not indeed without var., but on vastly prepondera- ting authority, the regular Augment ; as, (pKoUix'qcre Matt. vii. 24 ; 67 xxi. 33, (pKoBo/xrjTo Luke iv. 29, mKoBofiow Luke xvii. 28, (pKoBofi-qOr} (^tlied Jno. ii. 20. Only in Acts vii. 47, good Codd. have olKoBo/jurjae, on which later form see Lob. 153. 5. npo(fyqTev€iv has in Jude 14 with preponderating authority the Augment after the preposition, as usual (Bttm. I. 335) ; but the better Codd. give elsewhere forms like e'rrpo(f)i]Teva-av Matt. xi. 13, eirpojyqrevaap.ev Matt. vii. 22, i7rporjjevov Acts xix. 6. Schiilz ad Matt. vii. 22, advised that the latter should be everywhere re- ceived into the text, and this Lchm. and Tdf. have done. In later writers the Augment is often put before the preposition ; as, 72 § 12. AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION i7rp6r}T€V€iv, however, this is less surprising, as there was no sim- ple a, Bttm. I. 316), is transferred also to the 1st Aor., KareCkrj<^dr] for Kare\rj<^drj Jno. viii. 4, not without var. (see Maittaire, dialectt. ed. Sturz, p. 58) ; traces of this already existed in lonism. 7. A double Augment occurs, a. In dTreKarearddr] Matt. xii. 13 ; Mark iii. 5 ; Luke vi. 10, now 70 properly in the text (cf. Lucian, Philopat. c. 27 dTreKareaTTjae, 7th ed. Ducas 29 d7r€KaT€(TT7)aav, Theophan. p. 374 direKaTecrTT}, Cinnam. p. 259 dvT€Karea-rr)v ; see Dindorf, Diod. S. p. 539, and Schaf. Plutarch. Y. p. 198) .2 b. In dviay^ev Jno. ix. 14, 30, dvemx^V Luke i. 64 (Bttm. 11. 250), once even in Aor. Inf. dveay'xOiivat Luke iii. 21. Good Codd. give, further, many other forms in this verb, viz. rjvoi^ev Rev. xii. 16 etc., rjvoi'xd'qa-av Rev. xx. 12, r)voL'^7)v Acts xii. 10 ; Rev. xi. 19 ; XV. 5, as in Sept. and later writers (Bttm. as above 251 ; Lob. p. 153), and with a threefold augment, Matt. ix. 30 •^veco'x^drjaav ; Jno. ix. 10 ; Acts xvi. 26 ; Acts ix. 8 ; Rev. xix. 11 ^veayy/xevov (Nicet. Eugen. 2, 84, 128, var.) ; var. Jno. ix. 14 ; Rev. xx. 12 (Gen. vii. 11 ; viii. 6 ; Dan. vii. 10 ; 3 Mace. vi. 18). Cf. Thilo, Apocr. L 669. 85 c. In rjveixeade 2 Cor. xi. 1, 4, text. rec. (cf. Thuc. 5, 45, Herodi. 8, 5, 9) and tjveaxoiJbriv, for dvea-x- Acts xviii. 14 (cf. Her. 7, 159 ; Thuc. 3, 28) exactly as in Greek writers, who in these forms hardly admit the single Augm. (Bttm. 11. 189) ; yet in 2 Cor. the better Codd. have dveix^aOe. 8. 'Epyd^ofxai has, according to Codd., several times r/pydaaro for elpydaaro Matt. xxv. 16 ; xxvi. 10 ; Mark xiv. 6 ; Luke xix. 16 ; Acts xviii. 3 (Exod. xxxvi. 4). The same form occurs also in a good MS. of Demosth. (Schiif appar. V. p. 553) ; cf. Sturz, p. 125. On the other hand, good Codd. (Lchm. and Tdf.) have from ekKovv in Luke xvi. 20, elXKOi/jbivo^ ; cf. also Clem. Al. p. 348 Sylb. 9. The Augm. is for the most part entirely omitted in the forms of the Pluperf. ; as, Mark xiv. 44 SeSooKec (xv. 10 ; Jno. xi. 57), 1 Epiphanii Mon. edita et inedita cura A. Dressel, Paris, 1843. 8vo. 2 Compare also iirpo€(p'f)Tevov Leo Gramm. pp. 33, 35, and 36, eKareffKfvacTav Canan. 462, ((TvvefjLaprvpovv ibid. 478, 7\vyav 2 Sam. x. 14, evpau xvii. 20, i(j)d'yafiev xix. 42, ikddrco Estli. v. 4 (Prov. ix, 5 ; Amos vi. 2 ; 2 Cliron. xxix. 17), etc. In the N. T. modern editors have restored this form, agreeably to the concurrent testimony of the best Codd.^ : Matt. xxv. 36 rjXOare, i^ijXdare, Matt. xxvi. 39 7rape\6dT(o, 2 Tliess. ii. 13 elXaro, Acts vii. 10 ; xii. 11 efeiXaro, vii. 21 dveiXaTo, Gal. v. 4 i^eiricraTe, Rev. vii. 11 (Heb. iii. 17 ; Jno. xviii. 6) enreaav, Jno. vi. 10 dvkirecrav^ Heb. ix. 12 eupa/zei/o?, (Epiph. 0pp. I. 619 ; Theodoret, 0pp. II. 837, Hal.) cf. Acts ii. 23 ; xvii. 6 ; xii. 7 ; xvi. 37 ; xxii. 7 ; xxviii. 16 ; Matt. vii. 13, 25 ; xi. 7 f. ; 1 Respecting the MSS. which have this form, see Hug, Einleit. I. S. 238, 242, 244, 247, 249, 263 ; Scholz, curae crit. p. 40 ; Rinck, lucubratt. p. 37 ; Tdf. prolegg. ad Cod. Ephraemi, p. 21. 10 74 § 13. RARE FORMS IN THE TENSES xvii. 6 ; xxii. 22 ; xxv. 36 ; xxvi. 39, 55 ; Luke ii. 16 ; xi. 52 ; xxii. 52 ; Rom. xv. 3 ; 1 Cor. x. 8 ; 2 Cor. vi. 17 ; 1 Jno. ii. 19 ; Rev. V. 8, 1-4 ; vi. 13. In the Codd. we find, to be sure, no sort of consistency in respect either to tlie writers or to tlie words. ^ 69 In many passages where this form appears in only a few Codd. it Ithed. might be attributed to the transcribers,^ particularly where similar flexions in a precede or follow ; see Elmsley, Eurip. Med. p. 232 Lips. ; Fr. Mr. 638 sqq. Further, it is found mainly in the 1st Per. Sing, and Plur. or 2d or 3d Per. Plur. In the 2d Sing., on the other hand, the Imperative and the Partic, it very seldom occurs. On instances of such Aor. in Greek authors (e.g. Orpheus) see Bttm. I. 404. Upo^ikireaa occurring in Eurip. Troad. 293 Seidler has changed into irpo'^eirea-ov ; and in Alcest. 477 undoubt- edly Trecrot should be read for ireo-eie, see Hcrm. on the passage.^ On the other hand, we find in Theophan. p. 283 errreaav, Achill. Tat. 3, 17 KaTeireaafxev, c. 19 TrepieiricrafMev, and Enstath. amor. Ism. I. p. 4. should, on the authority of good Codd., be amended eWeo-ete, see Jacobs p. 664 ; cf. besides Lob. 183 ; Mtth. I. 424 f. In the 72 Byzantine writers various forms of this sort unquestionably occur, Ithed. e.g. 7j\6av Malalas 18, p. 465 ; 12, p. 395, dvrjXdav 15, p. 389, rjvpafiev 18, p. 449, airekOuTe Ducas 24, i^ekOare Leo Gr. p. 343, iTreiiieXOaTe 87 ibid. p. 337. Cf. in general the Index to Ducas, p. 639, and to Theophan. p. 682 sq. Bonn. b. The past tenses of verbs beginning with p are found in the best Codd. with a single p (cf. § 5 No. 4) ; as, 2 Cor. xi. 25 epa^SlaOrjv, Heb. ix. 19 ipdvncre (x. 22 ipavTia-fjievot), Matt. xxvi. 67 ipdirLcrav^ according to AD 2 Tim. iii. 11 ipvaaro, according to AC [Sin.] iv. 17 ipvadrjv ; cf. 2 Kings xxiii. 18 ; Exod. v. 23 ; vii. 10 ; Lev. xiv. 7, 51 ; Num. viii. 7. Such forms are confessedly poetic, Bttm. I. 84 ; Mtth. I. 124, yet they frequently occur also in the Codd. of Greek prose, Bast, comment, crit. p. 788. In the Perf. the Codd. 1 They are mostly verbs whose 1st Aor. is not in use. 2 'Audireaai, which, according to good Codd., occurs in Luke xiv. 10 ; xvii. 7 (a trace of it appears in Polyb. 6, 37, 4, iKirfffa/xtvois var.), must be the Imperat. of a similarly formed Aor. Mid. {aueirftrdfiriv). As, however, the latter nowhere occurs, ai/dirfo-ai is probably to be regarded as a mistake of the copyist (copyists often interchanged e and ax) for avdireffe, which, in fact, is the reading of the best Codd., and has been recently received into the text ; cf. also Rinck, lucubratt. p. 330. Besides, it is only the 2d Aor. Act. of this verb that is found, Matt. xv. 35 ; Mark vi. 40 ; Luke xi. 37 ; xxii. 14 ; Jno. vi. 10, etc. The Fut. (as irUffai), for which Fr. Mr. p. 641 is disposed to take these forms, docs not accord well with the construction, particularly as in the second passage Imperatives immediately follow. 8 On the other hand, a Greek inscription in BOckh, II. 220 has, distinctly, fvptiav. AND PERSONS OF REGULAR VERBS. 75 Al. [Sin.] and Epliraem. Heb. x. 22, give the reduplicated form pepavTiafMevoi, of which, besides the Homeric (Odyss. 6, 59) pepi/- TTiofieva, several examples occur in later writers. Lob. paralip. 13. So in Matt. ix. 36 the Cod. Cantab, gives pepififjuevoL, wliich Lchm. has adopted. c. Tlie Futures of verbs in i^w sometimes are found (with un- important var. in Codd.) in the contracted form ; as, fMcroLKiM Acts vii. 43, d4)opiet Matt. xxv. 32, ac^opiovcn Matt. xiii. 49, yvcopLovai Col. iv. 9, Kadaptei Heb. ix. 14, SiaKodapLel Matt. iii. 12, iX-Tnovai Matt. xii. 21, p.aKapLovai Luke i. 48, etc. This is an Atticism (though the same form was not foreign to the lonians also) ; of. Georgi, Hieroc. I. p. 29 ; Fischer, Weller. II. p. 355 ; Mtth. I. p. 402. Of jSaTTTL^o} the common form ^a-irriaet alone is used Matt. iii. 11. On (TTr}pl^(o see § 15. In the Sept. verbs in a^w also are inflected after the same analogy in the Future, e.g. kp^aTai Lev. xxv. 40, apira xix. 13, etc. Such Attic Futures of contract verbs 70 some have wished to find in Matt. ii. 4 yewdrai, J no. xvi. 17 deoipdre ^^■ (on account of 6^\re Jas. i. 11, have the a as verbs in paivco do regu- larly. Respecting ^avai see § 15, p. 89. e. Futures Subjunctive are occasionally noted in individual passages, from a greater or less number of Codd., e.g. 1 Cor. xiii. 3 Kavdi](TO)fuiL (adopted by Griesbach), 1 Pet. iii. 1 Keph'qdrjawvrai^ 1 Tim. vi. 8 apKeadrjaoifieOa (in both passages without much au- thority). In the better class of authors such forms probably originate with the transcribers, see Abresch in Observatt. misc. III. p. 13 ; Lob. 721 ; but in later writers, and the Scholiasts particularly (cf. Thuc. 3, 11 and 54), they cannot be rejected (see Niebuhr, ind. ad Agath. p. 418, and ind. to Theophan. p. 682). In the N. T., however, tliere is very little authority for these Subjiuictives, 73 Quite isolated are evp'qcrrf'i Rev. xviii. 14 and evprjawaiv Rev. ix. Q'^^^ (yet an Aor. evpijarai also occurs, see Lob. p. 721), jvcoaoomai Acts 88 xxi. 24 (yet cf. Lob. p. 735). {oyjrqa-de Luke xiii. 28 and Bvoarj Jno. xvii. 2, are unquestionably Aor.) 2. Peculiar personal endings are : ; a. The 2d Per. Sing. Pres. and Fut. Pass, and Mid. in ei for rj; 76 § 13. RARE FORMS IN THE TENSES as, ^ovXei Luke xxii. 42, irape^et vii. 4 (var.), oyjrei Matt, xxvii. 4 and Jiio. xi. 40 (var.). Cf. also Matt, xxvii. 4; Acts xvi. 31 ; xxiv. 8 (var.). In the two verbs oirreadat and /3ov\eadat, this is the form invariably used in Attic (Bttin. I. 348) ; in other verbs it seldom occurs, and almost exclusively in the poets (cf. Valcken. ad Phoen. p. 216 sq. ; Fischer ad Weller. I. p. 119, II. p. 399 ; Georgi, Hierocr. I. p. 34 ; Schwarz ad Olear. p. 225), yet it appears in goodMSS. even of Attic prose, Bttm. as above; but cf. Schneider, praef. ad Plat. civ. I. p. 49 sqq. b. In the 2d Per, Sing, we find the original uncontracted form not only in Bvvaaai (Matt. v. 36 ; viii. 2 ; Mark i. 40) where it continued to be the usual form, Bttm. I. 602 (yet cf. Bi/vy Mark «.«ix. 22 ; Rev, ii. 2j and var. Luke xvi. 2,^ which at first was used only by the poets, subsequently by prose authors also, e.g. Polyb. 7, 11, 5 ; Aelian. 13, 32, see Lob. 359), but we find it also in con- tract YGrhs, oSuvdaat Luke xvi. 25 (Aeschyl. Choeph..354), Kavxaaai Rom. ii. 17 ; 1 Cor. iv. 7, and KaTaKavxaa-at Rom. xi. 18 ; cf. Georgi, Hierocr. I. p. 184 ; Bttm. I. 347 ; Boisson. Anecd. IV. p. 479. See vrtW below. c. In the 3d Per. Plur. of the Perfect av for aac (from the 7;j^ old termination avTt) ; as, eyvwKav Jno. xvii. 7, rerTypT^/cai/ xvii. 6, 6th ei etprjKav Rev. xix. 3, also Luke ix. 36 and Col. ii. 1 icopuKav in very good Codd., likewise Rev. xxi. 6; Jas. v. 4. So also in Sept., e.g. Deut. xi. 7 ; Judith vii. 10 (Acta apocr. p. 235). This form belongs to the Alexandrian dialect ; cf. Sext. Emp. 1, 10, p. 261, and the Papyri Taurin. p. 24 (^KeKvpievKav} ; but occurs also iu Lycophr. 252 (iricfipLKav') , in inscriptions and often in the Byzantine writers (cf. Index to Ducas p. 639, to Codin. and Leo Gramm.) ; see Bttm. I. 345. Tdf. has received it into the text in all the above passages of the N. T. Bat in Rev, ii. 3 he has rejected [yet not in ed. vii.] the form /ce/coTrta/ce? (Exod. v. 22) found in AC. d. The 1st Aor. Opt. has the original ^olic termination eta, eta?, ete, instead of aifiL ; as, '\lrrj\a(f>i]a€t,av Acts xvii. 27, 'Kou]aeiav Luke 89 vi. 11. So very frequently (in 2d and 3d Sing, and 3d Plur.) in Attic authors : Thuc. 6, 19. 8, 6 ; Aristoph. Pint. 95 ; Plat. rep. I. 337 c. ; Gorg. 500 c. ; Xen. An. 7, 7, 30, etc. ; see Georgi, Hierocr. I. p. 150 sq. ; Bttm. I. 354 f., and still more frequently in later authors. See EUendt, Arrian. Al. I. p. 353. 74 e. The 3d Per. Plur. of the Imperative in raxrav occurs repeat- 7tbed. 1 As to this form, which some would exchange for Siu/oi, compare Porson, Eurip. Hec. 257 ; Schaf. and Hm. Soph. PMloct. 787 ; Oudend. ad Thorn. M. p. 252 ; IM. p. 359. AND PERSONS OF REGULAR VERBS. 77 edly in the N. T. ; as, 1 Cor. vii. 9 ya/Mijo-drcoaav, vii. 86 yafieiTtoaav, 1 Tim. V. 4 fiaudavircoaav (Tit. iii. 14), cf. Acts xxiv. 20 ; xxv. 5. Tlie assertion of Elmslej, Eurip. Ipliig. T. p. 232, ed. Lips., that this form did not become usual till after Aristotle's time, has been fully refuted by Mttli. I. 442 and Bornem. Xen. An. p. 38. f. The 3d Per. Plur. of the historical tenses has often, in good Codd., tlie termination oaav (Bttm. I. 346) ; as, Jno. xv. 22, 24 €l-)(oaav for €l)(ov, xix. 3 eSiBoaav for iSlBovv, 2 Thess. iii. 6 irapeXor ^oaav, and Rom. iii. 13 from Sept. iBoXtovaav. This termination is much used in the Sept. and by the Byzantines ; as, Exod. xv. 27 ijXOoaav, Josh. v. 11 icjidyoa-av, Exod. xvi. 24 KaTeXtTroaav, xviii. 26 eKpivoaav, Niceph. Greg. 6, 6, p. 113 eiBoaav, Nicet. Chon. 21, 7, p. 402 Kar^XOoaav, Niceph. Bryenn. p. 165 fxerirfKOoaav, Brunck, Analect. II. p. 47 ; cf. also 1 Mace. vi. 31 ; Cant. iii. 3 ; v. 7 ; vi. 8 ; Josh. ii. 1 ; iii. 14 ; v. 11 ; vi. 14 ; viii. 19 ; Judg. xix. 11 ; i. 6 ; Ruth i. 4 ; Lam. ii. 14 ; Ezek. xxii. 11 ; Exod. xxxiii. 8, etc., Fischer, Weller. II. p. 336 sq. ; Georgi, Hierocr. I. p. 165 sq. ; Lob. Phryn. 849, and patho.l. 485 ; Sturz, p. 58 sqq. In the N. T. liowever, with the exception of Rom. as above, only single Codd. give this form, and it may possibly be attributable everywhere to the Alex- andrian transcribers. 3. Of contracted verbs we must note a. The Future etcx/^Si Acts ii. 17, 18 Sept., after the manner of verbs in X, /a, v^ p, cf. LXX. Ezek. vii. 8 ; xxi. 31 ; Jer. xiv. 16 ; Hos. V. 10 ; Zech. xii. 10 ; Bttm. I. p. 369. Were it accented eVpj;6o>, it would be, according to Elmsley, the Attic Fut., as this form is both Pres. and Fut. ; see Bttm. II. 325. But in Sept. with the same accent it is further inflected, iK^eeU, e'/c^^eetre, Exod. iv. 9 ; xxix. 12 ; XXX. 18 ; Deut. xii. 16. b. The usual forms of the two verbs Si,yjrdco, 7re/-mw, in the (Attic) literary language were Inf. Stylrriv, Tretvijv, and Indie. Si-»/r^9, Bi-ylrf), etc., Bttm. I. 487. In the N. T. we find instead Biyjrdv, 8c^|ra Rom. xii. 20 ; Jno. vii. 37, ireivav Phil. iv. 12, ireiva, Rom. xii. 20 ; 1 Cor. xi. 21, which first occurs after the time of Aristot. (Anim. 72 9, 31, cf. Sallier ad Thorn. M. p. 699; Lob. 61), According to^""^ the same analogy we find Fut. ireivdaco (Jot Treivrjcrco) Rev. vii. 16 ; 90 Jno. vi. 35 var. (Isa. v. 27 ; Psalm xlix. 12;, and 1st Aor. iireCvaaa Mark ii. 25 ; xi. 12 ; Matt. xii. 1, 8 ; xxv. 85 ; Lilke^iv. 2. Both forms are peculiarities of later Greek ; see Lob. 204. c. Of verbs in ew, retaining e in the Fut. etc. (Lob. paral. 435), we find in the N. T. KaXkaw, reXia-o) (Bttm. I. p. 392), also (f)opi6pr}(Tev Luke xii. 16.) On aTToXeo-o) and eiraiveaw, see below, § 15. § 14. RARE INFLECTIONS OF VERBS IN MI AND OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 75 1. Of verbs in /At we find : fth ed. a_ Pluper. Act. karrjKeaav Rev. vii. 11 var. for karriicei(Tav ; cf. Thuc. 1, 15 ^vvear-qKea-av, Xen. An. 1, 4, 4 i^eari]Ke(Tav, Heliod. 4, 16 ewKeaav, of. particularly Jacobs, Achill. Tat. pp. 400, 622 ; Ellendt, Arrian. Al. II. 77. b. 3d Per. Plur. Pres. rtdeaai for riOelai Matt. v. 15, TrepirtOeaaL Mark xv. 17, eTriTidiacn. Matt, xxiii. 4. This is the better and more usual form ; cf. Thuc. 2, 34 ; Aristot. Metaph. 11. 1 ; Theophr. plant. 2, 6; see Georgi, Hierocr. I. 145 sq., who adduces many instances, and Mtth. I. 483 ; Schneider, Plat. civ. II. 250. Sim- ilarly BiBoaai Rev. xvii. 13, according to the best Codd. ; cf. Her. I. 93; Thuc. I. 42. The contracted forms rtdelat and especially BiBovcn belong to the later language ; Lob. p. 244. c. In the Imperf. the 3d Per. Plur. has the contracted form iBiBovv for eBiBoaav in compounds, Actsiv. 33; xxvii. 1; cf. Hesiod, epy. 123. In the Sing, the form iBiBovv is more common ; Bttm. I. 509. d. On the abbreviated but very (perhaps only) common Inf. Perf. Act. eardvai (for earTjKevaL) 1 Cor. x. 12, see Bttm. II. 26 f., cf. Georgi, Hierocr. I. 182 sq. e. The Imperative Pres. Pass, in several Codd. is irepdaTaao 2 Tim. ii. 16 ; Tit. iii. 9 (^a^laracro 1 Tim. vi. 5 var.) for which irepucrro) etc. is more usual ; see Th. M. p. 75 ; Mtth. I. 495. f. There are weighty authorities for forms like iarco^iev Rom. 91 iii. 31, avviarTO)VT€lu (Bttm. I. 521) see Fischer, Wellcr. II. 480. c. The 1st Aor. Pass, of ae\a) Rev. xxii. 19, is rare, see Bttm. II. 100. Yet it is found in Agath. 269, 5, and in the Sept. frequently : Exod. v. 8 ; Num. xi. 17 ; Deut. xii. 32 ; Job xxxvi. 7 ; cf. also Menand. Byz. p. 316. In opposition to Reisig, irg Comm. crit. in Soph Oed. C. p. 365, who claims it for Aristoph. 7thed. and Soph., see Hm. Oed. Col. 1454 and Eurip. Hel. p. 127. *dKovco. Put. aKovcTQ) Matt. xii. 19; xiii. 14 ; Rom, x. 14 ; Jno. xvi. 13, for aKova-ofiai, which even in the N. T. is the more frequent, particularly with Luke, as Acts iii. 22 (vii. 37) ; xvii. 32 ; xxv. 22 ; xxviii. 28, also Jno. v. 28. 'A/covam occurs not only in poets (Anthol. gr. III. 134 ; Jac. Orac. Sibyll. 8, 206, 345), but occasion- ally also in prose authors of the kolvj, as Dion. H. 980, 4. Reisk., cf. Schaf. Demosth. II. 232 ; Warm, Dinarch. p. 153 ; Bachmann, Lycophr. I. 92. In Sept. cf. Isa. vi. 9 ; 2 Sam. xiv. 16. 95 aWofxai, varies between Aor. rfKdfxriv and rjXofirjv Bttm. II. 108. The same variation exists in the Codd. Acts xiv. 10 (even with double X), yet rjXaro preponderates. afxaprdvo), dfiapreoi. 1st Aor. 'q/xaprTjaa tor 2d Aor. '^fiaprov Rom. V. 14, 16 ; Matt, xviii. 15 ; Luke xvii. 4 ; Rom. vi. 15 (1 Sam. xix. 4 ; Lam. iii. 41 1) Thom. M. p. 420 ; Lob. p. 732 ; yet see Diod. S. 2, 14 d/xapr'^ (for d7ravTi]aofiai^ Mark xiv. 13 (Diod. S. 18, 15). See Bttm. II. 114 ; Mtth. Eurip. Suppl. 774. aTTOKTeivoj . 1st Aor. dTreicrdvdrj, aTroKravdi^vac Rev. ii. 13; ix. 18, 20 ; xi. 13 ; xiii.J^ ; xix. 21 ; Matt. xvi. 21 ; Luke ix. 22, etc. ; cf. 1 Mace. ii. 9 ; 2 Mace. iv. 36. This form occurs indeed in Homer, but belongs peculiarly to later Greek prose (Dio C. 65, c. 4 ; Menander, Hist. p. 284, 304, Bonn ed.). See Bttm. II. 227, Lob. 36, 757.^ (For the uu-Attic Perf. direKTayKa see 2 Sam. iv. 11 ; Bttm. 226 f.) diroWv/MC. Fut. dirokeaw Matt. xxi. 41 ; Mark viii. 35; Jno. 80 vi. 39 ; xii. 25 ; cf. Lucian. asin. 33 ; Long, pastor. 3, 17 ; Bttm. II. 'tli«i 254. Yet see Lob. 746. (In 1 Cor 1. 19, we find the regular form ^^ airoXoi.) dpTrd^co. Aor. ^pTrdyrjv 2 Cor. xii. 2, 4 for ripTrdaOrjv (Rev. xii. 5) Thom. Mag. p. 424 ; Moeris, p. 50 ; Bttm. 1. 372, Fut. dp7rayi]ao/j,ai 1 Thess. iv. 17. (Also dpTrdaco for dpirdaofiab Jno. x. 28 is said to be a rare form ; it occurs, however, in Xen. mag. eq. 4, 17.) *av^dvo). The primitive form av^w Eph. ii. 21; Col. ii. 19 is frequent in Plato and Xen., Mtth. 541. ^apkio. From this comes not only ySe/3ap7;/xei;o9 Matt. xxvi. 43; 96 Luke ix. 32, but also, contrary to Attic prose usage (Bttm. II. 88), fiapovjjbevoi 2 Cor. v. 4 (Mark xiv. 40), ^apeiadco 1 Tim. v. 16, and the Aor. i^api]6r]v Luke xxi. 34 ; 2 Cor. i. 8, for which last the Greek literary diction employs i^apvvdrjv (var. Luke as above). ^aaKuivo). The Aor. Gal. iii. 1 is given in text. rec. ejSdaKave^ but in many Codd. i^da-Krjve (without an t subs.) ; cf. Bttm. I. 438. The latter in Dio C. 44, 39 ; Herod. 2, 4, 11, and the later writers. ^ 'AvoKrevvfffdat (others airoKTft'f(T6ai) occurring in Rev. vi. II, and aiTOKrevvei (hro- rr«»'6r var. ) in 2 Cor. iii. 6 (Rev. xiii. 10) are considered as Aeolic, the Aeolians being accustomed to change €i before \, fi, v, p, a into e, and double tlie following consonant; therefore, KTivvta for ktuvu, like (ririp^oi for airilpu), Koenig, Gregor. Cor. pp. ."SS", 597 Schafif., Mtth. I. 74 ; cf. Dindorf, praef. ad Aristoph. XII. p. 14. Also in Tob. i. 18 ; Wisd. xvi. 14, we find the first form among the var. A Present a-iroKTfvu is probably not, with Wahl, to be assumed for Matt. x. 28 and Luke xii. 4 ; xiii. 34. 'A.wokt(v6v- rwv in those passages (if not to be taken for an Aor. Particip., see Fr. Mt. p. 383) may be considered as a corruption of hroKtiwSvTwv, which a few, but good, Codd. have, and which Lchm. and, in part, Tdf. have printed. Cf. besides, Bornem. ad Luc. p. 81. 84 § 15. DEFECTIVE VERBS. jStoft) . 1st Aor. Inf. ^iwaai in 1 Pet. iv. 2, for which the 2d Aor. fiiwvac is more usual in Attic, Bttm. II. 130 f., yet see Aristot. Nic. 9, 8 ; Plutarch. 0pp. II. 367 f., and often in compounds, Steph. Thes. II. 260, ed. nov. The otlier forms of the 1st Aor. are more frequent, the participle yStcoaa? the most so. ^Xaa-rdvco. Aor. i^darrjaa for e^Xaarov Matt. xiii. 26 ; Jas. V. 18 (Gen. i. 11 ; Num. xvii. 8, etc. ; Acta apoc. p. 172) ; cf. Bttm. II. 131. Since Aristotle's time the form is not unusual even in the Greek literary language ; Stephani Thes. II. 273. ^yafiict). Aor. ir/dfMrjcra Mark vi. 17 ; Matt. xxii. 25 ; 1 Cor. vii. 9 stands for the older form eyrjfia (from ydfico^, as Luke xiv. 20 ; 1 Cor. vii. 28 ; see Georgi, Hierocr. L 29 ; Lob. 742. Yet ijdfirjaa is found (if not in Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 20) Lucian, dial. deor. 5, 4 ; Apollodor. 3, 15, 3. Better attested is eyafitjOrjv Mark x. 12 (though not fully established), 1 Cor. vii. 39 ; Lob. 742. yeXda. Fut. yekdaw (for yekdcrofxai) Luke vi. 21. See Bttm. II. 85, 134. yiyvofiai. A or. Pass. iyev^6r)v for iyev6fi7}v Acts iv. 4; Col. iv. 11 ; 1 Thess. ii. 14, etc. ; cf. Thorn. M. p. 189, — an originally Doric form frequently found in the writers of the kolvij, Lob. 109 ; Bttm. II. 136. BiBojiJbt. The 1st Aor. eSoiKa is avoided in the 1st and 2d Per. Plur. by Attic writers, and the 2d Aor. used instead, Bttm. 1. 509. 78 In the N. T., however, we find iScoKafiev 1 Thess. iv. 2, iBcoKare ^^^- Matt. XXV. 35 ; Gal. iv. 15, etc. as in Demosth. On Bcoarj see § 14, 1 Remark p. 79. *8iQ)K0}. Fut. BtQ)^(o for hidi^oixai Matt, xxiii. 34 ; Luke xxi.T.2 ; 81 Bttm. II. 154. Yet cf. Dera. Nausim. 633 c. ; Xen. An. 1, 4, 8 Tthed. ^Kru. h. 1.); Cyr. 6,3,13. hvvafxaL. We have merely to remark here that besides the Aor. iBvv^drjv, the (Ion.) form r}hvvda6r}v, with the Augm. rj too, is noted from B among the var. Matt. xvii. 16 (Bttm. II. 155). Sua), Bvvw. In several good Codd. we find Mark i. 32 the 1st 97 Aor. eBvaa, which among the earlier Greeks has only a causative meaning, Bttm. II. 156. On the other hand the 1st Aor. Bvvavro^, as inferior authorities give in Luke iv. 40, is found also Ael. 4, 1 ; Pausan. 2, 11, 7. € Xhw in the sense of hnow. Pret. otBufiev Mark xi. 33 ; Jno. iii. 2 ; 1 Cor. viii. 1, etc. for lafxev (Poppo, Xen. An. 2,4, 6), otBare Mark x. 38 ; xiii. 33 ; 1 Cor. ix. 13 ; Phil. iv. 15 for lare, olBaatv Luke xi. 44 ; Jno. x. 5 for Xaaai ; see Bttm. I. 546 (yet cf. Aristoph. av. § 15. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 85 599 ; Xen. Oec. 20, 14). The 2d Per. Sing. olSa? 1 Cor. vii. 16 ; Jiio. xxi. 15 is rather Ionic and Doric (for oZo-^a), yet it occurs Her. 4, 157 ; Xen. M. 4, 6, 6 ; Eurip. Ale. 790, and frequently in later Greek ; see Lob. 236 sq. The 3d Per. Plur. of the Plup. is written y^ecaav Mark i. 34 ; Jno. ii. 9 ; xxi. 4, etc. for jjSeaav ; Bttm. I. '547. etVeti/ (2d Aor. emov). 1st Aor. etTra in the N. T. in the 2d Per. Sing. Matt. xxvi. 25 ; Mark xii. 32, and frequently. This person also occurs in Attic, Xen. Oec. 19, 14 ; Soph. Oed. C. 1509 (along with eZ-Tre?, as often in Plato) ; but it is originally Ionic, see Greg. Corinth, ed. Schaf. p. 481 ; Schiif. Dion. H. p. 436 sq. Imper. dirare Matt. x. 27 ; xxi. 5 ; Col. iv. 17, elirdTcaaav Acts xxiv. 20 ; likewise very common in Attic, Plat. Lach. 187 d ; Xen. C. 3, 2, 28. We find, besides, in good Codd. 3d Per. Plur. Indie. ecTrav Matt, xii. 2 ; xvii. 24 ; Mark xi. 6 ; xii. 7, 16 ; Luke v. 33 ; xix. 39 ; XX. 2 ; Acts i. 11, 24 ; vi. 2 ; xxviii. 21, etc. (Diod. S. 16, 14; Xen. H. 3, 5, 24 a var.), the Participle eiVa? Acts vii. 37 ;» xxii. 24 which is chiefly Ionic, and even the more unusual 1st Per. elTra Heb. iii. 10 ; Acts xxvi. 15 (cZttoi/, on the contrary, predominates in the N. T.) ; see Sturz, dial. alex. p. 61.^ Recent editors have adopted these forms wherever they are attested by several Codd. In com- position we find aTrecTrd/jLTjv 2 Cor. iv. 2 (Her. 6,100), and Trpoenra/xei/ 1 Thess. iv, 6 (ecTrafiev in the 1. Turin. Papyrus, p. 10). Elirov (not eiTTov, see § 6, 1, k.) Acts xxviii. 26 (according to good Codd.) is to be regarded as 2d Aor. Imperative, a form which we now find also in the text of Mark xiii. 4 ; Luke x. 40, while in other passages eiVe preponderates. The 1st Aor. Pass, of this verb, ipprjd'qv (from pew, see Bttm. II. 166), is sometimes written in MSS. of the N. T. Matt. v. 21, 31, 33 ip'pid'qv, as often in Codd. of later 82 (non-Attic) authors, though this form occasionally appears in Attic ^1!^ writers also ; Lob. 447 (but not in Plato, see Schneider, Plat. civ. gthei II. p. 5 sq.). e/c;^ea>, later form iK^vvco (Lob. 726). Prom it comes Fut. eKxew for eKxeixrw Bttm. I. 396. See § 13, 3. a. p. 77. * iXedo) for eXeew occurs in several good Codd. in various pas- sages of the N.T., as Rom, ix. 16,18 ekeiavTo^, eXea, Jude 23 iXeuTe. 98 Also Clem. Al. p. 54, Sylb. (the^Florent. edition) has iXea. Cf. also Etymol. M. 327, 30. Similar is ikXoyav Rom, v, 13 ; Philem. 18, also in good Codd. The latter has been adopted by Lchm., 1 ETirai/ occurs also in the well-known Rosetta iascription, at the end of line 8. 86 § 15. DEFECTIVE VERBS. and after him by Tdf. Fr., Rom. I. 311, declares all these forms to be errors in copying. eTiKoi. From this we find, as regularly in Greek authors, a Pres. and an Imperf. Jas. 11. 6 ; Acts xxi. 30. On the other hand, for the Fat. ek^co (Mtth. 573) the more unusual ekKvaw occurs Jno. xii. 32 from the other form cXkixo ; cf. Job xxxix. 10. *e7ratv€co. Fut. iTraiveaco 1 Cor. xi. 22, for eiraivecrofiai ; see Bttm. I. 388. Yet cf. Xen. An. 5, 5, 8 ; Himer. 20. In general, however, this form is not uncommon ; see Brunck, Gnom. p. 10, 64 ; Schaef. Demosth. II. 465 ; Stallb. Plat. Symp. p. 139. *i7rtopKi(o. Fut. iiTLopK'qcrto for iTriopK'^aofiai Matt. v. 33. See Bttm. II. 85. epxofiaL. The Fut. eXevcrofxat, both in the simple verb and its compounds, is of frequent occurrence, but particularly in later prose authors (Arrian. Al. 6, 12 ; Philostr. Apoll. 4, 4 ; Dio Chr. 33, 410 ; Max. Tyr. 24, p. 295) ; in Attic, on the contrary, eifii is used instead (Phryn. p. 37 sq. ; Thom. M. p. 88, 336). Yet in the earlier authors iXevao/xai, also is not altogether infrequent. Her. I, 142 ; 5, 125 ; Lys. Dardan. 12 (p. 233, Bremi) ; see in general Lob. 37 sq. ; Schaef. Soph. II. 323 ; cf. Elmsley, Eurip. Heracl. 210. Instead of the Imperf. rip-)(6/j,7]v Mark i. 45 ; ii. 13 ; Jno. iv. 30 ; vi. 17, etc. Attic authors commonly use the Imperf. of el/xt, Bttm. II. 183 ; yet see Borncm. Luc. p.. 106, cf. Thuc. 4, 120, 121 ; Xen. An. 4, 6, 22. In Attic the imperatives Wo, ire from elfii are used for ep'x^ov, €p')(ea6e Jno. i. 47. Also ip'xpixevo'i is said to be rare in earlier Attic, Bttm. as above ; yet it occurs in Plato, Crit. c. 15. (rjkde for eXrfkvOe Gal. iv. 4 ; Jno. xix. 39, etc. has been too hastily rejected by Thom. M. p. 418 ; see Sallier on the passage.) io-dlo). From the poetic form eaOo) (Bttm. II. 185) we find the Participle eaOcov among the var. Mark i. 6 ; Luke vii. 33, 34 ; x. 7 ; XX. 47 ; xxii. 30, which Tdf., on the authority of (a few) good Codd., has received into the text; see Praef. p. 21. From Sept. cf. Lev. xvii. 10 ; xix. 26 ; Sir. xx. 16. evp i (TKO). Aor. Mid. evpdfirjv for evpofjLijv Heb. ix. 12, see § 13, 1 (Pans. 7, 11, 1 ; 8, 30, 4, etc. ; cf. Lob. p. 139 sq.). A 1st Aor. evprjaa appears in the Subjunctive form evp^arj'i Rev. xviii. 14 and 99 evpijaoiatv ix. 6 (as at least many Codd. have it), unless we take 83 these forms for the Subjunctive Fut. (see § 13, 1. e). Lob. 721, however, produces a Participle evpTjaavrof. 80 ^d(o. Fut. ^ri(T(o Rom. vi. 2, 8 ; 2 Cor. xiii. 4 ; 2 Tim. ii. 11 ; ^"^ Jno. vi. 51, 58 f. {av^jjaco Rom. vi. 8 ; 2 Tim. ii. 11), ^ijaofiai Matt. § 15. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 87 iv. 4 ; Mark v. 23 ; Jno. vi. 51 ; xi. 25, etc. 1st Aor. e^rjaa Rev. ii. 8 ; Luke xv. 24 ; Rom. vii. 9, etc. (and often in Sept.). These are principally later forms, which occur but seldom in early authors (see Bttm. II. 192). The Aor. is peculiar to later writers. Eai'licr authors used in the Fut. and Aor. the corresponding tenses of /3/oct). ?7/c&). From the 1st Aor. ^fa, a later form, Bttm. II. 194 ; Lob. 744, we find the Subjunctive ij^ooat Rev. iii. 9, where, however,^ better Codd. have the Fut. rj^ovat,. The Freter. 97/ca (Deut. xxxii. 17 ; Phot, biblioth. 222 ; Malal. pp. 136 and 137 ; Leo Gramm. p. 98, etc. ; Lob. 744) in the form rjKaai Mark viii. 3 is by no means established, though Lchm has adopted it. OdWo). 2d Aor. dveddXere Phil. iv. 10, a form not occurring in prose, and everywhere rare, Bttm. II. 195. larrjfit. The Pres. iardvo) Rom. iii. 31, and in composition o-vvia-rdvco 2 Cor. iii. 1 (iv. 2) ; v. 12 ; vi. 4 ; x. 12, 18 ; Gal. ii. 18, was used in Attic (Mtth. I. 482), but more frequently in later Greek (e.g. Cinnam. 214 and 256 ecfytardveLv} . On the later form lardo) see § 14, 1, f. p. 78. KaraKaiui . Fut. KaraKarjaofiai 1 Cor. iii. 15; 2 Pet. iii. 10 (from Aor. KarcKdrju Her. 1, 51 ; 4, 79) for KaraKavOijaofiai Rev. xviii. 8, which the Attics use, see Thom. M. p. 511 ; Bttm. II. 211. KaraXeiTTQ). 1st Aor. KareXei'^a Acts vi. 2; Lob. 714. K€pdvvv/Mc. Perf. Pass. KeKepaa-fiat Rev. xiv. 10, for the more usual KeKpafiac ; see Bttm. II. 214. Analogous is the Participle av^KeKepacTfievov^ Heb. iv. 2, in very good Codd. Kephalvw . Aor. iKepS-rjaa Matt. xxv. 20; xviii. 15, Kephrjaai Acts, xxvii. 21, KepSt^aa^ Luke ix. 25, KcpBrjaco Subj. 1 Cor. ix. 19, 20 ; Matt, xvi, 26 and frequently, forms peculiar to Ionic prose, Bttm. II. 215 ; Lob. 740. In Attic the verb is inflected regularly ; cf. 1 Cor. ix. 21. K\ac(o. Fut. KXavcrco (properly Doric) for Kkavao^ai (as in Sept. always) Luke vi. 25 ; Jno. xvi. 20 ; Rev. xviii. 9 ; cf. Babr. 98, 9 ; Bttm. II. 85, 220. KXeTTTQ). Fut. K\i-\lr(o for K\e>^oixai Matt. xix. 18 ; Rom. xiii. 9, Bttm. II. 85, 221. In Sept. never, but in Lucian, dial. deor. 7, 4. Kpd^o) . Fut. Kpd^Q) Luke xix. 40 according to good authorities for KeKpd^ofxai (as always in Sept.), Aor. eKpa^a for eKparyov Matt. 100 viii. 29 ; xx. 30, etc., Bttm. II. 223. *Kp€/xa/jLac. The form i^eKpifiero Luke xix. 48 in Codd. B [and Sin.] of which Griesb. and Schulz take no notice, is undoubtedly a mistake of the transcriber. Lchm. also has not noticed it. gg § 15. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 84 Kpvirroi. 2d Aor. Act. eKpv^ov Luke i. 24 (Phot, bibliothec. ^t''^'^- 1, p. 143, Bekk.), see Bttm. II. 226. KV03 (to he pregnant) has the Fut. and Aor. regular in the forms Kvr]ao), eKVTjaa (Bttm. II. 230). So Jas. i. 18 aireKvifjae. In the Pres. Kvio) occurs, but not, as Eustath. p. 1648, 20 insists, only in the sense of bring foi'th ; see Lob. Aiac. p. 182 sq. and paralip. 556. 81 Hence in Jas. i. 15 airoKvel may be written as well as diroKvei, but it is not necessary to prefer the former on account of the form of the Aorist in vs. 18. The N. T. Lexicons recognize only the form Kvio). \da-KQ). To this belongs the Aor. iT^KTjcra Acts i. 18, usually referred to the Doric Pres. XaKeoy ; but Bttm. II. 233 derives it directly from the 2d Aor. XuKelv, universally in use in Attic. * /j^taivQ) has Tit. i. 15, according to good Codd., in the Perf. Participle fxefMia/MfxivoL for the usual /jLe/jLLaa/jLivoi, cf. Lob. 35. vcTTTOi Jno. xiii. 6, 14, vlinofiai, Matt. xv. 2. Instead of this Pres. the earlier writers use vitjco ; see Bttm. II. 249 ; Lob. 241. otKrelpo). Fut. olKreip'^a-co Rom. ix. 15 (as if from olKreLpew) for ol/crepM ; cf. Ps. ci. 15 ; Jer. xxi. 7 ; Mic. vii. 19, etc. ; also in the Byzantines, see Lob. 741. ofjbvvco for 6fx,vv/ML (Bttm. II. 255) Matt, xxiii. 20 IF. ; xxvi. 74 ; Heb. vi. 16 ; Jas. v. 12. But in the better MSS. we find Mark xiv. 71 ofxvvvaL for 6/jivveiv, and Griesb. received it into the text. *6pd(o. Imperf. Mid. 0Dpcop.7}v Acts ii. 25 (from Ps. xvi.), for which ewpMfirjv was used in Attic (Bttm. I. 325). From oTrreadai we find Luke xiii. 28, though not without var., the 1st Aor. Subj. oy^rtjade, which occurs in Liban. and the Byzantines ; see Lob, 734. irai^m. Aor. iveirat^a Matt. xx. 19; xxvii. 31 (Sept. Prov. xxiii. 35), for which in Attic eTraiaa was used ; see Bttm. I. 372. But eirai^a. iral^ah Lucian, dial. deor. 6, 4, and encom. Demosth. 15 ; cf. V. Fritzsche, Aristoph. I. 378 ; and Lob. 240. The Fut. Trai'^to Anacr. 24, 8. •jrerofxaL . Part. Trerco/uievov Rev. xiv. 6 in B for jrerofMevov, from the form ireTuofMac which occurs only in Ionic (Her. 3, 111) and later writers (e.g. Lucian, dial. mort. 15, 3 var.), see Bttm. II. 271. The Pres. Trera/jiai, found even in Pindar, is cited by Wetst. and Matthai among the var. Rev. xii. 14. 101 IT IV ay. From the Fut. Triop^ai the complete form vteaai, is es- tablished in Luke xvii. 8 (Bttm. I. 347), as in the very same passage dyeaaL from ajelv. Fut. (pdryofxat Jas. v, 3 ; Rev. xvii, 16 [Jno. ii. 17] (Gen. xxvii. 25 ; Exod. xii. 8, etc.), whence 2d Per. (fidyea-ai, Luke xvii. 8.^ For this Greek authors Use eSofjuai from e8a>, Bttm. II. 185. (fyaivco. 1st Aor. Inf. i-m^avai {iirL^rfvai) Luke i. 79, contrary to the best usage. In later Greek, however, similar forms occur ; Lob. 26 ; Thilo, Acta Thom. 49 sq. (Aelian, anim. 2, 11 ; and epiL 102 p. 396, Jac). 90 § 15. DEFECTIVE VERBS. (fiavaKQ). Hence e7rt<^aya-et Epli. V. 14 ; cf. Gen. xliv. 3 ; Judg. xvi. 2 ; 1 Sam. xiv. 36 ; Judith xiv. 2. As to the analogical proof of this form, not found in Greek authors, by means of the Subs. vTTocjiavat^;, see Bttm. II. 312. *(f)6po}. Aor. Partic. iveyKuf; Acts v. 2 ; xiv. 13 (kveyKavreocr. paneg. 40. The Indie. r^ve'yKa 7th ed. Qccu^.g frequently in Attic, as also the Imperat. forms with a Jno. xxi. 10. * (f)0uv(o. According to several Atticists the 2d Aor. €J)6r)v is to be preferred to the 1st Aor. ecjidaaa, which, however, often occurs even in Attic writers (Bttm. II. 316), and prevails in the N. T. Matt. xii. 28 ; Rom. ix. 31 ; 2 Cor. x. 14 ; Phil. iii. 16 ; 1 Thess. ii. 16. In the last passage several Codd. have the Perf. e^duKe. (j>vw. 2d Aor. Pass, i^vrjv, vei^ Luke viii. 6, 7, 8 (since Hip- pocrat. very much used), for which the Attics employ the 2d Aor. Act. e^vp, 0u? ; see Bttm. II. 321. In Matt. xxiv. 32 and Mark xiii. 28 very good Codd. have eKcfiurj (Aor. Pass. Subj.) for iK(pvrj ; and the former reading may be regarded as preferable ; see Fr. Marc. 578 sq. 83 'x^aipo). Put. '^ap-qaofiat, for 'xaip-qa-w Luke.i. 14 ; Jno. xvi. 20, ethei 22 ; Phil. i. 18 (Hab. i. 16 ; Zech. x. 7 ; Ps. xcv. 12, and often), see Moer. 120 ; Tbom. Mag. 910 ; Lob. 740 ; Bttm. II. 322. It occurs also Diod. Exc. Vat. p. 95. *'X^api ^ofxat. Put. '^apiaofiat Rom. viii. 32 is the non- Attic form for '^apiov/j.aL. oiOkui. Aor. uTTcoaaTo ^ Acts vii. 27, 39 (Mic. iv. 6 ; Lam. ii. 7 and often, Dion. H. II. 759), for which the better writers used ecoaaTo with syllabic augment (Thom. M. p. 403 ; Pol. 2, 69, 9 ; 15, 31, 12). 1st Aor. Pass, a-rrcoadrjv Ps. Ixxxvii. 6 ; cf Xen. Hell, 4, 3, 12 ; Dio C. 37, 47. Also Aor. Act. i^waev Acts vii. 45 for which some Codd. have i^icoaev (Ellendt, Arrian. Al. 1. 181). That remark, however, respecting the syll. augm. holds strictly only of the Attic authors ; see Poppo, Thuc. IIL II. 407. *oDveofMat. 1st Aor. ajvrja-dfirjv Acts vii. 16, as frequently in writers of the Koivrj (e.g. Plut., Pausan.), Lob. 139. In Attic iTrpLcifirjv is preferred. Note. The later verbal forms are not always used in the N. T. where 103 they might be expected. We find for instance 7rto/xai 2d Fut. from vivw, 1 After the Fut. Oxrce (from Udo)). The Aorist form from the other Fut. we^^crw occurs only in later authors, as e.g. the Particip. eiswO^o-aj in Cinnam. p. 193. § 16. FORMATION OF WORDS. 91 and not mov^Lai Rev. xiv. 10 (see Bttm. I. 395) ; Aor. /coivwo-ai Mark vii. 15, 18 etc.; Moeris, ed. Piers, p. 434 ; Loceila, Xen. Ephes. p. 254 ; Fut. (fteviofiai, 6avfji.a.(TOfxaL, and not (f>€v$, 6avfjida-(ii (Bttm. II. 85). Among the various readings occurs Heb. iv. 15 Trertupafjiivov from the older form Tretpaw instead of TreireLpouriJievov from Trctpa^w ; the former Tdf. has received into the text. That the same forms sometimes come by inflection from entirely differ- ent verbs is well known ; we shall only specify e^eVtuo-e Jno. v. 13, which grammatically may come equally from ckvcw (Bttm. II. 248) and from eKV€VU). §16. FORMATION OF WORDS.i The N. T. contains a number of words never occurring in Greek 87 authors, but borrowed from the spoken language of the time, and '^'''**^' in part new formations (particularly in the writings of Paul). The greater the number of these peculiar forms, the more necessary it becomes to compare them with the established principles of Greek derivation (from stems). lu doing this, it will be instructive to note analogies not altogether unknown to Greek authors, but 84 far more prominent in the idiom of the N. T. Our remarks will be founded on the luminous exposition of Bttm., which comprehends whatever is of essential importance (II. § 118 ff.), of. Krii. § 41 fF. 1. A. Derivation by Terminations, a. Verbs: Of derivative verbs (mostly but not entirely from nouns) tliose in oco and i^Q) are peculiarly frequent. Forms in oco partly superseded those in eua> or i^co ; as, BeKuroco (Scvarevw Xen. An. 5, 3, 9, etc.), i^ovSevoco {i^ovSevi^oi) in Plutarch, yet see in general Lob. 182), aapoQ) (for craipco Lob. 89), KecfioXatooi (/ceeck, Parerga to Phryn., and. his other works referred to above, p. 3. Amopg expository works we must mention chiefly Selecta e Scholis Valckenarli. Specimens of later for- mations are to be found especially in the Byzantine authors. 92 " § 16. FORMATION OF WORDS. TreXeKi^Q) from ireKeKVi, fivKTiipti^a) from fiv/crrjp, afiypvi^o}, ave/uul^co, (f)v\aKL^(o, Ifiari^Qi, dvadefjuaTL^co (also in Byzantine autliors), dea- rpi^o} (Cinnam. p. 213), aTT\a'y)(^ui^o/xaL, alpeTi^o), o-v/j,fxop^ is sufficiently attested only in Luke xx. 34. Lastly, we note as altogether singular in forma- tion rfp'qyopew (from the Perf iyptjyopa'), with its cognate ijpTjjopeco, ' Lob. 119;^ Bttm. II. 158. With this verb,^ derived from a redu- plicated Perfect, may be compared, however, liriKex^ipkoi Papyri Taurin. 7, lin. 7. 1 Cf. Lck. Soph. Ai. p. 387. 'OKoeptiw Heb. xi. 28 is, in some good Codd., written iXfdpfvw (from 6\e0pos), and Lchm., and with him Tdf., has so printed. I am not aware that the latter form of this Alexandrian word has been preserved anywhere else. 2 Doderlein on reduplication in Greek and Latin derivation in his Reden und Auf- eatze II. no. 2. § 16. FORMATION OF WORDS. 93 To derivative verbs in cvw belongs also irapapoXeveaOai Phil. ii. 30, (which Griesb., Lchm., and others, agreeably to the weightiest critical evidence, have admitted into the text). From 7rapa/3oXos might have been formed most naturally irapa^oXeiaOaL ; but the termination cvw was selected to make the verb signify Trapa/SoAov cTvai, as iina-KOTrivuv in later Greek denotes iTriaiioirov ctmi (Lob. 591), and, what is more to the purpose, there is vepTTipeveaOaL from TrepTrepos. It would be unwarrantable to grant admission to irapa/BoXeveaOat. only on the assumption of a simple verb (3o\€v€(r6at, (which certainly does not occur). 2. b. Substantives : ^ Derived a. from Verbs (cf. Lob. paralip. p. 397 sqq. and particularly lib. 3 of teclinologia p. 253 sqq.). With the termination /lw)9 (Bttm. II. 398) from a verb in a^a> is to be noted dyiaa/j.6(; which does not occur in Greek authors, like 7recpaa/j,6 also signifies to be a heathen (e.g. in Malalas p. 449) is a fact lying beyond our present inquiry. § 16. FORMATION OF WORDS. 95 And such substantives in (twt) (denoting mental qualities) as iXerjfMoavvT] and aaxVH'OauvTi (from eXeijficov and da-xw^^v, of. a(o(j)poavvv ^0^^ ao^(f>p(ov) , or dryKoavvrj, dyadwcrvvv, leptoavvr], fieyaXa^avvn, with «, because the penult of the adjectives is short (Etym. M. p. 275, 44) i — all later words found only in Hellenistic g7 writers ; cf. in general Lob. prolegg. pathol. p. 235 sqq. ^ 6th e4 Also among those in la which come from adjectives in o?, po? (Bttm, II. 415) are many later formations (Lob. 343) ; as, eka(j>pla QSkQ alaxpicL in Eustath. from alaxpo^} ; and as evSaifMovla from evhaip^wv, so 2 Pet. ii. 16 irapac^povia from irapdcppcov (Lob. prolegg. pathol. p. 238) ; some Codd., however, have the more usual irapacfipocrvvr].^ Lastly, we often find Neuters of adjectives in lo^ used as substan- tives ; as, vTTol^vyiov, fiedopLOVj irrrok'^VLOV, a^dyioi/ (7rpo?^a7toi/) , etc., see Fr. Priilimin. S. 42. 7. From other Substantives (Bttm. II. 420 ff.) arc derived elZw- Xelov (etScuXoi/), iXatcov (^iXala), fivXdov INIatt. xxiv. 41 var. (^uXo?, fivXr]) Bttm. II. 422 f. and the Fem. ^aatXtaaa (Bttm. II. 427). 'A(fieBpQ)v, peculiar to the N.T., comes from eSpa. The Gentile Fem. from ^olvl^ is ^oivio-aa ; therefore also Mark vii. 26 livpo- 94 ^otvca-aa, as from KlXi^ comes KlXiaaa (Bttm. II. 427). Perhaps, ^thed. however, the Fem. was also formed from the name of the country ^olvIkt) ; for, a large number of good Codd. [Sin. also] have in the above passage in Mark ^vpocfyocvUiaaa, cf. Fritzsclie, and this 108 might come directly from an original form ^oivikl<;, as ^aa-CXuraa is connected with ^curtXi^, and, at least among the Romans, Scy- tliissa occurs for XkvOI^, or in later Greek vXdKia-cTa by tlie side of (f)vXaKl<;. See in general Lob. prolegg. pathol. p. 413 sqq. To tlie later and Latinizing formation belong, of Gentile and Patronymic nouns, 'HpQ)hiav6€VKr6<;, irpaKTO'i Aristot. de anima 3, 9, p. 64 Sylb. ; Cattier, gazophyl. p. 34. The verbal irpo^rjKvTo^, akin to the forms cttt^Xu?, fikriiKvi, is an extended formation of which no example is to be found in classic Greek. /S. Among adjectives derived from other adjectives (or parti- ciples) a few are deserving of special notice. Such are 'n-epiovau>^f iiriova-Lo^i, like iKouaio<;, ideXovaco^ (Lob. Phryn. p. 4 sq.), which are extended formations from €kcov and iOiXcov like the feminines exovaa, iOeXovaa ; but e-movaLO'i [according to Leo Meyer, in Kuhn's Ztschr. fiir vergleichende Sprachforschung. Bd. VII. Berl. 1858. pp. 424 sq. 428, formed by means of the suffix to from iiri and 6W, and that denoting " what is eVi," so that dpro'i imovaio^; signifies " bread that is serviceable, or suited, or necessary for life, for subsistence, that which answers our needs, is adequate for them "] has probably direct relation to the Fem. (77) iiriova-a sc. v/xepa, and accordingly dpTopQiv, Kparaicx^pwv Constant. Porphyr. II. 33, by later authors even lovSaLo^poyj, eW'qv6(ppo3P Cedren. I. 660 ; Theoph. I. 149) and raireLvofjipoavvr} (cf. funaLo- ^poavvT) Constant. Man. 657), 6p7}To<; Const. Man. 409), Kap^LoyvaxTTri'i (^KapBLOTrXnjKTo^ Theopli. I. 736, KapBioKoXaTTTr}'; Leo Gr. 441), CTjTo^pwTo^, 6(f>daX/jioSov\eia, elBcoXoXdrprji;,^ elBwXodvrov (Cedren. 95 I. 286, cf. the abstract elhwXodvaia Theophan. 415), Bea-fiocj^vXa^ 7th ed. (^voi)TO(f>v\a^ Theophan. I. 608), opKcofxoo-ca (cf. d'rrtop.oaia^ Karayfio- cid), TTarpoirapdhoro^i (6e(yirapdhoTov\og Her. 6, 6Q. More rarely is the first part of the compound a verb, as in e6e\o9pr)(TKeia self-chosen worship ; cf. kOekoBovkia. Compound adjectives whose first part is a privative exhibit nothing anomalous, though perhaps many of them were not current in written Greek (jdpberavoiqro'i, dv€^epevv7)roa intensivo sermonis graeci, Erl. 1830, 4to. b. When the last part of the compound is a verb — in compound verbs therefore — the verbal stem is regularly found unaltered only in combination with the so-called old prepositions (Scaliger in Lob. Phryn. 266 ; Bttm. II. 469 f.) ; in other cases with a change so far forth as the verb strictly speaking first adopts its ending from a noun formed out of the stem, as dBwarelv, ofioXcyyel- aOai, vovOerelv, evep^erelv, Tpo7ro(f)opelvj opOorofieiv (cf. opOoTOfiia so in der Art euphemistischer Ausdriicke, dass sie allgemein gehalten werden ; die, unter welchen sie gangbar werden, verstandigen sich bald Uber ihren Sinn. 1 Cf. avdpiciroxdrpvs Ephracm. p. 743, irvpaoXaTpris Pachym. 134 ; Geo. Pisid. Heracl. 1, 14, 182, if/evSoKarpris Theodos. acroas. 2, 73, likewise xp«'"''oA.«fTpTjj frequent in Byzan- tine authors. § 16. FORMATION OF WORDS. 101 Theophan. cont. p. 812), ar^adoep^elv and ayaOovpy^lv^ fMerpio- Tradeiv, etc. This rule, however, has some undoubted exceptions ; Scaliger 113 long ago pointed out hv^OvrjaKw in Eurip. (cf. Bttm. II. 472). EvSoKelv, therefore, is directly formed from BoKeiv, and not, as Passow maintained, from an intermediate noun Boko^ (Fr. Rom. XL 370) ; it arose simply from a combination of the words in speaking ; cf. Bttm. II. 470. The same remark applies to KapaSoKciv (not to be referred to So/ceuo), Fritzschior. opusc. p. 151) ; no noun 92 Kapah6Ko7ro\,rj7rTr)6po'i,^ the second part is derived from a verb while the first denotes the object, etc. (Bttm. II. 478), occur in the N. T. but are unknown to the Greeks : e.g. Be^LoXd^of; he who takes position at one^s rigM, hence an attendant. From such compounds arise in turn, not only abstract nouns (o-KTjvoTTTf/La cvcn, belongs to this class, as though from a-KrjvoTrrjjo^, 1 On these forms see Bttm.U. 457. Against o'lKOvpyuv and otKovpy6s (Tit. ii. 5 var.) cf. Fr. de crit. conform, p. 29. 2 Also avddSTjs is a compound of this description, from avros and fjSet*', ^iStadai Bttm. U. 458. 102 § 16. FORMATION OF WORDS. according to numerous analogies, as KXivoTrriyLa), but also verbs : Xido/SoXelv from \idol36\opos Col. iv. 15,' Zt/vSs for 1 Keil in the Philolopns II. 468 expressed his conviction that he had found this name in an inscription in Bockh. § 16. FOKMATION OF WORDS. 103 Zr]v68. applies to a "part only of the actors ; cf. Xen. H. 1,2, 14 ol al'x/idXcoroL . . . u>-)^ovto e? AeKeXeiav^ 01 B' e? Meyapa, Cyr. 3, 2, 12 ; see Poppo ad. Cyr. p. 292 ; Bremi, Demosth. p. 273. So, in Matt, xxviii., it is first stated hi general terms ol evBe/ca fiaOrjTal . . . IBovre'i avrov irpo^eKiivrjcrav ; that this, however, is to be understood only of the greater number is clear from what follows — ol Be eBiaraaav. In Luke ix. 19 ol Be refers regularly to the previously mentioned ixajdiyrai vs. 18, and should seem to denote that all gave the answer which follows ; but the expressions oXKol Be . . . oXKol Be show that the answer was given by only a part of the disciples. Matt. xvi. 14 is more regular : ol Be elirov ' ol fiev ^la)dvvr^v , . . aXXoi Be . . . erepot Be. § 18. ARTICULUS PRAEPOSITIVUS, a. BEFORE NOUNS. 118 1. When 6, 17, to is employed as strictly an Article before a noun, it marks the object as one definitely conceived,^ whether in 1 Cf. Epiphan. haer. 1, 9, 4. — Herni. praef. ad Eurip. Iphig. Aul. p. 15: articulns ^noniam origine pronomen demonstrativum est, definit infinita idque duobus modis, aut designando certo de multis aut quae multa sunt, cunctis in unura coUigendis. 106 § 18. ARTICULUS PRAEPOSITIVUS, a. BEFORE NOUNS. 101 consequence of its nature, or the context, or some circle of ideas 7^1 ei assumed as known ; as, Mark i. 32 ore eBv 6 rjXtor], xiv. 10 ; 1 Cor. xi. 5 (Aristot. aniin. 2, 8 and 10 ; Lucian. catapl. 11 ; D. S. 1, 70, 83 ; Pol. 15, 29, 11 ; Philostr. Ap. 4, 44). We say, he had eyes like, etc. ; he spoke with a loud voice, etc. The Greek here by the Article designates what belongs to the individual in a definite form, as is more obvious from Heb. Tii. 24 aTrapd^arov e^ei, rr)v lepoxrvvrjv he hath the priesthood as un- changeable (predicate), Mark viii. 17 ; 1 Pet. ii, 12 ; iv. 8 ; Eph. i. 18 and from Matt. iii. 4 et^e to evSv/xa avTov diro T/ot^wi; Kafirj- Xou, Rev. ii. 18 (differing from the preceding examples by the addition of the pronoun). From Greek authors, for the former cf. Thuc. 1, 10 and 23 ; Plato, Phacdr. 242 b. ; Lucian. dial. deor. 99 8, 1 ; fugit. 10 ; eun. 11 ; D. S. 1, 52 ; 2, 19 ; 3, 34 ; Ael. anim. 6"'<^ 13, 15 ; Pol. 3, 4, 1 ; 8, 10, 1 ; see Lob. Phryn. 265 ; Kru. Dion. H. 126. (The Art. is sometimes omitted e.g. in 2 Pet. ii. 14 ; cf. Aristot. anim. 2, 8 and 10 with 2, 11.) b. 1 Cor. iv. 5 rore 6 e7racvo<; 'yevqaeTai eKda-Tw the praise which is due him, Rom. xi. 36 uvtm tj Bo^a elf tov^ alcova<;, xvi. 27 ; Eph. 1 iii. 21 ; Gal. i. 5 ; 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; Rev. v. 13 ; Reyjv. 11 a|to9 eZ \a/3ety rrjv Bo^av koI rrjv Tifirjv, Jas. ii. 14 ri to 6(f)€\o<; idv irlaTiv Xeyrj Ti? ex^tv the advantage to be expected, 1 Cor. xv. 32 ; 1 Cor. ix. 18 Tt? fiol ia-Tiv 6 f^ia06<; (Ellendt, Lexic. Soph. II. 212). In general the Art. here denotes that which is due, requisite, etc., Krii. 84. Accordingly it is often used where we employ a Pos- sessive Pronoun ; as, Rom. iv. 4 tw ipya^ofxeva 6 fiiaOo'i ov Xoyi^erat his reward, ix. 22 ; Luke xviii. 15. Cf. Fritzsche, Aristot. Amic. pp. 46, 99. 121 On the other hand, no example occurs of the use of the Art. discussed by Mtth. 714 and Rest 438 in appellations (Schaef. Demosth. IV. 365) ; for in Rev. yi. 8 ovofta avrw o ^avaros, viii. 11 to ovo/jui tov daT€po<; Aeyercu 6 on}/Lv6o^, xix. 13 KeKX-qraL to ovofia avrov 6 X6yo<; tov Beov, a name is men- tioned in every case which belongs individually and exclusively to the object. 3. Adjectives and participles used substantively are, like sub- stantives, rendered definite by the Article ; as, 1 Cor. i. 27 ol aocfyni, Eph. vi. 16 /ScXt; tov Trovrjpov, Gal. i. 23 6 Buokcov vfid<;, Tit. iii. 8 01 Treirio-TevKOTe'i tc5 0ea, 1 Cor. ix. 13 ol to, lepd epya^ofievoi, Matt. X. 20 ; 2 Cor. ii. 2 ; x. 16 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 16 ; Heb. xii. 27. § 18. ARTICULUS PRAEPOSITIVUS a. BEFORE NOUNS. 109 But the place of the noun may be occupied also by an indeclina- ble part of speech, as an Inf. or an Adverb, 2 Cor. i. 17, or by a phrase, Rom. iv. 14 oi ex vofjLov, Heb. xiii. 24 ol a-rro rrj ro • -— ei hvvrj ; Gal. V. 14 6 Tra? v6/xo • wyairrfaeL^ rov irX-qa-iov aov, Rom. viii. 26 ; xiii. 9 ; Luke i. 62 ; [Matt. xix. 18]. (Sentences thus made prominent are usually 104 quotations or interrogations.) Cf. Plato, Gorg. 461 e. and Phaed. ^^''«* 62 b. ; rep. 1, 352 d. ; Demosth. Con. 728 c. ; Lucian. Alex. 20 ; Mtth. 730 f. ; Stallb. Plat. Euthyph. p. 55, and Men. 25. Even an Adverb or a Genitive connected with the Art. (particularly the Neut.) becomes a virtual Substantive (Ellendt, Arrian. Al. 1. 84; Weber, Demosth. p. 237) ; as, Luke xvi. 26 ol iKeWev, Jno. viii. 23 TO, KUTO), Ta avco, Jno. xxi. 2 ol rov Ze^ehaiov^ Luke xx. 25 ra KaLcrapoeiKovTi, see Mey. ToiovTos is joined to a noun without an Art. when such, any such, of this sort, is meant ; as, Matt. ix. 8 i^ova-ia roLavrrj, Mark iv. 33 rotavrai irapa/SoXaL, Acts xvi. 24 Trapayyekla Toiavrrj, 2 Cor. iii. 12. When, on the other hand, a particular object is pointed out as such a or of such a sort, the noun natu- rally takes the Art. ; as, Mark ix. 37 tv tCjv toiovt irpwyfiarL means to overreach in business (cf. im Handel u. Wandel), Jno. ii. 25 iylvfocjKev Tt ^v iv tu> avdpdoira in the man with whom he (at thd time) had to do, (in every man), Krii. 84 ; cf. Diog. L. 6, 64 7rpo9 Tov crvviaTiivTa rov iralha kuI Xeyovra cl)? evcf^viaTaro^ iarc ... 110 etTre, etc. to the person (to every one) recommending the boy, etc., '^^^^ Jno. iii. 10 av el 6 StSao-AraXo? toO ^laparfk Nicodemus is regarded as the teacher of Israel kut e^o^vv, as he in whom all erudition is concentred, so that the contrast koI ravra ov ytpa}(7Kec<; may be made the more palpable (cf. Plato, Grit. 51 a. koI av ^T^cret? ravTa iroicov BiKaca Trpdrreiv 6 rfj aXr)deia t^? dpeTf} Beat ; xvii. 34 eaovrai hvo CTri Kkivr)<; fud<; • eh ^ 7rapa'X.T}(f)6i]cr€rai, Koi 6 6Te/)09 de6i](T€rac (one . . . the other ; cf., however. Matt. vi. 24 ; xxiv. 40 f.) ; 1 Jno. iii. 18 jxr] u^arrwiMev Xoyw /jirjBe ry yXooaa-rj (according to the best Codd., cf. Soph. Oed. Col. 786 Xoyw fiev ia-dXd, rolai 8' epyoicnv KUKd^ ; 2 Tim. i. 10 ; 1 Cor. ii. 14, 15 ; Rom. ii. 29 ; iii. 27, 30 ; Heb. ix. 4 ; xi. 38 ; Jude 16 and 19 ; Jno. xii. 5, 6 ; Jas. ii, 17, 20, 26 ; Rev. xx. 1. See Porson, Eurip. Phoen. p. 42, ed. Lips. ; Ellendt, Arrian. Al. I. 58 and his Lex. Soph. II. 247 ; cf. Plat. rep. I. 332 c. and d. ; Xen. A. 3, 4, 7 ; Galen, temper. 1,4; Diog. L. 6, 6 ; Lucian. Eunuch. 6 ; Porphyr. abstin. 1, 14. (The antithesis iv ovpavat Kal eVt t^«? 7^9 is nowhere fully es- 111 tablished Matt, xxviii. 18 ; 1 Cor. viii. 5 ; in both phrases the Art. 7th ed. ig wanting without variant in Eph. iii. 15.) But the necessity/ of the use and of the omission of the Article is obvious in Luke ix. 13 ovk cicriv rj/xlv irXelov r/ Trevre aproi koI ixOv€<; 8vo, vs. 16 certain cases {ovros 6 &v6pwiros, robs vXaKrj (better attested than iv rrj (fivX.), vii. 37 (dXaXovs), x. 2 ^apicroLoi, X. 46 vtds, xi, 4 irtoXov, xii. 33 Ovatwv, xiv, 33 ldKU)(3ov, xiv, 60 els fx-eaovy 108 Luke ii, 12 iv a.Tvr], iv, 9 o utos, iv, 29 tws 6(f>pvo6<; (Schaef. Mel. I.e. and Demosth. I. 328, also Eur. Hec. p. 121 ; Plut. I.e. ; Stallb. Plat. Crit. p. 134), when from the connection no doubt can exist as to what city, field, etc. is meant. This omission of the Art., however, is more varied in poetry than in prose (Scliaef. Demosth. I. 329). In the N. T., where in general this omission of the Art. is less frequent than in Greek prose,i the following instances of abstracts ^ may be noted : 1 Tim. vi. 11 ; Rom. i. 29 ; Col. iii. 8, and in partic- ular SiKaioavpT] Matt. v. 10 ; Acts x. 35 ; Rom. viii. 10 ; Heb. xi, 33, etc., drydTTi] Gal. V. 6 ; 2 Cor. ii. 8, 7ricrTi9 Acts vi. 5 ; Rom. i. 5 ; iii. 28 ; 2 Cor. V. 7 ; 1 Thess. v. 8, etc., KaKia 1 Cor. v. 8 ; Tit. iii. 3 ; Jas. i. 21, m-Xeove^ia 1 Thess. ii. 5 ; 2 Pet. ii. 3, dfiapTia Gal. ii. 17 ; 1 Pet iv. 1 ; Rom. iii. 9 ; vi. 14, etc., a-coTTjpia Rom. x. 10 ; 2 Tim. iii. 15 ; Heb. i. 14 ; vi. 9. Here belong also, dr/a66v Rom. viii. 28 (cf. Fr. in 1.), TTovrjpov 1 Thess. v. 22, koKov re koX KaKov Heb. v. 14. Besides these, we often find in the N. T. without the Article the concretes T^Xto?, 7^ (^Eartli), Oeo^, Trpo^coTroy, i/o/io?, etc., and many others, at least when in connection with prepositions etc. they form phrases of frequent occurrence (Kluit, II. 377 ; Heindorf, Plat. Gorg. p. 265). We arrange them in the following list, founded on the most approved readings : T]\tow? rjXiov sunlight Rev. xxii. 5 var. (Plat. rep. 5, 473 e.), So^a y^Kiov splendor of the sun 1 Cor. XV. 41 ; or when the sun is mentioned in an enumeration (ii? connection with the moon and stars), as Luke xxi. 25 eo-rai arj/jiela iv rjXlio koI aeXrjvy Koi ao-rpoi? in sun, moon, and stars, Acts xxvii. 20 ( Aesch. dial. 3,17; Plat. Crat. 397 d.). yq, earth 2 Pet. iii. 5, 10 ; Acts xvii. 24, ctti y^s Luke ii. 14 ; 1 Cor. ^ So we find in Greek authors usually yeVei hy nation, wX-fiOei, etc., in the N. T. inva- riably T(f yev€i Acts iv. 36 ; xviii. 2, 24, also ry ir\^eei Heb. xi. 12. In Greek authors the omission of the Article before a Nom. even is not unusual, as ^\ios iBvero Xen, A. 1, 10, 15 ; Lucian. Scyth. 4 ; in the N. T., on the contrary, Mark i. 32 ort I5u 6 ^\ios, Luke iv. 40 Swovtos tov rjXlov, Eph. iv. 26 6 fiKtos /u^ ^iriSverw. So also in the N. T. never ai\-i]vi) in the nominative, and there are more instances of the same kind. 2 The assertion (Ilarless on Eph. S. 320) that the Article can only be omitted before abstracts vrhen they denote virtues, vices, etc., as properties of a subject, is unproved, and cannot be proved on rational grounds. Cf. also Kritg. in JaJin's Jahrb. 1838. 1. 47 § 19. OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE BEFORE NOUNS. 121 viii. 5 ; Eph. iii. 15 (Heb. viii. 4), ciTr' aKpov y^s Mark xiii. 27 ; cf. Jacobs, Philostr. Imag. p. 2G6 ; EUeudt, Arrian. Al. I. 91 ; Stallb. Plat. Gorg. p. 257. But this word usually has the Art. when it signifies earth; in 133 the sense of land, on the other hand, the Art. is regularly wanting when 115 the proper name of the country follows, as Matt. xi. 24 yrj "^oBofjMv, [iv. 15] ^'h «d. Acts vii. 29 iv yrj MaSta/Li, vii. 36 €v yrj AlyvTrrov, xiii. 19 iv yy Xavaav, etc. H" (but Matt. xiv. 34 eis rrjv yrfv Tevvrjcrapir). See below, 2. b. Van Hengel's remark on 1 Cor. xv. p. 199 is not to the point. ovpavo?, ovpavol, is seldom without the Article (cf. Jacobs in the Schulzeit. 1831, No. 119, and Schoem. Plutarch. Agid. p. 135) : a. In the Gospels only in the phrase iv ovpavw, iv oipavoXs, i$ oipavwv, i$ oipavov, but by no means always, even in this case (cf. Matt. vi. 1,9; xvi. 19 ; Mark xii. 25 ; Luke vi. 23, for John except in i. 32 constantly uses ck tov oipavov) ; b. By Paul the Art. is regularly omitted in phrases like air ovpavov, i$ oipavov (cK TOV oipavov — van Hengel on 1 Cor. xv. p. 199 — is never used by Paul) ; in 2 Cor. xii. 2 we find also Iws rpCrov oipavov (Lucian. Philopatr. 12) see b. below, and Peter has even in the Nom. ovpavoi 2 Pet. iii. 5, 12 ; c. The Article is never omitted in Rev. Odkaaaa, e.g. Acts X. 6, 32 Trapa ^aXacrtrav, Luke xxi. 25 ■^^ovcnj^ 6aXaa-a-r]7rov, e.g. Luke v. 12 ttco-wi/ fTTi TrpdsojTTov, xvii. 16 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 25; of. Sir. 1. 17 ; Tob. xii. 16 ; Heliod. 7, 8 piirret €aT;Td^ ctti TrpdswTrov, Achill. Tat. 3, 1 ; Eustath. amor. Ismen. 7, p. 286 (HeHod. 1, 16), Acts xxv. 16 Kara 7rpd?w7rov, 2 Cor. x. 7 (Exod. xxviii. 27 ; xxxix. 13, etc.). Sefia, dpLo-Tepd, and the like, in the formulas ck Se^iwv Matt, xxvii. 38 ; xxv. 33 ; Luke xxiii. 33, i$ cucjvr/Awv Matt. xx. 21 ; xxv. 41 ; Mark x. 37 ; Kru. 86. iKKXrja-ia, 3 Jno. 6 oi IjxapTvp-qcrav aov ttJ ayairrj IvoiTTiov CKKXi^crtas, 1 Cor. xiv. 4 (tv iKK\r)a-ia 1 Cor. xiv. 19, 35?). $dvaTo<;, Matt. xxvi. 38 em Bavdfov (Sir. xxxvii. 2 ; Ii. 6), Phil. ii. 8, 80 fiexpi Oavdrov (Plat. rep. 2, 361 c. ; Athen. 1, 170), Jas. v. 20 Ik OavdTov (Job v. 20; Prov. x. 2 ; Plat. Gorg. 511 c), Luke ii. 26 ft^ iSelv OdvaTov, § 19. OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE BEFORE NOUNS. 123 Rom. vii. 13 Karcpya^o/Ae'iT/ Odvarov, i. 32 a^tot Oavdrov, 2 Cor. iv. 11 cis Odvarov TrapaSiSofxeOa, etc. ; cf. Himer. 21 /Aera Odvarov, Dion. H. IV. 2112, 135 224:2 ; cf. Grimm, Buch der Weish. S. 26. Ovpa, in the Plur. itn 6vpaL<; ad fores Matt. xxiv. 33 ; Mark xiii. 29 ; cf. Plutarch. Themist. 29 ; Athen. 10, 441 ; Aristid. Oral. Tom. II. 43 (on the other hand in the Sing, em ry Ovpa Acts v. 9). See Sintenis, Plutarch. Them. p. 181. vo'/Aos, meaning the Mosaic law, Rom. ii. 12, 23 ; iii. 31 ; iv. 13, 14, 15 ; 117 V. 1 3, 20 ; vii. 1 ; X. 4 ; xiii. 8 ; 1 Cor. ix. 20 ; Gal. ii. 21 ; iii. 11, 18, 21 ; 7th eA iv. 5 ; Phil. iii. 6 ; Heb. vii. 12, etc. ; always as a Gen. where the prin- 11^ cipal noun has no Art. : tpya voftov, and the like. (In the Gospels, except Luke ii. 23, (24,) where, however, a qualifying Gen. follows, we find con- stantly 6 vofios.) As to the Apocr., see Wahl, clav. 343. Also cf. Bornem. Acta p. 201. prjix-a, meaning God's word, followed by 6eov Rom. x. 17 ; Eph. vi. 17 ; Heb. vi. 5,^nd without OeoZ Eph. v. 26 . \) <4'6a\/j, 2 cVt TeXevrrj toO f3iov, 4, 3, 16 ; Plat. Phaedr. 237 c. ; Lys. Agorat. 2 7th cd. tVi KaraXva-CL tov Si]fxov tov v/mfTcpov, and further on TrarpiSa (reTepav avrCiv 115 KaraXiTTovTCs, Lucian. Scyth. 4 ^loi/ avTUiv, Dio Chr. 38, 471 vrrkp -yevco-ews ''''^- avTrj<;, Strabo 1.0, 719 vtto p.rjKovpa/yfiov, legg. 6, 784 6 a(o<^povoiv \\Q Kol aaxppovova-a, 6. 510 c. ; apol. 18 a. ; Crat. 405 d. ; Aristot. anal. *5th cA post. 1, 26 ; Thuc. 1, 54 ; Lycurg. 30 ; Lucian. parasit. 13 ; Herod. 8, 6, 11 ; Ael. anim. 5, 26 ; cf. also Krii. Dion. p. 140, and Xen. Anab. p. 92 , Bornem. Cyrop. p. 668. When such nouns are disjoined by rj, the Article is invariably repeated ; as. Matt. xv. 5 Ta> irarpl rj rfj fir^Tpl, Mark iv. 21 inro rov fioScov rj inro r-qv Kkivqv, Re v, xiii. 17 . When the connected nouns differ in number the repetition of the Article is naturally and grammatically almost indispensable ; as, Col. ii. 13 cf toIs TrapaTTTw/ACMn kcu ry aKpo(3v(TTia, Eph. ii. 3 to. OfXrffJLaTa t^s crapKo KoajXAa KOX ayyikoK kcu a.v6puiiroL. WITH ATTRIBUTIVES. 131 § 20. ARTICULUS PRAEPOSITIVUS, b. WITH ATTRIBUTIVES. 1. Attributives (Adjectives, Genitives, or Adjuncts formed with Prepositions^) annexed to a noun which has the Article, are placed either a. Between the Article and the noun, as 6 dja66<; avdpwrTo 071^ avaaTpo<^ri 1 Pet. iii. 2, rj trap ifjuov hiaOr^Kr) Rom. xi. 27, rj KaT iK\.oyr}v irpoOeaa ix. 11, to Katvbv avTov pbviqixelov Matt, xxvii. 60 ; cf. 2 Pet. ii. 7 ; Heb. v. 14 ; vi. 7. Or, b. After the noun ; in which case a. If they are adjectives,^ or adjuncts with prepositions, they uniformly take the repeated Article, but /3. If Genitives of nouns, they usually take it only aa. when these additions are to be strengthened, or to be made more pronii- 125 nent (1 Cor. i. 18 6 X0709 6 tov cTavpov, Tit. ii. 10 tt^v hihacrKoXiav '^^^^ Tr)v tov awTTJpo'i Tj/juov ; see Schaef. Melet. p. 8,72 sq. ; Mtth. 727),^ particularly when relationship is added for distinction's sake, as J no. xix. 25 Mapia 77 tov KXcoira,^ Acts xiii. 22 Aa^lB 6 tov 'leacrai, 1 Genitives of personal pronouns are joined to nouns, as is well known, without the aid of the Article, as 6 irals fiov. They blend, as it were, with the substantive. 2 It is obvious that tliis applies only to adjectives used as attributives to substantives, ^n Luke xxiii. 45 ivx^c^il rh icaTaire'Taer/xa tov vaov fxeaov, the word fxeaov beiong'S to the verb : teas rent . . . in the middle ; rh fiiffov KaTairfTaaixa would have a different mean- ing. So the similar adjectives of space or number tcrxcfoi, '6\os, /xSvos, 6\iyos alwajs appear without the Article when they are not really epithets, — cither a. afier the noun, as Matt. xvi. 26 iav rhv K6(iti.ov '6Kov KepS-f)crr] if lie gain the whole world (the world wholly), X. 30 CM Tpi'xes T. KeipoKrii iracrot TjptO/zTjfieVou tlaiv (ix. 35 ; Jno. v. 22 ; Plato, epin. 983 a.). Matt. xii. 4 ovk f^ow -^v aiav ttjv BtaTO/xov ttjv o^elav, Krii. 102 ; except that when the last are not connected by /cat (§ 19, 4) the Article must be repeated.^ It will be necessary to explain here more minutely, and to con- firm by examples, the case b. a. 126 a. Adjectives and possessive pronouns with the Article are 7th ed. placed after the noun, either Quite alone, as Jno. x. 11 o Trotfirjv 6 Ka\6<;, Acts xii. 10 eVl ttjv irvKriv Trjv aiSrjpdv, Jno. vii. 6 6 Kaipo^ 6 e/io?, i. 9 ; iv. 11 ; xv. 1 ; Luke ii. 17 ; iii. 22 ; viii. 8 ; Acts xix. 16 ; Eph. vi. 13 ; Col. i. 21 ; 2 Tim. iv. 7 ; 1 Cor. vii. 14 ; xii. 2, 31 ; 1 Jno. i. 3 ; Jas. i. 9 ; iii. 7 (in which case the adjective sometimes is subjoined for greater perspicuity, cf. particularly Jas. iii. 7, sometimes is to be made more emphatic, Bornem. Luc. p. xxxvi. ; Mdv. 11). Or When the governing noun is amphfied by a Gen. or in some other way, as Matt. iii. 17 6 vto? fiov 6 dyaTnjTO'i, 2 Cor. vi. 7 Bid T(ov ottXcov TrjvXacoi Kvpio) 'I. Kal rrjV drfdmfjv rrjv ek iravra^ rovvre 'I. rjXevOepaxri fjue dirb rov vofwv Trj)La<;, where the words iv irpavrrjTL iv /QacrtA-ev?, etc. With other words in apposition, also, the use or the omission of the Article is determined by the general rule ; and it is strange that any one should assert, in absolute terms, that a word in ap- ^2(3 position never has the Article. Your father, an unlearned man, 6th ei would be expressed, to be sure, even in Greek without the Article ; but in the expression, your father, the field-marshal, the Article stands with entire propriety. Grammatically this applies to Jno. 151 viii. 44. In general, the use of the Article may be regarded as more common than its omission (Rost 439). § 20. ARTIC. PRAEPOSITIVUS, b. WITH ATTRIBUTIVES. 139 The Article may be omitted, in accordance with the principles explained in § 19, even when the intention is to express a charac- teristic predicate distinctive of the particular individual ; as, Rom. i. 7 OTTO deov 7raTp6aLaTov plylrei'i '\'^,2 VTTO 7raTp6. 617 b.; Theophr. ch. 15 ; Schneid. Isocr. Paneg. c. 24 ; Arrian. Ind. 34, 1 ; Xen. Ephes. 2, 5 ; 4, 3 ; Hcliod. 7, 2 ; 8, 5 ; Strabo 7, 302 ; Lucian. asin. 25, 44 ; scyth. 1 ; Philostr. Apoll. 7, 30 ; cf. Held, Plutarcli. Timol. p. 409 ; Herm. Lucian. conscr. hist. p. 106 ; Ellendt, Lexic. Soph. H. 241 ; Schoem. Plutarch. Cleom. p. 226 ; Mdv. S. 14. In Phil. ii. 9 the text. rec. has ovo/xa to vTrlp ttolv ovopa a name that is above every name. Yet good Codd. [Sin. also] have the Article before ovojaa : the name (which he now enjoys), which etc., the (known) dignity, which etc. 133 CHAPTER II. rth ed. 153 PRONOUNS. §21. THE PRONOUNS IN GENERAL. 1. In the use of the Pronouns the language of the N. T. deviates from the earlier prose of the Greeks, or even from Greek usage in general, only in these two particulars : First, it nniltiplies the personal and demonstrative pronouns for the sake of greater perspicuity (or emphasis) § 22 sqq. Secondly, it neglects— more frequently than do the later Greeks even — many forms which ranked rather among the luxuries of the language, or were not felt by Orientals to be necessary (such as the correlatives o?Tt9, OTTo'o-o?, oTToio'i, iTrfkiKo^ lu iudircct discourse) ; whereas those modes of expression by which the Greek aimed at conciseness (e.g. attraction), have become very frequent in the N. T. writers 1 This appears most plainly in sentences like Mark xv.41 &\\ai iro\Aai at awavafiaaai aiiT^ fls 'lfpo(r6\v(M. § 21. THE PRONOUNS IN GENERAL. 141 § 24. On the other hand it has been erroneously asserted that avT6 rf'x*'''* rSre 4(f>^ oTs (that is, Kapvo7s) vvv ivaurxvveffde. See, however, § 23, 2, p. 158. 142 § 21. THE PRONOUNS IN GENERAL. that the opposite construction occurs, that is, a Sing, pronoun re- ferring to a Plural noun (Bhdy. 295) ; but e| ov has become in usage nothing more than an adverb, exactly equivalent in sense to uncle. On the other hand, in 2 Jno. 7 ouro? eanv 6 7r\dvoa • • • oLKova-t), Arrian. Al. 2, 18, 2 ; Krii. 114 (Liv. 1, 10, 1 ; 6, 2', 9 ; 38, 56, 3). Accordingly, even in the fol- lowing passages no one will regard the repetition of the noun as idle: Rom. v. 12 Bl €vb<; dvdpooirov r) dfjuaprla eh rov Koa/xov el<;rj\6€, Kal 8ta tt}? dfxapTia<; 6 OdvuTo^, Jno. x. 29 o irarrjp fjbov, 09 BeBwKe /jbOL, fiei^wv irdvTcov iarC' Kol ovSeU Suvarai dpTrd^eLV €K Tr)*•» «i Jno. viii. 44 T/reucrTT;? earl koI 6 iraTrjp avrov (i/reuSou?) , see Liicke 1^^ in loc, 3 Rom. ii. 26 iav rj aKpo/Sva-ria ra SiKatMfiara tov vofiov^^^^ ^vXdcrar}, nv'xi rj aKpo^varia avrov (of such an dKp6^vcrT0<;) ek TrepirofiTjv XoyiaOrjaerat ; cf. Theodoret. I. 914 tovto rrj'i diroaro- 1 Compare, in general, Urn. diss, do pronom. hAn6s in the Acta Seminar, philol. Lips. Vol. I. 42 sqq. and his Opiisc. I. 308 sqq. 2 vSimpler is the reference of ourdj in the Plur. to an abstract signifying in itself nothing more than a community of individuals, as iKK\v(ria. On this see § 21, 3. On Col. iv. 15 according to the reading avra/v, see Me>/- in loc. 8 The other explanation : father of the liar, appears neither grammatically simpler nor preferable in meaning. Indeed, father of falsehood is a more comprehensive idea, and John has a predilection for abstract expressions. 19 146 § 22. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. \tKrj<; '^dpvTO'i iBtov avTol<; yap QairocTToXot^^ etc.^ In Luke xxiii. 51 avTOiv refers to the Sanhedrim, implied in the predicate fiovXevTrj^; verse 50. Cf. Jonah i. 3 evpe ttXoIov ^aBl^ov et? &apcrl6^ov avrSiv /jlt) (po^TjOrjre., that is rcov KaKovvrwv v/xd'i, or those from whom you must suffer (Tracr^^ety), see Hm. Vig. 714 ;2 Eph. V. 12 rd Kpu(f>rj yiv6/d.eva vrr avTcov, that is t&ji/ rd epja tov aKorowi iroiovvTwv verse 11 ; Acts x. 10. Cf. Aristoph. Pint. 566 ; Thuc. 1, 22, 1 and Poppo, in loc. ; Heinichen, ind. ad Euseb. III. 539. On Acts xii. 21 see § 21, note 1, p. 11:2. 4) Avt6<; sometimes has no antecedent grammatically implied in what precedes, but must be referred to some subject assumed to be known ; as, Luke i. 17 avT6pa rfi XavavinSi Br)(rovf, oTs (Xavavaiois) flvfv 6 Oths fii) airoKoXi^cu. Compare also the passage of an ancient poet in Cic. orat. 2, 46, 193 : neque paternnm adspectum es veritus, quem (patrem) aetate exacta indigem Liberum lacerasti, and Gcll. 2, 30, 6. 2 Otherwise in Epiphan. II. 368 a. eS^at fioi, virtp, 8ir«s vyialvw . . . iriffTtvf, reKvoy, r^ iaTavpunfi', Kol f^fts javT-qi/ (u7e/a>'). § 22. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 147 xi. 28 it refers to the Israelites, suggested to the reader by the 133 antecedent particulars. The above-meutioiied eh ^aprvpiov avroh Matt. viii. 4 comes under this head.; those meant by avroU are the Jews (the public, the community among whom the precepts of Moses, o 7rpos SwSeKa and aurovs in verse 31 (what intervenes being a statement of our Lord's). So also in Heb. iv. 13 160 avTov relates to tov 6iov in 12; and airnj's in Luke xxi. 21 to 'lepova-aXrjfx. in 20. Lastly, in 2 Cor. vi. 17 « fieaov avrwv, in a somewhat transformed quotation from the Old Test., refers to aTna-Toi in verse 14; and in Rom. X. 18 airCjv suggests to every reader the preachers, who were also men- tioned concretely in 15. On Acts xxvii. 14, where some have referred avTTJ'i to the ship, see Kuhnol in loc. In Luke ii. 22 avrwv points to mother and child (Mary and Jesus). Expositors are not agreed whether in Ileb. xii. 17 avTrjv refers to fierdvouiv or to evXoyuiv; from the correlation be- tween (.vpicTKuv and iK^rfTilv, however, the former reference is the more probable. In Matt. iii. 1 6 aura! and iir avrov relate unquestionably to Jesus. A slight inadvertence of another sort appears in Matt. xii. 15 ; xix. 2 ■f]Ko\ov6r](Tav avT(2 o)(\ol ttoWol kol iOepaTrevcrev avTov\ov kol irapaKa- Xovaiv avTOv (XpiCTTOv), tva avTov (tu<^A.ou) ail/TjToi, Mark ix. 27, 28. So ovTos in Jno. xi. 37. See below, § G7. In a clause following a relative clause, and where os or its continued influence might be expected, Greek authors frequently — indeed, almost uniformly (Bhdy. 304) — employ koI auros (ovtos), the wi'iter modifying the construction, (Ilm. Vig. 707 ; Ast. Plat. legg. p. 449 ; Boisson. Nic. p. 32 ; Bornem. Xenoph. con v. p. 196 ; Stallb. Plat. Protag. p. 68 ; rep. I. 197 ; Foertsch, observ. in Lysiam, p. 67 ; "VYeber, Dem. 355 ; Tei[)el, Scriptores Grace, Germ., Lat. a relativa verbor. construct, saepe neque injuria semper discessisse. Coesfeld, 1841, 4to. ; cf. Grotefend, lat. Gramm. § 143, 5 ; Kritz, Sallust. II. 540). From the N. T. may be quoted under this head, 2 Pet. ii. 3 ots to xpi/xa IxTraXat ovk dpyct kol tj aiTuiXcva. avToyv ov woTOL^et, Acts iii. 13 ; 1 Cor. viii. 6, with less appropriateness Rev. xvii. 2 lieO 17s CTTopvevaav . . . kol ificOva-Orfirav ck tov oivov rTJ<; Tropvctas avrfj^, where it was necessary to avoid the construction with the relative on account of the nouns to be connected with the pronoun. In Hebrew, as is well known, owing to its great simplicity, the continuing of a sentence without the relative is very common ; yet an idiom foreign to the genius of the language should not be introduced into the text by supplying "rrx with the following clause. (In passages such as Jno. i. 6 ; Acts x. 36 ; Luke ii. 36 ; xix. 2, to require the relative instead of auTos or ovto?, is to mis- apprehend the simplicity of N. T. diction ; particularly as even Greek authors not unfrequently employ the same idiom; see Aelian 12, 18; Strabo 8, 371 ; Philostr. Soph. 1, 25 ; cf. Kypke 1. 347. On the other 150 § 22. PEESONAL AM) POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. hand, in 1 Cor. vii. 13 for tjtl^ i^ei avSpa aTricrrov /cat auros crwcuSoKct etc. the expression os crvv€v8. etc. might have been iised.) In the N. T. 6 avro'?, the same, takes after it a Dat. of the person when it denotes the same {identical) with, as 1 Cor. xi. 5 ; of. Her. 4, 1 1 9 ; Xen. M. 1, 1, 13 ; 2, 1, 5 ; Cyr. 3, 3, 35 ; 7, 1, 2 ; Isocr. Paneg. c. 23 ; Plat. Menex. 244 b. ; Dio. Ch. 332, 97. Note. Autos in the Nom., as is well known, never stands in classic Greek for the unemphatic he (Krii. 109, 114). From the N. T. also' no decisive 142 passages can be produced to prove this usage [which Bttm. Gramm. des Ttli ed. neutest. Sprachgebr. p. 93 f. wrongly concedes] (cf. Fr. Mt. p. 47) ; even in Luke, who employs auros the most frequently (cf., in particular, Luke 163 V. 16, 17 ; xix. 2), it never occurs without a certain emphasis. It denotes, a. Self, in complex antitheses, and for all the three persons, as Mark 130 ii. 25 iireLvaa-cv auros koL ot /act aurov. Acts xviii. 19 ckciVous KaTcAiTrcv*, avros 6th ed. Sk ctscX^wv, etc., Luke v. 37 ; x. 1 ; xviii. 39 ; 1 Cor. iii. 15 ; Mark i. 8 ; Jno. iv. 2 ; vi. 6 ; ix. 21 ; Luke vi. 42 ttws Svvacrai Aeyeiv . . . auros ttjv iv Tw ocfiOaXfJiia crov 8ok6v ov /SXcttcdv, Heb. xi. 1 1 irCoTU kol avrrj 2a/)pa Swa/XLV CIS KaTa/3oXr]v o-7rcp/i.aTos (Xaficv even Sara herself (who had been incredu- lous), Jno. xvi. 27 auros 6 iraT-qp ^lAft v/u.as he himself, of himself (without entreaty on my part, verse 26), Rom. viii. 23. Avros was thus used by the disciples in speaking of Christ (compare the well known airos c^a) : Mark iv. 38 ; Luke v. 16 ; ix. 51 ; xxiv. (15) 36. Cf. Fischer, ind. The- ophan. under auro's. See, in general, the Lexicons. -4 b. Emphatic he, even he : Matt. i. 21 koXcctcis to ovojxa avTov 'Irjcrovv • avTos yap crwcrei rov Xaov, xii. 50; Col. i. 17. Autos is not used for the unemphatic he also in Luke i. 22 {he himself, as distinguished from the rest : iiriyvuiaav), ii. 28 {he Simeon, as distinguished from the parents of Jesus, verse 27), iv. 15 ; vii. 5 {he, of himself, from his own resources), Acts xiv. 12 {he Paul, as leader, verse 11), Mark vii. 36 ; [1 Thess. iii. 11 ; iv. 1 6 ; V. 23 ; 2 Thess. ii. 1 6 ; iii. 1 6.] (On the antithesis in Rom. viii. 23 auToi . . . €v eavTois see Fr. in loc.) 5. The reflexive pronoun eavrov, etc., which originally (as com- pounded of e and avros:) belongs to the third person, and in tlie N. T. is regularly so employed (frequently in antithesis and with emphasis, 1 Cor. x. 29 ; xiv. 4 ; Eph. v. 28, etc.), is also, when no ambiguity is to be apprehended, employed in reference to the first and second persons. It is used a. In the Plural, — as well for the first person. Rom. viii. 23 (j7yLtei' avrov would refer directly to the subject of the verb €?8c, that is, Jesus (Krii. 110). In the N. T. it is, in general, unlikely that a reflexive should be used in reference to a remote subject, that is, one which is not in the 1 In the later writers, as Aesop, the Scholiasts, etc. avrov seems to predominate ; see Schaef. ind. ad Aesop, p. 124. Cf. Thilo, Apocr. I. 163. 2 Cf., however, Held, Pint. Timol. p. 373." 8 Bremi, in the Jahrb. der Philol. IX. S. 171 , says : " On the use of avrov and avrov it is easy to lay down rules, but in certain cases the decision will always remain doubtful ; and it is far more difficult in Greek than in Latin to hit the mark," etc. " When the reference to the subject predominates in the mind, the reflexive is used ; but when the subject is viewed as a more remote object, the pronoun of the 3d person. In Greek one must yield rather to his individual impression, if you please, his mood at the moment." Further, see some pood rcm.arks on reciprocal pronouns in general by Hoffmann, in the Jahrb. d. Philol. VII. S. 38 ff. 152 § 22. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. same proposition as the pronoun ; this is owing to the simplicity of its narrative style, which, in like manner, disdains to adhere closely to the relative construction, see above p. 149. Accordingly, in Matt, in the passage referred to and in Eph. i. 17 aurov, avTov, should be adopted with- out hesitation, but airou in Acts xii. 1 1 ; Heb. v. 7 ; Rom. xiv. 1 4 ; see Fr. Exc. 5 ad Matt. p. 858 sqq. (where the view of Matthiae ad Eurip. Iphig. Aul. 800 and Gramm. I. 355 is examined) ; Poppo, Thuc. III. I. 159 sq. On the other hand, it deserves attention, as remarked by Bengel, appar. ad Matt. i. 21, that in the Codd. of the N. T. the prepositions arro, CTTL, viro, Kara, fxtrd, [dvTt] are never written d^', c^', etc. before avrov. Hence, with Bleek (Epist. to the Heb. II. 69), it might be inferred that the N. T. writers never employed the reflexive form avrov, (but used, wherever necessary, kavTov instead of it). In fact, recent editors have printed the form avroO almost everywhere ; as the uncial Codd. of the N. T. and of the Sept. that have diacritic marks recognize avrov almost 144 exclusively (Tdf. praef. N. T. p. 26 sq. [ed. vii. p. 58 sq.]). These Codd., 7th ed. ^Q \^Q sure, are not of greater antiquity than the eighth century, and the 165 expression " /ere constanter " suggests the desirableness of a more accurate collation. Now it is trtie that in most passages a reflexive is not absolutely required ; yet it is difficult to believe that Paul in Rom. iii. 25 could have written ei? ivZei^LV t^s SiKatoo-vvr^s avrov (in the face of Iv ai/xart avrov), or Jno. in ix. 21 auros Trept avrov ; compare also Eph. i. 9 ; Rom. xiv. 14 ; j^ Luke xix. 15 ; xiii. 34 ; Mark viii. 35 ; Rev. xi. 7 ; xiii. 2. Hence in the N. T. also, the choice between avrov and avrov must be left to the discreet judgment of editors. 6. The personal pronouns eydi, crv^ i7/xete<: ■f]fuv ra 6(f>ei\.ri/xaTa rj/jiMV a)9 kol r)fj,€L<; ar]Ka^ev etc., Jno. iv. 10 av av f,Tr)aaajetv (ye. since they themselves have no pro- visions with them vs. 36), Jno. vi. 30 ; xxi. 22 ; Mark xiii. 9, 23 ; 1 Cor. ii. 3f. ; Matt. xvii. 19 ; 2 Tim. iv. 6. So when the person is described by a word in apposition, as Jno. iv. 9 TTco? aif 'JouSaio? mv etc., Rom. xiv. 4 av rc'? el 6 Kpivcov aWoTpiov oUeTrjv, Jno. x. 33 ; Acts i. 24 ; iv. 24 ; Luke i. 76 ; Eph. iv. 1 ; or reference is made to some, preceding description, as Jno. V. 44 (42, 43) ; Rom. ii. 3 ; or such description is assumed as § 22. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 153 something known, as Jno. i. 80 ; Luke ix. 9 (/, — one wlio as king is certain of what has taken place) ; Epli. v. 32 (I as apostle) ; Jno. ix. 24 ; Gal. vi. 17 ; 1 Cor. xi. 23. Sv is used in addresses particularly when one out of many is meant, as Jno. i. 43 ; Jas. ii. 3 ; or when the person addressed is made prominent by an attributive, as 2 Tim. ii. 1 ; Matt. xi. 23. These pronouns nowhere occur wholly without emphasis and whei-e they might have been dispensed with (Bornem. Xcn. Conv. 187). For when in Eph. v. 32, for instance, we find ejo) Be Xiyw ek XpLdTov, but in 1 Cor. i. 12; Rom. xv. 8 Xe'yw Si, — in the first passage an emphasis is intended, in the other two, none. Moreover, the Codd. vary much with regard to the use or ctaiission, as well as the position, of these pronouns ; and each case must be decided, not according to any fancied pecidiarity of style in ■the separate writers (Gersd. I. 472 f.), but according to the nature of the sentence. The i)ersoiial pronoun is both used and omitted in close succession in 166 Luke X. 23, 24 ot /JAeVovTC? a ySAcTrerc . . . ttoXXoI 7rpo(f>rJTaL . . ■ rjOeXrjaav iBtlv, a v/u,£ts /3A€7r€T€. Only the latter case, however, contains a real antithesis (ii/xcls opposed to irpoffi^raL, /3ao-iA., etc.) ; in the first, the 6(fi6a\- fjiol fiXiiTovTi.rxi:n X'b "'SJX'] Kai vvv eyw ei/At oii;^ rffxaprov ; cf. V. 3 ; vi. 18 ; 1 Kings ii. 2. On avTo (in Acts x. 26 xdyw avro's) see Fr. Rom. II. 75. 7. The possessive pronouns are sometimes to be understood objectively ; as, Luke xxii. 19 r) ifirj avd/xvrja-i^ memoria mei (1 Cor. xi. 24), Rom. xi. 31 to5 vfierepw eXeet, xv. 4; 1 Cor. xv. 31 ; xvi. 17 139 (not in Jno. xv. 10). So also in Greek authors (especially the^'''<^ poets) ; as, Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 28 evvoia Kai (f)L\ia rfj ifjifj, Thuc. 1, 77 TO r/fierepov Seo?, 6, 89 ; Plato, Gorg. 486 a. ; Antiphon. 6, 41, etc. On the Latin cf. Kritz, Sallust. Cat. p. 243. Instead of a possessive pronoun iSio<; is occasionally employed in the N. T. — an impropriety similar to the use of pro2Jriu8 instead of suus or ejus in later" Latin (and of olKelo^ by the Byzantine 20 154 § 22. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. writers, see e.g. Index to Agath., Petr. Patric, Priscus, Dexipp., Gljcas, and Theophanes in the Bonn edit.), — as Matt. xxii. 5 cnrriXdev ek rov iBiov dypoi^, witliout any emphasis (that is, without any antithesis to Kocvo^i or uWuTpios), its parallel in the second member is evrt ttjv ifMrropiav aurov ; xxv. 14 eKoXeae tov<; lBiov mean : let each man have his tvi/e, and let each Jth eil. ivoman have her own husband. Isocr. Demon, p. 18 aKcirei irpcorov, TTCtJ? vTrep Tbiv avTov hupKrjcrev ' 6 yap /ca«ct>9 htavo7;6ei<; virep rtav IB 1(0 V etc. Bohme, Ktihnol, and others, improperly regard cBto<; in Heb. vii. 27 also, as used for the simple possessive pronoun ; to IBiat, afiapriaL there, al rov Xaov (as aWoTpiai) are expressly oi> posed ; cf. also iv. 10. When i'5to9, as in Tit. i. 12 iBto^ avruv 7rpo(f)^T7)ii (Wisd. xix. 12), is added to a personal pronoun, the pronoun merely expresses the idea of possession (their poet), and iBlo<; makes the antithesis, their oivn (not a foreign) poet. Similarly in Aeschin. Ctesiph. 294 c. ; Xen. Hell. 1, 4, 13 ; Plato, Menex. 247 b. See Lob. Phryn. p. 441 ; Wurm, Dinarch. p. 70. Kara with the Ace. of a personal pronoun is considered as a circumlo- cution for the possessive pronoun, as Eph. i. 15 rj kuO' lyxSs Trto-rts i/oicr faith. Acts xvii. 28 ol KaO^ v/tas Troir/rat, xviii. 15 vo/aos 6 naO' vfxa.'i, xxvi. -S, 140 etc. This is in the main connect ; it results, however, quite naturally from 6tli eJ. the signification of Kara : rj Kaff vfji.ai€ya, €1 i7/i,et? vfj-wv to. aapKCKo. OeptaoiJiev, Phil. iii. 20 ; c. when the Gen. belongs to two nouns,^ Jno. xi. 48 rjixStv koI tov tottov Kal to I^vos, Acts , xxi. 11 ; Luke xii. 35 ; Rev, ii. 19 ; 2 Cor. viii. 4 ; 2 Tim. iii. 10 ; Tit. i. 15 ; ' 1 Thess. i. 3 ; ii. 19 (D. S. 11,16). (The form ifiov depending on a noun, and placed after it, occurs only in such combinations as Rom. i. 12 TrioTews vp-wv re Kol ip.ov, xvi. 13 firfipa auTov kox ip.ov.) The insertion of a per- sonal pronoun between an article and a noun, as in 2 Cor. xii. 19 mrkp rrj? vp.wv olKoSop.rj'i, xiii. 9 ; i. 6, occurs on the whole but rarely. Cf. in general, 147 Kruger, Xen. Anab. 5, 6, 16. ^thed. When the noun is preceded by an adjective, the Genitive of the per- sonal pronoun if placed before the noun is inserted between it and the adjective ; as, 2 Cor. y. 1 rj cTriyeto? r]p.u)v oIklo, 2 Cor. iv. 1 6 6 e^w 17/xaiv avOpwTro<;. Note 2. The Dative of the personal pronouns in easy and familiar speech is sometimes in Greek and Hebrew (just as it is with us) appar- ently superfluous (dativus ethicus, Bttm. 120, 2, and Dem. Mid. p. 9 ; Jacob, Lucian. Toxar. p. 138). As instances of this usage from the N. T. — where certainly it might have been expected — are enumerated sometimes Matt. xxi. 5, a quotation from the Old Test., sometimes Matt. xxi. 2 ; Rev. ii. 5,^ 16 ; Heb. x. 34. But in the first of these last three passages, aydyere fxoi means bring him to me, and dyayerc alone would have been defective. In Rev. ii. lpxop.ai croi raxu signifies I will come (punishing, cf. 14 «x«« Kara 1 'O iroTT7p fxov and h ui<$j fiov 6 ayairnr6s is the usual order even in the N. T. Like- wise the Gen. of avros is regularly (see, however, Rost p. 459) put after the substantive. 2 When this arrangement is not adopted, the pronoun must, for perspicuity, be re- peated, Acts iv. 28 '66/3os. Even in Rom. ii. 9 ipv^-q is not a mere redundancy ; it denotes that in man which feels the 6'Ati//i? and a-Tevoxaip-, even should these come upon the body. In Rom. xiii. 1 Traaa if/vxr] iSovataLs VTrep€xov(raL oU vvv eTraia-jfyveade^ xiv. 21 ; Jno. xix. 37 (Sept.) ; Luke v. 25 ; ^ Similar to this would be 1 Tim. ii. 10 aA\' 6 wpfirei yvvai^iv iirayytWofjifvais dtoae- Qeiay, if we unite with Matthies in resolving dAA' 8 into a\A* iv -rovrw h wp. But it is simpler and easier to explain the passage by joining 5«' tpyccv with Kofffxitv verse 9. Had Paul intended to convey the former meaning, he would have expressed himself distinctly by writing tv ^ irpiirfi etc. 2 Rriche has obviously stated more than the truth in asserting that in all other in- stances the only demonstrative omitted, is one governed by a verb, and never one gov- § 23. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 159 2 Pet. ii. 12 ;i Soph. Phil. 957 ; Aristot. rhet. 2, 1, 7 ; Isocr. Demon, p. 2. Or, b) To the demonstrative understood ; as, Jno. vi. 29 Xva tnarev- crrjTe et? ov aTreareikev eKeivo^, xvii. 9 ; Rom. xiv. 22 ; 2 Cor. v. 10 ; xii. 6 ; Gal. i. 8 f. ; Heb. v. 8 (Num. vi. 21). Also Heb. ii. 18 iv 144 u> Tretrovdev ain6<; Treipaadei'i, hvvarai, toiovTO tovtov uvtov ev€Ka, ou-)(^ rjyovfievoi fie diroicrelvaL etc., see Maetzner, Antiph. p. 219 ; Schoem. Isaeus p. 370. The use of the demonstrative pronoun in such expressions as Acts i. 5 ov fj.€Ta iroAAas ravras •^/xcpas afier (in) a few days, is easily explained. It does not depend, as Kiihnol thinks, on a transposition of ttoXvs, but is to be explained like the Latin ante hos quinque dies, etc. ; cf. in Greek ws oXiytDV irpo TovTOiv rjfJLepuiV (Achill. Tat. 7, 14), ov -rrpo ttoAAojv tojvSc r/fieptav (Heliod. 2, 22, 97). Avrai rjfiepai are, these very days just past ; and ante hos quinque dies strictly means : before these (reckoning from the present ^ In Rom. ii. 3 an amplified Voc. intervenes between tovto and the clause with 8t*. 21 162 § 23. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. time) last past five days. The demonstrative, therefore, connects the 153 period specified with the present. Expositors and lexicographers are /fth ed. able to explain the force of the demonstrative in Jas. iv. 13 ■jro/ocucrw/Ae^a ci's TijvSc T^v ttoXlv into such and such a city, only by a reference to the well- known 6 Setva ; but oSc is also used by the Greeks in exactly the same way, e.g. Plutarch. Symp. 1, 6, 1 rr/vSc rriv yjjxipav such and such a day. [The full and ordinary demonstrative signification, however, is claimed, both for the passage in James and for that in Plutarch, by Bttm. Gramm. des neutest. Sprachgebr. p. 90 ; and Huther on James, 2nd. ed., agrees with him.] 175 The Plur. ravra is not unfrequently in Greek employed in reference to a single object, and stands therefore, strictly taken, for tovto (Plat. Apol. 19 d. ; Phaedr. 70 d. ; Xen. Cyr. o, 3, 19 ; see Schaef Dion. p. 80 ; cf. also Jacobs, AchilL Tat. p. 524 ; Stallb. Plat. Apol. p. 19 d. ; Maetzner, Antiphon p. 153).^ Instances of this in the N. T. are 3 Jno. 4 (where several Codd. give the correction Tavr-qs.) see Liicke, and also Jno. i. 51 ; but undoubt- edly not Jno. xix. 3G, see van lleiigel, annotat. p. 85 sq. ; in Luke xii. 4 the adverbial phrase yuera ravra means afterwards. Nearly the same is to be said of the well known koI ravra, idque, Heb. xi. 12. On 1 Cor. ix. 15 see Mey.^ In 1 Cor. vi. 1 1 ravra may have a contemptuous secondary signification : koL tovto. rtve? •^rt, and such a set, talis farinae homines (Bhdy. 281 ; Stallb. Plat. Rival, p. 274) ; yet perhaps this was far from the apostle's thought, and ravra is frequently used in reference to a series of predicates : of such a description, ex hoc genere fuistis ; Kypke and Pott in loc. have blended things quite dissimilar. 147 In 1 Jno. V. 20 Liicke thinks he finds a prozeugma of the demonstrative 6th ed. pronoun (cf. also Stud, und Kritik. II. S. 147 ff".) : ovros Io-tw 6 a\rjOLv6<; 0e6<:, Kot (avTrf) ^w^ alwvios, — not impossible, but in my opinion un- necessary. Note. Respecting the position of ovros and ckcTvos, it must be remarked that the former, from the nature of the case, usually stands before, and the latter after, the substantive ; as, oStos o av^pwiros, 6 avOpunros iKelvo's. Yet the opposite order also occurs in the case of ovros (Matt, xxviii. 15 6 Ao'yos ovros, Luke i. 29 etc.) without essential difi'erence of meaning, with e/cetvos (Luke xii. 47 ; Heb. iv. 1 1 ) particularly in the connecting phrases iv eKetVats Tttis yjfJLepaui, iv iKUvrj T-rj rjixepa or u)pa,,iv iKuvia rw Katpw (Gersdorf 433). It must not, however, be imagined that a writer has so committed himself to the one arrangement, that the other should be altered when it is confirmed by approved Codd. or by the sense. 1 Fritzsche, quaestion. Lucian. p. 126, qualifies this remark as follows : Plur. poni de una re tantummodo sic, si neqiie ulla emergat ambiguitas et aut universe, non definite quis loquatur, aut una res plurium vi sit praedita. 2 In tiie same vray e'^' ofs and avQ' Siv are used in Greek, where the Sing, would suffica Fr. Rom. I. 299. § 24. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 163 §24. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 154 7th ei 1. In accordance with the law of attraction (cf. Hm. Vig. 891 sqq. ; Bhdy. 299ff.),i the relative pronoun o? (never in the N. T. o9Tt?)»^ which by reason of the governing verb should stand in the Accusative, is so drawn by the oblique case (Gen. or Dative) of the 176 preceding noun with which it has a logical connection (that of a subordinate with a principal clause), as to pass over into this oblique case. This peculiar construction, which gives a sentence more internal unity and a certain periodic compactness, was fre- quent even in the Sept., and in the N. T. it regularly occurs (though not everywhere without var.) ; as, Luke ii. 20 errl irda-cv oU TjKovaaVy Jno. ii. 22 (iv. 50) eiriaTevaav rut \6j(p (o elirev, Acts iii. 21, 25 ; vii. 17 ; x. 39 ; xvii. 31 ; xx. 38 ; xxii. 10 ; Jas. ii. 5 1 Pet. iv. 11 ; Jno. vii. 31, 39 ; xv. 20 ; xvii. 5 ; Mark vii. 13 Luke V. 9 ; xix. 37 ; Matt, xviii. 19 ; 1 Cor. vi. 19 ; 2 Cor. x. 13 xii. 21 ; 2 Thess. i. 4 ; Tit. iii. 6 ; Hob. vi. 10 (ix. 20) ; x. 1 ; Eph. i. 8 ; ii. 10 ; Rev. xviii. 6, etc. (in all which cases the comma in the text before the relative is to be rejected, see § 7, 1). Jude 15 Trepl iravrwv tcov epycov da€^€La<; avrcop wv rjae^rjaav deserves par- ticular attention, see § 32, 1, p. 222. There are, however, passages in which this construction is neglected ; as, Heb. viii. 2 rrj<; aKrjvrjf t^? uXrjdivfjf;, rjv eTrrj^ev 6 Kvpio<;, and, according to good Codd., Mark xiii. 9 ; Jno. vii. 39 ; iv. 50 ; Tit. iii. 5. Besides, compare the var. in Jno. xvii. 11 ; Heb. vi. 10 ; Acts vii. 16 ; Rev. i. 20. So frequently in the Sept. and the Apocrypha (Wahl, clav. p. 360), likewise in Greek authors; see Bornem. Xen. Anab. p. 30 ; Weber, Dem. 543 ; Krii. 121. Eph. i. 6 T^wk^ Kpd^eiv Matt, xxvii. 50 ; Mark i. 26 ; 155 Rev. vi. 10, etc.) cf. Boisson. Nicet. p. 33, but (fxuvrj means cry, exclamation 7th ed. (loud utterance) ; the construction accordingly resolves itself into the phrase cfiwvrjv Kpd^av (Rev. vi. 10 var.), which, though unusual, is not inadmissible ; cf. Isa. vi. 4 u>prjs 175 iKCKpayov. (In Eph. i. 8 r}<; iTrcpLaaeva-ev, the verb is to be taken transitively, as yvwptcras in vs. 9 shows.) That attraction nevertheless may affect even the Dative of the relative (so as 177 to change it into a Gen.) is shown by G. Kriiger, as above, 274 f. ; cf. Heinichen, Euseb. II. 98 sq. Accordingly Cod. A in 1 Tim. iv. 6 has T^s KttA^s StSao-KoAtas ■^s 7rapriKoXovOr]Ka<;. Many expositors, too, as recently Fr. also, resolve Rom. iv. 17 KarivavTi ov cTrt'o-revo-ev O^ov into xar. 0€ov u cTTtcTT. ; but this is not necessary ; see 2 below.^ On the other hand. Matt, xxiv. 38 rjcrav . . . ya/xoOi/res kol c/cyayxi^ovres o-XP'- V'^ VM-^P<^^ ehrjXOe Ntoe €ts T^v KifiwTov is probably contracted from axpi t^s yjp.- y ehrjXOtv. Similarly Luke i. 20 ; Acts i. 2, 22. In Lev. xxiii. 15 ciTro t^s r)/i.e,oas ^s av TrposeveyK-rjTe etc. Bar. 1, 19, we find the same attraction of the Dative of the relative when the two clauses are not merged into one ; for though ^s 7}p.ipa ^ev., yet see § 31, 5. 'rj^ On 2 Cor. X. 13 see § 59, 7, p. 530. ' "^'^ For both the constructions specified above there are additional parallels : a) Hippocr. morb. 4, 11 Ta9 Trrjyd'i a? ODVofiaa-a, avrai rat o-MixaTi etc., Lysias bon. Arist. p. 649 ; Aelian. anim. 3, 13 ; Her. 2, 106 ; Soph. El. 653, and Trach. 283 ; Eurip. Bacch. 443 sqq. ; Aristoph. Plut. 200 ; Alciphr. 3, 59, the well-known passage of Virgil (Aen. 1, 577) urbem quam statuo vestra est, Terent. eunuch. 4, 3, 11 ; Sen. ep. 53 ; Wetsten. I. 468. From the Sept. Gen. xxxi. 16 rr)u Bo^av fjv dcpetkero 6 ^eo? . . . rjfup ecrrat,, Num. xix. 22, and from the Acta Petri et Pauli ed. Tiiilo I. 7 dpKel rjfuv rrjv OXlyfnv rjv e-^op,ev irapd JJerpov. b) Xen. A. 1, 9, 19 el' riva opan) KaTaa-Kevd^ovTa ^? dp')(pi 'X^p(i (o; see, in general, 182 Heindorf, Cic. N. D. p. 347. (The relative and interrogative are combined in 1 Tim. i. 7 /xj) voovvTeov (Gen. xxiii. 15), or at least twv dSeX^cov aiiToC (see Grotius), cf. Pol. 10, 48, 1 ; or the construction is a concise inaccuracy. Meyer's explanation takes for granted also an expression which is inac- curate as it is without example. 2. Conversely, the Plural of class (masc. or fern.) is used althougli the predicate refers primai'ily to only one individual, when the writer wishes to keep the tliought somewhat vague ; as, Matt. ii. 20 redv^/caaiv ol t^rfovvje^ rrjv "^v^W "^^^ iraLhiov (Herod the Great alone is meant, vs. 19), cf. Exod. iv. 19. See Aescli. Prom. 67 ; Eurip. Hec. 403 ; Aeschin. adv. Timarch. 21 and Bremi in loc. Person, Eur. Phoen. p. 36 ; Reisig, Conject. in Aristoph. p. 58, and C. L. Roth, gramm. quaest. e C. Tacito. Norimh. 1829, 4to. § 1. On the other hand, in Matt. ix. 8 ihu^aaav rov Oeou tov hovra i^ovatav ToiavTTjv rot? av6 pdoiroa , the reference certainly is not to Christ alone, but the expression must be taken as actually universal, like Heb. ix. 23. In ol XycTTai Matt, xxvii. 44 a different tradition from Luke xxiii. 39 must be recognized. Lastly, in 1 Cor. XV. 29 virep tmv veKpoiv cannot easily be referred to (the dead) Christ (for then it would have been et? tou? veKpov<;}, but (unbap- tized) dead men are meant. The expression to dprjfxlvov ev rots Trpo^iyTais Acts xiii. 40 ; Jno. vi. 45 (cV iSi^Xu^ tC)v Trpo^T/Twv Acts vii. 42) is a general form of quotation, like in Paul's Epistles, etc., employed when one does not wish, or is not able, to indicate the passage precisely. Essentially similar is Matt. xxiv. 26 189 h Tors Ta/A€tois, opposed to Iv ttj Iprjpn^, cf. Liv. 1, 3 'Silvius casu quodam in silvis natus. In Matt. xxi. 7 cTravo) avrOiv probably refers to Ipdna. There would, however, be no intrinsic absurdity in referring it to the two animals, any more than the expression im^efirjKm im ovov Kal ttwAov, verse 5, is absurd. We also say, loosely, he sprang from the horses, though only one of the team, the saddled horse, is meant. 1 In 1 Thess. i. 7 Svre yevfaOat i5/uas rvirov iraffi rots wKrreiovffiv, the Singular is used quite regularly, as Paul had in view the church as a whole. 1 Cor. x. 6, 11 ; 1 Pet. V. 3 are passages of a different kind, where the Singular would be surprising. 176 § 27. NUMBER AND GENDER OF NOUNS. Quite erroneously has the Plural l-ma-ToXal. in 1 Cor. xvi. 3 been taken for the Singular (Ileumann in loc). Though this Plural may be thus used of a single letter (Schaef. Plutarch. V. 446 ; Poppo, Thuc. 1, 132), yet here the words hC eTna-ToXwv are certainly to be joined to 7re/^i//w ; and the sending of several letters to different persons is in itself not at all unlikely. 166 3. Not a few nouns which are used by us ordinarily in the 7th ed. Singular, were employed exclusively, or at least predominantly, in 159 ii^Q Phn^al ; this is owing to the objects denoted by them having — • ' from a general or from a Grecian or a Biblical point of view — some sensible or ideal manifoldness or comprehensiveness (Krii. 9f) ; as, alcbve'i Heb. i. 2 world (n'^isbisj), ovpavol coeli (Schneider, lat. Gr. 11. 476) of 2 Cor. xii. 2, tcl ciyia the sanctuary Heb. viii. 2 ; ix. 8, 12, etc., dvaroXal, hvcr^iai (^Uast, West) Matt. viii. 11 ; xxiv. 27 (Plato, def 411 b. ; epin. 990 a. ; D. S. 2, 43 ; Dio. C. 987, 32; Lucian. peregr. 39), ra Se^ui, dptarepd, evcow/jia, the right, the left (frequently), 6vpai(^fores, folding-door') Acts v. 19; Jno. xx. 19 (in Greek also irvXai, but Ovpat is a regular Plural in Acts xvi. 26 f. ; Matt. xxiv. 33), koXttoc bosom Luke xvi. 23 (22 Sing.) cf. Pausan. 6, 1, 2 ; Ael. 13, 31 ; also rd l/jbdrLa of a (single) upper-garment, Jno. xix. 23 ; xiii. 4 ; Acts xviii. 6 ; the names of festivals ejKaivta, fyeveaLa, dl^ufia (nava6r]vai,a. Saturnalia, Poppo, Thuc. III. IV. 20), also ydixoL marriage Matt. xxii. 2 ; Luke xii. 36 (cf. Tob. xi. 20) ; likewise 6-\^u)via (Germ. Lohnung, soldier's pay) Rom. vi. 23 (Fr. Rom. 1. 428), and dpyvpia (^pieces of money, Shekel-pieces') Matt, xxvi. 15 ; xxviii. 12. When the names of countries or cities are Plural, this is due to their consisting (originally) of several provinces (as Galliae) or settlements ; as, ^AOrjvat, Udrapa, ^IXittttol, probably also ra ' lepocroXv/jia.^ Lastly, nouns denoting a feeling, disposition, or state, express in the Plural the modes or acts in which the feeling, etc. manifests itself; as, 1 Pet. ii. 1 dTroOefievot irda-av KaKtav . . . k. vTroKplaea K. (f)d6vovyevopcov, and 1 Cor. xv. 36, where d(f)pov has little authority in its'''''*^ favor), likewise Phil. iii. 18, 19 iroWol yap TreptiraTovaLv, ov0opa<; 21) than liberation from the body. Likewise in Heb. i. 3 ; 2 Pet." i. 9 Ka6apiap.ojo-€o>s dya^^s as on the meaning of Irr^puiT-qfw. ; sponsio would accord perfectly with the context, but this rendering has not been lexically established either by de Wette or Huther. On Heb. ix. 11 see Bleek. In 1 Cor. i. 27 tov Koa-fiov is the Subjective Genitive; see Meyer. In 1 Cor. x. 1 6 to Tron^piov t^ cuXoyta? means simply the cup of blessing, that is, over which the blessing is uttered ; and in 21 vot. Kvpiov 203 means cup of the Lord, where the closer relation of the Genitive is to be gathered from 16, just as in Col. ii. 11 that of Xpto-ToS is to be deduced from 14. Mey. gives a correct decision on Col. i. 14. In Acts xxii. 3 vop-ov depends on k. aKpifieLav. 1 As in Philem. 13 5fvaeL,6pyTJ<;, a different position of the words was hardly possible, if an unsuitable stress (rjfxev (fivcru tck. opy.) was not to foil on (fyvaeu See, in general, Jacob, Lucian. Tox. p. 46 ; EUendt, Arrian. Al. I. 241 ; Fr. Rom. II. 331. Note 3. Rarely two Genitives of different relations (particularly the one of a person, the other of a thing), mostly also separated from each other by position, are joined to a single noun (Krii. 33), e.g. Acts v. 32 rjix€l<; idfiev avrov (Xpurrov) /xaprupcs twv pr]fi.a.TOiv tovtojv, 2 Cor. V. 1 17 CTTiycto? rjfjuov ot/cta tov (TKrjvov:, Phil. ii. 30 70 vfjuov vcTTeprjfia r»}s Xctroupyui?, 2 Pet. iii. 2 t^? twv a.7rovpd, Jno. xi. 48, or b. is emphatic (Stallb. Plat. Protag. p. 118; Mdv. 13), as e.g. in 1 Cor. iii. 9 Oeov yap eafxev o-wepyot, 6eov yedipyiov, 6eov olKo8ofJL-j ccTTC, Acts xiii. 23 tovtov (AavtS) 6 ^eo; aTro tov o-TrepfiaTO^ ... 181 ^yaye awr^pa 'irjcrovv, Jas. i. 26 €t rts . . . tovtov /Aaratos rj Bprja-Kua, iii. 3 ; Ith ed, Heb. x. 36 ; Eph. ii. 8. The emphasis is not unfvequently founded in an expressed antithesis : Phil. ii. 25 tw ava-TpaTiwrrjv /xov, v/awv Se aTToaroXov Koi XeLTovpyov t^? ^P^'"' ^■^'"f Matt. i. 18 ; Heb. vii. 12 , 1 Pet. iii. 21 ; Eph. ii. 10 ; vi. 9 ; Gal. iii. 15 ; iv. 28 ; 1 Cor vi. 15 ; Rom. iii. 29 ; xiii. 4. The Genitive, however, for the most part contains the principal notion : Rom. xi. 13 iOvwv d7roo-ToA.os apostle of the Gentiles, 1 Tim. vi. 17 ctti ttXovtov a8r]X6TT]Ti upon riches which are perishable, Tit. i. 7 ; Heb. vi. 16 ; 2 Pet. ii. 14. That the placing of the Genitive before the governing noun belongs to the peculiarities of diction of a particular author (Gersdorf 296 ff.), though not in itself impossible (since emphatic combinations are weakened by individual writers), at least cannot be shown to be probable. Cf. more- over, Poppo, Thuc. III. I. 243. Heb. vi. 2 is a difficult passage ; /SaTmcr/Awv 8i8a;)(^s (depending on OcfieXiov) certainly belong together, and 8i8a;(^s cannot be torn away so strangely and regarded as the governing noun to all four Genitives, as Ebrard still maintains. But the question is, whether we should here admit a transposition for StSa;^?}? /SaTTTMrynwi', as most later expositors do. Such a transposition, however, would be at variance with the whole structure of the verse ; and if ySaTrna-^oi BtSaxrj^ is translated doctrinal baptisms, baptisms in connection with instruction, to distinguish them from the legal baptisms (lustrations) of Judaism, this appellation is confirmed as distinctively Christian by Matt, xxviii. 19 ^aTTTtcravTes airov's . . . StSacTKorres aurovs. Ebrard's objection, that Christian baptism is dis- tinguished from mere lustrations, not by instruction, but by the forgiveness of sins and regeneration, amounts to nothing, for Matt, xxviii. says nothing about the forgiveness of sins. As regards the use of the word ySaTrrtcr/Aos, and in the Plural too, what Tholuck has already remarked may be used also in support of the above explanation. 206 Note 5. Kiihnol and others consider Trept with the Ace. in Mark iv. 19 at TTcpi ta XoLira iinOv^Lai as a circumlocution for the Genitive. But, though Mark might have written at twv Xoittwi/ (.ttlO., yet the former expression is not only more definite, but Trcpi obviously retains its force : cupiditates, quae circa reliqua (rel. res) versantur (Heliod. 1, 23, 45 €TnOvfxia irepl Tr]v XapiVXetav, Aristot. rhet. 2, 12 at Trcpi to (TuifLa iTnOvpnai), just as (with the Gen.) in Jno. xv. 22. It is another thing when, in §30. GENITIVE. 193 Greek authors, irepi with the Ace. is used as a circumlocution for the 17-4 Genitive of an object to which a certain quality is ascribed, e.g. Diod. 'S. 6th ei 11, 89 rj irepl to iepov apx^^t-onqs, and again to vipl tov<; Kpartjpas iStw/Aa (cf. Schaef. Julian, p. VI. and Dion. comp. p. 23). With more reason might it be said that in 1 Cor. vii. 37 l^ovaia ncpl tov tSiov 6(Xr]p.aTovaiv kXo^ol are the branches according to nature i.e. the natural branches. So Heb. xi. 7 17 Kara ttIcttlv hLKaiofrvvq. In Heb. ix. 19, too, Kara tov vofiov, if referred to Tracrrj? evToA^s, would not be put for tov v6p.ov, a^ Bleek per- ceived. Yet, see above, § 22, 7. More pertinent examples are found in Greek writers ; as, Diod. S. 1, 65 17 kotoi rqv dpxqv d7rd^€o-c9 the abdication of the government (literally, as regards the government), 4, 13 ; Exc. Vat. p. 103 ; Arrian. Al. 1, 18, 12 ; Mtth. 866. On cmyy. KaTo. MaT9. etc. see 207 Fr. (cf. instances in the nova biblioth. Lubec. II. 105 sq.). It is quite erroneous to take ra ct? XpicrTOi' TraOrjpiaTa 1 Pet. i. 11 for to, Xpto-Toi; Tra^^/xara (v. 1). It means (similar to Trcpl t^s eis v/xas ■)(6.piTor] belongs to (is for) maiure persons, etc. 196 §30. GENITIVE. c. The Genitive of a quality in which one participates (sing, abstract), in diversified applications, 1 Cor. xiv. 33 ovk eanv clku- raaraala^ 6 deo^, Heb. x. 39 rj/xel^ ovk iafiev vTroaTokrj^ . . . dWa iriaTew^ etc. (Plato, apol. 28 a.)- Likewise the concrete Gen. Acts ix. 2 Tiva'i T7}ri^ I8ia<; iirCkV' aeai<; ov 'ylverai. Moreover, this construction of elfMi, when persons are the subject, is sometimes made more animated, in Oriental style, by the insertion of vi6<; or tekvov ; cf. 1 Thess. v. 5 v{j,el(: viol tov ^idvva (where some Codd. have 8. a. <^a- yelv diro tov /x. as a correction). ^ On the other hand, in Rom. i. 11 ; 1 Thess. ii. 8 the apostle could not have written fMeraSiBovat %apt- ^ri(pov Aevicfiv follows; cf. Heliod.2, 23, 100 ewe^^6 6 fiiv tov vdaros, 6 5e Kol olvov. 2 Bengel, on Heb. vi. 4, appears to trifle in attempting to make a distinction in this passage between yevea-dat with the Gen. and with the Ace. ^ In the sense of eating up, consuming, <^a76rc and ioeUiv have regularly the Ace. (Matt. xii. 4; Rev. x. 10) : cf., for distinction, 1 Cor. ix. 7. They also take the Ace. when one's food in general, merely, is described, — of which he ordinarily makes use, which he lives upon ; e.g. Mark i. 6 ?iv '\<»ivvr\s . . . iaOiwv aKpiSas Kal fi4\i &ypiov, Rom. xiv. 21 ; Matt. xv. 2 ; 1 Cor. viii. 7 ; x. 3 f. (Jno. vi. 58), cf Diog. L. 6, 45. It may be stated generally, that ^ffOiitv ti would in no passage be found to be entirely without justification (cf. even 2 Thess. iii. 12) and thus the absence of iadietu tivSs (together with i,v6 or fK Tivos) would cease to be strange. Luke xv. 16 atrh twi/ KeparlcDv wv fiffOiov oi Xotpoi is probably an attraction. Besides, we find iaBieiv, iriVeti/ ti regularly in the Sept. also; only in Num. xx. 19 ihv rov vSaT6s aov iriu/xey occurs. §30. GENITIVE. 199 Verbs of eating of as well as giving and taking of are, moreover, 212 ill the N. T. invariably joined to their nouns by prepositions : a) By airo ; as, Luke xxiv. 42 eTrehwKav avrw . . . airo fieXicraLov Krjptov, XX. 10 ; Matt. xv. 27 to, Kvvdpta iadUt airo rwv y^n-^lwv tcou vatSicov (cf. ya bsx and (payelv airo Fabric. Pseudepigr. I. 706), Luke xxii. 18 ov fiy ttlcd diro tov yevvq/Maro'i t^? dfiTreXov, cf. Jer. li. (xxviii.) 7, Acts ii. 17 eK^eco utto t. nrvevixaro'i fiov (LXX.), v. 2 Kol ivocri(TaTo diro Tri<; Ttfj,rj(ovia<; Koi xop(^v, Mark xiv. 64 r)KovaaTe t?}? ^a(T(fyr)fjiia<;, 1 Macc. x. 34 ; Bar. iii. 4 (Lucian. Hale. 2; gall. 10; Xen.C. 6, 2, 13,etc.). On the 180 other hand, the Accusative follows in Luke v. 1 dKovetv tov Xoyov *'"' **'* T. deov, Jno. viii. 40 ttjv dXr/Oeiav, rjv rjKovaa -irapa t. deov etc. In the last passages the object is referred to as a connected whole, and the hearing meant is intellectual ; while in the previous passages 1 Otherwise in 1 Cor. x. 4 tmvov in levtviMriKris aKoKoveovaris Tctrpas, where Flatt's explanation is a failure. 2 Others, RUck. and Fr., take the Genitive of the person here oZ oIk ^Kov dvOpcoTTO) tovto) a'cTiov wv KarrjyopeiTe kut avrov (yet we find also irepi rcvof de aliqua re Acts xxiii. 29 ; xxiv. 13, cf. Xen. Hell. 1,7, 2, like /cpiWo-^aiTreptrti^o? Acts xxiii. 6; xxiv. 21) ; for the offence of which one is accused is that from, out o/* which 183 the KaTrjyopelv arises, or proceeds. We must not, however, fail to <>"' «i mention that the two preceding verbs are usually in Greek authors construed differently, viz. Karir/opeiv riv66vov j^anting with, 7th ei breathing of, threatening and slaughter, cf. Aristopl^. eq. 437 ovro<; ijSr) KaKlai\ocTO(f)Lav represents philosophy as something indivisible which 193 one wishes to get possession of. ^''' *^ Next to the verbs already mentioned follow, c. those of thinking of, remembering (Mtth. 820) ; as, Luke xy\\. 32 fivq^oveuere t?}? ^uvaLKo<; AoiT, [1 Thess. i. 3], Luke i. 72 fjbvrjaOrjvac Bca6qKr]<;, Acts xi. 16 ; 1 Cor. xi. 2 ; Luke xxiii. 42 ; Heb. xih. 2 ; Jude 17 ; 2 Pet. iii. 2 (also virofMifivija-Keiv riva irepi Ttvo, Trplv r] avveXOeiv avrovs, evpedij iv yarrrpl t^ovaa, where tlie writer probably had contemplated another termination of the sentence. So perhaps Rev. xvii. 8. In Greek authors such instances are rare ; yet see Her. 5, 81 ; Plat. rep. 8, 547 b. ; Pol. 31, 17, 1, cf. Poppo, Thuc. I. 119 sq. ; Wannowski, p. Gl sqq. In the Sept. notice Gen. xliv. 4; 196 Exod. iv. 21 ; v. 20; xiv. 18 ; cf. Acta apocr. p. 68, 69 ; Epiphan. vit. Ith rti- p. 326, 340,346 (in the 2d vol. of the Works of Epiphan. ed: Colon.) ; in Latin, Suet. Tib. 31. In all these instances Genitives absolute appear as fixed forms of expression, their grammatical origin being no longer taken into consideration. §31. DATIVE. Iif Greek the Dative is the more comprehensive in its import, because it represents the Ablative also, which in Latin is a sep- arate case (cf. Hm. emend, rat. p. 140). Its relation to a sentence is not (in general) close and essential, like that of the Ace. or even the Gen. ; but it serves merely to complete and extend, inasmuch as it points out the object (mostly a person) towards which an action tends, to which it has reference, yet on which it does not directly terminate. Hence tlie Dative frequently accompanies an Ace. of the object ; as, 2 Cor. ix. 2 irpoOvfiia f/v KavxoifiaL MaKehhaiv, Acts xxii. 25 irpoereivav avrov tol<; l^idcnv (Kuin. in loc), xxiv. 5 ; Jno. vi. 13. In a looser application (to things) the Dative denotes what in any way accompanies the action, as motive, power, cir- cumstance (of time and place), etc. 222 1. We shall first consider the Dative as the case of reference (of the more remote object, as it is commonly called) when joined to transitive verbs — as, hihovat (^Brjipela-Oal) ri rtvt,, ypd(f)et,v ri tlvl (2 Cor. ii. 3), evayyeXi^eadal rivc rv (Luke ii. 10 ; 2 Cor. xi. 7), 1 From the Latin compare Ablat. absol. in Cic. PMl. H, 10 ; fam. 15; 4, 18; Cacs. b. gall. 5,4; civ. 1,36; 2, 19; 3, 21. §31. DATIVE. 209 oj>eiXeiv TLvi tl Matt, xviii. 28 ; Rom. xiii. 8 (cf. Rom. i. 14 ; viii. 12, contrary xv. 27), ofioiovv rivd rcvi Matt. vii. 24 ; xi. 16, KaraX- Xdaaeiv Tcvd rivi 2 Cor. v. 18, ijeipetv BXh^LV toi<; 8ecr/ioto/3o, 2 Cor. X. 4 hwara rut dew} See also 1 Cor. ix. 2. Cf. Wyttenb. Plat. Phaed. as above ; Erfurdt, Soph. Oed. R. 615 ; Krii. 61. b. The Dative of interest, 2 Cor. v. 13 etVe i^eaTrj/xev, 6eu)' etre awcppovovfiev, v/jZv (Rom.xiv. 6 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 22), or, more definitely, the dativus commodi and incommodi, Jno.iii. 26 m aii fjL€/ji.aprvp7)Ka<;, to whom, in favor of whom (Luke iv. 22 ; Rom. x. 2 ; 2 Cor. ii. 1 ; cf. Xen. M. 1, 2, 21). On the other hand, Matt, xxiii. 31 fiaprv- pelre eavroh on v'loC ea-re etc., against yourselves, cf. Jas. v. 3. Cf. besides, Heb. vi. 6 ; Jude 1 ; Rom. xiii. 2. On Rev. viii. 3, see Ewald. (But Eph. v. 19 XaXo0yTe9 eauroU — aXX.'^\otacrtoiTav Ttvt (io attend one as teacher), different from (poirav wp6s r. Epict. ench. 33, 13. 216 §31. DATIVE. 6(9o9) cf. Xen. C. 1, 2, 4 ; Sext. Ernp. 2, 6 ; Strabo 15, 715 (Tob. iii. 8 ; 2 Mace. vi. 1). c. Of the occasion or cause (on account of) ; as, Rom. xi. 20 rij 203 airicTTia i^eKXciaOijaav because of unbelief (cf. 30 rjkerjOrire rrj rov- '"'*''• rcov aTreideia), Gal. vi. 12 ; Col. i. 21 — also of the motive (through, from, etc.) 1 Cor. viii. 7 rfj awecSijaec tov elBcoXou o)? elhcSkoOvTOV eaOiovai, 2 Cor. i. 15 ; Rom. iv. 20. See Diog. L. 2, 57 ; Heliod. 1, 12, 33 ; Paus. 3, 7, 3 ; Joseph, antt. 17, 6, 1 ; cf. Ast, Plat. Polit. p. 392 ; Goeller, Time. p. 157, 184, etc. ; Mtth. 894 f. ; Blidy. 102 f. ; Kru. 73. The use of the Dative in Rev. viii. 4 avefB-q b xaTrvos twv Ovfjua/xaTOiv Tttis Trpoepeip ev tlvl 1 Cor. xv. 41 (Soph. Oed. C. 1112 ; Dion. H. ep. p. 225. Krii.). For b, /caret, as almost always KaTo. to e^09, eimOo'i Luke iv. 16 ; Acts xvii. 2. For c. hd with the Ace. see § 49 c. p. 398 sq. For d. htd or ev also fierd. Thus we find instead of /SaTrrt'^e- a-Oat vBari usually iv vSari (in water) Matt. iii. 11 ; Jno. i. 26, 31 (but also iv irvevixaTc), for /St'a always ixerd ^laav\ov, where, too, the Latin translator has: quidnam esset ho mi nib us honiim etc. Cf. besides, Fabric Pseudepigr. I. 628 SouKeuffovaiv iv to7j ixGpots ai'TcJj', Arrian. Epict. I, 18, 8. §31. DATIVE. 219 Yet eV is inserted, regularly in the last case, and frequently also in the first (especially with iaxdrrj rj/juepa or rjfMepa t^9 Kpiaewsi), even in Luke (iii. 1 ; i. 26), cf. Krii. 57 ; the expression ttj koprfi or Tat6r} opafxa ru> HaiiKw means became' visible to him (as often elsewhere 6(f>dfjvai rivt appear to one^. In Jas. iii. 7 rrj ^vaet rfj dvOpburivrj means rather by the nature of man (ingeniis hominum). In general, the Dative of a thing with Passives (probably also in Rom. xii. 16, see Fr. in loc.) is less surprising, as it coincides with the Dative of the means. In Heb. iv. 2 rot? uKovaaaLv indicates probably the persons with or in whom the /i^ cvyKp. rfj Triarei occurred. Lastly, Matt. v. 21 ff. ippijdrj Tot? dpxciioi<; should be translated : to them of old time ; see Tholuck, Bergpr. 158 f. The above use of the Dative (of a pers.) after Passives is known likewise in Greek prose, but it is especially frequent after participles ; cf. Dem. Olynth. 3, p. 12 c. ; 233 220 § 31. DATIVE. Theocriii. 507 c. ; coroii. 324 a. ; Coiion. 731 b. ; Diog. L. 8, 6 ; Plulostr. her. 4, 2. Note 1. The Dative in Col. ii. 14 c^aXcit/^as to Kaff rifjMv x«tpo'ypa^ov tois Soy/Aao-i, is noticeable. Some expositors explain it o rjv iv rots hoy^aaw quod constabat placitis (mos.), conformably to Eph. ii. 15 tov vo/xov twv 197 f-VToXCiv iv Sdy/iao-t Karapyifjaas — an explanation correct doubtless as re- 6th ed. spects the sense, but at variance with the grammar ; for according to it Paul must have written: x"/^"V- ro iv toIs Soy/xao-i. Now in the first place as regards Eph. ii. 15 the expression twj/ IvtoXwv iv 8o'y/Aao-t must undoubtedly be taken as one idea: commandments in (individual) ordinances, cf. § 20, 2. And in Col., all things considered, 8o'y/tao-i cannot be taken otherwise than as closely connected with to Ka(/ rjfxwv x^^p<^ypo-i>oy ■ the bond (in force) against us through the ordinances, and Paul perhaps em- ployed the word hoy^aa-i in this passage to bring out the notion with prom- inence. Meyer's explanation : what has been written with commandments (Dat. like what has been written with letters), is the more forced, because the word xf'poypa(/>ov has acquired from usage so distinct and independent a meaning that it can scarcely take such a Dative after it, as if equivalent to yeypa/x/xeVov. Note 2. What KUhnol remarks on Matt. viii. 1, viz. that Datives absolute are sometimes put for Genitives absolute, as Kara/SdvTL avrw for KaTa/?avTos avTov, Matt. xxi. 23 iXOovri auTw for cA^oVtos avrov, was indeed fonnerly believed, in general, even by scholars (Fischer, Well. III. a. p. 391 ; Wyttenbach, Plut. Mor. II. 304 ; Heupel, Mark p. 79). In reality, however, all such Datives (at least in the better class of authors, Wannowski, p. 207 91 sqq-) may be as easily explained from the nature of the Dative, as the 7th eo. Genitive absolute is from the nature of the Genitive ; see Blidy. 82 ; Stallb. Plat. Protag. 60; Rost, Gr. 712 f. The remark cannot with the slightest plausibility be applied to the passages quoted above from the N. T., as both KaTa^dvn and iXOovTL follow the verb aKoXovOtiv ; at the same time it must be confessed that the author might also have written : Kura^avTos avTov rjKoXovOrjaav avrio 0^X01 ttoXXol, cf. Matt. viii. 28 ; INIark v. 2 var. There is only this peculiarity in these constructions, that in all airw is repeated (because several other words are inserted between the Dative of the participle and the governing verb). In the passages quoted by Kypke I. 47 from Pausan. and Joseph., either there is simply a pronoun joined to the participle, or the pronoun is directly connected with the verb (Joseph, antt. 8, 13, 4) ; accordingly, they do not prove the point in question. Even in Acts xxii. 6, 17 the Datives are not properly absolute. In the latter passage /aoi vTroa-Tp^ij/avTL, precisely as in vs. 6, belongs with cycVcTo. 234 Then follows a quite different construction (with the Genit. absol.) : accidit mihi reverse, cum precabar in templo, etc. Cf. Paus. 3, 10, 7 and 25, 3. Note 3. Two Datives, the one of a person and the other (explaining, more closely defining) of a thing, occur in 2 Cor. xii. 7 iSoOrj /jlol aKoXoxj/ §32. ACCUSATIVE. 221 rrj crapKLa thorn was given me for (in) the Jlesh (Exod. iv. 9 ; Gen. xlvii. 24) cf. in Homer U^ov oi T7via ;(epcriv ; Reisig, Soph. Oedip C. 266 ; Elmsley, Eurip. Bacch. p. 49, 80, ed. Lips.; Bornem. Xen. conviv. p. 214; Jacobs, Achill. Tat. p. 81 1 ; Ast, Plat. legg. p. 278. The two Datives in Eph. iii. 5 ; Rom. vii. 25 ; Heb. iv. 2 ; Rev, jv^ are of a different nature, and require -■;'- no remark. Note 4. A very singular Dative occurs in 2 Cor. vi. 14 /u.^ yipea-Oe ire- po^uyowTcs aTTiarofi, where some understand crw, while others attribute 198 this meaning to the Dative itself. But, though the Dat. is sometimes to 6th ed. be resolved by with (Reitz, Lucian. VI. 599, Bip. ; Mtth. 907 j cf. Polyaen. 8, 28), this is an entirely different case. The apostle seems to have expressed himself elliptically, and to have suited the Dative rather to the thought than to the words. He evidently means : fjurj yiv. irep. koI outws 6fjio^vyovvT€<; ((Tv^vy.) airiaTOL<; do not put yourselves into an unsuitable yoke» that is, he not united in the same yoke with unbelievers. §32. ACCUSATIVE. 1, The Accusative is strictly the Objective Case when joined to transitive verbs (active, middle, or deponent) ; as, KoirreLv rrjv 6vpav, KOTTTecrOai r. .Ke(f)a\rjv, ^vkdcra-eLV r. kyjitov^ ^vKaaaeadai ra^ evTo\do^€La-6€ dno twv aTroKTevovruyv to awfia . . . o/3r]9rJTe 8k fxdXXov tov Svvdfievov, etc. Greek authors say o^. vwo two's or nvi (yet compare 6f3o^ ' diro Tivos Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 53 ; 6, 3, 27). ^o^cla-Oai diro is an imitation of the Hebrew l^ (or "^33?) xn^ (Jer. i. 8). According to this analogy are construed also ^AeVctv dno (praegnanter) Mark viii. 15 ; xii. 38, and Trpos- £X«v drro Matt. xvi. 6. On the other hand, Phil. iii. 2 /SkcTrcTe rrjv KaraTOfxi^v etc. observe, keep your eye on (/JAeVciv tl as signifying to beware of could receive no confirmation from cf>vXd(T(T€(r0ai ti, since the Mid. voice here is 210 essential). To beware is here but a derivative meaning. ''"' «i ^cuyciv governs the Ace. in a figurative sense in 1 Cor. vi. 18 ; 2 Tim. * ii. 22 (to flee a vice, i.e. to shun) ; but once it has dno, 1 Cor. x. 14 (fyevyfre dTTo T^9 ciSwAoXarpfta?. This last construction is otherwise very usual in the N. T. (as in the Sept.), and (f>evyeiv diro tivos means either to fee from one in various senses (Jno. x. 5 ; Rev. ix. 6 ; Mark xiv. 52 ; Jas. iv. 7), or (including the result of fleeing) to escape Matt, xxiii. 33. In Greek authors, €vy€iv drro occurs only in a strictly local sense, Xen. Cyr. 7, 2, 4 ; Mem. 2, 6, 31 ; Plato, Phaed. 62 d. ; Pol. 26, 5, 2. On )(p^6ai Tl see § 31, 1, i. p. 209 sq. 224 §32. ACCUSATIVE. The Ace. of the place to which, after verbs of motion, was confined in the classics, after the fnll use of prepositions had been introduced, mostly to poetry (Mtth. 747). From the character of the language of the N. T., one would expect only a preposition hi such a case. Even Acts xxvii. 2 fiiXkovrt TrXelv tou? Kara rrjv ^ Acriav rorrovf; (where, however, in several good Codd. [Sin. also] ek is inserted) forms no exception ; it must be rendered : sail to the places along the Asiatic coast. In this signification vrXeti/ is used by the best authors (as a strictly transitive verb) with the Ace. (also of places on the coast),! cf. Poppo, Thuc. 6, 36. 2. Neuter verbs expressing a feeling or act, frequently take an Ace. of a noun which is either from the same root or fi-om one of kindred signification. Such nouns, inasmuch as they merely denote substantively the notion of the verb, are virtually implied in it. They are never annexed, except when the meaning of the verb has to be extended (Hm. Soph. Philoct. 281 ; Eurip. Androm. 220 sq. ; Krii. 16 f.) either by an (Objective) Genitive, as 1 Pet. iii. 14 rov ^ojBov avTcov jjbT) (f)o/37]9rJT€ (Isa. viii. 12), Col, ii. 19 av^ec Ti]v av^rjatv tov Oeov (Plat. legg. 10, 910 d. aae^eiv avhpwv aae^r^fia, 1 Mace. ii. 58 ^rjXwaac ^rjkov voJMov, Judith ix. 4) ; or by means of an Adjective, as Matt. ii. 10 i-^dpTjaav x^P^^ /xejaXrjv a<^6hpa, Jno. vii. 24 ttjv hucaiav Kpiatv Kplvere, 1 Tim. i. 18 iva arparevjj rrjv 201 fca\r)v a-rparelav (Plutarch. Pomp. 41), Mark iv. 41 i cv crapKL, see above, § 24, note 3, p. 168. 1 This construction cannot be certainly established in reference to the Hebrew by 2 Chron.xvii. 9, iTnHnia lab as this probably means teach in Judah. In Acts vii. 22 iircuBfiOrj iriay) iav (cf. Diod. S. 1, 91) ; but the Dative is employed to denote the means of training, whereas diraiB. iraffav (rovaLv side by side. For tovtov tov rpoTrov even Greek prose authors more frequentlj employ jcara tovtov tov Tpo-rrov, Very extraordinary is the expression 686v OaXdcra-r]^ in Matt. iv. 15 (from Isaiah) which is rendered by the way. Passages such as 1 Sam. vi. 9 €t 68ov 6ptu)v auT^s TTopeva-eTat, (Wunder on Lob. Sophocl. Aj. 41 f.) Num. xxi. 33 ; Exod. xiii. 17 (cf. Luke ii. 44), do not authenticate that Ace. without government (by a verb), in an address containing Vocatives. Such a construction would quite exceed the limits of prose composition (Bhdy. 114 f.). What Thiersch p. 145 sq. remarks, is not decisive. Should we perhaps read ol oSov OaXaacrq'i (oiKoCrres), with the Sept. ? It is difficult to maintain with Mey. that clSe in verse 16 is the governing verb. The topographical difficulties of the usual interpretation are not invincible ; only we must not, as in the prophet, take tripav toD ^lophavov as an in- 217 dependent clause, as that would not apply to this passage in Matthew. ''tli ei 7. In some passages the Accusative is said to be used absolutely, when on closer examination the grammatical reason for the Ace. can be discovered in the structure of the sentence. Tims in Rom. viii. 3 TO ahvvarov tov vo/mov ... 6 ^eo? rov kavrov vlov irkfji^a'i . . . KareKpLve rrjv u^iapriav is properly equivalent to to ahvv. tov vo/jLov eTTOLrjaev 6 Oeo^, Tre/x-v^a? . . . /cat KaTaKplvcov etc. (where aSvvaTop does not require to be talvcn in a passive sense) ; this, however, may also be a Nominative put at the commencement (cf Wisd. xvi. 17). In Acts xxvi. 3 the Ace. yvcoa-TTju ovTa is undoubtedly to be explained as an anacoluthon, which, when 207 participles are annexed, is of frequent occurrence ; see § 63,1. 2 a. """^^ Schwarz, de soloec. p. 94 sq., has adduced nothhig altogether of the 245 same kind. In Luke xxiv. 46 f. ehet iraOdv tov XpcuTov ... /cat KTjpvxOnVCtL €7rl T(p OVOflUTC UVTOV flGTaVOLav . . . dp^d/jbevOV dlTO 'lepovaaXri/j,, the Acc. (in the construction of the Ace. with the Infinitive) is in itself grammatically clear ; only the reference of dp^dfievov is loose : beginning (viz. tlie /cT/pyo-o-wi/), or, imperson- ally, tJiat it should be begun ; cf. Her. 3, 91. See besides Kypke I. 344 sq. In Rev. i. 20 the Aces, depend on ypdyfrov verse 19, as has long been admitted. Lastly, in Rev. xxi. 17 efMerpr^ae to Tel^o^ TTjq TToXew? maTov Tecraap. Tn^-^oiv, fMCTpov dvdpfoirov etc., the last words are a loose apposition to the clause ifiiTp. to Teixopaivea6ai Rev. xviii. 20 (Ecclus. xvi. 1 ; 1 Mace. xi. 44; Xen. conv. 7, 5), avX- XijTrelaOat Mark iii. 5 (Xen. Mem. 3, 9, 8 ; cf. 'xaXenrSi^i ^epeiv iirl 218 Tti't Xen. H. 7, 4, 21) ; but sometimes also eV (Ximelv iv Jacobs, 7th ed. Achiil. Tat. p. 814), as x^ipetv Luke x. 20 ; Phil. i. 18 (Col. i. 24. cf. Soph.Trach. 1119), ev(^paLvea6aL Acts vii. 41, ajyaXkLaadat 1 Pet. i. 6 (but a/ydXkeadat eVt Xen. Mem. 2, 6, 35 ; 3, 5, 16). Of verbs oLbeing angry , dyava/creZv is construed with irepi (to be 246 angry on account of some one) Matt. xx. 24 ; Mark x. 41 ; but (like dyavaKTelv eirC Lucian. abdic. 9 ; Aphthon. progymn. c. 9 p. 267) 6pyl^€a6aL iirl tlvl Rev. xii. 17 ; cf. Joseph, bell. jud. 3, 9, 8 (in the Sept. even 6p/u.d^€iv Tivd Bid TL. But Oavfid^eLv iv reS ■)(povL^€iv Luke i. 21 may mean WITH ITS DEPENDENT NOUN, ETC. £33 during his tarrying ; jet cf. Sir. xi. 21. On ^evi^eaOai tcvi see above, § 31, 1, f. p. 209. c. Of verbs signifying to pity, cnrXayxyL^eaOaL usually takes eVt either with the Ace, Matt. xv. 32; Mark vi. 34 ; viii. 2 ; ix. 22, or with the Dat., Luke vii. 13 ; Matt. xiv. 14, only once Matt. ix. 36 it takes irepi] but iXeeladai is used as a transitive, see § 32, l,b.a. d. Verbs of relying on, trusting, hoping, boasting, are construed with eVt, eV, ek ', as, ireiroLda iiri rcvt, Mark x. 24 ; Luke xi. 22 2 Cor. i. 9 (Agath. 209, 5 ; 306, 20),€7rt rt or rwa Matt, xxvii. 43 2 Thess. iii. 4, with eV Phil. iii. 3 ; Trco-reveiv eVt tivc Rom. ix. 33 1 Pet. ii. 6 Sept. (on TrcareueLv et9 or eVi tlvu believe on one, see above, § 31, 5), eXm-i^eiv eVt with Dat. Rom. xv. 12 ; Phil. iv. 10 (Pol. 1, 82, 6) and with Ace. 1 Tim. v. 5 ; 1 Mace. ii. 61, et9 Jno. V. 45 ; 2 Cor. i. 10 ; 1 Pet. iii. 5 ; Ecclus. ii. 9 (Herod. 7, 10, 1 ; Joseph, bell. jud. 6, 2,1, rj eU rtva eX,7riavepw Matt. vi. 4, ek 4>av€p6v Mark iv. 22), but also mental and abstract, particularly with a Geu. annexed, as Rom. ii. 4 to 'XP'n<^ov t. 6eou (jj yp7}t7T6rr}aXh avTrj<;, Thuc. 1, 68 to ttuttov r^s TroXtreia?, 2, 71 to QXT6fv\fia T^s TTi'oTCO)?, 2 Cor. iv. 7 rva ^ i7ripf3oki)r^^Bvvdfl€W^ 222 rj ToS e^ov, Gal. ii. 14 SpOcmoBe'iv irpos T^v dXi^Oeiav Toi ciayyeXtov, ii. 5, also m ei 2 Thess. ii. 11 ttc/attci ivipyeixtv irXavq^. In Heb. ix. 2 ^ 7rpo^£crts tSv aprwv 1 On the case in which an adjective as a predicate is expressed by means of a substan- tive for rhetorical reasons, as in 2 Cor. iii. 9 «' h ^taKoula t^s KaraKpia.ms So^a,scii!i 58. 2 Fr. Rom. I. 367 sq. has objected to this separation, which however lie appears to have misunderstood. In passages of the second kind the statement is merely logicd, in those of the first it is rhetorical. When it is said, live according to the truth of the Gospel, we are to understand the words in their proper and natural meaning (the truth of the Gospel is the rule of life) ; but when it is said, corvi stupor ingemuit, the statement is Jiffuratim, like, his blood caUed for vengeance. Cic. N. D. 2, 50, 127 belongs to the second class, and foedo odore would be the less exact expression. §34. ADJECTIVES. 237 signifies: the setting before, exposition, of the bread; and in 1 Pet. i. 2 dyiao-/Aos Trvcvfiaros, as a glance at the context will show, is not synonymous with TTvevfJia ayiov. Lastly, the phrase Aaju./3av£tv rrjv lirayyiXiav tov Trvev- /xaros in Acts ii. 33 ; Gal. iii. 14 means : obtain the promise of the Spirit, which happens when the promised blessing itself is received (KOfjii^eaOai Tr]v cTrayyeXiav), when the promise becomes fulfilment. b. Far more frequently so that the noun which expresses a quality (mostly moral) stands in the Genitive : Luke iv. 22 \6jot t% p^a/06TO9, xvi. 8 oIkovoixo'^ tt)? dBLKia?'^ Pil^SiFin "^a^a, where, however, there is no necessity whatever for construing H^.X with the second substantive. 238 §34. ADJECTIVES. propriate sense, if connected with Oavdrov. As the apostle had already said much of ^avaros (verse 10 ff.), he might naturally refer to it ; see de Wette in loc. Likewise in Acts xiii. ctidttjp 'Irj(rov7j, €VTV)(ovvTa aTToOaviiv, Bauer, glossar. Theod. 455 ; Boisson. , Philostr. 491. Other expositors after pLLKp6T€poLXrjSovoi fiaWuv i} (fnXodiou '.^ ' 5. Sometimes, in comparative sentences, a part is compared not with the corresponding part but with the whole (Bhdy. 432) ; as, Jno. V. 36 fiaprvpiav fiei^co rov 'loyuvvov, witness greater than John, that is, greater tlian that of John ; so Her. 2, 134 Trvpa/jiiSa koI ovTO9 ; cf. Aeschyl. suppl. 524 ava^ dvaKrav, and, even as a technical designation, Theophan. contin. 127, 387 6 apx^^v rcov ap^ovrav. See also Hm. Aesch. p. 230 ; Georgi, vind. 327 and Nova Biblioth. Lubec. II. Ill sq. In reference to the kindred expression ol aUovenmo. §37. NUilEEALS. 249 The preceding use of the numeral is Hebraistic (Ewald, krit. Gr. 496 ; on the Tahaud, see Wetsten. I. 544 ; in the Sept. cf. Exod. xl. 2 ; Num. i. 1, 18 ; Ezra x. 16 f. ; 2 Mace. xv. 36) and has in classical Greek a parallel in compound numerals ; as, eh koX rpLTjKO- o-To^ (Her. 5, 89) one and thirtieth. We, too, use in like manner the cardinal numeral in giving the year, page, etc. mainly for brevity's sake, as in the year eighteen, 'page forty, etc. For the cardinal one the Singular of a substantive is sometimes used alone; as, Acts xviii. 11 iKaOtxrev ivtavrbv kol /x^vas c^ (Joseph, an tt. 15, 2, 3), Rev. xii. 14 Tpev\a^e Noah as eighth, i.e. with seven others. ^^^^ In the same way Plat. legg. 3. 695 c. Xa/Scov ttjv apxv''^ €yS8o/i0 9, Plutarch. Pelop. c. 13 et? otKiav ScoSe/caro? /carekOwv, Appian. Pun. p. 12 (2 Mace. v. 27), cf. also Schaef. Plutarch. V. 57 and Demosth. I. 812. Greek authors usually add avT6(f)dr} eirdvoy irevraKoaioc'; aSeX^oi?. Precisely so (without a case) the Greeks use eXuTTOP Plato, Icgg. 9, 856 d. /j,r] ekaTTOv heKa err] yejoporwi (Thuc. 6, 95), TrXiov (Pans. 8, 21, 1), Tre/at (Zosim. 2, 30), ei9 or h (Appian. civil. 2,96, but compare Sturz, Lex. Xen. II. 68), /u.expi' (Aeschin. fals. leg. 37 ed. Bremi), virep (Pint. virt. mul. 208, Lips. ; Jos. antt. 18,1, 5) ; see Lob.Phryn. 410 sq. ; Gieseler inRosenmiiller's Repert. II. 139 ff. ; Sommer in the allg. Schulzeit. 1831, S. 963. Latin constructions such as occisis ad hominum millibus quatuor, Caes. b. gall. 2, 33, from the historians, are well enough known. Note 1. That the Neuters Seurcpov, rpirov, etc., signify also the second time, the third time, etc., it is superfluous to remark. They are sometimes accompanied by tovto, as Tpirov tovto €p)^ofji(u 2 Cor. xiii. 1 this is the third time I come, or, now I am coming for the third time, cf. Her. 5, 76 rirapTov tovto. Note 2. For the numeral adverb eTrraKis we find the cardinal in Matt. ^ 1 Three numerals are sometimes found thus combined ; as, Rev^ vij^4 kKarhv rftraapd- — KovTa Tfffffapfs xiv. 3 ; xxi. 17 ; Jno. xxi. 11 in. irii'T{\K0VTa. rptis. § 38. ACTIVE AND MIDDLE VOICES. 251 xviii. 22 in the formula Iws k^Soix-qKovTdKi<; hn-a seventy times seven (times), compare iu Sept. Geu. iv. 24 and vyd Ps.cxix, 164 (for nirire snia) Ewald 498. Taken strictly it means : seventy times (and) seven, that is, seventy- seven times ; but this would not suit the passage. Moreover, that Icus is not to be joined to cTrra but to l^ho^vqK., appears from the preceding lays cTTTaKts. (How variously numeral adverbs are expressed in the Sept. may be seen from the following passages: Exod. xxxiv. 23; Deut. xvi. 16; 2 Kings vi. 10 ; Neh. vi. 4 ; 2 Sam. xix. 43.) CHAPTER IV. 236 7th ei THE VERB. '^^^ §38. ACTIVE AND MIDDLE VOICES. 1. As on the one hand the Active voice of transitive verbs not infrequently assumes also an intransitive (apparently reflexive) signification, so on the other many intransitive verbs have become 225 transitives (causatives) ; — ^''•^^ Sometimes in consequence of composition, as hia^alvetv Heb. xi. 29, Trapep-^eaOai Luke xi. 42 ; and sometimes by simple adaptation, SiS fiaOTjreveiv rtvd^ Matt, xxviii, 19 (6 piafx^eveLv rivd 2 Cor. ii. 14 ?), ^acrCkeveLv rivd 1 Sam. viii. 22 ; 1 Khigs i. 43 ; Isa, vii. 6 ; 1 Mace. viii. 13 (Lob. Soph. Aj. 385). See § 32, 1, pp. 221 sqq. Those transitive verbs which are frequently or even generally employed as intransitive, are restricted to certain classes of mean- ings that may be easily gathered from the following examples: dyeiv (ayQ)fi€v let us go), irapdyeiv Matt. xx. 30 ; 1 Cor. vii. 31, irepidyeiv Acts xiii. 11, ^dXkecv Acts xxvii. 14 (precipitate itself, rush),e7rt/SaA.\eii/ Mark iv. 37 (beat into), diropptTTTetv Acts xxvii. 43 (throw themselves off), KXiveiv Lukeix. 12 (incline itself, decline), eKKXiveiv Rom. xvi. 17, dvariWeiv, ^aardveiv, av^dveiv (Lob. Soph. Aj. p. 89 sq. 382 sqq.), arpej>etv Acts vii. 42, dva(TTpe properly 1 What verbs regularly express this reflexive meaning by the Middle must be learned from observation. In many (we should rather say in most, see Rost 563), the reflexive sense is never expressed by the Middle, but by the reflexive pronoun kavrAv etc. sub- joined, see Bttm. 122, 2. Thus in Matt. viii. 4 ^nKvvdv (avr6i/ is used to denote show himself, cf. Her. 3, 119; airoKniveiv kavr6u is always employed to express hill himself (Jno. viii. 22); cf. further, Jno. xxi. 18 ; 1 Cor. iii. 18; 2 Thess ii. 4; 1 Jno. i. 8 (in contrast with a passive Matt, xxiii. 12 ; 1 Cor. xi. 31, or an active Luke ix. 25 ; xxiii. 35), see Kiister, de verb. med. p. 56. Lexicographers should no longer defer an accu- rate investigation of the subject. See also Poppo. as above, p. 2, note; Ki-ii. 146. ^ ^vXiffffitTQai as a Middle means also sibi [aliquid) custodire (Heind. Plat. Gorg. p. 323), and was used of that which one retains in his mind, by Hcsiod. op. 263, 561. On the other hand, in the sense of (legem) sibi observare, as in Luke xviii. 21 according to the reading of several Codd. (tuvtu Trdin-a i(pv\a^(iix-nv 4k vtSr-nros), it probably does not occur in classical Greek, but frequently in the Sept. Yet in Luke xviii., 21 the better reading [sustained by Cod. Sin. also] is i^fjir]v rwhs ironlffOai, i. 10 iK\oyi)v TToiuffdai fifficuav. Jude 3 9pamos . . . rpidK. Koi OKri) erj) fx""' ^''-''"P affOfveia it cannot be said that ex'*"' is put for e'x*^/**'"'^. Rather might ex*"' *'" af^f- be considered as equivalent to €x«"' aaQtvUs (/co/cws). But according to verse 6 ex'^" is probably to be joined as transitive to ir-i). * The distinction between the Active and the Middle is forcibly marked e.g. in Dion. H. IV. 2088 r6v re aerov avea axTd/nr)!', Kol rhv arparoTreSdpxv foruxra. ^ In the same way along with KaTaXaixBdvitrOai tr6\iu, etc. (to capture, take possession of), KaToKaix^dviiv Tr6Mv is also used ; cf- Schweighduser, Lexic. Polyb. p. 330. § 38. ACTIVE AND MIDDLE VOICES. £57 I4f.i SecMtth. 1096(Foertech,Ljs. p.39).2 In 1 Cor. ix. 5 Trept- d'yeaOat might be more approprisjite. UepLorfuv rivd signifies to 272 lead about for exhibition, or to conduct, 2 Mace. vi. 10 ; Pol. 12, 4, 230 14; but to lead about with one (in one's company), is expressed ^""^ by irepcdyeaOat,. However, the Active is used perhaps iii this sense in Xeu. C. 2, 2, 28. Moreover, it would not be surprising that foreigners, not possessing in such matters the delicate perception of native Greeks, should sometimes fail to observe the precise shade of meaning conveyed by the Middle voice ; particularly as, even among natives, its use appears to have often depended on the culture and taste of individual writers. Kja£u7rT(o, an Active alto- gether peculiar to the later language (see Passow), stands for the Middle in Acts xxviii. 3 (yet not without var.). In such cases as Matt. xxvi. 65 Siepp-qie to. t/Aana avrov, Acts xiv. 14, the expression huppri^aro to. i/xaria might also have been used in Greek, see above ; yet the former is not an anomaly, Bhdy. 348. The distinction between Trapeyetv and Trapex^a-dcu (Rost, 564; Krii. 141 ; cf. Kiister, No. 49) is not uniformly observed even by the Greeks ; yet the suitableness of the Middle will be easily recognized in Acts xix. 24 ; C!ol. iv. 1 ; Tit. ii. 7, and in Acts xvi. 16 ipyaaiav iroXXrjv 7rapel)(€ Toi? KvpCoL<; avTrj^ fiavTevofievr) the Active is more appropriate than the Middle, as the writer is speaking of a gain which the damsel procured actually only, not designedly. 6. On the other hand, the Middle occurs with eaurw Jno. xix. 24 242 hie^iepiaavTo kavrol^i (for which we find in Matt, xxvii. Zbhiep.epiaaino'^^ ^ alone), cf. Xen C. 1, 4, 13 ; 2, 1, 30 ; Lycurg. 11, 8; 17, 3, and with eavTov, instead of the Active with kavrov (Plat. Protag. p. 349 a. ; Blume, Lycurg. p. 90). In Tit. ii. 7 aeavjov irapexop'evo'i rvirov tlie use of the Middle in the sense of show ones self (in any mental or moral quality) was so established, that the writer employed it even where aeavrov (on account of rimov) had to be distinctly expressed ; cf. Xen. C. 8, 1, 39 •rrapdheuypu . . . roiovSe eavTov irapel- X'^To. For other examples of the Middle with iavro), kavrov, see Schaef. Dion. Hal. p. 88 ; Bornem. Xen. Anab. 76 sq. ; Bhdy. 347 ; 1 In Mark xiv. 47 we find (Tiracrdfievos tt)v fidxaipav, but in Matt. xx\'i. 51 aTeVireure r^iv tidxa^pcw avr ov . 2 Under this head might be classed also those Actives, accompanied by the reflexive pronoun, for which the Middles are also actually in use in a reflexive sense ; as, ranewouv eauTdj/ Phil. ii. 8 ; Matt, xviii. 4 cf. ranrtivovaOcu Jas. iv. 10 ( Wetst. II. 271), SouKovv (avT6v 1 Cor. ix. 19, ^wvi/veiv eai/r. Jno. xxi. 18, yvfivd^fiv eavr. 1 Tim. iv. 7 etc. But in all these passages the reflexive pronoun is employed antithetically (Kiii. 146), and in Jno. xxi. e.g. the Mid. would even be incorrect. So Kfipeiv eavr. would mean, shear himself, KfiptffQai shear himself. Besides, the Active with ka\yT6v was probably chosen where the identity of the Passive and Middle forms would have occasioned ambiguity. 258 § 38. ACTIVE AND MIDDLE VOICES. Mehlhorn, as above, 36 ; Poppo, Time. I. 1. 189 ; ef. also Epiphaii. 1. 380 OTrX-taa/iez/o? eavTov. In Tit. i. 5 iiTLScopOwarj, according to the received text (where, however, better Codd. have iirtBtopdcoa-rj^r), wonld be exactly equivalent to the Actrve. As little can a Middle signification be recognized in tvrreKhveaOai Col. ii. 15, ajj-vveadat, 278 Acts vii. 24 (cf. Dion. H. 1. 548), dpfMo^eadat 2 Cor. xi. 2 (Losner, Observ. p. 320 sq.). Perhaps also Trpoi'^eadat Rom. iii. 9 is used for the Active. Similar instances occur in later writers, Schaef. Plutarch. V. 101 ; Meineke, Index ad Cinnam. 244.^ To this head are referred also Eph. v. 13 'irdv to ^avepovpuevov <^ft)9 eVrt, and i. 23 Tov rd •ndvra ev irdav ttXt] povp,epov . But in the first passage ^avepovaOau occurs immediately before as a Passive, and the apostle continuing his argument connects (pavepovp^evov with 231 (papepovraL ; tlie former, therefore, must be taken in the same sense *"'*^with the latter, as Harless and Mey. in loc. have explained: all things when reproved are made maivfest by the light, for everything that is made manifest is light. In i. 23 Trkripovp,. might also be taken in a Passive sense (as has been done by Holzhausen) ; but then, as Harless has well shown, rd irdvra ev irda-i would create difficulty. I take irXripovaOai, therefore, as Middle (Xen. Hell. 5, 4, 56 ; 6, 2, 14 ; Deinosth. Polycl. 707 b.), the fulness of him tcho flleth all, where the Middle signification is not entirely lost : from himself, with himself he filleth all. Likewise in Heb. xi. 40 the Middle irpo^eirea-Oai is employed correctly : irpo^eireLv would be the bodily act of seeing beforehand ; the Middle expresses the act of mental providing. (Similar is the distinction in Greek authors between TrpoopdaOat and TrpoiSeadaL.^ A distinction between the use of the Act. and Mid. appears in the verb tvepyctv, the Active of which is used by Paul of personal action (1 Cor. xii. G ; Gal. ii. 8 ; Eph. i. 11, etc.), and the Middle of non-personal (Rom. vii. 5; Col. i. 29 ; 2 Thess. ii. 7, etc.). Hence in 1 Thess. ii. 13 os must not be referred to Ocos but to Xdyo?. 243 7. From Middle verbs are to be carefully distinguished Deponent. 7th ed. These, under a Passive (or Middle) form, have a transitive or a neuter signification ; and their Active forms either do not occur at all (in prose), or have, by usage, exactly the same meaning (Rost 267.) ;'^ as, BvvaaOai, Bcopela-eai, TO evayy. (Actively Trio-reveiv rtvi tl), Rom. iii. 2 eiTLarevdrjaav (the Jews vs. 1) ra \6yca rov 6eov, 1 Cor. ix. 17 olKovofilav TreTTLCj-Tevfxat of. Diog. L. 7, 34 Tna-revOevre^ ttjv iv Uepydfio) ^i^ioOijKrjv, Pol. 3, 69, 1 ire'jrcareviJbivo'i ttju itoKlv rrrapa 'PoifiaLwv, 31, 26, 7 ; Herod. 7, 9, 7 ; Demosth. Theocr. 507 c. ; Appian. civ. 2, 136 ; Strabo 4, 197 ; 17, 797, and often. Likewise, in tlie signification to beheve some one (Triareveiv tivl}, the Passive TrcaTevo/nat signifies I am believed,^ e.g. Xen. A. 7, 6, 33 ; Isocr. Trapez. p. 874 ; Demosth. 233 Callip. 720 a., /SaacXevofMcit Aristot. Nic. 8, 11. It is otherwise in ^<^'l Tim. iii. 16 i-marevOi] {Xpia-To'i') kv Koa-fxrp^ wliich cannot be referred to ircaTeveiv XpLcrTu>, but presupposes the phrase inaTeveiv Xptarov, as in 2 Thess. i. 10 iiriarevOr) to fiaprvpiov rjfiwu is referable to TTiareveLv rt, 1 Jno. iv. 16. Under this head come also the following passages : Acts xxi. 3 avai^avevTef rrjv Kvirpov ivhen it appeared in sigJd, i.e. dva^avelaav e')(ovre? ^wirre? iv Kodiito ho'^iJiaTL^eade {Boyfiari^eiv rem 2 Macc. x. 8) see Mey. In 3 Jno. 12 the Passive ixapTvpdaOai is construed also with the Dative of a person. b. Of verbs governing the Genitive, only the Passive Karrjyopovfuu occurs, Matt, xxvii. 12 iv rw KarriyopelaOaL avrov vtto tcop dp^cepecov, 245 Acts xxii. 30 to ri Karr^^opelTat vtto (jrapa) rwu 'louSaicov (2 Macc. "•''*''' X. 13). On the other hand, I can find no sufficient reason for taking Kexapta/xai, 2 Cor. ii. 10 passively, as Mey. does [yet in the 4th ed. he has it correctly] . In Rom. vi. 17 uTn^Kovcrare . . . eis ov TrapcSo^i^rf tvttov 8tSa;^^s, this con- struction is perhai^s combined with an attraction (for i-n-rjK. ets tvttov 8iZa)(rj^, ov Trape86dr]Te, i.e. irapaSoOevTa e^erc) ; yet see above, § 24, 2, p. 164. Heb. vii. 116 \aos in avTij<; (lepojcrvvr]';) vevo/Ao^erT/rai may probably be referred to vofjioOeTclv ttvi : the people have received the law (founded) on the priesthood, cf. viii. 6. On the other hand, the passages quoted from the Sept. as parallel to vofj-odiTuv rtva (ti) do not belong here, as in that construction the verb always signifies : guide some one in accordance with law, e.g. Ps. cxviii. 33 vofioOerrjcrov fJL€ rrjv 686v twv St/caicu/x.aTwi' (tov, xxiv. 8 vofiodeTi^(Ta d/xapravovTas iv oSuJ. But the Byzantine writers use vo^oOcriiv Tiva (in reference to a country or people), Malal. p. 72, 194. The regular construction of the Passive occurs in Deut. xvii. 10 ocra av vofioOerrjOy aou 2. In the N. T. many verbs which in the Middle signification have uniformly in classical Greek the 1st Aor. Middle, take instead of that the 1st Aor. Passive (cf. § 38, 4), as: aTreKptOrj^ (the prevailing form), especially in the Partic. airoKpiOei'i (Aor. Middle aireicpivaTo Mark xiv. 61 ; Luke iii. 16 ; xxiii. 9 ; Jno. v. 19 xii. 23 ; Acts iii. 12, and frequently in var. as Jno. i. 26 ; xii. 34 xviii. 34),2 cf. Sturz, dial. alex. p. 148 sq.; Lob. Phryn. 148 sq. Schoem. ad Isaeum p. 305. In like manner BieKpiOr}, Matt. xxi. 21 Mark xi. 23 ; Rom. iv. 20 (but iKpi0r} in a Passive sense in Acts xxvii. 1). In other passages Aorists still regarded as Aor. Pass, for 234 Middle, viz. Trpoi/ re eiScs, wv 278 T€ 6(f>0ya-ofjLaL (TOL. Agreeably to the parallelism the passage might be trans- ' Marldand (explicatt. vett. aliquot locor. in the Leipsic reprint of his edition of Eurip. supplic. p. 324 sq.) refers to this head also the passage, famous in the Predesti- nation controversy, Acts xiii. 48, which he punctuates «. fviartvaav, oaoi ■^arcw TeTay/xevoi, els (w^v cudv. and translates: et fidem professi sunt, quotquot (tempus, diem) constitu- erant, in vitam aeternam. This interpretation, however, should find with unprejudiced expositors as little approval as most of those which come from English philologists, (who at any rate give more attention to the N. T. than the German). § 39. THE PASSIVE. 263 lated : what thou hast seen, and what I will cause thee to see, o^OritroyLai being taken in a causative sense (see Doederl. Soph. Oedip. C. p. 492 ; Bornem. in Roseum. Rep. II. 289). The other interpretation, followed in general by Schott, Kiihnol, Heinrichs, Mey., de "Wette : de quibus (in refer- ence to which) or quorum caussa tibi porro apparebo, would on the whole be more suited to the context, and is certainly simpler than the former. As to wv for a by attraction, see § 24, 2, p. 165 sq. Note 2. As in the Hellenistic language many verbs which in classic Greek 247 are neuter are used transitively (see above, p. 251), expositors affirm that ^ii «^ the Passive also, conformably to this causal signification, is occasionally to be taken just like the Hebrew Hophal. But of this there is no certain or even probable instance. In Gal. iv. 9 yvdi^cs O^ov, fiaXX.ov 8k yvuxrOivre's vw avTov even the antithesis requires the passage to be rendered : knowing God, or rather known (recognized) by God, see my Comment, in loc. 1 Cor. viii. 3 €1 Tt5 (lyaTra tov diov, outos eyvaxTToi vtt axnov should not be translated, as by Erasm., Beza, Nosselt, Pott, Heydenreich, et al. : is veram intelligen- tiam consecutus est ; but the meaning is : whoever imagines he knows any- thing (that is where a yvoxns v , the tenses ^ are employed in the N. T. exactly in the same manner as in Greek authors, * viz. the Aorist marks simply the past (merely ^ occurrence at some former time — viewed too as momentary), and is ' P the tense usually employed in narration ; the Imperfect and Pluper- , ^ feet always have reference to secondary events connected in respect f.hJ:-t . ' tQ i\T^y^Q ^y^^jj i\^Q priiieipal event (as relative tenses) ; the Perfect brings the past into connection with the present, representing an action in reference to the present as concluded. No one of these tenses strictly and properly taken can stand for another, as com- 237 mentators often would have us believe.^ But where such an inter- 8th ed. change appears to take place (cf. Georgi, Vind. p. 252 sqq. Hiero- 280 crit. I. 58 sq.) either it is merely apparent, and a sufficient reason (especially a rhetorical one) can be discovered why this and no other tense has been used, or it is to be set down to the account of a certain inaccuracy peculiar to the language of the people, which did not conceive and express relations of time with entire precision ^ Cf. Dertholdt, Einleit. VI. 3151 : "In the use of the tenses, it is well known that the N. T. writers pay very little regard to the rules of grammar." 2 Occasioned in part by parallel passages which it was thought must be considered as exactly alike grammatically. The abuse of parallelism in exposition ought some- time to be exhibited separately. '^ The three principal tenses with the Greeks were the Present, the Perfect, and the Future : Plut. Isid. c. 9 iyJ not only admits, but almost requires, the Present. And apart from this, the expression c^eiv ^w^i' alwvLov might very well be used of one who indeed is not yet in the enjoy- ment of eternal life, but who in the certainty of his hope already as it 250 were possesses it.^ So also Jno. v. 26 ; Matt. v. 4G. have been correctly Jth ed. explained by Fr. On the other hand, we must not with him regard Matt. iii. 10 as a general maxim : every tree which hringeth not forth good fruit, is hewn down (is wont to be hewn down). These words are connected by ow with rj a^ivq Trp6<; t-^v pt^av tojv SeVSpwv Kcirai, and require to be rendered with a special reference to the preceding BevSpa : the axe is already lying at the root of the trees ; accordingly every tree etc. is, (will be) to a cer- tainty, hewn down ; i.e. from the fact of the axe's being already applied, it may be inferred what fate awaits the bad trees. 1 Cor. xv. 35 ttw? iyeipovTai 61 ve.xpot treats of the resurrection of the dead, not as a fact (of the future), but as a doctrine : in tvhat manner does the resurrection of the dead (according to thy teaching) take place ? cf. vs. 42. In the same way we can say : Christ is the Judge ; the punishments of the damned are eternal etc. In like manner Matt. ii. 4 ttov 6 Xpicrros ycwarai (i.e. where is the birthplace of the Messiah ?) and Jno. vii. 52. In 2 Cor. v. 1 otSa/ACV, OTt, £av rj kiriy^LO'; rjjxwp oi(cta tov ct/ctJvous KarakvOrj, oikoSo/at/v ck deov exop-ev, the Future l^o/xcv would have been inexact; the instantaneous entrance into a new habitation, the moment the KaraXveaOaL takes place, is intended to be expressed. In Matt. vii. 8 the Present (of what usually occurs, Krii. 148) is connected, in a statement of universal application, with the Future, cf. Rom. vi. 1 6 ; Gal. ii. 16. On the other hand, in Matt. iii. 1 1 the Present and the Future (of one about to come) are intentionally dis- tinguished : the Present refers to the predicted, permanent (and already 282 present) personality ; the Future, (SaTn-LcreL, to a particular function which he is to execute. Lastly, in the parallel passages Matt. xxiv. 40 and Luke xvii. 34 we find in the former the Present, 6 cts irapaXap.^dv€TaL, but in the latter the Future, ets 7rapaXr]<))0rjcreTai ; in tiie one passage the fact introduced by the Fut. (lo-ovrai) is by a vivid conception regarded as present (see what follows) ; in the other, it is depicted in all its parts as future. Cf. besides, Jno. xvi. 14, 15 ; Heb. i. 11. b. For the Aorist as a historical tense, only when the narrator wishes to represent the past vividly, as though it were just taking place (Longin. c. 25 ; Mtth. 1135 f. ; cf. Zumpt, lat. Gramm. S.431.) ; 4 Jng.„i. 29 Tfi iiravpiov ySX,€7ret . . . kuI Xeyet (vs. 32 koI ifrnprij- fyrjcrev^, i. 44 evplyovTO how they (then) were choosing out, xxiv. 32 77 KapSia r^xoiv KaLOfiivrj tjv iv rj/xiv, 0)9 6\d\€i Tjfuv iv rfi 68ft), Acts viii. 36 &)? iiropevovio kuto. TTjv 680V, rfxdov iirl rt vBcop, x. 17 ; xvi. 4 ; xxii. 11 ; Luke vi. 19 ; Jno. V. 16 ; xii. 6. b. To denote a continuous or statedly repeated past action (Mtth. 1117, 1133 ; Schoem. ad Plut. Agid. p. 137 ; Held, Plutarch. Aera. P. p. 267) ; as, Jno. iii. 22 iKel htkrpv^e /xer avroov koI e^dTrrcS^ev, Rom. XV. 22 iveKOTnojXTjv ra TroWd tov iXOelv, 1 Cor. x. 4 errtvov jdp iK TTvevpxiT. dKoXovdov(T7) ^oivn avhpl heherai vojxw is hound (accordingly belongs to). Gal. ii. 7 ireirlaTevfiai to evayyeXiov con- creditum mihi habeo, etc. (his apostolic functions continue, he is still in the exercise of them), likewise 1 Thess. ii. 4 Ka6a)€ {rb ^t^Xiov) without var., viii. 6. The Perfect is thus used purely with the signification of an Aorist particularly in later writers (especially the Scholiasts, Poppo, Thuc. 256 III. II. 763), Schaef. Demosth. I. 468; Wyttenbach, Plut. Mor. I. 7thcd. 321sq. (Lips.); Lehrs, quaestion. epic. p. 274; Index to Petr. 244 Patric. in the Bonn edition, p. 647 ; Bhdy, 379. Less remarkable 6th ed. js 2 Cor. xi. 25 . . . eXa^ov, ippa^SiaOrjv . . . eXiddadrjv . . . ivavdyrjaa, 288 vv)(6r)p,epov iv r^ ^v6w TreTroirjKa, Heb. xi. 28 Trcaret TreTroirjKe TO irdaya Kol trjv 7rp6dyr), KaraKeKptTat is condemned, the sentence of condemnation has been (at the same moment) and 257 remains pronounced against him, he lies under condemnation,''*"^ iv. 14 ; 1 Cor. xiii. 1 ; 2 Pet. ii. 19, 20, and with a Participle Jno. ^^^ iii. 18 6 firj TTLcrrevoiv rj^rj KeicpLTai, Rom. xiii. 8. On the other ' hand, the Perfect is not used for the Fut. in Jno. v. 24 fiera/Se^rjicev eK Tov Oavdrov eh rrjv ^wrjv ; tlie passage has no reference at all to a future event, but to something that has already occurred 245 {e-^^ei ^coTjv alcovtov'), cf. 1 Jno. iii. 14 ; Lucive, Comment. II. 52. ^""*^ Further, in Jno. xvii. 10 Christ uses the word Se86^acr/xac prolep- tically in reference to the disciples, who already believe, cf. xvi. 11 ; but in xiv. 7 Kal dir apri yf.vcoaKere avrov kol eu) pdKare avTov must be rendered : from henceforth ye know him and have seen him, not with Kiihnol : eum mox accuratius cognoscetis et quasi oculis videbitis, cf. Demosth. Lacrit. 597 a. dvOpcoTrw, ov ■qixel<; ovre y tvco (TKOfiev oW empaKUfiev irdonroTe. See, further, Lucke in loc. 1 The N. T. does not contain a clear instance of the Hebrew prophetic Perfect ( Gesai. Lg. 764), which in the Sept. is usually rendered by a Future. Akin to it is the usage of the Greek augurs, who begin with the Fut. but continue in the Aorist, Iliad. 4, 1.58 sqq. ; Pind. Pyth. 4, 56 ; Isthm. 5, 51, see BOckh not. crit. p. 462. 35 274 § 40. THE TENSES. In JaS. V. 2 o trXovro'i v/xwv (tco-t/ttc, koI ra lynaria v/awv (rqToPpwrm yiyovev the Perf. is not put for the Pres. or Fut. ; but the case indicated by the Apostle in ToXawrcDp. v/xwv t. c7rcp;(o/A. is viewed as already present, and consequently the o-r^Tretv of the riches as already completed. In Jno. xvii. 22 SeScxiKu does not signify tribuam ; Christ contemplates his life as terminated, his disciples have already assumed his place. In Luke x. 19 Se'SwKa and StSw/Ai would be equally appropriate ; Tdf. justly prefers the former. That the Perf. is used also for the Pluperf. (which is not impossible), Haab p. 95 erroneously attempts to prove by Jno. xii. 7 ei? t^v rjfjiepav rov €VTa(f>iacrfji,ov rcTrjprjKcv avTo ; for here TfTTjprjKev is to be regarded as strictly a Perfect (she has kept it, and accordingly uses it now), since Jesus means figuratively to represent this anointing as that which prepares him for the grave. The reading, however, is doubtful. That the Perfects (and Aorists) of many verbs have inherently, and according to established usage, the signification of the Present, is well known ; and is explained by the (inchoative) primary meaning of these verbs (Fr. Rom. I. 254 ; Bengcl on Rom. iii. 23) ; as, Ke'/criy/xai I possess,^ 290 from KTaofj-ai I acquire ; Ke/cot/xTj/xat (I have fallen asleep) I am asleep, from KOifjidofxaL fall asleep ; oTSa / knoio, from ciSw / see ; 'lar-qKa I stand, from l(XTr}p.i place, properly, I have placed myself (hence also 2 Thess. ii. 2 iv4cm]K€v rj rjfjiepa rov Xp. cf. Palair. in loc, Rom. ix. 19 ti's avOea-rrjKe ivho resists him ? cf. xiii. 2 ; 2 Tim. iv. 6 i(f)eaTr]Ke) ; likewise loixa Jas. i. G, 23. The Plup. of such verbs then naturally becomes equivalent to an Imperfect, 258 as £to-TT/K€to-av Matt. xii. 4G, yj^etv Jno. ii, 9 ; xx. 9, etc. Also KtKpaya from ?th ed. Kpd^etv has the meaning of a Present (Jno. i. 15), see Bttm. II. 57 ; Bhdy. 279, and cwpa/ca sometimes signifies : / (have got a sight, and) see Jno. ix. 37 ; 1 Jno. iv. 20. But in Phil. iii. 7 ^yij/Aai (Mtth. 1139) is to be taken as properly a Preterite antithetical to rjyovfiai verse 8. 246 On the other hand the Present ^/cco means, I have come, lam here (Mtth. 6th ei 1136) Jno. ii. 4; iv. 47 ; 1 Jno. v. 20, and so aKovui may be sometimes rendered by audisse 1 Cor. xi. 18 (Xen. A. 5, 5, 8 ; INIem. 3, 5, 9 ; Plat. Gorg. 503 c. ; Philostr. Apoll. 2, 8 ; see Lucian. fug. 7 ; Ast, Plat. legg. p. 9 sq. ; Franke, Demosth. p. 62). This, however, is the case only when the hear- ing (in effect) continues ; as we too say : I hear thou art sick, cf. 2 Thess. iii. 11 and Schoem. Plutarch. Cleom. p. 246.^ To denote the act of hear- 1 In the N. T. this verb, in other tenses besides the Terfcct, is occasionally translated incorrectly by possess. Luke xviii. 12 should be rendered, of all / acquire, quae mihi redeunt ; and xxi. 19 by perseverance acquire, or you will acquire, your souls ; they will then for the first time become your true property, not to be taken away. Schott now explains the passage rightly. As to 1 Thess. iv. 4, see de Wette. Yet Krmai appears to signify possideo in Aesop. 142, 2. As to Koiixiiu^ai 1 Cor. xi. 30, which also is usually considered as equivalent to KfKoiuTivTai, see above, 2 c, p. 267. 3 Just so %vi>edvofxai I understand, Demosth. Calipp. p. 719 c. etc. §40. THE TENSES. 275 ing completed in time past, a Greek must say okt^koo. 'ATre'xo), in the same way, may be translated by accepisse, Matt. vi. 2, 5, 16; Phil. iv. 18, it is properly, however, like weghaben in Germaq (have already, or in full, received), Wyttenbach, Plutarch. Mor. II. 124 ; Palair. p. 25. 6. The AoRisT (E. A. Fritsch, de aoristi vi ac potest. Frcf. 1837. 4to. ; H. Schmidt, der griech. Aorist in s. Verhaltnissen zu d. iibrigen Zeitformen. Halle, 1845. 8vo.) is used, a. In narration for the Pluperfect (Poppo, Thuc. 1. 1. 157 ; Jacob, Lucian. Toxar. p. 98 and Lucian. Alex. p. 106 ; Kiihner, Gr. II. 79) : a. in subordinate clauses specifying time ; as, Acts v. 21 w? ^Kovaav T. Xoyovt . . . Birjiropovv, Luke vii. 1 eVetS?) iirX/jptoaev ra prjixara . . . ekrjxOev (ii. 39 ; xxii. 66 ; Jno. vi, 16 ; ix. 18 ; xiii. 12 ; ^ xxi. 9 ; Acts xxi. 26), cf. Thuc. 1, 102 ol 'AOrjualoi . . . iireiBr) dve- 'XcopT^a-av . . . ^vfifiaxot i «i 276 § 40. THE TENSES. not himself an eye-witness, may have supposed that the affixing of this superscription did not take place until this time), but according to the language it is a simple preterite. The narrator here does not observe the order of time. That the Evangelist does not exactly follow the order of time is obvious besides from this, that after he has made the soldiers sit down to watch Jesus, he proceeds vs. 38 to introduce the crucifixion of the two robbers : totc anavpovvTai, k.t.X. Should this also be regarded as a Plup. ? " In Mark iii. 1 6 i-rrWrjKe t<3 Styawn wo/Aa Uerpov is not to be translated by imposuerat ; for Mark had not yet recorded the circumstance, and it must not be thus as a matter of course supplied from John (i. 43). Also in Acts vii. 5 eSwKcv is not to be taken as a Plup. ; this is manifest fi-om the antithesis : he gave not . . . hut promised. It seems equally un- necessary to take the Aor. as Plup. in Acts iv. 4; viii. 2 ; xx. 12." As to Mark xvi. 1 compared with Luke xxiii. 56, see Fr. That the Aorist stands for the Perfect cannot be shown with certainty from any passage. Luke i. 1 cVctSi^Trep iroXkoi iirexeLprjaav . . . ISofc Kafioi must be taken in the narrative style : as many undertook . . . I too de- termined, etc. So also ii. 48 tckvov, ti i7roLy](ra<; . . . i^rjrovfxev ae. More plausible instances are the following : xiv. 18 aypbv rjyopaa-a, 19 C^vyrj fiowv ■ifyopacra etc., Phil. iii. 12 ovx otl ^877 (Xafiov ^ ij8r) TerckdwfiaL, Jno. xvii. 4 iyu) ere iSoBaaa iin r^s y^s, to epyov ercXeiwcra, etc. But in all these the action is exhibited merely as come to pass, as occupying a single point of 292 time past, simply as gone by, (in Luke, as above, in contrast with a present action) I bought a field, a yoke of oxen, etc. In Phil, as above in particular, ika/Sov seems to denote merely the attaining of the goal as an honorable achievement, while rereX. denotes its consequences. Likewise in Rom. _ xiv. 9 ; Rev, ii. 8 the Aorists are simply narrative, and in reference to the death of Christ the Perfect could not even be used here. In Mark xi. 17 the Perf. is now in the text ; but the Aorist also would be appropriate, see Fr. As to Greek usage, cf. Bockh, Pind. III. 185 ; Schaef. Eurip. Phoen. p. 15; Mtth. 1118. It often depends on the writer which of the two 260 tenses he will use, as the difference between them is sometimes very 7th «L slight, cf. Xen. Mem. 1, 6, 14 ; Dion. H. IV. 2320 ; Alciphr. 3, 46. (The Codd. occasionally vary — as well those of the Greek authors, see e.g. Jacobs, Achill. Tat. p. 434, 566, as those of the N. T. — between the Aorist and the Perfect, e.g. Jno. vi. 32 ; 1 Cor. ix. 15).^ 1 Marhland (expHcatt. vett. aliq. loc. in the Leipzig reprint of his edition of Eurip. Suppl. p. 326) erroneously refers to this head Matt, xxviii. 17 ol 5^ Hiaraffav also, on which see Valcken. annot. crit. p. 350. 2 If in Matt. xxi. 20 irws be taken as an exclamation (quam), i^'fipavrai might have been expected instead of i^ripdvOr), as in Markxi. 21 according to good Codd. But the latter passage is not entirely parallel, and Matt. xxi. 20 is probably to be rendered : how did the Jig4ree wither suddenly ? They desire an explanation of what (according to this Evangelist's narrative) had taken place before their eyes. The disciples therefore allude to the fact of fynpaiv., and not to the consequences. § 40. THE TENSES. 277 b. It is only in appearance that tlie Aorist is used for the Future 248 (Hm. Vig. p. 747. cf. above 4.b.),i e.g. Jno. xv. 6 iau /i// rt? /Meivrj 6th ei iv ifiol, e^XijOr] e^o) w? to KX.rjfjba in such case (should that have happened) he (was) is cast away, not he wiU be cast away (the not abiding has this as its instantaneous consequence : whoever has severed himself from Christ, resembles a branch broken off and thrown away. With this ^tjdrjvaL tlie Presents avvdyovacv etc. are connected). Cf. as to this passage Hm. de emend, p. 192 sq. and Vig. as above. Rev. x. 7 orav /jLeWj} adkiri^eiv, koI ereXeaOrj to fivo-T'npiou, in the mouth of the angel describing the future : then is finished the mystery, 1 Cor. vii. 28. Cf. Eurip. Med. 78 airwXo- fiead' ap , ei Kaicov 7rpoti), like scripsi in Latin, in reference to the epistle which is just being written. In the same way iTrefxifya misi is used, out of regard for the fact that to the receiver of 294 the epistle the ttc/xttw has become an tTrcfjuj/a. As to the latter, compare in the N. T. Acts xxiii. 30 ; Phil. ii. 28, av€7refjLi]/a Philem. 11, probably also crwc7r€/u,i//ttju.€i/ 2 Cor. viii. 18 (Demosth. ep. 3 ; Alciphr. 3, 30 and 41) ; as similar, rj/SovX.yOrjv 2 Jno. 12. On the other hand, not even typaij/a in 1 Cor. V. 11 can be quoted as an instance of that use. This Aorist, rather, refers in all cases either to a previous epistle (1 Cor. v. 9 ; 2 Cor. ii. 3, 4, 9 ; vii. 12 ; 3 Jno. 9), or to an epistle already brought to its conclusion (Rom. XV. 15 ; Philem. 19 ; Gal. vi. 11 ; 1 Pet. v. 12), or even to a series of verses just finished (1 Cor. ix. 15 ; 1 Jno. ii. 21,26 ; v. 13). For an epistle in course of being written ypatfaa is more usual, 1 Jno. ii. 12, 13; 1 Cor. iv. 14 ; xiv. 37 ; 2 Cor. xiii. 10, etc. As to 1 Jno. ii. 13 f. see Lucke. In the Greek writers also this use of the Aor. (or Perf.) for the Pres. is not carefully observed ; cf. Diog. L. 7, 9. See Wyttenbach, Plut. Morai. I. 231 sq. Lips. 2(32 3. Lastly, the Aor. is not employed de conatu ^ (Kiihnol) in Mark ix. 17 Ith ed. T^veyKa tov vlov jxov. These words denote : / brought my son to thee (and I present him now to thee). That i^rjkOe Jno. xi. 44 need not be thus 1 Schaef. Plut. IV. 398 declares himself against Hm. Soph. Aj. 1105. Yet cf. Hm. Iphig. Taur. p. 109. § 40. THE TENSES. 279 explained, has been perceived by KUhnol himself; and Tholuck very prop- erly takes no notice of such an interpretation. On Matt. xxv. 1 see Mey. 6, The Future ^ does not always denote pure and actual futurity, but sometimes what is possible (as futurity and possibility are 250 closely related) and in fact what may or should take place (ethical ^^'^ possibility), Hm. Vig. p. 747 ; Jacob, Lucian. Tox. p. 134 ; Krii. 156. This is particularly the case in questions. Owing, however, to the great resemblance between the Future and the Aor. Subjunctive and the variations in MSS., the passages in question are not all established. Luke xxii. 49 Kupie, el iraTa^ofMev iv fMa^aipa are we to smite, etc. ? (strictly, shaU we — with thy permission — smite, wilt thou allow us to smite ? cf. Eurip. lo 771 eiTrw/xev rj at,y(j!)/j,€v ; rj ri Bpdaofxev ;), Rom. x. 14 ttw? ovv iTriKoXiaovTai, ei? op ovk cTTicrTeu- aav ; how can they call, etc. ? iii. 6 eVet ttw? Kpcvel 6 ^eo? top koct/mov ; Jno. vi. 68 ; Matt. xii. 26 ; 1 Tim. iii. 5 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 16 (Plat. Lys. 213 c. Ti OVV Br) ■^pr)a6fj,eda, Lucian. Tox. 47 ttw? ovv . . .' 'XpTjaofieda rot? irapovai). On the other hand, in Matt. vii. 24 oyLtowoo-w retains the simple force of the Fut., as does ToXfirjad) in Rom. xv. 18. In Rom. v. 7 something is expressed which is never likely to take place. 1 Cor. viii. 8 is similar. In Rom. vi. 1 and 15 the Subjunctive is 295 the preferable reading, as also in Luke iii. 10 ; Jno. vi. 5 ; but in Rom. vi. 2 the authority for ^rjaofiev predominates, and the Future here forms a distinct contrast to the Aor. uTreOdvofiev. Mark iv. 13 and 1 Cor. xiv. 7 are strict Futures. In Matt. vii. 16 eTrir/vcocrea-Oe does not contain a precept (ye shall), but a simple reference to what time itself will show : by their fruits ye will know them (as ye observe them, in the course of your observations). In Rom. vi. 14 the Fut. expresses an assurance and is essentially connected with the Apostle's reasoning. 1 Cor. xv. 29 eVet ti rroi^a-ovaiv oi ^aim^ofxevoc inrep r(ov veKpwv is probably to be rendered : else (if Christ is not risen) what will they do (what are they about to do, what do they purpose) who get themselves baptized over the dead (are therefore in such case deluded) ? Tlie Pres. iroiova-tv is manifestly a correction. The phrase ti ovv ipovfiev always means quid dice- mus ? not quid dicamus. 1 Cor. xiv. 15 7rpo3 f. and Zeitschr. f. Alterthumswiss. 1848. 104-106; 1849. 30-33). Aken, Grundziige der Lehre von Tempus u. Modus im Griech. Giistrow 1850. 36 282 § 41a. INDICATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, AND OPTATIVE. 265 tli^s theory, as nothing in all jxspects better seems yet to have been %\k ed. propounded ; — least of all by Madvig. In the N, T. these moods in their main distinctions, are employed with strict propriety (Hwiid to the contrary ; — whom Kiihnol ad Acta p. 777 quotes with approval). Only it is noticeable that the Optative, as in the later Greek authors who do not aim at classic refinement, is partially set aside (more still than in Josephus), and in certain constructions is superseded by the Subjunctive.^ S98 a. IN INDEPENDENT PROPOSITIONS. 2. The use of the Indicative in independent propositions is very 253 simple even in classic Greek. In reference to the N. T., accordingly, 6th ed. ^g have on this head but two remarks to make : a. The Imperfect Indicative is sometimes employed, as in Latin (Zumpt, S. 446), where we should use the Subjunctive ; as, 2 Cor. xii. 11 e/v av. All recent expositors have correctly explained 2 Cor. xii. 9 apKel o-oi rj x'^P'-'^ fiov, which Luther inaccurately renders : be satisjied with my grace. The force of the Indicative has been exaggerated in another way in 1 Cor. v. 7 : KuOm eoTTc alvfioL esse debetis ; incorrectly, see Mey. 3. The Indicative Pros, sometimes occurs also b. in direct ques- tions where in Latin the Subjunctive (in German the auxiliary verb sollen) would be used ; as, Jno. xi. 47 ti Trotov/jiep ; on ovto<; 6 av6pa>- 300 TTo? TToWa aTjfiela iroiei, quid/aciamus ? what are we to do ? Lucian, pise. 10; asin. 25. The Ind., however, here strictly denotes that something must undoubtedly be done (forthwith) ; so we say, wJiat are we doing ? more resolute and emphatic than ivhat shall we do ? TL ifoioyfiev is the question of one who invites to delibera- tion (cf. Acts iv. 16) ; rt iroLovfiev, on the contrary, is the language of one who on behalf of those concerned assumes the determination not only in general to do something, but also to do something definite, and desires simply to draw out a declaration of the specific thing. [That this distinction is not artificial, as Bttm. Gramm. d. N. T. Sprachgebr. S. 180 asserts, has been justly acknowledged by Mey., also, inloc] On this (rhetorical) Ind. Pres., which mainly occurs in conversation, see Heind. Plat. Gorg. p. 109 and Theaet. p. 449 ; Stallb. Plat. rep. I. 141 ; Bhdy. 396. The Greeks go still further, and even say trlvofiev we drink i.e. we are to drink, when they mean to proceed to drink forthwith, when the cup has been already lifted up (Jacobs, Achill. Tat. p. 559). Gal. vi. 10 however, epdyQ)fJ>ev koI TrloifMev, avptov jdp d-TTodv-qaKoixev, Phil. iii. 15 oaoi ovvreXecoi, tovto (f)po va)/j,€v,lThess, V. 6 ryprp/opcbfiei^ Kal vri(j)cofiev, Luke viii. 22. Tlie Codd. occasion- ally vary between the Subjunct. and the Fut. Heb. vi. 8 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 15 ; Jas. iv. 18, but in the first two passages there is prepon- derating evidence in favor of the Subjunctive. b. In undetermined questions (conjunct, deliberativus, Mtth. 1170; Bhdy. 896 ; Kiihner II. 102 f.) ; as, Mark xii. 14 Bw/juev rj fxrj B^fjuev; shall we give or not give? Rora. vi. 1 eTTLfikvoijxev rfj d/xapTia ; 1 Cor. xi. 22 ; also in the 3d and 2d Pers., as Luke xxiii. 81 el iv tu> irypw 301 ^v\(p ravra irotovatv, iv tw ^r}pa> rl jevrjTai ; and Matt. xxvi. 54 TTft)? irXrjpcodioaLv al ypa^al ; how shall the Scriptures be fulfilled ? xxiii. 38 TTw? (f)vyr]Te (Jno. v. 47 var.). Under this head comes the Subjunctive in certain set phrases ; as, Luke ix. 54 ^eXet? ecTrw/Mev TTvp Kara^fjvai diro rov ovpavov ; (Hm. de ellips. p. 183) wilt thou that we, are we to bid etc., Matt. xiii. 28 ; xxvi. 17 ; Mark xiv. 12 ; Luke xxii. 9. Cf. Eurip. Phoen. 722 ^ovXei rpd-n-wpLai Srjd' 68ov9 aWwi TLvd<; ; Xen. Mem. 2, 1, 1 ^ovXei aK07rwfx€v ; Aesch. Ctesiph. 297 c. ; Lucian. dial. m. 20, 3. See also Matt. vii. 4 d4>€<; iK^dXw to Kdp^opovTt8os f-^Orj ; (1st Pers. VS. 311) ; Plato, Soph. 22,> a. ; Arrian. Epict. 3, 22, 96. In Luke xi. 5 the Fut. Ind. and the Subjunctive are connected, rt? cf v/awv I^cl (j>iXov kol Tropevo-cTai Trpos avTov ... kol eiTrr] avTw ; see Mtth. 1171 ; Hm. partic. av p. 87 ; Stallb. Plat. Phileb. p. 26 and Phaed. p. 202 ; Bornem. Luc. p. 147 ; Bmln. p. 182. Respecting Jas. iv. 15 lav 6 Kvpto^ Othqcrrf kox ^-qa-wfiev (lyaufjiev) /cut TTOi-^crco/Aev (ttoit/o-o/acv) tovto rj iKetvo a learned controversy has been carried on between Fritzsche (Leipz. Literatur-Zeit. 1824. S. 2316 and n. krit. Journ. V. S. 3 fF.) and Bornem. (n. krit. Journ. VI. S. 130 fF.)., The former would make the conclusion begin at kol Trotrjao/xcv (adopting this as the preferable reading) ; the latter would make it begin at koI ^■^awuev (re- 269 taining also Troirjawfiev). Fritzsche renders the passage: if the Lord will 7th ed. and we live, we shall also do this or that ; Bornem. : if it please the Lord, let us seek our support, let us do this or that. Every one must feel that there is something incongruous in the expression if God will, we will live ; and B. himself has perceived this, as he translates t,rja: we will use life ! But this explanation appears forced, and not warranted by biblical usage. There is nothing remarkable in the occurrence of Kai at the be- ginning of the apodosis (2 Cor. xi. 12). With regard to this, therefore, 1 must agree with Fr. But he should not have asserted that Tron^cro/Aev 302 is far better attested than ^-qaofjiev. The critical authorities are nearly equal. Only from Cod. Meerm. (by Dermout) Troiiycro/Acv (but not ^T^o-o/Aev) has been adduced, [and Cod. Sin. has Tron^aofj-ev together with Irjaofxev^. Considering the ease with which a mistake in transcribing might occur, we should probably adopt as the most suitable reading : iav 6 KvpLos OeXi^crr] KOL tpq(T(jifi(v, Kcd TTon^a-wfitv etc. (vs. 13). 5. The Optative is used in independent propositions when a wish is expressed ; as, Acts viii. 20 to apyvpiov aov avv aol eir] ei? unrcoKeiav, Rom. xv. 5 ; Philem. 20 i'yoi aov oval/j^ijv, 1 Pet. i. 2 ; 2 Pet. i. 2 ; 1 Thess. iii. 11 f. ; v. 23 ; 2 Thess. iii. 5 ; (in 2 Cor. ix. 10 ; 2 Tim. ii. 7 the Futures are to be restored, as is the Imperat. Xa/3eT0) in Acts i. 20). As to the Sept. see some remarks in Thiersch p. 101. Cf. 1 Kings viii. 57 ; Ps. xl. 3 ; Tob. v. 14 ; x. 12 ; xi. 16. Instead of the Optative, the Hebrew frequently employs a question to denote a wish ; as, 2 Sam. xv. 4 Tt9 p.€ KaraarT-qa-u Kpirrjv utinam quis me constituat ! This construction, however, occurs also in Greek poets, Fr. Rom. II. 70. Yet it is on insufficient grounds that Rom. vii. 24 ti? p.i pva-erat. etc. has been taken as a wish expressed in the form of a question. A question expressive of perplexity and conscious helplessness is here peculiarly appropriate, and requires no /ncra/Jao-ts cts aAAo yevos. § 41b. INDICATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, AND OPTATIVE. 287 b. USE OF THESE THREE MOODS IN DEPENDENT PROPOSITIONS. 257 6th ei 1. The particles of design Xva and ottcd? (both which, however, strictly signify qitx) modo, ut ; — respecting ^-q see below, § 56), are quite naturally construed with the Subjunctive and Optative (according to the distinction above pointed out between the two moods), as every design refers to the future, and, consequently, to something still to be carried into effect. The Indicative they can take — so long as the writer thinks correctly — only in the Future tense.^ In the N. T. these particles are usually followed by a. The Subjunctive, and then a. not only after the Present, as Matt. vi. 2 TTOioOo'ti' ... 07roi oTpaToXoyqcravTL dpeajj, 10 irdvTa xnrofievw hid t. iicXeKTOv^, 2(0 Xva Kol avTol awTrjpia'i rv'^coat (Mark iv. 21 ; Luke viii. 12 ; Rom. xi. 25 ; 1 Jno. i. 3 ; Heb. ix. 15; 1 Cor. vii. 29 ; Gal. vi. 13 ; the Subjunctive here denoting — Hm. Vig. 850 — what was regarded as a consequence actually about to take place, what was in fact and immediately designed, consequently what is objectively possible), and after the Imperat. and the Put., as 1 Tim. iv. 15 iv tovtoi<; 303 tadt, 7va (70V r) TrpoKOTTT] ^aj^epd ?/, Matt. ii. 8 dTrarf/eiXari fioL, oVo)? Kdyo) ekOoiv 7rpo-€r,e'nv, Lva ip i/Mol 7rpcoT(p ivSei^rjrat 'I. Xpiaroar]T at rjfxdi;^ Roin. vi. 4 avveTd(j)r}/ji€V avrai, ipa ,. . koI T^/xet? ev Kaivor'qri. ^wr}<; Trepi- TTUTTjawfiev, 1 Jno. iii. 5 €cf)avepco67}^ ha ra'i a/xajOTi'a? rjfxwv dprj, 258 vs. 8 ecfiavepcoOrj, XvaXvcrrj ra epja rod Sta^oXov, v, 13 ravra eypayjra ^^^^^viuv^XvaelhriTe', cf. Luke i.4 (Plat. Cnt.43 b. ; rep. 9,472c.; legg. 2, 653 d. ; Xen. Mem. 1,1,8; Aelian. 12, 80). In other passages, e.g. Acts V. 26 7/70761/ avrov^ ... iva fxrj XcOaaO wo-lv, Acts ix. 21 €i? Tovro ekrfKvdei, lva . . . a^'^d'yr), the Su])jiuictive may denote an intended result of the occurrence of which the speaker entertained no doubt whatever ; cf. Mark viii. 6 eSlSov rol<; fiaOrjTal'i aurov, Xva TrapaOwa-L (that they might . . . which they could not refuse to do), xii. 2 ; Acts xxv. 26 Trpo^yayov avrov icfi vjjlwv, otto)? t?}? dvaKpicrerj)<; fyevofxevr)va tova-9e, and Gal. iv. 17 ^rfKovcnv vfid eaxnov i/xeplarOr], cf. vs. 28 ; Luke xi. 20 (Pres. followed by Aor.) cf. Orig. de die domin. p. 3 Jani : el Be toO epjov cnreyei'^, et? ri]v eKKXrjaiav 8e ovk eUep-^T], ovBev iKepBava<;. /3. Acts xvi. 15 el KeKpUare jxe Triarrjv rco Kvpiw eivat, el(TKoixev (Perf. followed by Pres. ; cf. Demosth. c. Boeot. p. 639 a.) ; Jno. xi. 12 el KeKoiiJLrjrai, acod^a-erai, (Perf. followed by Fut.), Rom. vi. 5 ; 2 Cor. ii. 5 ei Tt9 X.eXvTrrjKev, ovk e/i-e XeXimrjKev (Perf. followed by Perf.) ; vii. 14 ei n avrat virep v/xiov KeKav^rjfiai, oi) Karya'xyvdrjv (Perf. followed by Aor.). 7. Rom. xv. 27 el rot? TrvevfiariKol^ avrcou 808 eKoivcovrjaav ra edvr), (x^e'Ckovai etc., 1 Jno. iv. 11 (Aor. followed by Pres.) ; Jno. xviii. 23 el KaK(io<; iXakrjaa, fjbaprvprjaov rrepl rov KaKov, Rom. xi. 17, 1 8 ; Col. iil. 1 ; Philem. 18 (Aor. followed by Imperat.) ; Jno. xiii. 32 el 6 ^eo? eBo^dadr) iv avro), Kol 6 deo koI iriw {&v is omitted in the better Codd. [Sin. also]) the Subjunctire is employed in reference to an uncertain limit in the future. 30 298 § 41b. INDICATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, AND OPTATIVE. Matt, as above, cf. Time. 1, 137 rrjv acr(^aXeLav ehai firjSiva iK^rjvai €K rriv iyoi iKOfxcadfirjv dv to ifxov avv tokw, and Heb. x. 2 67ret ovk av iiravaavTO 7rpo<;(f)ep6fM€vat, where we may supply from vs. 1 ; if tliese sacrifices had perfected forever the offerers, — com- pletely cleansed them from sin (Xen. A. 4, 2, 10 ; Thuc. 1, 11 ; 319 Plat. symp. 175 d. j rep. 8, 554 b. ; Aristot. rhet. 2, 2, 11 ; Diog. L. 2, 75). Cf. Sept. Gen. xxvi. 10 ; Job iii. 10, 13 (Pluperf. 2 Sam. xviii. 11). b. With the Optative, when subjective possibility is attached to condition (opinio de eo, quod ex aliqua conditione pendet, Hm. partic. dv 164 sqq.),^ Acts xxvi. 29 ev^aifirjv dv tcS 6eu) (J could willingly pray God, i.e. were I to be guided by what I feel — were I to follow the wish of my heart). This phrase (corresponding to fiov\oL/jL7)v dv) occurs in Dio C. 36, 10, and ev^acT dv Tt9 in Xen. hipparch. 8, 6, a>9 dv iyco ev^aifxijv Diog. L. 2, 76. We find a similar phrase, d^cdxrac/j,'' dv, in Liban. oratt. p. 200 b. In direct questions: Acts ii. 12 \eyovT€<; tl dv 6e\.oc tovto elvat ; ivhat may this perhaps mean? (I assume it must mean something), xvii. 18 285 Tt dv diXoi 6 airepiioXoyof; ovto^ \eyeuv ; (it being assumed that^""^' his words have some meaning or other), Luke vi.ll ; Gen.xxiii.15; Dent, xxviii. 67 ; Job xix. 23 ; xxv. 4 ; xxix. 2 ; xxxi. 31 ; Ecclus. xxv. 3. Cf. Od. 21, 259 ; Xen. C. 1, 4, 12 ; Diog. L. 2, 5 ; Kru. 163. Acts viii. 31 is equivalent to a hypothetical constriiction : ttw? av Swaiixrjv, iav ftrj Tis 68r]y^arj fj.€ ; for without a question it would run : ovk av Bwalfirjv, cf. Xen. Apol. 6 rjv ata-OdvwfiaL ^ftpwv yiyvoftcvos . . . ttcos av . . . cyw In av i^Scoj? )8toT£uoi;at ; We find av (according to most Codd. [Sin. included]) without a mood (Ilm. partic. dv, p. 187) in 1 Cor. vii. 5 fxrj airoarepilre a\Xrj\ov<;, d fiy ti av €K (TVfKJxavov, except perhaps in case of mutual consent. 2. After conditional clauses with el we find dv in the apodosis 1 Klotz p. 104 : Adjecta ad optativum ista particula hoc dicitur : nos rem ita anirao cogitare, si quando fiat, i.e. rem, si fiat, ita fieri oportere ex cogitatione quidem nostra Cf. Mdo. 148 f. 304 § 42. THE CONJUNCTION "AN WITH THE THREE MOODS. with the Indicative to denote hypothetical reality (Rost 627 ; Mtth. 1147 f.), a. With the Imperf. (usually), when I would do it is to be expressed, a. After an Imperf. in the antecedent clause, as in Luke vii. 39 0VT09 el rjv Trpocj^ijTrjf;, iyivcoaKev du etc. were he o, prophet^ 272 lie would know, xvii. 6 ; Matt, xxiii. 30 (Fr.) ; Jno. v. 46 ; (viii. 19) ; etbed^jji 42. ix. 41; XV. 19; xviii. 36 ; Gal. i. 10 ; Heh. viii. 4, 7 ; 1 Cor. xi. 31 ; Acts xviii. 14 ; cf. 2 Mace. iv. 47 ; Valckeuaer ad Luc. xvii. 6. /3. After an Aor. in the antecedent clause, as in Heh. iv. 8 el 'yap avrovavvr]? av Tpo(f)d ^aaiXel . . . koI Kadiaare iirl rr^v yrju, Epiphan. II. 368 e^e Tou? Tov Oeov \6you<; Kara "^u^^v aov Koi -^eiav firj eye ^E7n(f)aviov. In the N. T. this explanation has been applied to Eph. iv. 26. (from Ps. iv. 5.) opyi^eaOe koX fir) dfiaprdveTe be angry and 279 sin not i.e. if ye be angry ye do not sin (Rii.), Jno. vii. 52 ipevvqaov ^ ^ KoX the search^ and thou imlt see (Kii.), cf. divide et impera. In Hebrew, constructions of this sort are certainly frequent ; Ewald, 1 According to Mdler (Schneidewin, Philolog. VI. 124 ff.) the Imper. Pres. only should be so used. This, it is true, is found in the above passages of the N. T. ; but the question in reference to the N. T. will not be regarded as thereby decided. '^ What Bomem. on Luke xxiv. 39 adduces from Greek authors, is of a different nature. This mode of expression, however, cannot be considered as thereby a Hebra- ism ; see Gesen. Lgb. S. 776 (where, however, some passages are quoted which remain doubtful, as Ps. xxxvii. 27, or which at any rate ought to have been separated from the others Gen. xlii. 18 ; Isa. viii. 9). With Eph. iv. 26 (p. 312) those passages have no analogy, otherwise the words of Paul must mean : if ye are angry, yet do not sin, or even : if ye would not sin, then be angry. It is therefore surprising that, notwith- standing this, Zyro (Stud. u. Krit. 1841. 3 Heft S.685) has had recourse again to this alleged Hebraism. 312 § 43. THE IMPEEATIVE. krit. Gramm. 653. But in Jno. vii. the expression is more forcible than KoX oy^ei (Liician. indoct. 29) would have been. The result of the search is so certain, that the exhortation to search is at the same time an exhortation to see. We find the regular construction 328 in Luke x, 28. In the passage from Eph. Paul's meaning is un- questionably this : we should not let anger lead us into sin, of. vs. 27 (see Bengel and BCrus. in loc.) ; vs. 31 cannot be urged against this. It is only the grammatical acceptation of the expres- sion that is doubtful. It is eitlier logically a single proposition opyL^o/jievoc fxr) dfiapr. divided into two grammatically, or opyl^eade must be taken permissively (cf. the similar passage Jer. x. 24). For, the assertion (Mey.) that of two closely connected Imperatives the 293 one cannot denote a permission and the other a command, is incor- 7tbed. rect; we may say with perfect propriety: Well, then, go (I give you leave), but do not stay out above an hour. 1 Tim. vi. 12 d-ywvt^ov tov KaXov dywva Trj<; TrtoTcws, €7riXa)8ou r^s atuiVLOV t.unj'i (where the asyndeton is not without special force) must be rendered simply : Jight the good fight of faith, lay hold of (in and by that fight) eternal life ; cf. Mark iv. 39, see Fr. *E7riXa/i/?. riys C^^^s is not here ex- hibited (though it might have been) as the result, but as the very essence, of the contest ; and €7nkafj.f3. does not signify attain, receive. In 1 Cor. XV. 34 iKv^ij/are SiKatw? kol /xr] afjiaprdvcTe are obviously two exhortations, one of which (Aor.) is to be carried into effect at once, while the other (Pres.) requires continuous effort. Constructions like Jno. ii. 19 Xvaare tov vaov tovtov, koX iv rpixriv rifiepaLs cycow avTOV, Jas. iv. 7 dvTtaTrjTC tuJ 8ia/3oXa), koI vfjiwv (vs. 8), Eph. V. 14 (Sept.) dvaa-ra ck twv veKpwv, koI l-jnt^avau croi 6 Xpto-ros, may be resolved like two Imperatives connected by xat : if ye resist the devil, he will, etc. But this, grammatically, requires no remark, as the Impera- tive has here its ordinary import (hortatory), and the structure of these sentences can, indeed must (as incomparably ^ore forceful), be retained in the translation also. Cf. Lucian. indoct. 29 tovs Kovpe'as tovtous c7rtcrK€i//at KOX oipei, dial. d. 2, 2 evpvO/xa ftaive koI o\(/u, Plato, Theaet. 149 b.; rep. 5, 407 c. ; see Fr. Mt. as above. Even recent expositors quite erro- neously take the Imperative in Jno. ii. 19 ; xx. 22 for the Fut., supporting their view by a reference to the Heb. in such passages as Gen. xx. 7 ; xlv. 18 (Glass. Philol. sacr. I. 286). Inasmuch as every command extends into future time, the Fut. tense, as a general expression of futurity, may be used for the Imperative (see no. 5) ; but the special form (the Impera- tive) cannot, in turn, be employed for the more general (Fut.). Such 280 a substitution would occasion a confusion of tongues, and the observation ^1* «^' above alluded to, like so many others, is the offspring of the closet, not of attention to the phaenomena of living speech. Olshausen has correctly § 43. THE IMPEKATIVE. 313 opposed Tholuck (and Kiihnbl) on Jno. xx. 22, and Tholuck has rectified 329 his error. In Luke xxi. 19 the Fut. is the better reading; see Meyer. 3. In the N. T. the distinction between the Aorist Imperative and Present Imperative is in general maintained (Hm. emend, rat. p. 219 and Vig. 748, cf. H. Schmid de imperativi temporib. in ling, grace. Viteb. 1833, 4to. and especially Bmln. 169 ff., and in reference to the latter, MoUer in Schneidewin Philologus VI. 115 IF.). For a. The Aorist Imperat. (cf. § 40 note 2.) denotes an action that is either transient and instantaneous (Ast, Plat, polit. p. 518 ; Schaef. Demosth. lY. 488), or to be__iLUil£Ctaken but qncej as, Mark i. 44 aeaurbv Sei^ov Ta> lepel, iii. 5 eKreivov Trjv %et/3a crov, vi. 11 eKTLvd^are rov 'xpvv^ Jno. ii. 7 'ye^juiaare TaovevaeL<;, ov /jiot)(evaei,<;, Luke iv. 12 ; Acts xxiii. 5 ; Rom. vii. 7 ; xiii. 9 ; 1 Cor. ix. 9 (Heb. xii. 20 Sept.). Only the fifth commandment ri/jia tov rrraTepa etc. (from Sept.) Matt. XV. 4 ; xix. 19 ; Eph. vi. 2, etc. is expressed in the Imperat. In Rom. vi. 14 the Fut. expresses simple expectation. This form of expression may be in itself either stern or mild ; — depending on the tone with which it is uttered. d. By the Infinitive : to proceed ! This, not to mention antique and epic diction, occurs in Greek prose, and not only when a com- mand is uttered with excitement or imperious brevity (Hm. Soph. Oed. R. 1057 ; Schaef. Demosth. III. 530 ; Poppo, Time. 1. 1. 146 ; Bhdy. 538) ,1 but also in requests, wishes, and prayers (Bremi, Dem. 230; Stallb. Plat. rep. I. 388; Fr. Rom. III. 86; Mdv.155. Compare the' ancient form of salutation %at/9e4i/ Acts xv. 23 ; Jas. 288 i. 1). Expositors have often been over-ready to discover this usage in the N. T. (Georgi, Hierocr. I. I. 58) ; altogether incorrectly in 1 Thess. iii. 11 ; 2 Thess. ii. 17 ; iii. 5, where as the accent shows Imperatives occur. In other passages the change of construction, in sentences of some length, has been overlooked : in Luke ix. 3 we find fi'qre pd^hov . . . e')(eLv, as if firjhev aipeLv had been employed in thfe preceding part of the sentence ; both constructions might have followed direv 7rpo<; avrov'i, and the writer certainly thought of e^ety as an Infinitive depending on eiTrev. In the parallel passage Mark vi. 8 f. we find another change of structure. Cf. Arrian. Al. 4, 20, 5 aif vvv <^v\a^ov rrjv dp')(f)v ' el Be ... av Se . . . irapahovvai. Similarly Rom. xii. 15, see § 63. In other passages also tlie regu- lar grammatical connection has been misunderstood : in Rev. x. 9 hovvau undoubtedly must be joined with Xejoov ; in Col. iv. 6 elSevat, 297 is an Inf. elucidating the preceding predicates of X.6709. Only in Ithed. pijji Iii 1Q TrX^y . . . rS avrm a-jotxelv is the Inf. most easily taken for the Imperat. ; it points out here with peculiar effect the un- changing law of progress for the Christian life. Cf. Stallb. ad Plat. Gorg. 447 b. To the imperative tva under a. Gieseler in Rosenm. Repert. II. 145 refers the use of a tva in John etc., as in Jno. i. 8 ovk ^v ckcivos to ^ws aXX ii/a fiapTvpi^a-r) but he was to bear witness; ix. 3 ; xiii. 18. But the 833 construction can only have this meaning when iva signifies i?i order that ; 1 Thus in laws and moral rules in Hesiod. opp. et dd., in Theognis, in Hippocrates, in Marc. Anton. See Gayler, partic. negantt. p. 80 sq. § 44. THE INFINITIVE. 317 and then an ellipsis, at least of a general kind, as ycyovc tovto, ^ underlies the usage, though John himself in consequence of frequent use regarded it in particular passages as nothing more than but in order that, cf. Fr. Mt. 840 sq. An expositor, on the contrary, if he wishes to do his duty, can and must in every case give naturally the special ellipsis from the context ; as, Jno. i. 8 he himself was not the light of the world, but he came {rjXdev vs. 7) that he might bear witness ; ix. 3 neither hath this man sinned nor his parents, but he was born blind that . . . might be made manifest (cf. 1 Jno. ii. 19). In xiii. 18 there is probably an aposiopesis, which may be easily explained psychologically : / speak not of you all, I know those whom I have chosen, but (I have made this choice) that . . . might be fulfilled etc.; see BCrus. (if we do not prefer to suppose that Jesus, instead of giving utterance to the painful fact in his own language, continues in the words of the Psalmist, cf. 1 Cor. ii. 9). In Jno. xv. 25 ifjiUTrjcrdv /ac SiDpcdv in the quotation shows that fjLefxurrJKoaiv must be repeated before Iva. In Mark xiv. 49 the coming forth of the Jews against Jesus, in the manner de- scribed in vs. 48, is understood as predicted. Lastly, in Rev. xiv. 13 from a.TTodvrja-KovTe'i the word aTro6vi^(TKov(Ti may be supplied before iva etc. Note. In the N. T. text it is occasionally doubtful, whether a verbal form that answers equally for the Imperat. and (the 2d person of) the po^ Indie, is to be taken for the former or the latter ; e.g. Heb. xii. 17 ta-re, jtiui OTi Kol fi€T€TreiTa dcXdjv K\T]povofjirjaaL tt]v cikoyCav airfZoKifidcrdrf, [xiii. 23 j 1 Cor. vi. 4 jSiu^TLKo. fxev ovv Kpir-qpta iav tx'')'''^^ tov<; i^ovOevrj/jLevov; iv ry €KK\r)aLa, tovVous Ka^t^cre, i. 26 ; xi. 26; Rom. xiii. 6; Eph. ii. 22; Phil. ii. 15, 22 ; Jno. xiv. 1 ; 1 Pet. i. 6; ii. 5. In all such cases the decision must depend on the context; and the question belongs not to Grammar but to Hermeneutics. §44. THE INFINITIVE.2 298 7th ed. 1. The Infinitive, inasmuch as it expresses the idea of the verb purely and simply i.e. without reference to a subject, is least qualified of all the verbal forms to figure as a part of speech in a 334 grammatical sentence. It is so used, a. in expressing a concise, hurried command (§ 43, 5 d.) ; or, b. when introduced adverbially ; or, c. snbjoined absolutely. Under b. comes only the phrase «? eTTo? eiTreip Heb. vii. 9 (Krii. 178). To c. may be referred (Kru. 179) Phil. iv. 10 aveOaXere to irjrep ifiov (f)pov€lv as to your regard 1 To say that there is nothing to be supplied (as de Wette does), is not satisfactory ; at any rate it must be shown how and by what means ^ya assumes that import. 2 K. E. A. Schmidt on the Infinitive. Prenzlau, 1823. 8vo. ; M. Schmidt on the Infin. Ratibor, 1826. 8vo. ; Eichhoff on the Infin. Crefeld, 1833. 8vo. Cf. Mthlhom in the allgem. Lit. Z. 1833. Ergzbl. nr. 110. 318 § 44. THE INFINITIVE. for me, though another construction also is possible here. But an Inf. which is added to a clause as its complement (infinit. epexe- geticus), generally to express design (Rost 687), is related to the last use, or rather coincides with it essentially, Matt. ii. 2 y]kQoiiev iTpo'iKvvriaai aura) (in Order) to worship him (after epxofiai Matt. xi. 7 ; XX. 28 ; Heb. ix. 24 ; Rev. xxii. 12 ; Jno. iv. 15 ; Luke i. 17, and Trefnrw or uTroaTeXXo) Mark iii. 14 ; 1 Cor. i. 17 ; xvi. 3 and, besides, Acts v. 31 ; Rom. x. 7 ; 1 Cor. x. 7) ; 2 Cor. xi. 2 -^pfioadfMTjv vfmf hi dv8pl irapdevov ajyvr)v irapacnrjaaL tm Xpiarm, Col. i. 22 ; 2 Cor. ix. 5 ; x. 13, 16 ; Jno. xiii. 24 vevet tovto) Trvdea-Oac (cf. Diod. S. 20, 69), Rev. xvi. 9 ov pi€rev6r)aav Bovvai avra> So^av, 2 Pet. iii. 2 (1 Sam. xvi. 1) Phil. iv. 12. In other passages it denotes the result (as, in the early language, design and result were not yet distinguished, Bmln. S. 339) Col. iv. 6 6 X0709 vfxwv . . . akari i^pTVfjb€vo<; . . . elSevat Troi^ etc. seasoned loith salt, to know (so that ye may know), Ileb. v. 5 ; or the mode of carrying into effect, as in Acts xv. 10 ri Trupd^ere rov deov CTrtdelvai ^vyov inrl top rpd'xrjXov tcov pLaOrjrwv imponendo Jugum, Heb. v. 5 (1 Pet. iv. 3). Lastly, in Eph. iii. 6 the Infin. clause gives the substance of the fiiurrripLov vs. 4 ; cf. also Eph. iv. 22. In Greek authors this lax use of the Inf. is carried much farther, Schaef. Soph. II. 324 ; Jacob, Lucian. Tox. 116 ; Held, Pint. Aem. P. 185 sq. The Inf. of design is particularly frequent (Soph. Oed. C. 12 ; Time. 1, 50 ; 4, 8 ; Her. 7, 208 ; Plut. Cim. 5 ; Arrian. Al. 1, 16, 10 ; 4, 16, 4) 285 Mtth. 1234 ; Krii. 186 (though the Greeks, after verbs of going 6tli ed. QY sending, still more frequently employ the Participle, cf. Acts viii. 27 ; xxiv. 11). Such relations are more distinctly denoted sometimes by wsxc before the Inf., as in Luke ix. 52 ; Matt, xxvii. 1. On the above passage in Matt. 299 where the explanation of Fr. is very far-fetched cf. Strab. 6, 324 ; Schaef. Jtheiad Bos elHps. p. 784, and Soph. Oed. Col. p. 525; Mtth. 1232. In the Byzantine writers wsrc with the Inf. instead of the Inf alone is peculiarly common, e.g. Malal. p. 385 ifiovXevaaro wsre iK^XrjOrjvai ttjv vevOepav, p. 434. Cf. also Ileinichen, ind. ad Euseb. III. 545. A parallel to Luke, as above, occurs in Euseb. H. E. 3, 28, 3 : (heX6eiv ttotc iv ^aXaviiw wstc XovaaaOau 835 This extended use of the particle in the later language it is better to rec- ognize in the N. T. also, than to consent to forced interpretations. 'Qs before the Inf. occurs only in Acts xx. 24 ovSevo^ Xdyov Troiotfiat, oiSl t^w rrjv ijrvxqv fJi-ov Tip-iav i/xavrw, ws reXeiojo-ai tov Spofiov fiov fjura xapa.v\d^ai (Thuc. 1, 139.), Heb. xi. 6 ; vi. 10 ovk dSiKo^ 6 deo^ iirCkadeadaL etc., 1 Pet. iv. 3 ; 1 Cor. vii. 39 ; Mark i. 7 ; 2 Cor. iii. 5 ; Luke xv. 19 ; Acts xiii. 25 ; Heb. v. 11 ; 2 Tim. ii. 2 ; Luke xxii. 33. Cf. Ast, Plat. legg. p. 117 ; Stallb. Plat. Euthyd. 204 ; Weber, Demosth. 261 ; Bhdy. 361. 2. But the Inf. may also enter into the construction of a sentence as an integral part of it ; and then its nature as a noun more or less clearly appears. In such cases it is used sometimes as the subject and sometimes as the object. It serves as subject (Mtth. 1239) in sentences such as Matt. xii. 10 el e^eo-rt rot? ad^^aai depaireveiv is it lawful to heal on the Sahbath day (is healing etc. lawful) ? XV. 26 OVK eari Kokov Xa^elv tov dpTov rwv reKucov, 1 Thess. iv. 3 2S6 TOVTO i(TTC 6e\T]fia 70V deov . . . d'Ke-)(ea6ai, . . . diro t^poveiv, 2 Tim. i. 18. Yet, more frequently we find a 'complete clause with iva after verbs of entreating, commanding, etc. (see no. 8), with 6tl after verl)s of saying, believing (Matt. xx. 10 ; Acts xix. 26 ; xxi. 29 ; Rom. iv. 9 ; viii. 18 ; Gal. v. 10), and always in the N. T. after eXnri^a). If, on the other hand, the Inf. and the principal verb have one and the same subject, the quali- fying words, if such there be, are subjoined in the Nominative; as, Rom. XV. 24 ikirl^w htatropevo^ievci deda-aadat vfia^i, 2 Cor. x. 2 Biofiai TO fir) TrapoDv dappija-ai (Philostr. Apoll. 2, 23), Rom. i. 22 ; Phil. iv. 11 ; 2 Pet. iii. 14 ; Jude 3 (Luke i. 9 ?),3 which is a kind of attraction ; cf. Kriiger, gramm. Untersuch. III. 328 ff. The subject itself is then not repeated ; as, Jas. ii. 14 ; 1 Cor. vii. 36. 338 Even in this construction, however, the Accusative (with Inf.) may be used, yet only when the sulrject is repeated in the form of 302 a pronoun (Hm. Yig. 743), though this does not often occur; as, Itked. Rom. ii. 19 irkTroiBa^ aeavrov oBrjyov elvai rv^Xwv, Phil. iii. 13 e7&) ifiavrov ov Xoyl^ofxai KaTei\r)<^evai, Luke xx. 20 vTroKpivofjLevov;, eavToix; BiKaiov<; elvai, Acts xxvi. 2 ; Rev^JK^j_9, perhaps also Eph. 288 jv. 22 (where, as appears to me, dtroOea-Oai v[xa<; depends on eBiBdr- ^ ^ 1 In opposition to Bomem. Schol. p. 40 see Fr. Bom. II. 376 ; cf. Bltime, Lycnrg. p 1 51 . '^ If the governed substantive to which the Inf. refers be in the Dative, the noun accompanying the Infin. may also be in the Dative, as in Acts xxvii. 3 . . . to5 XlavKu Xp''\v(Tdevras \aTp(Vftv avr^ etc. * So also in 1 Tim. i. 3 TropevSixevos belongs to irapeKiiXeiTa. If connected with irposfjLe'ivai it would necessarily, in such proximity, appear in the Accusative. 41 322 § 44=' THE IKFINITIVE. yOrjre) cf. Her. 2, 2; Xen. C. 5, 1, 21 vofiil^oi,[iL yhp eavrov eocKivai etc., 1, 4, 4 (where see Poppo) ; Anab. 7, 1, 30 ; Mem. 2, 6, 35 ; Diod. S. 1, 50 ; Exc. Vat. p. 57 ; Pliilostr. Apoll. 1, 12 ; see Kriiger as above, S. 390. Yet in the former passages this construction was preferred probably for the sake of antithesis (see Plat. symp. c. 3, and Stallb. in loc, cf. Kriiger as above, S. 386 f.) or of per- spicuity : / deem not that I myself have already etc. For the same reason, also, u/ia?, in Eph. as above, appears to be employed, since in vs. 21 another subject, Jesus, has intervened. Later writers, however, use this construction even when no antithesis is intended, cf. Heinichen, Euseb. H. E. I. 118. b. After verbs of saying, (asserting), believing, the Iiif. is some- times used when the assertion etc. refers not to something that really is, but to something that should be (such verbs containing rather the notion of advice, claim, or command ; see also Elmsley, Soph. Oed. T. p. 80 ; Mtth. 1230) ; as. Acts xxi. 21 Xeycov, fjuri ir€pcTe/jiV€Lv avTov<; ra reKva he said they ought not to circumcise their children (he commanded them not to circumcise etc.) xv. 24 ? Tit. ii. 2 ; Acts xxi. 4 tw JlavXcp eXeyov firj ava^alvecv eU 'lepoa. they said to Paul that he should not go up (advised him not to go) etc. cf. Eurip. Troad. 724. In all these cases if the statement were resolved into direct address the Imperative would be used : p,r) irepireixvere ra reKva vp.oiv. Compare on this Inf. (which even recent writers still explain by supposing the omission of hdv, see in opposition Hm. A^ig. 745) Lob. Phryn. p. 753 sqq. ; Bttm. Demosth. Mid. p. 131 ; Engelhardt, Plat. Lach. p. 81 ; Jen. Lit. Zeit. 1816. No. 231 ; Bhdy. 371. Too many passages, however, of the N. T. have been referred to this h3ad. Rom. xiv. 2 o? p^ev Tnarevei, ^ayelv irdvra means : one man has confidence to eat, and the may is already implied in irtaTevetv. In xv. 9 ho^daat denotes, not what the Gentiles should do, but what they actually do ; see Fr. In ii. 21 f. and Eph. iv. 22 f. (see above) the verbs to make known and to be instructed, on which the Infinitives depend, inherently denote as well what is (and must be believed) as what ought to be (should be done) ; and, in the same way, we can say : they preached to 339 them not to steal; ye have been taught to lay aside. In Acts x. 22 '^prjpaTL^eadai occurs, which is almost uniformly employed to denote the direction of an oracle, a divine injunction. Finally, when after verbs of beseeching the Inf. must be rendered by may, such 803 import is comprehended in the meaning of those verbs in the ahed. context in question, as in 2 Cor. x. 2 Beopuc to pr) irapoiv dappPjaai § 44. THE INFINITIVE. 323 T^ Trerrotd^creL, as if, I beseech you in reference to my not being bold, that is, to see that I be not bold.^ C. The Article is put before the Inf. when it is the object, to make it a substantive, and thus give it greater prominence (Rost 289 682) Rom. xiii. 8 ; xiv. 13 (Luke vii. 21 var.) ; 1 Cor. iv. 6 ; 2 Cor. 6th d ii. 1 ; viii. 10 ; Phil. iv. 10 ; cf. above, 1 (Hm. Soph. Aj. 114) ; especially at the beginning of tlie sentence (Thuc. 2, 53 ; Xenoph. M. 4, 3, 1),1 Cor. xiv. 39 to XaXelv jXcoaraai'i firj KcoXvere (cf. Sopli. Phil. 1241 09 ere KcoXvaei, to hpav). In Phil. ii. 6 oii-^ apirw^yLOV r]<^7](TaT0 TO eXvai Xaa Oeo), the Inf. with the Article is the im- mediate object of vyw-i ^''d apiray/j,. is predicate, cf. Thuc. 2, 87 ou^t BtKalav e^ec TeKjxapcTLV to €K(j)o^r]vat, and Bhdy. 316. Especially deserving of attention is the use (in Luke peculiarly fre- quent) of the Inf. with the Ace. after iyiv^ro, as in Mark ii. 23 iyivero TrapaTTopeveadaL airov accidit, ut transiret, Acts xvi. 16 lyiv. iraLKaKTjv tlvo. . . . airavTricraL rjfjuv, xix. 1 iyiv. TIavXov SieXOovra . . . iXOelv cis E^con-v, iv. 5 ; ix. 3, 32, 37, 43 ; xi. 26 ; xiv. 1 ; xxi. 1, o ; xxii. 6 ; xxvii. 44 ; xxviii. 8, 17 ; Luke iii. 21 f. ; vi. 1, 6 ; xvi. 22 etc.^ Here the Infinitive clause is to be considered as the (extended) subject of iytvcro, just as after avve^rj (see just below), and in Latin after aequum est, apertum est, etc. (Zumpt, Gr. 505) : Jesus' passing by came to pass, etc. The construction is good Greek, though the frequent use of cytVcro with the Inf., instead of the historical tense of the particular verb, is primarily an imitation of the Hebrew '^t-n\ In Greek we find a grammatical parallel in arvve/3r] rrjv ttoXlv . . . tivai KvpLevovaav Diod. S. 1, 50 ; 3, 22, 39 ; Plat. legg. 1, 635 a. ; Demosth. Polycl. 709 c. ; Dion. H. lY. 2089, and frequently, particularly in Polybius (also 2 Mace. iii. 2), which occurs also once in Acts xxi. 35. 340 The germ of the former construction may be seen in Theogn. 639 ttoXXuki . . . yiyverai evpelv efry dvSpwv, with which Matt, xviii. 13 agrees most closely. It appears in its full form in Plat. Phaedr. 242 b. to Baifiovtov T€ Kol TO £10)^09 oiTjfJiCLov fjioi yLyv€ ^^ Luke xxiv. 29 el^XOev too /xecvac avv avTol<;, Matt. xxiv. 45 ov KaTeaTrjaev 6 Kvpio^ iirl tt}? oUeTeta^ avrov Tov Sovvac avTo2€vy€iv, aK07rov6oiXfjLol eKparovvro tov fx-rj iTnyvdvai avTov (Xen. Laced. 4, 6), Rom. vi. 6 ; Acts x. 47 (Sus. 9 ; 3 Esr. ii. 24 ; v. 69, 70; Gen. xvi. 2 ; Act. Thorn. § 19 ; Protev. Jac. 2 etc.). Perhaps also €vyeiv and eV^evyctv tov TroLrjaaLis best explained in this way (as cfavyciv Ttvds is used), Xen. A. 1, 3, 2. Cf. Bhdy. 356 ; Bttm. exc. II. ad Demosth. Mid. p. 143. In Rom. i. 24 irapiSuiKev avrovs 6 ^eos ... eis aKaOapatav tou aTifid^eadai TO. crw/xara aurcov iv iavTols the Inf. depends directly on the noun. aKaOapcr., 306 and there is nothing strange in the omission of t'^v before aKaO. (xv. 23 ; 7tli ed. 1 Cor. ix. 6). The Gen, indicates in what this aKa6. consisted : commisit impuritati, quae cernebatur in etc. Fr. with more detail says : virgula post aKaOapa: coUocata ante rot) mente repete aKaOapcrLov. The need of this I cannot perceive, as aKaOapcr. and art/jia^. stand close together, and the Gen. may naturally be understood of the sphere of the aKaOapa. In the same way, too, in Rom. viii. 12 the Inf. tov Kara a-dpKa (yjv is to be understood as depending on o^etAc'rr^v, in conformity to the regular phrase 6(ji€iX€Tr]v etvat tj.i'os ; see Fr. Matt. p. 844. Finally, in Luke i. 73 tov Sowai in the same way is most naturally connected with opKov, cf. Jer. xi. 5. It soon became usual, however, to employ this construction more loosely, not only a) After verbs involving the idea of (entreatyy- 292 command^ determination, and thus indirectly of design, Actsxv. 20 6th ei Kpivco . . . eTriaTetXat avjols tov cmkye.aOai to send ihem the direction to abstain, Luke iv. 10 (from the Sept.) rolf ajyiXoi^ 'avmv evre- Xelrat irepl aov tov hiac^vXd^ai,, Acts xxvii. 1 (where it would be forced to connect tov airoTrXelv with the following irapehihovv), cf. Rutli ii. 9 ; 1 Kings i. 35 ; 1 Mace. i. 62 ; iii. 31 ; v. 2 ; ix. 69 ; Malal. Chron. 1 8, 458 ; Ducas p. 201, 217, 339, a. ; Fabric. Pseudepigr. I. 707 ; Vit. Epipb. p. 346; — but also, b) For epexegesis, where an Inf. with or without w^re might have been used, and the im- port of the Gen. is lost by blending result and design. Very fre- 343 quently so in the Sept. ; (^ with the Inf. denotes both design and result ; as to et? with the Inf. see afterwards). In the N. T. com- pare Acts vii. 19 ouTO? KaTaao^iadp.evo^ . . . e/ca/cwcre touv eXKoai etc. 18, 461. 2 A construction parallel to KeKeveiv ha. § 44. THE INrmiTIVE. 327 these passages Fr.'s exposition (Matt. p. 846) is undoubtedly to be rejected ; otherwise, many passages of the Sept. would either be inexplicable, or would admit of but a very forced interpretation. Cf. in particular Josh. xxii. 26 ecTrafiev Trocfjaac ovrw rod OLKoBofirjcrai, 1 Kings xiii. 16 ov fir) hvvco/jiat rov iTriarpt^lrac (1 Mace. vi. 27), xvi. 19 inrep tcov a/j,apTiO)v avrov, 0)v iTrolrjae tov irotrjaaL to nrovripov etc., Judith xiii. 20 irotrjcrai, croi airra 6 6eb etc. as a sort of Genitive, inasmuch as the action expressed by the Inf. always depends on the principal verb as a part depends on the whole. g28 § 44. THE INFINITIVE. TToXcfi. for an imitation of the (later) Hebrew Onhnh pugnandum iis erat, as Ewald and ZuUig do. For even in the Sept. that construction is in no passage rendered so strangely. If iyivero tov TroXefjLrja-ai alone were the reading, there would be a parallel in Acts x. 25 (see just below), and the construction would be tolerably explicable. Perhaps, however, the passage contains an ancient gloss, or something fell out of the text, at an early period, before rov ttoAc/a. There is no plausibility in the proposal of Bomem. (Jen. L. Z. 1845, nr. 183) to read: cycVtro iroAe/ttos iv rw ovpavCi 6 ML)(arjX etc. ; and with Ilengstenberg boldly to supply had war before rov TToX. would be to make John chargeable with a strange latitude in the use of words. Acts x. 25 iyevero rov elseXOeiv rov IXcTpov, where rov is critically established, cannot be compaTbd to the usage mentioned by Gesen. 308 Lehrgeb. S. 78G f., for according to this it must have run : iyev. 6 Herpos 7th ed. ^qJ) fi^cXOelv ; it is an extravagant use of the Inf. with rov ^ which in Luke certainly must be very surprising. Bornem. considers the whole clause as spurious, — but the reader is referred to B. himself for the manner in which he thinks the text should be made up. Likewise in Luke xvii. 1 avivScKTOV icrrL rov fj.-q iXOilv to. crKavBaXa some Codd. omit the Tov. If it is genuine (both Lchm. and Tdf. have retained it), the Genitive is owing probably to the notion of distance or exclusion implied in avev- 8fKT., cf. above, no. 4 b. The view of Mey. is different. 5. The Dative of the Inf. denotes the cause, according to the 294 inherent import of that case, see § 31, 6 c. (Mtth. 1258; Schaef. 6th ed. Demosth. II. 163 ; Stallb. Plat. Tim. p. 203), 2 Cor. ii. 13 ovk 'iaxv^a dveaiv tw irvevfiarl fiov tm fxr) evpelv Tlrov because I found not etc. ; cf. Xen. C. 4, 5, 9 ; Demosth. pac. 21 c, funebr. 156 b., ep. 4 p. 119b. ; Achill. Tat. 6, 24 ; Lucian, abdic. 5 ; Diog. L. 10, 27 ; Liban. ep.8; Athen. 9,375; Joseph, antt. 14, 10,1; Simplic. in Epict. enchir. c. 38, p. 385 ; Schweigh. Agath. 5, 16. This Inf. is understood by some as denoting design in 1 Thess. iii. 3 rw firjSeva auLveadai iv 345 rail dXt^^eai in order that no one he shaken etc., as it were ' for the not being shaken ' (Scliott. in loc), a thought which is subordinate to the et? TO (nrjpi^at, and therefore was not expressed by a repetition of this form. No such Dut. Infin., however, occurs in Greek ; and we must read with good Godd. [Sin. included] to /jirjSeva aaiveadat, which has now been received into the tex't. See above, 1. Remark. 6. The Infinitive in an oblique case is often joined to 2i preposition, particularly in narration, and almost more frequently in the N. T. than in Greek authors. The Article is then never omitted (Hm. ^ Cf. Acta apocr. p. 66 &$ iyevero rod re\4iXov; but cf. Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 3 Sia to iXofxa6r]ai, Acts iii. 18; vii.5; similarly ^^^ o/jivvfjii. Acts ii. 30 6pK(p Mfioaev avTC^ 6 ^eo /3ovXofj.ei'(p . . . Xveiv. Cf. also Arrian. Al. 5, 2, 6. We find a perceptible distinction, however, between the Inf. Pres. and the Inf. Aor. in parallel clauses e.g. in Xen. C. 5, 1, 2. 3 ; Mem. 1, 1, 14; Her. 6, 177 etc., see Mtth. 944 ; Wcl>er, Demosth. 195, 492. In the N. T. cf. Matt. xiv. 22 -qvarfKcure ruvr]Tai KaO" cv, ovBi avTOV oLfiai rov Koa-fxov )(ojprj(Tai non comprehensurum esse, where some unneces- 350 sarily would insert av ; cf. Isocr. Trapez. 862 ; Demosth. Timoth. 702 a. ; Thuc. 7, 28 ; Plat. Protag. 316 c. (in some of which cases, it is true, ci with the Opt. precedes). The expression is more confident (without av), see Stallb. Plat. Protag. p. 43 ; cf. Losner, obs. p. 162 sq. The Inf. Put. (that is, also without av, cf. Hm. partic. av p. 187) is not singular in such constructions, Isocr. ep. 3 p. 984. As to the construction of fieXXeiv, in particular, with the Inf., that verb in Greek authors is most frequently used with the Inf. Put. (cf. also Ellendt, Arrian. Al. II. 206 sq.), more rarely with the Inf. Pres. (cf. Dion. H. IV. 2226, 8 ; Arrian. Al. 1, 20, 13 ; 5, 21, 1, and Kruger, Dion. p. 498). 334 § 44. THE INFINITIVE. This, however, is not very surprising as the notion of futurity is already implied in fiiWeiv, and the construction is analogous to that of ^Xtti^civ. It is still more rarely used with the Inf. Aor. (Plat. apol. 30 b. ; Isocr. Callim. p. 908 ; Thuc. 5, 98 ; Pdus. 8, 28, 3 ; Ael. 3, 27). This last con- struction, indeed, some ancient grammarians (e.g. Phrynich. p. 336) pro- nounce to be un-Greek, or rather un- Attic; but they liave been thoroughly 299 confuted with a considerable number of undoubted examples by Bockh, Bill ed. Pind. Olymp. 8, 32 ; Elmsley, Eurip. Heracl. p. 117 ; Bremi, Lys. p. 745 ff., of. also Hm. Soph. Aj. p. 149. In the N. T. we most frequently find after /AcAAetv, a. the Inf. Pres. (in the Gospels always) ; only in a few passages, b. the Inf. Aor., and that mostly in reference to transient actions, as in -^ Bey, iii. 2 /xeXXei aTroOavelv, iii._16 yu,, ifxeaai, xii. 4 /a. t€kuv, Gal. iii. 23 r^y fi,i\kovcrav mariv diroKaXvffiOrjvaL, cf Rom. viii. 18 (but 1 Pet. v. 1) ; c. more rarely the Inf Fut., viz. in Acts xi. 28 Xt/xoi/ fiiyav /xiWav eaea-Oat, xxiv. 15 avdoTaatv /Ac'AActv eaeaOuL vck/jwv, xxvii. 10 (xxiv. 25). The Perfect Inf. is frequently employed, especially in narration, to denote a past event in its relation to present time ; as, Acts xvi. 27 k/xeWev kavrov avaipelv, vo^i^wv iKirecpeir/evat rov^ Secr/xiovi had fed, and accordingly were away, xxvii. 1-3 Bo^avre'i Trj<; Trpode- ae(o<} KeKparrfKevai they had (already) obtained their j)urpose (and were thus in possession of the advantages), viii. 11 ; xxvii. 9 ; xxvi. 32 ; Heb. xi. 3 ; Rom. iv. 1 ; xv. 8, 19 ; Mark v. 4 ; Jno. 314 xii. 18, 29 ; 2 Tim. ii. 18 (1 Pet. iv. 3) 2 Pet. ii. 21. In several iih ed. Qf these passages, after verbs o^ saying, supposing, thinJdng, a Greek autlior would perhaps have considered the Inf. Aorist as sufficient, Mdv. 187. On. 2 Cor. v. 11 see p. 331 note ^ ; as to 1 Tim. vi. 17 see § 40, 4 a. p. 273. 8. That the N. T. writers sometimes (see below, p. 338 sq.) use Jm where, according to the syntax of (the written) Greek prose, simply the Inf. (Pres. or Aor., not the Perf.) should be expected, was 351 correctly admitted by the earlier biblical philologists, but lias been resolutely denied by Fr. (exc. I. ad Matt., yet see Rom. III. 230), whom Mey., and almost nobody else hitherto, has followed. ^ In such phrases as the following. Matt. iv. 3 e^Ve, iva ol \l6ol ovtol aprot jevcovTai, xvi. 20 StecrretXaTO rot? iJLa6r]raLpopT Krdrjvcu t)]v iroXiv, 1 8, 440 K(\ev or yp(i\j/w, for ypacpfty, ypa.4/ai. In general how far modern Greek goes in its application of the particle fd — which occurs even in the Byzantine writers, e.g. Cananus (cf. also Bois- sonade, Anecd. IV. 367) — a few passages from the Orthodox Confession will show: p. 20 (ed. Nermann) wpeirei pa TrurTevu/xtv (p. 24, 30), p. 36 \eyerat vii kutoik^, p. 43 ecpofie7ro va SovXfvr; (scrupled cf. Matt. i. 20), p. 1 13 T)ixropf7 va SexOv, P- 21 1 d4\€i, 67ri0vyua vol o.TTOKT'fiffTi, p. 235 ex'"^"'' XP^o^ "^ vovBfTovai, p. 244 tXfxeffdav xpfcu? 6 8i8ao-/ca\o? avTov, does the interpretation satis sit discipulo non superare magis- trum, ut ei possit par esse redditus seem easy and agreeable ? Cf. Jno. i. 27 ; vi. 7 ; Matt. viii. 8 (Inf. Matt. iii. 11 ; 1 Cor. xv. 9 ; Luke XV. 19, etc.). In John iv. 34 i^ov ^poifid icmv^ iva ttoio} to deXTjfxa TOV 7re/u.-v/rai/T6 Kp€/jLacT6y]vai fjUjKov 6v. . . . ha KaTairovr. etc. (by an attraction), would, I greatly fear, be generally thought very forced. And Meyer's opinion is too manifestly a shift. See also Luke xvii. 2 ; 302 Jno. xi. 50 ; xvi. 7 ; 1 Cor. iv. 2, 3 ; Phil. ii. 2 ; likewise Luke 6th ed. i. 43 irodev fioc tovto, ha e\6r) rj fMr)Ttjp tov Kvpiov etc.,^ on wiiich passage Hm. partic. dv p. 135 remarks : fuit haec labantis linguae quaedam incuria, ut pro infinitivo ista constructione uteretur. In fact, in all those phrases every unprejudiced scliolar must perceive that the clause with ha contains what, in classical Greek, would have been expressed by the simple Inf. (Mtth. 1235), just as in Latin (especially of tlie silver age) acquum est ut, mos est ut, expedit ut was employed, where the mere Inf. (as subject) would have been sufficient, sec Zumpt S. 522. Sometimes the construction 317 with ha and that with the Inf. are found connected, as in 1 Cor. '^^^J^ ix. 15 KcCkov ydp fioc /xdWov diroOaveh, rj to Kav^rjfid /xou ha Tt9 Kevcoaj), where it is easy to perceive what led the apostle to alter the construction ; yet in this passage the ha is not fully estab- lished. Thus the traces of the ancient function of the particle of design still exhibited in the examples adduced under a., and even under b. also, have entirely disappeared in the passages last illus-' 1 Analogoias is Arrian. Epictet. 1, 10, 8 ttpwt6v itrrtv, ha i-yw Koifxrjdio. Cf. besides. Acta apocr. p. 8, 15, 29. 338 § 44. THE INFINITIVE. trated. And so we see how modern Greek, gradually extending the usage, forms every Infin. by means of m. How far popular Greek had already declined in the second century, appears from many parts of Phryn., and in particular p. 15 sq. Lobeck's ed. What "Wyttenbach, Plutarch. Mor. I. 409 Lips. (p. 517 Oxon.),has ad- duced from Greek authors to prove the alleged lax use of Iva. for wstc, is not all to the point. In TrtiOtiv Iva (Plut. apophth. 183 a.) the verb is not regarded as supplemented by the clause with Iva (by persuasion to effect that), but as independent : to speak persuasively in order that. Ti fiot ToiovTO (Twcyvws, Iva roiavrai? /ac KoXaK€vcrr]<: ■f]Boval<; (Plut. fort. Alex. p. 333 a.) means : what hast thou discerned in me of the kind in order to Jlatter ? that is, concisely : what could lead you to flatter me ? In Adv. Colot. p. 1115 a. (240 ed. Tauchn.) ttov rrj<; doiKrp-ou to /Ji/JXiW cypa<^«v, iva .'..fir] Tots CKcivov crvvTa.yfjiacrt.v cvtu;^?, what was properly but result is attributed to the writer as design ; so we too say : In what desert then did he write his book, to keep you from obtaining it ? In Liban. decl. 17 p. 472 oiSct's ioTLV oiKeTr]<; 7rovr]p6<;, Iva KpiOrj Trj<; MaKcSovwv SovXeia? a^tos no slave is bad, in order to be judge d worthy, — iva is not used for ws after an intensive (so bad as to be), but denotes the design which the slaves' irovrjpia might have occasioned see § i'-'S, 10, p. 4G1. These passages are not exactly parallel to the above constructions from the N. T., but they exhibit the gradual transition to them. The phrase opa ottw? does not come under this head, and the ottw? also after verbs of beseeching, commanding, etc. (Matt. viii. 34 ; ix. 38 ; Luke vii. 3 ; x. 2 ; xi. 37 ; Acts xxv. 3 ; Philem. 6, etc.), which is not uncommon in Greek authors (Schaef. Demosth. III. 416 ; Held, Plutarch. Timol. p. 439 ; Holwerda, emendatt. Flav. p. 96 sq.), 303 is usually otherwise explained, Mtth. 1231 ; Rost S. 648. Yet see Titt- (th ei mann, Synon. II. 59. Further, John's use of Iva (cf Lucke I. 603, II. 632 f , 667 f.) deserves special attention ; in particular where Iva refers complementally to a demonstrative pronoun. Two cases are to be distinguished : 855 a. 1 Jno. iii. 11 av-nj lariv xj dyyeXia, Iva dya7raJ/A€V that we should love^ VS. 23, cf. vi. 40. Here the telic force of iva is clearly discernible (in the manner stated above p. 334 sq.), as in iv. 34 c/aov fipu)fid cotiv iva ttoiw to Bfkrjyia rov Trefjuj/avro^ that I may do (strive to do), vi. 29. In these passages nobody will consider iva as equivalent to on. On the other hand, b. Jno. XV. 8 iv TOVTU) iSo^da-Ot] 6 Tranqp fxov, Iva Kapirbv iroXvv eprp-€ is certainly equivalent to the construction with the Inf. («'v t<3 Kapirov ttoXvv 318 ^P^'-v V««)- "^^^ s*°^® applies to xvii. 3 av-nj iarlv rj ai'wvios ^wt;, iva 7th ed. yivcjo-Kwo-iv etc.,' xv. 13 ; 1 Jno. iv. 17 ; 3 Jno. 4 ; like Luke i. 43 -n-oOev /xoi tovto, tva fX6r] for to iXOtlv rrjv /a. see p. 337. To these may be added the 1 Schweigh. is wrong in adducing in his Lexic. Epictet. p. 3.56 the passage from Arrian. Epict. 2, 1, 1 as an instance of litis construction. § 44. THE INFINITIVE. 339 phrase -xpiiav ex«v iva Jno. ii. 25 ; xvi. 30 ; 1 Jno. ii. 27 (Ev. apocr, p. HI) as well as Jno. xviii. 39. On the other hand, viii. o6 iTyaAAtao-aTo Iva ISy is not he rejoiced in order to see ; yet still less is it that (on) he saw, but that he should see,' — a thought which, although ?va implies the idea of purpose (design), could hardly have been expressed in Greek by means of tva alone. In Jno. xi. 15 iva is simply a particle of design. Finally, the construction ^^erot or cX-^KvOev tj u)pa, Iva So^arrOy xii. 23 ; xiii. 1 ; xvi. 2, 32 means : the time is come in order to, that is, the time appointed for the purpose, that etc. True, in a Greek author in the same sense the Inf. IX-qk. yj wpa (tov) Bo^aa-d^vai, perhaps w^tc 8of., would have been employed.^ Cf. Ev. apocr. p. 127. As to Rom. ix. 6 ov)( olov Sc otl cKTrcTrrtoKcv 6 A.oyo? tov Oeov, where a clause with on seems to be used as a periphrasis for the Inf., see § 64, 1. 6. Note 1. It sometimes appears as if the Inf. Act. were used for the Inf. Pass. (d'Orville, Charit. p. 526) e.g. 1 Thess. iv. 9 nepl r^s ^i.Xa8fkipoi on yMcra ttoAA^ ^r]p.La<: ov p.ovov t. opTLov Kat t. ttXolov, aWa Koi twv i^v^wi' rjp.wv /xeXXav ifreaOai tov vkovv (cf. Xen. Hell. 2, 2, 2 eZ3(i>9, on, 6a(o av 3rA.eiovs (rvWeyHxriv 304 €S TO doTV, BoLTTov tC)V ciriTT^StiW tvSeiav eaecrOaL, Cyr. 1, 6, 18; 2, 4, 15;Cllie(l. An. 3, 1, 9 ; Plato, Phaed. 63 c. ; Thuc. 4, 37), which is a blending of two 856 constructions (Ilm. Vig. 500) : fieXXeiv (.ataOai rov irXovv and oti p-eXXu eaea-dai o ttXoiks. So especially after verbs sentiendi and dicendi, Schaef. ad Bast. ep. crit. p. 36 ; Ast, Plat. legg. p. 479 ; "Wyttenb. Plutarch. Moral. I. 54 ; Boissonade, Philostr. 284 and Aen. Gaz. p. 230 ; Fritzsche, quaest. Lucian. p. 172 sq. This so frequently occurs in the best authors (even in short sentences, Arrian. Al. 6, 26, 10), that it almost ceased to be felt by the Greeks as an anacoluthon, and to the on may be attributed merely a vis monstrandi, as when it introduces the oratio directa, cf. Klotz, Devar. 319 p. 692. (Similarly Iva with the Inf. 3 Esr. vi. 31.) libei Note 3. A trace of the Hebrew Inf. Absol. presents itself from the Sept- in Matt. xv. 4 Oavdrta reXeirrdTOi (Exod. xix. 12; Num. xxvi. 65), and in the diction of the N. T. itself in Rev. ii. 23 dTroKTcvw cv Oavdrut (cf n^ia^ rnt), and Lukexxii. 15 tTn$vfi.la iireOvfjirja-a etc. So frequently in the 1 The Subjunctive excludes the possibility of taking tva in these cases for irhere {Hootjev. partic. I. 525 sq.) ; .hs, otherwise, it would be necessary to regard the Subj. Aor. as exactly equivalent to the Fut. (Lob. Phryn, 723). Yet see Tittmann, Synon. II. 49 sq. 340 § 45. THE PARTICIPLE. Sept. the Inf. Absol. is expressed by the Ablative of a nomen conjugat. annexed to a verb, in a manner not altogether foreign to the Greek idiom (§ 54, 3), as in Gen. xl. 15 ; xliii. 2 ; 1. 24 ; Exod. iii. 16 ; xi. 1 ; xviii. 18 ; xxi. 20 ; xxii. 1 6 ; xxiii. 24 ; Lev. xix. 20 ; Num. xxii. 30 ; Deut. xxiv. 1 5 ; Zeph. i. 2 ; Ruth ii. 11 ; Judith vi. 4 (test. patr. p. 634). See, in general, Thiersch p. 1 69 sq. How in still other passages the Sept. expresses the Inf. Absol., see below, § 45, 8, p. 354. Note 4. There is nothing singular in a concurrence of several Infinitives in a single sentence, one depending on another, somewhat as in 2 Pet. i. 15 o-TTovSaorw CK0to-TOT€ i^^i-v v/xtts . • - TT/v TouTwv fjLVT^fXTjv iroicicrOai. In Greek authors three Infinitives not unfrequently occur thus in im- mediate succession ; Weber, Demosth. 351. §45. THE PARTICIPLE. 1. The verbal character of the Participle appears, partly in its directly governing the same case as its verb (Luke ix. 16 Xa^oop Toixi dpTov StSot'Ti rj/xiv to vIko^, Luke viii. 3 e/c rcbv vTrap-^ovTcdv avTal^, 2 Cor. i. 23 v, joined to a Preterite or an adverb of time, is not un- frequently an Imperfect Participle; as, Jno. i. 49 ; v. 13 ; xi. 31,49; xxi. 11 ; Acts vii. 2 ; xi. l; \^nn, 24 , 1 Cor. i, 28; 2 C. viii. 9 ; Eph. ii. 13 vuvl iv XpicTToJ 'Irfcrov vyacts ol irore ovt€S 6tc. Col. i. 21 ; 1 Tim. i. 13 /xe TO irpoTtpov ovTa fiXdatfi-qixov. Cf. Aristot. rhet. 2, 10, 13, Trpos rov? fjLvpLoa-TOv ovTtts, Lucian. dial. mar. 13, 2 Sipe ^T/XorvTrets vTrepoVrT;; irporepov 358 wv. But in Jno. iii. 13 o'v (see Lucke and BCrus. in loc.) means : who (essentially) is in heaven, who helongs to heaven} The same applies to i. 18. But ix. 25 on nx^Xo? tiv apri fSkeTrw is probably : / beincf blind (from my infancy), a blind man ; only in so far as a reference to a previous condition is included in apn, can it perhaps also be translated, whereas I was. An undoubted Present occurs in 1 Cor. ix. 19 cAei^'^epos tiv Ik ttuvtcov TracTLv ep.a.vTov eSouXa»o-a being free (though I am free), I made myself servant (the Apostle's IXtvOepia was something permanent). On the other hand, in Rev. vii. 2 cTSoi/ . . ayycXov avaf^alvovTa (which Eichhorn strangely enough declared to be a solecism) I saw him ascend (while he was ascend- ing) an Imperf. Part, is quite appropriate, as denoting something not at the moment completed. But in xiv. 13 aTro^vTyo-xovres can only be the Present Part. In many passages formerly the Present Part, was improperly taken for the Future, in most of which the force of the Present is (juite sufficient : 306 in connection, Clli ei 1 'O iiv iv T^ ovp., in the signification of qui erat in coelo, would nearly coincide in sense with 6 4k tov ovp. KaraPas. It must here, however, denote something special and more emphatic, and a climax in these predicates is not to be overlooked. Yet 6 icv does not form a third predicate co-ordinate with the two others, but is, as Likke cor- rectly observes, explanatory of the predicate & vihs rov h.vQp. 842 § 45. THE PARTICIPLE. a. with a Pres. or Imperat., as Rom. xv. 25 Tropcvoficu SiaKovwi' rots ayioi? (the BiaKovelv begins simultaneously with the journey), 1 Pet. i. 9 dyaXXiao-^6 . . . KofiL^ofjievoL as receiving (they are so already in the assurance of faith), Jas. ii. 9. As to 2 Pet. ii. 9 see Huther. b. with an Aor. (Lob. Soph. Aj. p. 234), as 2 Pet. ii. 4 vapiSwKev tts 321 'fpt'o""' Trjpovfji.€vov<; as those who are kept (contemplated from a present point 7th d. of view), Acts xxi. 2 cvpovrc? irXolov hairepwy tis ^oivucrjv on her passage to, bound for (Xen. Eph. 3, 6 in.), Luke ii. 45 v-ri(Trpv\iav tis 'lepovcr. ova- ^r}TovvT€<; avTov seeking him (which began already on the way back), Mark viii. 11 ; X. 2 (Fut. Part, in reference to an action only purposed, Acts xxiv. 17 ; XXV. 13). C. with a Perf., as Acts xv. 27 dTrearaXKafjiev *Ioi;8ai' kol 'XiXav . , . drrayyiXXovTas ra aura annonncing, with the announcement (they assumed the character of announcers simultaneously with their entrance on their journey), 1 Cor. ii. 1 ; Demosth. Dionys. 739 c. ; Pol. 28, 10, 7. In 2 Pet. iii. 11 TovTbiv TrdvTwv Xvopiivwv means, since all these things are dissolvingy that is, are by their nature destined for dissolution ; the doom of dissolution is already as it were inherent in them. Av6r}v would express only mere futurity : as their dissolution will at some time take place. The Apostolic (Patiline) terms ol dTroAAu/x-cvot, ol o-w^d/xevot (subst.) denote : 359 those who are perishing, those who are becoming saved etc., not merely at some future time but already, inasmuch as they refused to believe and therefore are the prey of eternal death. As to Acts xxi. 3, see no. 5. d. with a Conjunct, exhortat., as Heb. xiii. 13 i$epx(t>p-^Oa. . . . tov ovetSitr/i.oi' avTov ipovTes to. ail/v)^a v, Karaicr'^vvei etc. every man that prayeth or prophesieth with his head covered etc.Luke vii.37f. ; xvi. 23; xxiii.48; Acts xiv. 14; xxi. 2; xxv. 6; Mark i. 41 ; v. 25-27 ; viii. 6 ; Col. i. 3 f. evx^'P'-o-Tovfiev . . . Trpo^ev^o- fievoi . . . dicov(ravT€<; while we pray, . . . since (after) we heard, 1 Thess. i. 2 f. ; Heb. i. 3 ; xi. 7 ; xii. 1 ; 1 Cor. xv. 68 ; Jiio. xiii. 1 f. ; Col. § 43. THE PARTICIPLE. 345 ii. 13 ; Phil. ii. 7 ; Phileiu. 4 ; Jiide 20, etc. Nothing is more fre- quent in Greek authors, of. Xen. Hell. 1, 6, 8 ; Cyr. 4, 6, 4 ; Plato, rep. 2,366 a.; Gorg. 471b.; Strabo 3,165; Lucian. asin. 18; Alex. 19 ; Xen. Eph. 3, 5 ; Alciphr. 3, 43 in.; Arrian. Al. 3, 30, 7 ; see Heindoi-f, Plat. Protag. p. 562 ; Hm. Eurip. lo p. 842 ; Stallb. Plat. Phileb. § 32, and Plat. Euthyphr. p. 27 ; Apol. p. 46 sq. ; Boisson. Aristaenet. p. 257 ; Jacob ad Lucian. Tox. p. 43 ; Ellendt, Arrian. Al. II. 322, etc. (In several passages sometimes a smaller and sometimes a greater number of Codd. have the copula Kal, as in Acts ix. 40 ; Mark xiv. 22, etc.) The Participles stand otherwise related to each other in Luke ii. 12 tvpT^aere Ppi.o ^- • 1 • • .1 • . . , 'lli^'J' cally, the Participle is m these instances as appropriate, at least, as the Infinitive ; the Greeks used the former to mark a nice distinction which other nations failed to note. Ovk e-TravovTo BiBdaKovT€yk(i)aaaLov TifioOeov u7ro\e\vfjbevov ye know thai . . . is set at liberty, Acts xxiv. 10 e/c ttoWwv erwv ovra ae KpiT7}v TO) eOvet, roinw i7n,TTdfievoywv, Mem. 2, 6, 39 ; Diog. L. 6, 8 ; Liban. oratt. p. 525 b. Yet just liere we see with wliat propriety the Participle is chosen in the cases just noted. For tliis verb is also construed in Greek authors with the Inf. But there is an essential difference between the two constructions ; see Poppo, Xen. Cyr. p. 286 sq.^ The Part, is used only when a person is now doing (or has done) something of which he (at the moment of acting) is ashamed; but the Inf., when shame in view of something to be done (but not yet actually performed) is to be expressed (cf. e.g. Isocr. ad Philipp. p. 224, and big. p. 842 ; Xen. M. 3, 7, 5). Luke, observing this distinction, has written correctly xvi. 3 iiravTelv ala-'xyvo/MaL to beg I am ashamed (Sir. iv. 26 ; Sus. 11) ; had the speaker already begun to beg, eiratTMv aia-^vvo/jLat must have been used. ''Ap-xppui is uniformly in the N. T., and commonly in Greek authors, construed with the Infin., as he began speaking is less appropriate than he continued speaking. Yet see Rost 698. ^ Eph. iii. 19 yywvai rriv vv €p fiAWovtrav ttjs yvdaiuis ayiir7]v rod Xptarov cannot be referred to this head, as many expositors refer it; for the Part., by its position between the article and substantive, is too clearly marked as an adjective. For another reason, also, Phil. ii. 28 'Iva Idoyres ai/rhu irdKii/ x«»P^'''* must not be referred to the abore construction. The sense is : that ye, beholding him, may again rejoice. 2 The passage of Isocr. Pancg. c. 8, usually adduced as a parallel (even still by Mtth. 1289), was corrected by Hier. Wolf, cf. Baiter in loc. Weber, Demosth. p. 278, discusses another matter. • With Tcvvdavoixu both constructions coincide ; see Ellendt, Arrian. Al. I. 145. § 45. THE PARTICIPLE. 347 *Akov€iv, which also is occasionally construed with a predicative Part., and that not merely in the literal sense of immediate hearing as in Rev. V. 13 ; Acts ii. 11, but also in that of learning, being informed (through others) as in Luke iv. 23 ; Acts vii. 12 ; 2 Thess. iii. 11 ducouo/icv nvas ircptTraToCrras etc., 3 Jno. 4 (Xen. C. 2, 4, 12),^ is in the latter sense fre- 364 quently construed with on, once [by Paul] with the Ace. with the Inf., 1 Cor. xi. 18 oiKoxno (TyLa-fxaTa Iv v/juv inrdp^tiv {vTrdp^^ovra) , [once also by John, xii. 18 ^/coutrav tovto avrov TrcTrotT^KCvai to arTjfxeLOV^ ; cf. Xen. C. 1, 3, 1 ; 4, 16. The construction is different in Eph. iv. 22 if airoOicrOax vfia.<; Tov iraXaiov avdponrov depends on i7Koi;craTC or €SiBd)(OT]Te in vs. 21 (that ye must put off) ; see § 44, 3, p. 322. The use of the Part, examined in this section is in Greek authors, even prose writers, much more diversified than in the N. T. (see Jacobs, Anthol. III. 235, and Achill. Tat. p. 828 ; Ast, Plat. Polit. p. 500 ; Schaef. Eurip. Hec. p. 31). The construction of TravtcrOai with the Inf. is disapproved even by ancient grammarians, though erroneously, see Schaef. Apoll. Rhod. II. 223 ; Ast, Theophr. char. p. 223 sq. Also in 1 Tim. v. 13 a/Aa hk kcu dpyaX fiavOdvovcTi TrepL^p-^ofiivai the Part, is by nearly all recent expositors thought to be used for the Inf. : they learn (accustom themselves) (to be) going about idle etc. This gives a suitable meaning. But in all cases where the Part, joined to iJM.v6a.vtiv refers to the subject, that verb signifies to perceive, comprehend, observe, remark something which is already ex:£t:rit-, as in Her. 3, 1 Sia^c^SA-rj/xcvos vTTo A/x.acrios ov fjMvOdvu^ (see Valcken. in loc), Soph. Antig. 532 ; Aesch. Prom. G2 ; Thuc. 6, 39 ; Plut. paed. 8, 12 ; Dion. II. IV. 2238 ; Lucian. 326 dial. d. 1 6, 2 ; '^ but in the sense of learn it is used with the Inf., Phil. iv. 11 ''"' *^ also 1 Tim. v. 4;' Mtth. 1228. The preceding construction, then, must "IJ- have been incorrectly extended beyond the proper bounds. Perhajis, ' however, fxavd. is to be connected with dpyai, and vepup^o/jLevat to be taken as a proper Part, (they learn idleness, going about etc.). 'Apyal /x. would then be a concise expres^on, like what sometimes occurs elsewhere also with an adjective (Plat. Euthyd. 276 b. ot dfxaOft^ dpa aool fiavOdvovaiv, and more frequently StBda-Kciv rtva cro6v), which does not like the Part, include the notion of tense or mood.'' This exposition, which Beza, Piscator, and others adopted and which Iluther has recently approved, is supported by this, that in the sequel apyai is repeated as the leading word, and to the climax X.vapoi kol irepUpyoi, a Part, is likewise annexed, XoAoCo-ai Ta fJLT] SeOVTO. 1 Cf. Rost, in his griech. Wortcrb. I. 143. 2 In Xen. C. 6, 2, 29 ?wj hv fidduixev vipoir6Ta.i y(v6fi.evoi (a passage which would not be altogether decisive), XaQwutv was long ago substituted for fiddufify. * Matthles has passed over the grammatical difficulty in silence. Leo, after Casauhon. ad Athen. p. 452, would render (juwOavovffi by sdent ; but he has not observed that this meaning belongs only to the Preterite. * Under this head comes also Dio Chr. 5.5, 558 6 SojKpaTijy oti fxtv irals iiv 4fidyOay« \ido^6os Tr]v TOV irarphs Tt'x'^i', aKijK6afjLfj' (Socrates learned as stone-cutter etc.). 848 § 45. THE PARTICIPLE. A verb of the kind specified under a. is once construed with an Adjec- tive — which cannot be thought strange, Acts xxvii. 33 TccrcrapcsKatScKaTi^v 365 a-^fxepov r)ixipav TrposSoKoivrcs, acriTOi (ovres) SiaTcAciTe, cf. Xen. C. 1, 5, 10 dvaywvtcTTOS SiartXct, Hell. 2, 3, 25. Some erroneously think the Part, used for the Inf. in 1 Tim. i. 1 2 vuttov fi€ rjyqo-aTO 6efjLevo<; ei? SiaKoviW. The meaning is : he counted me fatth- fuL in that he appointed me to the ministry (by that very act showing that he counted me faithful). In another sense, indeed, OeaOai eh SiaKoviav might also have been employed. 5. Present participles are frequently used (in the narrative style) vrith the verb ehai, and in particular with r/v or i)aav (yet also with the Fut.) : — sometimes, as it seems, simply for the cor- responding person of their finite verb (Aristot. metaph. 4, 7 ; Bhdy. 334),^ as in Mark xiii. 25 ol aareped'yofjL€v. In Heb. X. 8 Xeyeov belongs to the verb following in vs. 9, eiprjKev. 330 In X. 16 Bi8ovwvr}v rifMeU r/Kovaa/jbev, instead of saying, as lie intended, ^/j.d<; el^e ravrrjv rrjv (f)covr]v uKov(TavTaiJLevoL viro tov vofxov etc. is: ye commit sin, while Bthei (since) ye are convicted, being convicted (as TrposcoTroAT^TTTovvres) ; Gebser is wrong. In Heb. xi. 35 iTVfXTravta-Orjaav ov TrposSc^a/xcvot ttjv aTroXvTpwarLV not accepting the deliverance (offered them), TrposSe^. denotes something preceding rather than following the rvix-iravit,. ; cf. Heb. ix. 1 2. Acts xix. 29, too, does not contain the use of the Aor. Part, in narration men- tioned by Hm. Vig. 774; as utpfirjcrdv re 6/i.o^uju.aSoj/ cts to Oiarpov, trvvap- iratravres Vaiov kolL ^Apia-rapxav means either, ajter they had seized along with themselves (from their quarters) or, while they seized along with them. In Luke i. 9 eXa^ev tov Ovp-iaa-aL eheXOojv cis tov vaov toS Kvpiov, the Part, probably belongs to the Inf. (as the Vulgate takes it) : entering into the temple to burn incense ; Mey. is artificial. As to Rom. iii. 23, see above, p. 352. Rom. ii. 4 requires no elucidation. Likewise the peculiarity oc- casionally found in Greek authors, according to which the principal notion is expressed by a Part, and the secondary by a finite verb (Mtth, 1295 f. ; Hm. Soph. Aj. 172; Stallb. Plat. Gorg. p. 136), has by some been un- warrantably forced upon the N. T. ; such critics having quite forgotten that the usage in question could not occur independently of any limitation involved in the nature of the ideas to be expressed. To explain 2 Cor. V. 2 a-Tevd^oficv . . . cTrtTro^oSn-cs as put for iTniroOovpiev crTcva^ovTes is emi- nently infelicitous ; the Part, must be regarded as subjoined to the verb, and explained as causal like crreva^o/xcv fBapovp.evoL in vs. 4. 7. The Present Part, (with the Article) is often used substan- tively, and then, as a noun, excludes all indication of time. In Eph. iv. 28 6 K\e7rrcov firjueTL KkeTnero) is not for 6 KXeyjra^ (as some Codd. have) ; but, let the stealer i.e. the thief steed no more, Heb. xi. 28. So also when it is accompanied with an Ace. of the Object, or other adjuncts ; as, Gal. i. 23 6 ^uokcov rjfia'i Trore our former persecutor, Matt, xxvii. 40 6 KaraXvav tov vaov the destrotjer of the temple (in his imagination), Rev. xv. 2 oi i/t/cwvre? eV toO OtiPlov (wliich Eichhorn, Einl. N. T. II. 378, mentions as singular!), XX. 10 ; Gal. ii. 2 (ot hoKovvre^ see Kypke II. 274 ; cf. also Pachym. 332 1. 117, 138, etc.) ; 1 Thess. 1. 10 ; v, 24 ; 1 Pet. i. 17 ; Rom. v. 17 ; ^^^ *^ Jno. xii. 20 (xiii. 11) ; of. Soph. Antig. 239 ovr elSov o9T4? ^v 6 Spcov, Pans. 9, 25, 5 OTrold ianv avroh kuI rfj fnjrpl ra BpcofMcva, Diog. L. 1, 87 ^paUwaia) ; and finally, not to leave out of sight the dis tinctively Christian vie w which 377 underlies the use of many prepositions (e.g. iv Xpiar^ or Kvpitp). The maltreatment of the prepositions until a few decades ago on the 360 § 47. THE PREPOSITIONS IN GENERAL, ETC. part of N. T. philologists in Lexicons and Commentaries (e.g. Koppe's N. T.) was really horrible ; ' but it found precedent and support in the purely empirical treatment of the Hebrew prepositions current until Ewald's time, see my exeget. Stud. I. 27 fF. Wahl was the first to pursue a better course ; and almost everybody now has begun to be ashamed of the license just described. As respects in particular the comparative predominance of the Greek element and of the Hebrew-Aramaic in the use of the prepositions, it must not be overlooked, 1) that many constructions which the N. T. writers adopted through the influence of their mother tongue, occur also in Greek poets and later prose writers, so diversified is the use of the Greek prepo- 338 sitions ; 2) that though in the more Hebraistic portions of the N. T. 7th ed. (particularly in the Revelation) the exposition from the Hebrew suggests itself, yet we must not on that account explain the Greek prepositions in all the books indiscriminately by a reference to the Hebrew ; for simul- taneously with the Greek prepositions a multitude of special linguistic relations had been communicated to the Apostles, and c losg observa tion shows that as respects the relations expressed by prepositions the ApostlesV had already become accustomed to think in Greek: 3) that, especially in Paul (and John), the un-Hellenic application of several prepositions (e.g. ev) is closely connected with doctrinal phraseology, and belongs to the I Apostolic (Christian) element in N. T. diction. 3. The proper and the metaphorical significations of each prepo- sition must be accurately distinguished. The former always refer primarily to local relations (Bernhardi I. 290) ; and if these are conceived in great multiplicity by a nation, a corresponding multi- plicity of prepositions is the result. The simple relations of place are but two, — that of rest and that of motion (or even merely of direction, which is viewed as more or less a motion). The latter, however, comprises motion towards and motion /row. The notion of rest is denoted by the Dative ; that of motion towards, by the Accusative ; that of motion /rom, by the Genitive. 323 Local designations to which single prepositions correspond are, ^t*^' a) of rest : in iu, by the side of irapd, upon iirl, over virip, under (y-TTo'), amid (with) fierd, be/ore irpo, behind fierd, on {up on} dvd, about dij,(j)i, around irepl, over against avri; b) of (direction) motion towards a point : into et?, towards Kard, to Trpo^, upon inri, to beside irapd, under vtto ; c) of (direction) motion /row : out of eK,from diro, from under vtto, down from Kara, from beside Trapd. To the last division may be referred through relating to space (hut) 1 Tittmann, de scriptor. N. T. diligentia gramm. p. 12 (Synon. I. 207) : nulla est, ne repugnans quidem significatio, quin quaecunque praepositio earn in N. T. habere dicatur. § 47. THE PREPOSITIONS IN GENEEAL, ETC. 361 (cf. Progr. de verbor. cum praeposs. compositor, in N. T. usu V. p. 3), for which tlie Hebrew uses la, and the German sometimes aus (e.g. aus dem Thore gehen). 4. Language deals at first with the ideas of time by taking local relations as the pattern ; hence temporal senses also are put upon most of the prepositions. Not till later does the transition ensue to immaterial, purely ideal relations, which every nation conceives under forms more or less material. Tliis produces a correspond- ing diversity in national modes of expression. A Greek, for instance, says, Xeyeiv irepc tlpo<; ; a Roman, dicere de aliqua re; a Hebrew, a la'n; a German, ii6er etwas sprechen. The first views the object as a central point which the speaker as it were encom- 339 passes (to speak about a thing) ; the Roman, as a whole of which ^thed. the speaker imparts something to the hearer (c?e as it were to speak off something from the object);^ the Hebrew, as the ground on which the speaker stands (to speak on something) ; the German, as something lying before the speaker over which his discourse extends (for fiber governs in this connection the Accusative). The notion of origin, and consequently of cause, is most naturally implied in the prepositions from, out of (aTro, utto, Trapd, e/c) ; that of occasion, and consequently also of motive, in Trpo?, et? (e.g. on the report), eVt with the Dat. and 8cd with the Ace. (on account of). Here eVi refers to the basis on which something rests ; hence we also use the word ground for reason. Design and aim expressed by to are denoted by eVt with the Dat., or by eh or 7rp6e\^la6ac utto and e/c r. Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 34 ; Mem. 2, 4, 1, also ctt/ rtt-i, aTroKTeiveaOat anro and e/c rti'o? Rev. ix. 18, a'iro6vi]a Kei,v eic Ttvo<; Rev. viii. 11 and viro t., airodu^aKeiv virep and Trepl Twz/ a/xaprtcov^ dycovi^eadai irepc and virep tlvo^. iKkeyeadat utto 340 and e'/c tcov /xadrjTWP^ .^ This cannot be called enallage of preposi- ith ed, tions. On the otlier hand, particnlarly in expressing local relations, the more compreliensive preposition may be used for the more restricted, (as Luke xxiv. 2 atroicvkl^eLv rov \idov air o tov fjuvrj/xelov, but Mark xvi. 3 e/c t>}? 6vpa<; rov fivrj/xelov ; the latter agrees better with the precise facts of the case : out of the door — cut into the rock). Tiiis is sometimes attributable to tlie fact that it does not seem to be everywhere necessary to speak with entire precision, sometimes the author may through negligence have used tlie more indefinite term for the more definite. The interchange of preposi- tions is only apparent when any of them is employed praegnanter, i.e. when it includes also a second relation, the antecedent or con- 380 sequent of that which it strictly expresses, as KaroLKelv et? ttjv ttoXiv, elvac vTTo vofiov; or in case of an attraction, as aipeiv ra eK t^? ocKia'i Matt. xxiv. 17, airord^aadai roh ei? tov oIkov Luke ix. 61. An arbitrary intercfiange of prepositions — (of which the earlier N. T. commentaries are full, and which was upheld in part by an abuse of parallel passages, especially in the gospels) — would never have entered the imagination of critics, had they been accustomed to consider language as a living instrument of social intercourse. It is really preposterous to suppose that any one could have said, ' he is travelling to Egypt ' for < he is travelling in Egypt ' (eis for Iv) ; or, ' all is for him ' instead of ' all IS, from him.' In expressing by, for instance, Sta and Iv are not thoroughly equivalent to each other, particularly 8ia T. XpujTov and Iv 'I. Xpto-rJ). In Latin, also, per (before names of persons) and the Ablative (of things) are usually distinguished. Close observation shows in general how cor- rectly the N. T. writers discriminate between those prepositions even which 1 Thus Paul sometimes employs different prepositions in parallel clauses, to give variety to his discourse ; as, Rom. iii. 30 is SiKcudxret neptrofi^v Sk marews koi aKpofivtrriav Sta Tvjs iriaTfus, Eph. iii. 8 f. '■^ Sometimes in different languages the same relation, because viewed under different aspects, is expressed by prepositions of exactly opposite significations. Thus Germans say, zur Rechten ; the Romans, Greeks, and Hebrews, a dextra etc. Even one and the same language may express a relation, especially if ideal, by opposite prepositions. We say on the condition and under the condition. In South Germany they say, relation or friend to (zu) one ; in Saxony, relation or friend of (von) one. How ridiculous it would be to infer from such instances, that of {von) is sometimes equivalent to to (zu), and on to under ! § 47. PREPOSITIONS IN GENERAL, ETC. 363 are closely allied (e.g. Rom. xiii. 1 ovk ecmv i^ova ta el /jltj a-Tro 6eov, at 8e ovaai vTTo tov Oeov Teray/xeVat daiv)} (^And we ought tO honor them and 32o ourselves by recognizing everywhere their scrupulouscar?^ Where either of two prepositions might be employed with equal pro- priety, a preference for one in the N. T. is perhaps to be attributed to the Hellenistic tinge of its diction ; tliis, at least, the critic must take into consideration as a j) ossibi lity. Planck, however (articuli nonnulli Lex. nov. in N. T. Goett. 1824. 4to. p. 14), is mistaken in supposing that dya^os Trpo's Ti (Eph. iv. 29) is less correct Greek than ets n. The former con- struction is of frequent occurrence, e.g. Theophr. hist, plant. 4, 3, 1 and 7 ; 9, 13, 3 ; Xen. Mem. 4, 6, 10, etc. ; see Schneider, Plat. civ. II. 278. With such prepositions as in different significations govern different cases, it is sometimes possible, when immaterial relations are to be ex- 341 pressed, to use either of two cases with equal correctness (as ivi with '"' ** Gen. or Ace). Sometimes the Codd. vary be twe en t he two ; see Rom. viii. 11. In the N. T. this has beenerroneously said to hold frequently in reference to Sid ; see below, § 47, i, d. p. 381, cf. § 49 c. Purely external relations, on the contrary, sustain no such interchange in careful writers ; only very late, especially the Byzantine, authors indulge in it, and con- found e.g. fj.€Ta. with the Gen. and with the Ace. ; see the word in the Index to Malalas in the Bonn ed., cf. Schaef. Ind. ad Aesop, p. 136 ; Boisson. 381 Anecd. IV. 487 ; V. 84.^ Indeed the later writers have already become so devoid of an appreciation of the cases as to begin to connect prepositions even with cases altogether foreign to them, — a-jro, for instance, with Ace. and Dat., Kara, with Dat., o-vv with Gen. ; see Index to Leo Gramm. and Theophan.^ The attempt, recently revived, to explain this alleged interchange of cases in the N. T. by the circumstance that Hebrew has no cases, is to be rejected, if for no other reason, because apart from a very small number of doubtful exceptions the N. T. writers exhibit a corre ct per ception of the d ifferences b etween the cases. The position of prepositions .is more simple in the N. T. than in the classics, Mtth. II. 1399 f. They are uniformly placed immediately before the noun, and only those conjunctions which never stand at the beginning of a clause intervene between preposition and substantive ; as, 8c Matt. xi. 12 ; xxii. 31 ; xxiv. 22, 36 ; Acts v. 12, ydp Jno. iv. 37 ; v. 46 ; Acts viii. 23 ; Rom iii. 20, tc Acts x. 39 ; xxv. 24, ye Luke xi. 8 ; xviii. 5, /neV and fikv ydp Rom- xi. 22 ; Acts xxviii. 22 ; 2 Tim. iv. 4. 1 Hence I cannot admit what LikJce, Apokal. II. 458, says about an irregular and inconsistent use of prepositions in the N. T, 2 In close succession /xfrd signifying with takes the Ace. and then tlie Gen. in Acta apocryph. p. 257. 8 The case is different with iv followed by the Ace. ; see Schoff. Dion. comp. p. 305; Ross, inscriptt. gr. I. 37. 364 § 47. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 326 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 6th ed. a. 'AvTL (Lat. ante^, of which the local meaning is (directly) be/ore, in front of, over-against, denotes figuratively barter, exchange (Plato, conv. 218 e.), in which one thing is given for, instead of, another (tooth /or tooth, Matt. v. 38), and in consequence assumes its place. It governs the Genitive, that being the case of (issuing from and) exchange (see above, p. 206), e.g. 1 Cor. xi. 15 ?; Ko/nrj dvrl 7repc/3o\aLov SeSoTat (t^ yvvatKL^ her hair /or, instead of, a covering (to serve her as a covering, cf. Lucian. philops. 22 ; Liban. ep. 350), Heb. xii. 16 09 dvrl ^pcocreco'i /Jbidayeiv e/c tov OvaiaaTijpiov from the altar (what was laid as an offering upon the altar) ; 2 1 Mark xvi. 3 does not come under this head : see above, no. 5, p. 362. Besides, it must not be forgotten that the same relation may be conceived somewhat differently indifferent languages, and yet with equal propriety: e.g. Rom. xiii. 11 iytpdrivai ({ Sirvov, (aufstehen vom Schlafe) arise ou< of, from, sleep. In Rev. vi. 14 ^/c is probably used designedly, as the mountains are rooted in the earth. It is certainly so used in Jno. XX. 1. 2 In the N. T. »caTo/3o(»'e»j' iK rov 6povs is unique, Matt. xvii. 9 (Exod. xix. 14; § 47. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 367 sometimes it denotes mere direction, from^ Matt. xx. 21 iva KadC- awaLv ... eh i/c Be^tcov etc.,Heb.i. 13 (Bleek in loc), where the Germ, says on (to) the right, zur Rechten, the Lat. a dextra, the Hebr. yq. In making such specifications it is a matter of indifference whether the mind proceeds from the object to be located (towards itself), or from itself towards the object. Tiie former conception the Greeks have adopted (e'/c 8e|taL\ov<; eic TOV /xafMcovd T'fj<; a8i,KLa<;, Rom. i. 4 6piaBevrovrjavTo(CT6<; on account of (for) tlte splendor (bis not seeing arose from the splendor), Luke xix. 3; Jno. xxi. 6, see Kypke in loc. (Acts xxviii. 3 var.), cf. Held, Plut. Tim. 314 (Judith Schweighaeiiser, Lexic. Polyb. p. 69, and others. Further, wc find in-i for bn6 after Passives in later writers more and more frequently (especially in the Byzantines ; see e.g. Index to Malalas in the Bonn edit.) ; in earlier authors this interchange is on the whole rare, yet see Poppo ad Thuc. III. I. 158 ; Bhdy. 224. ^ In Jas. i. 13 dirb Qtov -irfipa^onai means simply, / am tempted (through influences proceeding) from God, and is a more vague expression than inrb Beov irejpdfojuoj which would be identical with dehs veipii(fi fif. The words that follow, ■nipdCti 8i aiirhs ovSeua, merely show that the apostle has also in mind a direct temptation by God (cf. Hm. Soph. Oed. Col. 1531 ; Schoemann, Plutarch. Cleom. p. 237) ; the phrase avo Otov is very frequently a sort of Adverb, dlvinitiis. In Luke vi. 18 the words wi/evfi. ukuO. signify the malady itself; had the expression been e.g. 6x>^ovfnvoi airh voawv, it would have presented no difficulty. In Luke ix. 22 ; xvii. 25, diroSo(fijL«£^6(r0ai dird is simply : to be rejected on the part of the elders. That in Acts xii. 20 5id rb rpi eavTcov tyLvcocrKeie, 2 Cor. x. 7, where the subjective power whence the knowledge comes is indicated ; d(f eavrov, indeed, often signifying sponte^. Schleusner and Kiihnol maintain that airo denotes also 1) in, Acts 333 ^^* ^^ '^°'' aTTocrravra oltt avroiv aTro ITa/x^vXias who had left them in 6th ed. Pamphylia. But the obvious meaning is : who had left them (as they 390 were proceeding) out of Pamphylia. Tliis is quite different from iv IT., 349 which might have implied that Marcus remained in P. but separated from Ithei Paul, of. xiii. 13. 2) de, Acts xvii. 2 SicXeycro avrois utto tu>v ypacjiwv; but this means : starting (in his discourses) from the Scriptures, or draw- ing his arguments from the Scriptures (of. Epiphan. 0pp. II. 340 d.) ; cf. Acts xxviii. 23. Nor is the signification de supported by Her. 4, 53. 195 (Schweighaeuser, Lexic. Herod. I. 77). 3) per, Acts xi. 19 Siao-n-apevTcs aTTo T^s OXiij/ewi, which however means owing to the persecution, the persecution being tlie occasion or incidental cause. 4) modo, instar, 2 Tim. i. 3 aTro Trpoyovuiv, see also Flatt in loc. The phrase signifies, from mi/ forefathers (Polyb. 5, 55, 9), witli the sentiments inherited from them. On such passages as Jno. xi. 18 ; Rev. xiv. 20 see § 61, 5 remark p. 557. c. ^Afx(f>t does not occur in the N. T. d. IIpo before (in a wider sense than dvri), locally in Acts v. 23; Jas. V. 9, also Acts xiv. 13, cf. Heliod. 1, 11, 30 ; Boeckh, Corp. inscript. II. 605. It is more frequently used temporally, either with nouns of time, 2 Tim. iv. 21 Trpo yeiixwvo^, Jno. xiii. 1 ; 2 Cor. xii. 2 ; Matt. viii. 29, and the Inf. of verbs, Matt. vi. 8 ; Jno. i. 49, or with personal pronouns and names of persons, Jno. v. 7 nrpo ifjbov, X. 8 ; Rom. xvi. 7. It is used figuratively in Jas. v. 12 irpo irdvTwv ante omnia, 1 Pet. iv. 8 (Xen. M. 2, 5, 3 ; Herod. 5, 4, 2). As to the original use of this preposition, explaining its construction with the Gen., see Bhdy. p. 231. e. TlepL The fundamental meaning of this preposition may be discerned in its construction with the Dative. With that case it denotes encircling, shutting in, on several or on all sides (closely related to dfK^t, which signifies shutting in on both sides). Hence it is different from irapd, which merely indicates that one object is near to, beside another. JJepi with the Gen. is used in prose § 47. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 373 almost exclusively in a figurative sense (yet of. Odyss. 5, 68) ,i to designate an object as the centre of activity, around which the activity is conceived as moving, — e.g. contending, drawing lots, caring, about anything. Matt. vi. 28; Mark xiii. 32; Jno. x. 13; xix. 24 ; 2 and then quite usually deciding, knowing, hearing, 391 speaking, about, concerning (de, super), see above, p. 361. At other times it is to be rendered by /or (as pray /or one), Jno. 334 xvi. 26 ; Acts viii. 15 ; Heb. xiii. 18 ; Luke xix. 37 ; 1 Thess. i. 2 ; «"> «•• or on account of, Jno. xv. 22 ; Acts xv. 2 ; xxv. 15 ; 1 Pet. iii. 18 (although many traces of about are to be discerned in these cases), 350 or in reference to, Matt. iv. 6 ; Rom. xv. 14 ; 1 Cor. xii. 1 ; Jno. '^^ «*■ vii. 17 ; Demosth. 01. 1, § 11. In the last sense -rrepl with its substantive is put at the beginning of a sentence in appearance absolutely, as an exponendura (Stallb. Plat. rep. II. 157 and Tim. p. 97), 1 Cor. xvi. 1 Trepl rfjt 'KoyLa m ed ^^P"'^^) ^^- Xen. An. 3, 2, 19 ; Arrian. Al. 1, 18, 15. Applied to waters, it may refer not merely to their surface. Rev. v. 13 eTrl r. 6a\.d(T(Tr)^,^ but also to their coasts or banks (cf. Arrian. Al. 1, 18, 10) Jno. xxi. 1 iirl t^9 6a\dcr(Tr). 2 Here belongs also Jno. vi. 19 (it seems that in Matt. xiv. 2.5 M t^j/ 6d\. must be read) irepnrarfiv iir\ rris 6a\. to walk oil the sea, cf. Lucian. philops. 13 PaSi(fiv 4ip' vSaros, vera hist. 2, 4 firl tov irekdyovs Sia6eotnes (Job ix. 8). By itself eirl t. 6a\. might indeed also be translated on the edge of the sea. This assuredly Fr. Mt. p. 502 did not mean to deny. 8 Even in the case of things on the same level, the Greek, by a conventional or ethical conception which we not seldom share, speaks of an nlx>ve. Above the door {Her. 5, 92) might, for instance, be applied to a person who stands near the door mside the room ; on the other hand, under the door to one outside, at the door. Cf. as to the kindred virip Bhdy. S. 243. The relation is conceived very differently in diff'erent languages. § 47. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 375 cannot be certainly established. In Luke xxii. 40 tjjtto? refers to a hill (though we also say on the spot) ; in Matt. xxi. 19 eVt t% oBov means on the way ; in Acts xx. 9 eVt r^? Ovpiho^ is upon the window ; iu Jno. vi. 21 ro ifKolov iyeveTo eVt tt}? 7^? is used of the landing of a vessel, and eVt refers to the rising shore ; yet see what has been said before. The figurative meanings of eVt.are quite plain. It is used, a) Of authority and superintendence ove?' etc. ; as, Matt. li. 22 ^aatkeveiv kirl 'IovBala<;, Rev. xi. 6 ; Acts viii. 27 eivac eVt irdcn)^ T?}? ycL^t]^, vi. 3 ; xii. 20 ; Rom. ix. 5 elvai e-rrl irdmoov, Eph. iv. 6 ; 393 cf. Polyb. 1, 34, 1 ; 2,65,9; Arrian. Al. 3,5,4 ; Reitz, Lucian. VI. 448 Bip. ; Schaef. Demosth. II. 172 ; Held, Plutarch. Timol. 388. b) Of the subject, the ground-work as it were, of an action ; as, Jno. vi. 2 a-rjfiela a iTroiei eVt rojv daOevovvrojv which he wrought on the sick (cf. Mtth. 1368) ; particularly of speaking, Gal. iii. 16 ov Xeyet . . . a)€vyeLv Sc aioovo<;, Matt iv. 4 1 The meaning of jueri \vxvov Fahric. Pseudepigr. 11. 143 is : with a light, i.e. fur- nished with a light, carrying it with him, cum himine, not lumine. On the other hand, cf. Leo Gramm. p. 260 /xaxcupiov iirKpfperai $ov\6fj.evos affKfiv at fxer' avrov, p. 275 etc. 2 Yet fiird here is probably to be understood of the accompaniment : mth upraised arm, as he held up his arm over them (to protect them). 8 Fabric. Pseudepigr. II. 593 liiera rov 4\0€7v is undoubtedly an error in transcribing, for T b iKOftf. Further, the passages collected by Baphd. Mr. I.e. prove nothing. 48 378 § 47. PEEPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. eKTTopeveaOai Bid from Deut. viii. 3, and Bce^epxec^Oat Plat. rep. 338 10, 621 a.) ; i hence Std governs the Genitive. It is applied to space 6th ei jj^ simple expressions, Luke iv, 30 avT6<; BieXOcDV Bca /xeaov avrcov eVo- pev€To (Herod. 2, 1, 3), 1 Cor. iii. 15 aoiOr^aeTai ... ox? hd 7rvp6a\'f]<; e^mv having (a veil hanging) down from his head ; cf. also, in a tropical use, 2 Cor. viii. 2 17 Kara ^ddovi rrrw'xeia poverty reaching down to the depth.^ It * To the same head is to be referred also Acts xxvii. 14 i^aXe kut' avTTJs dvefios TvtpoifLKSi. The tempestuous wind rushed (from above) down upon the island. In Mark xiv. 3 Karfx^ev avrov xari tijs Ke while, during the time that, Jno. v. 7 ; Mark ii. 19 ; Thuc. 6, 55 ; Plato Theaet. 190 e. ; Soph. Trach. 925 (iv tovtw interea Xen. C. 1, 3, 17 ; 3, 2, 12), iv oh during which Luke. xii. 1. Closely related to the temporal signification is the iv of subsistence (i.e. positive and continued existence) Heb. vi. 18 iv ol? ahvvarov yfrev- a-aaOai deov whereupon, these two assurances being matters of fact, etc., Rom. ii. 12 iv vo/mo) rjiiaprov under (during the existence, while in possession, of) the law ; — also of condition, Luke viii. 43 f^vvT] ovaa iv pvaet aiixaro^, Rom. iv. 10 ; Phil. iv. 11 (see Eisner in loc. ; Kiihner IL 274), and that, too, inward, Luke iv. 36 ; Tit. i. 6, particularly of the state of mind or feeling, 1 Tim. ii. 2 ; 2 Cor. ii. 1 ; viii. 2 ; Luke i. 44, 75 ; Epli. i. 4 (Heb. xi. 2) ; 2 Pet. ii. 3 ; lastly, — the iv of occupation, 1 Tim. iv. 15 iv rovTotf; la-di. Col. iv. 2 cf. Eph. vi. 20 (Mey. in loc), neiit. iv oh Acts xxvi. 12. Cf. Xen. C. 3, 1, 1 ; 5, 2, 17 ; Soph. Oed. R. 570 ; Plato Phaed. 59 a. and Stallb. in loc. 3) The figurative use of iv, to which we have already made some incidental reference, is extremely diversified, perceptibly exhibiting the progressive deterioration of the language as well as a Hebrew coloring. For iv is used to indicate not merely that in which something else is (ideally) contained, consists, appears 1 Pet. iii. 4 ; Eph. iv. 3 (ii. 15), 2 Thess. ii. 9 (1 Cor. xi. 25), Phil. i. 9, but also, with great variety of application, a) The basis on which, or the sphere (range, personal or imper- sonal) in which, some power acts, 1 Cor. i:^15 Lva ovrw (vs. 13 f.) yevryrat iv ifMoi that it should be so done on me (in my case), iv. 2, 405 6 iv Tj/Mv ixd6r}Te learn in us, Jno. xiii. 35 iv tovtw yvwaovraL, Xen. C. 1, 6, 41 (Luke xxiv. 35 ; 1 Jno. iii. 19), Rom. xiv. 22 6 firj Kpivcov ev a> (iv T0in(p o) BoKifid^et, 1 Thess. v. 12 K07na)VT€<; iv v/xtv who labor upon you, Rom. i. 9 Xarpeveiv iv to5 evar/jekLw (1 Thess. iii. 2 crvvepyb^; iv tm evar/jekio) var.), 1 Cor. vii. 15 ; to denote an ethical relation, 2 Cor. iv. 2 TreptiraTovvTe^ iv iravovpyla (Eph. ii. 3, 362 10 ; V. 2), Rom. vi. 2 ^^y iv dpupria (Fr. in loc). Col. iii. 7 (Cic. ^'^ fam. 9, 26), cf. 1 Cor. vi. 20 ; 2 Thess. i. 10 ; 1 Jno. ii. 8 ; in a more extended sense, of the object in (on, at) which one rejoices, glories etc, 'xaipecv, KavxatyQai, iv see § 33 p. 232. b) The measure or standard (Thuc. 1. 77 ; 8, 89) in, according to, which something is executed, Eph. iv. 16 (Heb. iv. 11), cf. the § 48. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. 387 Hebrew a. Many understand it so in Heb. x. 10 ev u> deXij/xaTt ^iaafx,evoi ea/juev according, in conformity, to which will. Here, however, iv is more precise than Kara. : It is founded in the will of God, that we are sanctified through Christ's sacrificial death. In no other passage does the meaning secundum occur, although even the most recent N. T. Lexicons give copious examples in support of it. 'Ev kfioi according to my Judgment, 1 Cor. xiv. 11, is properly: to me (in my conception) cf. Wex, Antig. p. 187. In Rom. i. 24 ; viii. 15 ; xi. 25 (var.) ; Phil. ii. 7 iv denotes condi- tion. 1 Thess. iv. 15 may be translated : this I say unto you in a word of the Lord, cf. 1 Cor. ii. 7 ; xiv. 6. In TreptTrarelv iv aocf^ca .346 and similar phrases, a-ocpia is not represented as a rule according ^^^ ^ to which, but as an ideal possession, or even a sphere within which to walk (see above). To understand iv Xpiarrm, iv Kvpiw, as mean- ing according to the will or example of Christ, would be to take a flat view of the apostle's conception. Lastly, 1 Tim. i. 18 tW arpaTevrj iv avTal<; (ralroj)h- esyings, equipped with them so to speak (as the actual warrior is in arms^. c) The (external) occasion. Acts vii. 29 etpvyev iv r^Xoyrp rovray at (on') this saying, Xen. equestr. 9, 11 ; hence sometimes the ground, cause, Matt. vi. 7 iv rfi iroXvkoyia avrwv ehaKova-drjo-ovrav on account of their much speaking (properly on their etc.), cf. Aelian. anim. 11, 31 ; Dio C. 25, 5, and iv rovra Jno. xvi. 30 there- fore,^ probably also 1 Cor. iv. 4 (cf. Plutarch, glor. Athen. c. 7 iv TovTOi (for iv tovtw oti) because Rom. viii. 3 see Fr. In 406 many languages, however, a concomitant is assigned thus as a cause: in ha.th\, propter strictly means near; and the German weil (because) is properly a particle of time (during). 'Ev in ^ In Heb. xi. 2 iv ravrri {rf} vitrru) denotes not the ground, but the (ideal) posses- sion : in hac (ronstituti), cf. 1 Tim. v. 10 (Jno. viii. 21). In Heb. ii. 18 ^i/ ^ ■Kivovdiv is undoubtedly to be resolved by tv towt^ 3 in eo quod, sec above p. 159. This same meaning occurs in I Pet ii. 12. In Heb. vi. XI iv ^ may be referred to ZpKos preceding, though (as sometimes i(p' ^) the rendering quapropter, quart, would not be inappropriate. In liom. ii. \ iv $ may be rendered dum, or better, with the Vulgate, in quo (in qua re) judicas etc., which gives a sense quite in point, cf. Fr. In Luke x. 20 iv rovro) . . . on means, at this (rejoice) that, cf. Phil. i. 18. I am not aware of there being in any Greek author an unquestionable instance of iv rovrcp, iv S, in the sense of therefore, because. The passages adduced in Sturz, Lexic. Xenoph. II. 162, admit of another meaning. Xen. A. 1,3, 1 — a passage which Kypke, II. 194, refers to this head — has in the best editions eVl Toirro). Likewise Plat. rep. 5, 455 b., where Ast explains iv ^ by propterea quod, ii susceptible of another exposition ; see Stallb. in loc. 388 § 48. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. g63 tli6 sense of propter is never joined to names of persons (see my 7th ed. Comment, ad Gal. i. 24, of. Exod. xiv. 4) ;i and in general too many passages have been referred to this head, as Eph. iii. 13 ; Jno. viii. 21 ; Jas. i. 25 ; 2 Cor. vi. 12 ; Heb. iv. 11. d) The instrument and means (principally in the Rev.), not merely (as in the better Greek prose authors, see Bttm. Philoct- p. 69 ; Boeckh, Find. III. 487 ; Poppo, Xen. Cyr. p. 195, and the uncritical collections in Schwarz, Comment, p. 476; Georgi, Yind. 153 sq.) where the German in also (or auf^ is admissible, as Kaietv 347 eV -rrvpi Rev. xvii. 16 (1 Cor. iii. 13), cf. 1 Mace. v. 44 ; vi. 31 ^^- (^fjaac iv TreSat? Xen. A. 4, 3, 8 ; cf. Judg. xv. 13 ; xvi. 7 ; Sir. xxviii. 19 ; Stallb. Plat. Crit. p. 104, fcaXinrreLv iv Ifiarlw Ael. anim. 11, 15), fjL€Tpelv iv fiBTpM Matt. vii. 2, akt^eiv iv aXari Matt. v. 13 ; Rev. vii. 14 ; Jas. iii. 9 ; Heb. ix. 22, but also, through the influence of the Hebrew a, in circumstances quite different from this, where in Greek authors the Dative would be employed alone as the casus instrumentalis, as Luke xxii. 49 irardacjeLv iv fjui-)(aipa, Rev. vi. 8 .^ ^aTroKTelvai ev pofi(f}aia, xiii. 10 ; xiv. 15 Kpd^eiv iv jxeyciXr] (fxovfj (2 Pet. ii. 16), Matt. vii. 6 KaraTrareLV iv Tot? iroacv, Luke i. 51 ; Mark 407 xiv. 1 ; Rom. xv. 6, especially in the Rev. (cf. Judg. iv. 16 ; xv. 15; XX. 16, 48 ; 1 Kings xii. 18 ; Josh. x. 35 ; Exod. xiv. 21 ; xvi. 3 ; xvii. 5, 13; xix. 13 ; Gen. xxxii. 20; xli. 36; xlviii.22; Noh.i.lO; 1 Mace. iv. 15 ; Judith ii. 19 ; v. 9 ; vi. 4, 12, etc.).^ Yet such constriictions occasionally occur even in Greek authors ; as, Himer. eclog. 4, 16 iv |t0ei, Hippocr aphor. 2, 36 iv ^app,aK€i7)(TL Kadai- 364 peaOai, Malal. 2 p. 50.^ 'Ev is so used with personal designations, 7tli ei 1 In 2 Cor. xiii. 4 aaOfvoviiev iy auT^, as frequently tV Xpicn^ (so variously under- stood by expositors), denotes fellowship with Christ, the relation of thai 4v Xpiffr^ (see below, p. 389). The apostle is not yreakfor Christ's sake (out of regard as it were for the interest of Christ, to prevent the possible falling away of the Corinthians) ; but weak in Christ, i.e. in and conformably to (apostolic) fellowship with Christ (who likewise was in a certain sense do-flei'^jx; see what precedes). The phrase designates concisely a state which results from heimj in Christ ; just as the (riv and dwarhv that are referred to fellowship with Christ ((riy). Just as little does Eph. iv. 1 6 Seff/nios iv Kvpiai mean the prisoner for Christ's sake. Somewhat more remote is Phil. i. 8 tirnrodci!) viyTas v/xas if (nrXdyxvois XpiffTov 'I., see T3enrjel. 2 It would be a mistake to suppose that in Eph. ii. 15 (^ 31, note 1, p. 220) and vi. 4 iv denotes the instrument. In the latter passage iraihtia Ka\ vovdta-'ia Kvpiov is the sphere in which the children are trained, cf. Polyb. 1, 65, 7. Even in the expression awdatrtiv Tt iv rivi Rom. i. 23, I cannot with Fr. adopt the meaning per, nor do I think that the Hebrew 21 with "^""pn is to be so understood. To change something in gdd is either an abbreviated expression, or gold is conceived as that in which the exchange is effected. The iv of price is similar ; see above and p. 390. 8 Many passages that might be adduced under this head from Greek authors, are to § 48. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. 389 Matt. ix. 34 iv Tct) ap-xpvTt twv Sai/jbovirav eK^dWeiv ra Sai/iovia, Acts xvii. 31 Kplvetv ev avhpi in a man, cf. Time. 7, 8, 2 ; Mtth. II. 1841, not Jno. xvii. 10 ; 2 Thess. i. 10, or by any means Acts xvii. 28.i The phrase oixoaat ev rivi Matt. v. 84 If. does not signify jarare/)er 348 (see Fr. in ioc), but more simply : swear by (on) something. So ^'''^ likewise in other passages ev does not properly signify through : 1 Cor. vii. 14 rpjiaaTai o dvrjp 6 aTTto-ro? eV rfj yvvaiKL means, he is sanctified in the wife, — the foundation rather than tlie means of sanctification being indicated. In Rom. xv. 16 iv TrveufiaTi dyitp and not Btd ttv. dy. is employed designedly, in the Holy Spirit (an internal principle). Related to this is 1 Cor. xv. 22 iv t&> ^ASdfj, 7rdvT€ the dis- tinction between iv (referring to mental states or powers) and Sid (of the means) is perceptible ; as, 1 Pet. i. 5 rovs iv Swd/ufi deov Opovpov^iivovs Sta irio-Tfcos, see Steiger in Ioc, i. 22 fiyviKSres iv t^ tiiraKofj ttjs a\7]6eias Sia irvfiifj-aTos, Hel). x. 10. Lastly, pas- sages in which iv and Sid in reference to things are interchanged in the same proposition, Col. i. 16; 2 Cor. vi. 4ff. 8; 1 Cor. xiv. 19, merely show that both prepositions are identical as respects the sense. Even iv in Matt. iv. 4 iv Travrl l>-r)fxaTi does not appear to be exactly equivalfent to iiri in iit' 6,pr

(1 Thess. ii. 14; Rom. viii. 1 ; xvi. 11 ; 2 Cor. v. 17 ; Gal. i. 22), and Luther's " barbarous " translation (Fr. II, 85) ^ is to be retained. So like- wise in 1 Cor. xii. 3 iv irvev/jbaTt deov XaXcov is to be rendered quite 365 literally, speaking in the Spirit of God, the element in which the ''^^' speaker lives (Rom. ix. 1 ; xiv. 17 ; Col. i. 8). e) The price, after the analogy of the Hebrew, Rev. v. 9 dyo- pd^eiv iv Tft) aifiaTi (1 Chron. xxi. 24). The value of the thing purchased is contained in the price (to which the ix of the price then corresponds). Even in the most recent Lexicons the significations of this preposition have been unwarrantably multiplied or its real significations incorrectly applied to passages of the N. T. The interpretations which have been given to the phrase iv ovofiarl nvos in particular are Protean. The iv here causes no difiiculty, for it simply means in. And something takes place ' in a person's name ' when it is comprehended or embraced in his name, is to be set down to his personal activity, cf. Acts iv. 7 (not to his who is the nearest, the immediate, subject, cf. Jno. v. 43). Only the various verbs which are limited by iv ovo/xaTL require the expositor's attention, in order that the vai'ious senses may be traced back severally ia the simplest manner to the literal meaning of the phrase. This task has not yet been performed satisfactorily (yet better by Harless, Eph. S. 484, than by van Hengel, Philip, p. 161 sq.), not even by Mey. Phil. ii. 10 seems to require separate treatment : ovofia here refers to ovofia in vs. 9, and iv ovofxari denotes the name upon which those that bow the knee unite, on which united all (ttSv yow) worship. The name which Jesus has received '.moves all to united adoration. In Tit. iii. 5 iv does not indicate the Jinis lor consilium; but epya to. iv SiKaioa-vvr) mean, works performed in the 409 spirit of a St/catos; as to Luke i. 17 ; 1 Cor. vii. 15 see below. In Mark ix. 50 eipr}ve.veT€ iv aXX-^Xoi^, the rendering erga is not necessary ; we, too, 1 In so far as the Christian abides (by faith) in living (inward, hence iv) fellowship with Christ, he will do everything in the consciousness of this fellowship, and through the strength which this fellowship confers, i.e. in Christ, in the Lord ; as a Christian, in a Christian spirit, etc., as the words are frequently rendered, expresses much less than the pregnant phrase in Christ. So in Rom. xvi. 12 who labor in the Lord, conscious of their fellowship with the Lord (unworldly /foiriS;/ is meant), 1 Cor. xv. 18 ichofell asleep in Christ, in conscious, steadfast fellowship with Christ (cf 1 Thess. iv. 16; Rev. xiv. 13), Rom. ix. 1 (a passage which even Bengel misunderstood) speak the truth in Christ (as one living in Christ), xiv. 14 persuaded in the Lord (of a truth of which one in living union with Christ is assured). As to 1 Cor. iv. 15 see Meij. In the same way tipiaKt- (rBai 4v Xp. Phil. iii. 9 is to be explained. See besides, Rom. xv. 17 ; xvi. 2, 22 ; 1 Cor. vii. 39; Phil. iv. 1 (Eph. vi. 1),1 Pet. v. 10. Fr. Rom. II. 82sqq. is essentially right, though his remarks are not free from misapprehensions nor from unnecessary matter See, besides, v. Hengel, Cor. p. 81. § 48. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. 391 say : among (one another) yourselves. The following interpretations appear still more inadmissible : a. ex^ Heb. xiii. 9 cv 015 ovk dxjieXi^Orjtrav ol TrepiTraTT^cravTes unde (Schott) nihil commodi perceperunt (cf. (i^tXettr^ai airo Aeschin. dial. 2, 11). If cv 349 oTs is to be joined to dxpeKi^d., the preposition indicates the profit that would 6tli «!• have originated therein or attached thereto, Xen. Athen. rep. 1, 3 ; Demosth. Pantaen. 631 a. ; but ev oh belongs to TrepiTraT^o-avrcs. Matt.i. 20 to ev airfj yevvr]$ev means, that which has been begotten m her {in ejus utero). b. pro, loco, Rom. xi. 17 (Schott) iytKevrptaOrji ev^avrots (kXciSois) means: 366 grafted on the branches (of which some had been cut off). "fitei c. with. In Acts xx. 32 cv tois rjyia(TyiivoL<; signifies, among (with) the sanctified. Acts vii. 14 /xcTexaXco-aTO tov Trarepa avrov 'laKw/J . . . ev ^l/vxa-h c/JSo/x. means, (consisting) in seventy souls ; a is used in the same way in Deut. x. 22 ; I do not, however, know of an instance in a Greek author. Fr.'s explanation of these words (ad Mr. p. 604) appears to me too far- fetched, and it has been rejected by AYahl also. In Eph. vi. 2 ^tis iarrlv cn-oX^ TrptLrrj cv tTrayycXia undoubtedly means not merely, annexa, addita promissione, but the first in promise, i.e. in point of promise (not ev to^ci Chrysost.). So also Mey. d. by (of). In Eph. iv. 21 ciyc ev avria iBiSdxOrjTe if ye were taught in him is closely connected with airoOiaOaL etc. following, and consequently means, conformably to fellowship with Christ, as believers in Christ. As to €v for eis, see § 50, no. 4, p. 413 sq. b. Svv with as distinguished from fieTci indicates a more inti- mate union ; ^ as, among persons, partnership in calling, faith, fortune, etc. Acts ii. 14 ; xiv. 4, 20 ; 1 Cor. xi. 32. Hence it is generally used in reference to spiritual fellowship, as that of be- lievers with Christ, Rom. vi. 8 ; Col. ii. 13, 20 ; iii. 3 ; 1 Thess. iv. 17 : V. 10 ; or that of believers with Abraham, Gal. iii. 9 (o-w denoting in all these cases not mere resemblance, but actual association). Then in reference to things it denotes powers com- bining and co-operating with a person, 1 Cor. v. 4 ; xv. 10. It would be extended to a less intimate connection in 2 Cor. viii. 19 with the collection ; yet here iv seems the preferable reading. On 410 the other hand, cf. Luke xxiv. 21 fiv iy apyipa, xpv(r

ovofiarl rLvoocr. areop. 336 ; Dio Chr. 29, 293. Hence e'^' c5 wherefore, on which account, Diod. S. 19, 98 (e0' wirep Dio C. 43, 95, etc.), and because 2 Cor. v. 4 ;^Rom. ~|~ V. 12 ; probably also Phil. iii. 12 (on this account that, for eVt tovtw on see Fr. Rom. I. 299 sq.), eo quod.^ e) To, for, of aim and issue, 1 Thess. iv. 7 ovk eKuXeaev irrl cLKaOapa-ia to uncleanness, Gal. v. 13 (like KcCKelv eifi ^evla Xen. An. 7, 6, 3, and the like ; see Sintenis, Plutarch. Them. p. 147), 2 Tim. ii. 14 ; Eph. ii. 10, cf. Xen. An. 5, 7, 34 ; Mem. 2, 3, 19 ; Plat. rep. 8, 889 b. ; Diod. S. 2, 24 ; Arrian. Alex. 1, 26, 4 ; 2, 18, 9; Diog. L. 1, 7, 2 ; cf. Index to Dio C. ed. Sturz p. 148 sq., ac- cording to some i(j) o5 Phil. iii. 12 unto which (for which). f) After, of the rule, model, Luke i. 59 Kokelv evrt tw ovofiart after the name (Neh. vii. 63). To this head, pi-obably, belongs "■f 852 ^1^0 Romj_v. 14 eVt tw o/xouofMan Trj<; irapa^daew's ^ASd/x ad (Vulg. 6ih ed. in) aimilitudinem peccati Ad. ; for other explanations, see Meyer. 369 2 Cor. ix. 6, however, we cannot with Philippi (Rom.- Br. S. 172) 7th ed. understand in the same way ; see above, p. 392. When cTTi with Dat. in a local sense is joined to a verb of direction or motion (Matt. ix. 16 ; Jno. viii. 7, not Matt. xvi. 18 ; Acts iii. 11), the phrase 413 includes together with the idea of motion that of tarrying and resting also. d. JJapd beside i.e. properly near, at the side of, used of place, with the Dative of the thing only in Jno. xix. 25 (Soph. Oed. C. 1 Yet several of these passages may be referred to the more general signification at, with (see above), as is done by Fr. Rom. I. 315. 2 'ATToAfiTai 6 aadevuv a^fK' oudviov is probably to be rendered into, though BCrusius is of a diflf^rent opinion. 898 § 49. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. fore, or rather, inexact. Nor can th be strictly rendered before, coram in Acts xxii. 30 (see Kiihnol), cf. Heind. Plat. Protag. 471 ; Stallb. Plat. 372 symp. p. 43 sq. ; but tcrrr/o-av (avTov) cts aurous is : introduced (placed) Ifth ed. him among them, in the midst (cis fiecrov). In 2 Cor. xi. 6 cv Travri ^ave- pw^cWcs €is viias is very nearly : towards you (erga), as elsewhere irpo's is used. That eis is ever equivalent to 8ia with Gen. is a fiction ; and dov. Then, with numerals, in a distributive sense ; as, Jno. ii. 6 vSpiai, ')(Q)povaai dva fj,€Tp7}Tdd6vov out of (front) envy, Eph. ii. 4 hca rrjv iroWtjv dyaTrrjv (Diod. S. 19, 54 8ca rrjv 7r/309 Tov ir6\iv means, throughout the city ; /cofl' &S6v along the road, on the road (as on a line). Even Kar' oIkov, where the primary meaning recedes farthest from view, is used to express a diiferent conception from iv oUw (as zu Ilause, at home is different from \m Ilause, in the house). Besides, Kurd has established itself in many phrases where probably iv might have been used. 2 Hence comes the meaning with, among, as oi kuO' v/uias irotr}ra'i Acts xvii. 28, cf. xiii. 1 and other passages; see above, p. 193. Kard with a personal pronoun is em- ployed thus, especially in later authors, as merely a circumlocution for a possessive pronoun ; see Ilase, Leo Diac. p. 230. 8 Against this explanation, adopted also by Fr. Krehl and others, various objections have recently been raised, particularly by Mey. and Philippi. The most unimportant of all is that then Kar' avr6v would be used. The emphasis implied in the substantive §49. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 401 Closely connected with this is the temporal use of the preposition, sometimes as in Acts xvi. 25 Kara ro fieaovvKTiov towards midnight, and sometimes as in Matt, xxvii. 15 kuO' kopriqv during the festival, i. 20 Kar ovap during a dream, secundum quietem (Herod. 2, 7, 6, Kara v(nv, Matt. ix. 29 Kara rr)v Trlartv vfjb(ov according to your faith, ^'^ ^ as it deserves, 2 Cor. iv. 13 ; Rom. ii. 2 Kara dXTjOecav, Matt. ii. 13 Kara xpovov according to the time. Hence it denotes similarity, sort (pattern), Heb. viii. 8f. crvvreXeaw . . . haOrjK-qv Kaivrjv, ov Kara rr)v SLad7]K7]v, fjv ivoLTjaa etc. (1 Kings xi. 10), Acts xviii. 14. Likewise with names of persons Kara nva usually signifies accord- ing to some one's opinion Col. ii. 8 (Eph. ii. 2) ; 2 Cor. xi. 17, or will Rom. XV. 5 ; 1 Cor. xii. 8 ; cf. Stallb. Plat. Gorg. p. 91, or is easily felt, and is indicated visibly, too, by the position of KaTo. ee6v, thon means after the manner of God, which is more closely defined by irvevnart (for God is irvtvua). 2 Accordingly Kard sometimes stands parallel to the Dat. (instrura.), as in Arrian. Al. 5, 21, 4 Kar' ^x^os rh Udipov fxaWov fj i\ia rf} "AKc^dvSpov. See Fr. Rom. I. 99. 8 Matthies gives an artificial exposition with the remark that it cannot be shown that Kari expresses object. This import, however, is very naturally involved in the original meaning of this preposition. Moreover, see Mtth. 1356, 1359. § 49. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 403 KUT uTifitav Xeyo) to (as a, by way of) reproach (Her. 2, 152 ; Time. 5,7; 6,31). The signification cum must be rejected, though Kara may sometimes be translated with. In Rom x. 2 359 f^\o9 deov aXX ov Kar i-rriyvoxjcv is zeal/or God, but not according ^^^ ^ to knowledge, i.e. not as zeal resulting from knovdedge manifests itself (cf. above, Kar ayvotav), 1 Pet. iii. 7. In Heb. xi. 13 Karb. irlarrLv aTredavov etc. means : they died in (according to) faith, without having received etc. ; it was in accordance with faith (with the nature of Trio-Tt?) that they died having seen only from afar the fulfilment of the promises. The idea of kujo, iric-Ttv is contained in the second participial clause. c. 'Tirep with Ace. signifies beyond, away-over (Her. 4, 188 ; Plato, Crit. 108 e. ; Plut. virt. mul. p. 231 Lips.). In the N. T. it never occurs in reference to place, but is always used figuratively, beyond, over and above in number, rank, quality ; as, Acts xxvi. 13 ^Si'i TrepiKd/x-^au . . . virep rrjv XafiTrponjTa rov rfXiov, Matt. x. 24 ovK eart [iadr)Ti}vXaKr}v about the fourth watch (circa in Latin), Matt. xx. 3 (Aeschin. ep. 1, 121 b.) ; Acts xxii. 6. Lastly, of the object around which an action or a state revolves, as it were, as in Acts xix. 25 ol irepl to, Toiavra ipiydrat (Xen. Vectig. 4, 28) ; Luke x. 40 (Lucian. indoct. 6) ; 1 Tim. vi. 4 voawv irepl ^i^T'qaei'i (Plat. Pliaed. 228 e.). Hence it is sometimes equivalent to in reference to, as in Tit. ii. 7 ; 1 Tim. i. 19 ; 2 Tim. iii. 8 (Xen. Mem. 4, 3, 2 ; Isocr. Evag. 4 ; errorem (yi7'ca literas habuit, and similar expressions, occnr in Quintil. and Sueton.). Cf. al)ove, § 30, 3, note 5 p. 192, and Ast, Plat. legg. p. 37 ; but especially Glossar. Theodoret. p. 317 sqq. Worthy of notice, further, is the phrase ol irepl top UavXov Paul and his companions 362 Acts xiii. 13,^ like ol irepl UevocficovTa Xen. An. 7, 4, 16, ol irepl ^^'^- KUpoira Xen. Mem. 3, 5, 10, an expression which in later authors denotes the leader alone, Hm. Vig. 700. So probably in Jno. xi. 19 1 M€T«{ in such phrases is used also by Greek authors, though this use seems to become more common in the later language, Malal. 2, 52 iitoKiixr]aav fier' aWiXwy, 13 p. 317, 337; 18 p. 457. 2 Greek writers, as is well known, employ aix i^ovaia eVl nraaav — "^ to trust, hope, upon Matt, xxvii. 43 ; 2 Cor. ii. 3 ; 1 Tim. v. 5 ; 1 Pet. i. 13, but also a7r\ar/xvt^€a6ai eiri tivi, to have compassion on (towards) one. Matt. xv. 32 ; Mark viii. 2. d) of the direction of thought or discourse, Mark ix. 12 ; Heb. vii. 13 (Rom. iv. 9), or the will, and consequently of the intention and aim, Luke xxiii. 48 (Plat. Crit. 52 b.), Matt. iii. 7 (Xen. M. 2, 3, 13 ; Cyr. 7, 2, 14; Fischer, ind. ad Palaeph. under eVt), Matt. xxvi. 50 i66f) Xt^o9 iirl \l6ov, Mark xiii. 2 ov /jur) dcfieOfj \l6o<; e-TTt \i0(p (cf. Josh. v. 15 in one and the same clause e<^' a> vvv €(n7)KaelrjTwv . . . diro rJys yevcas rauTi^s ixTro tov atyuaros "AjSeX etc., Rom. xv. 13 ci? to Trepia-aeveiv vfias iv rrj cATrtSi iv SvvdfX€L 'n-vevfJLaTO<; dylov, Jno. ii. 23 ^v iv t. 'Icpoo-oXv/xois iv t^ ird.a-)(a. iv Trj iopTy, 2 Cor. vii. 16 ^^at'pco on iv Travri Oappw iv vfxlv, xii. 12 ; 1 Cor. iii. 18 ; Rom. i. 9 ; Eph. i. 3, 14 ; ii. 3, 7 ; iv. 22 ; vi. 18 ; Phil. i. 26 ; ii. 16 ; 1 Thess. ii. 14 ; 2 Thess. i. 4 ; Col. i. 29 ; ii. 2 ; iv. 2 ; Ileb. v. 3 ; ix. 11 f. ; Jno. iv. 45 (xyii.iS) ; Acts xvii. 31 ; 2 Pet. i. 4 (Philostr. her. 4, 1 ; Arrian. Epict. 4, 13, 1). 2. The two different prepositions in the same sentence in Philem. § 50. INTERCHANGE, ETC. OF PREPOSITIONS. 411 5 cLKOvav aov rrjv dyaTrrjv KoX rrjv TrtVrty, rjv e^et? irpof top KvpLOV ^Irjaovv Kol el vficav ovre dir dXk(ov the two prepositions are quite synonymous, as also in Jno. xi. 1 ; Acts xxiii. 34. In Rom. iii. 30 Paul certainly does not have in view any difference of meaning (between e'/c Tri(ne(o a-KoareXKbi vfjud^ coL^X. €is TTjv 6aXaa-(rav — the former means, they cast the net aboTtt (waved it about) in the sea ; the latter, they cast it into the sea ; different stages and acts of their business are indicated. In Rom. v. 21 cySacn'Xevcrcv rj dfjMpTLa iv tw Oavdrta in death, which is actually present ; but Iva -q ^(apis fiaa-iXevarr} Slol Sucatoo-vvT/? cis t,oyr]v alwviov unto life, as the end to be attained ; probably, however, eis C atwv. depends directly on Sik. see Fr. ; cf. besides 2 Cor. xiii. 3. It must, however, be admitted that the limitation according to which eis is construed with verbs of rest and iv on the other hand with verbs of motion, is overlooked by writers of the later period, especially by the Scholiasts ^ and Byzantines, and so iv and eis are em- ployed without distinction, and iv even begins to predominate with verbs of motion, see Leo Diac. ed. Hase p. XII. ; Blume, Lycurg. p. 56 ; Niebuhr, ind. to Agath., also the indices to Theophan. and to Menandri hist, in the Bonn ed.^ The modern Greeks, in fact, have retained but one of these prepositions. Cf. further, Argum. ad Demosth. Androt. § 17 ; Theodoret. 0pp. II. 466, 804 ; III. 809 ; Epiphan. haer. 46, 5 ; Pseudepiph. vit. proph. pp. 241, 248, 332, 334, 340, 341 ; Basilic. I. 150 ; III. 496, also the Sept. 390 the Apocr. and the Pseudepigr.^ in many passages. Yet in the N. T. 7th ed. there is at least no instance more anomalous than those which occur in the earlier writers of the kolvtj. 372 6. It is especially characteristic of Paul to use several preposi- 6th ed tions referring to one and the same substantive, in order that together they may define his idea on all sides, e.g. GaL 1. 1 nav\o avvearr^Kev is explanatory of et? avrov. Eph. iv. 6 eh 6e6 vjxwv, to. Se fxtO' vfj.(ov, ra 8k 8t* v/aSs, ra 8' vnkp v/xwv, Acta Ignat. p. 368 8l ov kol fx.eOi' ov r(3 Trarpt r/ So^a. Other instances may be seen in "Wetst. II. 77 and Fr. Rom. II. 556. 7. When two or more substantives dependent on the same prep- 439 osition immediately follow one another joined together by a copula, 1 Theodoret has thus explained the passage : atnhs rh -navra. irtnoirjKfv, avrhs ri y(yov6Ta StaTfXeT Kvfifpvut' . . . els avrhv a\r) ttjv Biktjv, 12, 955 b. iv tepois — 441 oh av iSikrf, 2, 659 b. €K Tavrov oro/AaTOS, omnp rows ^covs eTrcKoXe'craTO etc. 1 But in such antitheses the preposition is not repeated before an adjective, as 1 Pet. i 23 ovK iK airopas cpdapTrjS aWa acpOdpTOv. 422 § 50. INTERCHANGE, ETC. OF PREPOSITIONS. Plat. Pliaed. 21 ; Gorg. 453 e.; Lach. 192 b.; Thuc. 1, 28; Xen. conv 4, 1 ; All. 5, 7, 17 ; Hiero 1, 11 ; Aristot. probl. 26, 4 and 16 ; Paus. 9, 39, 4; cf. Bremi, Lys. p. 201 ; Schaef. Soph. III. 317 ; Dion. comp. p. 325; Meiet. p. 124 ; Demostli. II. 200 ; Heller, Soph. Oed. C. p. 420 ; Ast, Plat. legg. p. 108 ; Wurm, Dinarch. p. 93 ; Stallb. Flat. rep. II. 291 ; Bhdy. 203 f. 875 ^'^J ^" t^i^ ^- T., Acts xiii. 39 aircr iravruiv, S)V ovk rj8vvq6rp-€ . . . StKatw^^vai, 6th ed. otKatonrat, xiii. 2 d«^opttraTC . . . tts to ipyov, o ■7rpo^K€KXr]iJiai aurous, Luke i. 2o ; xii. 46 ; Matt. xxiv. 50 ; Rev. ii. 13 (not 1 Cor. vii. 20) ; on the contrary, Jno. iv. 53 iv iKtivy ry tjpa, iv rj cTttcv, Acts vii. 4; xx. 18 (Jon. iv. 10) cf. Demosth. Timoth. 705b. iv rots xpo'i'oi?, cv oh yeypaTrrai rrjv rn*.i]v Twv ^toAwv ocfielXoiv, Aristot. anim. 5, 30 ; Plat. Soph. 257 d. ; Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 4; Diog. L. 8, 68 ; Heinich. Euseb. II. 252. As to the Lat. see Ramshorn S. 378 ; Beier, Cic. offic. I. 123. The Greek authors, also, readily repeat the preposition when the relative is separated by several words from the antecedent, Her. 1, 47 ; Xen. vectig. 4, 13 ; Lucian. necyom. 9; DioChr. 17, 247. In Greek authors, and especially in the poets, a preposition belonging to two successive nouns is sometimes, as is well known, expressed only once and that before the second noun, Hm. Vig. p. 854 ; Lob. Soph. Aj. v. 397 sq., the comment, on Anacr. 9, 22 ; Kiihner II. 320 etc. Such an instance has been supposed to occur in Phil. ii. 22 (Heinich. Euseb. II. 252) on, d»s irarpl tckvov, crvv ip-oi eSovXeuaev etc. But the passage contains rather a variatio structurae. Paul uses crvv c/xot, bethinking himself that he cannot well say ip.ol iBovX^vcrev : he has, as a child serves his father, served with me, etc. See, in general, the opposite remarks of Bhdy. p. 202 ; cf. however, Franke, Dem. p. 30. Note 1. It is a peculiarity of later Greek, in particular, to combine a preposition with an adverb, especially of place or time (Krii. 266 f.), — • either so as to make the preposition modify the meaning of the adverb, as in OLTTO Trpm Acts xxviii. 23, airo iripvcri 2 Cor. viii. 10 ; ix. 2, oltt apri Matt, xxvi. 29, (iTTo Tore Matt. iv. 17 [xvi. 21] xxvi. 16 [Luke xvi. 16], (.Kirakai 2 Pet. ii. 3, v-n-epXiav 2 Cor. xi. 5 ; xii. 11 (cf. vrripev Xen. Hiero 6, 9) ; or so as to blend with an expressive adverb a preposition that seemed weakened by diversified usage (cf. in German : oben auf dem Dache), as vTroKoiTw, vTj-epdvo), Karcvavrt. Sometimes also an adverb is strengthened by the preposition, as irapavriKcu To this class belong likewise such nu' merals as e^aTraf Rom. vi. 10 etc. (Dio Cass. 1091, 91 ; 1156, 13, analogous to csttTra^ Franke, Demosth. p. 30, Trpos aTraf Malal. 7, p. 178), cVt r/ais 394 Acts X. 16 ; xi. 10 (among the examples adduced by Kypke II. 48 is the 7th ed, analogous tis rpis, which occurs in Her. 1, 86 ; Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 4 ; cf. Hm. Vig. p. 857). Many of these compounds are to be found only in writers 442 tliat flourished after the time of Alexander,^ some only in Scholiasts, Lob. 1 Yet es htl, h ivfira, 4s iypf, and the like, occur even in Thuc. 1, 129, 130 ; 4, 63 ; 8, 23. As to avh fiou{p6efv, and the like, see § 65, 2, p. 603. § 51. USE OF PREPOSITIONS IN CIRCUMLOCUTIONS. 423 Phryn. p. 46 sqq. ; cf., however, Kiihner II, 315 ; several, such as aTro iripvat (for which irpoTrepvcn or iKirepvcn), are not to be met with even there. Further, cf. Sept. oltto oTnaOev (■'^^nx^) 1 Sam. xii. 20 and Thilo, Act. Thom. p. 25, (Consistency in the mode of writing these compounds, whether connected Krii. 266 or separated, has not been observed even by the most recent editors of the N. T.) Note 2. The antique usage of employing (simple) prepositions without a case for adverbs, has been retained, with certain restrictions, in the prose 376 style of all periods, Bhdy. 196. In the N. T. we find but a single example 6tli ^ of this: 2 Cor. xi. 23 Staxovoi Xpia-Tov etcn'v ; — inrkp cyw I more. The instances which Kypke adduces in Toe. are not all similar. Usually in prose such prepositions are supported by a 8c or ye (/xcra Se is especially frequent) Bhdy. 198. IIpos in addition, besides, may be best compared with the above passage, e.g. Dem. 1 Aphob. 556a.; Franke, Demosth. p. 94. The form m with the accent thrown back for cVt (cv), including the substantive verb, occurs several times, see p, 80 ; Boruem, (Stud, u, Krit. 1843, S, 108 f.) attempted, but on insufficient grounds, to introduce ajro far from (Bttm. II. 378) in Matt. xxiv. 1. §51. USE OF PREPOSITIONS IN CIRCUMLOCUTIONS. 1. When a preposition with a noun forms a circumlocution for an adverb or (mostly with the aid of the article) for an adjective, the propriety of such a use of the preposition must be shown by a reference to its fundamental signification;^ a merely empirical treatment might lead to erroneous conclusions. Note, then, a. 'Airo ; e.g. a-rro fiipovi Rom. xi. 25 ; 2 Cor. i. 14 in part (from a part hitherwards), a-iro fxtm (yvaifXT}^) Luke xiv. 18 unanimously (proceediiig/rom one determination), with one mind, b. Aid with the Genitive usually denotes a mental state viewed as something mediate, a means: in Heb. xii, 1 Bi v7ro/j,ov7]<; may 443 be rendered, with (through^ patience, ^a^tew%, assidue (similarly Rom. viii. 25 8i viro^ovrj^ aTrcKBe'^ofieOa etc, cf. Bi d(f)poavvr}<; imprudenter Xen. C. 3, 1, 18, Bl euXa/SeiW timide Dion. H. III. 395 1360, see Pflugk, Eur, Hel. p, 41), cf. also e.g. Bt dacf>aX€La<; Thuc. ^"' ^ 1, 17. Of a different nature is Heb. xiii. 22 Bid ^pa^^oov iireaTeCKa vfilv breviter — properly by means of^ew (words), paucis — cf. Btd fipaxvTdrcovDem. Pant. 624c., and below, § 64,5. Used adjectively 1 This is not altogether without difficulty, chiefly because in different languages different views of the same relation predominate, e.g. airh fitpovs zum Theil, m part, iK Sffiooi/ zur Rechten, on, at, to the right, ab oriente gegen Osten, on, to, towards the East. Many phrases, too, arise from abbreviation. 424 § 51. USE OF PREPOSITIONS IN CIRCUMLOCUTIONS. 2 Cor. iii. 11 el to Karap^ov^evov Bta B6^7)<; etc. (above, p. 379), it denotes a quality with which something is invested. c. Ek expresses a degree (unto) whicli something reaches, Luke xiii. 11 ek to TravreXe^ completely (perfectly) wholly ( Aelian. 7, 2, ek KaXXiaTov Plat. Eutliyd. 275 b., €9 to aKpt^h Thuc. 6, 82) ; this, however, can hardly be called a periphrasis for the adverb. d. '£/c, e.g. GK ixepovi 1 Cor. xii. 27 ex parte (forth from a part). '£/c is used especially of the standard (secundum), as in e/c twv vojxcov secundum leges, legibus convenienter (rule of conduct drawn as it were out of the laws) ; hence e| laoTrjTo^; according to equality, gijY equally 2 Cor. viii. 13, e'/c fieTpov by measure, moderately Jno. iii. 34 ; 6th ed. cf. e'l ahUov injuste Xen. Cyr. 8, 8, 18, e'f Xaov Her. 7, 135 ; Plato, rep. 8, 561 b., e/c 7rpo' oaov, iirl iroXC present no difficulty. g. Kara. The expression 17 Kara ^d6ov, Luke xv. 2 avveaOiec avroh, etc. Accordingly, verbs compounded with airo, Kara (against), irpo, take the Gen. ; those compounded with irepl (Matt. iv. 23 Trepidjecv rr]p TaXikaiav, Acts ix. 3), the Acc. § 52. VERBS COMPOUNDED WITH PREPOSITIONS. 427 3. Which of these modes of construction is the regular one, must be learned from usage. Sometimes two of them, or all three together, occur (cf. iin^aWetv, likewise parallel passages such as Matt, xxvii. 60 and Mark xv. 46 ; Jno. ix. 6 and vs. 11 ; Acts XV. 20 and vs. 29).^ Yet it must not be overlooked that even in this case usage has often established a distinction. Thus no one 399 will regard it as an indifferent matter whether verbs compounded Iih ed, with etiaTdvat tlvl (of persons) Acts iv. 1, and i(f)ia-Tdvat, eVt irjv oiKiav xi. 11. See, in general, my second Progr. de verb, compp. p. 10 sqq. 4. The usage of the N. T. is more particularly as follows : 1) After verbs compounded with aTro, a) for the most part diro is repeated (cf., in general, Erfurdt, Soph. Oed. R. p. 225) : so after aTrepx^crOai (followed by a personal noun) Mark i. 42 ; Luke i. 38 ; ii. 15 ; Rev. xviii. 14 (Lucian. 380 salt. 81), after diroiri'nTeiv Acts ix. 18 (in a material sense, cf. ^'l''^ Her. 3, 130 ; Polyb. 11, 21, 3 ; in a figurative sense it does not occur in the N. T.), d^undvai desistere a, or to withdraw from a person, Acts v. 38 ; Luke ii. 37 ; xiii. 27 ; 2 Cor. xii. 8 ; 1 Tim. vi. 5 etc. (Polyb. 1, 16, 3) but 1 Tim. iv. 1, see below, d7rop>.icu Trpos4)pr7)vro Polyb. 8, 6, 5 ; 3, 46, 8, but (fig.) 9, 20, b irpozaprav iroWa. Tiva r ■p ar parity ie^. 428 § 52. VERBS COMPOUNDED WITH PREPOSITIONS. Acts xix. 12, airoKpiiTTTetv Matt. xi. 25, airoaTpec^eiv Rom. xi. 26 Sept., once also after the figurative d7ro6vi]a-K€Lv Col. ii. 20 (cf. Porphyr. abstin. 1, 41), which elsewhere, in the composite sense of dying to, is construed with the Dat. (see immediately below). b) after uTroXa/x^dvetv^ irapd is used (with pei'sonal nouns), Luke Yi. 34 ; cf. Diod. S. 13, 31 ; Lucian. pise. 7 (aTro, when the verb signifies to take away hy force, Polyb. 22, 26, 8). c) the Genitive follows d'iro(f>€vyeiv 2 Pet. i. 4 (but not in 2 Pet. ^ ii. 20), aTToXXoTpiovv Eph. ii. 12 ; iv. 18 (Polyb. 3, 77, 7), d(pi(TTdvat (deficere a) 1 Tim. iv. 1 (Polyb. 2, 39, 7 ; 14, 12, 3), diroa-Tepela-daL (fig.) 1 Tim. vi, 5. d) the Dat. is used after aTroOvrjaKuv to die to a thing, Gal. ii. 19 ; Rom. vi. 2, (in Rom. vi. 10 the Dat. is to be taken differently) ; similar is dirofyiveaOai rat? dp^apriac^ 1 Pet. ii. 24. 899 2) Verbs compounded with dvd in the local sense of up (to), 7th ed. g^j.g construed with, a) et9, wlien the place to which the motion is directed is indi- cated, e.g. dva^aivav to go (travel) up to Luke xix. 28 ; Mark 448 X. 32 (Her. 9, 113), or go up (upon a mountain, into heaven etc.) Matt. V. 1 ; xiv. 23 ; Mark iii. 13 (Herod. 1, 12, 16 ; Plat. Alcib. 1, 117 b. ; Dio C. 89, 97), dva^Xeireiv Matt. xiv. 19 (Mark vii. 34 ; Luke ix. 16) Acts xxii. 13, dvd'yeiv Matt. iv. 1 ; Luke ii. 22 ; Acts XX. 3 (Herod. 7, 10, 15), dva\ap,l3dveadai, Mark xvi, 19, dva- TriirreLV Luke xiv. 10, dvacfyepeiv Matt. xvii. 1 ; Luke xxiv. 51, avw^^copelv Matt. ii. 14 ; iv. 12 etc., dvep^ecrOau Jno. vi. 3 ; Gal. i. 18. b) 7rpo9, principally when the point at which the motion ter- minates is a person ; as, dva/Salvetv irpo^ rov irarepa Jno. xx. 17, dvaKdpTTTeiv Matt. ii. 12, dva'iTep,'jreLV Luke xxiii. 7 (dvaj3\e7r. 7rp6a9 rivof; (Sus. 22), cf. Her. 6, 40 and frequently ; e'/c occurs after this verb merely to denote locality in Acts xix. 16 iK(f)vyelv ex rov ockov, cf. Sir. xxvii. 20. 5) The construction of verbs compounded with iv is very sim- ple : when they signify direction to (towards) something, they are followed by etep€ad 6em to bring to God 1 Pet. iii. 18 (in Sept. 7rpo frequently), irpo'^KkiveaOal rivi to attach one's self to Acts v. 36 of. 7rpo<;e-)(eiv rivi Heb. vii. 13 ; Acts xvi. 14, 'Kpo but rarely repeat that preposi- tion Col. ii. 13 (cru^cooTTotetj/), or take instead of it fierd (Weber, Demosth. 210) Matt. xxv. 19 (avvaipeLv), 2 Cor. viii. 18 (^avfnri/M iretv), Matt. xx. 2 (^av/xcficovelv^ , xvii. 3 (o-uXXaXeti/), Mark xiv. 54 ; 453 they are most frequently construed with the Dat. alone, instances of which occur on nearly every page of the N. T. (also in 1 Cor. xiii. 6 ; Jas. ii. 22, not in Rom. vii. 22). In classical Greek this construction is almost the only one used. Acts i. 26 a-ir/KaTe^jrr}- La-6ri /MCTa rdv evheKa diroaToXwv is a pregnant expression. 16) Of the verbs compounded with viro none repeat the prepo- sition ; but when they denote direction towards (^virdjeiv, inroarpe- (f>€iv etc.) they take ek or tt/oo?, and when the vtto means under, as in uTTOTrXeti/, they are used as transitives. 17) Verbs componnded with irrrep are for the most part used absolutely. Only vTrepevrvyxdveiv repeats virep Rom. viii. 26 (var.), cf. Judith V. 21 ; Sir. xxxvi. 27 ; and virep<^povelv is construed with irapd in Rom. xii. 3. ' Tirep^aiveLv in 1 Thess. iv. 6 and xnrepLhdv in Acts xvii. 30 are used transitively in a figurative sense. Note. The N. T. contains no decided instance of the usage, not very rare in Greek authors, according to which the preposition of a compound verb influences also a second verb (Franke, Dem. p. 30). §53. CONJUNCTIONS. 1. Conjunctions, particles designed to connect words and sen- tences, classify themselves according to the various species of 55 434 §53. CONJUNCTIONS. connection, which are the same in all cultivated languages and are 385 eight in number (Krii. 308) ; cf. O. Jahn, grammaticor. gr. de ^ ^ conjunctionibus doctrina Giyph. 1847. The primitive conjunctions are monosyllabic : Kai, rot, re, Se, fieVf 404 ovv. Many are obviously derived from pronouns or adjectives : 7th ed, ore, oTfc, <»cat never occurs in the N. T. before the Imperative to imply urgency (Hoogeveen, doctr. partic. I. 538 sqq. ; Har- tung I. 148). All the instances formerly alleged in support of this usage are of a dififerent nature. In Matt, xxiii. 32 the *cai is consecutive : ye profess to be sons etc., fill ye up then etc. In Luke xii. 29 Kat denotes also or and (consequently). In Mark xi. 29 Kai is and ; in 1 Cor. xi. 6 also. The strengthening kox after interrogative?, as in Rom. viii. 24 o yap 40T )3A€7r€t Tis, Ti Koi (kiril,u ; why doth he yet hope for ? is reducible to the '^^^ ^ sense of also. h. Kat never occurs strictly as adversative. In the first place, passages in which »cai ov, koi fi-q (Fr. Mr. p. 31), koL owScis, etc. occurs — Matt. xi. 17 ; ggg xii. 39 ; xxvi. 60 ; Mark i. 22 ; vii. 24 ; ix. 18 ; Jno. iii, 11, 32 ; vii. 30 6th ed.' (on the contrary, vs. 44) ; x. 25 ; xiv. 30 ; Acts xii. 19 ; Col. ii. 8, etc. — must be set aside, as in these the contrast lies in the negation, and is neither strengthened by hi nor weakened by a simple kox (Schaef. Dem. I. 645). Even in such sentences as Mark xii. 12 c^tJtow avrov Kpar^crat k. i(f>o^-qOr](Tav Tov o)(Xov, 1 Thess. ii. 18 r)6e\rjaafiev iXOtiv Trpos v/aSs -. . Kat ivcKoipev rjfia^ 6 o-aravas, Jno. vii. 28 ; 1 Jno. v. 19, the writer probably viewed the two particulars as co-existing side by side, though we are more inclined to emphasize the opposition. And in Acts x. 28 ; Matt. xx. 10 (the first supposed that they would receive more ; and they also received every man a denarion) we also employ and to give prominence to an unexpected result, see above. No one now will think it strange that in 1 Cor. xii. 4, 5, 6 8i and Kat are used alternately. Lastly, in 1 Cor. xvi. 9 two circum- stances (one favorable and one unfavorable) detaining Paul in Ephesus are united ; Kat therefore is the simple copula.' c. The epexegetical, more closely defining, Kat namely (Hm. Philoct. 458 1408 ; Bremi, Demosth. p. 179 ; cf. Vc. Fritzsche, quaest. Lucian. p. 9 ; Jacob, Lucian. Alex. p. 33 sq. ; Weber, Demosth. p. 438) is primarily only and (and indeed), Jno. i. 16 out of his fulness have we all received, namely (that is) grace for grace, 1 Cor. iii. 5 ; xv. 38 ; Eph. vi. 18 ; Gal. vi. 16 ; Heb. xi. 17 ; Acts xxiii. 6. But this force has been attributed to Kat in too many passages : in Matt. xiii. 41 ; xvii. 2 ; xxi. 5 Kat is simply and. ^ So early a scholar as Hoogeveen perceived that but (however) is not the proper meaning of Kai : sciant non ex se sed ex oppositorum membror. natura hanc (notionem) nactam esse koI particulam (doctr. particul. I. 533). 438 . §53. CONJUNCTIONS. In Mark xi. 28 the true reading [sustained also by Cod. Sin.] is probably ij. In Matt. iii. 5 to render kol t) 7repi;>(a)pos tov 'lopSdvov by namely the country about the Jordan, would be to join an incongruous adjunct to t] 'lovSata, as the two geographical notion* do not exactly coincide nor is the former comprehended in the latter. The phraseology resembles, All Hesse and the Rhine-region ; all Baden and Breisgau, cf. Krii. 318. In the expres- sion 6(.os Kal Trarrjp the meaning of koI is simply and (at the same time), not namely, that is. d. It may be doubted whether kuI ever signifies especially (Bornem. Luc. 78 ; Fr. Mr. p. 11) when to a general term one that is special and strictly speaking already included in the former is added : in Mark i. 5 i$eTrop€V€To Traaa rj louSata X^P** '^'^'' ^''' i^po(To\viJUTat ttclvtcs, xvi. 7 the specification is made prominent by its very position, but /cat simply signifies and. Cf. Heb. vi. 10. On the other hand, when a special term precedes, Ktti is sometimes put immediately before the general expression which includes the former, as in Matt. xxvi. 59 oi ap^upti's koX 61 Trpeafivrspoi. 408 ''"■' ''■o a-vveSpLov oXov and (in one word, to sum up) the whole sanhe^ 7th ed. drim^ see Fr. Mt. 786 ; Mr. 652 ; cf. Vc. Fritzsche, quaest. Lucian. p. 67 , Stallb. Plat. Gorg. p. 83 and rep. II. 212. Kat stands at the close of an , entire exposition (before the final result) in Heb. iii. 19 (and according to some Codd. in 1 Cor. v. 13). e. When xai signifies also (which is not the case e.g. in Eph. v. 2),^ it 389 may be sometimes translated by precisely, just, very (eben, ja) (Hm. Vig. Itlied. 837; Poppo, Thuc. III. II. 419) : Heb. vii. 26 toiowos yap r]fx7v Kal hrpiTTfv dp;^i€pevs, octios etc. for such a high priest just became us, vi. 7 ; 1 Pet. ii. 8 (Jno. viii. 25), Col. iii. 15 ; 2 Cor. iii. 6 ; 2 Tim. i. 12. Else- where it might be rendered by vicissim 1 Cor. i. 8; Phil.ii. 9; but also is quite sufficient. f. When Kttt occurs in the consequent clause after a particle of time (ore, u)?), as in Luke ii. 21 ore iTrXrjo-Oi^aav 17/xcpai oktw tov TrcpiTe/xctv avTov, Kal tKXrjOri to ovofxa avrov 'l-qaov?, or vii. 12 ws ^yyio-e rrj vrvXy t^s ttoXcws, Kal I80V i$eKopi(€To Tc^vr/icais, Acts i. 10 ; X. 17, the proper construction 459 would be : lirX-qa-O. Se r/fiipai . . . kol iKXrjOr], yjyyiac rrj -rrvXrj . . . Kal i$eKOfju On the other hand, in Jno. i. 19 we must not (as even BCrus. does) join OT« aTTio-TetXav . . . Kal oiiioXoyqcre, but otc aTrea-reiXav etc. is to be connected with avTi; ccttiv r] fiaprupca etc., see Liicke in loc. On Kat commencing a parenthesis, e.g. Rom. i. 13 (Fr. in loc), see § 62, 1. On Kal yap see no. 8 p. 448 ; and on koi Se, no. 7 p. 443. In Luke xix. 42 and Acts ii. 18 we find Ktti yc et quidem, and that without a word intervening, a usage that does not occur in the earlier written language. As to later authors, see Klotz, Devar. II. 318. 1 As to KOI also after relatives (Heb. i. 2 ; 1 Cor. xi. 23, etc.), see Klotz, Devar. II. 636 ; but, in general, Kru. 319. The exact meaning of the also, even, must always be gathered from the context. Koi is repeated several times in succession by way of climax in 1 Cor. xv. 1 f. §53. CONJUNCTIONS. 439 4. Connection in the form of correlation takes place, when two words or clauses are joined as corresponding to each other,^ by means of kul . . . kuI (re ... re Acts xxvi. 16) or re . . . Kal. The first formula (/cat . . . KaC) is used wlien the writer from the very first conceives both members as co-ordinate, et . . . et (both . . . and^ as loell . . . as) ; the latter, when he appends to the first member a second (et . . . que, not only . . . hut also} Klotz, Devar. II. 740 ; Matt. X. 28 6 hvvd^evo koI to ^pe(f>o'i etc., Krii. 327. In the former case, the members are combined as into one whole (or compact group) ; in the latter, the second member is to be viewed as something added to the first, while the respective im- portance of each is not thez'eby pronounced upon (Rost 134, 5 c.) ; of. Acts iv. 27 ; v. 24 ; Rom. i. 14 ; Heb. xi. 32 etc. In the course of lengthened enumerations, groups (pairs) are thus formed by 409 re . . . KUi (. . . Kai), as in Heb. xi. 32 BapaK re koI XajMy^rMv k. '^''"^ 'Ie6(3r]Tpd re koI a-qfxela, Acts ix. 18, or are separated by one or two of the connected words, as in Luke xxiii. 12 o re IltAar. /cat 6 'Hpu}8r]<;, Jno. ii. 15 ; Acts ii. 43 ttoWo. re repara Kai crT^/Atta, x. 39 Iv t€ t^ X^P^- '''• '^ovSaloiv Koi Itpovaak-qfi, Rom. i. 20 ; Acts xxviii. 23 etc., in which case the article, preposition, or adjec- tive serves also for the second member. Otherwise in Phil. i. 7 Iv re rots Sccr/Aots /xov Koi iv ttJ airoXoyuq. etc. (In Acts xix. 27 ; xxi. 28 we find t€ Kai in one and the same clause, que etiam, a combination rare in Greek authors, though not to be rejected.) ^ Such passages as Mark ii. 26 koL titoKtv koX to7s avv axnf oZtriv, Jno. v. 27, where K(d . .. Kai are not parallel to each other but the second signifies also, do not come under this head, cf. Soph. Philoct. 274. 440 §53. CONJUNCTIONS. 5. Correlation is brought out with greatest precision in the form oi comparison: (09 (JovToi 41 2 yiav \aXovfjL€v iv rots tcAccois, (TOuiv 8c ov tov aiuivo? tovtou, iii. 15 ; Rom. iii. 22 ; ix. 30 ; Phil. ii. 8, or as a complete sentence in itself, as in Jno. vi. 10 ; ix. 14 ; xi. 5 ; xxi. 1 ; Gal. ii. 2 ; Eph. v. 32 ; Jas. i. 6 — and where, after a parenthesis or digression, the train of thought is resumed (Hm. Vig. 846 sq. ; Klotz II. 376 ; Poppo, Xen. Cyr. p. 141 sq.) ; 2 Cor. X. 2 ; ii. 12 ; v. 8 ; Eph. ii. 4 ; cf. Plat. Phaed. p. 80 d. ; Xen. An. 7, 2, 18; Pans. 3, 14, 1 (autem Cic. off. 1, 43 ; Liv. 6, 1, 10). In an explanation which is at the same time a correction, such as 1 Cor. i. 16, the adversative force of the particle is still perceptible. Sometimes Sc introduces a climax, as in Heb. xii. 6, or indicates successive steps in the discourse, as in 2 Pet. i. 5-7. As to 8c' in the apodosis [Acts xi. 17], see "Weber, Demosth. p. 387, particularly after participles (supplying the place of the protasis) as in Col. i. 21 (Klotz II. 374), see Jacobs, Aelian. anim. I. 26 praef. Ac used several times in succession in didactic discourse must be interpreted according to the requirements of each particular case, as in 1 Pet. iii. 14 sqq. (the third 8c, however, is dropped by Lchm.) see Wies- inger. In narration often several clauses are connected together simply by Sc, as in Acts viii. 1—3, 7—9. Kai. . . Si (in one and the same clause), as often in the best authors ("Weber, 4-1 o Demosth. p. 220), is equivalent to et . . . vero, atque etiam, and also (Krii. 7tk«L 319 "Kat means also ; 8c, and" ; Hartung 1. 187 f. maintains the reverse), 464 Matt. xvi. 18 ; Heb. ix. 21 ; Jno. vi. 51 ; xv. 27 ; 1 Jno. i. 3 ; Acts xxii. 29 ; 2 Pet. i. 5 ; Schaef. Long. p. 349 sq. ; Poppo, Thuc. IIL IL 154 ; Ellendt, Arrian. Al. 1. 137. The opposite phrase 8c Kai (2 Pet. ii. 1) means but also. As to fiiv (weakened from /xtJv*), there is nothing peculiar in N. T. usage, for fjiiv ... 8c ... 8c in Jude 8 (not in 2 Cor. viii. 17) requires no explanation. "Where, however, /xcv . . . aXXd correspond, as in Rom. xiv. 20 etc. (cf. Iliad 1, 22 sqq. ; Xen. C. 7, 1, 16), the second clause is made more strongly prominent, Klotz, Devar. II. 3. Further, when /xcv . . . Kat correspond, as ift Acts xxvii. 21 f., there exists an unmistakable anacol- uthon, Hm. "Vig. 841 ; Maetzner, Antiph. 257. As to fiiv without Sc following, see § 63, 1. 2, e. p. 575. Finally, on the unauthorized insertion of fi€v before Sc (Wahl, Clav. p. 307), see Fr. Rom. II. 423, cf. Rost 731. ^ In Greek authors, also, St occurs frequently, as is well kno%vn, in narration. - This occurs in the X. T. only in the pure Greek combintition ^ ^-fiv Heb. vi. 14 (and even there not without var.), used to introduce an oath (Hartung, IL 376, 388). 444 §53. CONJUNCTIONS. Antithesis expressed by means of yet, however, is of very rare occurrence in the N. T. John uses ftevroi most frequently where others would have employed a simple 8e. He once strengthens jxivroL by prefixing o/aws (xii. 42). Elsewhere o/aws is used but twice, — by Paul, 1 Cor. xiv. 7; Gal. iii. 15. We find /caiVotye in Acts xiv. 17, referring to something that 394 precedes, and meaning although, quamquam [cf. also Jno. iv. 2]. In the 8th ed. N. T. there is nothing peculiar in the use of aXka ye (Luke xxiv. 21 ; 1 Cor. ix. 2 etc.) hut yet, yet certainly, Klotz, Devar. II. 24 sq., except that both particles are placed in immediate succession, which could scarcely occur in classic authors, Klotz, as above, p. 15. The correlation though . . . yet, is expressed by ei /cat . . . aXKa in Col. ii. 5 d yap koL ttj crapKi aTretfii, dAAa tw Trvtvftari avv vfuv elfiL, and by ci xai . . . ye in Luke xviii.4. In general, ci kui means if also, si etiam, quamquam (designat- ing something as matter of fact) ; but koI el even if, etiam si (putting something merely as a case supposed), cf. Hm. Vig. 832 ; Klotz, Devar. IL 519 sq. 8. The temporal relation of clauses is expressed by &>?, ore (orav), eirei, or by €co<;, fie^t, irpiv (§ 41 b. 3^ p. 296 sq. and § 60). An inference is indicated by ovv, roivvv, mre (^fievovv') , and more sharply by apa, Bl6 (odev^, roiyapovv, (ovkovv only in Jno. xviii. 37). The causal relation is denoted by otl, yap {Bloti, eVet). while w?, Kadco'i, KadoTi, (subjoining a clause) are rather explanatory than argumentative. Lastly, a condition is expressed by ei (etVe, eiirep^y edv, § 41 b. 2, p. 291 sq. a. The most usual and most strictly syllogistic of the illative particles is ow, [Val. Chr. Fr. Rost iib. Ableitung, Bedeutung u. Gebrauch der 414 Partikel ovv. Gott. 1859. 4to.]. Its reference can be discovered with more 7the(l, or less facility from the context in each instance, e.g. Matt. iii. 8, 10 ; 465 xii. 12 ; 1 Cor. xiv. 11 (see Mey. in loc.) ; Matt, xxvii. 22 ; Acts i. 21 ; Rom. vi. 4. But like the German nun (Eng. then, now), it is very often used to indicate the mere continuance of a narration (when what follows depends upon what precedes chronologically merely), Jno. iv. 5, 28 ; xiii. 6; cf. Schaef. Plutarch. IV. 425. Moreover, like the German also {therefore, thus) or nun (now), it is used especially after a digression to resume the train of thought (Heind. Plat. Lys. p. 52 ; Bornem. Xen. Mem. p. 285 ; Jacob, Lucian. Alex. p. 42 ; Dissen, Demosth. cor. p. 413 ; Poppo, Thuc. III. IV. 738) 1 Cor. viii. 4 ; xi. 20, or when a writer proceeds to explain, (even by examples) as in Rom. xii. 20. *Apa accordingly, quae cum ita sint, rebus ita comparatis, serves, no doubt, primarily to introduce leviorem conclusionem, as it is used principally in conversation and the language of ordinary intercourse (Klotz, Devar. II. 167, 717) ; but in later Greek the use of this particle was extended, and individual writers, at least, employ it to indicate even a strictly logical inference. It inclines towards §53. CONJUNCTIONS. 445 its primary import when used in the apodosis (after a conditional clause) (Matt..xii. 28 ; 2 Cor. v. 15 ; Gal. iii. 29 ; Heb. xii. 8 ; cf. Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 2 ; 8, 4, 7) ; so also when it expresses an inference from another man's averment (cf. 1 Cor, v. 10 ; xv. 15, where it may be rendered by indeed^ that u,Klotz 169 ; cf Stallb. Plat. rep. I. 92 ; Hoogeveen, doctrina particul. I. 109 sq.) or proceeding (Luke xi. 48). In the N.T. Paul employs this particle most frequently, especially when analyzing the import of a quota- tion from the O. T., Rom. x. 17 ; Gal. iii. 7 (cf Heb. iv. 9), or summing up a discussion, Rom. viii. 1 (Gal. iv. 31 var.) ; though in these cases he as often uses ovv. In questions apa refers either to an assertion or fact previously mentioned, Matt. xix. 25 ; Luke viii. 25 ; xxii. 23 ; Acts xii. 18 ; 2 Cor. i. 17, or to some thought existing in the mind of the questioner Matt, xviii. 1, and which suggests itself more or less distinctly to the 395 reader. It then signifies, such being the case, under these circumstances, 6th el rebus ita comparatis, and sometimes, of course, obviously, Klotz II. 176. Likewise ei apa si forte Mark xi. 13; Acts viii. 22 and cVct apa 1 Cor. vii. 14 may be referred to this signification (Klotz, as above, 178). 'Apa ovv combined, and that as the first words of a sentence (see, on the other hand, Hm. Vig. 823), so then, hinc ergo (where o^a. is illative and ovv continuative, cf Hoogeveen, doctr. part. I. 129 sq. ; II. 1002), is a favorite expression of Paul's, Rom, v. 18 ; vii. 3 ; viii. 12 ; ix. 16, etc. I know of no instances of this combination in Greek authors : in Plat. rep. 5, p. 462 a. the recent texts read (in the question) ap ovv, cf. Schneider in loc. ; Klotz, Devar. II. 180. Paul and Luke employ 8io (8t' o) most fre- quently. Toi'vw assuredly now, therefore, and Toiyapovv (strengthened roiydp, Klotz II. 738) wherefore then, are rare. As to wstc and its construction, see p. 301. b. 'On refers in general to some matter of fact under consideration, and hence signifies both that and because, quod ; in the latter case, it is some- 466 times rendered still more forcible by a preceding 8ia tovto (proptereaquod). 415 Occasionally it is used elliptically, Luke xi. 18 ?/ Satan also is divided '^^^ against himself, how will his kingdom stand? (I ask this) because ye say, by Beelzebub etc, ; i. 25 ; Mark iii. 30 (Acta Apocr. p, 57) ; Bornem. Luc. p. 6. Likewise in Jno. ii. 18, where it amounts to the same thing to trans- late it in consideration of the fact that {seeing that), Fr. Mt. p. 248 sq. But in Matt, v. 45 on simply means because. (Sometimes it seems doubtful whether on means because or that ; the decision then rests on hermeneutical grounds.) The compound Stdn (chiefly found in later Greek) for this reason that, or simply because, Fr. Rom. I. 57 sq., is used most frequently by Paul and Luke. Tap is in cultivated prose the most common causal particle, and corres- ponds to our for. Originally (it is contracted from yc and apa, ap), it expresses in general a corroboration or assent (ye) in reference to what precedes (apa !) (see Hartung I. 457 ff. ; Schneider, Vorles. I. 219 ; Klotz, 446 § 53. CONJUNCTIONS. Devar. II, 232 f.') : sane igitur, certe igitur, sane pro rebus comparatis {enim in its primary import), and from this fundamental signification arose its causal force. In consequence of its original signification yap serves — passing over what is familiar — first of all and very naturally a) to introduce explanatory clauses, whether they appear in the form of supplementary statements (sometimes of digressions) Mark v. 42 ; xvi. 4; 1 Cor. xvi. 5 ; liom. vii. 1, or blend with the current of the discourse 2 Cor. iv. 11 ; Rom. vii. 2 ; Jas. i. 24 ; ii. 2 ; Heb. ix. 2 ; Gal. ii. 12. Tap is then to be rendered by that is, Klotz 234 sq. Explanatory in a wide sense every confirmation or proof (even Heb. ii. 8) may be said to be which we introduce by for (though the German ja comes nearer than denn to the primary import of yap Hartung I. 463 ff.) : Matt. ii. 20 go into the land of Israel; for they are dead etc. This is especially the case in those passages where it was supposed that something is to be supplied before yap for^ 396 Matt. ii. 2 : where is the born king of the Jews ? (he that is born king of Ithed. the Jews ?) for we have seen his star, xxii. 28 ; 1 Cor. iv. 9 ; 2 Cor. xi. 5 ; Phil. iii. 20 ; 1 Pet. iv. 15 ; 2 Pet. iii. 5. Hence what Klotz says p. 240 is in point : Nihil supplendum est ante enuntiationem earn, quae infertur per partic. yap, sed ut omnis constet oratio, postea demum aliquid tacita cogitatione adsumendum erit, sed nihil tamen alieni, verum id ipsum, quod ea sententia quae praecedit yap particulae enuntiavit (for we have seen his star, — he must have been born, therefore, somewhere). Likewise, 467 b) in replies and rejoinders (Klotz p. 240 sq.) the original import of A-tQ yap is prominent ; for in Jno. ix. 30 iv yap tovtw Oavfxaa-rov lariv etc. the 7th ed. reply refers primarily to the statement of the Pharisees in vs. 29 (apa), and then subjoins an affirmation (yc) : sane quidem mirum est etc. in this at least, it is assuredly wonderfxd. So also in 1 Cor. viii. 1 1 ; ix. 9, 10 ; xiv. 9 ; 1 Thess. ii. 20, in all which cases nothing is to be supplied before yap.^ Equally unnecessary is it to supply anything in exhortations (Klotz 242) Jas. i. 7 : for let not that man think etc. ; here apa refers back to 6 yap StaKptvd/xevos etc., and yc combines a corroboration with the inference. On the other hand, 1 Si sequimur originem ipsam ac natnram particulae -yi-p, hoc dicitur conjunctis istis particulis : Sane pro rebus comparatis, ac primum adfirmatur res pro potestate particulae ye, deinde refertur eadem ad antecedentia per vim particulae &pa. 2 This practice of supplying something has been carried to an extent quite pedantic, e.g. Matt. iv. 18 ; xxvi. 11 ; Mark iv. 25 ; v. 42 ; 2 Cor. ix. 7. If it were maintained that between the propositions, " He makes clothes, for he is a tailor," we must supply, " One need not wonder at this," every body would regard it as ridiculous. As to the Latin nam, see Hand, Tursell. IV. 12sqq. ' In Acts xvi. 37 naO\os ?<^ij* S^elpavrei rifjias Srnxotrla aKaraKpirovs, hvBpdiirovs 'Pwfiaiovs vvipxovTas e$a\ov (Is ;7r£/3 forasmuch as, since now (Aristot. Phys. 8, 5 ; Dion. Hal. 2, 72 ; Philo ad Caj. § 25 and (iised by the best Greek authors, see Ilartung, Partikell. I. S. 342 sq.) , occurs in th e N. T. only injjuke i. 1.] Ka^ws and. (1)5, in appended clauses, denote explanation rather than strict confirmation, and resemble the Latin (quoniam) quippe, siquidem, and the antiquated (Germ.) sintemal. On ws (in 2 Tim. i. 3 ; Gal. vi. 10 ; Matt. vi. 12 it means as) cf. Ast, Plat. Polit. p. 336 ; Stallb. Plat, sympos. p. 135 ; Lehmann, Lucian. I. 457 ; III. 425 etc. 898 As to £Or) and what do I wish ? (answer) if it were (only) already kindled ; see Mey. [in his earlier eds.] in loc. With regard to the Aorist, see Klotz I.e. : si de aliqua §53. CONJUNCTIONS. 449 re sermo est, de qua, quum non facta sit olim, nunc nobis gratum fore significamus, si facta esset illo tempore. Such a question, however, seems rather artificial in the mouth of Jesus. Of the objections which Mey. brings against the common exposition, How 1 wish that it were already kindled! the second, so far as usage goes, is less forcible than the first. [But Mey. now (4th ed.) acknowledges the common interpretation to be correct.] 9. Final clauses are expressed by means of the conjunctions tm, OTTO)? (ft)7] 8c, as even the leading position of the verb indicates, forms an antithesis to the statement that precedes : all these things happened etc. ; but they were written etc. In 1 Cor. xv. 13 8e is a genuine adversative : if Christ is 422 risen, then the resurrection of the dead is a reality ; but if the resurrection 7th ed. of the dead is not a reality, then (by converse reasoning) neither is Christ risen. Verse 14 contains a further inference : but if Christ is not risen, 402 then etc. The one statement of necessity establishes or invalidates the 6th ed. other. In 2 Pet. i. 13 8c forms the antithesis to the words Kawrcp ct8oTas etc. On Phil. iv. 18 see May. ^ In the sense of namely, that is, both conjunctions coincide : by means of 5e a new clause is annexed which is part of the statement ; while by means of yap a clause is presented as a confirmatory illustration of what precedes. The latter mode of expres- sion is often in substance equivalent to the former , see Hm. Vig.^ p. 845. §53. CONJUNCTIONS. 453 c) Nor does it ever serve as a mere copula or particle of transition : Jilatt. xxi. 3 (Schott) my, the Lord hath need of them ; and straightway he will send them, i.e. these words will not be without effect ; but, on the contrary, he will straightway etc. In Acts xxiv. 17 the narration proceeds by means of 8e to another event. In 1 Cor. xiv. 1 Sc means but : but the SiMKeiv T^v ayaTnjv must not prevent you from ^rjXovv to. ttv. On 2 Cor. ii. 12 Meyer's opinion is more correct than de Wette's ; Paul refers to vs. 4. In 1 Cor. xi. 2 it would be a mistake to regard, as Riick. does, hi as indicating merely the advance to a new topic (Luther has not translated it at all, while Schott renders it by quidem) ; the words connect themselves (directly) with the exhortation immediately preceding, fiLfj.r]TaL jlov ylveaOe : 474 yet (while I thus urge you, I do not mean to blame you) I praise you etc. Likewise in Rom. iv. 3 Luther and many other translators have neglected 8c (at the beginning of a quotation where the Sept. has kou) ; but Paul is probably as little chargeable as James (ii. 23) with having used the adver- sative particle wantonly or without meaning. It renders cttiotcvctc more forcible, not to say almost antithetic. 3. Tap is incorrectly taken a) for the adversative but (Markland, Eur. suppl. vs. 8 ; Elmsley, Eur. Med. 121 ; see, on the other hand, Hm. Vig. 846; Bremi in the n. krit. Journ. IX. 533) : In 2 Cor. xii. 20 I say all that for your edification ; for I fear etc. (this is the very reason that I say it). In Rom. iv. 13 the clause with yap confirms the last words of the preceding verse, €v dxpo/SvcrrCa. IT I or T ecus Tov Trarpo's etc. In Rom. V. 6 f . the first yap simply refers to the fact wjiich attested the love of God (vs. 5), — Christ's dying for the ungodly ; the second yap explains, a eontrario, how death (of the innocent) for the guilty evinces transcendent love ; the third yap substantiates the remark /lidXis inrep SiKaiov etc. 1 Cor. v. 3 means : and ye, have ye not felt yourselves compelled to exclude the man ? for I (for my part), absent in body, . . . have already decided etc. It was, therefore, surely to be expected that ye, who have him before your eyes, would have applied the (milder) punishment of exclusion. Pott understands yap here in the sense of alias! As to 1 Cor. iv. 9 see above, p. 446 a). 2 Cor. xii. 6 is : of myself Twill not boast ; for if I should desire to boast, I shall not be a fool (there- fore, I might do so). In Phil. iii. 20 tjiimv yap etc. stands in closest rela- tion to ol TCL eTTtycia pov. they that mind eartldy things ! (a summary of vs. 19), for our conversation is in heaven (on this very account I warn you against them, vs. 18 f.). In Rom. viii. 6 the clause with yap states the reason why ot Kara trvevfia (vs. 4) to. tov ttv. (f>povovcnv. which is, that the p6vT}p.a T-Jys crapKos leads to death, but the <^pov. tov ttv. to life ; vs. 5, 423 however, is confirmatory of vs. 4. In Col. ii. 1 Bengel had already in- '^^ **'* dicated the correct interpretation. Heb. vii. 12 (Kiihnol: autem) appends the reason for vs. 11: for change in the priestly succession and abolition of the law necessarily go together, see Bleek in loc. 2 Pet. iii. 5 explains 454 § 53. CONJUNCTIONS. (Pott) how such men can come forward with such frivolous assertions as 403 in vss. 3, 4. Heb. xii. 3 enforces the preceding resolution T/3£xa)/xev etc., by 6th ed. reference to the example of Christ. b) for therefore, then : Bengel's remark throws light on Luke xii. 58 : yap saepe ponitur, ubi propositi onem excipit tractatio. 1 Cor. xi. 26 elucidates the expression tU ttjv iixrjv avdfxvrja-Lv vs. 25. In Rom. ii. 28 475 the connection is this : the uncircumcised, who lives agreeably to the law, may convict thee, who, though circumcised, transgressest the law ; for it is not what is external (like circumcision) that constitutes the real Jew. On Heb. ii. 8 see above, p. 447. c) for although: as in Jno. iv. 44 (see Kiihnol) ; but yap is simply ybr; ■n-arpLs can only mean Galilee, vs. 43. d) for on the contrary: 2 Pet. i. 9 (Augusti). Ai might have been used, if the apostle had intended to say : but he, on the contrary, who lacks these (virtues) etc. With yap, the sentence confirms (illustrates) the foregoing ovk apyov^ . . . Xptcrrov eTriyvuxnv a contrario (fxi^) : for he that lacks these, is blind. This interpretation supplies, too, a more forcible reason for the exhortation in vs. 10. e) for dAA' o/xws nevertheless : 2 Cor. xii. 1 (where indeed the reading is extremely uncei'tain ; yet the common reading 8^ is not so decidedly incorrect as Mey. insists) to boast (xi. 22 if.) is not expedient for me surely; for I will {I will, that is to say, Klotz, Devar. II. 235) now come to visions and revelations of the Lord. Paul in this passage contrasts (cf. vs. 5) boasting of himself (of his own merits) with boasting of the divine marks of distinction accorded him. Of these last he will boast, vs. 5. Accordingly, the meaning is : yet glorying in self is not expedient ; for now will I come to a subject for glorying that excludes all self-glorification and renders it superfluous. f ) for the mere copula : In Rom. iii. 2 irpoyrov fikv yap commences the proof of the statement voXv Kara Travra rpoTrov. Acts ix. 1 1 inquire in the house of Judas for Saul of Tarsus ; for, behold, he prayeth (thou wilt therefore find him there), and he hath seen a vision (which has prepared him to receive thee), cf. Bengel in loc. In Acts xvii. 28 tov yap y€voip€Ti vfi€Lri to iravra rj^ rcreA. (so Mey.), or with Liicke and de Wette to the following Xcyet ; in the latter case Iva denotes a purpose attributed by John to Jesus. As to Jno. xvi. 24 see Liicke. In Rom. xi. 31 Iva does not indicate the design of the aTrct^ovvrcs, but God's decree which linked itself to this unbelief cf. vs. 32, to bring them salvation (not as merited, but) out of mercy. In connection with the divine plan, then, unbelief is designed etc., cf. also vs. 11. In the 408 same way is v. 20 f. to be explained, and probably also 2 Cor. i. 9. The '^''^ ^ same teleological view clearly finds place in Jno. xii. 40 in a quotation from the O. T. Rom. ix. 11 only requires attention to be plain ; and it is fairly surprising that Reiche should still take Iva as ecbatic. The meaning 481 of 2 Cor. V. 4 is obvious ; and it passes comprehension how even Schott could render iva by ita ut. In 1 Cor. v. 5 ct? 6X^6 pov t^5 (TapK66rj. But the words probably mean, in order that he suffer ; this must be understood as an answer to the question, and ipx'^rat or iXevacrai supplied before it. Nobody will be misled by the passage which Palairet (obs. 127) has quoted from Soph. Aj. 38o ovx opas, Lv el kukov ; where iva is an adverb. (Some take ottoj? for oTt, (OS in Xen. C. 3, 3, 20 ; 8, 7, 20, see Poppo in loc.) Many render also ottws in order that erroneously by ita ut (Klihnol, Act. 129 ; Tittm. Synon. 11. 55, 58). In Luke ii. 35 (BCrus. ?) it is hardly necessary to refer to the Hebrew teleology to discover the meaning of the conjunction. Acts iii. 19 is plain if ottojs aTroa-TiiXri tov Xp. vs. 20 be understood of the opening of the kingdom of heaven, as vs. 21 requires. What was remarked in reference to Iva p. 457 sq. elucidates Matt, xxiii. 35. Philem. 6 is connected with vs. 4: I make mention of thee in my prayers^ in order that etc. Meyer's objections to this reference are groundless. In Heb. ii. 9 (Kiihnol) the clause with ottws receives so much light from 431 vs. 10 that scarcely any expositor is now likely to render the ottcos by ita Ithed. ut. On ottws TrXrjpuiO-^ see above, p. 461. 'fis as a particle of comparison always means in the N. T. as, not so (for ovT(j}<;), as in 1 Pet. iii. 6 Pott might have learnt even from Bengel. Nowhere also in the N. T. is there a reason for writing it ws — a form, moreover, very rare (Heind. and Stallb. Plat. Protag. c. 15) in prose writers (with the exception of the Ionic). In Heb. iii. 11 ; iv. 3 (Sept.) 0)9 may be rendered by that, so that ; in which sense it is sometimes used with the Indicative even in good Greek authors (Her. 1, 163 ; 2, 135). On Mark xiii. 34 and similar passages, see Fr. ; to assume there with Mey. an anacoluthon is quite unnecessary. 484 §54. ADVERBS. 1. Adverbs are so indispensable in defining closely relations of quality, that we can easily understand how it is that the N. T. wri- ters, though inferior to the Greek prose authors as respects the use of conjunctions, have yet mastered pretty well the resources of the Greek tongue in adverbs, considered extensively ; it is only when it is viewed intensively^ i.e. as respects the finer shades of thought conveyed by several of the simple adverbs (e.g. av) and by adverbial compounds, that their usage betrays them to be foreigners who did not feel the need of such refinements. Derivative (adjectival) adverbs are the more numerous in the N. T., because the later Greek had derived from many adjectives 411 adverbial forms previously unknown, and had adopted into ordi^ 6th ed. iiary prose other words of the class which had hitherto been used §54, ADVERBS. 463 only in poetry. Cf. aKaCpw^ (Sir. xxxii. 4), dva^i(o<; (2 Mace. xiv. 42), dv6fjuo<; (2 Mace. viii. 17), dirorofiox; (since Polyb.), €KT€V(o<; (likewise ; Lob. Phryn. 311), d-rrepicr'irdaTW'i (likewise ; Lob. 415), eroi/jiQ)^ (for which the Attic language at least used e'l eToifiov), evdv/MQ)ai TTavrwi avfjUTroaia av/juiroa-ia catervatim,{cL Exod. yiii. 14:,') ys. 40 dveTreaov IT paacal rrrpaaiai areolatim, see § 37, 3. These words are strictly in apposition, cl". Luke ix. 14. What Georgi in his Vindic. p. 340 has collected is of another sort. 412 When a simple accusative of a noun (substantive) is used adverbially, 6tli ed. this use arises strictly from an abbreviated construction (Hm. Vig. 883). Besides the well-known x°^P'-^^ under this head come a. Tr]v dpxr'jv throughout, altogether (Vig. 723), which is probably so to be taken also in Jno. viii. 25 (see Lucke's careful examination of the passage) : altogether what I also say unto you (I am entirely what in my discourses I profess to be). The context furnishes no ground whatever for preferring the interrogative to the categoric interpretation ; Meyer's exposition is complicated, and appears to me least satisfactory of all. b. aKfjiiqv used in later Greek for m, as in Matt. xv. 16 ; see Lob. Phryn. 123 sq. Adverbs may be joined not only to verbs, but also to nouns, as in 1 Cor. 433 ^"' ^1 '^"^ vireplSoXrjv oSov ifuv SeLKWfit, see no. 2, and 1 Cor. vii. 35 Trpos 7th ed. TO ivirdpeSpov tw KvpLm dTTipicnrdcrTW's. 2. The adverbial notion is sometimes expressed concretely as adjectival, and subjoined to the substantive (Mtth. 1001 ; Kiihner 48611. 382). This takes place not only when it is to the substantive (not to the verb) that a predicate (logically) belongs (though in German an adverb is used),^ but also where such reference to the substantive appears to be more favorable to perspicuity : ^ Acts xiv. 10 dvdaTqOi iirl tou? TToSa? aov 6p66varrivi8i(0'i^ , Acts xxviii.13 Sevrepaloi rfKOojjbev elviBio<; Thuc. 6,49; 8, 28, suhitus irrupit Tac. hist. 3, 47); yet with other 41 3 adjectives not uncommon : Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 55 amo^ TrapeXavvcov ^ rov iTTTTOv . . . i^av^o'i KareOedro etc. 6, 1, 45 ev olB\ on aafxevo^ av 7rpoL\ovai, 7r/)09evx6o-^ai they love to pray (cf. Ael. 14, 37 t\a> ra arfaXfjiara . . . opav^ Wetst. and Fr. in loc, Luke xxiii. 12, see Bornem. Whether Oeko) also {idekco ? Hm. 489 Soph. Philoct. p. 238) is used as a finite verb to denote the adver- bial notion gladly, with pleasure, cheerfully (sponte), has lately been questioned, (that the Partic. of deXco is so used is well known, cf. Mey. on Col. ii. 18) .^ And in fact Jno. viii. 44 ra<; iirtdufiia^; 415 Tov Trarpo? vfiwv diXere TToteti/ must be rendered: the lusts o/'Wlied. your father ye will (are resolved and inclined to} do (carry into 436 effect), either in general (your hearts impel you to follow the will of ' Satan) or because ye go about to kill me (vs. 40). The Plural here, which troubles de Wette, has already been explained by Lticke. In Jno. vi. 21, also, the interpretation given by Kiihnol and others is necessary only in case an attempt (for which there is no author- ity) is made to harmonize the narrative of this evangelist with that of Matt, and Mark. At the same time this must be admitted, that rjdeXov iroi'^aat, they purposed, were inclined, to do ( Arist. polit. 6, 8) when from the context it is obvious tbat the sense is not confined to the mere act of will,^ may signify they did it designedly, spontaneously, gladly, e.g. Isocr. Callim. 914 ot Bv^rvxvcrao'V'i t»7? 7r6Xe(oriTe Kol yivTja-de etc. and Acts vii. 42 earpey^ev 6 debv koX /3ia(ro^€vos equivalent to fiia (IseKOdv. 2 The Hebrew verbs which when placed before other finite verbs are taken adverbially, express either an idea considered independently, as Job xix. 3 ye are not ashamed and ye deafen me, or a general idea which is more precisely defined by one more special, as : he made haste and ran to meet the Philistines ; he turned hack and dug etc. In like nuinner 1 Sam. ii. 3 ; which poetic passage, however, cannot be used in explaining the prose of the N. T. 8 Gebser gains nothing by appealing to Jas. i. 11 and iii. 14 in support of this inter- pretation. In i. 11 wfTuKtv 6 ?i\ios . . . koI i^-fipave expresses the rapid scorching of the herbage more aptly than avardKas f^-fipave, cf. veni vidi vici, not veniens vidi, or veni vidensque vici. To rise and to scorch is one act ; not, ' after he is risen, he sets about scorching.' It is precisely by expressing each of the moments by a finite verb that their rapid succession is more graphically represented. The second passage, iii. 14 /i^ KaraKavxaa-ee Kol »|/euSf(r0e koto rfyj aK-nOeias, I render (and Wiesinger concurs with me) do not glory and lie against the truth; Karh ttjj oA. belongs properly to Kara- KavxaffOai (Rom. xi. 18). But the apostle to explain KuraK. thrusts in forthwith a stronger expression. By resolving it into /u^ KaroKaux'^Mf'"'' ^dSfffOe Kara ttjs a\7]0. we gain only the tautology kotoi t. oA. i^euSeo-Oai, while the Kara in Kora/foux- is wholly neglected. §54. ADVERBS. 471 local sense la)9 ew, eay; eirl; yet cf. Diod. S. 1, 27 ew? mKeavov), also with names of persons (even unto, to Luke iv. 42 ; Acts ix. 38 ; cf. Lament, iii. 39), %ft>/Oi'? (Jno. sv. 5 separated ft^om, firj fievovret iv ifioL VS. 4, cf. Xen. C. 6, 1, 7 ; Polyb. 3, 103, 8, then veiy fre- quently witliout and besides), 'ttXtjolov Jno. iv. 5 with Gen., as in Sept. cf. Xen. Mem. 1, 4, 6 ; Aeschin. dial. 3, 3 (m Greek authors also with Dat.), but irapairX'qalov Phil. ii. 27 with Dat. (witli very slight variation of Codd.), e77i»9 with Gen. Jno. iii. 23; vi. 19; xi. 18 etc. and with Dat. Acts ix. 38 ; xxvii. 8, o'^k with Gen. Matt xxviii. 1, efjLTrpoadev with Gen., omcra) (exclusively Hellenistic), OTTtcrdev with Gen., vTrepeKetva and tSxmov ditto, and also eao) and e^co with Gen. Several of these are so frequently construed with a case, that they may be taken directly as prepositions ; just as in 60)?, %&)pi9, a%pi, l^^XP'"> t^^^ adverbial meaning is already per- ceptibly receding, and in avev (in the N. T.) has entirely disap- 493 peared. Under this head comes also Phil.ii. 15 fjiia-ov yevEas o-koXiSs (cf. Theophan. p. 530), which Lchm. and Tdf. have properly admitted into the text. But in Matt. xiv. 24 to ttXoiov ■^St; /xcVov 7775 OaXaacnjs ^v the word /x4(tov is an adjective : navis jam media maris erat, see Krebs in loo. In general, the use of adverbs with the Gen. in the N. T. diction appears very simple if we compare with it the far bolder constructions employed in the Greek of all periods, see Bhdy. 157 f. Combinations such as ews apri, Iws ttotc, Iws otov, cods Trpwii, cojs t$iD, £005 (CttTO) and the like, are, indeed, especially common in later prose authors (in Sept. cf. ews tot€ Neh. ii. 16, Jws tiVos, ew? ov Gen. xxvi. 13), but some such had already been sanctioned by earlier writers, Bhdy. 196; Krii. 266 f. As to adverbs with the article instead of nouns, see § 18, 3 p. 109. 7. Adverbs of place, even when not in relative clauses (§ 23, 2), are (originally by force of an attraction, Hra. Vig. 790, ad Soph. Antig. 617; Wex, Antig. 1. 107 ; Weber, Demosth. p. 446 ; Kruger, graramat. Untersuchungen III. 306 ff.) interchanged by good prose writers ; particularly adverbs of rest are joined to verbs of motion when at the same time continuance in a place is to be expressed, Hm. as above, Bhdy. 350 (see above, on eV, § 50, 4) cf. Matt. ii. 22 i(bo^i]07] eKel a-irekdelv, xvii. 20 ; xxviii. 16. So in the later writers e/cet came to be used freely for iKelae, irov and oTTov for TTot and ottol, ov for whither. They are thus used in the Sept. and even in the N. T. (where e.g. ottol never occurs) ; as, 440 Jno. xviii. 3 6 'Iov8a 6ea> '\jr6varr}v ireirolrjicev avrov, on ov TTeiriarevicev elM avrov, where fxr} e^^cov is used with reference to the law that made this provision (^idv Tt9 diroOdvrf fir) i^mv etc. VS. 24) : not having, he left behind etc., as one not liaving in the sense of the law, he left etc. (ou/c e^oov would exhibit tlie not having as if narrating something purely a matter of fact) ; in Mark xii. 20 we find in the narrative form ovk d^Ke cirepfLa. Col. i. 23 eir)TopiK-fi (2, 107), 2, 1 10 ; hypotyp. 3,1, 2; Lucian. catapl. 15 iyw ore /xr^Stv Ixf" fveX^P'"' *'" ■'■'? ^'V> o^'f a.yp6u, ov trvvoiKiav, ov XP^*^^" etc. Soph. Antig. 686 oUt h,v SvvaifiriP, jU^t* (Tridyoi, (yet some Codd. read here (f>dyr)), 2 Tim. iv. 16; and in Imperative sentences, Rom. xiv. 1 tov daOevovvra Ty irLaret irpo^- 498 Xafi^dveaOe, fir) et)(T(ii v/jtas cir' ovk eOvei over a no-nation, ix. 25 KaAetro) tov ov Xaov fjLov Xaov /x,ov Ktti TTjV OVK r]ya7n]fxevr]v rjyaTTrjjxevrjv, 1 Pet. ii. 10 — (all quota- tions from O. T.) ; cf. Thuc. 1, 137 17 ov 8iaA.i;cns the not breaking (the bridge had not been broken), 5, 50 ^ ovk l^ovaia, Eurip. Hippol. 196 ovk aTToSeift?, see Monk in loc. ; Sturz, ind. ad Dion. Cass', p. 245 ; Fr, Rom. II. 424. How this combination differs from that with /a^ (17 /at/ StaXutrts), see Franke, as above, I. 9. Numerous examples of both in Gayler p. 16sqq. The simple, accented, ov no (Matt. v. 37 ; Jas. v. 12 ; 2 Cor. i. 17 f.) occurs in answer to a question only in Matt. xiii. 29 ; Jno. i. 21, (for instances from Greek writers, see Gayler p. 161) ; the fuller form ovk fyoyye would have been more usual. 2. Let us consider now those cases, the most frequent of all, in which a negation is expressed by /jlij ; this takes place : a. In (wishes) commands, resolutions, encouragements, and that not only with verbs of the sort, that is to say Imperatives and Subjunctives, Matt. vii. 1 fx.r) Kpivere, Gal. v. 26 (irj yivcofMeda Kevo- Bo^oi, 2 Tliess. iiL 10, see § 56, 1, but also with words which are § 55. NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 477 considered as integral parts of the command, etc., 1 Pet. v. 2 iroLfxavare . . . fir} ava'yKacnw'i, 1 Pet. i. 13 f, ; 1 Tim. v. 9 ; Luke vi. 35 ; 1 Cor. v. 8 ; Rom. xiii. 13 ; Phil. ii. 4, 12 ; Heb. x. 25 ; Acts X. 20. b. In telic clauses, with Xva Matt. vii. 1 ; xvi. 20 ; Rom. xi» 25 ; Eph. ii. 9 ; Heb. xii. 3 ; Mark v. 43 ; 2 Cor. v. 15 ; vii. 9 ; Eph. 499 iv. 14, or 07ra)9 Luke xvi. 26 ; 1 Cor. i. 29 ; Matt. vi. 18 ; Acts viii. 24 ; xx. 16. So also with single words of such clauses, Rom. viii. 4 ; Eph. ii. 12 [?] ; Phil. i. 27 f. ; iii. 9 ; 2 Thess. ii. 12 ; Heb. xii. 27. c. In conditional sentences (Hm. Vig. 805), with el Jno. xv. 22 el fir} rfkdov, a/jbapTLav ovk et'^oaav, xviii. SO el firj rjp ovTOavX6v ian to Oelov ... et Se e')(ei, ecrrac ti rov Oeov KpeiTTov, hypotyp. 2, 5. 160. 175 ; Lucian. paras. 12 ; Galen, temper. 1, 3 ; Mr. Anton. 11, 18 p. 193 Mor. (cf. also Euseb. de die dom. p. 9 Jani). Nor is there any- thing to object against 1 Cor. xv. 13 : et avdaraaK veKpwv ovk ecrrt if the resurrection of the dead is a chimera, etc. ; cf. in the preceding context ttw? Xeyovai Ttveov€V(Tei<; 6e, yeyova<; Trapa^drrjfi vofjuov if thou dost not commit adul- tery, yet if thou killest,^ i. 23 ; iii. 2 ; 1 Cor. xvi. 22 el' ti<; ov ^tXet Tov Kvpiov, rjTQ} dvddefia (where the rendering, if any one hateth the Lord, would probably not represent the apostle's meaning) ; 2 Jno. 10 el' rt? ep'^erai, irpb'i vfMdepeif Luke xiv. 26. For the later prose writers, then, who in general use el ov (as the stronger and more expressive form) much oftener than the older writers (wiio were rather frugal in its use), we may state the rule thus (cf. also Anton, Progr. de discrim. particul. ov et fiij, Gorlic. 1823, 4to. p. 9) : where not in a conditional proposition is emphatic,^ el ov (as in Latin si non^ is used ; but where if not stands without emphasis on the negation, el fii] (as in Latin nisi^ : 447 e.g. if thou dost not commit adultery (with reference to the pre- '^^ *'• ceding fir) /iot;^;.), if any man loveth not the Lord (as he ought), if I am not an apostle unto others, Jno. i. 25 if thou art not the Christ, cf. vs. 20. The emphasis is brought out by an antithesis, either open (1 Cor. ix. 2) * or concealed (1 Cor. xvi. 22). It hes, however, in the nature of the case that ov then negatives only a jpart of the conditional proposition, not the proposition itself. 1 Macar. homil. 1, 10. Cf. also idv Diog. L. 1, 105 fav veos iiv rhv olvov ov (pep-ps, •yepwv yevofievos vS fMT) Trdpean ravra, TV(f)\6<; iariv whoso lacJceth, if any man lack, etc. In 1 Tim. v. 13 ; Tit. i. 11 rd firj Beovra and d firj Bel (cf. Rom. 1. 28 ; Soph. Phil. 583) express merely a moral conception : quae, si quae non sunt honesta ; whereas a ov M would denote positively inhonesta, the kind of unseemly things objectively present, cf. Gayl. 240 f. In Col. ii. 18 firj before § 55. NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 481 i(opaK€v ^ is expunged by the more recent critics ; only Tisch. in the 2d [and 7tli] Leipzig ed. restores it, and undoubtedly it has 503 the greatest amount of external authority on its side (Mey. states the authorities imperfectly). If the negation [which is wanting, moreover, in Cod. Sin.*] be genuine (some authorities have ov), fi^ must be used because even the relative clause is viewed by 427 Paul subjectively, as firjSeh vfi. KaTa/Spa/Severco.^ "" *"• Frequently o? is followed by ou, where, since apparently a mere sup- position is uttered, some have expected /at; (Lipsius de modis p. 14), as in Matt. xxiv. 2 ov fir] a<^eO-g wSi Ai^os ctti \i6ov, os ov KarakvO-qaeraL (but here firi is not indispensable, inasmuch as the words deny a matter of fact) ; and also where in Latin the Subjunctive would stand, and therefore fx-q would have been expected, Matt. x. 26 ovSeV ccrrt KeKaXvfifievov, o ovk aTroKa\v6rja-e.Tai, Luke viii. 17 ; xii. 2 ; Matt. xxiv. 2 ; cf. 1 Kings viii. 46. For instances from Greek authors (Hm. Vig. p. 709) see Eur. Hel. 509 sq. avi]p yap ovSeis wBe ...os...ou Swcrei ^opdv, Lucian. sacrif. 1 ovk otSa, €t Tis ovTw KaT7] etc. Cf. Krii. 253, 270 ; Mdv. 235. 6. g. With Participles (Gayl. 274 sqq. ; Krii. 274 f.) fiij is used not only when they belong to a proposition which, as expressing command, design, condition, etc., requires the subjective negation (see no. 2), Eph. v. 27 ; Phil. i. 28 ; ii. 4 ; iii. 9 ; 2 Thess. ii. 12 ; Heb. vi. 1 ; Jas. i. 5 ; Tit. ii. 9 f. ; Rom. viii. 4 ; xiv. 3 ; Matt, xxii. 24 ; Acts xv. 38 ; Luke iii. 11 ; 2 Cor. xii. 21 ; cf. Soph. Oed. § 55. NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 483 C. 1155, 980 ; Plato, rep. 2, 370 e. ; Xen. Cjr. 1, 4, 26 ; Kru. 275, 450 — but also under other circumstances : "^^ *•• a. when they refer, not to particular persons, but to a supposed 505 genus : Matt. xii. 30 o fxrj cov fier ifjuov Kar i/xov earlv he who is not with me i.e. whoever belongs to this class of men that I have in mind, si quis nan stet a meis partibus, Hm. Vig. 805 ; Mtth. 1441 sq. ; Krij. 174 (6 ovk &v /xer ifMov would mean a particular individual who actually was not with him). Matt. xxv. 29 ; Luke vi. 49 ; Jno. x. 1 ; xii. 48 ; xx. 24 [?] ; Rom. iv. 5 ; xiv. 22 ; Jas. ii. 13 ; iv. 17 ; 1 Jno. ii. 4 ; 1 Cor. vii. 37 ; hence with ird^ Matt. xiii. 19 ; Jno. XV, 2. Also 2 Jno. 7 ttoWoI ifkdvot ei€pov I seek to please all, (supposition) as one who, inasmuch as I etc., ix. 21 ; 2 Cor. vi. 3 ; Rom. xv. 23 ; 1 Thess. iii. 1, 5 (against Riickert see Liinemann in loc.) ; Jno. vii. 15 ttw? ovTo6t firj fiadoiv ypdfjbfiaTo) . Luke vii. 33 ekrjXvOev ^Icodwr)^ firjre eadlwv aprov firfre irivcov olvov without having eaten . . . di'unken (spoken from the position of those who, observing this, are introduced as saying so) ; ovre iaOltav ovre iriufov would express the predicates as pure matters of fact. In Luke iv. 35 to BaifMoviov i^XOev air avTov fxrjBev ySXai/rai; ovtov, by the last words the author does not mean to relate a mere matter of fact (ovhlv ^dyfr. avTov and did not harm him), but to exclude merely the thought that the evil spirit had in any way injured the possessed : he had not (as one might perhaps have thought) injured him. Thus fjb^ is very often to be understood : Acts v. 7 ; xx. 22 ; Heb. iv. 15 ; xi. 8 ; Matt. xxii. 12. Cf. what Klotz says, Devar. p. 666 : quibus in locis omnibus propterea fi^ positum est, non ot), 484 § 55- NEGATIVE PARTICLES, quod ille, qui loquitur, non rem ipsam spectat sed potius cogita- tionem rei, quam vult ex animo audientis amovere (Plut. Pompej. 606 c. 64) ; Hm. Vig. 806. In Matt, xviii. 25 /i^ e'xpvro^ avrov airo- Bovvai iKeXevaev avrov 6 Kvpio€LB6jji€voi Tov TTOLybvlov is, as the Future shows, to be taken altogether as an ideal picture. Also Heb. ix. 9 firj Swdfievai Kara avvelSTfaiv reXeioxrai etc. is spoken in the view of the writer ; had it been ov hwdfi. an actual inherent property would have been signified (not being able), but such offerings Israelites would not have presented. 1 Cor. i. 28 i^eKe^aro 6 6eb9 is qualitative ; to? (mt) a. h. would he as if I would not heat the air'), Gal. iv. 27 (LXX) ev ayav. (according to Olympiod.) injuste facerem si non indignarer. Cf. also Joseph, antt. 16, 7, 5 i Sh ^epdipas els fitirov avei\T]vro, fX7}5ev fUffxvH-o" **'* kvoXoyiay fX"" • • • t^Kovaat S" oit iriaTiv6nevos. 486 § 55. NEGATIVE PARTICLES. fjbTjBk ovo^ia^ecrOa) iv v/itv . .. rj evrpaTrekla, ra ovk av^Kovra. The latter (in apposition) is to be resolved, which are unseemly things (which a Christian is bound to shun), actions which are not seemly (as indeed some Codd. [so too Cod. Sin.] have: a ovk avriKev). Gal. iv. 8 Tore ovk elhore^ 6eov ehovXevcrare etc. is a glance at a past historic fact, and ovk elS. form a single idea: ignorantes deum, ddeot ; on the contrary, 1 Thess. iv. 5 ra eOvt} 608 ra fit} elBora rov deov, and 2 Thess. i. 8 rol8e should be employed (cf. Hm. Soph. Philoct. p. 140), yet the better Codd. [Sin. also] give it. Likewise in Rev. v. 3 ovBeL<; '^Bvvaro iv rm 436 ovpavu) ovSe eVl rj}} ^ Suvavrai, are regular correlates, and to the first proposition belong 0VT6 iv rah avvaycoyah ovre Kara ttoXlv as subordinate members. On Luke xx. 36, see p. 490. That in negative sentences the subordinate members are introduced by ^, has already been stated, § 53, 6. On the other hand, in Acts xvii. 29, according to the reading (adopted by Bornem.) of Cod. D ovk 6v(r(a rj apyvpif etc., the ^ is co-ordinate with ovtc, a usage of which another example could hardly be found, Mtth. Eurip. VII. 178. ^ Ov HfTfvSriffai' iK tuv appears to me more suitable (the better Codd. too [Sin. also] have this reading, and Lchm. has so printed) ; and in general, I think that in this case accurate writers would for the sake of perspicuity use i] instead of ovre, see § 53, 6, p. 440 sq. In 1 Cor. ill. 2 the best Codd. [Sin. also], instead of the transcriber's error ovre as in the received text, give dAA' ovSk h-i vvv hvva6rtpa tria ista, but by no means vindicates that rendering by Odyss. 15, 78 aixipdrepof kvS6s re koX iyKatri kuI &v(iap, since the first two words here, united by re Kai, are regarded as a sing-Ze notion. In Acts, as above, were we to read ^rjSf, aij.(p6repa still could not mean tria ; but the writer regards S77. and vvtvixa, agreeably to their logical import, as om leading conception. 494 §55. NEGATIVE PARTICLES. logical foundation, is observable likewise in the N. T., cf. koI ov Jno. v. 43 ; vi. 17 ; vii. 36 ; Acts xvi. 7 ; 2 Cor. xiii. 10, koI /ai^ Jas. i. 5 ; iv. 17 ; 1 Pet ii. 16; iii. 6; Heb. xiii. 17. 516 For passages in Greek authors which especially illustrate the difference between ov84 and owe, see Isocr. Areop. p. 345 ovk avwfxaXias ovBk draKTog ovT€ iOepaTTivov ovre tipyia^oi/ etc., permut. p. 750 wsre /Mi^SeVa /u,oi TrtoTrore fi 7)0 iv oXiyap^ia /xrjS^ iv SrjfjLoKpaTLa fjLrJTe vjSpLV /u-t^tc dSiKtW iyKaXeaai, Her. 6, 9 ; Isocr. ep. 8, p. 1016 ; Xen. Ages. 1, 4 ; Demosth. Timocr. 481 b. Cf. Mtth. p. 1445. 7. In two parallel propositions, sometimes ovtc (/xt^tc) is fol- lowed, not by another negative, but by a simple copula {kuc or re), e.g. Jno. iv. 11 ovre dvrXrjfjia e%6t9, kuI to (f)peap iarl ^adv, as in Latin nee liaustrum habes et puteus etc. (Hand, Tursell. IV. 133 sqq.), 3 Jno. 10, cf. Arrian. Al. 4, 7, 6 ijco ovre ttjv ayav ravrrjv rifjucopiav B^aaov iiratvoy ... Ka\ inra'y^^drjvat ^ AKe^avhpov ^v/jL^rjfMi etc., Paus. 1, 6, 5 Ar}fjt,i]Tpio<; ovre iravTairacnv i^eLcrriJKei nToXefialfp Trj<; '^copa not so much to m£n (the apostle Peter), as to God etc. ; 1 Cor. xv. 10 ovk iyon Se (^eKOTrlaa-a) , aW' r) ')(upc€crov, aXXa cr)(COov Td(Tr)^i p, vvn A7 -S —ki-ii? Jloj ; in the last, ovk eaTiv consti- tutes a single idea which is negatived by the first ov, — ihQ not belonging to the body is denied, (cf. ovk elvai used thus in a nega- Meyer and BCrusius have decidedly agreed with me in the various passages adduced above ; but I take especial pleasure in the remarks of my acute colleague Klotz ad Devar. p. 9 sq. in support of my view. As to non . . . sed, cf. Kritz, Sallust. Jug. p. 533 ; Hand, Tur. IV. 271. 1 The two negatives equivalent to an affirmative in Rom. xv. 18, which occur in two different clauses blended by attraction, require uo special notice. §55. NEGATIVE PAETICLES. 499 tive clause in Demosth. Androt. 420 c.; Aelian. 12, 36). See 521 besides, Matt. xxv. 9 text, rec, Cf. Poppo, Tliuc. III. IV. 711 ; Mtth. II. 1449. Or, b. They both produce but a single negation (which is the more frequent case), and serve (originally) only to make the principal negation which would have sufficed alone more distinct and forci- 465 ble, and to impart to the sentence a negative character tlirough- '^i'' ^ out : ^ Jno. XV, 5 ^w/at? e'/^v ou huvaaOe iroielv ovBiv non potedis ■*'*^ /acere quidquam, i.e. nihil pot. fac. (Dem. Callip. 718 c), 2 Cor. xi. 8 irapoiv . . . ov KaTevdpKrjaa ov8€v6ed'>]cr€TaL avrat ovre iv tovto) tm alwvt ovt€ iv tS fiiXXovrt.^ In this way a single sentence may contain a series of negatives : Luke xxiii. 53 ov ovk rjv ovheiru) ovBel<; /^ifievo<;, Mark v. 3 (cf. Aelian. anim. 11, 31 &>? ovheiroiiroTe ovBeva ovBev ahiKrjTa<^, Plat. Parmen. 166 a. on raXKa tS)v /ult} ovtcov ovSevl ovSafirj ovhapbo)'^ ovhe- filav Kovvwviav e^«, Phaed. 78 d. ; Her. 2, 39 ovhe aWov ovBev6daXfjiov<; ei? rov ovpavov iirdpai. In 1 Cor. vi. 10, after several antecedent partitive clauses (ovre, ovre, ov, ov), the negative is once more repeated for the sake of perspicuity with 466 the predicate /b'ttcnXciW Otov ov KX-qpovofi-qcrovcn. The best Codd., how- 7th ed. ever, [Sin. also] omit it, and Lchm. has expunged it. In Rev. xxi. 4 6 6oivaTOdyT], liowever, would here be more appropriate in the mouth of Christ, — if it only had more external authority in its favor. Besides, see Gayler p. 76 sqq. 82. b. When a warning is expressed, it is construed a) sometimes with the Imperative Present, usually where something permanent and which a person is already doing is to be indicated (Hm. Yig. 437 80'9), Matt, vi, 19 firj drjaavpi^ere vfuv, vii. 1 /xt) Kpivere, Jno. v. 11 'tliei firjKeTt, dfidprave, cf. Matt. xxiv. 6,^ 17 ; Jno. xiv. 1 ; xix. 21 ; Mark xiii. 7, 11 ; Rom. xi. 18 ; Eph. iv. 28 ; 1 Tim. v. 23 ; .1 Pet. iv. 12 ; 445 /9) sometimes with the Subjunctive Aorist, when something tran- ^^ ^ sient, which should not be begun at all, is to be expressed (Hm. as above), Luke vi. 29 diro tov aXpovT6€iX.. cannot be taken as an Indicative. Reiche's observations on the other side are a strange mixture of obscurity and half-truth. And if he means to say that the subjective negatives are used in the same way in some of the passages 524 adduced by Wetstein, he is very much mistaken ; for in these passages the Inf. or Participle is employed, both of which regularly take fxrj. As to ov with the Fut. Indie, partly in passages from the 0. T. law, as ^ There must here be is. vOEuna after ipare, as H. Stephanus correctly remarked in the preface to his edition of the N. T. of 1576. If dpare fiii be immediately connected, 9porj(r6e must be substituted for Opoelade. Tdf. [in his 2d ed.j has not attended to this. (In his 1st ed. and 7th he has it correctly, also in his edd. man.J ^ Cf. Brtmi, excurs. 12 ad Lys. p. 452 sqq. 502 § 66. CONSTRUCTION OF NEGATIVE PARTICLES. Matt. V. 21 ov 0ov€uo-€is, xix. 18 ; Acts xxiii. 5 ; Rom. xiii. 9, and partly in the N. T. style itself, Matt. vi. 5 ovk ea-ea-Oe wsTrcp ol vTroKpLraC, where /i-77 with the Subjunctive might have been expected, cf. § 43, 5. Not unlike this is Xen. Hell. 2, 3, 34 ; see Locella, Xen. Ephes. p. 204 ; Franke I. 24. (On yixi; with the Fut. Indie, in a mildly prohibitive sense, see Weber, Demosth. p. 369.) When fi,7] in a prohibitive sense is joined with the third Person (as frequently in laws, see Franke, as above, p. 32), the Imperat. is used (always in the N.T.), not the Subjunctive (Hm. Soph. Aj. p. 163) : the Present Imper. when what is forbidden has already commenced, and the Aorist Imper. when something which has not 4g8 yet commenced is to be avoided (in future also) ; as, Rom. vi. 12 firj 7th ed. ovv ^aaiXeverw r) a^apria iv roS 6vr)Ta> v/jicbv (rcofiaTi, xiv. 16 ; 1 Cor. vii.12,13; CoLii.l6; 1 Tim.'vi. 2 ;' Jas. i. 7 ; 1 Pet. iv. 15 ; 2 Pet. iii. 8 ; on the other hand Matt. vi. 3 /xr) yvvoroy rj dpiarepd aov etc., xxiv. 18 fMT) eTriarpeylraTO) OTria-o), Mark xiii. 15 fir) KaTafidro) et? ttjv OLKtav (probably also in Matt. xxiv. 17 according to good Codd. [Sin. also], where the text. rec. has KaTa^awero)') . Cf. Xen. C. 7, 5, 73 ; 8, 7, 26 ; Aeschin. Ctes. 282 c. ; Mtth. II. 1157 ; Kuhner 44g II. 113. (Instances from tlie Sept., therefore, are not needed 6th ed. here ; otherwise, besides Deut. xxxiii. 6 and 1 Sam. xvii. 32, many could be found, as Josh. vii. 3 ; 1 Sam. xxv. 25 ; 2 Sam. i. 21 ; Judges vi. 39.) If a dehortation in the 1st Pers. (Plur.) is to be expressed, fiij takes the Subjunctive, and either the Pres. or the Aor. according to the distinction indicated above (Hm, Soph. Aj. p. 162), e.g. Jno. xix. 24 fit] a'^iaoifiev, but 1 Jno. iii. 18 firj wyairwixev Xoyw (as some were doing), Gal. vi. 9 ; 1 Thess. v. 6 ; Rom. xiv. 13 ; 1 Cor. X. 8. In Gal. v. 26 the Codd. vary, some having firj r^ivonfieOa Kevoho^oL (text, rec), others lyeveofieOa. The better [Sin. also] favor the former, (and Lchm, and Tdf. have so printed). The apostle may mean to reprove a failing already existing in the churches, as seems probable also from what precedes. Mey. takes a different view. From Greek autliors, see evidence for the use of the 1st Pers. Plur. Subj. in Gayler 72 sq. 2. In dependent clauses fi'^ (/at/ttco?, firjirore etc.) is used, 525 a. In the sense of in order that not (for which ha fxr) is more commonly employed), with the Subjunctive after Pres. and Impera. 1 Cor. ix. 27 virwiria^w p,ov to awfia . . . firjiro)^ . . . uSokl/jlo^; yivto- fiuL, 2 Cor. ii. 7 ; xii. 6 ; Matt. v. 25 ; xv. 32 ; Luke xii. 58 and frequently ; with the Optative after a Preterite, Acts xxvii. 42 luv § 56. CONSTRUCTION OF NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 503 vyoc, but good Codd. [Sin. also] have here Bi,avyr}, which Lchm. and Tdf. have adopted (Bhdy. 401 ; Krii. 168). The latter reading, however, may be a correction or an error of transcribers. The Subj. is also used in the 0. T. quota- tion Matt. xiii. 15 ; Acts xxviii. 27, where, however, as a permanent result is meant, it is less questionable. The Indie. Fut. (along with a Subj. Aor.) Mark iv. 12 Sept. firjiroje einaTpe^lrcoaL koL a^edriaeTat (according to good Codd.) [as also the Fut. ^r}6r]ay Matt. V. 25] it is not necessary to regard as likewise dependent on /jbijiroTc, though even then the Fut. would be quite proper, see Fr. This applies to Idaofxat Acts xxviii. 27 (Born. Idaco/xat) cf. Luke xiv. 8 f. In Matt. vii. 6 Lchm. and Tdf. read fnjTrore Kara- irarrjaovaLVy where Griesb. and Scholz have not noted any var. b. In the sense of that not, lest, after opa, ^SXevre or (jjo^ovfjuac, and the like (Hm. Vig. 797 ; Rost, Gr. 650 f.). In this connection the particle is followed a) by the Indicative, when the suspicion (apprehension) that something is, will be, or has been, a matter of fact, is also ex- pressed : Present Indie. Luke xi. 35 aKOTrei, fx.r) to ^m to eV aol aK6T0o^ovfuii, fii]7r(ovcnv KXdSwv ovk ti^eto-aro, lirpru)d(TiraL (far better supported than €Lcrr]raL) if God has not spared, (I fear and presume) that he will not spare thee also, ne tibi quoque non sit parciturus, cf. Gen. xxiv. 39. In Gal. ii. 2 dv€f3r]v . . . dvfOefxrjv . . . /xr^ws eU k€v6v rpex^ V ^^pa/xov, Fr. (Conject. I. note, p. 50) considered the translation ne operam meam luderem aut' lusissem faulty in two respects : because instead of rpexio (after a Preterite) the Optative was to be expected; while the Indie. 448 cSpa/Aov here would mean, what the apostle cannot have intended to say, 6tli «!• tliat he had labored in vain. Hence Fr. took the words as a direct question : num frustra operam meam in evangelium insumo an insumsi ? He himself, 627 however, afterwards felt that this explanation is forced, and in the Opuscula Fritzschiorum p. 173 sq. gave a different rendering. The difficulty in regard to Tp6'x<^ entirely disappears, so far as the N. T. is concerned ; indeed, the Pres. Subj.^ is even appropriate, as Paul is speaking of apos- 1 That rpfx<^ is Indicative [as is assumed again by Bttm. Gramm. dcs N. T. Sprachtipbr. S. 303 and even i/ey. Aufl. 4] Usteri and Schott inferred from the fact that tSpa/xot § 56. CONSTRUCTION OF NEGATIVE PAETICLES. 505 tolic activity, still continued. And the Pret. Indie. (Spa/jLov would be justified by the assumption that Paul gave to the whole sentence the same turn of expression that he would have employed, had he uttered the words in a direct form : in order that J run not or have run (for might run, or might have run), cf. above, p. 288. Still simpler, however, is the inter- pretation now adopted by Fr., who takes the Preterite in a hypothetical sense, cf. Mtth. II. 1185 ; Hm. de partic. av p. 54: ne forte frustra cucur- rissem (which might easily have been the case, had I not propounded my doctrine in Jerusalem). But of course, it is not allowable to refer aveOcfxrjv (as Fr, does) to an intention of Paul to instruct himself (for not the mere exposition of his views could have secured him from having run in vain, but only the assent of the apostles) ; on the contrary, Paul must have been satisfied in his own mind that his views were correct, and only have designed to obtain the very important declaration of the apostles in his favor, without which his apostolic labors for the present and the past would have been fruitless, see de Wette in loc. In 1 Thess. iii. 5 /a^ttws is construed with both In^ic. and Subjunct. : «.Tr€fxijja CIS TO yvwvoL T'^v ttlotlv vjuwv, /iiyxw? iireipacrev v/aa? 6 Trctpa^wv »cat CIS Kcvov yivrjrai o kottos rjfjiMv I sent to ascertain your faith, (fearing) lest haply the tempter have tempted you, and my labor be fruitless. The different moods here are obviously justifiable. The temptation (to waver 471 in faith) might have already taken place ; but whether the apostle's labor '"• ** had been rendered fruitless by it depended on the result of the temptation, as yet not known to him, and might be dreaded as impending. Fr.'s interpretation (Opusc. Fritzschior. p. 176) : ut . . . cognoscerem, an forte Satanas vos tentasset et ne forte labores mei irriti essent, appears to me harsh, as firjirms would thus be taken in two senses. And I can by no means admit that according to my interpretation the Fut. yevrjcrcTai, would be required instead of yivrjrai. On the contrary, the Fut. denoting an apprehension which cannot be verified, and in any event will not be verified at some definite future time, would be far too explicit. See also Hm. Soph. Aj. p. 48 and partic. av p. 126 sq. ; Mtth. II. 1186. Note. Verbs oi fearing are regularly followed by the simple p.ri, firj-n-w^, etc. not by Iva firj : hence in Acts v. 26 Iva p.rj XiOaa-Owaiv must not be connected with i(f>o^ovvTo tov Xaov, as is done by most expositors (even Mey.) ; but it is dependent, rather, on •^ayev avrovs oi fierb. jStas, and the 449 words iipofiovvTo yap tov Xaov are to be considered as parenthetical. fit'' ed. 3. The intensive ov /jltj (in reference to what in no wise will 528 or should take place) ^ is construed sometimes, and indeed most follows ; forgetting that two different moods, according to different conceptions, may- be and sometimes are connected with one and the same particle. ( See the passage to be quoted immediately : 1 Thess. iii. 5. ) 1 Thus ov fi-fi regularly refers to the future (Matt. xxiv. 21 o"a ov -yiyoviv . . . ovS' ov /u^ ytmirai). Moreover, it is now the prevalent opinion of scholars, that this idiom 64 606 §56. CONSTRUCTION OF NEGATIVE PARTICLES. frequently, with the Subjunct. Aorist, sometimes with the Sub- juiict. Present (Stallb. Plat. rep. I. 51, see below), and sometimes also with the Indie. Fut. (Bengel on Matt. v. 18 is mistaken), see Ast, Plat, polit. p. 365 ; Stallb. Plat. rep. II. 36 sq. ; Ellendt, Lexic. Soph. II. 409 sqq. ; Gajl. p. 430 sqq. The difference between the Subj. Aor. and the Fut. Indie, (which alone occur in the N. T.) is defined by Hm. Soph. Oed. Col. ver. 853 thus : Conjunctivo Aor. locus est aut in eo, quod jam actum est (see, however, Ellendt as above, p. 411 sq.), aut in re incerti temporis, sed semel vel brevi 472 temporis memento agenda ; Futuri vero usus, quem ipsa verbi Ith ed. forma nonnisi in rebus futuris versari ostendit, ad ea pertinet, quae aut diuturniora aliquando eventura indicare volumus aut non aliquo quocunque, sed remotiore aliquo tempore dicimus futura esse. Tlie inquiry whether this distinction is observed in the N. T., is rendered difficult by the variations of MSS., of which, in many passages, some have the Indie. Fut., and some the Aor. Subj. So far as can be ascertained by the present apparatus of various readings, the Subj. is established in Matt. v. 18, 20, 26 X. 23 ; xviii. 3 ; xxiii. 39 ; Mark xiii. 2, 19, 30 ; Luke vi. 37 xii. 59 ; xiii. 35 ; xviii. 17, 30 ; xxi. 18 ; Jno. viii. 51 ; x. 28 xi. 26, 56 ; 1 Thess. iv. 15 ; 1 Cor. viii. 13 ; 2 Pet. i. 10 ; Rev. ii. 11 ♦ iii^^^3j_12_; xviii. 7, 21 f. ; xxi. 25, 27. There is a preponderance of evidence for the Subj. in Matt. xvi. 28 ; xxvi. 35 ; Mark ix. 41 ; xvi. 18 ; Luke i. 15 ; ix. 27 ; xviii. 7, 30 ; xxii. 68 : Jno. vi. 35 ; 529 viii. 12, 52 ; xiii. 8 ; Rom. iv. 8 ; Gal. v. 16 ; 1 Thess. v. 3. There is at least as much evidence for the Subj. as for the Fut. in Mark xiv. 31 ; Luke xxi. 33 ; Matt. xv. 5 ; xxiv. 35 ; Gal. iv. 30 ; Heb. x. 17 ; Rev. ix. 6 (xviii. 14). ^ The authorities decidedly favor is to be considered as elliptical : ov fi)) iroiiiffri for ov StSoiKu or ov (p6fios, oii Seos iarl (there is no fear) /u^ ir. see Ast, Plat, polit. p. 365 ; Matthiae, Eurip. Hippol. p. 24 ; Sprachl. II. 1174; Hm. Soph. Oed. C. 1028; Ilartung II. 156. This involves, indeed, the assumption that the Greeks lost sight of the origin of the expression ; for in many- passages " there is no fear that " is not appropriate, (in the N. T. Matt. v. 20 ; xviii. 3 ; Luke xxii. 16 ; Jno. iv. 48). Earlier Hm. (Eurip. Med. p. 390 sq.) had explained the phrase differently, cf. also Goyl. p. 402. The connective oifSe fx-fi (koI ov n-q) occurs in the N. T. only in Rev. vii. 16 (var.), but frequently in the Sept. e.g. Exod. xxii. 21 ; xxiii. 13; Josh, xxiii. 7; and ouMs fi-fi in Wisd. i. 8. Generally, ov fxi) is of very ■ frequent occurrence in the Sept., and its prevalence may probably be referred to that effort after expressiveness, characteristic of the later language. The instances have been collected by Gayl. p. 441 sqq. It is not the fact, however, that in the N. T. {Hitzig, Job. Marc. S. 106) Mark and the Revelation display a predilection for ov n.-i\. A concordance will prove the contrary. 1 It must not be overlooked that sometimes the Future form may be occasioned in MSS. by a preceding or following Future, as in Jno. viii. 12 ov (x^ irepiirariiaei . . . a\\ § 56. CONSTRUCTION OF NEGATIVE PARTICLES. 507 the Flit, in Luke x. 19 ; xxii. 34 ; Jno. iv. 14 ; x. 5. The Fiit. is 450 established (without var.) in Matt. xvi. 22 ov fir) earat. croi, tovto *'''*''' (absit) ne tibi accidat hoc. Accordingly the Subj. is indisputably predominant in the N. T. (cf. Lob. Phryn. p. 722 sq.), and this is no less the case in Greek authors, see Hartung, Partik. II. 156 f. Hermann's rule on the whole does not apply to the N. T. ; for although several passages might be interpreted in accordance with it, yet others in turn are at variance with it, and the Aor. is em- ployed where the Put. should have been used, as e.g. 1 Thess. iv. 15 OTL rifieL ov fiTQ iroTf. xwpa^ <^vy6vTf. Kpdaao<;, ^cav 8' &) ^^^O* '^'^^ xi. 25 eyco elfXL 77 avdaTaaLya . . . /xaprvpel irepl ifiov, 2 Pet. ii. 20 yeyovev avrok ra eaxara -xeipova roiv irpcaTfov, Acts i. 18 ; xxvi. 24 ; Jno. ix. 3 ; x. 21 ; iii. 23 ; xix. 31 ; Rev. viii. 3. But a) when prominence is to be given to the plurality and diver- sity of the objects (Weber, Demosth. p. 529), the Pred. is put in the Plural, as Jno. xix. dl iva KareaycjaLv avrcbv (of the three persons crucified) ra crKeXr) (previously iva /jltj fxeivr) ra (Tcofiara is used, cf. also vi. 13 ; Rev. xxi. 12 ; xx. 7 ; Xen. An. 1, 7, 17) ; seldom otherwise, 1 Tim. v. 25 ra dXXox: exovra Cepja') Kpv/3rivat ov BvvavTai, Rev. i. 19 a eZSe? koI a eialv (but immediately afterwards a /xeWei jLveaOai,}, Luke xxiv. 11 (not Rom. iii. 2, see § 39, 1 a.). In 2 Pet. iii. 10 Sing, and Plur. are united. Likewise 537 in Greek authors (Rost 475 ; Kuhner XL 50) the Plural of the verb is not unfrequently used, especially when instead of the Neut. another substantive. Masculine or Feminine, may be in the mind (Hm. Soph. Elect, p. 67 ; Poppo, Thucyd. I. I. 97 f. and Cyrop. p. 116 ; yet see Schneider, Plat. civ. I. 93) ; yet in other cases also, cf. Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 2 ; Anab. 1, 4, 4 ; Hipparch. 8, 10 ; Thuc. 6, 62 ; Ael. anim. 11, 37 ; Plat. rep. 1, 353 c. iS) neuters, however, which denote or refer to animate objects, especially persons, are almost always construed with a Plural Pred. ; as. Matt. x. 21 itravacnrjcrovTaL reKva eVt yoveh koI Oavarda- (Tovaiv avTov<;, Jas. ii. 19 ra Saniovia maievovaLv koX ^picraovaiVy Jno. X. 8 ovK rjKovaav avrwv ra Trpo^aTa, Mark iii. 11 ; v. 13 ; • vii. 28 ; Matt. vi. 26 ; xii. 21 ; 2 Tim. iv. 17 ; Rev. iii. 2, 4.; xi. 13, 18 ; xvi. 14 ; xix. 21 (Matt, xxvii. 62 iroXXa crcofMara rwv KeKoifirj- /jL6V(ov aryimv r/yepdrjaav, Rev. xi. 13). In other passages the Codd. vary remarkably, and there is a preponderance of authority for the Sing, in Mark iv. 4 ; Luke iv. 41 ; viii. 38 ; xiii. 19 ; Jno. x. 12 ; 1 Jno. iv. 1 ; Rev. xviii. 3 ; indeed, in Luke viii. 2 is found without var. d(f> ^<; SaL/jLOvca eirra i^eXrjXvdei,, vs. 30 el^rjXdev Baifj,6vca iroWd, and in 1 Jno. iii. 10 <^avepd ea-rtv rd reKva rox) Oeov koI to, t. tov ?)La^6\ov. Cf. also Eph. iv. 17 and Rom. ix. 8. The Sing, and Plur. are connected in Jno. x. 4 rd Trpo^ara avrcp uKoXovdel, on 480 oiBaoTLV rrjv , vr] ttjv rjixeripav Kav;(T7oriv, rjv l^^w, the Sing, and the Plur. would be used together ; but ifierepav [which also Cod. Sin. gives] is here unquestionably to be preferred.) 5. Such sentences as the following are not to be regarded as instances of grammatical discord between the Subj. and Pred. : Matt. vi. 34 apKerbv rfj rj^epa rj KUKia avTrj ^IdKw^o^ Kal ^Icodvinj^;, Jiio. xxi. 2, hence with Kal . . . KaL or re . . . Kal Luke xxiii. 12 iyivovro (f)t\.0L 6 re Uikdro^ Kal 6 'Hpd^v'^ (Acts i. 13 ; iv. 27 ; v. 24 ; xviii. 5), Tit. i. 15 /jbefilavrat, avToyv Kal 6 vov^€aO(u avros koI tj ywrj KoX TO. TraiSia. 7. When several Subjects or Predicates are united in a single proposition, the copulative particle is, according to the most simple construction, put before the last ; whereas the disjunctive ij must stand before each of the successive words, as in Matt. vi. 31 rl djcofi€v rj rl Tricofxev rj ri Trept^aXco/jieOa ; Luke xviii. 29 09 dovyovel<; rj reKva. Even the copulative is sometimes used in tiiis manner, as in Rom. ii. 7 rot? Bo^av kcu Tifirjv KoX d(fidapcriav ^T/roOcri, xi. 33 ; xii. 2 (Lucian. Nigr. 17), see Fr. Rom. II. 553. When such a series of words is introduced by wavoL, ^Xd(rfav^(Ta<; axnov elirev avrw, yet cf. Acts xiii. 3 einOevTe69 (which in Greek can only mean, God is wise). The same holds also when the subject and the predicate are extended, as in Heb. V. 13 Trd? 6 fieri'^wv ydXaKTo<; dnretpo'i \6jov BcKaioavvr)^, 2 Cor. i. 21 ; Rom. xi. 15 ; see § 64, 2. But as the predicate is usually blended with the copula, so the subject may be implied in the 486 copula, or in the blended copula and predicate. This takes place, '""***■ independently of any special context, a. When the verb is in the 1st or 2d Pers. (where the subjects are conceived as preseut, Mdv. p. 6) usually, as in Jno. xix. 22 o yeypa(f)a, yeypa(l)a, Rom, viii. 15 ovk eXd^ere irvevfia SoyXe/a?, as here even the pronouns eyw, av are expressed only when emphasis is intended, see § 22, 6. If now the name of the subject be annexed to the pronoun of the 1st or 2d Pers., as in Gal. v. 2 iyco IlavXo^ XcYO) vfjblv (Eph. iii. 1 ; Rom. xvi. 22 ; 2 Cor. x. 1 ; Philem. 19 ; Rev. i. 9 ; xxii. 8, etc.), Gal. ii. 15 r//x.et9 rj(TL and cTttcv there is an apostolic ellipsis (of 6 Oeos). Lastly, in Heb. vii. the best authorities [Sin. also] give tiaprvpCa-au There is nothing at all impersonal in Jno. xii. 40 (one acquainted with 1 It cannot, however, be inferred from this that the 3d Plural Active strictly has a Passive sense (as in Chald., see my Gram. § 49), for even in Luke xii. 20 avcuTovaiv may be taken concretely ; see Bornem. in loc. § 59. EXTENSION OF A SIMPLE SENTENCE, ETC. 523 the Scriptures easily supplies 6 ^cos), 1 Cor. xv. 25 {0-g scilicet XpuTT6p6vifxo€yi(77(x)v TToXecov, KaXovvrcav tc &)9 aurou?), Rev. xi. 15 i'yevovro (pcoval fieyaXac . . . Xi'yovre'i (v. 13 f.) ; i v._8^ ra riacrapa ^wa, ev ,^Ka0' €v avTbiv e'x^wv ava Trrepvya^ e^ . . . koI avdiravacv ovk exovatv r}lJLepaepovTe<; dadevet- in Rev. iii. 9 tmv Xeyovrcov is not an epithet of avvcvywyrj'i^ but to be taken partitively. The Sing, and Plural connected, occur in Mark viii. 1 Tra/XTroXXov O'^ov 6vroepovTat /mt) hwdjievai etc. iii. 6 iav ri]V irappriaLav ^'h ei Kal TO Kavxni^^^ H'^XP'' t^^o^'? /Se/Saiai^ KaTda-)(wp^v (var.). Rev. viii. 7. 550 Cf. Iliad. 2, 136 sq. al 'qfierepal r akoxoi koX vryKta rUva eiar ivl 491 fieydpoi,<; TrortBiy/jievat, Thuc. 8, 63 Trudofjuevo^ . . . Kal rov ^rpo/x^c- "" *"• X^^V^ Kdl Ta9 vav9apT0Li dpyupio) 17 )(pvalia iXxn-puidrjre; but $apT. must be regarded as a substantive, and apy. and xp- ^s explan- atory specifications in apposition to it : not with corruptible things, silver or gold etc. 6. Predicative amplifications, which we introduce by as or for, to, are very frequent : 1 Tim. ii. 7 et«? o ireOrjv eyo) Krjpv^, 1 Cor. X. 6 TavTa Tviroi tj/mmv ivo ^^'^ ivrevOev, i-v Tcbv r)Sov(ov etc. Mark viii. 4 ; Eph. i. 19 ; 1 Pet. ii. 7, 15. 552 Several words may be joined by apposition to one and the same subject, Rev, xii. 9 ; xiii. 16 ; and so sometimes an apposition con- sists of several parts, 2 Thess. ii. 3 sq. On the other hand, in 2 Pet ii. 18 we are not (with Lchm. and Tdf.) to find in rov<; iv ifKdvj) dvaaTpecfjofiivovi an apposition to toj)? 0X170)9 diro(^eiryovraviov, probably also in Phil. iii. 18 and 2 Cor. x. 13, see Mey. in loc, cf. Plat. Phaed. 66 c. tote . . . rjfjuv earai ov iirLOv/xovfjiev . . . (ftpov^aew'Sf Hipp. maj. 281 C. ol -TraXaiol eKelvoi ; oiv ovofiaTa /xeydXa Xeyerai . . . ULTraKov 653 Koi BtavTos, . . . a[vovTaL dwexof^^voi, rep. 3, 402 C. ; 7, 533 c. ; Apol. p. 41 a.; Lucian. Eunuch. 4. ^QA 8. That words in apposition, being co-ordinated with their prin- 7th ed. cipals, agree with them in case is the well-known rule. It does not extend to gender or number (Ramshorn, S. 294) ; since, in particular, a neuter (abstract) may be put in apposition with a personal noun, a plural with a collective singular, a singular with a plural, as Phil. iv. 1 dBeX^ol fiov ayaTnjrot . . . %a/oa fcal o-r€(f)av6 deu>, ttjv \o>yiK7)v Xar peiav, i.e. tjrt<; earl Xoy. Xarp. qui est cultus etc., 1 Tim. ii. 6 6 Sou? kavrov amiXvTpov inrep irdmcop, to fiaprvpiov KaipoldX.aiov iiri tois XeyofievoK toiovtov exofiev ap)(i^pia (Lycurg. orat. 17, G), where it is not necessary to supply kari Cf. Rom. viii. 3 ; 1 Pet. iii. 8. 11. In conclusion, we must advert to the irregularities (sole- cisms) of government and apposition which occur in the Revelation (especially in the descriptions of visions), and which, from their number and nature, give the style the impress of considerable harshness ; see, besides the well-known works of Stolberg and 498 Schwarz (see above, p. 8), my exeget. Stud. I. 164ff.i They are 7th ed. 1 Wh&tHitzig (on Joh. Marcus. Zurich, 1843. 8vo. S. 65 ff.) has collected respecting the language of the Revelation, serves a special critical purpose, and too much is put down to the account of the Hebrew element. A more moderate view is taken by Liicke, Apokal. II. 448 flP., who, however, in this particular sets too high a value on Ilitsig'a merits. § 59. EXTENSION OF A SIMPLE SENTENCE, ETC. 535 partly intended, and partly traceable to the writer's negligence. From a Greek point of view they may be explained as instances of anacoluthon, blending of two constructions, constructio ad sensum, variatio structurae, as should always have been done, instead of attributing them to the ignorance of the author, or pro- nouncing them to be mere Hebraisms, since most of them would be anomalies even in Hebrew, and in producing many of them Hebrew could have had only an indirect and incidental influence. But with all his simplicity and Oriental tone of diction, the author understands and observes very well the rules of Greek syntax, and even in imitating Hebrew expressions proceeds judiciously (Liicke S. 447). Besides, examples analogous to many of these irregu- larities occur in the Sept., and even in Greek authors ; though certainly not in such thick succession as in the Revelation. In reference to particulars we remark : Rev. ii. 20 is probably to be construed thus : otl aeli]TLV koX BiBdaKei kul ifKava etc. wJio^ while she pretends to he a prophetess^ teacher amd seduces etc. The blending of two constructions explains vii. 9 elSoy, koX t^ov o^\o<; TToXy? ... eLKoiJiivrj virdp'^ei ainfj evhalfxovL eivat, TfKdv7]LijLO)cro, 1 Cor. iv. 8 i^Brj KeKopea^ikvot eare • r^Br] irrXovTijaare, Xwph rj/jLMv i/3aaL\€ua-aT€, xiii. 4-8 ; xiv. 26 ; 1 Thess. v. 14 ; 1 Pet. ii. 17 ; 1 Tim. iii. 16 ; 2 Cor. vii. 2 ; Jas. v. 6 ; 1 Pet. v. 10 etc. Similar is Demosth. Phil. 4, p. 54 a. ; Pantaen. 626 a. ; Xen. Cyr. 7, 1, 38 ; Weber, Demosth. p. 363. b) In antitheses, where the force of the contrast is thus made to strike the reader more pointedly : 1 Cor. xv. 43 f. airdpeTai iv drifiia, iyeiperaL iv So^t], cnrelperai, iv aadeveia^ iyelpeTai iv Bvvdfiei, aireip. acofia -^vxikov, iyetp. aoifui TrvevfjuariKov, Jas, i. 19 ird^ dv9pco- 7ro9 Tavi'9 et9 to aKovaac, ySpaSu? et? to \d\.7](Tai, cf. further, Mark xvi. 6 ; Jno. iv. 22 ; vi. 63 ; viii. 41 , Stallb. Plat. Crit. p. 144 and Plat. Protag. p. 52. So, in general, in the counterpoising of sen- tences, as Acts XXV. 12 Kuiaapa itrLKeKkqaaL^ iirl Kaiaapa iropevarj, cf. Eurip. Iphig. Aul. 464. 561 c) Especially when a reason or explanation is suhjoined to a statement (Krii. p. 223), or an application or exhortation is de- duced from what has been said (Stallb, Plat, Alcib. 2 p. 319), Rev, xxii, 10 firj a(jipcvyia-r]v) ; 41 (Kal) ; 42 (re) ; Acts xii. 1-3 (he four times) ; 5 (ovv and he) ; 6 (Se) ; 7 (kuL twice and he) ; 8 (8e twice and Kal) ; 9 (/cat twice and he) ; 10 (/cat twice and 8e) ; 11 («at) ; 12 (tc) ; 13 (he) ; 14 (km and Se) ; 15 (he three times) ; 16 (he twice) ; 17 (he,, re, and Kal) ; 18 (he) ; 19 (8e and /cat) ; 20 (Se twice) ; 21, 22 (he) ; 23 (he and /cat') ; 24 f. (he) ; xxv. 1 (ovv) ; 2 (re) ; 4, 5 (o5f) ; 6, 7 (8e), etc. Not much more characteristic, yet aiming at greater diversity, is the 503 connection, in the historical style, effected by tot6 (especially in Matt.), 7th ed. fiera tovto or ravra (especially in John and Luke), iv c/ceiVais rai? ij/icpais etc. (in isolated cases etra). The polysyndeton between clauses not purely narrative is designed to give them prominence as individual portions of a compound sentence, e.g. Jno. X. 8 TOUTO) o 6vpu)p6 Tpet6aaev, vi. 2 oTav ovv 7rot^9 h\€7}p,oavvi]v, pLT] aa\Trl<7r}ome 07ie among you is afflicted (I suppose the case), let him pray; 1 Cor. vii. 21 hov\oiXel/x€v (ii. 3), Acts xxvii. 42 Ttiiv OTpaTUiyrStv ^ovXr] iyevero, Iva tovs Sccrju-wras dTroKTCtVojcrtv (on the other 567 hand, vs. 12), Rev. xix. 8. This mode of expression is not always adopted from a love of amplification (a peculiarity of the later language), but is employed sometimes to -give more forcible prominence, and sometimes to attain a more flexible construction. 9. By these various means of connection, the style of the N. T. is shaped into an organic structure which is by no means destitute of variety, though it is inferior in this respect to the style of Greek authors. In this way are constructed periods even of considerable length, particularly in Luke (and especially in the Acts), e.g. Luke i. 1-3 ; Acts xii. 13 f. ; xv. 24-26 ; xvii. 24 f. ; xx. 9, 20 f. ; xxiii. 10 ; xxvi. 10-14, 16-18 ; Rom. i. 1-7 ; 1 Pet. iii. 18-22 ; Heb. ii. 2-4 ; 2 Pet. i. 2-7. At the same time it must be admitted that, after the beginning of a long period has been made, the thread of the arrangement is frequently broken, and the sentence terminates in some kind of anacoluthon or remains quite unfinished Rom. iii. 8 ; xii. 6-8 ; xvi. 25 f. 27 ; Mark vi. 8 f. ; Gal. ii. 4 f. ; 2 Pet. ii. 4-8 ; 2 Thess. ii. 3 f. ; see § 63, or at least is commenced anew 2 Pet. ii. 5 sq. ; Eph. v. 27 ; Jno. viii. 53 ; Rev, ii. 2, 9. The N. T. writers, 482 further, have desisted from one mode of constructing ramified ^'l" 6^ sentences, in that they regularly do not incorporate quotations, though but of small extent, in an indirect form, but express them directly, and without introducing them always by otl as an external connective or by A,e7ft)i;, as in Matt. ix. 18 ; xxvi. 72; Mark xi. 32; Luke V. 12 ; Jno. i. 20 ; xxi. 17 ; Gal. i. 23 ; Acts iii. 22 ; v. 23, etc. They often, even when they begin with an indirect quotation of others' words, pass over very soon into the oratio directa, as in Luke V. 14 ; Acts i. 4 ; xxiii. 22 ; see § 63. The same takes place in particular after verbs of requesting ; in which case instead of subjoining the request indirectly, by means of an Inf. or a clause with tva (§ 44, 8), the precise words of the petitioner are stated, as in Luke xiv. 18 epwrw ere, e)(e fie iraprjTTjfievov, vs. 19 ; v. 12 ; Jno. iv. 31 ; ix. 2 ; Phil. iv. 3 ; Acts ii. 40 ; xvi. 15 ; xxi. 39 ; Matt. viii. 31 ; xviii. 29 ; 1 Cor. iv. 16. However, what the style loses thus in compactness, it gains on the other hand in animation and vividness. Further, see Schleiermacher, Herm. 131. Note. It is interesting to notice, in parallel sections, especially in the 63 546 § 61. POSITION or woeds and clauses. first three gospels, the variety as respects the structure and connection of 608 sentences. Luke will be found by such comparison invariably the most '" *"• expert writer, and more careful than the others also in the selection of his words ; (he prefers, for instance, idiomatic expressions, verba composita and decomposita). This subject, however, belongs to N. T. Stylistics. 668 §61. position of words and clauses, especially when irregular (hyperbaton). 1. The arrangement of the individual words of a sentence is, in general, determined by the order in which the conceptions are formed, and by the specific relation which the different parts of the sentence (as groups of words) bear to each other. This rela- tion requires, for instance, that the adjective should regularly be placed in immediate contact with its substantive, the adverb with its verb or adjective, the Genitive with its governing noun, tli-e preposition with its case, and one member of an antithesis with the other. In particulars, however, the connection of a clause with what precedes (cf. Heb. xi. 1 ; 1 Tim. vi. 6 ; Col. ii. 9 ; Phil. iv. 10), the greater (ilictorical) emphasis to be given to a word, even to a greater or less degree the requirements of euphony, regulate the respective position of the words. Sometimes, how- ever, the arrangement depends on the nature or the conventional importance of the ideas (e.g. terra marique, etc.). It is not nec- essary that the word to be emphasized should be placed at the commencement of the clause ; it may even stand at the end (see e.g. Jacob, Lucian. Alex. p. 74), and in any case in that position which from the nature of the sentence gives it the most striking prominence. For example, intentional connection with what pre- 433 cedes causes a relative pronoun, even in an oblique case, usually 6th ed. to begin the clause etc. The position of words is determined therefore, by the laws of the succession of thought and by rhetorical aims (Hm. Soph. Trach. p. 131). And although these leave great latitude to the spontaneous mental movements of the writer, and are never felt by the practised author as trammels ; yet just because the arrangement of words decidedly serves logical and rhetorical purposes, only a small part of it usually becomes so habitual with an individual writer that it can be considered as a prominent characteristic of his style.^ 1 No very thorough treatise is known to me on the ar-anffcment of words in Greek- Kiihner's attempt, however, to vindicate for this subject (under the name of Topik) its § 61. POSITION OF WORDS AND CLAUSES. 547 2. The arrangement of words in the N. T. is in the main deter- 509 mined by the same principles as in the Greek prose authors, for ''"J* these principles are but to a very small extent confined to any particular nation. It must be remarked, however, that a. The arrangement of words is bolder and more diversified in the didactic writings, particularly those of Paul, than in the his- torical books ; since in the former the rhetorical element is more influential, while in the (synoptical) gospels the Hebraistic type of arrangement predominates. b. Especially in the narrative style, a wide separation of the two principal parts of a sentence, the Subject and the verb (Pred- icate), is avoided ; and, in accordance with the Hebrew mode of expression, sometimes the verb is advanced nearer to the Subject, sometimes, when the Subject is complex, only the principal Subject precedes the verb, and the others follow (see § 58, 6), lest the attention should be kept too long in suspense. Relative clauses, too, are if possible so placed as to be introduced only after the full enunciation of the principal clause. On the whole, the arrange- ment of words in the N. T. is simple and free from all affectation, as well as from stiffness or monotony. Gersdorf, in his well-known work, has professed to point out numerous peculiarities of indi- vidual N. T. writers ; but on strict examination it will be found that a) he has not duly investigated the several particulars on which the arrangement of words is in every case dependent ; and b) under the impression that it might become the invariable usage of a writer to place e.g. the adverb before or after the verb, he has propounded and partly executed a species of critical inquiry that merits the charge of prejudgment. A philosophical work on this 484 subject would be a great acquisition to verbal criticism. It is not a matter of indifference whether a writer employs to Trvcv/ota Tov df.ov or TO TTvevfjia TO Tou Oiov (cf. § 20, 1), or, without the articles, TTVivfUj. Oeov or ^€01; ttv. Every individual passage of the N. T. must be elucidated according to its respective stylistic conformation. To lose sight due place in grammar deserves thanks (ii. 622 ff.) ; Mdv. also has collected some observa- tions on the subject (SjTitax, S. 258 ff.). In regard to Latin, special inquiries were previously instituted in connection with the doctrine of sound, and the subject is ably though briefly handled by Zumpt, Grammat. S. 626 ff. ; cf. also Hand, Lehrb. des lat. Styls S. 307 ff. ; Gernhard, commentatt. gramm. P. 8 (Jen. 1828. 4to.). On the ancient languages in general, see H. Weil, de I'ordre des mots dans les langues anciennes etc. Paris, 1844. Svo. As respects the habitude of individual writers in the arrangement of words, Tzschirner, for instance, who strove after a prose rhythm, could not fail to be recognized in any one of his writings. 548 § 61. POSITION OF WORDS AND CLAUSES. of this, neglecting the Codd. (as well as the ancient versions, and the more or less free quotations in the Fathers), and invariably to attribute to a writer one and the same arrangement of words, is empirical pedantry. If the adjective is usually placed thus : <^6^oa\r) re koX ^e^aiav koX el7) Be Trpo? etc. Luke xvi. 12 ; xxiii. 31 ; Jno. ix. 17 ; xxi. 21, likewise in 2 Cor. ii. 4 ov^ Xva XvrrrjdriTe, uXXd rrjv dydTrrjv Xva yvbiTG, xii. 7 ; 1 Cor. ix. 15 ; Acts xix. 4 ; Rom. xi. 31 ; Col. iv. 16 ; Gal. ii. 10 (Cic. div. 1, 40 ; Mil. 2 fin. ; Krii. 236), as well as in 1 Cor. vi. 4 /Blcotlko, fikv ovv KpLT'qpia idv e^rjTC (such postpone- ment of idv is frequent in Demosth., see Klotz, Devar. p. 484) ; Rom. xii. 3 eKdarcp ox? ifiepcaev p^erpov iriareo)';, 1 Cor. iii. 5; viii. 7 ; 512 Jno. xiii. 34 (Cic. off. 2, 21, 72) ; 2 Thess. ii. 7 p,6vou 6 Karixfov dprt eo)? etc fiiaov yemjTac, finally in Rom, viii. 18 ovk d^ia rd TraOrjfjLara T. vvv Kaipov Trpo? t. p^iWovaav ho^av d7roKdX,v(f>drjvaij Gal. iii. 23 ; Heb. x. 1 ; 1 Cor. xii. 22. b. At other times we find a closer specification, which only occurred to the writer after the sentence had been arranged, 672 brought in afterwards ; as, Acts xxii. 9 to p,ev ^w? idedaavTo, rrjv Be <^wvrjv OVK rjKova-av rov XaXovvro^; p,oi, iv. 33 p^eydXy BvvdfMet dnreSlBovv ro p^aprvpiov ol diroaToXoi Tr) (Diod. S. exc. Vat. p. 23), Col, iii. 11 'EXXrju K. 'lovhalo^. (Cod. D has in Matt, xiv. 21 ; xv. 38 [and in the latter passage Cod. Sin, also] TratBia koI jvvalKed6yyoi<; firj 80S, ttco? yvcocrdrjaeTai ro avXovfievov etc. instead of rd dylrv-)(a, (^Kaiirep) (fxov. BlS., 6fj,(o<;, edv fii] etc., and Gal. iii. 15 o/itu? dvdpcoTTOv KeKvp(i)fjLein}v BiaOijKtjv ovBel<; dderel instead of o/i. ovZe\<; aJderel (see Bengel, and mj Comment, in loc), cf. Plato, Phaed. 70 554 § 61. POSITION OF WORDS AND CLAUSES. 91 c. (fyo^eiTUi /j,T) 7) '^v^r) ofioij koI Oeiorepov Kol KaXkiov bv rod awfjLaro^ TrpoairoWinjTai, see Hm. and Lob. Soph. Aj. 15 ; Doederlein, Soph. Oed. C. p. 396 ; Pflugk, Eiirip. Audrom. p. 10 and Hel. p. 76.^ 489 Likewise the transposition of a negative is not altogether rare 6tb ed. jjj Greek authors (especially the poets, see Hm. Eurip. Hec. vs. 12). Then, however, there is either a suppressed antithesis, e.g. Plat. Crit. 47 d. TreiOofievoi /u-r/ rfj twv eiralovjwv Bo^y, legg. 12, 943 a. ; Xen. M. 3, 9, 6 ; cf. Kiihner XL 628 ;^ or the negative, instead of 576 being joined to the word denied, is prefixed to tlie wliole sentence, as in Plato, Apol. 35 d. a /jli]T€ r)'yov/xaL KoXa elvac firjre BUaia, Xen. Eph. 3, 8 ori, firj to (f)dp/jiaKov Oavdai/xov -qv ; so also in Acts vii. 48 aXV oti^ 6 v'\lr(,aTO oi CK (}>aivofjiev(ov to, ^Xe'rrop.eva yeyovevac, and to this sentence the 577 negative is prefixed quite according to rule. The instance to which appeal is made of a transposition of a negation in 2 Mace, vii. 28 OTL ovK i^ ovTcov iTTOLrfaev avra 6 6e6 irapov, Acts i. 1 ; viii. 4 etc. (Demosth. Lacrit. 59.5 a.). So also ixev olv in Lysias pecun. publ. 3 ip ftiv olv rif iroXefiai. Cf. Bornem. Xen. conv. p. 61. This holds also of other conjunctions, see above, p. 363. Also the names of a single person are separated by such conjunctions, Jno. xviii. 10 'Xifitev olv Xlerpos. 560 § 61. POSITION OF WORDS AND CLAUSES. case it sometimes emphasizes them as belonging to the two parallel mem«. bers alike, as in Acts xxv. 23 avv re ;^iXtap;(ois koL avSpdatv, xiv. 5 ; x. 39 ; cf. Plat. legg. 7, 79 G d. ci? tc TroXtrctav Kal ihiovs olkovs, Thuc. 4, 13 and the examples collected by Elmsley as above (also Joseph, antt. 17, 6, 2) 521 and Ellendt, lexic. Soph. II. 796. See, in general, Sommer in Jahn's 7th ed. Archiv I. 401 ff. In the same way ye is placed after an article or mono- syllabic particle in Rom. viii. 32 ; 2 Cor. v. 3 ; Eph. iii. 2, cf. Xen. M. 1, 2, 27 ; 3, 12, 7 ; 4, 2, 22 ; Diod. S. 5, 40 ; see Matthiae, Eurip. Iphig. Aiil. 498 ; Ellendt, as above, I. 344. 582 Many expositors, e.g. Schott, find a trajection of the Kai. (even) in Heb. Vli. 4 w KOL B^KOLT-qv 'A/Spaafx IStoKtv, for <5 SiKarrjv Kal 'A/3p, eS. But the emphasis in this passage lies in the giving of a tenth, and Schulz has correctly translated it. 7. Violent transpositions of clauses ^ have been thought to occur a. Acts xxiv. 22, where Beza, Grotius, and others, in explaining the words 6 VlN ol^ ^A^f^ * I cannot admit that in this sense vs. 1 1 must have run, Koi 4iri.r(Kiffare rh irotTjercu : the 6f\(iv, was, of course, completed long ago, but it is necessary to complete the iroi^aai also. § 62. INTEERUPTED STRUCTURE ; PARENTHESES. 561 exposition propounded by Fritzsche (diss, in Cor. II. 9), which de Wette ably combats. This last critic has recently reproduced the above explanation [which Mey. also has adopted in his 2d, 3d, and 4th eds.] , and I recall the view that I formerly upheld. As to Jno. xi. 15, see above, § 53, 10, 6, p. 459. (In Mark xii. 12 there is nothing whatever of the nature of a trajection. To the double clause is annexed, after its conclusion, the ground of the first member, and then in koX a^ei/re? etc. the result is expressed. 522 Similar is Mark xvi. 3. In Phil. i. 16 f. the two clauses should, '^^^ on the best testimony [Sin. also] , be thus arranged : oi fiev i^ cuydirr}^ . . . ol 8e i^ ipcdeia^;, thus in converse relation to vs. 15 ; 583 this can perplex no reader.) When, in the arrangement of individual clauses, the dependent are placed before the principal, e.g. telic clauses, as in Matt. xvii. 27 ; Acts xxiv. 4 ; Jno. i. 31 ; xix. 28, 31 ; 2 Cor. xii. 7 ; Rom. ix. 11 (see Fr. Rom. II. 297), relative clauses, as in Mark xi. 23 ; Jno. iii. 1 1 ; Rom. viii. 29 etc., con- ditional clauses, as ia 1 Cor. vi. 4 ; xiv. 9, the grounds of such arrangement are obvious to every attentive reader, cf. Kuhner II. 626. Here belongs, probably, also 1 Cor. xv. 2 tivi \6yw cviy-yyeAwa/xi^v vfuv el Karcj^crc ; see Mey. in loc. §62. INTERRUPTED STRUCTURE OF SENTENCES; PARENTHESES. 1. Interrupted sentences are those whose grammatical flow is obstructed by the insertion of a clause complete in itself ;i as, Acts xiii. 8 avdicrraro avTol vfid^ ayvoelv on TroXXa/ci? TrpoeOifjLijv iXOelv tt/oo? v/za? — koI eKcoXvdrjv a'^pL rov Bevpo — iva riva KapTrov cr')(f) koI iv vpuv. The clause thus inserted is denominated a jyarenthesis,^ and is usually separated visibly from the rest of the period by the well-known parenthetical marks.^ According to the preceding definition the 496 6th ed. 1 The definition given in Ruddimann's Instit. 11. 396, ed. Stallb. is not amiss : paren- thesis est sententia sermoni, antequam absolvatur, interjecta. Wilke's definition (Rhetor. S. 226) is too comprehensive. 2 Ch. Wolle, comment, de parenthesi sacra. Lips. 1726. 4to. ; .7. F. Hirt, diss, de parenthesi et generatim et speciatim sacra. Jen. 1745. 4to. ; A. B. Spitzner, comment, philol. de parenthesi libris V. et N. T. accommodata. L. 1773. 8vo. ; J. G. Lindner, 2 comment, de parenthesibus Johanneis. Amstad. 1765. 4to. (A work de parenthesibus Paullinis is a desideratum.) Cf. also Clerici ars crit. II. 144 sqq. Lips. ; Baumgarten, au«fiihrl. Vortr. iiber die Hermeneutik S. 217 ff. ; Kdl, Lehrbuch der Hermen. S. 58 f. (mostly incorrect). 8 To throw away all external marks of a (true) parenthesis, and yet retain inter- 71 562 § 62. INTERRUPTED STRUCTURE ; PARENTHESES. name oi parentheses cannot be applied, in the first place, to inserted subordinate clauses, even though of considerable length, if they are connected in construction with the principal clause by a rela- tive or as Gen. absol. (Rom. xvi. 4 ; ix. 1 ; 1 Pet. iii. 6 ; 1 Cor. v. 4 ; 684 Luke i. 70 ; ii. 23 ; Eph. vi. 2 ; Acts iv. 36), still less to clauses in apposition, such as Jno. xiv. 22 ; xv. 26 ; 1 Pet. iii. 21 ; 2 Jno. 1 ; Acts ix. 17 ; Mark vii. 2 ; 1 Cor. ix. 21, or to clauses annexed by way of explanation or reason to a concluded sentence, such as 523 Jno. iv. 6, 8, 10 ; xi. 2, 51 f. ; xiii. 11 ; xviii. 5 ; xix. 23 ; Mark '"'•^- vii. 3 f. 26 ; Matt. i. 22 f. ; Luke i. 55 ; Acts i. 15 ; viii. 16 ; Rom. viii. 36 ; 1 Cor. ii. 8 ; xv. 41 ; Gal. ii. 8 ; Eph. ii. 8 ; Heb. v. 13 ; viii. 5 ; vii. 11 ; Rev. xxi. 25, or lastly, to those with which the continuation of the discourse, beyond the alleged parenthesis, is grammatically connected, as 1 Cor. xvi. 5 iXevao/xaL 7rp6 • pa^^l, o XiyejaL ipfijjvevofievov BiBda-KuXe, ttov fiivei^ ;^ Sometimes an exhortation is thrust in in the same way, as Matt. xxiv. 15 f. orav tBr}T€ ro ^Bekir/fia . . . eo-To? iv tottu) dylw, 6 dvaytvoacr kcov voeiroi, Tore ol iv rfj ^lovBaia etc. 3. There is no parenthesis in Jno. xi. 30 :, vs. 30 is so far con- nected with vs. 29 as it was necessary to mention the place to which Mary went ; and after the narrator has completed the account of her going out, he passes in vs. 31 to her attendants 1 Aristoph. Acharn. 12 xws rovr' 4a> dew htd ''Irjaov Xp., c5 7} ho^a ek Tovo)vij ijivero /Mia ck nrdvrwv (instead of i^vr)aa» a7rai/Te9),Markix. 20 Ihiiiv (6 iral'i) avrov, rd Trvevfxa €v6v<; ioTrapa^ev avTov (instead of vvb rod irvevfiaro'; ia7rapd')(67]^ , to which Fr. compares Anthol. pal. 11, 488 (?) Kwyoi 8' avrov IBciov, to arofia fxov SeSerat, see also Plat. legg. 6, 769 c. Further, in Luke xi. 11 riva e^ vficju TOP Trarepa alTrjaei 6 vlo'i dprov, fir) \C6ov eiriBcoaei, avT(p ; the question, will he give ? pre-supposes a protasis : a father when asked Jor bread by his son, or, a father whom his son asks for bread (Matt. vii. 9). So too in Acts xxiii. 30 firjwdelarjfi fiot ein^ovXrf^ eh rov dvhpa fieXXeiv eaeadac, where the construction should have continued fxeX\.ovai]epei — ifiol yap ol BoKovvre Xpi, iyelpa'i avrov . . . koL cKad laev, 2 Cor. vi. 9 ; Jno. v. 4-4 ; Col. i. Q (Paus. 10, 9, 1). As to 2 Juo. 2 see below, II. 1 p. 578. An effort to attain a more simple structure, or to give prominence to the second thouglit (particularly in 2 Cor. vi. 9 ; cf. Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 29), is not unfrequently the cause of such an anacoluthon. Heb. viii. 10 (from the 0. T.) is to be explained thus : avrij 17 BiaOrjKr)^ rjv BiadTjaofiat to) oiK(p ^IcrparjX . . . StSov? vofxovi fiov ei? Tr)v Bidvoiav avrcov kcu eirX KapBia^ avTcov eTriypd^p'O) avTOVi. To render /cat before iirtyp. by etiam, as some (Bohme, for instance) do, is forced, and far from being favored by x. 16. As to Jno. i. 32 Te6ea/jLai to irvevfia KaTa^alvov . . . koX efieivev eV avTov (cf. vs. 33 €<^' ov dv iBrjevei and you, the anointing, which . . . abides in you. In both passages, u/ici?, if placed in the relative clause (Lchm.), would in that position of precedence be too em- phatic. Luke xxi. 6 ravra a decopelre, iXevcrovTai, '^fiepai, ev ah ovK a<^e6r)a€raL \i6o<; eVt \ld

v aTria-raXKa 7rpo<; v/judekrj(f)67). Now the writer ought to proceed : and the history from this point of time (the Ascension) I will narrate now in the second part of my loork; but by the mention of the apostles vs. 3 he is led to refer to Christ's appearance after his resurrection, and connects immediately with this the continuation of the narrative. Rom. vii. 12 &)6^r)Tai tov dvhpa (cf. § 43, 5, and Jno. xiii. 29) ; Eph. v. 27 ha TrapaaTTjarj kavTw evSo^ov ttjv iKKk'nauWy /jbTj exovaav cnnkov . . . a\X' Xva rj (17 iKKXrjaia) dyia k. a/i&)/xo9,^ cf. Acta apocr. p. 179 ; Phil. ii. 22 otl, ox? Trarpt tckvov, crvv ifjLol iSovXevaev ek to eva/yjiXcov that, as a child a father, he served (me in my apostolic calling, more appositely) with me etc., Rom. iv. 12 (Ael. an. 2, 42) ; Luke ix. 1 ; i. 73 f. 2 ; Rom. i. 12 ; cf. Mtth. 1529 f ; Schwarz, soloec. p. 89 sq. ; 1 Cor. xiv. 1 t^rfkoine rd TTvev/xaTLKa, puaXkov Be ha 7rpocf)T]Tevr}T€ (where Paul might have written to irpo<^Tev€Lv^, cf. vs. 5 and vs. 11; Rev. iii. 18.; 600-?*- Acts xxii. 17. The following are bolder : Mark xii. 38 f. twv deXovTwv iv aToXah •TrepiTraTelv Kal dairaafiov^i (da-Trd^ea-Oat) iv Tai<; dyopat'i etc. ; 510 Jno. viii. 53 fj,rj av fiei^ayv el tov Trar/oo? '^/jlmv 'A/3pad/jb, 09x49 •'^*^ direOave ; Kal ol irpocfiriTai direOavov, where the regular construction required the continuation of the interrogative form: Kal tmv 7rpo(fyr)Tcbv, oXTLve XlfKovL etc. in reference to the chief apostle, then follow iu vss. 17-19 the names of the rest in direct dependence on eTroLrjaev, and only in vs. 17 is subjoined a similar statement, which no more breaks the flow of the discourse than in vs. 19 09 koI irapeBoiKev etc. does. The whole structure would be regnlar had Mark said in vs. 16 Slficova, c5 iiridriicev ovojia etc. Under this head comes also the transition from a relative construction to a personal, as in 1 Cor. viii. 6 els Bf.o^ . . . €$ ov ra Trai/ra Kat t^ju-cis €t5 avTOv, 2 Pet. ii. 3 o t s to Kpifia (.KiraXai ovk dpyei kol rj aTrtuXcia avTutv ov ward^eL, Rev. ii. 18, see above, p. 149 ; Weber, Demosth. p. 355 sq. Essentially similar is Luke x. 8 cis fjv av ttoXiv dsepxrjfrOe, Kat 8€';)^wvTat (01 TToXirai) v/xas etc. On Rev. vii. 9 elSov ical IBov ox\o X/aio-Tw, ovTo> . . . ai ywaiKes rots dvSpacrtv (tiTroTao-o-cor^wo-av) ; 2 Tim. i. 5 i/Tis ivwKrfaev iv Trj fjidfiixri crov . . . 7r€7r€to-/Aat 8e, on Kat ev ay€iv Kpia fxr^Sk irulv oivov, //.T^Se iv (S 6 d8€X<^ds crov TrposKOTTTci etc., after the second fx.r]8e, the general word TToulv (Aristot. Nicom. 8, 13, G), or such an expression as make use of, is probably to be supplied. As to Phil. ii. 3 see below, p. 587 (Lob. paralip. p. 382). In Ileb. x. 6, 8 oXoKavrwfiaTa kol irepl a/xapTias ovk €vSoK7jo-as the general notion 6v(Tia<; is to be educed from oXok. for Trcpl d/x., as in Heb. x. 38 the general term a.v6p(iiiro% is to be gathered from 8i»caios (cf. Kiihner II. 37). In Rev. vi. 4 we must abstract from AayS. t. up. c/c Trj<; yjjs the concrete ot KaTotKovKres ctt' avr^s as a subject for (T(f>a$ovaL. Yet here, too, the omission is but partial. (For examples of all the 515 preceding cases from Latin, see Lindner, lat. Ellips. S. 240 ff.) At the ^^*^ same time, in all these cases the incompleteness of the sentence (viewed grammatically and logically) renders it obviously necessary to supply 606 something. This is not the case in Jno. viii. 15 v/u,€ts Kara t^v a-dpKa KpiviTe, cyw ov Kpivui ovSe'va, where on the contrary the second clause is so concluded by ovScVa that nothing whatever requires to be supplied : ye Judge according to the Jlesh, hut I judge no one (not merely, no one according to the flesh, but absolutely no one). To supply KaTa r^v aapKa 543 from the foregoing clause could only be justified by incongruity in the iflt ei sense without such addition. This, however, I am as unable to discover as Olshausen and Liicke. On the meaning, see especially BCrus. in loc. After et Se jut/ or ci Se fxr] ye (Matt. vi. 1 ; Luke X. 6 ; xiii. 9 ; 2 Cor. xi. 16 etc.; cf. Plat. Gorg. 503c.; Phaed. 63c.; Hoogeveen, partic. gr. I. 845 sq.), and after the expression (current with Paul) ov fjiovov 8i (. . . dAAd Kttt), it is peculiarly common to supply a preceding word or phrase ; as, Rom. v. 3 ov /xovov 8c' (sc. Kav;(w/A€^a ctt* cXttiSi t^s 8o^s vs. 2), dXAo. Kal Kav^to/xc^a etc., v. 11 KaraXXayevrc^ crtnOTjo-oixeOa . . . ov fiovov Sc (jcaTaXXaycKTCs a-oiOrjcr.), dAAd kol kcvx^/acvoi, viii. 23 ; 2 Cor. viii. 19. In Rom. ix. 10 ov p.6vov Sc, dAXd koL 'PcyScKKa etc. something to be gathered from a more distant part of the context appears to be wanting. It is easiest to supply it from vs. 9 ; cf. vs. 12: and (not only) Sarah received a divine promise respecting her son, but also Rebecca, who was yet the mother of two legitimate sons, etc. In Greek cf. Diog. L. 9, 39 TTCVTaKoo-iois TttXdvTois TifirjOrjvai, firj fiovov Si, dAAd koX ^aXKais flKoau Lucian. vit. auct. 7 ov /xovov, dXXd koi tjv Ovpwpelv avrw cTrwmJcn^s, ttoXu 684 §64. DEFECTIVE STRUCTURE. TruTTOTcpo) XPWV '^'^^ Kvvwv, Toxar. 1 (Kypke, obs. II. 165 ; Hoogeveen, partic. II. 956). Analogous is the expression oi fxovov ye . . . dXXa used by earlier authors, e.g. Plat. Phaed. 107 b. ov fx-ovov y, €(f>r] 6 SwKpaTTjs (sc. aTTUTTiav avep^ lovSatos icrriv ovSk r) iv tw (f>av€p(o Trcptro/Ai^ the predicative 'lovSaios and Trcpiro/i.^ must be supplied also to the subject 6 iv tw cjiav. Cf. further Acts viii. 7. 607 Note. It may sometimes happen that a word is to be supplied in the preceding from the subsequent context (Hm. opusc. 151 ; Jacob, Lucian. Alex. p. 109 ; Lindner, lat. Ellips. S. 251 fF.), cf. 1 Cor. vii. 39. But in 516 Rom. v. 16 to supply TrapaTrTw/Aaros after i$ evds from t/c twv TroXXwv Trapa- 6ui ed. TTTw^ttTwv may now be regarded as out of date, see Philippi in loc. And in 2 Cor. viii. 5 eSwicav serves, as usual, also for the clause beginning with Ktti ov, only with the latter it must be taken absolutely : and they did not give as (in extent) we hoped, but their own selves gave they etc. Only in Mark xv. 8 rjp^aro alrfxaOaL KaOm del IttoUi avrols it may seem as if it were necessary to supply ttolcIv after aiTeicrOai, from cttoici ; but the words 644 properly run : to entreat according as he always did for them, from which Tth ed. the object of request may be gathered, but not grammatically supplied. As to Eph.iv. 26, however, where some would supply fj.rj from the second member also in the first, see p. 311. 2. The most frequent real omission is that of the simple copula elvai : a. In the form iari, more rarely in the form y (yet cf. Stallb. Plat. rep. I. 133), because it is obviously suggested by the juxta- position of subject and predicate (Rost 473 f. ; Krii. 240 f. ; cf. Wannowski, syntax, anom. p. 210 sq.) Heb. v. 13 Tra? 6 fjuerc'^wv jaXaKra aTrecpa (eVrt) \6€o-i(ov, but especially in certain set forms of expression Jas. i. 12 /xaKupio^ avrjp, o? etc. (Matt. V. 3, 5-10 ; xiii. 16 ; Luke i. 45 ; Rom. iv. 8 ; xiv. 22 ; Rev. xvi. 15 ; cf. 1 Pet. iv. 14), 8rj\ov ore 1 Cor. XV. 27 ; 1 Tim. vi. 7, avdyKTj with Infin. Heb. ix. 16, 23 ; Rom. xiii. 5, Trto-ro? o ^eo? 1 Cor. i. 9 ; x. 13 ; 2 Cor. i. 18 or TTfcTTo? 6 X6709 1 Tim. i. 15 ; iii. 1 ; 2 Tim. ii. 11, 6 Kvpto^ iyyv'i Phil. iv. 5, a|f09 6 epjdT7]<; t. rpo^7rov o Odvaroi (exists) vs. 40 ; Rom. iv. 13. It is thus sufficient to supply elvai or yiveaOai even in most of those passages where an oblique case or a preposition seems to require a more definite verb ; as, 1 Cor. vi. 13 ra /Spcofiara rfj KoCkia Kcu rf KoCKia Tot9 ^po)fui,<7L, Acts x. 15 (fxovr] ttoXlv e/c Sevripov 609 7rpo9 avrov {iyevero, cf. vs. 13), Matt. iii. 17 (Jno. xii. 28 ■^Xdeu (ovrf)^ 1 Cor. iv. 20 ovK ev Xoytp rj ^aaCkeia tov 6eov, aXX iv BvvdfXet (cf. ii. 6), Rom. x. 1 ; xi. 11 ; 2 Cor. iv. 15 ; viii. 13 (Mey.), 1 Pet. iii. 12 ; Heb. vii. 20. The preposition or case suggests the particular verbal notion to be supplied : (whose final doom) leads to burning, is destined for, results in, etc. As in the last passage iyevero is obviously sufficient, so in the first and second, in accord- ance with the simplicity of the style, nothing more than e'o-Tt is to be supplied. The same applies to 1 Cor. v. 12 ti yap /xot koL tow 518 e^co Kpivevv ; (Arrian. Epict. 2, 17, 14 ri /xot vvv ttjv 7rpov Brjvaplov a measure of ivheat for a denarion I is as obviously suggested by the Genitive of price (p. 206), as in similar forms of expression with us. As to the epistolary forms of salutation in Rev. i. 4 ^Io)dvvr}a\i\v iroi Aristoph. pac. 1063, rpaire is usually supplied (see Bos p. 657 sq.), agreeably to Mosch. 4, 123 ; Phalar. ep. 128. 588 § 64. DEFECTIVE STRUCTUEE. 547 sc. 'xalpetv Xeyei, or Acts xxiii. 26 K\. Avata<; rw KpariaTw '^ye/jLovt 7tbed. ^7]\tKt ^aipecv sc. Xijei,, xv. 23 ; Jas. i. 1, see Fr. Rom. I. 22. In the proverb 2 Pet. ii. 22 vs \ovaafj.ivq els KvXiafxa ^opfSopov, the requisite verb is implied in et?, and cTrto-Tpei/zao-a may easily be supplied, conformably to what precedes. But it is precisely in proverbs, where brevity of expression is necessary, that specific verbs are (by conventional usage) suppressed, cf. yXavK m ' AOijva's, fortuna fortes, and Bhdy. p. 351. Grotefend, ausf. lat-Gramm. II. 397 f . ; Zumpt, lat. Gramm. p. 610. 3. The subject is wholly wanting (Krii. 232) only, a. When it is self-evident ; because the predicate, owing to the nature of the case or to conventional usage, can refer to but one (definite) subject, e.g. /SpovTa (6 Zeu?), aaXTrl^et (6 aaXin'yKrrj'i), avayucoaerai (Demosth. Mid. 386 b.) sc. scriba, see above, § 58, 9 p. 521 sq. From Jewish phraseology may be included under this head the formulas of quotation Xejet Heb. i. 7, elprjKe iv. 4, ^crl viii. 5 (vii. 17 rec. fiaprvpel}, see above, § 58, 9 p. 522. As to Heb. xiii. 5 see Bleek. b. When an expression is introduced the subject of which js at once supplied by every reader's knowledge or memory ; as, Jno. vi. 31 aprov ck tov ovpavov eh(OKev avTol«*> Under a. come also Heb. xi. 12 8td koL d cvos iyewi^O-qo-av, where the 520 term children (descendants) Is readily supplied, and indeed is already im- 6th ei plied in yewaaOaL (cf. Gen. x. 21) ; and Rom. ix. 11 /ai^ttw yap yewrjOevroiv fjLrjSe TT/ja^avTcov, where, moreover, the notion of tckvwv or vlwv is sufficiently intimated in 'Pe/SiKKa i$ cvos kolttjv ex'^vaa etc. vs. 10. In Luke xvi. 4 the subject is the debtors, cf. vs. 5. When the subject is not omitted, but has to be repeated from the context (not Heb. viii. 4), there is room sometimes for a difference of opinion, as in Rom. vii. 1 ; 1 Cor. xv. 25 (Heb. ix. 1). The decision in such cases is not grammatical, but hermeneutical. 4. On the other hand, often but a part of the subject or of the predicate (if it consists of something besides the copula, see above, no. 2) is expressed, and the portion omitted is to be supplied from what is expressed in accordance with conventional usage ; as, Acts xxi. 16 avvTjXdov koX tmv fxaOrjroiv there came also at the same time (some, nve^') of the disciples ; with e/c or airo in Luke xi. 49 i^ avrSiv (iTroKrevovai (Ttm9),xxi. 16; Jno. xvi. 17; xxi. 10; vi. 39; 612 RevJLlO (v. 9) ; xi. 9,i cf. p. 203 ; Heindorf, Plat. Gorg. p. 148 ; Vic. Fritzsche, quaestion. Lucian. 201 ; Jno. iv. 35 on ere Terpd/xrivo^ ioTL (x/>o'i/09), Xen. Hell. 2, 3, 9 ; Luke xii. 47 f. iKelvof 6 SovXo^; . . . Sap'^aeTUL 7roX\a Trveovrt sc. avkfiw Lucian. Char. 3). X<^pO' (Bos p. 560 sqq.) : e| emi/rta? ex adverso Mark xv. 39, which is used likewise in a figurative sense Tit. ii. 8. The same word is usually supplied in Luke xvii. 24 17 daTpairr} rf daTpdirrova-a €K Try; vtr ovpavov elf rrjv irrr ovpavbv Xdfinec (Sept. Job xviii. 4 ; Prov. viii. 28). r) opeiv^ Luke i. 39 early became a substantive, the highlands, the hill country, Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 3 ; Ptol. Geogr. 5,17, 3; 6, 9, 4. . &pa time, is regarded as omitted in the phrase a^' rj<; 2 Pet. Vig. p. 881 found no fault with this local Gen. which became established in the Pro- nominal adverbs ov, irov. And many instances of this very phrase ttjs (avTrjs) 6Sov (cf Bhdy. 138) are cited, and that not merely from poets (Krii. Sprachl. II. 2. S. 157) ; cf. in particular, Thuc. 4, 47, 2 and Krii. on the passage, and Thuc. 4, 33, 3. If any one wishes to bring this local G^en. nearer to the primary import of the Gen. (^ 30, 1), he may take it perhaps thus : out or forih from that {voay). But probably it connects itself more simply with the use mentioned in § 30, 11 p. 207. 1 Many adverbial expressions arose from an ellipsis of W(Js (Bttm. ausf Sprachl. II. 341) or x^^pa (Bos P- 561), such as tSi'a, kot' lUav, Srifiofflcf Acts xvi. 37 etc., jvhich no longer suggest to the mind their origin, Bkdy. 185 f Such an adverbial expression also is oxb juios Luke xiv. 18, which cannot be discovered in the literary language of the Greeks, but was probably current in the language of conversation. It is equivalent to with one mind {iK ixiai yj/yxv^ Dion. H. II. 1058) or with one voice (uno ore, iK ixias ipaiyrjs Herod. I, 4, 21). Wahl, clav. p. 45, after Camerar. is too artifical. It is possible, moreover, that the Greeks did not understand any substantive at all originally, but employed the Feminine (as an abstract, Ewald, Heb. Gr. 645), just as independently as the Neuter, see Schaef. Bos p. 43 and the Review in the L. Lit. Zeit. 1825. no. 179 ; Ihis, however, Hm. opusc. p. 162 will not admit 692 § 64. DEFECTIVE STRUCTURE. iii. 4 ; Luke vii. 45 ; Acts xxiv. 11, which, indeed, had already become completely an adverb (cf. however, Matt. xv. 28). The same applies to i^ avTrj-i Markvi. 25 ; Acts x. 33 etc., which many write as one word, i^avTi]ep€Lv Heb. V. 3 to offer, 7rpo<;Kvvelv to worship Jno. xii. 20 ; Acts viii. 27, Xarpevetv Phil. iii. 3 ; Luke ii. 37 ; Acts xxvi. 7, KoXeiv invite 1 Cor. x. 27 (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 23 ; 8, 4, 1), Kpoveiv knock (at a door) Matt. vii. 7 etc., rrrpo^dWeiv to put forth (of trees), a 75 594 § 64. DEFECTIVE STRUCTURE. horticultural term, Luke xxi. 30. Nautical terms are aipeiv weigh sc. Ta9 djKvpa9T€ erotfidcraL avrS is probably to be rendered : to prepare for him, what ? appears from the context, and ^eviav from Philem. 22 is not to be supplied. In the same way the verbs are used in 1 Cor. xi. 4 Kara Ker}(j.ov ; to speak a word against one, is a phrase complete in itself. In Rev, ii. 6 , also, the rendering hoc — (laudabile) habes does not assume the omission of some similar word in the Greek. A more plausible instance would be Acts v. 29 6 UeVpos koi ol aTTocTToXoi, i.e. ol oXXoL oT XoLTTol OLTT. aud the like ; yet on this see above, § 58, 7 note, p. 520 sq. It would be preposterous also to supply, for instance, eva in Matt, xv, 23 525 ovK aTTiKpidT] airrj koyov or ivi in Luke vii. 7 ciTTC Adyo), or tlvCjv in Mark ^^ *"• ii. 1 8l rjfiepwv (Jacobs, Achill. Tat. p. 440), or even ttoAw in Luke xviii. 4 cTTi )(p6vov. The notion of one is contained in the Singular, and that of several in the Plural. Cf. Lucian. Herm. ToAavrou for one talent, and eun. 6 rifxipav unum diem (in Latin, ut verbo dicam), Lucian. Alex. 15 rjp.ipav rjv irXeiovwv Tta-aapaKovTa, xxiii. 13, 21 ; xxiv. 11 ; XXV. 6 ; Matt. xxvi. 53 -^ is not to be supplied (though it is elsewhere used in such a construction). The Greeks had become accustomed to abbreviate the phrase in this manner, and probably did not regard the word TrXeioces here as a comparative (more than), but as an annexed specification, just as elsewhere the neuter (adv.) vXiov is inserted even without government, see Lob. Phryn. p. 410 sq.; cf. Mtth.. S. 1019. Lastly, some wanted (Pott still) in 2 Pet. iii. 4 d<^' ■^s oi Trarepcs iKoifju'^Orja-av, iravra ovtws Sta/xeVei air apxfji>6akp.ov dvTi 66aXfj,ov koI oBovra avTi oSoktos, the subject and part of the predicate are likewise omitted ; although an indica- tion of the latter is contained in ovtL The words, however, are borrowed from Exod. xxi. 24, where 8aJo-cts precedes. In such well-known expres- sions as the familiar and almost proverbial passages of the law, even a verb may have been suppressed that could not elsewhere have been omitted without ambiguity ; see under 3, b. p. 588.^ 7 Even whole propositions are sometimes omitted by ellipsis (Hm. opiisc. p. 159 ; Vig. 872) : a. Rom. xi. 21 et yap 6 deb^ rwv Kara ^vaiv KkdScov ovk i(f)eiaaTOy /LtJ^TTft)? ovBe (TOV (^eLGerai so. hehoiKa or opdre, wliieli, however, is suggested in /i/jTrw?. In Matt. xxv. 9 the text. rec. [and Cod. Sin.] has fM7]7roT€ ovk, but there is a preponderance of authority f for the reading /AT^Trore ov fxr}, according to which firjiroje would be 528 taken by itself (as dehortatory) hy 710 means ! sc. Batfiev vs. 8 or ^^yeveo-doi TOVTO, cf. Rev. xix. 10 ; xxii. 9 ; Exod. x. 11. In Luke xvi. 8 there is not so much an omission of (prjai or €(f)7) as rather an annexation in oratio recta of the further discourse of him to whom the expression oxi (f)povifjLio ; cf. Acts xxiii. 9 Lchm. 600 § 64. DEFECTIVE STRUCTURE. (for thee) ; xxii. 42 iraTep, el ^ovXev irapeveyKeiv to 'rrorrjpLov rovro air i/jbov • ttXt^i/ etc. In both passages sorrow has suppressed the apodosis. Acts xxiii. 9 ovSev kukov evplaKOfiev iv rw avOpoDira 558 TovTw ' el Be TTvevfia ekahjqaev avTU) rj dyyeXo'; . . . we Jind nothing 7th ed. ^yii if I iJiig jyian ; but if a spirit has spoken to him or an angel — (which the Pharisees utter with gestures expressive of reserve), sc. the matter is significant, or requires caution. Others take the words interrogatively (Lchm.) : if, however, . . . has spoken ? how then ? what is to be done in that case ? See, in general, Fr. Conject. I. 30 sq. Tlie addition pur] Oeopba-xpip^ev found in some Codd. is a gloss. Bornem. has quietly retracted his earlier con- jecture. Moreover, it may be doubted whether in the preceding passage an aposiopesis really occurs, or merely a break in the discourse at vs. 10. In Jno. vi. 62 the apodosis, suggested readily by vs. ^1, is omitted with an air of triumph : how strange will that appear to you ! In Mark vii. 11 vpieh Xer^ere • eav e'lTrr] dv6p(07ro<; Ta> Trarpl rj rfj pb-qrpi' Kop^av . . . o eav i^ epov u><^e\ri6^ 1 k BeairoTy Trjfio(X€v 6 de6T]Tev(ov rj 6 \a\(ov jX(oaaai, (xiv. 33), Jno. vi. 5 i7rdpa<; toi"? 6e\r]v rjcrav Kol 7rdvTeC 6fioXo Sa-fit) Oavdrov CIS Odvarov, oh Se oa-firj ^w^s cts ^wi^v. A savor oj" death unto death, a savor of life unto life, means : an odor of death which, from its nature, can bring nothing else than death, etc. §65. REDUNDANT STRUCTURE. 611 Redundancy of expression is often erroneously supposed to exist in passages where synonymes are found connected in order to express (as frequently in Demosth.) a single main idea, see Schaef. Demosth. I. 209, 320, 756 ; Plutarch. IV. 387 ; V. 106 ; Weber, Demosth. p. 376 ; Franke, Demosth. p. 12 ; Bremi, Aeschin. I. 79 ; Lucian. Alex. ed. Jacob p. 24 ; Poppo, Thuc. III. I. 619 ; Schoem. Plut. Agis 171 ; of. Lob. paralip. 61 sq. But Paul, from whom the examples in question have mostly been taken, 568 is not in the habit of combining in one sentence really synonymous expres- '^^ «i sions, — (not even in Eph. i. 5, 19 ; ii. 1 ; iv. 23 ; 1 Cor. i. 10 ; ii. 4 ; 1 Tim. ii. 1 ; v. 5 ; cf. Jas. iii. 13 ; Jno. xii. 49 ; 1 Pet. i. 4 ; iv. 9 ; 1 Juo. i. 1, etc. ; Fr. Rom. II. 372). A more careful study of Greek, but especially of apostolic diction, precludes a supposition according to which e.g. the apostolic salutation xa-pi-i, cXeos koI elprjvr], would become extremely flat.^ Likewise there is nothing pleonastic in the combinations 6vfi6LXoia? tpyov is the occupation of philosophizing, the cultivation of philosophy, cf. 542 just afterwards dpiaL ^lAoo-o^ias (in Latin cf. virtutis opus Curt. 8, 14, 37, "'"*"• proditionis opus Petr. fragm. 28, 5), not precisely the fabric, system, of philosophy. Xprjixa is different from epyov, and even xPVf^"- with a Genitive is not properly a pleonasm, see Passow under the word. As to ovofia (very frequently regarded as pleonastic, see Kiihnol on Jno. p. 133) Wahl has already given the true view (cf. v. Ilengel, Philipp. p. 160), see also my Simon, lexic. Hebr. under wq ; yet this word certainly requires a more precise handling than it has yet received in N. T. Lexicons. (As to a periphrastic use of 6vop.a in Greek poets, see Mtth. 965.) In Col. ii. 16 iv fji€p€i iopTrj<; rj vov/ATyvias rj o-a/SySartuv is no more pleonastic than in respect (or in the matter) of holidays, new moons, etc. Lastly, in Rom. vi. 6 aw/xa r^s d/Aaprta? is a single composite idea, the body of sin, i.e. the (human) body ; respecting the relation of which to sin no reader of Paul's epistles can be at any loss. See above, p. 188. 8. Nearly all the earlier expositors asserted, that by a sort of half pleonasm KaXeladai is used for elvat (Graev. lection. Hesiod. p. 22 ; Porsoii, Eurip. Hippol. v. 2 ; Blomfield, Aesch. Pers. p. 128 ; on the other hand, EUendt, lexic. Soph. I. 912), in which use at the same time there was thought to be a Hebraism (x'np?> esse). But Brets&hn. lex. man. p. 209 sets the matter right by saying : sum videlicet ex aliorum sententia. Cf. van Hengel, Cor. p. 53 sq. 572 As to Nnpa see my Simon, lex. p. 867. In the N. T. KokelaOat,'^^^'^ always signifies to he named, to he called, Jas. ii. 23 ; Matt. v. 19 ; xxi. 13, especially in reference to names of honor, which denote the possession of a certain dignity, Matt. v. 9 ; Luke i. 76 ; 1 Jno. iii. 1 ; Rom. ix. 26. It is used even as antithetical to elvat (to be), 638 1 Cor. XV. 9 (even so much as to bear the name of an apostle), Luke XV. 19. Nor can ovofid^ea-daL Rom. xv. 20 (1 Cor. v. 1) ; Eph. i. 21 ; iii. 15 ; v. 3 be weakened down to a mere esse ; (it is even emphatic, as /i7/Se in the last passage shows). ^ It is an 1 The passages adduced by Schwarz, Comment, p. 719 sq., from Greek authors to 616 § 65. REDUNDANT SENTENCES. utter perversion when many expositors render even Heb. xi. 18 €v IcrauK KKr^drjaerai aot aTrip/xa : existet tibi posteritas ; (Scliulz, too, very inaccurately translates it : thou wilt receive offspri7ig'), EvpiaKeadat also is said (see Pott on 1 Cor. iv. 2 ; of, the annotators on Pint. educ. 13, 5), like nst?? (cf. on the other hand my Simonis p. 575), often to be used instead of ehuL. But these two verbs are always distinguished from each other by this, that ehai denotes the quality of a thing in itself, while eypla-KeaOai denotes that quality as found, discovered, recognized, in the subject. Matt. i. 18 €vpi6r) iv yacrrpl e-xpvaa it proved (it appeared^ that she was with child (rjv iv yacnpl e-xpvaa might have been previously 543 said), Luke xvii. 18 ou^y; evpeOrjaav imocnpey^avTe'i Bovvat ho^av tcS ' dea el fjbTj 6 dX\oj€vr) neither was their place any more found (any more to be seen) in heaven, as we say : every trace of them was blotted out (cf. Rev. xvi. 20 ; xviii. 21 ; xx. 11), 1 Pet. ii. 22 ovBe evpedrj BoXo'i iv rw aTo/xaTi avrov nor was guile found in his mouth, no guile could be detected in his words (Rev. xiv. 5). Phil. ii. 7 was correctly rendered by Luther. The Greek passages adduced as parallel, by Kypke I. 2 ; Palairet p. 198 ; Schwarz et al., prove nothing. In Mr. Anton. 9, 9 TO avvaywybv iv tw KpeixTOVL iinTeivofievov evplcrKero etc. 673 evpLo-KOfxac retains its proper meaning : was found. Hierocl. in 7th eJ. carm. Py thag. p. 88 ed. Lond. dp^r] fiev rcov dpercov rj <^p6vr}cn? hrava/MCfjuvijaKtov, the parti- cle Qivaiv ; they therefore cannot be ingrafted on the stock again. In strictness the language ought to run : again to unite them to the stock, viz. by ingrafting. On the other hand, Col. iii. 25 6 aStKwv xo/xiciTai o rihiK-qa-f. could hardly in accordance with the genius of the Greek language be regarded as § 66. CONDENSED AND EXPANDED STEUCTURE. 621 brachylogical. It denotes (according to the signification of KOfu^ecrdai) pretty nearly : he will reap the wrong ; not that he will suffer the same wrong which he has committed, but its fruits, the reward of it, the wrong in the form of penalty. Cf. Eph. vi. 8. Similar to this are Jno. xii. 5 8ia Ti ToSro TO fJLvpov ovK hrpadri . . . kox cBoOtj TrT(i)xo16apy rd vorjixara vfiMv diro Tpj however, there is no MS. authority for ixovoi, later editors have with reason declined to follow him. 2 The passage quoted by Hottinger in loc. from Plat. rep. 2, 367 d. runs as follows, § 66. CONDENSED AND EXPANDED STRUCTURE. 623 ir\ov(no aiiri] 5j' avriji/ rhy txoi'Ta 6fiin]\o}(Te to, voTjfiaTa t€)v air laroiv^ 1 Thess. iii. 13 (TT'qpi^ai Tdopo' r}^t.a 7iix.u)v. But such dilFuseness would have been intolerable to every classic author also, cf. Eurip. Phoen. 536 es olkovs cis^A^e koI i^^XO" (where to be sure the arrangement is more simple) and Va^ckeu. in loc. See also Poppo, Thuc. I. I. 289. Note. In Acts x. 39 there would in like manner be a brachylogy in the words Koi ■fifiii'5 fidprvpe^ Trdvrwv oiv cTrotr/trcv . . . , ov kul (tte reading according to the best authorities [Cod. Sin. also]) dvelXov Kpe/Aao-avres eTri $vXov, if the meaning were : we are witnesses of all that he did, also of this, that they put him to death. But this acceptation is not necessary. Besides, whatever opinion others may hold, Kai here means nothing else than etiam (adeo), and the rendering tamen (Kulmol) is in this connection very doubtful. Likewise Luke xxiv. 21 TpLTrjv Tavrrjv rffxepav ayci a-rjixepovy cf. 2 Cor. xii. 14 ; xiii. 1, could only be regarded as a brachylogy by taking German as the standard. In Greek the numeral was' considered simply as a predicative adjunct, cf. Achill. Tat. 7, 11 Jac. Tpirrjv Tavrrjv -fjixipav yeyovev d<^av7;s, Dion. Hal. IV. 2095 TpuLKocrrov iros tovto dve^ofiSa. etc. see Bornem. Luc. p. 161 and on analogous cases Krii. 237. Further, there is no brachylogy in 1 Cor. i. 12 lKa(TTod, eyw 8e XptoToS. In these four 581 Statements Paul intended to comprehend all the declarations current in 'tli ei the church respecting religious partisanship ; each uses one of the following 551 expressions. Cf. 1 Cor. xiv. 26. Lastly, 1 Cor. vi. 11 ravra rtvcs 7Jt€, rightly understood, contains no brachylogy, see § 58, 3 p. 513. 4. But the Greek language has a method of blending sentences and parts of sentences so as to give discourse still greater com- pactness and conciseness, viz. by means of what is called Attraction (Bttm. Gr. § 538, 1), which can be termed a species of brachylogy only under one point of view. The name of Attraction, as is well known, has been given by modern grammarians to that mode of expression by means of which two portions of discourse (especially clauses), logically (in sense) connected, are also grammatically (formally) blended. A word (or assemblage of words), which properly belongs to but one of these portions (clauses), is gram- 648 matically extended to the other, and so applies to both at once (to the one clause, logically, and to the other, grammatically), as urbem, quam statuo, vestra est; where urbs properly belongs to vestra est (for there are two propositions : urbs vestra est, and quam statuo'), but is attracted by the relative clause and mcorpo- rated into it, so as now to belong to both clauses, logically to vestra est, and grammatically to quam statuo. See Hm. Yig. p. 891 sqq.,i ^ Hm. as above : Est attractio in eo posita, si quid eo, quod simul ad duas orationis partes refertur, ad quarum alteram non recte refertor, ambas in unam conjungit. Cf. 79 626 § 66. CONDENSED AND EXPANDED STRUCTURE. in particular G. T. A. Kriiger, gramm. Untersuch. 3 Theil. The copious diversity of this mode of expression encountered in Greek authors, does not, indeed, occur in the N. T. ; yet even there we find not a few instances of attraction which were not recognized as such by the earlier expositors, and which, to say the least, created no small difl&culty in interpretation (see e.g. W. Bowyer, Conjectur: 1. 147). 5. Attraction in general, so far as it alffects the connection of sentences or clauses, may be reduced to three principal sorts : Either, 1. something is attracted from the dependent by the prin- cipal clause ; or, 2. the principal clause transfers something to the dependent (accessory) clause ; or, 3. two clauses, predicated of one and the same subject, are blended into one. The 1st sort ccfmprehcnds such constructions as the following : a. 1 Cor. xvi. 15 otSare rrjv o Ik lav J!re<^ava on iarlv dirap'^T) T^9 '-4;^ata• xi. 31 ; Rev. xvii. 8 (Gen. i. 4 ; 1 Mace. xiii. 53 ; 2 Mace. ii. 1 ; 1 Kings V. 3 ; xi. 28, etc.). Also when interrogative clauses follow, 552 as Luke iv. 34 olhd ere, ri? eZ, Mark i. 24 (see Heupel and Fr. in ^ *^ loc. ; Boissonade, Philostr. epp. p. 143), Luke xix. 3 Ihelv rov ^Irjaovv, Ti<} icrn, cf. Schaef. ind. Aesop, p. 127;^ Jno. vii. 27 tovtov otBafiev, TTodev iariv (Kypke in loc). Acts xv. 36 iiriaKeylrcofMeda Toi'9 dSeXcfyov^ . . . ttw? ep^oucrt, 2 Cor. xiii. 5; Jno. xiii. 28 (Achill. Tat. 1, 19 ; Theophr. char. 21 ; Philostr. ep. 64). And the same form of anticipation occurs from clauses with ha, fit] etc. 649 Col. iv. 17 /3Xe7re ttjv ScaKoviav, Xva avrrfv 7r\r]pol d. The most simple attraction, but one of very frequent occur- rence, is that in which a relative, instead of being put in the case (Ace.) required by the verb of the relative clause, is made to correspond to the verb of the principal clause, and consequently is put in the case governed by it : Jno. ii. 22 iiriaTevcrav roS 'Xoym w elirev (for 6V), see § 24, 1 p. 163. e. Lastly, under this head would come 1 Pet. iv. 3 dpKCTo^ 6 irapeXrjXvBoo'i ')(p6vo^ to (SovXrj/xa rwv eOvSiv KaretpydaOai, if, with Wahl, we were to resolve it thus : dpKerov ianv tj/mlv, tov ')(jp6vov . . . Kareipy. cf. Bttm. § 138, 1, 7. But there is no need of such nicety. On the other hand it should not be said that in Phil. i. 7 BiKaiov ifiol TovTo (l>povelv etc. attraction is neglected (^SUaLo^ el/^t r. <^pov.^ Mtth. 766, for the Greeks also use SUaiov eari with the Infin. impersonally ; only they are less accustomed to connect with it the Dat. of the person, than to connect the personal word with the 111 fin. and put it in the Ace. Her. 1, 39. The former is the more simple and natural construction. 2) The simplest form in which a subordinate clause exerts an 583 attraction on the principal clause is when the relative pronoun, ''"' *^ which should agree in number and gender with the noun of the principal clause, agrees in these respects with the noun of the subordinate clause ; as, 1 Tim. iii. 15 kv oU(p deov, rJTL^ iarlv eKKkrjaia, Rom. ix. 24 (juKexn} i\.€ov<;^ oO? koI eKdXeaev r]fid /xadjjrfj, Iva jivrjraL 0)9 6 BtBda-Ka\o<; airrovj koX 6 Bov\oy]fx.ovvrt. cis Tii/a, is of frequent 7th ei occurrence (§ 32, 1 p. 222), cf. 3 Cj'nn 2 Sam. xxiii. 9, 2 b^p Isa. viii. 21 (to which perhaps may be compared also /xvKTT/pt^eiv ev tlvl 3 Esr. i. 49 ; see, on the other hand, 2 Chron. xxxvi. 16), though dyvociv h nvi also is not without example in later writers ; see Fabricii Pseudepigr. n. 717. 6. But attraction is also confined to a single clause. In this case it is especially noticeable that two local prepositions are blended into one, and thus the clause gains in terseness (Hm. Vig. 893), Luke xi. 13 6 irar-qp 6 i^ ovpavov Scoaei irvevfjia ayiov for 6 irarrip 6 iv ovpavS 8(ocret i^ ovpavov irv. cuy., [Matt. xxiv. 17 ra eK rrj^; olKiaafc is to be deduced from the collective tU %77pa, see Hutlier in loc, as a Plur. often refers to 654 rk (Rev. xiv. 11), see Herbst, Xen. mem. p. 50. On the other hand, in Rom. xiii. 6 Xeirovpyol deov elauv refers to ol dp)(ovT€ (^TraiBLO)^ BiBm Kal firj ^od (to iraiB.^. Cf. Poppo, observ. in Thuc. p. 189 ; Schaef. Demosth. lY. 214 and Plutarch. lY. 281, 331 ; Y. 86, 295 ; Stallb. Plat. Gorg. 215 ; Maetzner, Antiphon 145 ; Schoem. Is. 294. As to Hebrew usage, see Gesen. Lgb. 803. d. "Words referring to something antecedent are used in a loose reference. On avTO'i see § 22, 3 p. 145 sq. So in Gal. ii. 2 avToU refers to 'lepoaoXvp^a vs. 1, but the inhabitants are meant. Sim- ilarly in Acts xvii. 16 ; 2 Pet. iii. 4 avTov is to be understood of Christ, who has not been expressly named, but is intimated in wapovcrla. In Jno. xv. 6 avTa refers to the Sing, to KXrjfjLa, which is in apposition to el' rt?. In Acts iv. 7 avTovv pIttootoXodv ovk €i8ov, el fx-q laKw/Sov tov a8cXOT€p(ov rjfiwv ev T<3 oiko). 2. The very structure of the sentence has been disturbed by the inadvertence of the writer in Luke xxiv. 27 ap^dfjbevo6vov . . . curwerovi, davvOkrovi (Wetst. in loc). In other passages words of similar derivation are placed together ; as, 1 Cor. ii. 13 iv 8tBaKrol eavrcov k'^copovu,, 2, 5, 7 iravrr) yap Trdvra Tot«t Writers occasionally use strange or uncommon words, or forms, for the purpose of producing a paronomasia (Gesenius LG. S. 858) e.g. Gal. V. 7 TreldeaOac ... 17 ireiafjiop'^ (see my Comment, in loc), cf. die Bisthiimer sind verwandelt in Wiistthiimer, die Abteien 1 See also Doederlein, Progr. de brachjlogia p. 8 sq. Especially a large collection of such paronomastic combinations will be found in E. A. Diller, Progr. de consensu notionum qualis est in vocibus ejusd. originis diversitate formarum copulatis. Misen. 1842. 4to. 638 § 68. REGARD TO SOUND, ETC. 660 sind nun — Eaubteien (Schiller in Wallenstein's Lager), Verbes- serungen niclit Verboserungen.^ 2. Annomiiiatio is akin to paronomasia, but differs from it in this : that it adds to a regard for the sound of words, a regard to their meaning also (as, in German : Trtiume sind Schaume) ; consequently for the most part it consists of antitheses, e.g. Matt. xvi. 18 (TV el IIerpovXdKo}v iOo€(rLV, Wisd. i. 10 otl ovs ^TjXwo-ew? oLKpoarat to. navra kox 6povia<; crou Ipya (cf. Grimm, Comment, on the Book of "Wisdom, In trod. p. 40), Acta apocr. p. 243 ef dTreiptas paXXov Sc aTropia?, Macar. hom. 2, 1 to o-dpa ov^i cv p.ipo 302 sqq. ; after condi- tional clauses 303 ; in relative clauses 306 ; in indirect questions 308 ; after particles of time 308. Of. Imperative, Indicative, Infinitive, etc. Names of persons, from oxytones throw back the accent 51 ; indeclinable ac- cented on last 52 ; contracted 102 sq. ; with the art. 112 sq. Negation (473 sqq.) continued 487 ; un- conditional, in antithesis or followed by awd 496 ; in oaths expressed by e«500; in interrogative sentences 510. Negative Particles 473 sqq. ; objective and subjective 473 ; use of fj.'fi 476 sq. ; in relative clauses with Sv 480 ; with the infin. 481 ; with participles 482 ; in succession 487 sqq. ; after an affirm- ative sentence or followed by aXAa 495 ; two in a single clause 498 ; with the moods 500 sqq. ; in dependent clauses 502 ; the intensive oh ftij 505 sq., in interrog. sentences 510. Neuter used of persons 178 ; for the fem. 178; verbs connected with their pred. nouns by preps. 232 sq. ; plur., when joined to a sing, and when to a plur. verb 514; adj. used as subst. 517; 648 ENGLISH INDEX. neut. adj. or part, referring to a whole clause .'533. K". T. Grammar, Language, etc. see Grammar, Language etc. Nominative the, absolute 181, 574 ; titular 181 sq. ; for the voc. 182; in exclamations 183, 532 ; supposed cir- cumlocution for by means of eis 183 ; by means of eV 184. Nouns, proper with altered accent 50 sq. ; derived from verbs 93 sq. ; in fios 93 ; in jua and crts 93 ; in fioyri 93 ; derived from adjectives 94 sq. ; in ttjs 94 ; in 0T7JS 94 ; in ffvvti 95 ; in la 95 ; in Tipwv 96 ; in as 102 sq. ; proper with the art. 112; list of anarthrous 120 sqq. ; used instead of the pron. 144 ; ante- cedent incorporated into the relative clause 164 ; Hebr. repetition of for evert/ 174, 463 ; several plur. in Greek though sing, in English 176; of kindred signification, with verbs 224 ; substi- tuted for adjs. 236 ; list of often omitted 590 sqq. Of. Abstracts, Collectives, Gender, Number, etc. Number: use of plur. pronouns referring to a sing, noun 141 ; of nouns, col- lective use of the sing. 174; plur. of category 175; plur. used in Greek, though we use the sing. 176; dual does not occur in N. T. 177; use of plur. to signify two 177 ; neut. sing. or plur. used of persons 178 ; use of sing, to signify one 249 ; of the pred. differing from that of the subj. 513sqq.; plur. used of himself by speaker 517. 'umerals 248 sqq. ; use of card, for ord. in expressing first day of week 248 ; ordinal, abbreviated use of 249 ; car- dinal in distributive sense 249 ; ar- rangement of in combinations 250 ; construction of with iirdvw 250. Object gen. of 186; a single belonging to two verbs 521. Optative the, distinguished from the indie, and subjunc 281 ; use of in independ. prop. 286 ; in depend, prop. 288 ; after 1i>a 290 sq. ; after ej 293 ; after a particle of time 297 ; after an in- terrogative 299 ; in the oratio obliqua 300 sq. ; with &v 303 ; in indirect quest. 308, 310. Oratio Variata 577 sqq. ; mingling ot orat. rect. and obliq. 301, 545, 579. Ordinals a peculiar abbreviated use of 249. Cf. Numerals. Orthography variations of inMSS. 40; Alexandrian 43, 48. Parallelism antithetic 610, 639 ; not pleonastic 611 ; synonymous 639. Parataxis 630. Parathetic apposition 528. Parentheses in N. T. 562 sq. ; in the historical books 563 sq. ; in the epistles 565. Paronomasia 636 sq. Partaking verbs of, with the gen. 200. Partitive gen. 200 sqq., as subject 203, 513 ; partitive apposition 528. Participle the, as a subst. takes the art. 108, 353; as an attributive, takes or omits the art. 134 ; its verbal character 340 ; use of pres. 341 sqq. 353 ; fut. 340 ; aor. 342 sq. ; perf. pass. 343 ; construction of 343 ; to be resolved by a particle of time 344 ; with Kairoi or KaiiTfp 344 ; two or more in differ- ent relations without a copula 344; apparently for an infin. yet different 345 sq. ; periphrastic construction with ehui 348 sq. ; is it ever used for the finite verb 350 sqq. ; with the gen. 354 ; in imitation of the Hebr. infin. absol. 354 ; absolutely, referring to a clause 533 sq. ; with the art. as pred. 513; as a means of connection between clauses 543 ; in abnormal case, par- ticularly the nom. 572. Particles the, lax use of in N.T. 36 ; how certain should be written 45 ; of design, how construed 287 ; of time 296, 308 ; ^ in general 356 sqq. ; how classified 356 ; com])aratively frugal use of in N. T. 357 ; works on 358 ; position of 558 ; no ellipsis of 595. Cf. Interrogative, Negative etc. Pasor G. 5. Passive the, with the dat. 219 ; with the ace. 229, 260 •. 1st aor. used for the ENGLISH INDEX. 649 classic 1st aor. mid. 261 ; perf. and pluperf. in mid. sense 262 ; perf. sup- posed to be used for perf. act. 262 ; fut., singular use of 262 sq. ; is it ever used like the Hebr. Hophal 1 263; forms, how to be distinguished from the same in the middle voice 263. Paul his knowledge of Greek 21 ; his doctrinal system as a guide to his language 98, 130 ; his use of the art. with Xpjo-rds 118; his multiplication of relatives 167 ; his use of the gen. of more remote internal relations 188 ; his separation of the gen. from its noun 191 ; his use of the infin. with eis or irpjj 329 ; fond of participial constructions 355 ; his doctrinal use of prepositions 360 ; his accumulation of prepositions 418 ; his bold arrange- ment of words 547 ; his use of paren- theses 565 sq. ; and anacolutha 567 sq. ; fond of paronomasia 636. Perception verbs of, with the gen. 199. Perfect the, pass, for mid. 262 ; pass, said to be used for act. 262 ; its import and use 270 sq. ; in connection with the aor. 272 ; for the aor. in narration 272 ; how far used for the pres. 272 sq.; prophetic 273 ; supposed use of for pluperf. 274 ;' in sense of pres. 274. Periodic Structure in the N. T. 545. Personal Pronouns multiplied in N. T. 143 ; occasionally omitted 143 ; occasional use of nouns for 144 ; loose reference of 145 sq. ; repetition of 147 sq. ; in nom. always emphatic 152; position of 155 ; dat. apparently su- perfluous 155 ; 1} ^vx"!) f-ov etc. in circumlocution for ? 1 56. Persons rare forms of, in regular verbs 75 sqq. Pfochen Seb. 13. Place gen. of 207 ; dat. of 219 ; ace. of after verbs of motion 224 ; as a speci- fication 230. Pleonasm 601 sqq. ; causes of 602 ; for the most part cii'cumstantiality or fulness 605 sq. ; supposed instances of examined 612 sqq. Pluperfect augment of omitted 72 ; pass, in mid. sense 262 ; of certain verbs, equiv. to imperf. 274; when expressed by the aor. 275. Plural the, of category 175 ; of certain nouns used for the sing. 176 ; of names of countries and cities 176; of nouns denoting a feeling etc. 1 76 ; Hebr. plur. maj. or excellentiae 177; for the dual 177; neut. used of a person 1 78 ; used of himself by the speaker 517. Polysyndeton 5i 9, 540. Position of words and clauses 546 sqq. ; how determined 546; works on 546sq.; in N. T. simple 547 ; in the apostolic benediction 549 ; of the vocative 549 ; causes of unusual 549; of the predicate 551 ; of the gen. before its noun 155, 192, 551 ; trajection 551 sq. ; hysteron proteron 553 ; irregular, of single words, particularly certain adverbs and negatives 553 sq. ; of irp6, air6 etc. in specifications of place and time 557 sq. ; of particles and enclitic pro- nouns 558 ; supposed transposition of clauses 560 ; as affected by a regard to sound 636 sq. Cf. Adjectives, Ap- position etc. Positive the, with fiaWoy a prep, or 1j instead of the compar. 240 ; for the superl. 246. Possessive Pronouns 143 sqq. ; some- times to be taken objectively 153 ; ISios used for 153 sq. , circumlocutions for 154 sq. Predicate the art. with 114 ; its connec- tion with the subj. 512 sqq. ; a clause as 513 ; consisting of a part, with the art. 513 ; grammat. discord between prcd. (or copula) and subj. 513 sqq. ; grammat. form of compound 518 ; sev- eral, how connected 519; several with a common object 521 ; indispensable 521 ; extended by adjuncts 523 sqq. ; 527 ; when placed first 551. Prepositions predilection for in N. T. 32, 38, 180 ; compound 102 ; connect- ing a (neut.) verb with its dependent noun 232 sq. ; for adverbs 250, 423 ; general remarks on 358 sqq. ; the proper sense of to be distinguished from the metaphorical 360 ; inter- change of 361 sq. 411 sq. ; interchange 650 ENGLISH INDEX. of cases with 363 ; position of 363 ; with the gen. 364 sqq. ; with the dat. 384 sqq. ; with the ace. 396 sqq ; the same in the same sentence used to de- note different relations 409; different in the same sentence 410 sq. ; kindred substituted for each other in parallel passages 411 sq. ; iy and ds not used indiscriminately 413 sqq. ; accumula- tion of by Paul 418 ; repetition of 419 sq.; omitted before the relative 421 sq. ; combined with adverbs 422 ; in circumlocutions 154, 192, 423 ; after compound verbs 425 sqq. ; two blended into one 629. Present the, its force 265 ; only in ap- pearance for the fut. 265 ; for the aor. in narration 266 sq. ; conjoined with the aor. 267 ; may include also a past tense 267 ; in dependent clauses ap- parently for the impcrf. 268 ; perfs. and aors. equiv. to 274 ; with force of perf 274. Cf. Aorist, Future, Perfect. Prophetic Perfect the Hebr. 273. Pronouns enclitic 54 ; indef. expressed sometimes by eh 117 ; use of in N. T. 140 sqq. ; differing in gend. or numb, from their noun 141 ; in supposed reference to a following noun 142 ; neuter used adverbially 142 ; personal and possessive 143 sqq. ; repetition of 147 sq. ; demonstrative 157 sqq. ; rela- tive 163 sqq. ; interrogative and in- definite 168 sqq. ; Hebraisms in con- nection with 171 sqq. ; in loose refer- ence 632 sq. Cf Demonstrative, Per- sonal etc. Proper Names throw back the accent 51 ; contracted forms of 102 ; with the art. 112 sqq. Proposition see Clause and Structure. Protasis 291. Cf Apodosis. Prozeugma of the dcmonstr. pron. 162. Punctuation of the N. T. 55 sqq. Purists the, history of 12sqq. ; a criti- cism of their efforts 16. Questions rel. pron. put for interrog. in direct 167 ; the subjunc. in undeter- mined 285 ; indirect 298 sq. 308, 543; negative 510 sq. ; with the fut. for the imperat. 315 ; brachylogyin 628. Cf. Interrogative. Quotation peculiar biblical formula of 522. Redundant Structure 601 sqq. Reduplication 72 sq. ; of verbs in p 74 sq. Reflexive Pronoun used in reference to the 1st and 2d pers. 150 sq. ; with the middle voice 257. Relative Pronoixns thought to refer sometimes to the more remote noun 157; include the demonstrative 158 ; attraction with 163 sq.; agree some- times with following noun 166 ; for interrogative 167 ; multiplied by Paul 167; before whole clauses 168; not used for demonstrative 168. Relative Clauses position of 167 ; use of 542 sq. Revelation book of, its irregularities of style 534. Rhetoric (stylistics) of N. T. 1 sq. Ruling verbs of, with the gen. 206. Schema kot' ^|ox^i' 520. Sentence see Clause, apd Structure. Septuagint its Greek style 31 sq. 37 sqq. Singular (the distributive) for the plural 174. Smelling verbs of, with the gen. 203. Structure of Sentences : of a simple 512 sqq. ; of compound 518sq. ; by extension of subj. or pred. 523 sqq. ; their connection 537 sqq. ; asyndeton 537; polysyndeton 519, 540; position of words and clauses in 546 sqq. ; inter- rupted (parenthetic) structure 561 sqq.; broken and heterogeneous (anacolu- thon 566, oratio variata 577) 566 sqq.; defective (ellipsis 580, aposiopesis 599) 580 sqq. ; redundant (pleonasm 601, blended 605, circumstantiality 605, fulness 609) 601 sqq.; condensed and expanded (breviloquence 619, con- structio praegnans 621 , attraction 625, hendiadys 630) 619 sqq. ; irregularities of relating to single words (hypallage) 631 sqq. ; regard to sound in (parono- ENGLISH INDEX. 651 masia 636, annominatio 638, paral- lelism 639, verse 640) 636 sqq. Cf. Clauses, Asyndeton, Attraction, Posi- tion, etc. Style (stylistics) in N. T. 1 sq. 31, 33, 35, 37 sq. ; of individual writers 4, 29, 33, 39, 118, 546 sq. Cf. Paul etc. Subject the, in relation to the art. 115; gen. of 186; relation to the sentence 512 sqq. ; a partitive gen. may be used for 203, 513 ; relation of copula and predicate to 513 sqq. ; compound 518 ; one rendered prominent 519, 520 ; may be implied 521 sq. ; extension of 523 sqq. ; wanting 588, 631 ; sudden change of 631 sq. Subjunctive the future 75, 86 ; dis- tinguished from the indie, and the optat. 281 ; in independent proposi- tions 285 sq. ; in dependent proposi- tions 287 sqq. ; in hypothetical sen- tences 291 sq. ; after particles of time compounded with &y 297, 308 ; after interrogatives 298 ; after Ssre 301 ; in relative clauses with Hv 307 ; with 'Iva for the impcrat. 315 ; with 'tva for the infin. 334 sqq. Substantives see Nouns. Superlative the, circumlocution for 246; Hebr. modes of expressing 246 sq. ; strengthened by irdin-ui/ 248. Synizesis 622. Synonymes 611. Syntax peculiarities of, few in later and N. T. Greek 27 ; 36 sqq. Technical Terms religious inN.T.35. Tenses rare forms in 73 sqq. ; how far interchanged 264 ; import and use of the pres. 265 sq. ; imperfect 268 sq. ; perfect 270 sq. ; aorist 275 sq. ; force of in the moods 281 ; future 279 sq. ; dif- ferent connected 280 sq. Cf. Aorist etc. Thinking of verbs expressing take the gen. 205. Time gen. of 207 ; dat. of 218 ; ace. of 229 sq. ; particles of, how construed 296 sq., with &v 308. Touching laying hold of, verbs of take the gen. 201. Trajection (transposition) of words 513 sqq. ; of clauses 560. Transition from a participial constr. to a finite verb 573 ; fiom '6ri to the (ace. with) infin. 573 ; from a relative constr. to a personal 579 ; from or alio obliq. to rect. and vice versa 579 ; from the sing, to the plur. and the reverse 580. Cf. Structure of sentences. Verbs augm. and redupl. of 70 sqq. ; rare forms in tenses and persons of regular 73 sqq. ; in verbs in fjn and irregular verbs 78 sqq. ; list of defective 82 sqq. ; later forms of not always used in N. T. 90 ; same forms may come from dif- ferent 91 ; derivative 91 ; compound 100 ; decomposite 102 ; intransitives with ace. of thing 227 ; neut. used transitively 251, 263; compounded with prepositions, how construed 425 sqq. ; with air6 427 ; with avd 428 ; with ayrl 429 ; with ix 429 ; with 4y 429 ; with (Is 430 ; with M 430 ; with Sd 431 ; with Kard 431 ; with fifjo. 432 ; with irapd 432 ; with irtpl 432 ; with irp({432 ; with npos 432 ; with ffvv 433 ; with vTr6 433 ; with inrep 433 ; in cir- cumlocutions for adverbs 467 sq. C£ Active etc. ; Tenses etc. Verbal substantives 93 sqq. (cf. nouns) ; adjectives 96 sq. Verses found in N. T. 640 sq. Vocative use of nom. for 182 ; most fre- quently without S> 183; position of 549. Voices see Activ^, Middle, Passive. Vorst J. 14- Words see Derivation, Position, Paxo» nomasia etc. Wyss Caspar 5. Zeugma 622. n. INDEX OF GREEK WORDS AND FORMS. The Figures refer to Pages. a privative, intensive, fonuative 100. -a, -a in the gen. 60. a in forms of 2d aor. 73. £ for 5t' fi 142. 'Kap(i)v 67. 'Aj3t({ accent 52. ikyadofpyilv 26. kyaQoTToitlv 25. ayadhs ■Kp6s ri and eU ri 363. ayadovpye?v 25, 101. ayaBwcrwri 25. hyaWtav 24. iyaWiaff IS 25. dyaj-a/creiv constr. of 232. dyaiTTj without art. 120; Oeov or Xpurrov 185. "Ayap, t6 179. a77€A.\w forms of 82. Sy-yeAos art. with 124 ; &yye\oi and ol ir/y. 124. a7€;'ea\({-yrjTos 25, 26. rh. ayio 176, 177; y\ &yia ayioov 246; ol S.yioi 35, 234 ; S-yiov, t6 592. ayiafffiSs 93. 07trfT?js 25. ayf^^eo-eai 252. dy^'oerj' iy 629. dyvf^TTjs 25. Syrvyui forms of 82. ayopd without art. 121.* iySpaioi accent 53 ; so. fjntpcu 590. aypifKaios 25. ayp6s without art. 121. &yu forms of 82 ; &ye with plur. subject 516 ; &y. rivi 215 ; Hywuev 251. iywvl^oixai 260. a.^f\(t>6s supposed ellipsis of 593. a^iKua-dai 254. a.^poT-f)s 52 sq. A-fi position of 553. aeT6s 22. 652 &Cvfia 176. -a(cD verbs in 92. aduos air6 r. 180, 197. A'tyvTTTos never has art. 112. oTjua 30 ; oT/ua iKx^ftv 33 ; oZ/iaTa 177. ai/j.aTfKxv(rta 25, 26, 99. ojVerv with dat. 536. -atvu aor. of verbs in 75 ; verbs in 92. aXpfiv sc. Tctj ayKvpas 594. aiperi^ti) 26. alpfo) forms of 82 ; alpovfiai 253. a(Vxw«'0;uai with part, and with infin. 346. alreTi' constr. of 227. aiTriixa. 24. alxi^aJ«'>TfVfiy 25. ajxM'''^'^'''''C*"' 25. aiwfc; 17G ; ol ety 251, 469. aydcTTaffts yeKpwv 188. aydartfia 24. iyareWeiy 251. hyaTidriij.1 253. itvaToXai. 176. o;/€\eos 100. ofeiroiVxut^oj 236. 6;'ei» 471. ayfxofiai augm. of 72 ; forms of 83. ayiip {(poyevs etc.) 30; without art. 122; &v5pfs in addresses 610. aixaprdviiv a/jLapriay 225. ayOpwirdpetTKOs 25. iyiarnfii cmfpfxartyi 33; i,vd(rra79; iwourrds redundant? 608. iivoiya augm. of 72 ; forms of 83 ; kv. robs o 275 ; airf'xf (rOat constr. of 427. d»iJ in alleged circumloc. for the gen. 193 ; with verbs of eating, taking etc. 199 ; with verbs of fulness 201 ; meaning of etc. 364 sq. 369 sq. ; distinguished from iK 364 ; distinguished from vir6 369 ; distinguished from irapd with passives 370 ; with verbs of receiving etc. 370 ; constr. of verbs compounded with 427 8q. ; trajection of with the gen. of place ? 557 ; anh dvaiOty 603 ; air' Upri 422 ; airh Tttpvct 422 ; awh irpwt 422 ; airh Tore 422 ; airh (xaKpo^ev 603 ; owrb fifpovs 423 ; airh /nias 423, 591 ; airh fUKpov ews iu.eydKov 18. aro0\firfiv fls 622. arroypdcjxffOcu 254. avo^'iSoficu 253. hiroev^aKiiv constr. of 210, 226, 227, 428. a.iroKa€iffTT]ij.i augm. of 72. iiroKecpoKi^dy 25. aTroKpi.voiJi.aji 23, 253, 261. airoKTeiyw forms of 83 ; signif. of 253. airoKve? and airoKvet 88. diroXeVw 83. airoKan^dveiv constr. of 428. a.Tr6\\vixi forms of 83. 'A-noWds 62, 102. airo\vonai 253. aToiriirreiy constr. of 427. aTrop^iiTTfiy 251. diro<7To(rio 24. airoo'TfWfiy 594. avo, ainrv6(i> 26. 'Axfltfa art. with 112. dxe'poTTOiTjTos 236. fixP' or &xp^s 1 42 ; constr. of 297, 471. Bao\, v 179. fiaBfiSs 22. fiaivti) forms of 79. fioXivTiov form of 43. ^dWuv 251 sq. ^airriCw constr. of 216, 217, 412 ; mid. 254, 255, 621 ; jSottt. rivk ets tj 622. fidirTiai^a 25, 35, 93. ^airricrtx.6s 621. jSape'w 24 ; forms of 83. fiaariKfveiy constr. of 180, 206. PaffiKtcTcra 24, 95. ^aaKaivw forms of 83 ; constr. of 223. ^6.Tos, ^ 36 ; 6 63. fie^aia 69. fiefx^pdvas 22. BTjOaiSapa decl. 61. Br]d(xai5d indecl. 61. Br)d(l)ayrj 52 ; indecl. 61. fii$\aplSioy 24, 96. fiioai forms of 84 ; XP*^""" 226. ^Kd-KTdv constr. of 227. ^XaarivM forms of 84 ; 251. fi\a(T forms of 84 ; mid. 254. yapuiTKW 92. ydfMoi 176. 7(£p origin and signification of 445 sq. ; in explanations 446, and going before 447 ; in rejoinders 446 ; in questions 447 ; repeated 447 sq. ; not to betaken for but 453 ; nor for therefore 454 ; nor for althou(jh 454 ; nor for on the contrary 454 ; nor for nevertheless 454 ; nor as a mere copula 454 ; sometimes equiv. to Se 452, 456 ; position of 558 ; in- troducing parenth. 562. GREEK INDEX. 655 r(0ff7)/xayri or -vet 52. ye\da) forms at" 84. yevft and T(f ytvii 120. •yivfffia 'lA, 176. 'yevvi]fj.a-ta 23, 25. •ytvicecu constr. of 36, 198; eawirov 33. yrj without art. 120; ellipsis of 592. yripdffKU) 92. yr^pti dat. 64. ylyvofxai fonns of 84 ; construed with ds 183 sq. ; with gen. 195 sq.; with dat. 210sq. ; eyeVcTo with ace. and inf. 323; never used periphrastically 350 ; with pred. adj. 515; ellipsis of 586; koI iytveio pleonastically 608. yipdffKfiv signific. 263; ^vSpa 18. yKuaaa 32 ; ellipsis of 591 ; yXuaacus \o- \etv 594. yXoxraSKOftov 24, 94. yvi)aios inflec. 69. 707715^0; 22. yovvTitTuv Tiva 210. ToKyoda indecl. 61. TO lepa ypdfifxaTa 177. al ypatpai 177. ypdv 593. SiSdffKfiy Tivi 223 ; iy 227. S/S»/u forms of 78, 79, 84 ; constr. of. 180, 197, 198. Sieyfipeiy 102. hiipxearOai with acc. and with iii 431. StKaioKptffia 25, 99. Si/cotos iK vlffTeais 136. SiKoioffvyr] 32 ; etc. 35 ; without art. 120 ; dfoH 186 ; irlarfus 186. St6 445. StoTt 445. SiopvffiTfty 594. 5i\pay etc. 17, 77 ; with acc. 204 sq. SidKeiy 30 ; forms of 84. SiS^di 84. SoKfiy alleged pleonasm of 612 sq. SoKiocD 26. S6/X0S ellipsis of 592. So'|o 32 ; ^108. Zpaxfii) ellipsis of 592. SvyafjLai aug. of 70 ; forms of 76, 84 ; with infin. 321, 327, 333 ; used absolutely 590, 594 ; alleged pleonasm of 613. Svydfids 32. SvyaiJ.6a) 26. bvyri 76. Suo inflec. 64 ; with plur. 177 ; Suo Uo 249. Swt'i 64. hv 26, 100. ei\i fut. 77. IlKTpWjJUl 25. iKX^yfi" 24. 'EA.aieii' or 'EA.cuwi' 1 182. 4\a.Kr](Ta 88. iKax'^fff^'npos 69. ^Acactf 85. i\f(iv6s 99. ^\€e'ft) forms of 85 ; constr. of 233. ?Aeos gend. 66. (\evdepovu constr. of 196, 197. iKfvcrofiou 86. 'i\K(i) forms of 86. (WijvlCfiv, fW-nviarfis 28, 94. f?^wi(fii' constr. of 233, 321, 331, 410. 4fi6s used objectively 153. invopfveffdai constr. of 222, 429. ift.irpo(r6ev 471. iy oadBeth e^seniiae 184, 513 ; hebraistically for ace. of object ? 226 ; in alleged circumloc. for gen. 193; alleged sign of the dat. 217; 4v Xpi 26. i^ov6€V€7v 25. 4^inrvlCfiv 24. I{« 471. ^{£' 90. Ibuca 274. ^irayyeX/ou 177. 4TraYy4\\t:(TBai with infin. 331. 4iraiy((ra) 86. ^TCMj/tw forms of 86 ; constr. of 203. t-irai^a 88. 4ieaivofixu augm. of 73 ; constr. of 231. 4ir6.v 297. 4vdvw 102, 250. 'Eira forms of 86. iTTiovffioi 97, 236. iieiiro0tlu constr. of 204, 430. iTnv6driTos 236. iTriaKuk^dv constr. of 431. iieiffrtWdv 23. i-KiffToKai of a single ep. 176. iirii\ei\v, i^^tei]v 85. (pXOfiai forms of 86 ; tpx^Tai &pa, ti/a 339 ; 6 ipxofifyos 341. ipurau 22, 30, 32, 335. Haevcrii 23. iffOio) forms of 86 ; constr. of 180, 198 sq. fffflw 23, 86. ((Trdvai 78. tffxo-ros without art. 131. ^ verbs in 92. ^<^c£irof 422 f(p7} in direct disc. 558 ; omitted 598. ^(peoffa 90. e '/'I'X^'' 33- ^w^ ai^^fios 133. J{ in comparisons 240 sq. ; f) ... fj Kal 440 ; never for Kai 440, yet cf. 441 ; co- ordinate with oijTf 491 sq. ; after neg. 508 ; in questions 509 ; repeated 519; supposed ellipsis of 595sq. riytofiai ws 602. 9iy7} 87. KaToXied^iiv 102. KaToKvfia 25, 93. Kardw^is 94. KaTaiTOVTi^iiV 24. KaTa and Kvia 88. KtoXleiv with gen. 196. KSis, Kw 62. AojSe, A({i3e 49. AojScij' pleonastic ? 607. Ao7X'^''f »' constr. of 200. XdBpa 47. AoiXo^l' not XaiXa^ 50. AaA<(f 23. AoAerv yXwaffois 594. Xofifidvew constr. of 202 ; tV ivceyyt\U» 237. Aa/uir(£f 23. A((o-Kw88. GREEK INDEX. 661 Karpeieiv 593. X^ew constr. of 212 ; ellipsis of 587 ; Keyei sc. 6 ee6s 522, 588 ; Aeywv used absoL 535 sq. ; pleonastically 602. Aevi or Aevts inflection 66. MeofioKuf 25, 26, 102. Mfios, 7], 22, 36, 63. \oyia 25. \oyiCeaeai els 228. \oylCofiai 259 ; iis 602. \oi^-f) 23. \oiit6v, t6 592. \ovuv awh 197 ; \ovff\KVffTlK6v 41. vtKpol without art. 123. vTjtrid^w 92. tnKos 24. riirrcB 88. vot, yo6s 62. yo/xoQeTeiy 261. y6fios without art. 123. y Off (rid 24. voaffoi 24. VQvdfffia. 24. voDs inflection 62. Nu/x(^os 102. vi/jxpT] 32. yuvl 23 ; with imperat. 313. wx^yifpov 25. vSiTos 6 and t(( 63. ^eviCf(r6ai constr. of 209. ^fvoSoxfiis 25. ^■npi, fi 18, 592. iv\ov 23. ^vpicd 24. i with participle derisively 135 ; with an ace. elliptically 589 ; 6 fiev ... 6 Se 104 ; d Se without 6 niv 104 ; 6 iiv k. & ^v K. 6 ^px^nevos 68. 8 for Si* 3 142 ; before a clause 168. 85e apparently equiv. to 6 Bflva 162. dUs 32 ; ellipsis of 590 ; iShv ea\da' 25. olKoS€, o\edpeva) 92. 6\0KavTUfx.a 33. 6A.o'K\rj(jos 25. iKos without art. 131. 'OKvixiras 103. 6fj.fipe(T0M or ofieipfffBcu 101. 6fj.i\f7v constr. of 212. o/xi/vu 88 ; constr. of 222. dfioii^eLV 25. 6juo7oj accent 52 ; inflec. 68 ; constr. of 180, 195, 209. bii.oi.6w its 602. 6fio\oy(7y constr. of 39, 209, 226. blxoXoyia 35. '6nws 344, 444 ; transposed 553. 6vfi5i^iiv with the ace. 222. 6yfiSiffix6s 24. oyofm as an alleged pleonasm 615 ; 4p owSfiarl rivos 390 ; iirl r^ 6y6fi. 394. oyofidCfffdai not esse 615 sq. oiriadfv 471. otriffce 471. iiroros 543. 6ir6aos 543. Sirou for owot 471, 472 ; 510. owToaia 24. Sttws constr. of 287 sq. 542 ; with Sj/ 309 sq. ; Spa Sir. 338 ; meaning and use 449 ; Siras ir\rtpa)6T) 461 ; not equiv. to Syre 462 ; in indirect quest. 510; supposed ellipsis of 285, 595. 6pii(>) 88 ; perf. in sense of pres. 274. Opyfly V SC. TOV dtov 594. 6pyi(fcrdai constr. of 232. opfyecrBai 252. ij opayf) 591. opfwv 64. 6p0oiroie7v 26, 102. op6oT0i.ie7y 26. dpdpi((i> 26, 33. opQpiv6s 25. SpKov or opK^ 226, 603 ; e«j 397. ipKcefioffia, t) 24. dpodfcrla 25. 2s supposed remote reference of 157 sq.; for interrog. 167 ; position of clause, with 167 sq. ; for demons. 168 ; before a clause 168 ; hs &v with the moods 306 sq. ; hs /uei/ . . . ts Se 105 ; 3 for Si' 8 142. SffdKis &v 297, 308. -offay in 3d plur. hist, tenses 77. Saov oaov 241 . offrea, offTiuv 63. 8sTts occurs in N. T. only in nom. 163; 8sTij i.v 306, 480, 543. offrpdKivos 26. -offvvT] substantives in 95. irav with indie. 36 ; with the moods 297, 308, 309. 8t€ with the indie. 296 ; with the subjunc. 298 ; confounded with 8x1 457 ; iir($T« constr. of 296. 8t« with infin. 339, 573 ; meaning and use of 445, 449 ; not equiv. to hi6 456, GREEK INDEX. 663 nor 8i(k rl 456, nor quanquam 457, nor 8t« 457, nor profecto 457, nor 8s 457 ; 542 ; pleonastic ? 597 ; before the orat. rect. 605; wsUi 618. 8,T» mode of writing 46 ; as interrog. in N. T. 167, 168. oh etc. distinguished from jutj 473 sqq. ; combining with verbs 476 ; with nouns 476 ; in conditional sentences (e* oh) \11 ; after 8t< and iitii because 480 ; in relative clauses 480 sq. ; with partici- ples 485; in continued negation 488sq.; oh ... of/T€490; in antith. (ou ... d\Aa) 495,497 ; oh . . . a\Ka. Kai 498 ; oh fi6voy . . . a\Ki 498 ; with fut. ind. 315, 501 ; oh ^^ 505 sq. ; Dawes's rule 507 ; with pres. indie. 507 ; in questions 510 sq. ; ohK &pa 511 ; oh ftij disting. from fi^ oh 511 sq. ; oil vdyrui and irdi'Tws oh 554 ; oh irdi>v 554 ; oh n6vov 54, dAAi Kal 583 sq. ; not {^r oijirw 596 ; ohx Srt... oAAa 597 ; ohx "foj/ Stj 597 ; oh ,. , vas 30, 171 sq. ; oh wos 171. at no 476. o5 whither 471, 591. ohai, T] 179. ohSe without a preceding neg. 487 ; in con- tinued negation 487 ; must be preceded by oh 489, 500 ; o«5e . . . ohS4 489 ; after oihe 491 ; distinguished from Kal oh 493, and from oihe 487, 494 ; ohSe . . . Sf 495 ; ohSe ne . . . quidem 500 ; ohdf fjLT} 506, 539 sq. ohSi 6?s 173. ohSds iffTiv 2j with indie. 300. ohdfis etc. 44. ohKeri supposed half pleonastic use of 618. oCkovv and ovkovv 512. olv uses of 444 ; allied to 5e 455 ; not equiv. to hut 455 ; nor for 455 ; nor super- fluous 455 ; as connective 539 sq. ; before apod. ? 541, 542 ; position of 558. ohpdvios inflection 68. ohpav60(v 463. ohpavSs without art. 121 ; ohpavol 176. oOre . . . oUre 487 sq. 540 ; ot/re . . . otlrt . . . Kal oh 489 ; oijre after ov 490 ; oUrt ... ^ 491 ; oUre after ohSe 1 492 ; diff". between and ohSe 494 ; o£»t« . ., kcU 494. Bvros with a noun and art. 110; remote reference of 157 ; repetition of 159 sq.; looking forwards 161 ; in expressions of time 161 ; position of 162, 548 ; Totrro 162 ; ToCra irdm-a 548. oStwj and oSt«41 ; repeated 160; looking forwards 161 ; for oStoj? 465; before apod. 541 ; after condit. clauses 541 ; with part. 541 ; in anaphora 618. 6fi\7)na 32 ; 6w ilva.1 465. TToraTrdy 24. iroTe for 67r(^T€ 510. irSrripov . . . <{ 509. iroT-{}piof 32. iro{;471, 508, 510. irous accent 50. irp^os 47. vpaSy, irpaiJTTjs 45. irpiftrfis 22. irp(»' with subjunc. 297 ; with infin. 330, 332. vp6 372 ; with gen. of time 557 ; constr. of verbs compounded with 432. wpo^dWeiv 593. irpo^ariK'S] sc. vv\7\ 592. irpojSAeireij', irpofiKe-ireadai 258. ■jrpo€x«o'9a« 264. 1tpOK6-ttTflV 251. Tp(Js for the simple dat. ? 212, 214 ; with gen. 373 ; with dat. 395 ; with ace. 404 sq. ; in circum. 425 ; verbs com- pounded with 432. vposfpxf(r6M constr. of 427, 432. •Trposfx^^" '''"'' sc. t6v vovv 593. ■Kpoyf]Kvros 24, 26, 97. irposKvvilv constr. of 36, 210, 593. vposrid-nfii adverbial constr. of 468. irposs 463. 'irposiroA-)7irT77S 101. »pofio 48, 101. Tp6s 24, 74. ^airifffia 25. ^a(^i; 25. pevffo} 89. ^eo) 89. ^fjM without art. 123. Piaffo) 22. pifaOai constr. of 197. ^vixT) 22, 23. 'P 89 ; v 236. Toprapovv 25. ravra referring to a single object 162 ; TttCro irt^in-o and Trocra roi/Ta 548. rax^s comparison of 69. re distinguished from koi 434 ; re . . re 439 ; Tf . . . 56 439 ; re icai 489 ; re ydp 448, 539 sq. ; position of 559 ; with Tpwroy 576. TtKvlov accent 52. TfKvov with gen. of abstracts 238. rtXfffd) fut. 77. I ripas 65. 666 GREEK INDEX. rifffftpes etc. 43. rerevxt 89. -T7JS, -oTjjs substantives in 94. rlertfii forms of 78. Tlfioov accent 51. ris, ri in indirect quest, and for the relat. 168 sq. ; for irSitpos 169 ; ris iffriv 8s with indie. 300, and oi) 481 ; ri used adverbially 142 ; in exclamations 142 ; tI 8ti 585. Tij, rt (indef ) not used for elf tis 1 69 ; with substs. and adjs. 170 sq. ; position of 170, 559; rt aliquid (magni) 170 ; rov, rqi not used in N. T. 171 ; ri as ace. with verbs 227. Tiros and Tiros 52 ; never has art. 113. t6 before entire clauses 109 ; before a word as a sound 109, 179 ; before the infin. 320 ; rh i^ v/xuv and the like 230. TO J 434. Toiyapodv 445. roivvv 445, 559. roioZros use of art. with 111. ToKfMv alleged pleonasm of 612 sq. -Tos verbals in 96 sq. r6re as a connective 540; before apod. 541. TovTo used adverbially 142 ; rovro fjL^v . . . rovro Sf so used 142 ; toOt' ^ffrii' ep- exegetical 530. rplrov 250. Tp6cpifxos accent 51. rpox 89 ; (pavrtvau constr. of 233. (fiaiffKO) 90. (pfiSfffdai constr. of 180, 205. (pfiSofievus 99. v\aKi^u 26. (pvXaKr^piov 26. ^vKdfffffiv udfiov 30 ; (pvXaKds 225 ; tpvXdv- aeaecu constr. of 223 ; signification of 253. ' in salutation 316. Xap'fiiTOfiai 90. XaplCop-ai 90, 261, 264. Xapicoftai 90. XuKos 18, 30, 32. GREEK INDEX. 667 Xei\ft»y Tincontr. 64. X««V ellipsis of 592. Xepovfiifj. 68. ■)(OpTa.^uv 23. Xpew'^e'A.fTTjs 44. Xp^C**" constr. of 200. Xpij/uaT/^tji/ 23, 260. Xp7)(rSa* constr. of 209 sq. Xpi'ttv constr. of 227. XpiCjua accent 50. Xpi(TTicw6s 95. XpiffTOs and 6 Xpiirr6i 118 ; supposed use of to intensify 248. Xpdi'os year 177. XpucoSoKTvA.JOj 26. -Xwff'a 93 note. X<6pa ellipsis of 591 . XtuplCdv constr. of 197. Xopis 471 ; X'^P^^ rivos elfcu 465. il/fiS(a$ai constr. 212. if)ev(riJia 24. ^(piff/jia \pns 462) constr. of 296, 448, 449 ; with infin. 318 ; always as (not ovtws) 462 ; before a series 519 ; before a pred. 527 ; supposed pleonastic 617 ; force of, particularly before gen. abs. 617 ; with a prep, of direction 617 sq.; us . . ■ Kai 440 ; &s Sti 618 ; iis (Srirtp) . . . ovTus 440 ; us iv 308, 309 note ; &s Ivos (liTfiv 317, 449. uffdfirjv 71. SjTrep in prot. without apod. 599. &STe constr. of 301, 318, 327 ; with a neg- ative 480. uriov 25. upeXfTv constr. of 227. M^eAtjuos constr. of 213. m. INDEX OF PASSAGES IN THE N.T. EXPLAINED OR CITED. The Figures refer to Pages; those folloA merely referred to or quo ved by an Asterisk indicate passages not ted, but commented upon. Matt. i. 1 125 Matt. iii. 5 68, 268, 438* Matt. i. 3 366 Matt. iii. 6 528 Matt. i. 6 67, 190 Matt. iii. 7 409 Matt. i. 10 67 Matt. iii. 8 206, 444 Matt. i. 11 187*, 375* Matt. iii. 9 151 Matt. i. 12 187* Matt. iii. 10 110, 266*, 444 Matt. i. 16 366 Matt. iii. 11 75, 217, 266*, 337, 412*, 630 Matt. i. 17 110*, 370 Matt. iii. 12 75, 149* Matt. i. 18 113, 192, 208*, 330, 368, 455* Matt. iii. 13 325 » » >» 465*, 527, 616* Matt. iii. 14 269, 436* Matt. i. 19 330 Matt. iii. 15 269 Matt. i. 20 391*, 401* Matt. iii. 16 147*, 151*, 369* Matt. i. 21 141, 150, 182 Matt. iii. 17 132, 232, 278*, 586 Matt. i. 22 461, 562, 563 Matt. i. 24 436 Matt. iv. 1 106*, 374, 392, 428 Matt. i. 25 107, 182, 296, 436 Matt. iv. 3 334*, 541 Matt. iv. 4 87, 280*, 377, 389*, 392 Matt. ii. 1 113, 139 Matt. iv. 5 622 Matt. ii. 2 55, 155, 318*, 446* Matt. iv. 6 373 Matt. ii. 3 68, 111*, 113, 344, 376 Matt. iv. 10 210 Matt. ii. 4 75, 110, 266*, 365 Matt. iv. 1 1 521 Matt. ii. 6 114, 429 Matt. iv. 12 428 Matt. ii. 7 106 Matt. iv. 15 121, 187*, 231*, 590 Matt. ii. 8 287, 607 Matt. iv. 16 147, 247, 602 Matt. ii. 9 104, 275, 296, 473, 542 Matt. iv. 17 422 Matt. ii. 10 66, 224 Matt. iv. 18 177, 403*, 417*, 446 Matt. ii. 12 260, 428, 481 Matt. iv. 19 228, 606 Matt. ii. 13 79, 267, 434 Matt. iv. 21 113, 1.32, 190 Matt. ii. 14 1Q4, 428 Matt. iv. 23 131, 132, 145, 186, 426, 539 Matt. ii. 16 365, 370, 401* Matt. iv. 24 110,436, 527, 539 Matt. ii. 17 61 Matt. iv. 25 67, 420, 520, 539 Matt. ii. 18 222 Matt. ii. 20 175, 446* Matt. V. 1 115,428 Matt. ii. 22 206 , 260, 364*, 375, 471, 472 Matt. V. 2 Matt. V. 3 608 195, 215, 551, 585 Matt. iii. 3 61 Matt. V. 4 200, 551 Matt. iii. 4 108, 370, 406*, 523 668 Matt. V. 5 551, 585 N. T. INDEX. 669 Matt. V. 6 205*, 551, 585 Matt. V. 7 551, 585 Matt. V. 8 215, 551, 585 Matt. V. 9 122, 229, 551, 585, 615 Matt. V. 10 120, 551, 585 Matt. T. 11 222, 551 Matt. V. 13 114, 293, 388, 541 Matt. V. 15 78, 436 Matt. V. 16 287 Matt. V. 17 127 Matt. V. 18 172, 432, 506, 518, 542, „ „ „ 552, 612* Matt. V. 19 160, 246*, 310, 543, 615 Matt. V. 20 245*, 477, 506 Matt. V. 21 85, 210, 219*, 316, 502, 522 Matt. T. 22 111*, 209, 213*, 455, 621 Matt. V. 23 455* Matt. V. 25 79, 296*, 502 Matt. V. 26 506 Matt. V. 27 316 Matt. V. 28 204 Matt. V. 31 85 Matt. V. 32 56, 496 Matt. V. 33 85, 86, 316 Matt. V. 34 222, 389*, 481, 488 Matt. V. 35 397* Matt. V. 36 76, 490 Matt. V. 37 476 Matt. V. 38 588, 598* Matt. T. 39 168, 280*, 481 Matt. V. 40 147, 209 Matt. V. 41 280* Matt. V. 42 254* Matt. V. 44 222 Matt. V, 45 445*, 457* Matt. V. 46 266 Matt. V. 48 315, 540 Matt. vi. 1 31,121,259, 329*, 405, 583, 605 Matt. vi. 2 Matt. tI. 3 Matt. vi. 4 Matt. vi. 5 Matt. vi. 6 Matt. vi. 7 Matt. vi. 8 Matt. vi. 9 Matt. vi. 10 Matt. vi. 11 Matt. vi. 12 Matt. vi. 13 Matt. vi. 16 Matt. vi. 17 275*, 287, 540 502, 592 148, 235 275*, 310, 315, 467*, 502 94, 132, 433 387*, 501 209, 329*, 372 121, 533* 440 97* 81, 152, 448* 197, 501 56, 275*, 638 143, 253 Matt. Matt. Matt. Matt. Matt. Matt Matt. Matt. Matt. Matt. Matt. Matt. Matt. Matt. 18 19 20 22 24 25 26 27 vi. 28 . 29 . 30 . 31 . 32 vi. 34 477 501, 594* 488, 489 114 116, 202,440 156, 209, 299, 488 57, 430, 487*, 514 432 373, 488 110 341 519 200, 548* 209, 517, 590 Matt. vii. Matt. vii. Matt. vii. Matt. vii. Matt. vii. Matt. vii. Matt. vii. Matt. vii. Matt. vii. Matt. vii. Matt. vii. Matt. vii. Matt. vii. Matt. vii. » >» 467, 518 Luke xxiv. 46 123, 231* Luke xxiii. 13 113 Luke xxiv. 47 213, 393, 396, 624* Luke xxiii. 14 180, 203, 431 Luke xxiv. 49 297 Luke xxiii. 15 219 Luke xxiv. 50 143, 603, 607* Luke xxiii. 26 121,430 Luke xxiv. 51 428 Luke xxiii. 28 183, 222, 408 Luke xxiv. 52 210 Luke xxiii. 31 218, 285, 550 Luke xxiv. 53 349 Luke xxiii. 32 530* Luke xxiii. 33 122, 552 John i. 1 122*, 181 , 365, 405, 551 Luke xxiii. 34 168 John i. 2 122, 124 Luke xxiii. 35 253 John i. 3 173, 379*, 610 Lake xxiii. 38 392 John i. 4 114 N. T. INDEX. 687 Johni .5 270 John ii. 10 • 110, 152, 524 John i • Q 149, 350, 365*, 585 John ii. 11 61, 110 John 1 .7 458* John ii. 12 143, 230, 519 John i .8 114, 316*, 317* John ii. 13 539 John i .9 132, 349* John ii. 14 106, 128, 539 John i . 10 609 John ii. 15 429 , 439, 539, 559 John i . 11 592* John ii. 16 314, 539 John i . 12 134 John ii. 17 89, 185 John i . 13 177*, 488 John ii. 18 445* John i .14 122, 193, 201, 564*, 617*, 630 John ii. 19 312, 385*, 537 John i . 15 222, 244*, 274 John ii. 20 71, 218, 250 John 1 . 16 364*, 437* John ii. 21 531 John i . 17 379*, 639 John ii. 22 123, 163, 627* John 1 . 18 160,341,413,415* John ii. 23 67, 68, 155 385, 410, 638 John 1 . 19 438* John ii. 24 143, 638 John 1 .20 479, 545, 610 John ii. 25 115*, 339 John 1 .21 106, 114, 476 John ] . 22 620 John iii. 1 366, 563, 585 John .25 479*, 488, 491 John iii. 2 84, 122, 527 John ] .26 217, 261, 412*, 537 John iii. 3 537 John .27 335, 337 John iii. 4 331, 537 John .28 61 John iii. 5 537, 630 John . 29 266 John iii. 6 178, 639 John .30 153, 244* John iii. 8 298 , 472, 510, 543 John .31 217, 561 John iii. 9 537 John .32 121, 266, 573 John iii. 10 114, 115*, 537 John . 33 408, 412*, 573 John iii. 11 437, 517, .561 John 1.34 273* John iii. 12 235*, 478 John 1.36 430 John iii. 13 341*, 431, 537 John 1.38 537 John iii. 14 106*, 540 John I. 39 105, 563 John iii. 16 133, 172* , 281, 301, 610 John 1. 40 230, 268, 298, 537 John iii. 17 537, 540 John i. 41 64 John iii. 18 272, 273, 474*, 480 John i. 42 154, 537, 563 John iii. 19 129, 155, 630 John i. 43 60, 153, 430 John iii. 20 111,639 John i. 44 266, 313, 537, 563 John iii. 21 122, 155, 639 John i. 45 61 John iii. 22 268, 376, 539, 593* John i. 46 133, 267, 537, 543 John iii. 23 144, 471, 514 John i. 47 86, 551 John iii. 25 368 John i. 49 329, 341, 372, 537, 551 John iii. 26 212* John i. 50 114 John iii. 27 499 John i. 51 162, 239 John iii. 29 79, 199, 466* John i. 52 537, 553 John iii. 30 John iii. 31 332, 537 537 John u. 1 61, 187, 540 John iii. 32 437, 537 John ii. 2 519, 540 John iii. 33 155, 537 John ii. 3 540 John iii. 34 424*, 543 John ii. 4 211, 274, 537, 585 John iii. 35 414 John ii. 5 307 John iii. 36 266* John ii. 6 398*, 401, 402, 523 John ii. 7 201, 313, 537, 539 John iv. 1 144* , 239, 268, 540 John ii. 8 313, 314, 537, 540 John iv. 2 150, 444 John ii. 9 85, 198, 268, 274, 343, 540 John iv. 4 283*, 540 688 N. T. INDEX. John iv. 5 lis, 396 , 444, 471, 540 John V. 4 413* John iv. 6 134, 367*, 392* 540, 541, 562, John V. 5 59, 230*, 250, 256* >» » » 618* John V. 6 537 John iv. 7 537 John V. 7 372, 386, 537, 599* John iv. 8 288, 562 John V. 8 314, 537 John iv. 9 88, 152 , 365, 523, 537 John V. 9 539 John iv. 10 152*, 537, 562 John V. 10 331, 340 John iv. 11 132, 494*, 524, 537 John V. 11 64, 160, 228, 314 John iv. 12 239, 519 John V. 12 135 John iv. 14 199, 397*, 507 John V. 13 91, 268, 34: John iv. 15 318, 488, 537 John V. 14 501 John iv. 16 537 John V. 15 64, 268 John iv. 1 7 537 John V. 16 268 John iv. 18 110, 464* John V. 18 154, 268 John iv. 19 537, 551 John V. 19 261, 306, 307, 543 John iv. 20 384 John V. 20 242, 287 John iv. 21 183 , 265, 296, 537 John V. 21 123, 440, 541 John iv. 22 480, 538 John V. 22 131, 548* Johniv. 23 111 210, 420*, 424*, 448, 528 John V. 23 475 John iv. 24 538, 551 John V. 24 273* John iv. 25 308, 537 John V. 25 199, 296 John iv. 26 537, 582 John V. 26 266 John iv. 27 376, 393*, 539 John V. 27 439* John iv. 28 396, 444 John V. 28 82 John iv. 29 114,511 John V. 29 188,354 John iv. 30 86 John V. 30 495, 496, 499 John iv. 31 268, 545, 592* John V. 32 109, 225, 513 John iv. 33 511* John V. 35 114, 405, 614 John iv. 34 337*, 338, 537 John V. 36 133*, 245* John iv. 35 313, 539, 589, 626, 641* John V. 37 488, 489 John iv. 36 133, 459* John V. 38 489* John iv. 37 114, 363 John V. 39 114 John iv. 38 272 John V. 41 365 John iv. 39 134, 540, 550 John V. 42 185, 263, 482, 626 John iv. 40 177 , 296, 335, 540 John V. 43 390, 494, 537 John iv. 41 540, 619 John V. 44 152, 331*, 464*, 573, 578 John iv. 42 114, 435, 540, 619* John V. 45 109, 233, 273*, 537 John iv. 43 106 John V. 46 363, 66, 304 John iv. 44 447, 454* John V. 47 285, 292, 477, 478 John iv. 45 134, 275, 410 John iv. 46 61, 275 John vi. 1 191*, 207 John iv. 47 70 , 155, 274, 336 John vi. 2 375*, 515 John iv. 48 65, 506, 507* John vi. 3 106, 428, 456 John iv. 49 79, 330* John vi. 5 268, 279, 287, 607 Johniiv. 50 163, 537 John vi. 6 150, 564 John iv. 51 207 John vi. 7 335, 337 John iv. 52 230 John vi. 9 117, 141, 169 John iv. 53 422, 519, 582 John vi, 10 73,74, 230*,313,443, 452*, 456* John iv. 54 604 John vi. 13 John vi. 14 132, 201, 208, 514 114 John V. 1 118, 125* John vi. 15 228, 607 John T. 2 112, 267*. 392*, 592* John vi. 16 275 John V. 3 128, 520 John vi. 17 86, 429, 494, 596* N. T. INDEX. 689 John vi. 18 435 John vii. 14 270 John vi. 19 230, 250, 374*, 471 John vii. 15 340, 483*, 496 John vi. 21 268, 330, 375*, 467*, 614 John vii. 16 496* John vi. 22 79, 131, 275, 568* John vii. 17 107, 293, 332, 373, 509, 537, John vi. 23 564* >t )> » 541, 614 John vi. 24 57, 268 John vii. 18 537 John vi. 26 496 John vii. 19 271, 508 John vi. 27 496*, 528, 534 John vii. 21 59*, 117 John vi. 29 57, 159 , 166, 338, 628 John vii. 22 271, 368, 421, .597 John vi. 30 152 John vii. 23 459*, 508 John vi. 31 106*, 588* John vii. 24 224, 314 John vi. 32 276 John vii. 26 511 John vi. 33 343 John vii. 27 298, 442, 510, 626 John vi. 35 77, 506, 639 John vii. 28 437 John vi. 36 439* John vii. 30 437 John vi. 37 178 John vii. 31 58, 163, 511* John vi. 38 287 John vii. 32 288 John vi. 39 83, 574, 589 John vii. 34 53, 552 John vi. 40 144, 338 John vii. 35 187*, 300*, 472, 511 John vi. 41 343, 431 John vii. 36 53, 494 John vi. 42 159 John vii. 37 77, 293, 525 John vi. 43 376 John vii. 38 89, 550, 574 John vi. 45 175, 189* John vii. 39 163 John vi. 46 597 John vii. 40 107 John vi. 50 114, 199 , 343, 366, 630 John vii. 41 447* John vi. 51 86,87 , 114,343,443 John vii. 42 265,411 John vi. 52 212 John vii. 43 399 John vi. 54 552 John vii. 44 330, 437 John vi. 55 465* John vii. 45 157*, 632 John vi. 56 552 John vii. 48 442, 366, 420 John vi. 57 399*, 440, 549 John vii. 49 442, 484, 486*, 515 John vi. 58 86, 198 John vii. 51 267, 523*, 588 John vi. 60 551 John vii. 52 265,266,311* John vi. 62 159, 600* John vi. 63 114 , 499, 538, 609 John viii. 3 123 John vi. 64 124, 268, 475*, 543 John viii. 4 72 John vi. 65 368 John viii. 6 268 John vi. 66 367, 550 John viii. 7 394, 467 John vi. 68 279, 549 John viii. 8 268 John vi. 69 553* John viii. 9 249, 621 John vi. 70 436* John viii. 12 506, 513 John Ari. 71 70, 190 John viii. 14 John viii. 15 267, 441, 472 583* John vii. 1 268 John viii. 16 293, 558 John vii. 2 528 John viii. 18 538 John vii. 3 79 John viii. 19 304, 488 John vii. 4 292, 630* John viii. 20 275, 385*, 480 John vii. 6 132 John viii. 21 387, 388 John vii. 7 614* John viii. 22 2.'J3, 511* John vii. 8 596* John viii. 23 109 John vii. 10 541, 617 John viii. 25 46, 167*, 230, 438, 457, 464* John vii. 12 105 )t » f 549 John vii. 13 185* John viii. 26 416, 442, 451 87 690 N. T. INDEX. John viii. 27 222 John ix. 41 304 John viii. 29 277* John viii. 33 271 John X. 1 483 John viii. 36 295 John X. 3 154, 537, 540 John viii. 37 413, 414*, 480 John X. 4 514, 537 John viii. 38 455* John X. 5 84, 223, 507, 610 John viii. 39 305 John X. 6 168, 298* John viii. 40 199*, 272, 528 John X. 7 114, 187* John viii. 41 538 John X. 8 372, 514 John viii. 42 304 John X. 9 540 John viii. 44 114*, 138, 145*, 308, 467* John X. 10 606 John viii. 45 457 John X. 11 106* 132, 524, 539 John viii. 51 293, 506 John X. 12 514, 540 John viii. 52 506, 519 John X. 13 206, 373 John viii. 53 545, 577* John viii. 54 293, 574*, 626 John X. 15 882, 440 John viii. 55 195*, 209, 482 John X. 16 520 John viii. 56 339* John X. 17 537 John viii. 58 267, 330, 523 John X. 18 370 John viii. 59 253*, 469* John X. 19 John X. 20 399 456 John ix. 1 139, 367 John X. 21 333,514 John ix. 2 58, 459*, 545 John X. 22 112 John ix. 3 177,316, 317*, 488, 514 John X. 23 67, 385 John ix. 4 296 , 297, 332, 481 John X. 25 437, 514 John ix. 5 144, 609 John X. 27 514 John ix. 6 427 John X. 28 83, 506 John ix. 7 413, 415*, 563 John X. 29 143, 144, 242 John ix. 8 114,268 John X. 30 152, 518 John ix. 9 209 John X. 32 265*, 368, 412, 525 John ix. 10 72 John X. 33 152, 228, 412 John ix. 11 155, 415*, 427, 456 John X. 35 478 John ix. 13 68, 267, 528 John X. 36 580 John ix. 14 72, 443 John X. 37 478* John ix. 15 298 John X. 38 553 John ix. 17 83, 550 John X. 41 144 John ix. 18 275, 296 John ix. 19 114 John xi. 1 364*, 370, 411* John ix. 20 114 John xi. 2 227, 343*, 562 John ix. 21 83, 150, 152, 155, 298 John xi. 3 543 John ix. 22 254 t, 262, 294, 336 John xi. 4 383*, 405 John ix. 24 153 John xi. 5 268, 443 John ix. 25 298*, 341* John xi. 6 159, 165, 230, 541, 576 John ix. 26 155,456 John xi. 7 603 John ix. 27 331 John xi. 8 436, 472 John ix. 28 222 John xi. 11 608* John ix. 29 66 John xi. 12 292 John ix. 30 72, 184*, 446* John xi. 13 531 John ix. 31 160, 199, 549 John xi. 15 80,339*, 459* John ix. 33 70 305*. 477, 499 John xi. 18 112, 195, 372, 471, 557* John ix. 36 437, 620* John xi. 19 275 John ix. 37 273, 274*, 540 John xi. 21 304 John ix. 38 105, 210 John xi. 25 87, 114, 518 N. T. INDEX. 691 John xi. 26 506 John xii. 36 238 John xi. 27 273 John xii. 40 155, 459, 494, 522*, 588 John xi. 30 275, 456, 563* John xii. 41 457 John xi. 31 341, 626 John xii. 42 444 John xi. 32 155, 159*, 304 John xii. 43 241* John xi. 33 215*, 527 John xii. 44 456 , 496, 497 John xi. 37 70, 149, 337 John xii. 46 527 John xi. 38 396*, 430 John xii. 47 144 John xi. 39 313 John xii. 48 160, 483 John xi. 40 76 John xii. 49 611 John xi. 41 396 John xi. 44 229, 278*, 313, 552 John xiii. 1 155 , 339, 344 372, 396, 460, John xi. 45 168 >i » »» John xiii. 2 531 , 572, 638 252* John xi. 47 128, 284* John xiii. 3 272 John xi. 48 155, 192, 607* John xiii. 4 176*, 267* John xi. 49 118, 170*, 341 John xiii. 5 106, 614* John xi. 50 337, 382 John xiii. 6 549, 88, 265* , 444, 508 John xi. 51 70, 71, 562 John xiii. 7 543 John xi. 52 577 John xiii. 8 .506 John xi. 54 421 John xiii. 9 552, 582 John xi. 55 539 John xiii. 10 508 John xi. 56 506, 508* John xiii. 11 353, 562 John xi. 57 72, 275, 294, 336 John xiii. 12 271, 275 John xiii. 14 88, 292 , 528, 5*9 John xii. 1 123, 557* John xiii. 16 239 , 242, 488 John xii. 2 268, 593* John xiii. 17 296*, 612 John xii. 3 97*, 201*, 525*. 606 John xiii. 18 316 317* 430, 620 John xii. 5 116, 621* John xiii. 22 233, 26» John xii. 6 116, 206, 268 John xiii. 24 308*, 31 & John xii. 7 274* John xiii. 25 407* John xii. 8 150 John xiii. 27 243*, 265, 311* John xii. 9 123, 515 John xiii. 28 405*, 626 John xii. 10 254*, 336 John xiii. 29 158*, 313, 559 , 577, 580 John xii. 11 191, 550 John xiii. 31 277* John xii. 12 106, 515, 526 John xiii. 32 292* John xii. 13 270, 603* John xiii. 33 440 John xii. 15 549 John xiii. 34 336, 464*, 524*, 550 John xii. 16 393, 541 John xiii. 35 173, 386 John xii. 17 123, 270 John xii. 18 334, 347, 515 John xiv. 1 817, 501 John xii. 20 353, 593* John xiv. 3 265 John xii. 21 331, 370 John xiv. 7 273*, 304 John xii. 23 261, 339*, 460* John xiv. 9 549 John xii. 25 83 John xiv. 11 585 John xii. 26 265 John xiv. 15 314 John xii. 27 442 John xiv. 16 5S0 John xii. 28 682*, 586 John xiv. 17 488 John xii. 29 334, 522 John xiv. 19 585 John xii. 32 86, 291 John xiv. 21 114 John xii. 33 70, 226 John xiv. 22 562 John xii. 34 261 John xiv. 23 S56 John xii. 35 296, 538 1 John xiv. 24 475 692 N. T INDEX. John xiv. 26 227, 609 John xiv. 27 186, 609, 639 John xiv. 28 304* 513 John xiv. 30 60, 218, 436, 437 John xiv. 31 285 John XV. 1 132 John XV. 2 58, 11 1, 148, 343*, 483, .537, 574 John XV. 3 399, 537 John XV. 4 314, 384, 471, 537, 541, 582 John XV. 5 471* 499* 537, 578, 582 John XV. 6 141, 277*, 293, 522, 537, 632* John XV. 7 310, 537 John XV. 8 161, 278*, 337*, 338*, 537 John XV. 9 537, 541 John XV. 10 153*, 537 John XV. 11 137, 537 John XV. 12 537 John XV. 13 338, 537, 539, 595* John XV. 14 537 John XV. 15 537, 619 John XV. 16 78, 537, 607 John XV. 17 336, 537 John XV. 18 537 John XV. 19 304, 429, 537, 609 John XV. 20 163, 292*, 537 John XV. 21 537 John XV. 22 77,192*,305*,373,477,537,595 John XV. 23 537 John XV. 24 77, 271, 439, 475, 537 John XV. 25 317*, 588, 620 John XV. 26 141, 365, 429, 562 John XV. 27 267, 443 John xvi. 2 265, 339, 451*, 460 John xvi. 4 124 John xvi. 7 320, 337 John xvi. 8 421, 520 John xvi. 11 273 John xvi. 12 332 John xvi. 13 ^ 82, 308 John xvi. 14 266 John xvi. 15 266 John xvi. 17 75, 203, 265, 366*, 589 John xvi. 19 330 John xvi. 20 87,90,184 John xvi. 22 90, 558 John xvi. 23 227, 499 John xvi. 24 459, 499 John xvi. 25 296, 481 John xvi. 26 373 John xvi. 27 112, 150*, 365 John xvi. 30 122, 339, 387* John xvi. 31 John xvi. 32 John xvi. 33 John John John John John John John John John John John John John John John John John John John John xvii. 2 xvii. 3 xvii. 4 xvii. 5 xvii. 6 xvii. 7 xvii, 8 xvii. 9 xvii. 10 xvii. 11 xvii. 12 xvii. 14 xvii. 15 xvii. 17 xvii. 18 xvii. 22 xvii. 23 xvii. 24 xvii. 25 xvii. 26 John xviii. 1 John xviii. 2 John xviii. 3 John xviii. 5 John xviii. 6 John xviii. 7 John xviii. 10 John xviii. 11 John xviii. 12 John xviii. 13 John xviii. 14 John xviii. 15 John xviii. 16 John xviii. 20 John xviii. 22 John xviii. 23 John xviii. 24 John xviii. 26 John xviii. 28 John xviii. 30 John xviii. 31 John xviii. 32 John xviii. 34 John xviii. 36 John xviii. 37 John xviii. 38 John xviii 39 John xviii. 40 508 339, 460, 516* 291 75, 79, 145, 185*, 289 161, 290, 337, 338, 525 276* 163 76 76 553 159, 166, 421 273*, 389*, 389, 562 163, 183, 265 508 272 336, 410 538 277*, 440 274*, 582 585 123, 265 439 225 67 113, 376 106, 368, 377, 471, 472* 113, 582 73, 109 582 98, 182, 559 148*, 313, 512* 275* 60 319 519 395 117,610 226 292 275 158, 159 267, 288 304, 477 581* 70, 226 151, 261 304 444, 457, 512* 152 839 582 N. T. INDEX. i^ 693 John xiz. 2 226, 430 John XX. 26 123, 472. 537, 585 John xix. 3 77, 182 John XX. 27 610 John xix. 4 631 John XX. 28 183* John xix. 5 564, 631* John XX. 29 272* John xix. 6 128, 610 John XX. 30 525 John xix. 7 228 John xix. 9 267 John xxi. 1 191, 374*, 443 John xix. 10 508, 609 John xxi. 2 109, 190, 518, 520 John xix. 11 242, 305* John xxi. 3 265, 284, 537 John xix. 12 429 John xxi. 4 85, 408 John xix. 14 124, 189* John xxi. 5 511 John xix. 16 456 John xxi. 6 313, 371, 618 John xix. 19 374, 376 John xxi. 8 65, 188, 216 370, 557, 562 John xix. 21 501 John xxi. 9 275 John xix. 22 271, 521 John xxi. 10 90, 199, 370, 589 John xix. 23 111, 176, 562 John xxi. 11 250, 341 John xix. 24 257 285, 373, 502 John xxi. 12 613* John xix. 25 60, 131*, 190, 394 John xxi. 13 607* John xix. 26 183 John xxi. 14 123 John xix. 28 459*, 561 John xxi. 15 85, 190, 549 John xix. 29 201 John xxi. 16 313, 604 John xix. 30 1 271 John xxi. 17 545 John xix. 31 70, 514* , 561, 562, 563 John xxi. 18 253, 257, 268 John xix. 32 70, 115, 576 John xxi. 20 407* John xix. 35 340 John xxi. 21 169, 550, 562, 586* John xix. 36 162 John xxi. 22 55 152, 296, 58P John xix. 37 158 John xxi. 23 265 John xix. 38 632 John xxi. 24 343, 517 John xix. 39 86 John xxi. 25 168, 333*, 482*, 525 John xix. 41 499, 524 Acts i. 1 183, 244, 256, 549, 559, 575*, 621* John XX. 1 106, 248, 343* 366*, 396 Acts i. 2 164, 275, 542, 543, 556* John XX. 2 420, 522, 588* Acts i. 3 143, 188, 207, 575* John XX. 3 270, 519 Acts i. 4 199, 545, 580 John XX. 4 69, 464, 604* Acts i. 5 161* 216, 412*, 540 John XX. 6 267 Acts i. 6 105, 509 John XX. 7 376, 415*, 632 Acts i. 7 195*, 441* John XX. 9 123, 274 Acts i. 8 125*, 407, 420 John XX. 11 395, 396 Acts i. 10 . 174 , 175,348,438 John XX. 12 173, 384, 395, 591* Acts i. 11 85, 110, 43C , 523, 549, 610 John XX. 13 298 Acts i. 12 182* John XX. 14 537 Acts i. 13 113, 128, 131 , 190, 518, 520 John XX. 15 147*, 537, 632 Acts i. 14 122, 521 John XX. 16 537 Acts i. 15 250, 562, 563 John XX. 17 201, 428, 537 Acts i. 16 183, 523 John XX. 18 537 Acts i. 17 200* John XX. 19 123, 159, 176 , 234, 248, 267, Acts i. 18 88, 206, 514 ff 9f ff 185, 473*, 585 Acts i. 19 112 John XX. 21 271, 541, 585 Acts i. 20 286, 435 John XX. 22 312 Acts i. 21 160, 407, 444, 624 John XX. 23 272, 291, 293 Acts i. 22 164, 621 John XX. 24 483 Acts i. 24 85, 152, 158*, 342* John XX. 25 66 Acts i. 25 432, 631 694 N. T. ] [NDEX. Acts i. 26 408, 433* Acts iii. 13 Acts iii. 14 148, 149, 157*, 400, 575 126, 523 Acts ii. 1 328, .539 Acts iii. 15 123 Act9 ii. 2 348, 539 Acts iii. 16 133, 144, 378, 394* Act3 ii. 3 516*, 539 Acts iii. 17 402* Acts ii. 4 539, 614 Acts iii. 18 606 Acts ii. 5 370, 407 Acts iii. 19 310*, 462* Acts ii. 6 154, 516, 528 Acts iii. 20 462 Acts ii. 9 112,439 Acts iii. 21 163, 462, 558 Acts ii. 10 400, 439 Acts iii. 22 82, 307, 401, 545 Acts ii. 11 345, 347 Acts iii. 23 156, 307, 480 Acts ii. 12 303*, 516 Acts iii. 24 370, 633* Acts ii. 14 183, 391, 610 Acts iii. 25 114, 163, 225 Acts ii. 1 7 77, 199, 370 Acts iii. 26 134*, 329* Acts ii. 18 77, 438 Acts ii. 19 531 Acts iv. 1 207, 427 Acts ii. 20 330, 396 Acts iv. 2 123, 133, 389 Acts ii. 22 379, 523 Acts iv. 3 396, 430, 590 Acts ii. 23 73, 148 Acts iv. 4 84, 276 Acts ii. 24 31 Acts iv. 5 146*, 323, 415, 590 Acts ii. 25 88, 397* Acts iv. 7 390, 420, 527, 632* Acts ii. 26 71, 425* Acts iv. 9 185*, 448 Acts ii. 27 156, 592 Acts iv. 11 114, 157* Acts ii. 28 201, 376* Acts iv. 12 217*. 454*, 493 Acts ii. 29 113 , 384, 549, 585 Acts iv. 13 268, 269*, 434, 544, 626 Acts ii. 30 226, 331, 455*, 603 Acts iv. 15 593* Acts ii. 31 482, 592 Acts iv. 16 284, 331 Acts ii. 32 110 Acts iv. 17 393, 396, 466*, 481 Acts ii. 33 214*, 237* , 435, 531, 559 Acts iv. 18 344, 481, 488 Acts ii. 34 81, 215 Acts iv. 19 518 Acts ii. 36 111* Acts iv. 20 475, 481, 498* Acts ii. 37 435 Acts iv. 21 109, 299, 343* Acts ii. 38 393*, 397, 587 Acts iv. 22 43, 196, 239, 531, 596 Acts ii. 39 307,415* Acts iv. 23 128 Acts ii. 40 545 Acts iv. 24 152, 404, 552 Acts ii. 41 433 Acts iv. 27 439, 518 Acts ii. 42 348 Acts iv. 29 45, 431 Acts ii. 43 65, 156, 211*, 379*, 439, 527 Acts iv. 33 78, 407, 435, 550 Acts ii. 45 306 Acts iv. 34 384 Acts ii. 46 198, 401* Acts iv. 35 306, 403 Acts ii. 47 110* Acts iv. 36 120, 230, 562 Acts iii. 1 408* 518 Acts v. 1 62, 171 Acts iii. 2 171, 227, 325, 354*, 522, 543 Acts V. 2 253, 57, 62, 90, 199 Acts iii. 3 270, 354 , 543, 608, 609 Acts V. 4 212, 343* 355, 495*, 497, 585 Acts iii. 4 233, 313 Acts V. 5 344, 408 Acts iii. 5 593 Acts V. 7 58, 483, 563 Acts iii. 6 211 Acts V. 8 206, 298 Acts iii. 7 192, 202* Acts V. 10 342, 405 Acts iii. 8 553 Acts V. 12 65, 67, 363, 379, 564*, 607 Acts iii. 10 66, 392, 626 Acts V. 13 564 Acts iii. 11 67 , 392, 394, 526 Acts V. 14 564* Acts iii. 12 183, 261, 326*, 610, 617 Acts V. 15 374, 376, 400*, 431, 564* N. T. INDEX. 696 Acts V. 16 516, 526 Acts vii. 27 71, 90, 269 Acts V. 17 520, 608 Acts vii. 29 121, 387* Acts V. 19 176, 380 Acts vii. 30 106* Acts V. 20 237*, 238*, 634 Acts vii. 32 114, 585 Acts V. 21 407* Acts vii. 33 313 Acts V. 22 251* Acts vii. 34 354 Acts V. 23 372, 472, 545, 604 Acts vii. 35 63, 67, 159 Acts V. 24 129, 275, 308, 439, 518 Acts vii. 36 121, 524 Acts V. 26 217, 288, 377, 505* Acts vii. 37 82,85 Acts V. 28 112, 201, 393, 408, 466, 481 Acts vii. 38 118, 421 Acts V. 29 332, 518, 520, 595* Acts vii. 39 40, 71, 90 Acts V. 30 374 Acts vii. 40 67, 110, 148, 182, 300* Acts V. 31 214*, 228, 318 Acts vii. 41 232 Acts V. 32 191* Acts vii. 42 43, 175, 251, 469*, 512* Acts V. 35 60, 392, 549, 557*, 610 Acts vii. 43 75, 210 Acts V. 36 170*, 184, 261, 433* Acts vii. 44 66 Acts V. 37 106, 621 Acts vii. 45 71, 90, 174 Acts V. 38 296*, 427, 519 Acts vii. 46 71 Acts V. 39 122, 296* Acts vii. 47 71 Acts V. 40 393 Acts vii. 48 554 Acts V. 42 345*, 435 Acts vii. 51 Acts vii. 53 215, 440 228*, 398* Acts vi. 1 28, 268, 405 Acts vii. 58 254 Acts vi. 2 85, 87 Acts vii. 59 549 Acts vi. 3 375 Acts vii. 60 226 Acts vi. 4 128 Acts vi. 5 28, 103, 113, 120, 214, 233 Acts viii. 1 113 133, 400, 443 Acts vi. 6 632 Acts viii. 2 256, 276, 443 Acts vi. 7 268, 435 Acts viii. 3 113, 443, 552 Acts vi. 8 113 Acts viii. 4 559 Acts vi. 9 112, 129*, 420 Acts viii. 5 113, 125, 145 Acts vi. 11 67 Acts viii. 6 113,329, 435 Acts vi. 13 128, 382 Acts viii. 7 Acts viii. 8 443, 584 443 Acts vii. 2 330, 341 Acts viii. 9 170*, 443 Acts vii. 3 429 Acts viii. 10 114,370 Acts vii. 4 329, 413, 415, 422 Acts viii. 11 218, 329, 334 Acts vii. 5 276*, 331, 397 Acts viii. 12 113 Acts vii. 8 61, 113,218 Acts viii. 13 348, 435 Acts vii. 9 61, 376 Acts viii. 14 259, 271 Acts vii. 10 73, 138*, 228, 527 Acts viii. 15 71, 122, 373 Acts vii. 11 407 Acts viii. 1 6 350* 430, 499, 562 Acts vii. 12 63, 345, 347 Acts viii. 17 122, 269 Acts vii. 14 113, 250,391* Acts viii. 19 46 , 158, 287, 307 Acts Vii. 15 519 Acts viii. 20 286 Acts vii. 16 70, 90, 163, 190, 206 Acts viii. 21 211 Acts vii. 17 163 Acts viii. 22 198, 300, 370 445, 542, 622 Acts vii. 19 157, 326*, 329 Acts viii. 24 158* 166, 430, 477 Acts vii. 20 212, 248* Acts viii. 25 223 Acts vii. 21 73, 143, 147, 228*, 528 Acts viii. 26 119*, 121, 157*, 400 Acts vii. 22 227* Acts viii. 27 318, 341, 375, 593* Acts vii. 24 258, 632* Acts viii. 28 348, 374, 435 Acts vii. 26 48, 269, 341, 435 Acts viii. 80 510, 638 696 N. T. INDEX. Acts tiii. 31 295, 303*, 304, 335, 435, 447 Acts viii. 34 420 Acts viii. 35 71, 607* Acts viii. 36 268, 400, 407, 604 Acts viii. 38 528 Acts viii. 39 226, 415, 499 Acts viii. 40 71, 415*, 616*, 621 Acts ix. 1 204* Acts ix. 2 106, 107, 195, 196, 227, 294, „ „ „ 396, 552, 559 3 323, 366, 426, 432, 486 4 610 6 41, 79, 168, 587* X. 7 44, 486 X. 8 72, 113 X. 9 486*, 488 X. 11 182,313, 454* X. 12 182, 430 X. 13 . 371, 549 15 587 17 106, 287, 430, 562 18 427, 439 X. 20 268, 626 X. 21 114,161,270,275,288,340, 354, 457 X. 24 207, 435, 552 X. 26 268, 484 X. 27 46, 202, 301 X. 31 185, 219, 382, 420 X. 32 61, 323 X. 33 367 X. 34 79, 594* X. 35 61, 275 37 178*, 323 38 61, 471 X. 39 253, 254, 376 X. 40 105, 345 42 213*, 382 43 323 Acts X. 1 61, 62, 171 Acts X. 3 230 Acts X. 4 632 Acts X. 5 313, 396 Acts X. 6 121,211,395,404 Acts X. 7 145, 632* Acts X. 9 124, 407, 544 Acts X. 10 146, 147, 330, 408, 430 Actsx. 11 267, 376*, 635 Acts X. 13 586 Acts X. 14 171, 441, 475, 499 Acts X. 15 152, 543, 586, 604 Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts » Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts X. 16 Acts X. 17 Acts X. 1 8 Acts X. 20 Acts X. 21 Acts X. 22 Acts X. 23 Acts X. 24 Acts X. 25 Acts X. 26 Acts X. 28 Acts X. 30 Acts X. 32 Acts X. 33 Acts X. 35 Acts X. 36 Acts X. 37 Acts X. 38 Acts X. 39 Acts X. 41 Acts X. 42 Acts X. 45 Acts X. 47 Acts X. 48 Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts xi. 1 5 6 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 28 29 30 Acts xii. 1 Acts xii. 2 Acts xii. 3 Acts xii. 5 Acts xii. 6 Acts xii. 7 422 268, 308, 371*, 408, 438, 605 268, 298, 543 41, 442, 451, 477 584 61, 138, 199, 322*, 434 253* 348 328* 153 435, 437, 449*, 481 43, 80 121, 138*, 404, 528 345, 592 120, 574 149, 164, 564*, 574* 382, 564* 227 163, 363, 439, 559, 560, 625* 123, 140, 171 50, 552 424 326, 511 435 341, 400 42, 80, 635* 270 441 422 408, 427 106, 435 152, 518 124, 614* 205, 216, 412*, 602 80, 443, 603, 628* 371, 372*, 392* 268 435 133, 609* 335, 433 524 95, 323 63, 75, 89, 334, 375*, 526 71,516 606 113, 138, 540 62, 216, 540 268, 468*, 540, 562, 563 540 64, 177, 435, 539, 540 73, 79, 429, 539, 540 N. T. INDEX. 697 Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts Acts xii. 8 xii. 9 xii. 10 xii. 11 xii. 12 xii. 13 xii. 14 xii. 15 xii. 16 xii. 17 xii. 18 xii. 19 xii. 20 xii. 21 xii. 22 xii. 23 xii. 24 xii. 25 314, 435, 442, 72, 126, 132, 73, 435, 50, 371, 345, 467*, 45, 298, 301, 396, 415*, 371, 375, 142*, 146, 518, 539, 540 539, 540 464, 540 152, 540 539, 540 540, 545 442, 540 540 540, 544 539, 540 445, 540 437, 540 410, 540 218, 540 142, 540 540 539, 540 539, 544 Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. Acts xiii. 1 2 3 4 8 9 10 124, 183, 11 12 13 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 400, 520 262*, 313, 422 143, 521, 584* 539 138, 561, 562, 563 107* 315, 345, 510*, 549 251, 268, 486, 585 232 109, 187, 372, 406* 183, 218 183, 610 377 121 218, 250 230 113, 131, 180, 190, 228, 527 192* 238 607 169*, 319, 543 237* 238* 454* 484 454 123 405, 408, 543 223, 227, 454, 626 618* 592* 432, 540 158, 543 57, 422 175, 430, 504 293, 508 Acts xiii. 43 128, 542 Acts xiii. 44 435 Acts xiii. 45 355* Acts xiii. 46 151^ 51 g, 539 Acts xiii. 47 228, 259, 528 Acts xiii. 48 69, 262*, 543 Acts xiii. 49 378* Acts xiii. 50 126, 539 Acts xiii. 51 342 Acts xiv. 1 301, 323, 401*, 559 Acts xiv. 3 379 Acts xiv. 4 104, 391 Acts xiv. 5 319, 560 Acts xiv. 8 73, 215 Acts xiv. 9 324, 543 Acts xiv. 10 48, 82, 108, 464, 528, 553* Acts xiv. 11 431, 539 Acts xiv. 12 66, 150*, 539 Acts xiv. 13 90, 372, 630 Acts xiv. 14 257, 344, 518 Acts xiv. 15 209, 543, 552, 628 Acts xiv. 16 219 Acts xiv. 17 78, 156, 201, 444* Acts xiv. 18 325 Acts xiv. 19 321, 344, 544 Acts xiv. 20 391 Acts xiv. 21 223, 420, 539 Acts xiv. 22 430 Acts xiv. 23 78 Acts xiv. 26 472 Acts xiv. 27 376, 542 Acts XV. 1 215, 293 Acts XV. 2 373 Acts XV. 3 431 Acts XV. 4 127, 259, 420, 435, 539 Acts XV. 5 301 , 370 Acts XV. 6 128, 539 Acts XV. 7 226*, 606 Acts XV. 8 440 Acts XV. 10 152, 318* 488, 542 Acts XV. 12 177, 379, 515 Acts XV. 13 183, 329 Acts XV. 16 469* Acts XV. 17 141, 310 Acts XV. 19 481 Acts XV. 20 127, 326*, 427, 520 Acts XV. 21 401* Acts XV. 22 255*, 567, 627 Acts XV. 23 128,133,316,588,606 Acts XV. 24 322, 344, 545 Acts XV. 25 320, 545, 627 698 N. T. INDEX. Acts XV. 26 545 Acts xvii. 20 169 Acts XV. 27 342* Acts xvii. 21 71, 244*, 549 Acts XV. 29 315 , 345, 427, 520 Acts xvii. 22 244*, 523, 610 Acts XV. 31 232 Acts xvii. 24 120, 545 Acts XV. 36 142*, 298, 626, 627* Acts xvii. 25 200, 637 Acts XV. 37 70 Acts xvii. 26 407, 539 Acts XV. 38 372*, 481, 482 Acts xvii. 27 76, 299*, 485 Acts XV. 39 435 Acts xvii. 28 104, 154, 389, 400*, 454* » »> >» 540, 640* Acts xvi. 2 260 420 Acts xvii. 29 441, 491* Acts xvi. 3 607, 626 Acts xvii. 30 433 Acts xvi. 4 268, 296, 431 Acts xvii. 31 163, 389* 410, 424, 463 Acts xvi. 5 215 Acts xvii. 32 82, 104, 123, 528 Acts xvi. 7 333, 400, 476*, 494 Acts xvi. 9 112, 219*, 313, 380 Acts xviii. 1 112 Acts xvi. 10 262* Acts xviii. 2 120, 182, 215 329, 343, 543 Acts xvi. 11 590 Acts xviii, 3 Acts xviii. 4 • 72, 230, 395 539, 552 Acts xvi. 13 403 Acts xviii. 5 129, 341, 518 Acts xvi. 14 433, 543 Acts xviii. 6 176*, 587 Acts xvi. 15 292, 314, 545 Acts xviii. 7 182 Acts xvi. 16 257*, 323, 543 Acts xviii. 8 113 Acts xvi. 18 553 Acts xviii. 9 610 Acts xvi. 19 202 Acts xviii. 10 693* Acts xvi. 21 332, 493 Acts xviii. 11 249 Acts xvi. 22 269*, 332 Acts xviii. 12 206 Acts xvi. 23 539 Acts xviii. 13 404 Acts xvi. 24 69 ,111, 542, 622 Acts xviii. 14 72. 183, 304, 401 Acts xvi. 25 401* 518 Acts xviii. 15 154 Acts xvi. 26 63, 72, 176, 549 Acts xviii. 17 113, 202, 205 Acts xvi. 27 70, 334*, 544 Acts xviii. 18 253 Acts xvi. 28 222, 226, 501 Acts xviii. 19 150, 209 Acts xvi. 29 433 Acts xviii. 20 242 Acts xvi. 31 76, 518 Acts xviii. 21 415, 603 Acts xvi. 33 197, 372* Acts xviii. 22 544 Acts xvi. 34 44, 346 , 435, 539, 627 Acts xviii. 24 62, 120, 341 Acts xvi. 37 41 , 73, 446*, 591 Acts xviii. 25 268 Acts xvi. 39 335 Acts xviii. 26 243, 539, 614* Acts xvi. 40 396 Acts xviii. 27 Acts xviii. 28 259 209 Acts xvii. 2 209, 211,215, 217,372*, 584* Acts xvii. 3 330, 580 Acts xix. 1 62 219, 323, 543 Acts xvii. 4 262 Acts xix. 2 539, 298 451, 493, 509 Acts xvii. 6 61, 73, 219, 484 Acts xix. 3 397*, 439, 539 Acts xvii. 9 420 Acts xix. 4 530, 550, 576 Acts xvii. 10 112, 129 543 Acts xix. 6 71, 539 Acts xvii. 1 1 299* 377 Acts xix. 10 408, 552 Acts xvii. 12 523 Acts xix. 11 140, 539, 606 Acts xvii. 13 82 112 Acts xix. 12 428, 435 Acts xvii. 14 129, 617* Acts xix. 13 226, 408 Acts xvii. 15 112 420 Acts xix. 14 60, 170 Acts xvii. 16 112 632 Acts xix. 16 . 132, 429, 431 Acts xvii. 18 71, 105, 171, 303*, 593* Acts xix. 17 140 N. T. INDEX. 699 Acts xix. 19 527, 592 Acts xxi. 3 112, 260*, 270, 349*, 472 Acts xix. 22 251*, 415* Acts xxi. 4 322*, 481, 543 Acts xix. 24 253, 257, 341 Acts xxi. 5 122, 323, 552 Acts xix. 25 367, 406, 543 Acts xxi. 6 430 Acts xix. 26 110, 321, 498* Acts xxi. 8 184*, 692* Acts xix. 27 H 184*, 196, 228, 550 Acts xxi. 9 523 Acts xix. 28 584 Acts xxi. 11 155, 552 Acts xix. 29 201, 353* Acts xxi. 12 825, 439 Acts xix. 31 594, 61, 171, 335, 481 Acts xxi. 13 382, 609* Acts xix. 32 242 Acts xxi. 16 165 203, 214*, 841, 513, 589* Acts xix. 33 209, 330, 332 Acts xxi. 17 207, 465 Acts xix. 34 567*, 584 Acts xxi. 18 435 Acts xix. 35 234, 300 ,447 481, 523, 592 Acts xxi. 19 158 Acts xix. 37 222 Acts xxi. 21 219, 322* Acts xix. 38 53, 590* Acts xxi. 23 211 Acts xix. 39 292 Acts xxi. 24 75, 255 Acts xix. 40 203, 448 Acts xxi. 25 Acts xxi. 26 128, 223, 520 218, 255, 275, 296 Acts XX. 1 543, 609* Acts xxi. 28 114, 272, 344*, 439, 578* Acts XX. 2 145 Acts xxi. 29 321 Acts XX. 3 112,211 , 324 428, 539, 567 Acts xxi. 30 86 Acts XX. 4 103, 138* 519, 520, 593 Acts xxi. 31 62, 215* Acts XX. 7 248, 435, 539 Acts xxi. 32 61 Acts XX. 9 341, 371, 375*, 431, 545 Acts xxi. 33 168, 299*, SOS Acts XX. 10 430 Acts xxi. 34 484 Acts XX. 11 541 Acts xxi. 35 323 Acts XX. 12 276 Acts xxi. 36 516, 526 Acts XX. 13 262* Acts xxi. 37 509 Acts XX. 14 415* Acts xxi. 38 106, 114, 134, 511* Acts XX. 15 112, 590 Acts'xxi. 39 313, 528, 545 Acts XX. 16 211 , 294, 319, 477 Acts XX. 17 112 Acts xxii. 2 432 Acts XX. 18 298* , 422, 430, 549 Acts xxii. 3 187, 189*, 340*, 559* Acts XX. 20 325, 545 Acts xxii. 4 543 Acts XX. 21 66, 559 Acts xxii. 5 141, 472 Acts XX. 22 215, 483 Acts xxii. 6 121, 220, 323, 406*, 432 Acts XX. 23 63, 340, 508 Acts xxii. 7 73 Acts XX. 24 186, 318 Acts xxii. 9 540, 550 Acts XX. 25 384 Acts xxii. 10 163 Acts XX. 26 197 Acts xxii. 11 268, 371*, 481 Acts XX. 27 325, 482, 604 Acts xxii. 12 528 Acts XX. 28 228, 527 Acts xxii. 13 54, 218, 313, 428 Acts XX. 29 205, 396, 484* Acts xxii. 15 110, 158 Acts XX. 30 621 Acts xxii. 17 220*, 323*, 577 Acts XX. 31 552 Acts xxii. 18 137* Acts XX. 32 391* Acts xxii. 19 213*, 401 Acts XX. 33 204 Acts xxii. 21 396 Acts XX. 34 577 Acts xxii. 22 282* Acts XX. 35 240 Acts xxii. 24 85, 301 Acts XX. 38 163 Acts xxii. 25 Acts xxii. 26 61, 208, 509 61 Acts xxi. 1 62, 323, 427, 590 Acts xxii. 28 439 Acts xxi. 2 342*, 344 Acts xxii. 29 443 700 N. T. INDEX. Acts xxii. 80 109, 261, 365*, 398* Acts xxv. 2 Acts xxv. 3 539, 548 338, 341 Acts xxiii. 1 111,262 Acts xxv. 4 540 Acts xxiii. 3 81, 332, 340 Acts xxv. 5 77, 540, 558 Acts xxiii. 5 222, 316, 502, 641* Acts xxv. 6 239, 344, 540, 544, 596 Acts xxiii. 6 195, 203, 437, 631 Acts xxv. 7 330, 373, 432, 525*, 540 Acts xxiii. 7 128 Acts xxv. 9 375 Acts xxiii. 8 481, 493*, 540 Acts xxv. 10 227, 242* Acts xxiii. 9 519, 599, 600* Acts xxv. 11 203, 253, 267*, 456, 540 Acts xxiii. 10 504, 545, 600 Acts xxv. 12 262*, 538 Acts xxiii. 11 621 Acts xxv. 13 138, 342, 518, 544 Acts xxiii. 12 297 Acts xxv. 14 401, 527 Acts xxiii. 13 239, 256, 596 Acts xxv. 15 128, 373, 543 Acts xxiii. 14 44, 128, 150, 297, 466*, 543 Acts xxv. 16 122, 297, 300 Acts xxiii. 15 285 , 313, 324, 329 Acts xxv. 17 256, 475 Acts xxiii. 19 202 Acts xxv. 18 168, 373* Acts xxiii. 20 301 Acts xxv. 20 299, 397, 543 Acts xxiii. 21 193*. 297, 371, 596 Acts xxv. 21 143, 332 Acts xxiii. 22 54, 545, 579 Acts xxv. 22 82, 283*, 558, 587 Acts xxiii. 23 61, 170*, 313*, 579 Acts xxv. 23 60, 402, 420, 560 Acts xxiii. 24 138, 579, 621 Acts xxv. 24 3GS , 499, 515, 516, 549 Acts xxiii. 26 588 Acts xxv. 26 288* Acts xxiii. 27 134*, 544 Acts xxv. 27 89, 319 Acts xxiii. 29 203 Acts xxiii. 30 278, 315, 375, 568* Acts xxvi. 1 229, 268 Acts xxiii. 34 364 , 366, 411, 582 Acts xxvi. 2 321 Acts xxiii. 35 308, 332, 558 Acts xxvi. 3 Acts xxvi. 4 154, 231*, 400, 559, 572 124, 133, 136, 576 Acts xxiv. 1 534 Acts xxvi. 5 401, 527, 626 Acts xxiv. 2 614* Acts xxvi 6 394, 397 Acts xxiv. 3 47, 200, 637 Acts xxvi. 7 100,331,543,549,552,593 Acts xxiv. 4 561 Acts xxvi. 8 395*, 542 Acts xxiv. 5 133, 208, 351, 567* Acts xxvi 9 138 Acts xxiv. 6 351*, 543, 567* Acts xxvi. 10 107, 545 Acts xxiv. 7 217 Acts xxvi. 1 1 268, 545 Acts xxiv. 8 76, 365, 543 Acts xxvi. 12 133, 386, 545 Acts xxiv. 9 614 Acts xxvi. 13 403, 545 Acts xxiv. 10 346, 367 Acts xxvi. 14 396, 545 Acts xxiv. 11 239, 318 , 341, 592, 596 Acts xxvi. 15 85 Acts xxiv. 12 441, 491 Acts xxvi. 16 142, 158, 161, 166, 262* Acts xxiv. 13 203, 491 »> » » 439, 442, 543, 545 Acis xxiv. 14 161, 219 Acts xxvi. 17 141, 429, 545, 550 Acts xxiv. 15 334 Acts xxvi. 1 8 139*, 325, 421, .545 Acts xxiv. 17 550, 213, 342, 380*, 453 Acts xxvi. 19 68, 549 Acts xxiv. 19 54, 282, 294* Acts xxvi. 20 352, 420, 435, 627 Acts xxiv. 20 77, 85, 375 Acts xxvi. 22 133, 140, 158, 455*, 485, Acts xxiv. 21 123, 164, 203 » )> » 550, 559 Acts xxiv. 22 560* Acts xxvi. 23 97*, 123 Acts xxiv. 23 61 Acts xxvi. 24 106 , 132, 514, 549, 550 Acts xxiv. 25 834, 342, 463 Acts xxvi. 25 40, 558 Acts xxiv. 26 209 Acts xxvi. 26 Acts xxvi. 27 500* 549 Acts XXV. 1 869*, 540, 544 Acts xxvi. 29 209,212,235, 303*, 420*, 440 N. T. INDEX. 701 Acts xxvi. 30 126, 128, 519 Acts xxviii 21 85, 489 Acts xxvi. 31 267* Acts xxviii 23 121, 372, 420, 422, 439, Acts xxvi. 32 70, 305, 334, 477 >» » „ 543, 559 Acts xxviii. 24 104 Acts xxvii. 1 62, 78, 182, 261, 326*, 540 Acts xxviii. 25 61, 602 Acts xxvii. 2 224*, 400, 430 Acts xxviii. 26 51,85 Acts xxvii. 3 200, 321*, 539 Acts xxviii. 27 494, 503 Acts xxvii. 5 133, 187, 431* Acts xxviii. 28 83 Acts xxvii. 6 525 Acts xxvii. 7 484 Rom. i. 1 125, 545, 565 Acts xxvii. 8 471, 539 Rom. i. 2 543, 545, 565 Acts xxvii. 9 63, 334, 543 Rom. i. 3 186, 545, 565 Acts xxvii. 10 334, 339*, 573 Rom. i. 4 123, 188*, 237, 367*, 545, 565 Acts xxvii. 12 242, 299, 400, 405, 545 Rom. i. 5 120 , 186, 379*, 383, 384, 402, Acts xxvii. 13 243*, 334*, 594* » » » 517, 543, 545, 565, 631 Acts xxvii. 14 147, 251*, 381*, 558 Rom. i. 6 195*, 517, 543, 545, 565 Acts xxvii. 17 209, 210, 504 Rom. i. 7 124, 139, 219, 234, 545, 565, 585 Acts xxvii. 18 256 Rom. i. 8 378, 383, 575, 576* Acts xxvii. 20 120, 484, 488, 610 Rom. i. 9 386, 410 Acts xxvii. 21 87, 183, 282, 443, 481 Rom. i. 10 300, 376* Acts xxvii. 22 223, 508, 633* Rom. i. 11 198* Acts xxvii. 23 218, 543 Rom. i. 12 155, 577 Acts xxvii. 25 183 Rom. i. 13 438, 440, 561, 562, 565 Acts xxvii. 27 123 Rom. i. 14 209, 439 Acts xxvii. 28 252* Rom. i. 15 223, 230, 235 Acts xxvii. 29 71, 366, 504, 539 Rom. i. 16 221, 247*. 576* Acts xxvii. 30 62 Rom. i. 17 59, 136* 186*, 396, 419, 513 Acts xxvii. 31 61 Rom. i. 19 235* Acts xxvii. 33 44, 70, 198, 335, 348 Rom. i. 20 123, 125, 128,216, 235*, 439, 638 Acts xxvii. 34 364, 374* Rom. i. 21 71, 582, 624* Acts xxvii. 35 71, 614* Rom. i. 22 321, 627 Acts xxvii. 36 198 Rom. i. 23 206, 388*, 524 Acts xxvii. 37 80, 250 Rom. i. 24 213, 263*, 326*, 387, 417* Acts xxvii. 38 106, 201 Rom. i. 25 404* Acts xxvii. 39 294, 557* Rom. i. 26 237, 404, 571* Acts xxvii. 40 64, 591, 594 Rom. i. 27 417, 571* Acts xxvii. 42 336, 502*, 545 Rom. i. 28 480, 485, 638 Acts xxvii. 43 196, 251*, 528 Rom. i. 29 120,217,520, 553, 637 Acts xxvii. 44 105, 323, 528 Rom. i. 30 Rom. i. 31 53* 553, 637 Acts xxviii. 2 420, 539 Rom. i. 32 123, 206, 344* Acts xxviii. 3 257*, 368*, 371 Acts xxviii. 4 366 Rom. ii. 1 135, 183, 387*, 533 Acts xxviii. 6 268, 396* 416 Rom. ii. 2 401 Acts xxviii. 8 323 Rom. ii. 3 152, 161*, 183, 509 Acts xxviii. 9 456 Rom. ii. 4 190, 235, 353 Acts xxviii. 11 216 Rom. ii. 5 125, 188* 402, 417* Acts xxviii. 13 465, 528 Rom. ii. 7 187*, 519, 639 Acts xxviii. 14 392 Rom. ii. 8 424, 578 Acts xxviii. 16 62,73 Rom. ii. 9 156*, 552, 576*, 578 Acts xxviii. 17 127, 129, 323, 485 Rom. ii. 10 578 Acts xxviii. 18 70, 482 Rom. ii. 11 395, 447 Acts xxviii. 20 229 Bom. ii. 12 128, 378, 386*, 447 702 N. T. INDEX. Rom. ii. 13 186*, 447, 565* Rom. iv. 9 129, 321, 409, 420, 587*, 595* Horn. ii. 14 139*, 141, 211, 309, 447, 483 Rom- iv. 10 386, 420 » » » 556*, 565*. 620 Rom. iv. 11 133, 190, 380, 531 Rom. ii. 15 440, 565*, 580*, 615 Rom. iv. 12 209, 211, 219, 534, 555*, 577 Rom. ii. 17 76, 122, 233, 569*, 610 Rom. iv. 13 123, 186*, 320, 441, 447, Rom. ii. 18 263, 569*, 594 » I) )> 453*, 586 Rom. ii. 19 321, 520, 569* Rom. iv. 14 59, 109, 123, 273, 292, 368, Rom. ii. 20 569* » » » 447, 585, 595 Rom. ii. 21 322*, 481, 508, 569* Rom. iv. 15 123, 447, 456 Rom. ii. 22 481 Rom. iv. 16 69, 368, 585, 598* Rom. ii. 23 123, 233, 569 Rom. iv. 17 164, 165* Rom. ii. 25 293 Rom. iv. 18 329, 404, 411, 465 Rom. ii. 26 145, 228, 259, 293 Rom. iv. 19 50, 486* Rom. ii. 27 134*, 343*, 380*, 454* Rom. iv. 20 215*, 216, 261, 342, 344, 397 Rom. ii. 28 421, 454*, 488, 584* Rom. iv. 21 262 Rom. ii. 29 116 Rom. iv. 22 523* Rom. iv. 24 123, 628 Rom. iii. 1 174, 584 Rom. iv. 25 611, 639 Rom. iii. 2 229, 260*, 454*, 514, 575, 576 Rom. iii. 3 585, 638 Rom. V. 1 186*, 378, 406 Rom. iii. 4 254, 310, 442 Rom. V. 2 583, 136*, 233, 271, 379 Rom. iii. 5 594, 122, 402, 511. 563 Rom. V. 3 233, 583* Rom. iii. 6 279, 480, 500 Rom. V. 5 453,107,185, 378, 413, 414, 417 Rom. iii. 7 580 Rom. V. 6 124, 382, 383, 447, 453*, 553 Rom. iii. 8 287, 580, 628* Rom. V. 7 117*, 279*, 447, 453*, 613 Rom. iii. 9 59, 60, 120, 258*, 264*, 407, Rom. V. 8 137, 383, .553 »> « » 548, 552, 554*, 585 Rom. V. 9 197, 594 Rom. iii. 10 173 Rom. V. 10 262 Rom. iii. 11 81, 109 Rom. V. 11 351*, 583* Rom. iii. 13 77, 407* Rom. V. 12 144, 158*, 394, 396, 562, 569* Rom. iii. 18 185 >» » >» 599, 609 Rom. iii. 19 110, 460 Rom. V. 13 85, 123, 475, 570 Rom. iii. 20 171, 186, 280" Rom. V. 14 82, 206, 394*, 409,442, 542, 570 Rom. iii. 21 186*, 271 Rom. V. 15 110,442,541,570* Rom. iii. 22 186, 418*, 443 Rom. V. 16 60, 82, 340*, 368, 396, 584* Rom. iii. 23 201, 274, 352, S.-jS Rom. V. 17 353 Rom. iii. 24 216, 217*, 352* Rom. V. 18 188, 440, 445, 558, 570*, 587* Rom. iii. 25 96*, 137,152* 228, 254, 378, Rom. V. 19 110,421,587,638 » u » 399, 412, 527 Rom. V. 20 123, 459 Rom. iii. 26 368, 412 Rom. V. 21 397, 418*, 440 Rom. iii. 27 116, 582 Rom. iii. 28 120, 456, 595* Rom. vi. 1 279, 285 Rom. iii. 29 192* Rom. vi. 2 86, 168, 210, 279*, 386, 428 Rom. iii. 30 116,186,280*,362*,411*,448 Rom. vi. 3 136, 509 Rom. iii. 31 78, 87, 123, 609 Rom. vi. 4 136, 137, 236, 288, 444 Rom. vi. 5 292, 442*, 451 Rom. iv. 1 113, 334, 508 Rom. vi. 6 161, 188*, 326, 612*, 615 Rom. iv. 2 306* Rom. vi. 8 49, 86, 391 Rom. iv. 3 453*, 523* Rom. vi. 9 538 Rom. iv. 4 35, 108, 402* Rom. vi, 10 168*, 210, 227, 422, 428 Rom. iv. 5 186, 483 Rom. vi. 11 210*, 228, 389* Rom. iv. 7 81 Rom. vi. 12 488, 502, 524* Rom. iv. 8 506, 585 Rom. vi. 13 314, 488 N. T. INDEX. 708 Rom. vi. 14 120, 279*, 316* Rom. viii. 20 58, 399*, 485 Rom. vi. 15 82, 279, 420, 585 Rom. viii. 21 197, 531, 621 Rom. vi. 16 158, 266, 440, 612* Rom. viii. 22 124, 610 Rom. vi. 17 164*, 261*, 368, 585, 629* Rom. viii. 23 117*, 150, 187*, 528, 531* Rom. vi. 18 197, 210 » >» >} 583, 637 Rom. vi. 19 128, 210 397 Rom. viii. 24 216, 284*, 340, 437* Rom. vi 20 210* Rom. viii. 25 292, 379, 423, 543 Rom. vi. 21 60, 141, 158*, 221 Rom. viii. 26 97, 109, 112, 168, 299*, 433 Rom. vi. 22 197,417* Rom. viii. 27 122, 400*, 584 Rom. vi. 23 176, 389 Rom. viii. 28 Rom. viii. 29 120, 534 158, 195, 228, 561 Rom. vii. 1 123, 446, 562, 565, 589 Rom. viii. 30 277*, 278 Rom. vii. 2 188*, 209, 271*, 293, 446, 621 Rom. viii. 31 382, 383, 584 Rom. vii. 3 280, 324, 343, 445, 558 Rom. viii. 32 90, 154, 379, 560 Rom. vii. 4 118, 210*, 301, 381* Rom. viii. 33 60, 180, 203, 234, 350, 382, Rom. vii. 5 133, 189, 258, 329 » » » 431, 508, 513 Rom. vii. 6 159, 236 Rom. viii. 34 382 Rom. vii. 7 189, 305*, 316, 448*, 477 Rom. viii. 35 185, 197, 440 Rom. vii. 8 575 Rom. viii. 36 188, 562 Rom. vii. 9 87 Rom. viii. 38 488 Rom. vii. 10 133, 160, 189, 616*, 621 Rom. viii. 39 133 Rom. vii. 11 189 Rom. vii. 12 520, 575* Rom. ix. 1 248*, 390*, 537, 540, 562 Rom. vii. 13 41,123,189,211,346,351, Rom. ix. 2 639 » » >» 513, 575 Rom. ix. 3 32, 71, 135, 283*, 370, 382, 621 Rom. vii. 14 98, 407* 618 Rom. ix. 4 177*, 520 Rom. vii. 15 160 Rom. ix. 5 60, 230, 375,401, 551*, 586* Rom. vii. 17 152, 618* Rom. ix. 6 160, 171, 271, 339*, 597* Rom. vii. 18 320, 530 Rom. ix. 7 40, 575 Rom. vii. 19 160, 528 Rom. ix. 8 110, 160, 228, 514 Rom. vii. 20 618 Rom. ix. 10 583* Rom. vii. 21 59, 149, 534, 557*, 571* Rom. ix. 11 131,193* , 425, 441, 459, 484, Rom. vii. 22 401, 433 » j> » 561, 562, 589* Rom. vii. 24 37, 189*, 197, 237*, 286*, 634 Rom. ix. 12 245, 583 Rom. vii. 25 62, 221, 378, 601* Rom. ix. 13 Rom. ix. 14 113, 549 395, 500 Rom. viii. 1 135* 390, 445 Rom. ix. 15 66, 88, 221 Rom. viii. 2 126, 137*, 197 Rom. ix. 16 85, 445, 598* Rom. viii. 3 231*, 23.5*, 387*, 534, 574*, 624 Rom. ix. 17 82, 143, 254 Rom. viii. 4 57, 58, 134, 420, 477, 482, 582 Rom. ix. 18 85, 588 Rom. viii. 5 56, 402, 447, 453 Rom. ix. 19 274*, 280*, 588 Rom. viii. 6 453* Rom. ix. 20 183, 465*, 511, 549, 559 Rom. viii. 7 397, 594 Rom. ix. 21 105, 112, 191, 366, 397, 550 Rom. viii. 8 452* Rom. ix. 22 108, 235, 570*, 599 Rom. viii. 9 57, 122, 195, 448, 477, 478 Rom. ix. 23 409, 570* Rom. viii. 10 120 Rom. ix. 24 528, 627 Rom. viii. 11 292, 363, 399 Rom. ix. 25 385, 476, 485 Rom. viii. 12 209, 326*, 445, 556* Rom. ix. 26 615 Rom. viii. 14 122 Rom. ix. 27 383 Rom. viii. 15 387, 397, 521, 609 Rom. ix. 29 304, 602, 605 Rom. viii. 16 122 Rom. ix. 30 139, 186, 443 Rom. viii. 17 441, 459, 460, 585 Rom. ix. 31 90, 636* Rom. viii. 18 213*, 321, 334, 405*, 550 Rom. ix. 32 582, 617* 704 • N. T. INDEX. Bom. is .33 233, 435 Bom. xi. 36 108, 379*, 418* Rom. X 1 133, 383 ,412 537, 575*, 586 Rom. xii. 1 58, 231, 332, 381*, 533* Rom. X 2 185* 212, 403*, 447 Rom. xii. 2 519, 578 Rom. X 3 186*, 447, 575* Rom. xii. 3 400, 404, 433, 481, 550, 638 Rom. X 4 123, 447 Rom. xii. 4 548 Rom. X 5 133, 447 Rom. xii. 5 110, 249 Rom. X 6 136, 186 Rom. xii. 6 352, 440, 545, 578*, 582 Rom. X 7 318 Rom. xii. 7 545, 578* Rom. X 8 195 Rom. :xii. 8 545 Rom. X 10 120, 396, 611, 639 Rom. xii. 9 537, 585, 586* Rom. X 12 397 Rom. xii. 10 215 Rom. X. 14 199,82, 158*, 166, 279*, 285*, Rom. xii. 11 476 » » „ 480, 632 Rom. xii. 12 210, 217*, 433 Rom. X 15 118,477,606 Rom. xii. 14 537 Rom. X. 16 171 Rom. xii. 15 376 Rom. X 17 123,367,411,445,558 Rom. xii. 16 219, 395*, 397, 537, 580 Rom. X. 18 111, 147*, 511*, 559 Rom. xii. 18 230, 585 Rom. X 19 114*, 392, 393, 442, 464*, Rom. xii. 19 594 M » „ 476*, 511, 528 Rom. xii. 20 77, 293, 313*, 444, 580 Rom. X 20 219, 469* Rom. xii. 21 537 Rom. X 21 405 Rom. xiii. 1 122, 156*, 363, 370, 371, Rom. X . 1 448, 511 W )J » 537, 582* Rom. X] . 2 382, 385 Rom. xiii. 2 212, 274,301, 429 Rom. X) .4 179* Rom. xiii. 3 313, 368, 481, 524 Rom. XI . 6 283* ,480, 582,618* Rom. xiii. 4 192, 293 Rom. XI . 7 200 Rom. xiii. 5 319, 585 Rom. xi . 8 , 94 Rom. xiii. 6 317, 631* Rom. XI . 10 63 Rom. xiii. 7 590* Rom. xi . 11 458, 459, 586 Rom. xiii. 8 47,123,209,273,323,499,501* Rom. xi . 12 639 Rom. xiii. 9 87, 109, 151, 316, 502, 565 Bom. xi . 13 192*, 408* 409, 551, 575* Rom. xiii. 11 195, 239, 319,366*, 551, Bom. xi . 15 521 »> » » 565*, 573*, 585 Bom. XI . 16 582*, 584, 585 Rom. xiii. 13 219, 477 Bom. xi . 17 200 ,292 , 391*, 637, 638 Rom. xiii. 14 396,397, 417, 549, 556* Bom. xi . 18 76, 292, 431* 470, 501, 619* Bom. xi . 19 118, 280* Rom. xiv. 1 174, 397, 476 Bom. xi .20 216*, 313* Rom. xiv. 2 105, 322* Bom. XI . 21 193*, 401, 425, 448, 474*, Rom. xiv. 3 482 » >) ,, 478, 504*, 598* Rom. xiv. 4 152, 154, 210 Bom. xi . 22 363, 578 Rom. xiv. 5 154, 404* Bom. XI . 23 620* Rom. xiv. 6 212 Bom. xi . 24 154, 429, 430 Rom. xiv. 7 441 Rom. X] . 25 42 ,211 287, 423*, 477 Rom. xiv. 8 295* Rom. XI .26 428 Rom. xiv. 9 161, 206, 276, 457, 552* Rom. xi .27 131, 193*, 308 Rom. xiv. 10 440 Rom. XI .28 401 Rom. xiv. 11 209, 449, 457* Rom. xi . 30 216, 440 Rom. xiv. 13 323, 502, 529, 619 Rom. xi .31 60, 153*, 459*, 550 Rom. xiv. 14 152, 160, 390*, 609 Rom. xi . 32 178 , 397*, 459, 610, 622 Rom. xiv. 15 383, 402, 619 Rom. xi .33 191*, 519, 639 Rom. xiv. 16 15.5, 502 Rom. xi .35 436 Rom. xiv. 17 139, 390*, 552 N. T. INDEX. 705 Bom. xiv. 19 133 Rom. xvi. lo 103 Rom. xiv. 20 380, 443 Rom. xvi. 16 118 Rom. xiv. 21 65, 158, 198, 320, 475*, 488 Rom. xvi. 17 126, 251 , 314, 332, 404, 429 »> » » 583*, 584 Rom. xvi 18 447 Rom. xiv. 22 159 ,386 , 483, 508, 585 Rom. xvi. 19 283, 397 Rom. xiv. 23 262, 273*, 293, 582 Rom. xvi. 20 Rom. xvi. 22 280*, 621 390, 521 Rom. XV. 1 • 476 Rom. xvi. 25 218, 401, 545, 567* Rom. XV. 2 397 Rom. xvi. 26 186, 396, 435, 567* Rom. XV. 3 74, 118, 222, 448, 574*, 5^9 Rom. xvi. 27 108, 168, 378, 545, 507* Rom. XV. 4 153*, 189* Rom. XV. 5 78 , 185 286, 321, 401 1 Cor. i. 2 263*, 234, 530 Rom. XV. 6 388 1 Cor. i. 3 122, 124 Rom. XV. 7 118, 122 1 Cor. i. 4 393, 412 Rom. XV. 8 122 , 153 , 185, 334, 383 1 Cor. i. 5 201, 566 Rom. XV. 9 322*, 332*, 383 1 Cor. i. 6 118, 185*, 566 Rom. XV. 11 314 1 Cor. i. 7 134, 201, 480, 499 Rom. XV. 12 206, 233 1 Cor. i. 8 144, 157*, 417*, 438, 528, Rom. XV. 13 185, 201, 410 >i » » 566*, 624 Rom. XV. 14 201, 373 1 Cor. i. 9 378, 585 Rom. XV. 15 243*, 278, 379, 399*,455, 6 1 7* 1 Cor. i. 10 62, 336, 381*, 611 Rom. XV. 16 223*, 455, 531 1 Cor. i. 11 65, 190* Rom. XV. 17 230, 390, 455* 1 Cor. i. 12 60, 153, 161, 195, 625* Rom. XV. 18 158 166 216, 217, 279, 1 Cor. i. 13 60, 118, 508 »> y> » 498, 552 1 Cor. i. 15 301 Rom. XV. 19 65, 118, 334 1 Cor. i. 16 60, 298, 443 Rom. XV. 20 556*, 615 1 Cor. i. 17 118,318, 496 Rom. XV. 21 82, 575, 599 1 Cor. i. 18 131, 185, 211, 217 Rom. XV. 22 268, 325, 604 1 Cor. i. 19 83 Rom. XV. 23 324, 326, 483 1 Cor. i. 20 75, 609 Rom. XV. 24 198, 201, 308*, 321, 331,472* 1 Cor. i. 21 144, 381* Rom. XV. 25 265, 342* 1 Cor. i. 22 612* Rom. XV. 26 133, 256 1 Cor. i. 23 135 , 441, 541, 612, 638 Rom. XV. 27 20C , 209, 292, 448 1 Cor. i. 25 235, 239, 245* Rom. XV. 28 343, 378*, 385, 621 1 Cor. i. 26 317, 585 Rom. XV. 29 384 1 Cor. i. 27 108, 178,, 189*, 609 Rom. XV. 30 332, 381 1 Cor. i. 28 129, 178, 484* Rom. XV. 31 133, 234 1 Cor. i. 29 171,477 Rom. XV. 32 122 1 Cor. i. 30 122, 371*, 439, 542, 550 Rom. XV. 33 585 1 Cor. i. 31 599* Rom. xvi. 1 133, 134, 343 1 Cor. ii. 1 185, 342, 402, 607 Rom. xvi. 2 159, 234, 307 , 390, 448, 638 1 Cor. ii. 3 152, 420 Rom. xvi. 3 136 1 Cor. ii. 4 96, 126, 611 Rom. xvi. 4 •562, 566* 1 Cor. ii. 5 420, 586 Rom. xvi. 5 185, 397 1 Cor. ii. 6 218*, 385, 443 Rom. xvi. 7 143, 372 1 Cor. ii. 7 137, 167, 193, 387 Rom. xvi. 8 103, 113, 136 1 Cor. ii. 8 304, 562 Rom. xvi. 10 136, 190* 1 Cor. ii. 9 168,317 575, 599, 620, 633* Rom. xvi. 11 66, 190*, 390 1 Cor. ii. 10 599* Rom. xvi. 12 390* 1 Cor. ii. 11 133,271, 550,551 Rom. xvi. 13 155 1 Cor. ii. 12 193*, 259 Rom. xvi. 14 89 103 1 Cor. ii. 13 194*, 637 706 N. T. INDEX. 1 Cor. ii. 14 116 1 Cor. V. 7 44,284, 448, 524, 528, 534, 538 1 Cor. ii. 15 116, 559 1 Cor. V. 8 120, 301, 384, 477, 531 1 Cor. ii. 16 125, 300 1 Cor. V. 9 1 Cor. V. 10 106, 278, 481, 555* 128, 129, 283, 445 1 Cor. iii. 1 46, 70,98,217,583, 594 1 Cor. V. 11 278*, 481, 572* 1 Cor. iii. 2 70, 226, 493*, 520, 594, 622* 1 Cor. V. 12 211, 586 1 Cor. iii. 3 99, 447 1 Cor. V. 13 313, 438, 538 1 Cor. iii. 4 62, 308, 447 1 Cor. iii. 5 378, 437 , 442, 447, 455*, 550 1 Cor. vi. I 254*, 375, 613 1 Cor. iii. 6 247 1 Cor. vi. 2 234, 292, 385, 638 1 Cor. iii. 7 583 1 Cor. vi. 3 124* 1 Cor. iii. 8 128 1 Cor. vi. 4 60, 160, 317, 550, 561 1 Cor. iii. 9 192 1 Cor. vi. 5 80, 173, 175*, 300, 398 1 Cor. iii. 10 298, 300* 1 Cor. vi. 6 214, 442, 451 1 Cor. iii. 11 404* 1 Cor. vi. 7 214, 254* 1 Cor. iii. 12 430, 520 1 Cor. vi. 10 488, 500* 1 Cor. iii. 13 265, 388, 457* 1 Cor. vi. 11 41,142, 162*, 255, 442, 513, 1 Cor. iii. 14 53 » » » 529, 609, 625 1 Cor. iii. 15 87, 150, 378, 443 1 Cor. vi. 12 369 1 Cor. iii. 16 122 1 Cor. vi. 13 211, 586 1 Cor. iii. 17 166, 539, 638 1 Cor. vi. 14 378 1 Cor. iii. 18 253, 287, 410, 613 1 Cor. vi. 15 47, 118, 192, 608 1 Cor. iii. 19 352*, 395 1 Cor. vi. 16 183, 522* 1 Cor. iii. 20 626 1 Cor. vi. 18 223, 233, 310, 538 1 Cor. iii. 21 195, 233, 301, 575 1 Cor. vi. 19 1 Cor. vi. 20 122, 163, 174, 195* 206, 313, 386, 595* 1 Cor. iv. 1 161,527 1 Cor. iv. 2 168, 337, 386, 580, 616 1 Cor. vii. 1 57, 159, 166, 320 1 Cor. iv. 3 184*, 211, 337, 420, 460, 635 1 Cor. vii. 2 154*, 176, 398* 1 Cor. iv. 4 271, 350, 387*, 447*, 630 1 Cor. vii. 3 106, 571, 582 1 Cor. iv. 5 108, 124, 371 1 Cor. vii. 4 495, 538 1 Cor. iv. 6 62, 173, 289*, 323, 382*, 386* 1 Cor. vii. 5 303*, 424* » » » 516, 580, 590* 1 Cor. vii. 7 283*, 368, 440, 452*, 465* 1 Cor. iv. 7 76, 443, 452* 484 „ „ „ 528, 603 1 Cor. iv. 8 302*, 538, 609 1 Cor. vii. 8 320 1 Cor. iv.,9 127*, 228, 446, 453, 517, 528 1 Cor. vii. 9 77, 84, 292, 477 1 Cor. iv. 10 411 1 Cor. vii. 10 197, 321, 496* 1 Cor. iv. 11 92 1 Cor. vii. 11 262, 293, 565 1 Cor. iv. 13 530 1 Cor. vii. 12 152, 496*, 502, 520 1 Cor. iv. 14 125, 278, 342, 485, 573, 578* 1 Cor. vii. 13 150, 502, 577 1 Cor. iv. 15 442* 1 Cor. vii. 14 132, 271, 283*, 389*, 445 1 Cor, iv. 16 545 1 Cor. vii. 15 311*, 386,417, 518, 538 1 Cor. iv. 17 133, 166, 167*, 226 1 Cor. vii. 16 85, 299 1 Cor. iv. 18 278,484, 617 1 Cor. vii. 18 169* 1 Cor. iv. 20 586 1 Cor. vii. 19 583* 1 Cor. iv. 21 285, 384, 420 1 Cor. vii. 20 1 Cor. vii. 21 422 541, 582*, 595 1 Cor. V. 1 384, 480, 550*, 615 1 Cor. vii. 22 124 1 Cor. V. 2 315, 429, 436*, 508 1 Cor. vii. 23 538, 539 1 Cor. V. 3 160, 453*, 575 1 Cor. vii. 24 314, 395* 1 Cor. V. 4 391, 562 1 Cor. vii. 25 124, 455 1 Cor. V. 5 160, 459* 1 Cor. vii. 26 106,320*, 455*, 523, 568, 602 1 Cor. V. 6 524 1 Cor. vii. 27 197, 209 N. T. INDEX. 707 1 Cor. vii. 28 84, 205,211,277,284*, 293* 1 Cor. ix. 25 111, 227, 582 1 Cor. vii. 29 596 , 106, 287, 459*, 460, 484 1 Cor. ix. 26 474, 484, 485* 1 Cor. vii. 31 210, 251, 340 1 Cor. ix. 27 43,502 1 Cor. vii. 32 299 1 Cor. vii. 33 109, 299 1 Cor. X. 1 106, 407, 476*, 549, 609 1 Cor. vii. 34 215, 299, 519 1 Cor. X. 2 67, 255* 1 Cor. vii. 35 211, 329, 354, 430, 464 1 Cor. X. 3 133, 198 1 Cor. vii. 36 77, 242, 296, 321, 332, 631* 1 Cor. X. 4 114, 118, 199,268*, 281, 525 1 Cor. vii. 37 161, 193*, 483, 573* 1 Cor. X. 5 71, 232 1 Cor. viu 38 242, 243, 439*, 576* 1 Cor. X. 6 175, 329*, .'527 1 Cor. vii. 39 84, 158, 159, 319, 390, 584 1 Cor. X. 7 318 1 Cor. vii. 40 613 1 Cor. X. 8 1 Cor. X. 9 74, 250, 502 143*, 369 1 Cor. viii. 1 84, 562, 565* 1 Cor. X. 10 106 1 Cor. viii. 2 499, 539, 565*, 613 1 Cor. X. 11 175 405, 452*, 515, 527, 550 1 Cor. viii. 3 263*, 565* 1 Cor. X. 12 78, 301, 504, 613* 1 Cor. viii. 4 123, 444, 558, 565 1 Cor. X. 13 324, 325, 585, 590*, 594* 1 Cor. viii. 5 116, 120 1 Cor. X. 14 223*, 313 1 Cor. viii. 6 149, 419*, 579 1 Cor. X. 16 118, 164, 189*, 237, 628 1 Cor. viii. 7 185*, 191, 198, 216, 450, 1 Cor. X. 17 110, 201,368 >> » >) 466, 550 1 Cor. X. 18 114, 135*, 200 1 Cor. viii. 8 279 1 Cor. X. 19 53 1 Cor. viii. 9 211, 452*, 504 1 Cor. X. 20 442, 520 1 Cor. viii. 10 134, 263*, 293 1 Cor. X. 21 124, 125, 189*, 200 1 Cor. viii. 11 394, 446 1 Cor. X. 22 284* 1 Cor. viii. 12 155 1 Cor. X. 23 495 1 Cor. viii. 13 65, 506 1 Cor. X. 24 1 Cor. X. 25 496, 583 313 1 Cor. ix. 1 510 1 Cor. X. 27 550, 593*, 614* 1 Cor. ix. 2 211, 212, 444, 479* 1 Cor. X. 28 421 1 Cor. ix. 3 211 1 Cor. X. 29 150 1 Cor. ix. 4 319,511 1 Cor. X. 30 159, 216 1 Cor. ix. 5 228, 257*, 319, 511, 523*, 527 1 Cor. X. 32 439 1 Cor. ix. 6 324, 326, 465, 518 1 Cor. X. 33 483* 1 Cor. ix. 7 198, 199, 216* 1 Cor. ix. 8 402 1 Cor. xi. 1 582* 1 Cor. ix. 9 205, 316, 446, 495, 595* 1 Cor. xi. 2 205, 227, 453* 1 Cor. ix. 10 45, 394, 446 1 Cor. xi. 3 114, 118, 122 1 Cor. ix. 11 155, 294 1 Cor. xi. 4 111, 344* ,381*, 411, 544, 594 1 Cor. ix. 12 185, 200, 209, 582 1 Cor. xi. 5 108, 150, 178, 216* 1 Cor. ix. 13 84, 108, 433 1 Cor. xi. 6 311*, 320, 437*, 478* 1 Cor. ix. 14 367 1 Cor. xi. 7 122, 513 1 Cor. ix. 15 162, 209, 218, 239, 276, 278, 1 Cor. xi. 8 447 )> >> » 337*, 386*, 550, 572 1 Cor. xi. 9 409 1 Cor. ix. 16 293, 430, 447 1 Cor. xi. 10 374,411 1 Cor. ix. 17 229, 260, 292, 465, 528, 1 Cor. xi. 12 381*, 409 » >> f> 541, 620 1 Cor. xi. 13 319, 433 1 Cor. ix. 18 108, 137, 329 1 Cor. xi. 15 271*, 364* 1 Cor. ix. 19 87,242, 257, 341*, 344 1 Cor. xi. 16 582, 613*, 619 1 Cor. ix. 20 87, 123, 278* 1 Cor. xi. 17 396, 420 1 Cor. ix. 21 87, 483, 484, 562 1 Cor.xi. 18 274' ,347. 413, 414*, 575, 576* 1 Cor. ix. 22 170 1 Cor. xi. 20 319, 320*, 444, 576 1 Cor. ix. 24 313, 598 1 Cor. xi. 21 77, 106 708 N. T. INDEX. 1 Cor. xi. 22 86, 174, 28.5,447, 511, 1 Cor. xiv. 7 54, 129, 134, 279, 344*, >i » » 552, 594* » » » 444, 553* 1 Cor. xi. 23 116, 139, 144,153,270,370* 1 Cor. xiv. 8 253 J) » » 432, 438, 582 1 Cor. xiv. 9 349, 378, 446, 561 I Cor. xi. 24 153 1 Cor. xiv. 10 123, 638 1 Cor. xi. 25 308*, 386, 403*, 582 1 Cor. xiv. 11 217,218*,385,387*,444 577 I Cor. xi. 26 42, 297, 308*, 317*, 454* 1 Cor. xiv. 13 460* I Cor. xi. 27 202, 301, 441* 1 Cor. xiv. 15 62, 279*, 285 1 Cor. xi. 28 199, 452* 1 Cor. xiv. 16 108, 279, 480 1 Cor. xi. 29 343, 552, 638 1 Cor. xiv. 18 345*, 627 I Cor. xi. 30 267*, 274, 527 1 Cor. xiv, 19 62, 122, 241, 389 1 Cor. xi. 31 150, 253, 304, 638 1 Cor. xiv. 20 215* 1 Cor. xi. 32 391 1 Cor. xiv. 22 184,211,212,301,496 1 Cor. xi. 34 308* 1 Cor. xiv. 23 1 Cor. xiv. 24 496, 510 518, 609 1 Cor. xii. 1 373 1 Cor. xiv. 25 122, 515 I Cor. xii. 2 132, 306 , 457, 526, 571, 636 1 Cor. xiv. 26 520, 538, 625 1 Cor. xii. 3 122, 390* 1 Cor. xiv. 27 401*, 582* 1 Cor. xii. 4 437, 540 1 Cor. xiv. 30 244 1 Cor. xii. 5 437 1 Cor. xiv. 31 249 1 Cor. xii. 6 258, 437 1 Cor, xiv. 33 196 1 Cor. xii. 7 405 1 Cor. xiv. 34 229, 622 1 Cor. xii. 8 105, 378,401,411,419* 1 Cor. xiv. 35 122, 320, 333 1 Cor. xii. 9 419* 1 Cor xiv. 36 396 1 Cor. xii. 12 548, 606 1 Cor, XIV, 37 168, 278, 613, 626 1 Cor. xii. 13 229, 440, 552, 621 1 Cor. xiv. 38 311* 1 Cor. xii, 15 368*, 404*, 498* 1 Cor. xiv. 39 323 I Cor. xii. 16 404* 1 Cor. xii. 19 304 1 Cor. XV. 1 71, 438 1 Cor. xii. 22 240 , 245, 528, 549, 550 1 Cor. XV. 2 265, 561, 605 1 Cor. xii. 23 240 1 Cor. XV. 3 412 1 Cor. xii. 27 125, 424* 1 Cor. XV. 4 272*, 281 1 Cor. xii. 28 105, 568* 1 Cor. XV. 6 250 1 Cor. xii. 31 132, 242, 265, 464, 466* 1 Cor. XV. 8 1 Cor. XV. 9 46, 53, 106, 171 337, 565, 615* 1 Cor. xiii. 1 273 292, 440, 441, 549 1 Cor. XV. 11 518 1 Cor. xiii. 2 44, 527, 610 1 Cor. XV. 12 123, 626 1 Cor. xiii. 3 75, 226*, 289 1 Cor. XV. 13 123, 452*, 478* 1 Cor. xiii. 4 520, 538 1 Cor. XV. 14 452* 1 Cor. xiii. 5 520, 538 1 Cor. XV. 15 123, 185, 382, 445 1 Cor. xiii. 6 210 , 232, 433, 520, 538 1 Cor. XV. 16 292*, 478 1 Cor. xiii. 7 520, 538 1 Cor. XV. 18 135, 390* I Cor. xiii. 8 520, 538, 585 1 Cor. XV. 19 233, 242 1 Cor. xiii. 10 109 1 Cor. XV. 20 123, 527, 530 1 Cor. xiii. 11 80 268, 270, 296, 609 1 Cor. XV. 21 123, 586*, 610 1 Cor. xiii. 12 153*, 263*, 377, 380*, 404* 1 Cor. XV. 22 389, 421, 440 1 Cor. xiii. 13 240*, 242* 1 Cor. XV. 23 1 Cor. XV. 24 527 124, 308 1 Cor. xiv. 1 453*, 577* 1 Cor. XV. 25 297, 332, 523*, 588*, 589 1 Cor. xiv. 2 549 1 Cor. XV. 26 527 1 Cor. xiv. 4 122, 150 1 Cor. XV. 27 272, 308, 522, 582, 585, 588 1 Cor. xiv. 5 294*, 129, 239, 577, 605* 1 Cor. XV. 28 112, 114 I Cor. xiv. 6 387, 420, 440, 612 1 Cor. XV, 29 123, 175, 279*, 382*, 480 N. T. INDEX. 709 2 Cor. i. 11 222*, 412 1 Cor. XV. 31 153*, 517 2 Cor. i. 12 70, 98, 122, 243, 247*, 420 1 Cor. XV. 32 108, 123, 285, 585 2 Cor. i. 13 442* 1 Cor. XV, 33 41, 640* 2 Cor. i. 14 423*, 513 1 Cor. XV. 34 312*, 314 2 Cor. i. 15 216, 283* 1 Cor. XV. 35 266*, 280*, 442, 443 2 Cor. i. 16 431 1 Cor. XV. 36 158, 183 2 Cor. i. 17 109, 395, 445, 400*, 476, 513 1 Cor. XV. 37 294*, 340, 621 2 Cor. i. 18 449, 476, 585 1 Cor. XV. 38 437 2 Cor. i. 19 272, 476, 558 1 Cor. XV. 39 171 2 Cor. i. 21 521, 584 1 Cor. XV. 40 586 2 Cor. i. 22 417 1 Cor. XV. 41 120, 196, 217, 5G2 2 Cor. i. 23 340, 619 1 Cor. XV. 42 123, 266, 522 2 Cor. i. 24 206, 210, 555, 597 1 Cor. XV. 43 538 1 Cor. XV. 44 549 2 Cor. ii. 1 161, 212, 323, 386, 482, 529 1 Cor. XV. 46 234, 592* 2 Cor. ii. 2 108, 367, 368, 437 1 Cor. XV. 47 59 2 Cor. ii. 3 159, 208, 278, 282, 409, 410 1 Cor. XV. 49 78, 277* 2 Cor. ii. 4 243 278, 366, 379*, 550 1 Cor. XV. 50 161, 518, 596 2 Cor. ii. 5 292, 497 1 Cor. XV. 51 555* 2 Cor. ii. 6 133, 209, 517* 1 Cor. XV. 52 89,123,385*,436,522*,555* 2 Cor. ii. 7 46, 323, 502 1 Cor. XV. 53 331 2 Cor. ii. 8 120, 332 1 Cor. XV. 54 541, 606, 621, 639 2 Cor. ii. 9 161, 278 1 Cor. XV. 56 114 2 Cor. ii. 10 261, 264*, 448 1 Cor. XV. 57 340, 341 2 Cor. ii. 12 145, 397*, 443, 453* 1 Cor. XV. 58 344 2 Cor. ii. 13 2 Cor. ii. 14 145,211* 328*, 475 23, 251, 389 1 Cor. xvi. 1 133, 313, 373*, 397 2 Cor. ii. 16 397, 584, 610* 1 Cor. xvi. 2 248, 307, 395, 401, 541 2 Cor. ii. 17 110 1 Cor. xvi. 3 60, 176*, 308, 310, 318, M » » 380*, 543 2 Cor. iii. 1 87, 200, 508, 614 1 Cor. xvi. 4 324* 2 Cor. iii. 2 114, 134, 430, 431, 513, 638 1 Cor. xvi. 5 446, 562* 2 Cor. iii. 3 98*, 384, 420 1 Cor. xvi. 6 159, 355*, 405, 440 2 Cor. iii. 4 555* 1 Cor. xvi. 7 283, 331 2 Cor. iii. 5 319, 367, 411, 597 1 Cor. xvi. 9 437*, 585 2 Cor. iii. 6 83, 191*, 228, 438, 527 1 Cor. xvi. 10 124 2 Cor. iii. 7 341, 480, 634, 635* 1 Cor. xvi. 12 62, 336, 373, 554 2 Cor. iii. 8 280* 1 Cor. xvi. 13 313 2 Cor. iii. 9 236, 455* 1 Cor. xvi. 15 60, 125, 185, 515, 626 2 Cor. iii. 10 43, 271 1 Cor. xvi. 17 1.53* 2 Cor. iii. 11 379,411*, 424,425 1 Cor. xvi. 21 529*, 531 2 Cor. iii. 12 111 1 Cor, xvi. 22 79, 479* 2 Cor. iii. 13 2 Cor. iii. 14 329, 582* 46, 534*, 565 2 Cor. i. 2 122, 139 2 Cor. iii. 15 296, 408, 565, 590 2 Cor. i. 3 651, 586 2 Cor. iii. 16 40, 308*, 565 2 Cor. i. 4 163 2 Cor. iii. 17 114, 565 2 Cor. i. 5 189*, 378 2 Cor. iii. 18 124, 174, 229, 254*, 370. 2 Cor. i. 6 136, 155, 383, 527, 582* » »> »> 419, 565 2 Cor. i. 7 440, 572 2 Cor. i. 8 83, 324, 383, 403 2 Cor. iv. 1 565* 2 Cor. i. 9 233, 123, 150, 214,410,459 2 Cor. iv. 2 41, 85, 87, 253*, 386, 405, 488 2 Cor. 1. 10 233, 273 2 Cor. iv. 3 218* 710 N. T. INDEX. 2 Cor. iv. 4 118, 190, 329, 482, 624* 2 Cor. vii. 1 186, 197, 344, 544 2 Cor. iv. 5 399 2 Cor. vii. 2 538, 609 2 Cor. iv. 6 168,367* 2 Cor. vii. 3 49, 329 2 Cor. iv. 7 195*, 236, 412, 460* 2 Cor. vii. 4 217, 383 2 Cor. iv. 8 ■ 355, 485, 520, 638 2 Cor. vii. 5 352*, 568, 572 2 Cor. iv. 9 355, 485 2 Cor. vii. 6 528, 534 2 Cor. iv. 10 189, 355 2 Cor. vii. 7 135, 234, 243*, 584 2 Cor. iv. 11 123, 213, 446, 522 2 Cor. vii. 8 584, 612 2 Cor. iv. 12 301 2 Cor. vii. 9 397, 402*, 460*, 477, 496* 2 Cor. iv. 13 112, 351*, 401 2 Cor. vii. 10 402* 2 Cor. iv. 15 586 2 Cor. vii. 11 161,216* 320 2 Cor. iv. 16 155, 442, 463* 2 Cor. vii. 12 43, 133, 278, 329, 354, 405, 2 Cor. iv. 17 235,396,411, 635* » » » 582, 601 2 Cor. iv. 18 208*, 484* 2 Cor. vii. 13 240, 243, 371, 393* 2 Cor. vii. 14 227, 233, 292, 375* 2 Cor. V. 1 122 , 155, 191, 266*, 293, 524, 2 Cor. vii. 15 205, 377 » »» » 528, 531 2 Cor. vu. 16 410 2 Cor. V. 2 147*, 353* 2 Cor. V. 3 560, 616 2 Cor. viii. 1 218 2 Cor. V. 4 83, 107*, 353, 394, 448, 459, 2 Cor. viii. 2 381*, 386, 425 » » » 638 2 Cor. viii. 3 562, 571* 2 Cor. V. 5 531* 2 Cor. viii. 4 133, 155, 198, 631 2 Cor. V. 6 352*, 430, 562, 573* 2 Cor. viii. 5 122, 572, 576*, 584* 2 Cor. V. 7 41, 120, 379, 565 2 Cor. viii. 6 288, 329* 2 Cor. V. 8 443, 562 2 Cor. viii. 7 193*, 315, 450, 451* a Cor. V. 10 159, 405 2 Cor. viii. 8 381* 2Cor. V. 11 186, 331*, 334 2 Cor. viii. 9 157, 341 2 Cor. V. 12 41, 87, 352*, 594 2 Cor. viii. 10 323, 422, 480, 560* 2 Cor. V. 13 212, 582 2 Cor. viii. 11 313, 324, 368, 560*, 585 2 Cor. V. 14 185 2 Cor. viii. 12 307* 2 Cor. V. 15 161, 383, 445, 477, 558 2 Cor. viii. 13 424*, 585, 586 2 Cor. V. 16 292, 301 2 Cor. viii. 15 589* 2 Cor. V. 17 235, 390 2 Cor. viii. 16 414, 585 2 Cor. V. 18 209 2 Cor. viii. 17 242*, 443 2 Cor. V. 19 145, 349, 618* 2 Cor. viii. 18 278, 378, 433 2 Cor. V. 20 262, 383* 2 Cor. viii. 19 391, 583 2 Cor. V. 21 186, 382, 484*, 638 2 Cor. viii. 20 63, 351* 2 Cor. viii. 22 240, 637 2 Cor. vi. 1 332 2 Cor. viii. 23 383, 578, 585 2 Cor. vi. 2 522, 565, 609 2 Cor. viii. 24 174, 397, 602 2 Cor. vi. 3 483, 484*, 499 2 Cor. vi. 4 78, 87, 181*, 389 2 Cor. ix. 1 133, 447*, 576 2 Cor. vi. 6 389 2 Cor. ix. 2 65, 193*, 208, 222, 233, 272, 2 Cor. vi. 7 132, 378, 389, 552 » » » 383, 422, 629 2 Cor. vi. 8 389 2 Cor. ix. 3 576 2 Cor. vi. 9 573 2 Cor. ix. 5 318, 336 2Cor. vi. 11 271 2 Cor. ix. 6 176, 392*, 394, 596* 2 Cor. vi. 12 388 2 Cor. ix. 7 446, 587* 2 Cor. vi. 13 530*, 620* 2 Cor. ix. 8 637 2 Cor. vi. 14 211, 221*, 350, 406, 584 2 Cor. ix. 9 469*, 588 2 Cor. vi. 15 41, 234, 443 2 Cor. ix. 10 286, 572 2 Cor. vi. 16 430 2 Cor. ix. 11 211, 572 8 Cor. vi. 17 74, 147*, 201 2 Cor. ix. 12 211, 572 N. T. INDEX. 711 2 Cor. ix. 13 118, 136, 186, 381*, 572* 2 Cor. xii. 1 124, 177, 454* 2 Cor. ix. 14 204, 217 2 Cor. xii. 2 83, 121 , 126, 160, 176, 372, 2 Cor. ix. 15 393, 585 » » >» 2 Cor. xii. 3 417, 565 111, 626 2 Cor. X. 1 381, 397, 521, 558 2 Cor. xii. 4 83, 331, 626 2 Cor. X. 2 259, 321 322*, 409, 443, 482 2 Cor. xii. 5 383, 454 » » » 527, 602 2 Cor. xii. 6 199, 159, 453*, 502 2 Cor. X. 3 411, 638 2 Cor. xii. 7 177, 220*, 550, 561, 611 2 Cor. X. 4 212, 248, 565 2 Cor. xii. 8 336, 383, 427 2 Cor. X. 5 186, 621 2 Cor. xii. 9 118 , 209, 240, 271. 284 2 Cor. X. 6 332 2 Cor. xii. 10 232 2 Cor. X. 7 122 , 161, 195, 372», 585 2 Cor. xii. 11 197 282*, 422, 477, 538 2 Cor. X. 9 310* 2 Cor. xii. 12 106, 111*, 410, 575 2 Cor. X. 10 522*, 563 2 Cor. xii. 13 403* 2 Cor. X. 11 161 2 Cor. xii. 14 41, 332, 625 2 Cor. X. 12 81 ,87, 150, 209, 218* 331, 637 2 Cor. xii. 15 156, 245 2 Cor. X. 13 163, 165, 318, 396, 530 2 Cor. xii. 17 158, 574* 2 Cor. X. 14 90, 342*, 384, 396, 431, 2 Cor. xii. 18 219 »> » » 474*, 484 2 Cor. xii. 19 155, 209, 383*, 508 2 Cor. X. 15 331 2 Cor. xii. 20 65,176, 219, 453*, 504, 556* 2 Cor. X. 16 109, 318, 587 2 Cor. xii. 21 163, 207, 222, 343, 393, 482, 2 Cor. X. 18 78,87 >y » » 494, 504, 554*, 635* 2 Cor. xi. 1 72, 302*, 442 2 Cor. xiii. 1 250*, 265, 375, 440, 625 2 Cor. xi. 2 117, 185, 258, 318, 534 2 Cor. xiii. 2 128 2 Cor. xi. 3 133, 370, 504, 541, 621 2 Cor. xiii. 3 411,418 2 Cor. xi. 4 72, 109, 306* 2 Cor. xiii. 4 86, 388*, 442, 541 2 Cor. xi. 5 196*, 422, 446 2 Cor. xiii. 5 626 2 Cor. xi. 6 398*, 442, 580, 585* 2 Cor. xiii. 7 212, 321, 460*, 495, 513, 2 Cor. xi. 7 208, 509* )> >> » 555*, 617 2 Cor. xi. 8 44, 405, 499 2 Cor. xiii. 8 382, 594 2 Cor. xi. 9 134* 2 Cor. xiii. 9 155, 161, 529 2 Cor. xi. 10 248*, 397, 449, 456* 2 Cor. xiii. 10 278, 494 2Cor. xi. 11 582 2 Cor. xi. 12 158, 286 Gal. i. 1 122 371,378,379,418* 2 Cor. xi. 13 111, 513 Gal. i, 3 124, 139 2 Cor. xi. 14 112 Gal. i. 4 133, 383, 412, 525 2 Cor. xi. 16 321, 583, 584, 605 Gal. i. 5 108 2 Cor. xi. 17 401 Gal. i. 6 638 2 Cor. xi. 18 117, 233 Gal. i. 7 109, 118, 513 2 Cor. xi. 20 255*, 609 Gal. i. 8 159, 295, 296, 517, 518* 2 Cor. xi. 21 40, 402*, 563, 618 Gal. i. 10 80, 304, 509 2 Cor. xi. 22 454 Gal. i. 11 402, 549 2 Cor. xi. 23 176, il7,243, 423*, 466, 578* Gal. i. 12 489, 492* 2 Cor. xi. 24 369, 578, 589 Gal. i. 13 269* 2 Cor. xi. 25 74, 272* Gal. i. 14 70, 243, 403 2 Cor. xi. 26 188*, 217, 57i, 609 Gal. i. 15 367 2 Cor. xi. 27 578 Gal. i. 16 218*, 552 2 Cor. xi. 28 533* Gal. i. 18 428 2 Cor. xi. 29 153* Gal. i. 19 113, 633* 2 Cor. xi. 30 222, 538 Gal. i. 20 449 2 Cor. xi. 32 60, 61, 138 Gal. i. 22 215, 390 3 Cor. xi. 33 429, 606 Gal. i. 23 108, 353*, 545, 631* 712 N. T. INDEX. Gal. i. 24 388 Gal. iv. 8 Gal. iv. 9 475, 486* 263*, 604 Gal. ii. 1 60, 380* Gal. iv. 10 253 Gal. ii. 2 353, 380, 443, 504*, 632* Gal. iv. U 503*, 626 Gal. ii. 4 255, 289, 545, 569* Gal. iv, 12 227 Gal. ii. 5 236 Gal. iv. 13 71, 223, 400* Gal. ii. 6 170*, 568* Gal. iv. 15 84, 305, 585 Gal. ii. 7 46, 229, 260*, 271* Gal. iv. 17 289*, 638 Gal. ii. 8 258, 397, 562, 565 Gal. iv. 18 320, 329 Gal. ii. 9 152 587*, 592, 613 Gal. iv. 19 141 Gal. ii. 10 142, 149*, 550 Gal. iv. 20 283, 330 Gal. ii. 11 343* Gal. iv. 21 407, 537 Gal. ii. 12 446 Gal. iv. 22 173 Gal. ii. 13 216, 301 Gal. iv. 23 104 Gal. ii. 14 45, 236, 405 Gal. iv. 24 118, 248,562,576 Gal. ii. 15 521 Gal. iv. 25 109*, 112, 179* Gal. ii. 16 17] , 186, 266, 280 Gal. iv. 26 576 Gal. ii. 17 120, 500, 510*, 616* Gal. iv. 27 240, 485* Gal. ii. 18 87 Gal. iv. 28 192, 402* Gal. ii. 19 210, 428 Gal. iv. 30 506 Gal. ii. 20 168, 227, 619 Gal. iv. 31 44& Gal. ii. 21 123, 558 Gal. v. 1 210 Gal. iii. 1 75, 83, 135*, 149*, 183, 223 Gal. V. 2 227, 521 » » » 400, 537, 549 Gal. V. 4 73, 427, 429, 621 Gal. iii. 2 365, 509 Gal. V. 6 120 Gal. iii. 7 424*, 445 Gal. V. 7 604 Gal. iii. 8 71, 114, 411 Gal. V. 8 637 Gal. iii. 9 301, 391 Gal. V. 10 137, 214, 321 Gal. iii. 10 325, 368, 407 Gal. V. 11 558 Gal. iii. 11 123, 136, 186 Gal. V. 12 255, 302, 638 Gal. iii. 13 383 Gal. V. 13 394, 596* Gal. iii. 14 237* Gal. V. 14 109, 151, 549 Gal. iii. 15 192, 402, 444, 553* Gal. V. 16 219, 506 Gal. iii. 16 166*, 375, 522 Gal. V. 17 307*, 460 Gal. iii. 17 596, 250, 396 Gal. V. 19 515 Gal. iii. 18 123, 619 Gal. V. 20 65, 176 Gal. iii. 19 124, 297, 379* Gal. V. 21 200 Gal. iii. 20 116, 593* Gal. V. "26 209, 476, 502* Gal. iii. 21 123 , 139, 304, 508 Gal. iii. 22 186, 397 Gal. vi. 1 537, 580, 626 Gal. iii. 23 334 , 396, 550, 558 Gal. vi. 3 170*, 613 Gal. iii. 26 122, 213, 234 Gal. vi. 6 110, 114 Gal. iii. 28 80, 552 Gal. vi. 7 310 Gal. iii. 29 445 Gal. vi. 9 Gal. vi. 10 483, 502 284, 448 Gal. iv. 1 106 Gal. vi. 11 278 Gal. iv. 2 407 Gal. vi. 12 216, 290 Gal. iv. 3 80 Gal. vi. 13 233, 287, 332 Gal. iv. 4 86 Gal. vi. 14 123, 319 Gal. iv. 5 123 Gal. vi. 16 437 Gal. iv. 6 580 Gal. vi. 17 153, 207 Gal. iv. 7 301, 379, 580 N. T. INDEX. 713 Eph. i. 3 410, 517, 551, 586 Eph. iii. 11 167, 2.56 Eph. i. 4 125, 342, 386 Eph. iii. 12 128, 137, 167, 186 Eph. i. 5 342,378,402, Gil Eph. iii. 13 136, 166*, 234, 388 Eph. i. 6 125, 163, 190 Eph. iii. 14 404, 566*, 638 Eph. i. 7 389*, 528 Eph. iii. 15 111*, 116, 121, 615 Eph. i. 8 111*, 163, 164* Eph. iii. 16 65, 78,290*, 319,378,397,417* Eph. i. 9 152, 342 Eph. iii. 18 128 , 144, 331, 340, 572* Eph. i. 10 397, 528 Eph. iii. 19 185, 217*, 346*, 638 Eph. i. 11 258, 262 Eph. iii. 20 158 Eph. i. 12 58, 125, 134* Eph. iii. 21 108 Eph. i. 13 213, 216, 528, 562, 586* Eph. i. 14 166, 410, 531 Eph. iv. 1 136*, 152, 163, 332, 388*, 566* Eph. i. 15 133, 135, 137, 154*, 234 Eph. iv. 2 202, 572* Eph. i. 16 256, 376, 383, 412 Eph. iv. 3 386, 572* Eph. i. 17 78, 152, 290, 416 Eph. iv. 4 417, 584 Eph. i. 18 108, 298, 572, 584 Eph. iv. 6 375, 419* Eph. i, 19 134, 190, 421, 529, 611 Eph. iv. 7 401 Eph. i. 20 125,218*,235,384, 430,573,592 Eph. iv. 8 225, 522 Eph. i. 21 420,421, 527, 566, 615 Eph. iv. 9 69, 243, 531*, 592 Eph. i. 23 114, 166, 167*, 258*, 260*, Eph. iv. 11 104 » )> » 513, 533, 638 Eph. iv. 12 Eph. iv. 13 144, 157, 411, 615 190*, 297, 528 Eph. ii. 1 126,412, 611 Eph. iv. 14 460*, 477 Eph. ii. 2 238*, 401, 634* Eph. iv. 15 397 Eph. ii. 3 80, 127, 176, 191*, 215*, 238, Eph. iv. 16 256, 386 »> » » 386, 410, 550*, 573* Eph. iv. 17 161,-514, 526 Eph. ii. 4 201*, 225, 399, 443 Eph. iv. 18 186* , 189, 215, 428, 526* Eph. ii. 5 218*, 565 Eph. iv. 19 213 Eph. ii. 6 235, 278 Eph. iv. 21 199*, 391* Eph. ii. 7 65, 137, 254, 410 Eph. iv. 22 318, 321*, 322*, 342, 347*, Eph. ii. 8 192, 217*, 411, 562 410 Eph. ii. 9 459, 477 Eph. iv. 23 215, 263*, 611 Eph. ii. 10 149*, 155, 163, 192, 386, 394 Eph. iv. 25 313, 342, 528 Eph. ii. 11 135,313,562,566*, 578, 582,602 Eph. iv. 26 120, 311*, 313, 494*, 584 Eph. ii. 12 177*, 194, 197,428, 465, 477, Eph. iv. 27 312, 491* » » » 566, 578 Eph. iv. 28 234, 313, 353*, 501 Eph. ii. 13 118, 341, 578 Eph. iv. 29 172, 363, 583 Eph. ii. 14 114, 181, 228, 531 Eph. iv. 30 125, 39b Eph. ii. 15 136,138, 220*,386,388, 528, 621 Eph. iv. 31 312 Eph. ii. 16 342, 416* Eph. ii. 17 607*, 609 Eph. V. 2 386, 438, 605* Eph. ii. 19 558 Eph. V. 3 441,485*, 615* Eph. ii. 20 128, 130, 185, 431 Eph. V. 4 270 Eph. ii. 21 83, 111*, 136, 149*, 193,342, 396 Eph. V. 5 122, 128 166, 167, 172*, 265, Eph. ii. 22 122, 317 Eph. V. 6 355*, 518 501 Eph. iii. 1 189, 521, 566* Eph. V. 8 238 Eph. iii. 2 448, 560, 634 Eph. V. 9 184*, 562, 565 Eph. iii. 4 136 Eph. V. 11 143, 521 Eph. iii. 5 128, 218, 221, 566* Eph. V. 12 47, 141, 146*, 319 Eph. iii. 6 318*, 389 Eph. V. 13 258* Eph. iii. 8 65, 69, 242, 319, 362 Eph. V. 14 79, 90, 123, 312, 431 Eph. iii. 10 128, 235*, 362,459* 90 Eph. V. 15 300*, 474*, 610 714 N. T. INDEX. Eph. V. 17 584, 610 Phil. i. 15 359 Eph. V. 18 217 PhU. i. 16 184, 332, 368, 561 Eph. V. 19 212*, 216, 351 Phil. i. 17 184 , 209, 332, 368, 431 Eph. V. 20 351, 383 Phil. i. 18 90,157,216 ,217*, 232, 387, 585 Eph, V. 21 186, 351* Phil. i. 19 128, 129 Eph. V. 22 154, 351 Phil. i. 20 128 Eph. V. 23 122, 451, 530 Phil. i. 21 320, 333 Eph. V. 24 440, 451*, 582* Phil. i. 22 160, 169, 299* 513 Eph. V. 26 30, 123, 138* Phil. i. 23 240*, 245, 329*, 397, 578 Eph. V. 27 482, 545, 577 Phil. i. 25 128, 161, 397 Eph. V. 28 150 Phil. i. 26 136 , 234, 287, 410, 466 Eph. V. 29 278 Phil. i. 27 109, 211, 477 Eph. V. 31 183, 262, 364*, 432* Phil. i. 28 166,211,477, 482 Eph. V. 32 153*, 397, 443 Phil. i. 29 259, 320, 513 Eph. V. 83 249, 315, 577 Phil. i. 30 112, 572 Eph. vi. 1 182, 390, 537 Phil. ii. 1 122, 526 Eph. vi. 2 126, 316, 391*, 562 Phil. ii. 2 155, 337, 525 Eph. vi. 3 289* Phil. ii. 3 583, 537* Eph. vi. 4 189*, 313, 388* Phil. ii. 4 477, 482, 498 Eph. vi. 5 .138, 537, 401* Phil. ii. 5 582 Eph. vi. 6 402 Phil. ii. 6 177*, 209, 323* Eph. vi. 8 310, 365, 552, 621 Phil. u. 7 342, 345, 387, 616 Eph. vi. 9 192 Phil. ii. 8 122, 215, 257, 443 Eph. vi. 10 264, 537 Phil. ii. 9 140*, 438 Eph. vi. 11 176, 189* Phil. ii. 10 191* 235* 390* Eph. vi. 12 235, 239*, 421, 496, 552, 609 Phil. ii. 11 122, 124, 551 Eph. vi. 13 132, 189*, 313 Phil. ii. 12 151,301,313,476^477,498,594 Eph. vi. 14 174, 432, 531 Phil. ii. 13 114, 350*, 383*, 430, 513 Eph. vi. 15 416 Phil. ii. 15 122 , 123, 141, 317,471 Eph. vi. 16 108, 134*,384, 393, 531 Phil. ii. 16 125, 410, 606 Eph. vi. 17 709, 123,166,313 Phil. ii. 17 128, 393 Eph. vi. 18 122, 383, 410, 412, 437, 631 Phil. ii. 18 40, 227 Eph. vi. 20 384*, 386 Phil. ii. 19 331, 344 Eph. vi. 21 126, 136, 401* Phil. ii. 20 300 Eph. vi. 22 161 Phil. ii. 22 317, 422*, 577* Eph. vi. 23 124, 377 Phil. ii. 23 Phil. ii. 25 45, 308*, 331 49, 192 Phil. i. 1 136, 587 Phil. ii. 27 221, 288, 408*, 471 Phil. i. 2 122 Phil. ii. 28 70, 243*, 278, 346*, 548 Phil. i. 3 110, 392*, 393 Phil. ii. 29 228 Phil. i. 4 256, 637 Phil. ii. 30 93, 122, 191 Phil. i. 5 109, 124, 126, 193 Phil. i. 6 143, 161, 227 Phil, iii. 2 223*, 609, 638 Phil. i. 7 128, 148, 319, 329*, 383, 420, Phil. iii. 3 114,209,! 214, 216, 233, 485*, » » » 439, 543, 627* »» j> »» 529, 593, 638 PhU. i. 8 189*, 204, 388 Phil. iii. 4 344, 582 Phil. i. 9 240, 336, 386, 416* Phil. iii. 5 196, 215, 520 Phil. i. 10 416 Phil. iii. 6 65, 123, 140, 402 Phil. i. 11 133, 140, 201, 229, 378 Phil. iii. 7 160, 168, 228, 274*, 281 Phil. i. 12 243*, 332, 549 Phil. iii. 8 229, 235, 442* Phil. i. 13 63, 578 Phil. iii. 9 122, 133 137, 139, 186, 390, Phil. i. 14 137*, 243 » » i> 392, 477, 482, 616 Phil. iii. 10 439, 92, N. T. E 129, 189, 325*, 572 vTDEX. Col. i. 24 136, 166 715 167, 189, 232, 382 Phil. iii. 12 262, 263, 276*, 394, 638 Col. i. 26 227, 573 Phil. iii. 13 321* Col. i. 27 166*, 168,330 Phil. iii. 14 136, 205, 400*, 407, 431*, 620 | Col. i. 28 167, 609 Phil. iii. 15 280*, 285*, 585 Col. i. 29 167, 258, 397, 410 Phil. iii. 16 90, 316*, 513 Phil. iii. 17 549 Col. ii. 1 76, 453 Phil. iii. 18 532, 573, 183, 222, 530, 628 Col. ii. 2 58, 65, 410, 572* Phil. iii. 19 114, 183, 532, 564 Col. ii. 5 155, 215, 236, 292, 442, 444, 469* Phil. iii. 20 124, 139, 141*, 155, 446, Col. ii. 7 216, 343, 431 » » » 453*, 551 Col. ii. 8 109, 128, 401, 437, 503*, 520 Phil. iii. 21 324, 528, 624 Col. ii. 9 Col. ii. 10 546 572 Phil. iv. 1 301 , 390, 523, 530, 537 Col. ii. 11 144, 157, 189*, 216 Phil. iv. 3 69, 125, 313, 439, 545, 584 Col. ii. 12 123, 190, 340 Phil. iv. 4 537 Col. ii. 13 127 148 218, 342, 391,412, Phil. iv. 5 219, 235, 585 » » >i 344, 433, 602 Phil. iv. 6 128, 212, 405 Col. ii. 14 47, 138, 220, 271 Phil. iv. 7 126, 186*, 280* Col. ii. 15 141, 258 Phil. iv. 8 160, 609 Col. ii. 16 420, 502, 552, 615* Phil. iv. 9 160, 280*, 313 Col. ii. 17 166, 532* Phil. iv. 10 87, 233 317*, 323, 382, 546 Col. ii. 18 187*, 190, 232, 248*, 369, Phil. iv. 11 152, 158 , 159, 321, 347, 386, » >» » 467*, 480* » >9 » 402*, 597 Col. ii. 19 83 ,128 141, 202, 224, 247*, 485* Phil. iv. 12 77, 180, 318, 520 Col. ii. 20 209 , 25S , 261, 370, 391, 428 Phil. iv. 14 155, 345 Col. ii. 21 488, 501, 594 Phil. iv. 15 84, 193, 200, 602 Col. ii. 22 127 Phil. iv. 16 228*, 414* Col. ii. 23 349, 575* Phil. iv. 17 597, 606 Phil. iv. 18 237*, 275*, 366*, 452, 528, Col. iii. 1 292 f9 99 99 530, 631 Col. iii. 3 271, 272, 391 Phil. iv. 19 65, 137, 280* Col. iii. 4 530 Phil. iv. 21 137 Col. iii. 5 117*, 166* 167, 313, 531*, 553 Phil. iv. 22 629 Col. iii. 6 Col. iii. 7 265* 269, 386 Col. i. 3 344*, 412 Col. iii. 8 107*, 116, 120 Col. i. 4 135 Col. iii. 9 397 Col. i. 6 137, 573 Col. iii. 11 80, 440, 520, 552 Col. i. 7 60, 103, 382 Col. iii. 12 176, 565, 611 Col. i. 8 122, 135*, 390* Col. iii. 13 440, 565* Col. i. 9 137,412 Col. iii. 14 166*, 393, 565 Col. i. 12 136 Col. iii. 15 186*, 438 Col. i. 13 237, 259 Col. iii. 16 430, 566, 572 Col. i. 14 189 Col. iii. 17 126, 307, 378, 420 Col. i. 15 54, 124 Col. iii. 18 182, 270* Col. i. 16 116*, 235, 272*, 389, 419* Col. iii. 23 307 Col. i. 17 150, 419* Col. iii. 24 370*, 371, 531 Col. i. 18 123 Col. iii. 25 620* Col. i. 19 71, 588 Col. i. 20 178, 187*, 190, 212*, 397 Col. iv. 1 126, 257 Col. i. 21 132, 216, 341, 443, 571 Col. iv. 2 386, 410, 433 Col. i. 22 188*, 318 Col. iv. 3 517 Col. i. 23 124, 448, 475* Col. iv. 5 405, 424 716 N. T. INDEX. Col. iv. 6 298, 316*, 318*, 585 1 Thess. iv. 1 109, 432, 513 Col. iv. 9 75 1 Thess. iv. 2 84, 379* Col. iv. 10 60, 565 1 Thess. iv. 3 319* , 427, 513, 529 Col. iv. 11 84, 513 1 Thess. iv. 4 274 Col. iv. 12 103, 111* 1 Thess. iv. 5 134, 139, 486 Col. iv. 14 103 1 Thess. iv. 6 53, 85, 115* , 171,320,433 Col. iv. 15 102, 145 1 Thess. iv. 7 394*, 411, 417* Col. iv. 16 107* ,337, 395, 550, 629* 1 Thess. iv. 8 497* Col. iv. 17 85, 626 1 Thess. iv. 9 56, 324, 339* Col. iv. 18 155 1 Thess. iv. 10 1 Thess. iv. 14 133, 332 541* 1 Thess. i. 1 136 1 Thess. iv. 15 387*, 506, 507* 1 Thess. i. 2 256 ,344 , 373, 376 1 Thess. iv. 16 135*, 150,247 *,385,390,431 1 Thess. i. 3 155, 187*, 190, 205, 615* 1 Thess. iv. 17 83, 135*, 391 1 Thess. i. 5 420 1 Thess. iv. 18 301 1 Thess. i. 6 550 1 Thess. i. 7 111, 130, 175* 1 Thess. V. 1 339 1 Thess. i. 8 133 , 145 , 420, 480 1 Thess. V. 2 139* 1 Thess. i. 9 122 , 145, 298 1 Thess. V. 3 65, 506, 541 1 Thess. i. 10 125 , 134 , 353, 594 1 Thess. V. 4 1 Thess. V. 5 460* 195*, 196 1 Thess. ii. 1 133, 626 1 Thess. V. 6 285, 502 1 Thess. ii. 3 368, 411, 493* 1 Thess. V. 8 120, 125, 195* 1 Thess. ii. 4 271, 340 1 Thess. V. 10 294*, 391 1 Thess. ii. 5 120 , 488, 565 1 Thess. V. 11 173 1 Thess. ii. 6 344, 411* 1 Thess. V. 12 335, 386* 1 Thess. ii. 7 307, 541 1 Thess. V. 14 202, 405, 538 1 Thess. ii. 8 101, 198*, 204, 331, 622* 1 Thess. V. 22 120, 427 1 Thess. ii. 9 205, 329 ,482 552, 587 1 Thess. V. 23 150, 286, 527 1 Thess. ii. 10 465 1 Thess. V. 24 353 1 Thess. ii. 12 128, 333 1 Thess. V. 27 226 1 Thess. ii. 13 122 191, 258* , 465, 551 1 Thess. ii. 14 46, 84, 154 ,369 , 390, 410 2 Thess. i. 1 136 1 Thess. ii. 15 355 2 Thess. i. 4 163 383, 410, 533 1 Thess. ii. 16 90, 137, 155, 329, 452*, 2 Thess. i. 6 122, 448* » » J) 594, 604 2 Thess. i. 7 237* 1 Thess. ii. 17 243*, 427 2 Thess. i. 8 475*, 486 1 Thess. ii. 18 437 2 Thess. i. 9 125, 190, 371 1 Thess. ii. 19 155 2 Thess. i. 10 260, 386, 389, 565 1 Thess. ii. 20 446, 513 2 Thess. i. 11 2 Thess. i. 12 206, 397 130* 1 Thess. iii. 1 483 2 Thess. ii. 1 383 1 Thess. iii. 2 113, 386 2 Thess. ii. 2 125, 274, 370, 378*, 421, 1 Thess. iii. 3 184, 328* )f » » 493, 618 1 Thess. iii. 5 483, 505* 2 Thess. ii. 3 106, 238, 239*, 499, 500, 1 Thess. iii. 6 371* » » » 529, 545, 599*, 600 1 Thess. iii. 7 128 2 Thess. ii. 4 253, 626 1 Thess. iii. 8 295 2 Thess. ii. 6 178 1 Thess. iii. 9 57, 226 2 Thess. ii. 7 123 258, 297, 550 1 Thess. iii. 10 155, 552 2 Thess. ii. 8 611, 639 1 Thess. iii. 11 :i39 , 150, 316 2 Thess. ii. 9 60, 158, 386 1 Thess. iii. 13 155, 417* 528, 624 2 Thess. ii. 10 2 Thess. ii. 11 189* 236 N. T. INDEX. 717 2 Thess. ii. 12 232 , 475, 477, 482 1 Tim. iii. 1 204, 537, 585 2 Thess. ii. 13 73, 124, 186, 417*, 527 1 Tim, iii. 2 117*, 525 2 Thess. ii. 15 202, 229, 558 1 Tim. iii. 4 117 2 Thess. ii. 16 69, 150 1 Tim. iii. 5 205, 279, 452*, 477, 565 2 Thess. ii. 17 155, 316 1 Tim. iii. 6 1 Tim. iii. 12 191*, 430 117* 2 Thess. iii. 2 584 1 Tim. iii. 13 140 2 Thess. iii. 3 89 1 Tim. iii. 14 69, 243*, 331, 537 2 Thess. iii. 4 137, 233 1 Tim. iii. 15 166*, 243, 298, 627 2 Thess. iii. 5 118, 155 185, 286, 316 1 Tim. iii. 16 123, 124, 260*, 413, 538, 2 Thess. iii. 6 77, 432 »> » »» 588*, 639* 2 Thess. iii. 7 298 2 Thess. iii. 8 351*, 493 1 Tim. iv. 1 187*, 427, 428 2 Thess. iii. 9 597 1 Tim. iv. 3 139, 622* 2 Thess. iii. 10 161,475 , 476, 477, 478 1 Tim. iv. 4 343 2 Thess. iii. 11 274, 347, 638 1 Tim. iv. 6 128, 164 2 Thess. iii. 12 143, 198, 381 1 Tim. iv. 7 257, 313, 405 2 Thess. iii. 13 345 1 Tim. iv. 8 140, 213 2 Thess. iii. 14 119*, 253, 477 1 Tim. iv. 10 410 2 Thess. iii. 15 228 521, 527, 602 1 Tim. iv. 11 313, 537 2 Thess. iii. 16 150, 217 1 Tim. iv. 12 1 Tim. iv. 13 537 296, 313, 520, 537 1 Tim. i. 1 139 1 Tim. iv. 14 205, 377*, 537 1 Tim. i. 2 137* 1 Tim. iv. 15 79, 155, 287, 385, 386, 1 Tim. i. 3 315, 321*, 433, 488, 566, 570* » » » 520, 537 1 Tim. i. 4 140, 488 1 Tim. iv. 16 537 1 Tim. i. 5 139, 368, 570* 1 Tim. i. 6 196 1 Tim. V. 1 527, 537 1 Tim. i. 7 169, 253, 488 1 Tim. V. 4 77, 347, 631* 1 Tim. i. 8 638 1 Tim. V. 5 130, 233 ,409, 410, 433, 611 1 Tim. i. 9 161, 211, 638 1 Tim. V. 7 313 1 Tim. i. 10 520 1 Tim. V. 8 205, 239, 259, 477 1 Tim. i. 11 229 1 Tim. V. 9 477, 590* 1 Tim. i. 12 348* 1 Tim. V. 10 234, 387, 609 1 Tim. i. 13 341 1 Tim. V. 13 347*, 432, 480* 1 Tim. i. 14 133 1 Tim. V. 14 537 1 Tim. i. 15 107, 234, 585 1 Tim. v; 15 621 1 Tim. i. 16 288, 549 1 Tim. V. 16 83, 590 1 Tim. i. 18 224, 387* 1 Tim. V. 17 206 1 Tim. i. 19 406, 524 1 Tim. V. 18 585 1 Tim. i. 20 195*, 288 1 Tim. V. 19 1 Tim. V. 21 64, 313, 375*, 420, 605 477 1 Tim. ii. 1 256,332,611 1 Tim. V. 22 200* , 209, 430, 501 , 537 1 Tim. ii. 2 70, 386, 524, 593* 1 Tim. V. 23 127, 498*, 501, 537, 548 1 Tim. ii. 3 534 1 Tim. V. 24 171, 537, 559 1 Tim. ii. 4 553* 1 Tim. V. 25 514 1 Tim. ii. 6 58, 383, 533 1 Tim. ii. 7 527 , 562, 565, 610 1 Tim. vi. 1 407, 537 1 Tim. ii. 8 68*, 283 , 321, 332, 544 1 Tim. vi. 2 143, 202, 502, 521 1 Tim. ii. 9 68 1 Tim. vi. 3 56, 57, 537 1 Tim. ii. 10 158* 1 Tim. vi. 4 406, 518 1 Tim. ii. 12 122, 206 1 Tim. vi. 5 78, 102, 196, 229, 427, 428 1 Tim. ii. 15 293, 516* 631* 1 Tim. vi. 6 546 1 Tim. u. 1 3 464 718 N. T. INDEX. 1 Tim. vi. 7 585 2 Tim. iii. 15 120, 370 1 Tim. vi. 8 75 2 Tim. iii. 16 96*, 213, 416 1 Tim. vi. 9 525 1 Tim. vi. 11 120, 183, 313 2 Tim. iv. 1 537, 552, 630 1 Tim. vi. 12 202, 224, 312* 2 Tim. iv. 2 79, 314, 520* 1 Tim. vi. 13 107, 375 2 Tim. iv. 3 83,481 1 Tim. vi. 15 246 2 Tim. iv. 6 152, 274 1 Tim. vi. 17 136*, 192*, 236*, 273, 334 2 Tim. iv. 7 132 , 224, 523, 638 1 Tim. vi. 18 201 2 Tim. iv. 8 • 273* 1 Tim. vi. 19 202 2 Tim. iv. 9 602 1 Tim. vi. 20 183, 253, 314, 549 2 Tim. iv. 10 2 Tim. iv. 13 103 22, 395 2 Tim. i. 1 402 2 Tim. iv. 14 78 2 Tim. i. 3 372*, 448* 2 Tim. iv. 15 223, 314 2 Tim. i. 4 155, 544 2 Tim. iv. 16 476, 501 2 Tim. i. 5 582* 2 Tim. iv. 17 74, 259, 514 2 Tim. i. 8 189, 314 2 Tim. iv. 18 621* 2 Tim. i. 10 116, 139, 534 2 Tim. iv. 20 219 2 Tim. i. 11 527 2 Tim. iv. 21 372 2 Tim. i. 12 319, 396, 438 2 Tim. i. 13 139 Titus i. 1 402, 565* 2 Tim. i. U 140, 314 Titus i. 2 565* 2 Tim. i. 15 195 Titus i. 3 534*, 565*, 568* 2 Tim. i. 16 73,78 Titus i. 5 112, 258*, 288 2 Tim. i. 17 219 Titus i. 6 117*, 139 , 386, 477, 525 2 Tim. i. 18 78, 242*, 321, 365* Titus i. 7 Titus i. 9 192 • 202 2 Tim. ii. 1 133, 153, 313 Titus i. 10 368 2 Tim. ii. 2 160,319, 378* Titus i. 11 332, 480* 2 Tim. ii. 3 314 Titus i. 12 69, 154*, 640* 2 Tim. ii. 4 287 Titus i. 13 217, 313 2 Tim. ii. 5 477, 556* Titus i. 15 88, 155, 518, 559' 2 Tim. ii. 6 556* 2 Tim. ii. 7 78, 286 Titus ii. 2 217, 322 2 Tim. ii. 8 313 Titus ii. 4 290, 525 2 Tim. ii. 10 140, 234, 287, 605 Titus ii. 5 101, 154 2 Tim. ii. 11 86, 143, 585 Titus ii. 7 228, 257*, 406 Titus ii. 8 64 , 424, 477, 591 2 Tim. ii. 14 313, 394, 533, 537, 624 Titus ii. 9 154, 482 2 Tim. ii. 16 78 Titus ii. 10 131, 482 2 Tim. ii. 18 334 Titus ii. 11 132 2 Tim. ii. 22 223* Titus ii. 12 127, 344, 355 2 Tim. ii. 26 621 Titus ii. 13 Titus ii. 14 130* , 344, 355, 544 197, 288 2 Tim. iii. 1 124 2 Tim. iii. 2 520 Titus iii. 1 313 2 Tim. iii. 4 245, 638 Titus iii. 3 120, 593* 2 Tim. iii. 6 366 Titus iii. 4 139 2 Tim. iii. 8 66, 229, 230, 406 Titus iii. 5 66,139,163 189, 193, 390*, 402 2 Tim. iii. 10 155 Titus iii. 6 163, 163, 378 2 Tim. iii. 11 74, 420 Titus iii. 7 157, 216 2 Tim. iii. 12 614* Titus iii. 8 108, 205, 253 2 Tim. iii. 14 314, 365 Titus iii. '9 68, 78, 524 N. T. INDEX. 719 Titus iii. 12 Titus iii. 13 Titus iii. 14 Titus iii. 15 Philem. 1 Philem. 4 Philem. 5 Philem. 6 Philem. 9 Philem. 10 Philem. 11 Philem. 12 Philem. 13 Philem. 14 Philem. 16 Philem. 17 Philem. 18 Philem. 19 Philem. 20 Philem. 22 Philem. 23 102 103, 313 77 585 189* 256, 345 139, 155,410* 338, 416, 462* 189* 164, 628 278, 638 530 189*, 270, 283*, 383 270, 283*, 330, 463, 617 403, 420 313 85, 227, 292 278, 521 137, 198, 286, 549, 638 594 519 Heb. Heb. Heb. Heb. Heb. Heb. Heb. Heb. Heb. Heb. Heb. Heb. . 1 375* . 2 176*, 228, 438, 527 . 3 125, 187*, 216, 237*, 256, 344, 384 . 4 240, 245, 271 . 6 210, 308 . 7 352, 405*, 588 .8 182 . 9 435, 226, 277*, 404 . 10 435 .11 53, 266 . 13 228, 271, 367*, 558, 605 14 120 Heb. ii. 1 89, 242, 243 Heb. ii. 2 545 Heb. ii. 3 205, 340, 379*, 545, 621 Heb. ii. 4 545 Heb. ii. 6 89 Heb. ii. 8 442, 446, 447*, 454 Heb. ii. 9 198*, 343, 3©9*, 462*, 534, 551 Heb. ii. 10 320, 343*, 409, 627 Heb. ii. 11 366, 448*, 585 Heb. ii. 13 582 Heb. ii. 14 200, 272*, 281, 288, 541, 552 Heb. ii. 15 329*, 380 Heb. ii. 16 202, 267*, 606 Heb. u. 17 209, 227*, 230 Heb. ii. 18 159*, 387* Heb. iii. 1 194, 200, 314 Heb. iii. 2 60 Heb. iii. 3 67, 190*, 206, 240*, 271, 404 Heb. iii. 4 350, 562 Heb. iii. 5 340* Heb. iii. 6 126,158, 409, .527 Heb. iii. 7 575 Heb. iii. 8 385, 401* Heb. iii. 9 436 Heb. iii. 10 85, 450 Heb. iii. 11 462,500 Heb. iii. 12 194*, 329, 416, 503, 538 Heb. iii. 13 111, 151, 189* Heb. iii. 15 571* Heb. iii. 16 53, 378, 426, 442, 510, 571* Heb. iii. 17 73, 230 Heb. iii. 19 438 Heb. iv. 1 197, 319, 613 Heb. iv. 2 87, 219*, 221, 229, 260, 475 Heb. iv. 3 123, 134, 265, 343, 344, 462, 500 Heb. iv. 4 271, 370. 522, 588, 590* Heb. iv. 7 113,199,385 Heb. iv. 8 146*, 304* Heb. iv. 9 445 Heb. iv. 10 154 421 Heb. iv. 11 162, 386, 388, 550 Heb. iv. 12 240, 247 Heb. iv. 13 147*, 406*, 442 Heb. iv. 14 202 Heb. iv. 15 91, 143, 475, 483 Heb. iv. 16 66, 397 Heb. V. 1 230, 382 Heb. V. 2 209, 229 Heb. V. 3 410, 440, 593* Heb. V. 4 106, 550, 582* Heb. V. 5 318, 582* Heb. V. 6 592* Heb. V. 7 152, 158, 197, 371, 621 Heb. V. 8 159, 166*, 344, 637 Heb. V. 10 229 Heb. V. 11 115*, 215, 319, 450 Heb. V. 12 59, 169, 190, 324, 339, 350', 399* Heb. V. 13 200, 521, 562, 584* Heb. V. 14 120, 195*, 399, 405, 528 Heb. vi. 1 188*, 482, 531, 550, 635 Heb. vi. 2 187*, 192*, 439, 550, 551* Heb. vi. 3 285 Heb. vi. 4 122, 198* Heb. vi. 5 123, 198 Heb. vi. 6 212, 319, 339, 343, 344, 396, 605 720 N. T. INDEX. Heb. vi. 7 131, 139, 200, 343, 376, 399, 438 Heb. ix. 1 133, 435*, 575 Heb. vi. 8 195, 351*, 584 Heb. ix. 2 129, 140, 236, 435*, 446, Heb. vi. 9 120, 202, 229 » » » 636* Heb. vi. 10 163, 205, 319, 343, 438, 630 Heb. ix. 3 177*, 246*, 403 Heb. vi. 11 321, 405, 544 Heb. ix. 4 67, 116, 158*, 38.5* Heb. vi. 12 442 Heb. ix. 5 68, 320 Heb. vi. 13 222, 382, 575 Heb. ix. 6 267* Heb. vi. 14 354*, 443 Heb. ix. 7 131, 203*, 577 Heb. vi. 16 88, 192, 222, 242, 382, 575* Heb. ix. 8 176*, 187, 482 Heb. vi. 17 216, 235, 243, 254, 387* Heb. ix. 9 166*, 401, 484*, 527 Heb. vi. 18 134, 202, 386*, 549 Heb. ix. 10 635* Heb. vi. 19 66, 69, 549 Heb. ix. 11 189,242,410, 485,524,525, 530 Heb. vi. 20 472* Heb. ix. 12 69, 73, 86, 154, 176*, 353, » w » 380, 495, 524 Heb. vii. 1 110 Heb. ix. 13 405 Heb. vii. 2 351*, 412 Heb. ix. 14 75, 197 Heb. vii. 3 488 Heb. ix. 15 185*, 287, 392* Heb. vii. 4 61, 412, 528, 534, 549*, 560* Heb. ix. 16 551*, 584, 585 Heb. vii. 5 344, 486 Heb. ix. 17 297, 394*, 480*, 549 Heb. vii. 6 71, 177*, 271, 273*, 486* Heb. ix. 18 271 Heb. vii. 7 178 Heb. ix. 19 74, 106, 193*, 401 Heb. vii. 8 340 Heb. ix. 20 163 Heb. vii. 9 273*, 317*, 378*, 449* Heb. ix. 21 443 Heb. vii. 11 67, 261*, 304*; 482*, 562 Heb. ix. 22 388, 554* Heb. vii. 12 123, 192, 424*, 447, 453* Heb. ix. 23 58, 175, 177, 240, 585 Heb. vii. 13 370, 409, 433, 447 Heb. ix. 24 318, 528 Heb. vii. 14 271, 397, 447 Heb. ix. 25 384, 401* Heb. vii. 15 240* Heb. ix. 26 271, 283*, 392* Heb. vii. 16 98,99 Heb. ix. 27 319 Heb. vii. 17 522, 588 Heb. vii. 19 178 Heb. X. 1 163, 550 Heb. vii. 20 104, 565*, 586 Heb. X. 2 43,134, 303*, 329, 345, 482, 508 Heb. vii. 21 377, 610 Heb. X. 4 584 Heb. vii. 23 329 Heb. X. 5 253, 277* Heb. vii. 24 108*, 143, 330, 528 Heb. X. 6 71, 222, 277*, 583* Heb. vii. 25 382 Heb. X. 7 182, 183, 325 Heb. vii. 26 197, 438* Heb. X. 8 71, 222, 351*, 563*, 583* Heb. vii. 27 154*, 421 Heb. X. 9 244 Heb. vii. 28 228 Heb. X. 10 138*, 387*, 389 Heb. X. 12 344 Heb. viii. 1 384, 534, 574 Heb. X. 13 297, 344 Heb. viii. 2 163, 176* Heb. X. 14 271 Heb. viii. 3 299 Heb. X. 16 225, 351*, 573 Heb. viii. 4 40, 121, 304, 589 Heb. X. 17 • 506 Heb. viii. 5 191, 260, 271, 285, 522, 562, Heb. X. IS 584 » j» » 588, 595 Heb. X. 20 528 Heb. viii. 6 89, 261, 271, 524 Heb. X. 21 409 Heb. viii. 7 304 Heb. X. 22 73, 74, 75, 229, 621 Heb. viii. 8 146*, 209, 436 Heb. X. 24 185, 397 Heb. viii. 9 225, 401, 430, 571* Heb. X. 25 151, 245, 477, 582 Heb. viii. 10 184, 225, 352, 573* Heb. X. 27 170* Heb. viii. 11 174, 507* Heb. X. 28 392*, 420 Heb. viii. 13 195, 271 Heb. X. 29 524, 562 N. T. INDEX. 721 Heb. X. 30 549 Heb. xii. 10 200, 268, 405, 409 Heb. X. 32 205 Heb. xii. 11 196" , 531, 550, 559 Heb. X. 33 142 Heb. xii. 13 641* Heb. X. 34 155, 524, 549 Heb. xii. 15 22, 197*, 252*, 504 Heb. X. 36 192 Heb. xii. 16 206, 364 Heb. X. 37 247*, 355, 585, 610 Heb. xii. 17 147*, 317, 377 Heb. X. 38 136*, 156, 523*, 583* Heb. xii. 18 566, 609, 66, 216*, 343* Heb. X. 39 196 Heb. xii. 19 Heb. xii. 20 259, 433, 604 201,316, 5C6* Heb. xi. 1 59*, 484, 485, 546 Heb. xii. 21 566* Heb. xi. 2 260, 386, 387*, 412 Heb. xii. 22 432, 528, 566*, e09* Heb. xi. 3 329, 334, 539, 555* Heb. xii. 23 134 Heb. xi. 4 240 Heb. xii. 24 240 Heb. xi. 5 71, 325 Heb. xii. 25 259, 478, 582, 594, 633* Heb. xi. 6 319 Heb. xii. 26 262 Heb. xi. 7 193*, 344, 402*, 484 Heb. xii. 27 108, 460, 477 Heb. xi. 8 70, 228, 268, 298, 483 Heb. xi. 9 376 Heb. xiii. 2 205, 407* Heb. xi. 11 150*, 404 Heb. xiii. 4 585* Heb. xi. 12 120, 132, 162, 215, 589* Heb. xiii. 5 232, 507*, 585, 588 Heb. xi. 13. 268, 403* Heb. xiii. 7 191 Heb. xi. 15 305*, 319 Heb. xiii. 8 552 Heb, xi. 16 204, 221, 530 Heb. xiii. 9 391*, 495, 496 Heb. xi. 17 549, 114, 269*, 437, 639 Heb. xiii. 10 199, 366* Heb. xi. 18 405, 616* Heb. xiii. 11 165, 168 Heb. xi. 19 584 Heb. xiii. 12 154 Heb. xi. 20 71 Heb. xiii. 13 559, 189*, 342* Heb. xi. 21 71, 341 Heb. xiii. 15 64, 209, .530 Heb. xi. 22 63, 205 Heb. xiii. 16 205, 260 Heb. xi. 23 230 Heb. xiii. 17 143 , 156, 382, 494 Heb. xi. 26 228 239, 384*, 592, 622 Heb. xiii. 18 373, 517, 614 Heb. xiii. 19 517, 69, 243* Heb. xi. 28 92, 106 147*, 201, 272, 353 Heb. xiii. 20 133, 134, 137 Heb. xi. 29 121,251,409, 431, 524 Heb. xiii. 22 202, 378*, 423*, 592* Heb. xi. 30 67, 408 Heb. xiii. 23 69, 243*, 317, 346* Heb. xi. 32 280*, 439, 550* Heb. xiii. 24 109, 629* Heb. xi. 33 120 Heb. xi. 34 62 James i. 1 133, 316, 588 Heb. xi. 35 288, 353*, 367, 460*, 485* James i. 2 111, 432 Heb. xi. 37 • 62, 520 James i. 3 235 Heb xi. 38 116 James i. 4 477 Heb xi. 39 381*, 412* James i. 5 201 , 482, 494, 610 Heb. xi. 40 258* James i. 6 274, 443, 447 James i. 7 446* , 447, 502, 534 Heb. xii. 1 344, 379, 423*, 432 James i. 8 528, 534* Heb. xii. 2 125 206 271, 364*, 435, 622 James i. 9 132, 622* Heb. xii. 3 215, 230, 234, 429, 454*, 477 James i. 10 622* Heb. xii. 4 405, 429 James i. 11 75, 277*, 470* Heb. xii. 5 205 James i. 12 531, 585 Heb. xii. 6 168, 443 James i. 13 97, 194*, 371* Heb. xii. 7 122, 300, 397, 481 James i. 14 369 Heb. xii. 8 445, 610 James i. 15 88 Heb. xii. 9 221, 228, 436, 527 91 James i. 16 537 722 N. T. INDEX. James i. 17 54, 80, 189, 348, 395, 527, James iv. 2 256, 470*, 482, 594 » » »» 537, 641* James iv. 3 256 James i. 18 88, 170*, 537 James iv. 4 179*, 229, 307 James i, 19 301, 329, 520, 538 James iv. 5 425* James i. 21 120 James iv. 7 223, 312*, 537 James i. 23 160, 274, 479, 610 James iv. 8 312, 313, 537 James i. 24 278*, 281, 446 James iv, 9 313, 537, 639 James i. 25 140, 237, 388 James iv. 10 257,261,537 James i. 26 68, 125, 192, 477 James iv. 13 117*, 162*, 249, 285 James i. 27 89, 161, 319, 529 >f >» n 516,517 James iv. 14 109, 140 , 447, 565, 590 James ii. I 60, 176, 186 James iv. 15 286*, 329*, 541 James ii. 2 446, 572* James iv. 17 147, 483, 494 James ii. 3 81, 106, 153, 430 James ii. 4 60, 185, 187*, 508, 572* James v. 1 341,516,537 James ii. 5 163, 189*, 201, 212, 228, 510 James v. 2 274*, 537 James ii. 6 86, 174, 206, 278* James v. 3 60,89,12-1 , 212, 537, 539 James ii. 9 342, 353* James v. 4 76, 371*, 537 James ii. 10 168, 202, 280, 308*, 447, 582 James v. 5 156*, 414, 416*, 537 James ii. 1 1 293, 479* James v. 6 106 , 174, 520, 537 James ii. 12 313,378 James v, 7 308, 314, 592* James ii. 13 100*, 203*, 432, 483 James v. 8 537 James ii. 14 108, 321, 585 James v. 9 372, 537 James ii. 15 350*, 452, 518 James v. 10 228, 527, 537 James ii. 16 580, 585 James v. 11 247* James ii. 17 116 James v. 12 59, 79, 88, 222, 313, 372*, James ii. 18 60, 280*, 367 „ „ „ 442, 476, 488 James ii. 19 514, 541 James v. 13 169*, 285*, 541* James ii. 20 116, 183 James v. 14 408* James ii. 22 270, 433 James v. 16 209 James ii. 23 453*, 615 James v. 17 325, 466 James ii. 25 106, 219, 344, 571 James v. 18 84, 436 James ii. 26 116*, 440 James v. 20 122, 197 James iii. I 242 1 Pet. i. 1 112,113 James iii. 2 479 1 Pet. i. 2 122, 137*, 188*, 237*, 286 James iii. 3 192, 541, 549, 599* 1 Pet. i. 3 134, 402, 551 James iii. 4 307, 344, 472, 604 1 Pet. i. 4 520, 525, 611 James iii. 5 524, 548 1 Pet. i. 5 124, 332, 389 James iii. 6 54, 134 1 Pet. i. 6- 232, 317 James iii. 7 132, 219* 1 Pet. i. 7 139*, 235*, 340, 378, 385, 459 James iii. 8 532*, 536 1 Pet. i. 8 226, 466, 485* James iii. 9 222, 388 1 Pet. i. 9 156*, 342* James iii. 10 332 1 Pet. i. 10 355 James iii. 1 1 128, 591 1 Pet. i. 11 193* James iii. 12 493* 1 Pet. i. 12 8S , 134, 355, 495 James iii. 13 511, 137*, 169, 313, 611 1 Pet. i. 13 314, 343 , 409, 477, 550 James iii. 14 174, 432, 470, 494*, 511* 1 Pet. i. 14 238, 352*, 4f7 James iii. 15 350* 1 Pet. i. 15 111*, 402 James iii 17 576 1 Pet. i. 17 353 James iii. 18 219 1 Pet. i. 18 1 Pet. i. 19 133, 216, 525, 527* 525 James iv. 1 161, 529 James iv. 1 1 Pet. i. 20 1 313 123, 376 N. T. INDEX. 728 1 Pet. i. 21 529 1 Pet. iv. 1 120, 196, 217, 262*, 263*, 271, 1 Pet. i. 22 186, 389 »» » >» 313, 412* 1 Pet. i. 23 340,366,411,421,549,610 1 Pet. iv. 2 84, 225, 226, 230, 329, 482 1 Pet. i. 24 277 1 Pet. iv. 3 176,209,219, 262,318,319, 1 Pet. i. 25 213 » » » 334, 520, 627* 1 Pet. iv. 4 484, 549 1 Pet. ii. 1 176, 527 1 Pet. iv. 5 552 1 Pet. ii. 2 204, 314 1 Pet. iv. 6 123, 223, 281, 402*, 441, 522, 1 Pet. ii. 3 448* » j> >j 630*, 639 1 Pet. ii. 4 122, 421, 427 1 Pet. iv. 7 397 1 Pet. ii. 5 317, 527 1 Pet. iv. 8 108,351,372 1 Pet. ii. 6 233, 252* 1 Pet. iv. 9 397,611 1 Pet. ii. 7 160, 164, 529, 549*, 551, 571* 1 Pet. iv. 10 210, 516, 524* 1 Pet. ii. 8 397, 438 1 Pet. iv. 11 108, 158*, 163, 582 1 Pet. ii. 9 381, 520 1 Pet. iv. 12 209*, 405, 501 1 Pet. ii. 10 343, 476, 485 1 Pet. iv. 13 200, 209 1 Pet. ii. 11 143, 352 1 Pet. iv. 14 109, 132, 401, 585 1 Pet. ii. 12 108, 342, 352, 384, 387, 411 1 Pet. iv. 15 440, 446, 502, 518, 519* 1 Pet. ii. 13 124 1 Pet. iv. 17 324, 584, 586 1 Pet. ii. 14 379 1 Pet. iv. 18 174 1 Pet. ii. 15 161, 319, 465, 529 1 Pet. iv. 19 51,122, 254,301, 524 1 Pet. ii. 16 484, 494, 550, 573*, 612 1 Pet. ii. 17 314*, 538 1 Pet. V. 1 140,200,334,384,528,529, 537 1 Pet. ii. 19 518, 550 1 Pet. V. 2 314, 385*, 477, 610 1 Pet. ii. 22 167, 6J6* 1 Pet. V. 3 175 1 Pet. ii. 23 251* 341, 590* 1 Pet. V. 5 253 1 Pet. ii. 24 149*, 210, 407, 428, 429* 1 Pet. V. 6 261, 407 1 Pet. ii. 25 128, 156 1 Pet. V. 7 351*, 430 1 Pet. V. 8 124, 139, 299, 528, 534, 538 1 Pet. iii. 1 75, 154, 289, 351*, 352 1 Pet. V. 9 123, 215 1 Pfet, iii. 2 131,342* 1 Pet. V. 10 58, 134*, 135, 148, 390, 538 1 Pet. iii. 3 195, 531 1 Pet. V. 12 278 1 Pet iii. 4 386 1 Pet. iii. 5 134, 154, 233, 268, 341 2 Pet. i. 1 130, 200*, 623 1 Pet. iii. 6 224, 462, 494, 499, 562, 566* 2 Pet i. 2 286, 545 1 Pet. iii. 7 242, 352, 403, 534 2 Pet i. 3 109, .381*, 545, 617* 1 Pet. iii. 8 230, 520, 534, 586 2 Pet i. 4 157,343,410,428,524,545,566* 1 Pet. iii. 9 46, 161 2 Pet. i. 5 142, 313, 443, 545, 566* 1 Pet. iii. 10 197, 326, 604, 614 2 Pet i. 6 443, 545 1 Pet. iii. 11 143, 429 2 Pet. i. 7 443, 545 1 Pet. iii. 12 125, 409, 586 2 Pet. i. 8 397, 489 1 Pet. iii. 13 437 2 Pet i. 9 158, 185, 187, 454*, 480*, 553* 1 Pet. iii. 14 146*, 224, 293*, 443 2 Pet. i. 10 128, 256, 290, 313, 506, 527, 1 Pet. iii. 15 209, 227, 534 >> » » 549, 551 1 Pet. iii. 17 294, 604* 2 Pet. i. 11 69, 126, 534 1 Pet. iii. 18 215,373,383,412,433* 2 Pet i. 12 205, 227, 344 » » » 441, 545 2 Pet i. 13 408*, 452* 1 Pet. iii. 19 543, 545, 608 2 Pet. i. 14 551 1 Pet. iii. 20 125, 156, 431, 457, 530, 543, 2 Pet i. 15 89, 256, 321, 340 79 i> fy 131, 545, 621 2 Pet i. 16 630 1 Pet. iii. 21 189*, 191*, 192, 194*, 528, 2 Pet i. 17 212, 278*, 351*, 365, 369* }> y> >t 643, 545, 549, 562 2 Pet i. 18 352* 1 Fet iii 22 543,545 2 Pet i. 19 243*, 297, 345, 551 724 N. T. INDEX. 2 Pet. i. 20 2 Pet. i. 21 2 Pet. ii 1 2 Pet ii 2 2 Pet. ii 3 161, 196 122, 173, 549 351*, 443* 399, 400 120, 149, 217*, 223*, 386, 422, „ „ „ 466, 579, 639 2 Pet. ii. 4 205, 216, 342*, 448, 478, 545, „ „ „ 566, 569* 5 82, 249*, 342,344*, 545, 566, 569 6 125, 190, 210*, 340, 531, 545, 566, 569 7 131,193,259,369*545,566,569 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. ii. 2 Pet. iii 2 Pet. iii 2 Pet. iii 2 Pet. iii 118, 268, 545, 566, .569 342, 569* 237, 345, 594* 243*, 395* 159, 397, 440, 628* 185*, 416, 430* 108,174,192,194* 201 .238,-525 185*, 219 95, 388, 538 342*, 529* 219*, 273, 344 273, 292, 428, 514, 534 239, 282, 320, 334, 482*, 627 109, 352, 588*, 641 1 58, 142*, 527, 537, 5.50* 2 190,191,205,318,529,550 3 376, 572 4 124, 146, 267, 588, 591, 596*, „ „ „ 612, 632* 2 Pet. iii. 5 120, 121, 217*, 351*, 419*, „ „ „ 446, 453*, 467* 6 604* 7 518 8 395, 502 9 197, 484 10 87, 120, 125, 514 11 342* 12 121, 158*, 400* 13 524*, 527 14 219,321 15 228 16 110,143,405 17 216, 314, 427, 429 2 Pet. 2 Pet. 2 Pet. 2 Pet. 2 Pet. 2 Pet. 2 Pet. 2 Pet. 2 Pet. 2 Pet. 2 Pet. 2 Pet. 1 John i. 1 124, 272, 567*, 607*, 609, 611 1 John i. 2 562, 565 1 John i. 3 132, 287, 443, 562, 567* 1 John i. 5 161, 199, 499 1 John i. 6 .376, 537, 610 John i. 7 John i. 8 John i. 9 John i. 10 John ii. I John ii. 2 John ii. 3 John ii. 4 John ii. 5 John ii. 6 Jolin ii. 7 John ii. 8 John ii. 9 John ii. 10 John ii. 12 John ii. 13 John ii. 15 John ii. 16 John ii. 17 John ii. 13 John ii. 19 John ii. 20 John ii. 21 John ii. 22 John ii. 24 John ii. 25 John ii. 26 John ii. 27 John ii. 2 John iii. 1 John iii. 2 John iii. 4 John iii. 5 John iii. 6 John iii. 7 John iii. 8 John iii. 9 John iii. 10 John iii. 11 John iii. 12 John iii. 13 John iii. 14 John iii- 17 John iii. 18 John iii. 19 John iii. 20 John iii. 22 John iii. 23 John iii. 24 1 John iv. 1 197 253, 537 461*, 537 537, 551 537 558, 577* 161, 545 483, 537, 610 40, 185, 543 537 124, 524* 267, 386, 524 537 .639 80, 146, 278, 400 278 185, 537 629 639 124, 537 73, 74, 304*, 317 371 172*, 278 114, 128, 604 128, 574* 225, 530, 628* 278 277*, 339, 574*, 610, 612* 287,308,314 122,460*, 537,615 122, 209 114,537 267*, 288, 537 537 501, 537 161, 267, 288, 537 537 514, 537 161, 338*, 623* 623* 542 273, 457 40, 185, 543, 622 116,412,489, .502*, 537 368, 386, 537, 582 155, 203, 537, 582* 214, 256 161,338 161, 411, 529, 578 514, 537 N. T. INDEX. 725 I John iv. 2 346 3 John 7 S70*, 383, 638 1 John iv. 4 239, 537, 632* 3 John 8 638 I John iv. 5 537 3 John 9 51, 141, 278 1 John iv. 6 128, 480, 537, 543 3 John 10 232 429, 475, 494 1 John iv. 7 537 3 John 12 261*, 271 1 John iv. 8 475, 537 3 John 13 378 1 John iv. 9 133, 161, 218*, 417*, 537 3 John 14 331 1 John iv. 10 161, 527, 537, 555 1 John iv. 1 1 292, 448 Jude 1 190, 212, 421* 1 John iv. 12 499, 537 Jude 3 256 321, 330, 333 1 John iv. 13 161, 199, 366* Jude 4 130*, 140 , 528, 534, 605 1 John iv. 14 527 Jude 5 343, 620* 1 John iv. 15 114, 307 Jude 6 125, 188*, 216, 273 1 John iv. 16 260, 553 Jude 7 230, 594, 623 1 John iv. 17 137, 161, 338, 566 Jude 8 443 1 John iv. 20 274* Jude 9 209* 1 John iv. 21 371 Jude 11 Jude 13 189, 206 176 1 John V. 1 178, 537 Jude 14 41,71,211, 277*, 370, 384 1 John V. 2 161,368,545 Jude 15 163, 222 1 John V. 3 161 Jude 16 116, 572* 1 John V. 4 161, 178 Jude 17 205 1 John V. 5 537 Jude 19 114, 116 1 John V. 6 114, 128, 144, 380*, 498 Jude 20 122, 345 1 John V. 9 271, 537, 619 Jude 21 137, 397 1 John V. 10 225, 474* Jude 23 85, 370 1 Johnv. 11 • 161 1 John V. 12 475, 537 Rev. i. 1 75, 125 1 John V. 13 134, 278, 288, 549 Rev. i. 2 126 1 John V. 14 161, 256 Rev. i. 3 519 1 John V. 15 295 Rev. i. 4 68, 113, 182*, 536, 587 iJohnv. 16 225,475* ,523*, 530*, 537, 549 Rev. i. 5 197, 532, 536* 1 John V. 17 537 Rev. i. 6 530, 580 1 John V. 18 343, 537 Rev. i. 7 * 222, 410 1 John V. 19 437, 537 Rev. i. 9 268, 521 1 John V. 20 133*, 157*, 162, 234, 274, Rev. i. 10 184* » )) >> 287, 421*, 528 Rev. i. 13 66, 395* 1 John V. 21 314 Rev. i. 14 Rev. i, 16 247 525 2 John 1 113,141,562 Rev. i. 17 114 2 John 2 411*, 578 Rev. i. 18 65 2 John 4 366, 526 Rev. i. 19 514 2 John 6 146, 161 Rev. i. 20 163, 231* 2 John 7 134* 140, 142*. 157,346,483,632* 2 John 8 259 Rev. ii. 2 76, 321, 545 2 John 10 479 Rev. ii. 3 76 2 John 11 200 Rev. ii. 5 155*, 296, 541*, 611 2 John 12 70, 278, 283, 331, 378 Rev. ii. 6 595* Rev. ii. 8 87, 276 3 John 2 373* Rev. ii. 9 321 , 545, 551, 582 3 John 4 69 , 162, 338, 347, 595* Rev. ii. 10 366, 589 3 John 5 397 Rev. ii. 11 506 3 Jolm 6 122, 345 Rev. u. 12 132, 525 726 N. T. INDEX. Rev. ii. 13 83,103,395,422,472, 610,612* Rev. V. 12 127, 520, 536 Rev. ii. U 223, 227 Rev. V. 13 108, 347, 374, 409, 526 Rev, ii. 16 155, 214*, 376 Rev. V. 14 74 Rev. ii. 17 198, 579* Rev. ii. 18 108, 579 Rev. vi. 1 199 Rev. ii. 19 i27, 155, 520 Rev. vi. 2 409 Rev. ii. 20 52, 81, 535* Rev. vi. 3 199 Rev. ii. 21 331 Rev. vi. 4 148, 583* R«v. ii. 22 376 Rev. vi. 6 206, 587* Rev. ii. 23 339 Rev. vi. 8 29, 108, 182, 234, 388, 574 Rev. ii. 24 235, 528 Rev. vi. 9 420 Rev. ii. 25 308 Rev. vi. 10 164, 182 Rev. ii. 26 574 Rev. vi. 11 Rev. vi. 12 83 174, 289, 297 523 Rev. iii. 1 155 Rev. vi. 13 74, 523 Rev. iii. 2 89 , 155, 334, 514 Rev. vi. 14 366*, 527 Rev. iii. 3 230, 281, 506 Rev. vi. 15 64, 128, 527 Rev. iii. 4 514, 631 Rev. vi. 16 409 Rev. iii. 5 227 Rev. iii. 7 65 Rev. vii. 1 409, 552 Rev. iii. 8 148, 155 Rev. vii. 2 120, 148, 212, 341*, 602 Rev. iii. 9 87, 289, 337, 526*, 610, 626 Rev. vii. 3 552 Rev. iii. 10 237 Rev. vii. 4 250 Rev. iii. 12 58 112, 148, , >06, 507*, 524, Rev. vii. 9 148, 520, 526, 527, 535*, 579 » >i » 536*, 574, 603 Rev. vii. 11 73, 78, 125, 210 Rev. iii. 14 524 Rev. vii. 12 128, 520, 610 Rev. iii. 15 155, 302 Rev. vii. 14 « 388, 399 Rev. iii. 16 334 Rev. vii. 16 77, 506 Rev. iii. 17 114, 117, 271 Rev. vii. 17 191, 550 Rev. iii. 18 226, 577 Rev. iii. 19 470* Rev. viii. 3 79 212, 289, 514 Rev. iii. 21 384, 574 Rev. viii. 4 Rev. viii. 5 216* 201, 272*, 520 Rev. iv. 1 ' 79, 535 Rev. viii. 7 519, 527, 609 Rev. iv. 3 68, 215, 221 Rev. viii. 8 515 Rev. iv. 4 227, 250, 535 Rev. viii. 9 515, 536, 592 Rev. iv. 5 114, 166 Rev. iv. 7 108 Rev. viii. 11 108, 182, 184 , 362, 367, 515 Rev. iv. 8 345 , 398, 526, 536 Rev. viii. 12 460*, 609 Rev. iv. 9 280*, 309 Rev. viii. 13 117,368 Rev. iv. 10 210 Rev. iv. 11 108 Rev. ix. 1 Rev. ix. 2 343, 606 606 Rev. V. 1 408, 409, 525 Rev. ix. 3 396 Rev. V. 2 226, 585 Rev. ix. 4 171,474, 633 Rev. V. 3 491* Rev. ix. 6 75, 86, 223, 506 Rev. V. 4 227, 491* Rev. ix. 7 604* Rev. v. 6 65, 114 , 166, 526, 536 Rev. ix. 10 324, 623* Rev. V. 7 272* Rev. ix. 11 534.. 591 Rev. V. 8 74 , 114, 166, 516 Rev. ix. 12 179, 248 Rev. v. 9 390, 589 Rev. ix. 13 65 Rev. V. 10 206 Rev. ix. 14 392, 536 Rev.T. 11 535* Rev. ix. 17 518 N. T. INDEX. 727 Rev. ix. 18 i J3, 362, 364*, 367, 37 1,429,515 Rev. xiii. 7 409, 527 Rev. ix, 19 623 Rev. xiii. 8 148 Rev. ix. 20 83, 210, 289, 366, 460*, 622 Rev. xiii. 10 62, 83, 128, 388 Rev. ix. 21 143 , 491, 606 Rev. xiii. 11 Rev. xiii. 12 65, 623* 149 Rev. X. 1 525 Rev. xiii. 13 461* Uev. X. 2 852* , 376, 552 Rev. xiii. 14 62,66 Rev. X. 3 612 Rev. xiii. 15 307, 480 Rev. X. 4 70, 612 Rev. xiii. 16 79, 128, 289, 409, 420, 529 Rev. X. 5 396 Rev. xiii. 17 127, 290, 536, 594 Rev. X. 6 222 Rev. X. 7 71, 277* Rev. xiv. 1 43, 79, 536 Rev. X. 9 155, 316* Rev. xiv. 2 606 Rev. X. 10 198 Rev. xiv. 3 70, 250 Rev. X. 11 393 Rev. xiv. 4 Rev. xiv. 5 472, 527 538, 616 Rev. xi. 1 536 Rev. xiv, 6 88, 409 Rev. xi. 2 43,250 Rev. xiv. 7 126, 536, 552 Rev. xi. 3 436 Rev. xiv. 8 191, 609 Rev. xi. 4 536* Rev. xiv. 9 410 Rev. xi. 5 294, 541* Rev. xiv. 10 87, 91, 191* Rev. xi. 6 . 375, 396 Rev. xiv. 11 210, 631 Rev. xi. 7 152 ReA'. xiv. 12 186, 536* Rev. xi. 9 267, 589 Rev. xiv. 13 197, 234, 289, 317*. 341*, Rev. xi. 10 23S , 281, 409 » ») » 390, 460* Rev. xi. 11 413 Rev. xiv. 14 535*, 579 Rev. xi. 13 83, 514 Rev. xiv. 15 212, 324, 388 Rev. xi. 14 179, 248 Rev. xiv. 1 7 133 Rev. xi. 15 526, 535 Rev. xiv. 18 155, 212 Rev. xi. 17 533 Rev. xiv. 19 526, 536 Rev. xi. 18 514 Rev. xiv. 20 372, 557 Rev. xi. 19 72 Rev. XV. 1 341 Rev. xii. 1 528 Rev. XV. 2 247*, 353, 367* Rev. xii. 2 267 Rev. XV. 4 214, 508, 549, 585 Rev. xii. 3 525 Rev. XV. 5 72, 83 Rev. xii. 4 281, 334 Rev. XV. 6 106, 432, 525 Rev. xii. 5 83 Rev. XV. 8 201 Rev. xii. 6 148 Rev. xii. 7 214, 327*, 519 Rev. xvi. 1 607 Rev. xii. 8 491, 616 Rev. xvi. 2 523, 524, 607 Rev. xii. 9 529, 602 Rev. xvi. 3 530, 536 Rev. xii. 11 399 Rev. xvi. 6 538 Rev. xii. 13 66 Rev. xvi. 7 207*, 533 Rev. xii. 14 88, 148, 177* 249, 370 Rev. xvi. 9 225, 229, 318 Rev. xii. 16 72 Rev. xvi. 10 350 Rev. xu. 17 232, 393 Rev. xvi. 11 Rev. xvi, 12 622 120, 133 Rev. xiii. 1 65 374, 410 Rev. xvi. 14 514 Rev. xiii. 2 152 Rev. xvi. 15 538, 585 Rev. xiii. 3 237* Rev. xvi. 18 606 Rev. xiii. 4 210 214, 584 Rev. xvi. 19 191,611 Rev. xiii. 6 222, 405 Rev. xvi. 20 616 728 N. T. INDEX. Rev. xvi. 21 281, 368 Rev. xix. 16 Rev. xix. 21 246* 83, 201, 514 Rev. xvii. 2 149, 201 Rev. xvii. 3 201 Rev. XX. 1 65, 116, 408 Rev. xvii. 4 94, 226 Rev. XX. 2 536 Rev. xvii. 6 201, 224 Rev. XX. 3 536 Rev. xvii. 8 208 626, 628 Rev. .XX. 4 106 Rev. xvii. 9 149 Rev. XX. 5 297* Rev. xvii. 12 65, 515 Rev. XX. 7 514 Rev. xvii. 13 78 Rev. XX. 8 148 Rev. xvii. 14 536 Rev. XX. 10 353 Rev. xvii. 15 520 Rev. XX. 11 525, 616 Rev. xvii. 16 89, 141*, 388 Rev. XX. 12 72, 368 Rev. xvii. 18 114 Rev. XX. 13 Rev. XX. 14 133, 516 114 Rev. xviii. 2 609 Rev. XX. 15 477, 478 Rev. xviii. 3 190, 514 Rev. xviii. 4 449, 515 Rev. xxi. 1 244, 523, 527 Rev. xviii. 5 155 205, 247 Rev. xxi. 2 211, 524 Rev. xviii. 6 163 Rev. xxi. 4 500* Rev. xviii. 7 506 Rev. xxi. 5 228 Rev. xviii. 8 29, 87 Rev. xxi. 6 76, 148, 190, 552 Rev. xviii. 9 87 222, 410 Rev. xxi. 8 343*, 520 Rev. xviii. 10 603 Rev. xxi. 9 132 Rev. xviii. 1 1 222, 393, 408, 499 Rev. xxi. 11 247*, 536* Rev. xviii. 12 234, 520, 536, 579* , 591, 592 Rev. xxi. 12 536*, 514 Rev. xviii. 13 579* Rev. xxi. 13 41,60, 121 Rev. xviii. 14 75, 86, 156, 370, 427, 499, Rev. xxi. 16 408* )> )> >} 506, 507 Rev. xxi. 17 43, 65, 231*, 250, 534* Rev. xviii. 16 591 Rev. xxi. 21 249 Rev. xviii. 17 223 Rev. xxi. 23 552 Rev. xviii. 20 183*, 232, 408 Rev. xxi. 25 506, 507, 562 Rev. xviii. 21 506, 616 Rev. xxi. 27 171, 506, 633* Rev. xviii. 22 172 506, 603 Rev. xviii. 23 114, 506 Rev. xxii. 1 128 Rev. xviii. 24 177* Rev. xxii. 2 Rev. xxii. 3 66 172 "Rev. xix. 1 526 Rev. xxii. 5 120 Rev. xix. 3 76 Rev. xxii. 8 521 Rev. xix. 4 250 Rev. xxii. 9 598, 601 Rev. xix. 5 209, 536 Rev. xxii. 10 538 Rev. xix. 6 536 Rev. xxii. 1 1 311* Rev. xix. 8 545 Rev. xxii. 12 318 Rev. xix. 10 114, 582 598, 601 Rev. xxii. 13 552 Rev. xix. 11 72 Rev. xxii. 14 289 Rev. xix. 12 536 Rev. xxii. 15 585 Rey. xix. 13 108, 182 Rev. xxii. 16 393 Rev. xix. 14 133, 392, 525* Rev. xxii. 18 638 Rev. xix. 15 141, 191* Rev. xxii. 19 82, 594 ANDOVER PUBLICATIONS, EMBRACING VALUABLE COMMENTARIES AND BIBLICAL WORES. W. F. DRAPER, PUBLISHER, ANDOVER, MASS. Full descriptive Catalogues free on appllcatlon> ELLICOTT. Oritical and Grammatical Commentaries on St. Paul's Epistles. With Revised Translations. By Rt. Rev. Charles J. Ellicott, Bishop of Gloucester and Bristol. 8vo. Galatians. "With an Introductory Notice by Prof. C. E. Stowe, $1.25. Ephesians. $1.25. Thessaloniana , $1.25. Phllipplans, ColossianB, Philemon, $1.75. Pastoral Epistles. $1.75. The whole Set in Two Volumes, bevelled edges, $6.75. " It is the crowning excellence of these Commentaries that they are exactly what they profess to be — critical and grammatical, and therefore in the best sense of the term, exegetical His results are worthy of all confidence. He is more care- ful than Tischendorf, slower and more steadily deliberate than Alford, and more patiently laborious than any other living New Testament critic, with the exception, perhaps, of Tregelles." — Prof. Stowe in the Introductory Notice. " To Bishop Ellicott must be assigned the first rank, if not the first place in the first rank, of English biblical scholarship. The series of Commentaries on the Pauline Epistle are in the highest style of critical exegesis." — Methodist Quarterly. *HACKETT. A Commentary on the Original Text of the Acts of the Apostles. By Horatio B. Hackett, D.D., Professor of Biblical Literature in Newton Theological Institution. 8vo. $3.50 " We regard it as the best Commentary on the Acts which can be found in the English or any other language." — Bibliotheca Sacra. HENDERSON. Commentaries, Oritical, Philological, and Exegetical. Translated from the Original Hebrew. By E. Henderson, D.D. 8vo. The Book of the Twelve Minor Prophets. "With a Biographical Sketch of the Author by Professor E. P. Barrows. $3.00. Jeremiah and Lamentations, $2.25. Ezekiel, $1.75. " His Commentaries on the Minor Prophets and on Isaiah, are probably the best Bpecimens of exegetical talent and learning which have ever appeared in England. The same diligence, learning, sobriety, and judiciousness appear in Ezekiel as characterize the learned author's commentaries on Isaiah, Jeremiah, and the Minor Prophets." — Bibliotheca Sacra. " The learning, the sound judgment, and the earnest religious spirit of the authctf stamp a standard value on his commentaries." — Baptist Quarterly. H-4 Books Published by W. F. Draper. LIGHTFOOT. St. Paul's Epistle to the G-alatians. A Revised Text, with Introduction, Notes, and Dissertations. By J. B. Lightfoot, D.D., Hulsean Professor of Divinity, and Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. 8vo. S3.00 " For a scholar's use Dr. Lightfoot's Commentary is invaluable. He and Bishop Ellicott worthily supplement each other. The revised text is one of the best recent contributions to a complete text of the Greek New Testament, and the criticisms on the text are concise and to the point." — American Presbyterian Review. "Among the modern English commentaries on the New Testament Scriptures this appears to us to be the best. The critical dissertations, which form a leading feature of it, are in the highest degree \aluable." — New Englander. MURPHY. Critical and Exegetical Commentaries, with New Translations, By James G. Murphy, LL.D., T. C. D., Professor of Hebrew, Belfast. 8vo. Genesis . With a Preface by J. P. Thompson, D.D., New York. $3.00. Exodus, $2.50. Exodus, crown 8vo. , $1.25. Leviticus, $2.25. Psalms , $3.50. " The Commentaries of Murphy have many excellences. They are clear, dis- criminating, and comprehensive." — Baptist Quarterly. " Thus far nothing has appeared in this country for half a century on the first two books of the Pentateuch so valuable as the present two volumes [on Genesis 4nd Exodus]. His style is lucid, animated, and often eloquent. His pages afford golden suggestions and key-thoughts." — Methodist Quarterly. " Like the other Commentaries of Dr. Murphy, his Commentary on the Psalms is distinguished by the ease and perspicuity of its style, its freedom from pedantry, and the excellent religious spirit pervading it." — Bibliotheca Sacra. PEROWNE. The Book of Psalms. A New Translation, With Introductions and Notes Explanatory and Critical. By J. J. Stewart Perowne, D.D., Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge, and Canon of Llandaflf. Reprinted from the Third English Edition. Two Volumes. 8vo. 86.75 " It comprises in itself more excellences than any other commentary on the Psalms in our languaj;e, and we know of no single commentary in the German language which, all things considered, Is preferable to it." — Baptist Quarterly. STUART. Critical and Exegetical Commentaries, with translations of the Text, by Moses Stuart, late Professor of Sacred Literature in Andover Theological Seminary. 12mo. Romans $1.75. Hebrews, $1,75. Proverbs, $1.50. Ecclesiastes, $1,25. The Commentaries on the Romans, Hebrews, and Ecclesiastes are edited and revised by Prof. R. D, C. Robbins. " His Commentary on the Romans is the most elaborate of all his works Regarding it in all its relations, its antecedents and consequents, we pronounce it the most important Commentary which has appeared in this country on this Epistle. .... The Commentary on Proverbs is the last work from the pen of Prof. Stuart, Both this Commentary and the one preceding it, on Ecclesiastes, exhibit a mellow- ness of spirit which savors of the good man ripening for heaven In learning and critical acumen they are equal to his former works," — Bibliotheca Sacm. H-5 THE BOOK OF ENOCH. TRANSLATED FROM THE ETHIOPIC. WITH INTEODUOTION AND NOTES, By Prop. GEORGE H. SCHODDE, Ph.D. 12mo. pp. vlii, 278. Price $1.75. In the Epistle of Jude we find a quotation taken from " Enoch, the seventh from Adam." It was well known from many citations and extracts in the Church Fathers that an apocryphal Book of Enoch existed in the early days of Christianity, and was regarded by many with great admiration, and enjoyed considerable authority. Like so many secular and religious works of that period, this important book, the only apocryphal work cited by an inspired writer, was lost to the church and to literature. The numberless speculations and guesses made afterwards as to its character and contents were put to an end by its discovery in an Ethiopic version at the close of the last century. Bishop Lawrence, some time later, issued an English transla- tion, a book that now cannot be obtained for love or money. A new version of a book with such a history and of such intrinsic value will, it is confidently hoped, not prove an unwelcome addition to theological science in America. Here, too, as throughout Europe, everything that throws any light on the time of Christ and tends to explain the moral, relig- ious, and social atmosphere which he breathed, is studied by many faithful scholars with peculiar delight. In the complex of literary remains belonging to this sphere the Book of Enoch is one of the most important. The object of the different parts that compose it is entirely religious, and the contents are the heart-utterances of the faithful Israelites who wrote them ; and thus the book is a reliable reflex of the time that gave it birth. In making the new translation Dr. Schodde has had aids which surpassed those at Lawrence's disposal. New mss. of the original have been brought from Ethiopia, a reliable text has been issued, and a host of scholars ia England, Holland, France, and especially Germany, have employed a vast amount of theological learning and historical research to unravel the mys- teries of this literary enigma. In preparing the Introduction and Notes, which occupy fully three fifths of the whole work, the translator has made a thorough study and conscientious use of these aids. He has critically analyzed the work into its component parts, determined the age, purpose, and language of each, and by thus giving the true historical background has sought to make the contents more easily understood. In the translation proper the object aimed at was to be as literal as possible, and it is certainly more reliable than its English predecessor. Dr. Ezra Abbot, who has carefully examined the manuscript, expressea the opinion that " Dr. Schodde's work has great value as an original and scholarly contribution to the illustration of this most interesting and impor* tant of all the books of its class." W. P. DBAPER, Publisher, O-IS Andovevt Mass. Books Published by W. F. Draper. ETeilej/. An Examination of the Alleged Discrepancies of the Bible. By John W. Haley, M. A. With an Introduction by Alvah Hovey, D. D., Professor in the Newton Theological Institution. Crown 8vo. pp. xii and 473. $1.75 From Professor Edwards A. Park. — " I do not know any volume which gives to the English reader such a compressed amount of suggestion and instruc- tion on this theme as is given in this volume." From the Presbyterian Quarterly. — " The book is honest, candid, and painstaking. It will be found useful to all students of the sacred volume." "An able book, containing a clear and dispassionate discussion of a moinentoas subject. It stands unique in a field of its own." — Independent, " As an example of thorough and painstaking scholarship, as a serviceable hand- book for all Bible students, and as a popular defence of revealed truth, it will take high rank, and fill an important place which up to this time has been conspicuously vacant." — Congrecjationalist. " It would be difficult, by any amount of labor, to produce anything more con- vincing and satisfactory.'' — Zfte Interior. Haley. The Hereafter of Sin: What it will be ; with Answers to Certain Questions and Objections. By Rev. John W. Haley, author of "Alleged Discrepancies of the Bible." 16mo. 75 cents. " It presents, in a calm and admirable manner, the Scriptural doctrine of future retribution, divested, indeed, of the literalism with which it is sometimes presented, and showing its accordance with the deductions of a sound philosophy." — Zion's Herald. " It is a scholarly, clear, dispassionate, and conclusive argument in favor of what is known as the common or orthodox view of future punishment. The whole dis- cussion is conducted in a spirit of courtesy and fairness towards all opponents which does credit to our current controversial literature." — The Interior. Wright. The Logic of Christian Evidences. By Rev. G. Fred- erick Wright. 16mo. $1.50 " Beginning with a general statement of the principles of inductive and deduc- tive logic, which are illustrated by ample examples drawn from the whole field of modern science, it advances to the consideration of the personality, wisdom, and benevolence of the Creator, as seen in nature ; to the place of miracles in the Chris- tian system ; to the specific evidences of Christianity as discerned in the early his- tory of the New Testament, and in the characteristics of the Christians of the first and second centuries ; and to the historical probability of Jesus and his immediate followers having been either impostors or deluded enthusiasts." — Literary World. " The book would form an admirable text-book for Bible-classes or college classes, and will give solid comfort and strength to all readers who have any desire to be able to give a reason for believing." — Rev. Dr. Thomas Hill in the Bibliotheca Sacra. Wright. Studies in Science and Religion. By Prof. G. Frederick Wright, author of " The Logic of Christian Evidences." 16mo. $1.50 " The chapter on inductive reasoning, with which the book opens, is as full, ex- planatory, and convincing as any one could wish, despite the fact it occupies only twenty-six }>ages. . . . The grand point contended for and ct.rried is that ' Christi- anity, in its appeal to historical evidence, allies itself with modern science rathei than witli the glittering generalities of transcendentalism,' and that in its begin- nings science has no advantage over religion in solidity of basis." — The Leader. " The article on Prehistoric Man, now appears for the first time. It is illustrated by a number of maps and cuts which enhance the interest of the story. Tha southern limit of the ice of the Glacial Epoch in North America is traced, and tha connection of human implements therewith is shown." — Oberlin Review. G-U Booics Fnblisnea by W. F. Draper. Cary. An Tut rod action to tlie Greek of the New Testament. By George L. Cary, of the Meadville Tlieological Seminary. 12ma pp. 72. 75 cents " This small volume has been prepared for persons, either students of theoloory, or others who have not had the advantage of a knowledge of the Greek, and who nevertheless would be glad to read the New Testament in its original tongue. It gives the rudiments of the language so far as absolutely necessary for the under- Btanding of New Testament Greek. It is well adapted to its purpose, and will prove of great service to such as have not had the advantage of a classical education."— Lutheran Qitarterly. " The simplicity of its method, its conciseness and perspicuity admirably adapt it to the use of such persons. With a moderate degree of application, any one with an ordinary capacity for acquiring language may in a short time master these elementary lessons, and having done so will be able to 'proceed at once to the reading of the easier portions of the New Testament.' " — Theological and Homiletie Monthly. " This is substantially a primary Greek Grammar of the New Testament; in- tended for those who have had no previous knowledge of the language." — The Central Baptist. "A handy little manual for those who wish to become familiar enough with Greek to read the New Testament." — Zion's Herald. MitchelL The Critical Hand-book. A Guide to the Authenticity, Canon, and Text of the New Testament. By Edward C. Mitchell, D.D. Illustrated by a Map, Diagrams, and Tables. 12mo. $1.75 The plan of the book embraces, in the first place, a view of the present field of controversy on the subject of the Authenticity of the New Testament Scriptures as viewed from a historical and geographical stand-point. This is followed by a brief discussion of the leading points in the History of the Canon, and then by a r€sum4 of the subject of Textual Criticism — History of the Text. In this part of the work, and the fourteen Tables which accompany it, care has been taken to combine brevity with the greatest possible accuracy of statement. The best recent authorities have been consulted, and the author has received valuable aid from eminent scholars in England and America, especially from Dr. Ezra Abbot, of Cambridge, who has bestowed upon the whole of Part III. and the accompanying Tables much patient thought, suggesting many new points of interest and value. One of these tables, for instance, shows at a glance what was the state of civiliza- tion at a given ])eriod ; what writers flourished, whether poets or philosophers or physicists or historians. A second table shows what Christian Fathers were con- temporaneous. Another table gives a list of witnesses and actors in the scenes of Christian history and the places in which they acted. Others give catalogues of dis- puted books, the uncial Mss. the cursive Mss. ancient versions, etc. There are fur- nished also several facsimiles of different codices of the New Testament. " It is certainly ' A Guide ' which must prove exceedingly convenient and val- uable to scholars. I have read and re-read it with the exception of some of the Tables, and have found it accurate and to the point, giving the essential facts clearly, and in a suitable form for reference. As a ' Handbook ' for frequent use I know of nothing equal to it." — Alimh Uovey, D.D., Pres. Newton Theological Institution. " It is brief, clear, and, so far as we can see quite accurate, and a thoroughly serviceable and important book." — Congregationafist. " This volume gathers up and presents in a comparatively brief compass a great deal that is worth knowing in regard to several branches of biblical criticism. It contains what every thorough student of the Holy Scriptures needs to under- stand." — The Churchman. " The tables at the end are a feature of the book of peculiar advantage. It is to be recommended to all students of the New Testament." — C. W. Hodge in Pre*, byterian Review. "Of this book it may be most truly said ' multum in parvo.' It well ape-^-rs the purpose for which it was designed. It furnishes the material necessary to a refutation of the charge so frequently made that the New Testament is largely mythical. It is a strong defence of Christianity." — Baptist Quarterly. p_j - Books Published by W. F. Draper. Davies. A Compendious and Complete Hebrew and ChaldeA Lexicon of the Old Testa^nent ; with an English-Hebrew Index. By Benjamin Davies, Ph.D., LL.D. Carefully Eevised, with a concis»s Statement of the Principles of Hebrew Grammar, by Edward 0. Mitchell, D.D. 8vo. Cloth, $4.00 ) Morocco backs, $4.75 " It is in many respects an improvement upon either of the Lexicons now in use. Dr. Davies modestly calls himself the editor of the work, but it is anything but a mere revision or compilation. Nearly every page bears evidence of original thought and independent investigation, and many improvements have been madd upon the work of previous lexicographers in the handling of roots and derivatives. " While the Lexicons of Gesenius and Fiirst have been made the chief basii, — as they must be for any genuine advance in this direction, — the definitions have all been re-written and condensed without being abridged, so as to make them more convenient for reference, and the work less bulky and expensive." So far from being an abridgment, the present edition will be found to contain over a thousand more Hebrew words or forms than appear in Tregtlles's or Robinson's Gesenius, besides incorporating into the body of the work all the grammatical forms con- tained in Robinson's Analytical Appendix. " I regard it as a very valuable addition to our Hebrew text-books. It is con- cise, accurate, sufficiently full in definitions, and admirably adapted for the use of students. Prof. Mitchell's admirable compend of the Principles of Hebrew Gram- mar at the beginning of the book, and the English-Hebrew Index at the end, are valuable helps not found in the ordinary Lexicons of Hebrew." — Prof. Henry A. Buttz, in Drew Tlieological Seminary. Mitchell. A Concise Statement of the Principles of Hebrew Grammar, for the Use of Teachers. By Edward 0. Mitchell, D.D. 8vo. Paper, 15 cents ., I*rofessor in the Berkeley Divinity School : A Harmony of the Foilt Gospels in Greek, according to the Text of Tischendorf ; with a Collation of the Textus Receptus, and of the Texts of Griesbach, Lachmann, and Tregelles. 8vo. pp. Ivi and 268. §3.00 The distinctive features of this Harmony are, — ^ 1 . A critical text, viz. the text of Tischendorfs eighth or last edition, embodying the latest results of textual criticism. To obtain the final portions of this edition the publication of this work has been delayed several months. The readings of the textus receptus, where they differ from Tischendorfs text, are given in full in the margin ; the variations "being designated by a different type. The texts of Griesbach, Lachman, and Tregelles are carefully collated. The relative value of readings as estimated by Griesbach are noted, and original authorities cited in important cases. 2. All dijtinct quotations from the Old Testament are given in full in the margin, according to Tischendorfs edition of the LXX., together with the var. led. of the Alexandrian text and of the Codex Sinaiticus, and of the several other versions named in the title. 3. A choice selection of parallel references has been placed in the margin, chiefly to point out similar language or incidents in other parts of the Gospels, or passages in the Old Testament, on which the language of the Gospels may be founded. 4. Brief notes relating to matters of harmony have been placed at the bottom of the page. 5. Special care has been devoted to the chronological order of the Gospel narratives. 6. The columns are so arranged on the page as to combine the greatest clearness consistent with the least cost. The columns are never interwoven on the page. 7. A synoptical table is given of the arrangement adopted by several harmonists, showing at a glance the general agreement on the main points of chronology, and the points of difference where difference occurs. This is a new feature in this work, and will be found very useful to the student. A Harmony of the Pour Gospels in English, according to the Authorized Version ; corrected by the best Critical Editions of the Original. 8vo. pp. xliv and 287. $2.00 This Harmony is a reproduction in English of the author's " Harmony of the Four Gospels " in Greek. Being intended for English readers, so much of the Introduction and of the notes as require a knowledge of Greek, is omitted. Other notes have been abridged in many cases. Diatessaron. The Life of Our Lord, in the "Words of the Gospels. 16mo. pp. 259. $1.00 This work combines in one continuous narrative the events of the life of Christ as recorded by all the evangelists. His genealogy, conversations, discourses, parables, miracles, his trial, death, resurrection, and ascension, are placed in the order of their occurrence ; and in the foot-notes references are made to passages in the Old Testament relating to Christ or quoted by him. The life of our Lord has been of late years presented in such a multitude of fonns, colored with the views and theories of such a multitude of minds, that it is hoped the present effort to present that life in the exact form of the inspired record, without addition or abatement, may tend to the increase of the real knowledge of the life of the Saviour of mankind. The work is specially adapted for use in the family and in Sabbath-schools and Bible-classes. WAKREN P. DRAPER, Publisher, D-6 ANDOVEB, MASS. Books Published by W. F. Draper. Buttmann. A Grammar of the New Testam,ent Greek, Bj Alexander Buttmann. Anthorized Translation [by Prof. T. Henry Ihayer.] "With numerous additions and corrections by the Author. 8vo, pp. XX. and 474. Cloth, $2.75 From the Translator's Preface. " This Grammar is acknowledged to be the most important work which has appeared on N. T, Grammar since Winer's. Its use has been hindered by the fact that in the original it has the form of an Appendix to the Classic Greek Grammar by the Author's father. The inconvenience arising from this peculiarity has been obviated in this translation by introducing in every case enough from that Gram- mar to render the statements easily intelligible to readers unacquainted with that work; at the same time, the Author's general scheme of constantly comparing New Testament and Classic usage has been facilitated for every Student, by giving running references throughout the book to five or six of the most current gram- matical works, among them the Grammars of Hadley, Crosby, Donaldson, and Jelf. Additions and corrections in more than two hundred and fifty places have been furnished for this edition by the Author. " The N. T. Index has been enlarged so as to include all the passages from the N. T. referred to in the Grammar ; and a separate Index has been added, compris- ing all the passages cited from the Septuagint. The other Indexes have been materially augmented ; the cross-references have been multiplied ; chapter and verse added to many of the fragmentary quotations from the N. T. ; the pagina- tion of the German original has been given in the margin ; and at the end of the book a glossary of technical terms encountered more or less frequently in commen- taries and grammatical works has been added for the convenience of students." From the New Eng'lander. " One of the ablest books of its class which have been published. Indeed, it holds a rank next below Winer's great work on the same subject In some respects we think the plan adopted gives his work an incidental advantage as cora- Eared with Winer's. It is a thoroughly scientific treatise, and one which will be elpful to students, both in connection with Winer's and as discussing many points from a different or opposite point of view." From the Presbyterian Quarterly. " Buttmann's Grammar is more exhaustively philological than that of Winer, It has less the character of a concise commentary. It is thoroughly scholarly, lucid, and compact ; and admirably adapted to promote a sound knowledge of the Greek New Testament." From the American Presbsrterlan Review. " By far the most important work on the Grammar of the New Testament Greek which has been produced of late years." From the Baptist Quarterly. " It is an indispensable, and, perhaps, the best, grammatical help to the critical student of the New Testament." From the Bvangrelical Lutheran Quarterly Review. " Most valuable addition to our helps in the study of the New Testament Greek, not at all designed to supplant the excellent work of Winer. It is intended only to be used along with it, or to occupy a place in the same great interest. We have no doubt, however, that many will prefer to use this instead of the Grammar of Winer." " Professor Thayer has performed his task — which has been a great deal more than that of a mere ti anslator — with remarkable fidelity. It is doubtless the best work extant on this subject, and a book which every scholarly pastor will desire to possess. Its usableness is greatly enhanced by its complete set of Indexes." — Ths Advance. "The work is thorough and exhaustive in its particular sphere." — Reformed Church Messenger. " Buttmann's Gi^njmar is not i^iended to supersede Winer's, but while that may, as it were, be looked upon as a grammatical commentary — so rich and full is It in illustration and explanation — this is rather a manual for constant refer* ence." — Christian Union. F-15 r ' UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY BERKELEY Return to desk from which borrowed. This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 4Nov'55VLl ■Wn 8195611 jun'^' 89 -«P* LD 21-100m-ll,'49(B7146sl6)476